Argyle ES#4 Specs 04212023 V1

Argyle Elementary School #4 75 Percent Package Project Manual
ProjectVolume 1
22296.0000
16 March 2023 Corgan Associates, Inc.
90 Percent Progress Set 22296.0000
20 April 2023
401 North Houston Street
Dallas, Texas 75202
214 748 2000
Contract Conditions and Specifications for the general construction

of
Argyle Elementary School No. 04

For Argyle Independent School District
Cover v1 00 01 01 - 1
Argyle Elementary School #4 Project 22296.0000
90 Percent Progress Set 20 April 2023
DOCUMENT 00 01 03
PROJECT DIRECTORY
CONTRACT CONDITIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR

THE GENERAL CONSTRUCTION OF ARGYLE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL #4
FOR
ARGYLE INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT
Project Manual
75 Percent Progress Set
Architect:
Corgan Roofing:
401 N. Houston Street ARMKO
Dallas, Texas 75202 1320 Spinks Road
(214) 748-2000 Flower Mound, Texas 75028
(972) 874-1388
Mechanical/Electrical/Plumbing
Engineer: Food Service:
EMA FDP
3608 West 2655 Villa Creek Drive
Tyler, Texas 75703 Dallas, Texas 75234
(903) 581-2677 (972) 245-5300
Civil Engineer: Landscape Architect:

RLK Engineering Ramsey Landscape
111 West Main Street 11914 Wishing Well Court
Allen, Texas 75013 Frisco, Texas 75035
(972) 359-1733 (972) 335-0889
Structural Engineer:
AG&E-SE
15280 Addison Road, Suite 310
Addison, Texas 75001
(214) 520-7202
Project Directory 00 01 03 - 1
SECTION 00 01 10
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTIONS ISSUE DATE REVISED
DIVISION 00 — PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

00 01 01 Cover v1 .........................................................................................
00 01 02 Cover v2 .........................................................................................
00 01 03 Project Directory .............................................................................
00 01 10 Table of Contents............................................................................
00 11 13 Advertisement for CSP....................................................................
00 21 13 Instructions to Proposers ................................................................
00 31 00 Available Information ......................................................................
00 31 32 Geotech Data Preamble..................................................................
00 31 32a Geotech Report G23-2009 Argyle Isd Elementary School No.5 - Argyle, Tx
00 41 00 Proposal Form ................................................................................

00 43 13 Proposal Bond ................................................................................
DIVISION 01 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 11 00 Summary of Work ...........................................................................
01 21 00 Allowances......................................................................................
01 23 00 Alternates .......................................................................................
01 25 00 Substitution Procedures ..................................................................
01 29 00 Measurement and Payment ............................................................
01 31 00 Project Coordination .......................................................................
01 31 19 Project Meetings .............................................................................
01 32 00 Construction Progress Schedules ...................................................
01 33 23 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples ...................................
01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements ...............................................................
01 42 00 References .....................................................................................
01 43 39 Mock-Up Wall Construction .............................................................
01 45 16 Contractor's Quality Control ............................................................
01 45 23 Structural Testing and Inspection Services .....................................
01 45 29 Testing Agency Services.................................................................
01 50 00 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls ..............................
01 58 00 Project Identification and Signs .......................................................
01 60 00 Product Requirements ....................................................................
01 71 23 Field Engineering ............................................................................
01 73 29 Cutting and Patching.......................................................................
01 74 13 Construction Cleaning .....................................................................
01 74 23 Final Cleaning .................................................................................
01 77 00 Closeout Procedures ......................................................................
01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data ...................................................
01 78 30 Warranties and Bonds ....................................................................
01 78 39 Project Record Documents .............................................................
01 78 46 Extra Materials ................................................................................
01 79 00 Systems Demonstrations and Training............................................
01 91 00 Building Systems Commissioning ...................................................
Table of Contents 00 01 10 - 1
DIVISION 03 — CONCRETE
03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories ................................................
03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing ......................................................................
03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete ...................................................................
03 39 00 Concrete Sealer ..............................................................................
03 54 16 Hydraulic Cement Underlayment ....................................................
DIVISION 04 — MASONRY
04 20 00 Unit Masonry...................................................................................
04 27 23 Through-Wall Flashing ....................................................................
DIVISION 05 — METALS
05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing .................................................................
05 12 13 Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing............................
05 21 00 Steel Joist Framing .........................................................................
05 31 00 Steel Decking..................................................................................
05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing ...........................................................
05 43 00 Slotted Channel Framing ................................................................
05 50 00 Metal Fabrications...........................................................................
05 51 13 Metal Pan Stair Assemblies ............................................................
05 52 13 Pipe and Tube Railings ...................................................................
05 53 00 Gratings ..........................................................................................
DIVISION 06 — WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

06 10 53 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry .....................................................
06 15 33 Wood Patio Decking .......................................................................
06 16 63 Moisture Resistant Sheathing .........................................................
06 20 23 Interior Finish Carpentry..................................................................
06 41 16 Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets .................................
06 64 00 Plastic Paneling (FRP) ....................................................................
DIVISION 07 — THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 16 16 Crystalline Waterproofing ................................................................
07 21 00 Thermal Insulation ..........................................................................
07 21 19 Foamed-In-Place Insulation ............................................................
07 22 16 Roof Board Insulation .....................................................................
07 27 26 Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barriers-Stpe ......................................
07 42 13 Formed Metal Wall Panels ..............................................................
07 52 16 Modified Asphalt Bituminous Roofing ..............................................
07 61 13 Standing Seam Metal Roof System ................................................
07 62 00 Sheet Metal & Misc. Accessories ....................................................
07 62 13 Gutters & Downspouts ....................................................................
07 72 00 Roof Accessories ............................................................................
07 72 16 Roof Portals ....................................................................................
07 81 16 Spray-Applied Fireproofing .............................................................
07 84 13 Penetration Firestopping .................................................................
07 84 46 Fire-Resistive Joint Systems ...........................................................
07 92 00 Joint Sealants .................................................................................
07 95 00 Exterior Expansion Control .............................................................
07 95 13 Interior Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies .....................................
DIVISION 08 — OPENINGS
08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames .....................................................
08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors ..........................................................................
08 17 34 Frp Flush Doors ..............................................................................
08 31 13 Access Doors..................................................................................
08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors ..................................................................
08 33 26 Overhead Coiling Grilles .................................................................
08 34 73 Metal Sound Control Door Assemblies ............................................
08 39 06 Tornado Resistant Doors and Frames ............................................
08 41 13 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts ................................
08 55 14 Tornado-Resistant Aluminum Windows ..........................................
08 56 53 Fixed Security Windows ..................................................................
08 71 00 Door Hardware ...............................................................................
08 80 00 Glazing ...........................................................................................
08 91 19 Fixed Louvers .................................................................................
DIVISION 09 — FINISHES
09 05 61 Moisture Vapor Emission and Alkalinity Control ..............................
09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies .............................................................
09 21 19 Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies ............................................
09 30 13 Ceramic Tiling .................................................................................
09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceilings ................................................................
09 51 84 Acoustical Baffle Ceiling System .....................................................
09 64 66 Athletic Wood Flooring Systems .....................................................
09 65 13.13 Rubber Base and Accessories ........................................................
09 65 19 Resilient Tile Flooring .....................................................................
09 65 66 Resilient Athletic Flooring................................................................
09 67 23 Resinous Flooring ...........................................................................
09 68 13 Tile Carpeting .................................................................................
09 84 33 Sound-Absorbing Wall Units ...........................................................
09 91 13 Exterior Painting .............................................................................
09 91 23 Interior Painting ...............................................................................
09 96 23 Antigraffiti Coating...........................................................................
09 96 53 Elastomeric Paint Coatings .............................................................
09 96 59 High Performance Coatings ............................................................
DIVISION 10 — SPECIALTIES
10 11 00 Visual Display Units ........................................................................
10 11 17 Glass Markerboards........................................................................
10 14 16 Plaques ...........................................................................................
10 14 21 Illuminated Dimension Letter Signage .............................................
10 14 23 Panel Signage ................................................................................
10 14 24 First Responder Panel Signage ......................................................
10 14 30 Digital Marquee ...............................................................................
10 21 17 Plastic Toilet Compartments ...........................................................
10 21 23 Cubicle Curtain and Track...............................................................
10 26 00 Wall and Door Protection ................................................................
10 26 41 Ballistics Resistant Panels ..............................................................
10 28 13 Toilet Accessories ...........................................................................
10 41 16 Emergency Key Cabinet-Alum ........................................................
10 43 00 Safety Equipment............................................................................
10 44 13 Fire Protection Cabinets..................................................................

10 51 13 Athletic Lockers ..............................................................................
10 51 23 Plastic-Laminate-Clad Lockers........................................................
10 56 13 Metal Storage Shelving Full ............................................................
10 73 17 Metal Shade Canopies ....................................................................
10 73 26 Walkway Cover ...............................................................................
10 75 00 Flagpoles ........................................................................................
DIVISION 11 — EQUIPMENT
11 12 33 Lift Arm Gates .................................................................................
11 30 00 Appliances and Equipment .............................................................
11 40 00 Foodservice Equipment ..................................................................
11 50 00 Kilns and Vent Hoods .....................................................................
11 52 14 Projector and Projection Screens ....................................................
11 61 43 Stage Curtain and Tracks ...............................................................
11 66 00 Athletic Equipment ..........................................................................
11 68 13 Playground Equipment ....................................................................
11 68 13a Materialspec- Argyle #4 Es Playgrounds - 1170450-01-04..............
DIVISION 12 — FURNISHINGS
12 24 13 Roller Window Shades ....................................................................
12 36 61.16 Solid Surfacing Countertops ...........................................................
12 64 26 Upholstered Seating .......................................................................
12 66 00 Telescoping Gym Seats ..................................................................
12 93 13 Bicycle Racks .................................................................................
DIVISION 13 — SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13 03 40 Audiometric Rooms.........................................................................
13 31 10 Pre-Engineered Fabric Shade Structure .........................................
13 34 15 Grandstand Seating ........................................................................
DIVISION 14 — CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

14 21 23 Machine Roomless Electric Traction Passenger Elevators..............
DIVISION 21 — FIRE SUPPRESSION

21 00 10 Basic Fire Protection System Requirements ...................................
21 00 90 Fire Protection System Submittal Procedures .................................
21 13 16 Fire Protection System ....................................................................
DIVISION 22 — PLUMBING
22 00 10 Basic Plumbing Requirements ........................................................
22 00 90 Plumbing Submittal Procedures ......................................................
22 05 24 Valves - General .............................................................................
22 05 30 Pipe and Pipe Fittings - General .....................................................
22 05 54 Plumbing Identification ....................................................................
22 07 20 Piping Insulation .............................................................................
22 08 00 Commissioning of Plumbing ............................................................
22 11 17 Domestic Water Piping and Appurtenances ....................................
22 13 17 Soil, Waste and Sanitary Drain Piping, Vent Piping and Appurtenances
22 13 18 Condensate Piping..........................................................................
22 14 01 Roof Drainage and Appurtenances .................................................
22 16 01 Natural Gas Piping and Appurtenances ..........................................

22 33 34 Access Doors..................................................................................
22 40 01 Plumbing Fixtures and Fixture Carriers ...........................................
DIVISION 23 — HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

23 00 00 Basic Mechanical Requirements .....................................................
23 00 90 Hvac Submittal Procedures .............................................................
23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Hvac Piping and Equipment ..................
23 05 32 Roof Curbs......................................................................................
23 05 53 Identification for Hvac Piping and Equipment ..................................
23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for Hvac ......................................
23 07 13 Duct and Grille Insulation ................................................................
23 07 21 Refrigerant Piping Insulation ...........................................................
23 08 00 Commissioning of Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning ...........
23 09 23 Energy Management Control System..............................................
23 09 63 Safe Shelter Emergency Systems Controls.....................................
23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping ...........................................................................
23 31 13 Metal Ductwork ...............................................................................
23 33 33 Access Doors..................................................................................
23 34 16 Hvac Fans.......................................................................................
23 37 13 Diffusers, Registers and Grilles .......................................................
23 38 13 Commercial Kitchen Hoods .............................................................
23 43 23 Bipolar Ionization Air Purification System ........................................
23 74 33 Packaged Dedicated Outdoor Air Handling Units ............................
23 81 19 Packaged Hvac Units ......................................................................
23 81 26 Split System Hvac Units ..................................................................
23 82 39 Electric Unit Heaters .......................................................................
DIVISION 26 — ELECTRICAL
26 00 00 Electrical .........................................................................................
26 00 30 Warranty Period ..............................................................................
26 00 90 Electrical Submittal Procedures ......................................................
26 05 19 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables ....................
26 05 19.19 Metal Clad Cable ............................................................................
26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems ...............................
26 05 33.11 Raceways and Conduits for Electrical Systems ..............................
26 05 33.13 Boxes and Fittings for Electrical Systems .......................................
26 05 34 Provisions for Communication, Security and Safety Systems .........
26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems .................................................
26 08 00 Commissioning of Electrical Systems..............................................
26 08 11 Testing of Electrical System ............................................................
26 09 13 Electrical Power Monitoring and Control .........................................
26 09 16 Time Switches ................................................................................
26 09 21 Contactors ......................................................................................
26 09 41 Lighting Controls .............................................................................
26 21 00 Low Voltage Electrical Service Entrance .........................................
26 22 13 Low Voltage Distribution Transformers ...........................................
26 24 16 Panelboards for Distribution Switchgear .........................................
26 27 26 Wiring Devices ................................................................................
26 28 13 Fuses ..............................................................................................
26 28 16 Enclosed Safety Switches and Circuit Breakers ..............................
26 28 19 Ground Fault Protection System .....................................................

26 33 53 Static Uninterruptible Power Supply ................................................
26 43 00 Surge Protective Devices ................................................................
26 50 00 Lighting ...........................................................................................
26 55 61 Theatrical Lighting...........................................................................
26 56 23 Area Lighting...................................................................................
DIVISION 27 — COMMUNICATIONS
27 05 00 General Communication Systems Requirements ............................
27 10 30 Data and Telephone Cable Plant ....................................................
27 40 18 Audio-Video Equipment, Brackets and Cabling ...............................
27 51 25 Sound Reinforcement Systems .......................................................
27 53 13 Clock System ..................................................................................
DIVISION 28 — ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

28 05 00 General Electronic Safety and Security System Requirements .......
28 05 44 Emergency Responder Radio Coverage System ............................
28 13 27 Building Access Control System .....................................................
28 21 23 Video Surveillance System .............................................................
28 32 22 Elevator Lobby Emergency Call System .........................................
28 46 21 Fire Detection and Alarm System ....................................................
DIVISION 31 — EARTHWORK
31 10 00 Site Clearing ...................................................................................
31 22 00 Grading ...........................................................................................
31 22 19 Finish Grading ................................................................................
31 63 29 Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts ...................................................
DIVISION 32 — EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 01 90 Landscape Grounds Maintenance 90%Aes4 ..................................
32 11 13 Subgrade Modification (Lime) .........................................................
32 13 00 Rigid Paving....................................................................................
32 13 23 Stamped Concrete Paving ..............................................................
32 17 23 Pavement Markings ........................................................................
32 18 13 Nonathletic Synthetic Grass Surfacing ............................................
32 18 16 Playground Surface ........................................................................
32 80 00 Irrigation 90%Aes4..........................................................................
32 92 00 Lawns and Grasses 90%Aes4 ........................................................
32 93 00 Planting 90%Aes4...........................................................................
DIVISION 33 — UTILITIES
33 00 00 Utilities ............................................................................................
33 40 00 Storm Drainage Utilities ..................................................................
END OF SECTION
DOCUMENT 00 11 13
ADVERTISEMENT FOR PROPOSALS

PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS,
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR
THE GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
OF
ARGYLE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL NUMBER 4
FOR THE
ARGYLE INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT, ARGYLE, TEXAS
Proposals for general construction of the Argyle Elementary School No. 4 will be received by Dr.
Wright, Superintendent, Argyle Independent School District, 6701 Canyon Falls Drive, Argyle, Texas
76226, until 10:00 A.M. on XXX, XXX xx, 2023. Each Proposer shall identify their proposal by typing on
the outside of the envelope “PROPOSAL FOR THE ARGYLE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL NUMBER 4.”
Proposals received by hand delivery or mail after 10:00 A.M. (Central Time) XXX, XXX XX, 2023 will be
returned unopened. Proposals will be opened publicly and read aloud in the Conference Room at
approximately 10:05 AM. Only the name of the parties submitting proposals and the monetary amount
of their proposals shall be read aloud.
Beginning XXX XX, 2023 at 1:00 PM prospective General Contractors may obtain a digital set of the
Contract Documents free of charge from Reprocon. Contact Reprocon via email at
ReproCon@corgan.com to obtain access to the digital files.
Owner reserves right to waive any informalities or to reject any or all Proposals.
Each proposer must deposit, with his proposal, security in amount, form and subject to conditions
provided in Instructions to Proposers. Security amount shall be five percent of total amount of proposal
No proposer shall withdraw a proposal within 45 (forty five) days after the actual date of the opening
thereof.
Within 45 days after the opening of the proposals, the District shall evaluate and rank each proposal
submitted in relation to the selection criteria set for the in the Project Manual, which selection criteria are
incorporated by reference herein. The District shall select the proposal that offers the best value to the
District based on the selection criteria and on the ranking evaluation; price alone shall not be
determinative. The District and its Architect may discuss with the selected Proposer options for cost
reduction. If the District is unable to reach a contract agreement with the selected Proposer, the District
shall terminate further discussions and proceed to the next Proposer in the order of the selection ranking
until a contract agreement is reached or all proposals are rejected.
END OF DOCUMENT
Advertisement for CSP 00 11 13 - 1

DOCUMENT 00 21 13
INSTRUCTION TO PROPOSERS
ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS
1.1 Definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA
Document A201, or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding
Documents.
1.2 Addenda: Written or graphic instruction issued by Architect prior to execution of Contract
which modify or interpret Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications or
corrections.
1.3 Alternate Bid: Amount stated in Bid to be added to or deducted from amount of Base Bid
if corresponding change in Work, as described in Bidding Documents, is accepted.
1.4 Architect: Corgan Associates, Inc., 401 N. Houston, Dallas, Texas 75202, (214)
748-2000.
1.5 Base Bid: Sum stated in Bid for which Bidder offers to perform Work described in
Bidding Document as base, to which Work may be added or from which Work may be
deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids.
1.6 Bid: Complete and properly signed proposal to do Work for sum stipulated therein
submitted in accordance with Bidding Documents.
1.7 Bidder: Person or entity who submits a Bid.
1.8 Bidding Documents: Include Bidding Requirements and proposed Contract Documents.
1.9 Bidding Requirements: Include Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders,

Bid Form, and other sample bidding and contract forms including Contractor Qualification
Forms.
1.10 Contract Documents: Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor, Conditions of
the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions) Drawings, Specifications
and all Addenda issued prior to execution of Contract.
1.11 Civil Engineer: - RLK Engineering.
1.12 Mechanical and Electrical Engineers: - Estes McClure & Associates, Inc
1.13 Owner: - Argyle Independent School District
1.14 Sub-bidder: Person or entity who submits a bid to Bidder for materials, equipment or
labor for a portion of the Work.
1.15 Unit Price: Amount stated in Bid as price for each unit of measurement for materials,
equipment or services or portion of Work as descried in Bidding Documents.
Instructions to Proposers 00 21 13 - 1
1.16 Work: Argyle Elementary School Number 4.
ARTICLE 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATION
2.1 Bidder by making a Bid represents that:
A. Bidder has read and understands Bidding Documents and Bids is made in accordance
therewith.
B. Bidder has read and understands Bidding Documents or Contract Documents, to extent
that such documentation relates to Work for which Bid is submitted, for other portions of
Project, if any, being bid concurrently or presently under construction.
C. Bidder has visited site, become familiar with location conditions under which Work is to
be performed and has correlated Bidder's personal observations with requirements of
proposed Contract Documents.
D. Bid is based upon materials, equipment and systems required by Bidding Documents
without exception.
E. Bidder shall examine adjoining areas, structures, and has investigated for existing
utilities; from examination Bidder shall have informed himself fully of conditions to be
encountered and pertinent matters and conditions in connection with Work and services
to be performed.
ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS
3.1 COPIES
A. Bidders may obtain complete sets of Bidding Documents from Architect as designated in
Advertisement.
B. Bidding Documents will not be issued directly to Sub-bidders.
C. Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids; neither Owner
nor Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from use of
incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.
D. In making copies of Bidding Documents available on above terms, Owner and Architect
do so only for purpose of obtaining Bids on Work and do not confer a license or grant
permission for any other use of Bidding Documents.
3.2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
A. Bidder shall carefully study and compare Bidding Documents with each other, and with
other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to extent that it relates
to Work for which Bid is submitted, shall examine site and location conditions, and shall
at once report to Architect errors, inconsistences or ambiguities discovered.
B. Bidder and Sub-bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of Bidding Documents

shall make written request which shall reach Architect at least seven days prior to date of
receipt of Bids.
C. Interpretations, corrections and changes of Bidding Documents will be made by

Addendum. Interpretations, corrections and changes of Bidding Documents made in any
other manner will not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon them.
D. Questions relating to Bidding Documents and Project site shall be directed to attention of
Keith Cummins, at the office of Architect.
3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Materials, products and equipment described in Bidding Documents establish standard of

required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed
substitution.
B. Requests for substitutions shall include name of material or equipment for which it is to
be substituted and complete description of proposed substitution including drawings,
performance and test data, other information necessary for evaluation, and samples
where applicable. Include statement setting forth changes in other materials, equipment
or other portions of Work including changes in work of other contracts that incorporation
of proposed substitution would require. Burden of proof of merit of proposed substitution
in upon proposer. Architect's decision of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution
shall be final.
C. If Architect accepts proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids, such acceptance will be
set forth in Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon acceptance made in any other
manner.
D. No substitution will be considered after Contract award unless specifically provided in

Contract Documents.
E. By requesting Architect's acceptance of substitutions, bidder represents that substitute

products are readily available in sufficient quantity to prevent delay in Work; are equal to
products described in Bidding Documents in strength, durability, efficiency, capacity and
ease of maintenance; have record of performance equal or superior to products
described in Bidding Documents and, if exposed to view in completed Work, are available
in same range of colors and textures as products described in Bidding Documents.
Bidder and manufacturer shall provide sufficient assurance that proposed substitute
product or system will remain available for full term of Agreement.
3.4 ADDENDA
A. Addenda will be delivered to all who are known by issuing office to have received a
complete set of Bidding Documents.
B. Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents
are on file for that purpose.
C. No Addenda will be issued later than four days prior to date for receipt of Bids except
Addendum withdrawing request for Bids or one which includes postponement of date for
receipt of Bids.
D. Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting Bid that Bidder has received all addenda
issued, and Bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in Bid.
ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES
4.1 PRE-BID CONFERENCE
A. A Pre-Bid Conference will be held on JXXX XX, 2023 at 2 PM Central Time at Argyle
Administration building: 6701 Canyon Falls Drive, Argyle TX 76226.
B. Following will serve as minimum agenda for Pre-Bid Conference:

1. Introduction of Project Team.
2. Project description.
3. Bidding requirements.
4. Project schedule.
5. Bond and insurance requirements.
6. Payment.
7. Miscellaneous information.
8. Questions and answers.
4.2 FORM AND STYLE OF BIDS
A. Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to form included with Bidding Documents.
B. All blanks on Bid Form shall be filled in by typewriter or manually in ink.
C. Where so indicated by makeup of Bid Form, sums shall be expressed in both words and
figures; and in case of discrepancy between the two, the amount written in words shall
govern.
D. Interlineation, alterations or erasures must be initialed by signer of Bid.
E. All requested Alternates shall be Bid. If no change in Base Bid is required, enter "No
Change."
F. Where two or more Bids for designated portions of Work have been requested, Bidder
may, without forfeiture of bid security, state Bidder's refusal to accept award of less than
combination of Bids stipulated by Bidder. Bidder shall make no additional stipulations on
Bid Form nor qualify Bid in any other manner.
G. Each copy of Bid shall include legal name of Bidder and statement that Bidder is sole
proprietor partnership, corporation, or other legal entity. Each copy shall be signed by
person or persons legally authorized to bind Bidder to Contract. Bid by corporation shall
further give state of incorporation and have corporate seal affixed. Bid submitted by
agent shall have current power of attorney attached certifying agent's authority to bind
Bidder.
H. Each bid shall have attached documents as required by Bidding Requirements for this
Project. This includes a minimum of three references with current phone numbers where
they can be reached. Please make sure your references are current, as they will be
contacted and out of date phone numbers delay the selection process. Proposals
submitted without attachments are subject to return by Owner without further
consideration.
I. Bidder may submit, on separate attachment to Bid form, voluntary alternates which he
may deem appropriate for Project. Owner is under no obligation to consider or accept
any such alternate.
4.3 BID SECURITY
A. Each Bid shall be accompanied by cashier's check or certified check on any State or
National Bank in Texas, or acceptable Bidder's Bond, payable unconditionally to Owner.
Cashier's check, certified check or Bidder's Bond shall be in amount of not less than five
percent of total amount of lump-sum Bid. Bid security is required by Owner as evidence
of good faith and as pledge that, if awarded Contract, Bidder will enter into contract with
Owner on terms stated in Bid and will furnish required bonds within 10 days after Bid is
accepted. Should Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or fail to furnish required
bonds, amount of bid security shall be forfeited to Owner as liquidated damages, not as a
penalty.
B. Surety bond shall be written on Bid Bond included in Contract Documents and attorney-
in-fact who executes bond on behalf of surety shall affix to bond a certified and current
copy of power of attorney.
C. Owner will have right to retain bid security of Bidders to whom award is being considered
until either Contract has been executed and bonds have been furnished; or specified time
has elapsed so that Bids may be withdrawn; or all Bids have been rejected.
4.4 SUBMISSION OF BIDS
A. Bid, bid security and other Documents required to be submitted with Bid shall be
enclosed in sealed opaque envelope. Envelope shall be addressed to party receiving
bids and shall be identified with Project name, Bidder's name and address and, if
applicable, designated portion of Work for which Bid is submitted. If Bid is sent by mail,
sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with notation
"SEALED BID ENCLOSED' on face thereof.
B. Bids shall be deposited at designated location prior to time and date for receipt of Bids.
Bids received after time and date of receipt of Bids will be returned unopened.
C. Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at location designated for receipt
of Bids.
D. Oral, telephonic (FAX) or telegraphic Bids are invalid and will not receive consideration.
4.5 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID
A. A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by Bidder during stipulated time period
following time and date designated for receipt of Bids, and each Bidder so agrees in
submitting Bid.
B. Prior to time and date designated for receipt of Bids, a Bid submitted may be modified or
withdrawn by notice to party receiving Bids at place designated for receipt of Bids. Such
notice shall be in writing over signature of Bidder or by telegram; if by telegram, written
confirmation over signature of Bidder shall be mailed and postmarked on or before date
of time set for receipt of Bids. A Change shall be so worded as not to reveal amount of
original Bid.
C. Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to date of time designated for receipt of Bids
provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders.
D. Bid security shall be in amount sufficient for Bid as modified or resubmitted.
ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS
5.1 OPENING OF BIDS
A. Properly identified Bids received on time will be opened publicly. Only the name of the
parties submitting proposals and the monetary amount of their proposals shall be read aloud.
5.2 REJECTION OF BIDS
A. Owner shall have right to reject any or all Bids, reject a Bid not accompanied by required
bid security or by other data required by Bidding Documents, or reject a Bid which is in
any way incomplete or irregular.
5.3 ACCEPTANCE OF BID (AWARD)
A. It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the best value Bidder provided Bid has
been submitted in accordance with requirements of Bidding Documents and does not
exceed funds available. Owner shall have right to waive informalities or irregularities in a
Bid received and to accept Bid which, in Owner's judgment, is in the Owner's own best
interest.
B. Owner shall have right to accept Alternates in any order or combination provided in
Bidding Documents, and to determine low Bidder on basis of sum of Base Bid and
Alternates accepted.
C. Required Forms
• The following forms must be completed and included with the
response.
oAffidavit of Authority and Non-Collusion
oResident Bidder’s Certification
oDebarment or Suspension Certificate
oFelony Conviction and Criminal History Notice
oAISD Contractor Certification
oConflict of Interest Disclosure
oIRS Form W-9
oChapter 2270 (Boycott) Verification
ARTICLE 6 POST-BID INFORMATION
6.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Bidder shall, within seven days after notification of selection for award of a Contract,
furnish to Owner through Architect in writing:
1. Designation of Work to be performed with Bidder's own forces.
2. Names of manufacturers, products and supplies of principal items or system of
materials and equipment proposed for Work.
3. Names of persons or entities, including those who are to furnish materials or
equipment fabricated to a special design, proposed for principal portions of Work.
4. Statement of costs of each major item of Work.
B. Bidder will be required to establish reliability and responsibility of persons or entities

proposed to furnish and perform Work described in Bidding Documents.
C. Prior to award of Contract, Architect will notify Bidder in writing if either Owner or
Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed
by Bidder. If Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a proposed person or entity,
Bidder may, at Bidder's option, withdraw the Bid or submit any acceptable substitute
person or entity with an adjustment in Base Bid or Alternate Bid to cover difference in
cost occasioned by such substitution. Owner may accept adjusted bid price or disqualify
Bidder. In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security will not be
forfeited.
D. Persons and entities proposed by Bidder and to who Owner and Architect have made no
reasonable objection must be used on Work for which they were proposed and shall not
be changed except with written consent of Owner and Architect.
6.2 CONTRACTOR SCREENING PROGRAM
A. Criminal History Background Checks and Drug Testing

General Contractor, all Subcontractors and all Sub-subcontractors shall ensure
that any person assigned to perform work at any District location under the
Contract meets the following criterion:
1. No records in the Texas DPS Sex Offender Registration database.
2. No felony convictions, open deferred adjudications or pending criminal trials in
jurisdictions checked for crimes involving sex, violence or any other offense
against or injury to a child.
3. No felony convictions, open deferred adjudications or pending criminal trials in
jurisdictions checked for the past seven (7) years, except for crimes involving
sex, violence or any other offense against a child for which there is no time
limit.
4. No misdemeanor convictions, open deferred adjudications or pending criminal
trials in jurisdictions checked for crimes involving sex or any other offense
against a child.
5. No misdemeanor convictions, open deferred adjudications or pending criminal

trials in jurisdictions checked for the past seven (7) years for crimes involving
violence.
6. No positive drug test results. Drug test shall consist of a five-panel screen for
drugs of abuse. Substances and cut-off levels shall be consistent with
Department of Transportation requirements. All positive results shall be
laboratory confirmed and independently verified by a Medical Review Officer
(MRO).
General Contractor shall perform and shall require, as a condition of contracting,

all Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors to perform criminal history background
checks and drug testing on any person who is assigned to perform any work at
any District location under the Contract and shall promptly produce to Owner the
results of such background checks and drug testing upon request. Any person
noticeably under the influence of drugs or other, that a drug test will be demanded.
A photo identification badge shall be issued to those persons meeting the

screening criterion described in Section 6.4.A. Any person who is assigned to
perform any work at any District location under the Contract shall be required to
wear their identification badge while on-site.
B. All persons working onsite are required to wear the project identification badge
described above. This includes any persons performing warranty work.
C. If for some reason workers employed by the Contractor, Subcontractors, or Sub

subcontractors cannot obtain a badge the Contractor is to notify the Architect in
writing. The Contractor will be required to provide an off duty police officer or
reimburse the Owner for the cost of an off duty police officer at the current
prevailing rates (approximately $40/hr) to be onsite at all times when non badged
workers are onsite.
ARTICLE 7 - PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND
7.1 BOND REQUIREMENTS
A. Bidder shall furnish bonds covering faithful performance of Contract and payment of all
obligations arising thereunder.
1. Performance Bond: Good and sufficient construction or performance bond in amount
equal to 100 percent of total amount of Contract, as evidenced by proposal tabulation
or otherwise, guaranteeing full and faithful execution of Work and performance of
Contract in accordance with Contract Documents. This bond shall guarantee repair
and maintenance of defects due to faulty materials and workmanship that appear
within period of one year from date of completion and acceptance of improvement by
Owner.
2. Payment Bond: Good and sufficient bond in amount equal to 100 percent of total
amount of Contract, as evidenced by proposal tabulation or otherwise, guaranteeing
full and proper protection of claimants supplying labor and materials in prosecution of
Work provided for in said Contract and for use of each such claimant.
B. Cost shall be included in Bid.
C. If Owner requires that bonds be secured from other than Bidder's usual sources, changes
in cost will be adjusted as provided in Contract Documents.
D. No sureties will be accepted by Owner who are now in default or delinquent on any
bonds or who are interested in any litigation against Owner. Bonds shall be executed by
not less than one corporate surety authorized to do business in State of Texas. Each
bond shall be executed by Bidder and Owner. Should any Surety on Contract be
determined unsatisfactory at any time by Owner, notice will be given Contractor to that
effect, and Contractor shall immediately provide new Surety at no additional cost and
satisfactory to Owner. Contract shall not be operative, nor will any payments be due or
paid until approval of bonds has been made by Owner. Bonding company shall be
qualified as required by Article 11.4 of General Conditions of the Contract and by any
Supplementary Conditions.
7.2 TIME AND DELIVERY AND FORM OF BONDS
A. Bidder shall deliver required bonds to Owner not later than three days following date of
execution of Contract. If Work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of
intent, Bidder shall, prior to commencement of Work, submit evidence satisfactory to
Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered in accordance with this
subparagraph.
B. Bonds shall be written on AIA Document A312, Performance Bond and payment Bond.
Both bonds shall be written in amount of the Contract Sum.
C. Bond shall be dated on or after date of Contract.
D. Bidder shall require attorney-in-fact who executes required bonds on behalf of surety to
affix thereto certified and current copy of power or attorney.
ARTICLE 8 - FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR
8.1 Agreement for this Work will be written on AIA Document A101, Standard Form of
Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Where the Basis of Payment Is a Stipulated
Sum.
8.2 Project is tax exempt and Contract will be executed with separate contract sums for
materials and services to comply with requirements of 1991 Texas House Bill 11.
8.3 SALES TAX:
A. The Owner qualifies for exemption from state and local sales tax pursuant to the
provisions of Article 20.04 (F) of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. A
certificate of exemption will be furnished to the successful bidder. The contractor
performing this Contract may purchase, rent, or lease all materials, supplies, equipment
used or consumed in the performance of this Contract by issuing to his suppliers an
exemption certificate in lieu of the tax, said exemption certificate complying with State
Comptroller of Public Accounts Ruling No. 95-0.07. Any such exemption certificate
issued by the contractor in lieu of the tax shall be subject to the provisions of the State
Comptroller of Public Accounts Ruling No. 95-0.09 as amended to be effective October 2,
1968, and any subsequent amendments thereto.
END OF DOCUMENT
DOCUMENT 00 31 00
AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 AVAILABLE INFORMATION
A. Informational Documents: The Owner is making certain documents available for the
Bidders information. The Owner does not warrant the accuracy of the information
contained with these documents. Bidders are encouraged to verify conditions prior to
submitting their bid.
1. Informational documents and reports are provided for convenience and are
intended as information only. These documents are not a part of the Contract
Documents.
2. The Owner and Architect have no liability for the use of or interpretation of data
from supplementary documents and reports provided for Bidders’ information.
3. Copies of informational documents are available upon written request.
1.2 GEOTECHNICAL REPORT
A. The geotechnical data prepared by the Owner's geotechnical consultant will be made
available for convenience. The report will include subsurface exploration and
geotechnical evaluations including location plan, exploration results, borings, general
notes, and soil classification system. It was prepared for the Owner for use by the Design
Team in designing the Project. It serves as additional information and is not in lieu of
nor does it replace the Contractor’s own investigation. The geotechnical report is made
available upon written request through the Owner or Architect.
1. The geotechnical report is not a part of the Contract Documents.
2. Data indicated for subsurface conditions are not intended as representations or
warranties of continuity of conditions. It is expressly understood the neither the
Owner nor the Architect are responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn
from the data by the Bidder.
a. Data are made available for convenience and are not warranted to represent
conditions that may be encountered. The Contractor may perform its own
geotechnical evaluation of the site.
b. The report identifies properties of below grade conditions and offers
recommendations for the design of foundations primarily for the use of the
Architect and Engineer.
c. Do not construe recommendations described within the report as a
requirement of the Contract, unless specifically referenced in the Contract
Documents.
d. Do not rely on subsurface information contained in the report. Employ an
independent laboratory to make investigation of existing subsurface
conditions as deemed necessary. Conclusions drawn from the data are the
responsibility of the Bidder.
3. The report, by its nature, cannot reveal every condition existing on the site. Should
subsurface conditions vary substantially from this report, changes in the design
Available Information 00 31 00 - 1
and construction of foundations will be made, with resulting credits or expenditures

to the Contract Sum accruing to the Owner.
4. Boring Logs: Excerpts from the Geotechnical Report, including a Boring Plan,
Boring Logs describing strata for each test hole, and results of laboratory tests will
be made available upon written request.
5. It is in the bidder’s interest to visit the site, review existing conditions and make
investigations deemed necessary to verify site and subsurface conditions.
Schedule investigations with the Architect.
6. The Owner retains the right to retain a geotechnical engineer to observe the
execution of work in connection with excavating, trenching, filling, backfilling and
grading.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF DOCUMENT
Available Information 00 31 00 - 2
DOCUMENT 00 31 32
GEOTECHNICAL DATA
1.1 GEOTECHNICAL DATA
A. Soil boring data and Geotechnical Report for Project, obtained from D&S Engineering
Labs, report number G22-2214 dated January 23, 2023, is hereby attached to this
Document.
B. This Document with its referenced attachment (the Report) is part of the Procurement
and Contracting Requirements for Project. They provide Owner's information for Bidders'
convenience and are intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of Bidders' own
investigations. The Report is made available for Bidders' convenience and information
but is not a warranty of existing conditions.
C. This Document and its attached Report are not a part of the Contract Documents.
1.2 GEOTECHNICAL REPORT
A. The information contained in the Report represents design criteria, recommendations,

and guidelines intended to be utilized as the basis of design for the engineering of the
earthwork operations, paving subgrade and preparation, and potential foundation
options and design for structures, and are not directives to the Bidders.
B. The opinions expressed in this Report are those of a geotechnical engineer and
represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted
by a geotechnical engineer. Owner is not responsible for interpretations or conclusions
drawn or inferred from the data.
C. Because subsurface conditions indicated by the soil borings are a sampling in relation
to the entire construction area, and for other reasons, the Owner, the Architect, the
Architect's consultants, and the firm reporting the subsurface conditions do not warrant
the conditions between boring or below the depths of the borings, or that the strata
logged from the borings are necessarily typical of the entire site. Further, the Architect
and Owner assume no responsibility for variations in subsoil conditions, quality, or
stability; or for the presence, level, and extent of underground water.
D. Any entity or party using information described in the Report may make additional test
borings and conduct other exploratory operations that may be required to determine the
character of subsurface materials that may be encountered pending coordination with,
and approval by, the Owner.
E. Entities or parties using the information included in the soil borings and Geotechnical
Report accept full responsibility for its use.
Geotech Data Preamble 00 31 32 - 1

END OF DOCUMENT
Geotech Data Preamble 00 31 32 - 2

Geotechnical Engineering Report
Argyle ISD ES #5 (HARVEST SCHOOL SITE)
Northlake, Texas
April 7, 2023
D&S ENGINEERING LABS
April 7, 2023
Argyle Independent School District

Attn: Jeff Koehn
6 6 01 Canyon Falls Dr
Argyle, Texas 76226
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
D&S ENGINEERING #G23-2009
ARGYLE ISD ES #5 (HARVEST SCHOOL SITE)
CLEVELAND GIBBS AND 17TH STREET
NORTHLAKE, TEXAS
Mr. Koehn,
As requested, D&S Engineering Labs, LLC has completed the Geotechnical Investigation for the
above referenced project. This investigation was conducted in accordance with Proposal No.
GP23-2009, dated January 13, 2023. Authorization to proceed was received on January 18, 2023.
Persistent wet weather and soft ground conditions delayed the start of field exploration until mid
month of March.
We appreciate the opportunity to provide professional geotechnical engineering services for this
project. At your request, we are available to discuss any questions which may arise regarding this
report. Please do not hesitate to call if we can provide any additional services.
Sincerely, 0'1 /07 /207.3
Ibrahim A. Baayeh, P.E.

Director of Geotechnical Engineering
14805 Trinity Boulevard, Fort Worth, TX 76155

Geotechnical 817.529.8464 • Corporate 903.420.0014
www.dsenglabs.com
Texas Engineering Firm Registration# F-12796
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION .................................................................................... 1

2.0 PURPOSE AND SCOPE ...................................................................................... 1
3.0 FIELD AND LABORATORY INVESTIGATION...................................................... 2
3.1 General .......................................................................................................... 2
3.2 Laboratory Testing.......................................................................................... 3
3.2.1 Unconfined Compression Tests ............................................................. 4
3.2.2 Overburden Swell Tests......................................................................... 4
3.2.1 Soluble Sulfates ..................................................................................... 4
4.0 SITE CONDITIONS .............................................................................................. 5
4.1 Stratigraphy .................................................................................................... 5
4.2 Ground Water ................................................................................................. 5
5.0 ENGINEERING ANALYSIS .................................................................................. 6
5.1 Estimated Potential Vertical Movement (PVM) ............................................... 6
6.0 FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS ................................................................ 6
6.1 Straight-sided Drilled Shafts ........................................................................... 7
6.1.1 Lateral Load Parameters ....................................................................... 8
6.1.2 Drilled Shaft Construction Considerations .............................................. 9
6.1.3 Pier-supported Grade Beams and Suspended Floor Slabs ...................10
6.1.4 Soil-Supported Floor System ................................................................11
7.0 EARTHWORK RECOMMENDATIONS ................................................................11
7.1 Soil Preparation for Structurally Suspended Floor Slabs ...............................12
7.2 Earthwork Preparation for Soil-Supported Floor Slabs...................................12
7.3 Additional Considerations ..............................................................................14
8.0 PAVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS ...................................................................14
8.1 General .........................................................................................................14
8.2 Behavior Characteristics of Expansive Soils Beneath Pavement ...................15
8.3 Subgrade Strength Characteristics ................................................................15
8.4 Pavement Subgrade Preparation Recommendations ....................................15
8.4.1 Lime Treatment.....................................................................................17
8.4.2 Aggregate Base ....................................................................................18
8.5 Rigid Pavement .............................................................................................18
8.6 Pavement Joints and Cutting .........................................................................19
8.7 Pavement Reinforcing Steel ..........................................................................19
9.0 CORROSION POTENTIAL ..................................................................................19
10.0 OTHER CONSTRUCTION...................................................................................21
10.1 Utility and Service Lines ..............................................................................21
10.2 Exterior Flatwork .........................................................................................22
10.3 Surface Drainage.........................................................................................23
10.4 Landscaping ................................................................................................23
10.5 Site Grading ................................................................................................24
10.6 Excavations .................................................................................................24
11.0 SEISMIC CONSIDERATION ...............................................................................25
12.0 LIMITATIONS ......................................................................................................25
APPENDIX A – BORING LOGS AND SUPPORTING DATA

APPENDIX B – GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PROCEDURES
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
ARGYLE ISD ES #5 (HARVEST SCHOOL SITE)
NORTHLAKE, TEXAS
1.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
This report presents the results of the geotechnical investigation for the proposed Argyle
ISD Elementary School #5 in Northlake, Texas. The site is located northwest of the
intersection of Cleveland Gibbs Road and 17th Street in Northlake Texas. The proposed
school will have separate buildings with connection hallways. The project consists of the
design and construction of the new school building, play field and associated pavements.
The main school building column loads will be in the range of 250 kips to 350 kips and
maximum approximate loads for the perimeter grade beam may be assumed to be 6.5 klf,
if the first story of the building to be a structurally suspended floor system. The column
load and perimeter grade beam loads may be reduced to approximately 200 to 300 kips
and 4.5 klf if a soil-supported floor slab system is selected. Paved parking and drive areas
are also planned.
The proposed location of the structures is currently covered with short to medium height
grass and bare soils. Based on the site observations and available topographic maps
(dfwmaps.com), the overall site slopes from north to south with a topographic relief of
about 5 to 10 feet. Within the building footprint the topographic relief is about 5 feet. Recent
photographs of the site are shown below.
2.0 PURPOSE AND SCOPE
The purpose of this investigation was to:
• Identify the subsurface stratigraphy present at the site.
1
D&S Engineering Labs, LLC Argyle ISD ES #5 (Harvest School Site)
Northlake, Texas
G23-2009
• Evaluate the physical and engineering properties of the subsurface soil for use
in geotechnical analyses.
• Provide geotechnical recommendations for use in design of foundations of the

building structures and pavements.
The scope of this investigation consisted of:
• Drilling and sampling a total of eighteen (18) borings. Ten (10) borings (B1
through B10) were advanced within the proposed building footprint to depths of
about 30 to 45 feet and the remaining eight (8) borings (B11 through B18) were
advanced to depths of about 10 feet within the new pavement areas.
• Laboratory testing of selected soil samples obtained during the field investigation.
• Preparation of a Geotechnical Report that includes the following:
o Evaluation of potential soil heave through Potential Vertical Movement

(PVM) estimates.
o Recommendations for the design and construction of the foundations.
o Recommendations for pavements and pavement subgrade.
o Recommendations for earthwork.
3.0 FIELD AND LABORATORY INVESTIGATION
3.1 General
The borings were advanced using truck-mounted drilling rigs, each of which were
equipped with continuous solid flight augers. Undisturbed samples of cohesive soil
and weathered bedrock strata were obtained using 3-inch diameter tube samplers
that were advanced into the soils in 1- to 2-feet increments by the continuous thrust
of a hydraulic ram located on the drilling equipment. After sample extrusion, an
estimate of the material stiffness of each cohesive soil and weathered bedrock sample
was obtained in the field using a hand penetrometer.
The bedrock strata present in the building borings were drilled and sampled using a
double-tube core barrel fitted with a tungsten-carbide, saw-tooth bit. The length of
core recovered (REC), expressed as a percentage of the coring interval, along with
the Rock Quality Designation (RQD), is tabulated at the appropriate depths on the
Log of Boring illustrations. The RQD is the sum of all core pieces longer than four
inches divided by the total length of the cored interval. Pieces shorter than four inches
which were determined to be broken by drilling or by handling were fitted together and
considered as one piece.
Soil and bedrock strata were also intermittently tested in-situ using cone penetration
tests in order to determine their resistance to penetration. For this test, a 3-inch
2
Northlake, Texas
G23-2009
diameter steel cone is driven by the energy equivalent of a 170-pound hammer falling
freely from a height of 24 inches and striking an anvil located at the top of the drill
string. Depending on the resistance of the soil and bedrock materials, either the
number of blows of the hammer required to provide 12 inches of penetration is
recorded (as two increments of 6 inches each), or the inches of penetration of the
cone resulting from 100 blows of the hammer are recorded (as two increments of 50
blows each).
All samples obtained were extruded in the field, placed in plastic bags to minimize
changes in the natural moisture condition, labeled according to the appropriate boring
number and depth, and placed in protective cardboard boxes for transportation to the
laboratory. The approximate locations of the borings performed at the site are shown
on the boring location map that is included in Appendix A. The specific depths,
thicknesses and descriptions of the strata encountered are presented on the
individual Boring Log illustrations, which are also included in Appendix A. Strata
boundaries shown on the boring logs are approximate.
3.2 Laboratory Testing

Laboratory tests were performed to measure engineering characteristics of the
subsurface materials encountered and to provide data for developing engineering
design parameters. The samples recovered during the field exploration were
described by a geotechnical engineer in the field. These descriptions were later
refined by the geotechnical engineer based on results of the laboratory tests
performed.
Samples were classified and described, in part, using ASTM and Unified Soil
Classification System (USCS) procedures. Bedrock strata were described using
standard geologic nomenclature.
In order to determine soil characteristics and to aid in classifying the soils,
classification testing was performed on selected samples as requested by the
geotechnical engineer. The tests were performed in general accordance with the
following test procedures. The classification tests are described in more detail in
Appendix B (General Description of Procedures).
• Moisture Content ASTM D2216
• Atterberg Limits ASTM D4318
• Percent of Particles Finer than No 200 Sieve ASTM D1140
Additional tests were performed to aid in evaluating strength, volume change, and
chemical characteristics, which consisted of the following:
• Unconfined Compressive Strength of Soil Samples ASTM D2166

• Overburden Swells ASTM D4546
3
Northlake, Texas
G23-2009
• Soluble Sulfates TEX-145-E

• Sulfides SM4500-S2-F
• Redox Potential (Oxidation Reduction Potential) ASTM G200
• Chlorides SM4500-CI-C
• pH of Soil ASTM D4972
• Resistivity of Soil Materials ASTM G187
The results of these tests are presented at the corresponding sample depths on the
appropriate Boring Log illustrations or summary tables, Appendix A.
3.2.1 Unconfined Compression Tests

Unconfined compression tests were performed on selected samples of the
cohesive soils and on selected samples of the intact rock cores. These tests
were performed in general accordance with ASTM D2166 for soil samples
and ASTM D7012 Method C for rock core samples. For each unconfined
compression test performed, a cylindrical specimen was subjected to an
axial load applied at a constant rate of strain until failure or a large strain
(i.e., greater than 15 percent) occurred.
3.2.2 Overburden Swell Tests

Selected samples of the near-surface cohesive soils were subjected to
overburden swell tests. For this test, a sample is placed in a consolidometer
and is subjected to the estimated in situ overburden pressure. The sample is
then inundated with water and allowed to swell. Moisture contents are
determined both before and after completion of the test. Test results are
recorded as the percent swell, with initial and final moisture content. The results
from overburden swell tests performed indicate a low potential for swell with
changes in soil moisture content.
3.2.1 Soluble Sulfates

Soluble sulfate tests were performed on representative samples obtained.
These results are provided in Appendix A (Boring Logs and Supporting Data).
Subgrade materials in some areas of Texas has experienced sulfate-induced
heave treatment with calcium-based additives such as lime. In general, a sulfate
level less than 3,000 ppm is considered to have an acceptably low potential for
sulfate induced heaving. The results of the sulfate tests performed on
representative near-surface soil samples from test borings in this study indicate
values in the range of 100 to 600 ppm, and thus should be considered to pose
a minimal risk of sulfate-induced heaving after lime treatment. However,
additional sulfate testing is recommended to be performed prior to construction
for the subgrade to receive lime treatment.
4
Northlake, Texas
G23-2009
4.0 SITE CONDITIONS
4.1 Stratigraphy
Based upon our observation of the boring samples and a review of the Geologic Atlas
of Texas, Sherman Sheet, this site is in an area characterized by soil and bedrock
strata associated with the Undivided Grayson Marl and Main Street Limestone
Formation.
Fill material consisting of aggregate base and lean clay were encountered in Borings
B8, P6, and P7, which extended to depths of about 2 to 4 feet below existing grades.
At the ground surface within the remaining borings, low to high plasticity clays were
observed. These clay soils are generally soft to hard in consistency, are various
shades of brown and tan in color and contain varying amounts of calcareous nodules
and deposits, ferrous nodules, weathered limestone fragments and iron oxide stains,
and occasional limestone seams. The clay soil extends to depths of about 5 to 10
feet.
Overburden soils are underlain by weathered limestone bedrock strata that extend to
depths of about 10 to 15 feet. The weathered limestone bedrock strata are generally
soft to hard in rock hardness, are tan in color, contain varying amounts of thin shale
seams and intermittent fresh limestone layers, and are argillaceous.
Below the zone of weathering, fresh limestone bedrock strata are present. The
limestone strata are generally medium hard to hard in rock hardness, are gray in color
and contain trace to few amounts of thin shale seams. The fresh limestone bedrock
strata extend to the top of shale strata at depths of about 17 to 30 feet within the
borings.
Beneath the fresh limestone bedrock strata, fresh shale bedrock strata are present
within the building borings. The shale strata are generally medium hard to hard in rock
hardness, dark gray in color and extended to the maximum depths of about 30 to 45
feet.
Subsurface conditions at each boring location are described on the individual boring
logs in Appendix A.
4.2 Ground Water

Ground water was encountered during drilling operations in all the building borings
with the exception of Boring B9 at depths of about 3.5 to 14 feet during drilling
operations and about 20 to 35 feet upon completion of drilling operations. The
remaining borings were observed to be dry during drilling operations and upon
completion of drilling operations. Groundwater levels should be anticipated to
fluctuate with seasonal and annual variations in rainfall, and also may vary as a result
of development and landscape irrigation.
5
Northlake, Texas
G23-2009
5.0 ENGINEERING ANALYSIS
5.1 Estimated Potential Vertical Movement (PVM)

Potential Vertical Movement (PVM) was evaluated utilizing several different methods
for predicting movement, as described in Appendix B, and based on our experience
and professional opinion.
At the time of our field investigation, the near-surface soil was generally found to be
dry to wet in moisture conditions. Based upon the results of our analysis, the site is
estimated to possess a PVM of about 2 to 3.5 inches at the soil moisture conditions
existing at the time of the field investigation. If the near surface soils are allowed to
dry appreciably to significant depth prior to or during construction, the potential for
post-construction vertical movement may increase. Dry, average, and wet are relative
terms based on moisture content and plasticity.
6.0 FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The near-surface soils present at the site have the potential for post-construction vertical
movement with changes in soil moisture content. We understand post construction vertical
movement of ¾ inches is expected for the school. Considering the type of structure,
reported loading intensity and the subsurface soil and groundwater conditions, we
recommend that the main school building and other movement sensitive structures, be
supported on a drilled shaft foundation system using a structurally-supported grade beam
and suspended floor slab system. A drilled shaft foundation system using a structurally-
supported grade beam and suspended floor slab will provide the least risk of post-
construction vertical movements. This option will reduce the extent of required grading
and soil modification across the site to reduce potential movements. Distress caused by
potential post-construction vertical movement will be negligible because the structure is
isolated from the expansive soils.
If post-construction movements on the order of 1-inch can be tolerated after subgrade

preparation is completed in accordance with the earthwork recommendation section of
this report, the main school building can be supported on a soil-supported floor slab in
conjunction with a pier and beam system. A soil-supported floor slab in conjunction with a
pier and beam system may experience some vertical movement with changes in soil
moisture content. Non-load bearing walls, partitions, and other elements bearing on the
floor slab will reflect these movements should they occur. However, with appropriate
design, adherence to good construction practices, and appropriate post-construction
maintenance, these potential movements can be reduced. The majority of the movement
is expected to occur within 10 feet of the perimeter of the building, and any walls bearing
on the slab in the areas of movement may exhibit distress.
Final grading plans were not available during the time of this report preparation. We
anticipate the finished pad elevation will be achieved by some amount (within about 2 feet)
6
Northlake, Texas
G23-2009
of cut/fill operations. Recommended design parameters provided herein should be

expected to change should there be significant quantities of cut or fill; therefore, we
recommend that this office be permitted to review final grading and design plans prior to
construction to confirm and/or revise the conclusions and recommendations provided
herein.
The following paragraphs provide design recommendations and construction

considerations for deep foundation design and construction.
6.1 Straight-sided Drilled Shafts

The new school building may be supported on auger-excavated, straight-sided,
reinforced concrete drilled shafts founded in the fresh gray limestone or the dark gray
shale bedrock encountered at depths of about 12 feet below grades existing at the
time of our field investigation. We recommend that straight-sided drilled piers for
structural loads be a minimum of 18 inches in diameter and penetrate a minimum of
2 feet into the bearing stratum to utilize the full amount of end bearing.
Straight-sided drilled shafts may be designed to transfer imposed loads into the
bearing stratum using a combination of end-bearing and skin friction as outlined in
Table 1 below.
The allowable side frictions to resist both axial loading and uplift may be taken from
the top of the bearing stratum or from the bottom of any temporary casing used,
whichever is deeper.
Table 1. Recommended Drilled Shaft Design Parameters

Depth Below Allowable Allowable
Material Existing Grades Side Friction End Bearing
(ft) (psf) (psf)
Tan Weathered Limestone /
10 to 12 4,500 N/A
Gray Limestone
Fresh Gray Limestone 12 to 22 6,400 45,000
Fresh Shale >22 3,500 30,000
The shafts should be provided with sufficient steel reinforcement throughout their
length to resist potential uplift pressures that will be exerted. Uplift forces acting on
individual shafts will be resisted by the dead weight of the structure, plus the shale-
to-concrete adhesion acting on that portion of the shaft that is in contact with the shale
strata. For the near surface soils, we recommend using an uplift pressure of 800 psf
over an average depth of 10 feet. Typically, one-half (½) of a percent of steel by cross-
sectional area is sufficient for this purpose (ACI 318). However, the final amount of
reinforcement required should be determined based on the information provided
herein, and should be the greater of that determination, or ACI 318.
7
Northlake, Texas
G23-2009
There is no reduction in allowable capacities for shafts in proximity to each other.

However, for a two-shaft system, there is an 18 percent reduction in the available
perimeter area for side friction capacity for shafts in contact (tangent). The area
reduction can be extrapolated linearly to zero at one shaft diameter clear spacing.
Please contact this office if other close proximity geometries need to be considered.
We anticipate that a straight-sided drilled pier foundation system designed and

constructed in accordance with the information provided in this report will have a
factor of safety in excess of 2.5 against shear failure and may experience settlements
of small fractions of an inch.
6.1.1 Lateral Load Parameters

The following soils and rock geo-parameters for lateral analysis of drilled shafts
for use in LPILE® or other lateral load software. These values are based on
stratigraphy, laboratory data and experience. The recommended model layers
are “Stiff Clay” and “Weak Rock”. The depth ranges are based on the borings
drilled. We recommend that the lateral resistance parameters be neglected for
the uppermost 3 feet of soil materials to account for seasonal and annual cyclic
variations in soil desiccation and contraction and a lack of confining pressure.
These parameters were selected to conservatively approximate the subsurface
conditions across the site.
Table 3. Subsurface Soil and Bedrock Materials

Depth Software Material Unit Weight
Stratum
Designation (pcf)
(ft)
Native Clays 0-5 Stiff Clay w/o Water 125

5 - 12 Weak Rock 135
Gray Limestone
Fresh Gray Limestone 12 - 22 Strong Rock 145
Fresh Shale > 22 Weak Rock 140
Table 4. Recommended Geotechnical Parameters for Soil and Bedrock Strata

Unconfined
Undrained Strain
Depth Compressive Modulus
Stratum Cohesion RQD Factor
(ft) Strength – (psi)
(psf) ε50
Rock (psi)
Native Clays 0-5 1,000 NA NA NA 0.015

5 - 12 NA 100 20,000 75 0.0005
Gray Limestone
8
Northlake, Texas
G23-2009
Unconfined
Undrained Strain
Depth Compressive Modulus
Stratum Cohesion RQD Factor
(ft) Strength – (psi)
(psf) ε50
Rock (psi)
Fresh Gray Limestone 12 – 22 NA 500 NA NA NA
Fresh Shale >22 NA 200 25,000 80 0.0005
6.1.2 Drilled Shaft Construction Considerations

Groundwater seepage was observed during drilling in all the building
borings with the exception of Boring B9 at depths of about 3.5 to 14 feet
during drilling operations and about 20 to 35 feet upon completion of drilling
operations.
Temporary casing should be locally available in the event that excessive
groundwater seepage is encountered that cannot be controlled with
conventional pumps, sumps, or other means, or in the event that excessive
sidewall sloughing occurs. Ideally, concrete should be onsite during drilling
operations, so it can be placed immediately after drilling of each shaft is
complete.
The installation of all drilled piers should be observed by experienced
geotechnical personnel during construction to verify compliance with design
assumptions including: 1) verticality of the shaft excavation, 2) identification
of the bearing stratum, 3) minimum pier diameter and depth, 4) correct
amount of reinforcement, 5) proper removal of loose material, and 6) that
groundwater seepage, if present, is properly controlled. D&S would be
pleased to provide these services in support of this project.
During construction of the drilled shafts, care should be taken to avoid
creating an oversized cap ("mushroom") near the ground surface that is
larger than the shaft diameter. These “mushrooms” provide a resistance
surface that near-surface soils can heave against. If near-surface soils are
prone to sloughing, a condition which can result in “mushrooming”, the tops
of the shafts should be formed in the sloughing soils using cardboard or
other circular forms equal to the diameter of the shaft.
Concrete used for the shafts should have a slump of 8 inches ± 1 inch.
Individual shafts should be excavated in continuous operation and concrete
should be placed as soon as after completion of the drilling as is practical.
All pier holes should be filled with concrete within 8 hours after completion
of drilling. In the event of equipment breakdown, any uncompleted open
shaft should be backfilled with soil to be redrilled at a later date. This office
should be contacted when shafts have reached the target depth but cannot
be completed.
9
Northlake, Texas
G23-2009
6.1.3 Pier-supported Grade Beams and Suspended Floor Slabs

We recommend the building additions be constructed with structurally
suspended floor slabs over a void space. For a pier and grade beam
foundation with a structurally suspended floor slab, a minimum void space
of 6 inches should be provided beneath all structural elements. Two
methods are typically utilized for constructing a suspended floor slab
system. These include using pan and joist type construction utilizing either
concrete or steel beams and raising the floor slab well above the underlying
expansive soils (forming a crawl space) or using cardboard carton forms to
create the void.
Provisions should be made for positive drainage of the floor slab crawl
space if a pan and joist system is used. Sufficient ventilation should also be
provided where construction with metal beams and joists is planned to limit
corrosion of the metal components.
Structural cardboard carton forms (void boxes) may be used to provide the
required voids beneath the floor slab and grade beams; however,
trapezoidal void boxes should not be used. Care should be taken to assure
that the void boxes are not allowed to become wet or crushed prior to or
during concrete placement and finishing operations. We recommend that
masonite (1/4” thick) or other protective material be placed on top of the
carton forms to reduce the risk of crushing the cardboard forms during
concrete placement and finishing operations. We recommend using side
retainers along the grade beams to prevent soil from infiltrating the void
space after the carton forms deteriorate.
Grade beams may be earth-formed, but only if the sides can be cut and
maintained vertical. If sloughing occurs, or if the sides cannot be maintained
vertical, the grade beams should then be formed on both sides. The bottom
of all grade beam excavations should be essentially free of any loose or soft
material prior to the placement of concrete. All grade beams and floor slabs
should be adequately reinforced to minimize cracking as normal movements
occur in the foundation soils. Required fill under the void boxes may be any
clean soil and should be compacted in accordance with the earthwork
recommendation in this report. If needed, a thin (less than 3-inches thick)
leveling bed of lean concrete or flowable fill may be used.
If grade beams are formed, the exterior side of the grade beams around the
structure should be carefully backfilled with on-site clayey soils. The backfill
soils should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density
for the backfill material as determined by ASTM D698 (standard Proctor).
The fill should be placed at a moisture content that is at least three (3)
percent above the optimum moisture content, as determined by that same
test. This fill should extend the full depth of the grade beam and void box
10
Northlake, Texas
G23-2009
and should extend a minimum distance of one foot away from the exterior
grade beam perimeter.
6.1.4 Soil-Supported Floor System

A soil-supported floor system that is placed directly on a modified subgrade may
be used for the structures in conjunction with a drilled shaft foundation system.
A ground supported system has an increased risk of potential vertical movement
resulting from subgrade soil volume changes which may occur as a result of
changes in soil moisture content. The majority of such movement typically
occurs in the perimeter 10 feet of buildings with slabs constructed with Finished
Floor Elevations near those of the final exterior grades and any walls bearing
on the slab in the areas of movement may exhibit distress. We recommend that
the subgrade be prepared according to the Earthwork Recommendations
section of this report in order to reduce the potential for post-construction
movement. The floor slab in conjunction with a shallow foundation should be
doweled to the beams at the locations of the doors in order to prevent vertical
steps from forming at these high-traffic areas.
In order to reduce the effects of seasonal moisture fluctuations and subsequent

possible soil movement beneath soil-supported floor slabs as described above,
consideration is often given to the installation of a horizontal barrier around the
perimeter of the structure. This barrier may be in the form of an independent
barrier, such as a minimum 5-foot wide sidewalk or pavements that abut the
building. The joints between the building and any sidewalks and pavements
should be sealed and the seals should be inspected periodically and re-sealed
as necessary through the life of the structure.
We understand that sidewalks are not always practical or desired around the
full perimeters of some facilities. Where landscaping will be present adjacent to
building perimeters, diligent post-construction maintenance should be
employed to prevent excessive wetting or drying of those adjacent soils.
7.0 EARTHWORK RECOMMENDATIONS
The near-surface soils present have moderate to high potential for post-construction
vertical movement with changes in subsurface soil moisture changes. Grading plans were
not available during the time of this report preparation; therefore, we anticipate the finished
pad elevation will be at or near existing grades. We have the following earthwork
recommendations for a structurally-supported floor slab system and a soil supported floor
slab used in conjunction with a pier and beam foundation. Each are described separately
below.
11
Northlake, Texas
G23-2009
7.1 Soil Preparation for Structurally Suspended Floor Slabs

• After stripping, the building pad area should be undercut to a common
elevation corresponding to the lowest grade existing prior to beginning grade-
raise backfilling.
• After performing required cuts, scarify, rework, and recompact the exposed
bottom of the excavated subgrade areas to receive grade raise fill to a depth
of 12 inches. The scarified and reworked soils should be compacted to
between 92 and 96 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by
ASTM D698 (standard Proctor), and to a moisture content that is at least three
(3) percent above the optimum moisture content as determined by the same
test. This procedure should extend at least 5 feet beyond the perimeter of the
new structure.
• Begin required fill operations using debris-free on-site or imported soil to no
higher than the bottom of the void boxes. The grade-raise soil fill should be
placed in maximum 8-inch compacted lifts and should be compacted in similar
fashion to the scarified soils noted above.
• Place a minimum 15-mil thick vapor barrier beneath all floor slabs. The barrier
should be securely bonded to the underside of the floor slab to promote
continued contact after concrete placement. All seams and penetrations
throughout the barrier should be sealed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
requirements.
7.2 Earthwork Preparation for Soil-Supported Floor Slabs

If post-construction movements of up to 1-inch can be tolerated after subgrade
preparation is completed in accordance with the recommendations provided herein,
it is our opinion that the floor slab may be soil-supported in conjunction with a pier and
beam foundation system. Please note that more stringent tolerances limiting potential
post-construction vertical movement will require more extensive effort.
• Strip the site of all vegetation, organic soil, and deleterious material within the
new building areas. Typically, 6 inches is sufficient for this purpose.
• After stripping and after performing any necessary grade cuts, excavate an
additional 4 feet of material and stockpile for re-use. The excavation should
extend at least 5 feet beyond the perimeter of the new structures. The
excavations should be terminated if competent limestone is encountered prior
to achieving the required depth.
• After excavating, scarify, rework, and recompact the exposed stripped

subgrade to a depth of 12 inches. The scarified and reworked soils should be
compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined
by ASTM D698 (standard Proctor), and placed at a moisture content that is at
12
Northlake, Texas
G23-2009
least three (3) percent above the optimum moisture content, as determined
by the same test. This procedure should extend at least 5 feet beyond the
perimeter of the new structure.
• Within 24 hours of recompacting the reworked excavated subgrade, begin fill

operations with the stockpiled soil to no higher than 1-foot below the bottom
of floor slab final grade elevation. The fill soil should be placed in maximum
8-inch compacted lifts, be compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum
dry density as determined by ASTM D698 (standard Proctor) and be placed
at a moisture content that is at least two (2) percent above the optimum
moisture content, as determined by that same test. Grade raise fill within the
building pad areas may be on-site or imported material having a Liquid Limit
(LL) of 50 or less, a Plasticity Index (PI) of 30 or less, a minimum of 30% of
the material passing a No. 200 mesh sieve, and be essentially free of particles
in excess of 4 inches in their longest direction.
• Provide a minimum of 12 inches of select fill on top of the re-worked fill, but
only within the confines of the building perimeter. Select fill should have a
Liquid Limit (LL) of less than 40 and a Plasticity Index (PI) between 6 and 18.
The select fill should be placed in maximum 8-inch loose lifts, compacted to
at least 95 percent of the maximum density as determined by the Standard
Moisture Density Relationship test (ASTM D698), and should be placed at a
moisture content that is at least the optimum moisture content, as determined
by that same test. Select fill may be used in lieu of on-site or imported grade-
raise fill to bring the entire pad to grade.
• In the instance that competent weathered limestone is encountered directly

beneath the grade beams, we recommend about 1 to 2 inches of leveling sand
on top of the limestone bedrock to act as a cushion/bond breaker. This will
avoid constraint to shrinkage of the concrete that leads to random cracking.
Any over breakage greater than 6-inches in depth should be filled with lean
concrete, prior to placement of the levelling sand to achieve a level surface.
• The moisture content of the subgrade should be maintained up to the time of

concrete placement. Depending on the speed of the earthwork layers, on hot
or windy days, sprinkling with water atop the subgrade may be required, to
maintain the compaction moisture content.
• Water should not be allowed to pond on the prepared subgrade either during
fill placement, or after reaching final subgrade elevation. To that end, the
subgrade surfaces should be shaped to shed water to the edges of the
respective pads.
13
Northlake, Texas
G23-2009
• Place a minimum 15-mil thick vapor barrier beneath all floor slabs (Stego or
equivalent). All seams and penetrations through the barrier should be sealed
in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.
• Each lift of fill placed should be tested for moisture content and degree of
compaction by a testing laboratory at the rate of one test per 3,000 square
feet, with a minimum of three tests performed per lift within the building pad,
one (1) test per 10,000 square feet in paved areas, one (1) test per lift per 100
linear feet in sidewalk areas, and one (1) test lift per 100 linear feet of utility
trench backfill. D&S would be pleased to provide these services in support of
this project.
7.3 Additional Considerations

In order to further minimize the potential for post-construction vertical movement,
consideration should be given to the following:
• Trees or shrubbery with a mature height greater than 6 feet and/or that require
excessive amounts of water should not be planted near structures or flatwork.
• Trees should not be planted closer than the mature tree’s height from structure
foundations.
• The grade should slope away from the foundation to the maximum amount
possible, preferably at a minimum of five (5) percent within the first 10 feet of the
foundation’s perimeter.
• Water should not be allowed to pond next to foundations. Rainfall roof runoff
should be collected and conveyed to downspouts. Downspouts should be
directed to discharge at least 5 feet away from the foundation.
• The moisture content of exposed subgrade soils that are within proximity to at-
grade foundations should be maintained as close as possible to a consistent level
throughout the year. However, we strongly recommend that excessive watering
near foundations be avoided.
• Where practical, pavements, sidewalks, or other flatwork may be constructed
adjacent to foundations to serve as horizontal moisture control elements to help
control subgrade moisture variations near foundations or soils-supported floor
slabs.
8.0 PAVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS
8.1 General
The pavement design recommendations provided here are derived from the subgrade
information that was obtained from our geotechnical investigation, from design
assumptions based on project information provided by the design team, our
experience with similar projects in this area, and on the guidelines and
14
Northlake, Texas
G23-2009
recommendations of the American Concrete Pavement Association (ACPA).

However, it is ultimately the responsibility of the Civil Engineer of Record and/or other
design professionals who are responsible for pavement design to provide the final
pavement design and associated specifications for this project.
8.2 Behavior Characteristics of Expansive Soils Beneath Pavement

Near-surface soils at this site are considered to be moderately to highly expansive in
nature and have the potential for appreciable volume change with changes in soil
moisture content. The moisture content can be stabilized to some degree in these
soils by covering them with an impermeable surface, such as pavement. However, if
moisture is introduced by surface or subsurface water, poor drainage, or the addition
of excessive irrigation after periods of no moisture, or if moisture is removed by
desiccation from vegetation (especially trees), the soils can swell or shrink causing
distress to pavements in contact with the soil in the form of cracks.
The edges of pavement and sidewalks are particularly prone to moisture variations,
so these areas therefore often experience the most distress (cracking, displacement,
etc.). When cracks appear on the surface of the pavement, these openings can allow
moisture to enter the pavement subgrade, which can lead to further weakening of the
pavement section as well as accelerated failure of the pavement surface.
In order to minimize the potential impacts of expansive soil on paved areas and to
improve the long-term performance of the pavement, we have the following
recommendations:
• Subgrade treatments should be extended to at least 2 feet beyond the back of

curbs or edges of pavements.
• Avoid long areas of low-sloping roadway and adjust slopes to provide maximum
drainage away from pavement edges.
8.3 Subgrade Strength Characteristics

The anticipated subgrade soils in the proposed paving areas will generally consist of
clay soils. We recommend that a California Bearing Ratio (CBR) value of 3 be used
in the design with a corresponding resilient modulus of 4,100 psi. For compacted lime
treated subgrade or aggregate base we recommend using a resilient modulus of
20,000 psi.
8.4 Pavement Subgrade Preparation Recommendations

The anticipated subgrade soils in the proposed paving areas will consist of fat clay
and lean clay soils. These soils can become weak with appreciable increases in
moisture content. A commonly used method for clay soils to improve the strength
properties of the subgrade soils, provide a working platform, and provide a uniform
subgrade is to treat them with lime. For the anticipated subgrade soils lime treatment
15
Northlake, Texas
G23-2009
or an aggregate base layer should be used beneath pavements. To that end, we have
the following recommendations:
• Remove all surface vegetation, including tree root balls and root mats, and
similar unsuitable materials from within the limits of the project. We anticipate a
typical stripping depth of about 6 inches.
• Perform any cut operations as-needed. We anticipate that excavation of

overburden soils can be accomplished with conventional earthwork equipment
and methods.
• After stripping and performing necessary cuts, the exposed subgrade should be
proof rolled. Proof rolling should consist of rolling the entire pavement subgrade
in mutually perpendicular directions with a heavily-loaded, tandem-axle dump
truck weighing at least 20 tons or other approved equipment capable of applying
similar loading conditions. Any soft, wet or weak soils that are observed to rut
or pump excessively during proof rolling should be removed and replaced with
well-compacted, on-site clayey material as outlined below. The proof rolling
operation should be performed under the observation of a qualified geotechnical
engineer. D&S would welcome the opportunity to perform these services for this
project.
• In areas to receive fill, fill may be derived from on-site or may be imported. The
fill should be placed in maximum 8-inch compacted lifts, compacted to at least
95 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by ASTM D698
(standard Proctor), and placed at a moisture content that is at or above the
optimum moisture content, as determined by the same test. Prior to compaction,
each lift of fill should first be processed throughout its thickness to break up and
reduce clod sizes and blended to achieve a material of uniform density and
moisture content. Once blended, compaction should be performed with a heavy
tamping foot roller. Once compacted, if the surface of the embankment is too
smooth, it may not bond properly with the succeeding layer. If this occurs, the
surface of the compacted lift should be roughened and loosened by dicing
before the succeeding layer is placed.
• Water required to bring the fill material to the proper moisture content should be
applied evenly through each layer. Any layers that become significantly altered
by weather conditions should be reprocessed in order to meet recommended
requirements. On hot or windy days, the use of water spraying methods may be
required in order to keep each lift moist prior to placement of the subsequent
lift. Furthermore, the subsurface soils should be kept moist prior to placing the
pavement by water sprinkling or spraying methods.
• Fill materials should be placed on a properly prepared subgrade as outlined

above. The combined excavation, placement, and spreading operation should
16
Northlake, Texas
G23-2009
be performed in such a manner as to obtain blending of the material, and to

assure that, once compacted, the materials, will have the most practicable
degree of compaction and stability. Materials obtained from on-site should be
mixed and not segregated.
• Soil imported from off-site sources should be tested for compliance with the
recommendations herein and approved by the project geotechnical engineer
prior to being used as fill. Imported materials should consist of lean clays
(maximum Plasticity Index of 30) that are essentially free of organic materials
and particles larger than 4 inches in their maximum dimension.
8.4.1 Lime Treatment

Once the subgrade is prepared, we have the following recommendations for
lime treatment of the subgrade:
• After completion of proof rolling and placement of any grade raise fills,
mix lime slurry into the prepared subgrade soil after scarifying to a depth
of at least 8 inches to achieve a treated subgrade with a minimum of 6
percent lime by dry weight measure (about 48 pounds of lime per square
yard of treated area). However, the final amount of lime used should be
determined once subgrade preparation is nearly complete. The amount
of lime used should be sufficient to reduce the Plasticity Index of the soil
to 15 or below (Atterberg Lime series) or to increase pH of the soil-lime
mixture to 12.4 (pH series). To account for error, an additional 1 to 2
percent lime should be added to these test quantities. The hydrated lime
should be applied only in an area where the initial mixing operations can
be completed the same working day. The area of lime treated subgrade
should extend a minimum of 2 feet beyond the back of roadway curbs or
edges.
• The material and hydrated lime should be thoroughly mixed to obtain a

homogeneous, friable mixture free of clods or lumps larger than about
the size of a golf ball. After initial mixing, roll the mixed material with a
suitable type and size of equipment in order to somewhat “seal-in”
moisture and to minimize moisture loss. The rolled subgrade should be
left to cure from one to four days. During the curing period, the material
should be kept moist. To that end, in no case should the subgrade surface
be allowed to dry for more than 12 hours between instances of surface
moistening / wetting.
• After the curing period, the subgrade should be thoroughly re-mixed to a

depth of 8 inches until the following gradational characteristics are
achieved (after the removal of non-slaking particles such as limestone,
concrete and/or asphalt fragments):
17
Northlake, Texas
G23-2009
o Minimum passing 1-3/4 inch sieve = 100%

o Minimum passing no. 4 sieve = 60%
After achieving the required gradation, the treated soil-lime mixture should
then be immediately compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum dry
density, as determined by ASTM D698 (standard Proctor), and placed at a
moisture content that is above the optimum moisture content, as determined
by the same test.
8.4.2 Aggregate Base

As an alternative to lime treatment, a six (6) inch thick layer aggregate base
may be placed over the prepared subgrade in accordance with the following
recommendations prior to placing the pavement.
▪ Aggregate base, should be TxDOT Type A or D and meeting the

gradation, durability, and plasticity requirements of TxDOT Item 247
Grade 1-2 or better (2014). Aggregate base material should be
uniformly compacted to a minimum of 95% of the maximum standard
Proctor dry density (ASTM D698) and placed at a moisture content
that is sufficient to achieve density.
▪ After proof rolling, and prior to the placement of aggregate base, the
exposed subgrade beneath pavement areas should be scarified and
reworked to a depth of 12 inches, moisture added or removed as
required, and the subgrade soils recompacted to a minimum of 95
percent of the maximum dry density of the materials obtained in
accordance with ASTM D698 (standard Proctor test) and that is at or
above the material’s optimum moisture content, as determined by the
same test. The rework and aggregate base should extend to at least
24-inches beyond the outside edges of curbs.
▪ Field density and moisture content testing should be performed at the

rate of one test per 10,000 square feet in pavement areas.
8.5 Rigid Pavement

We recommend that Portland Cement Concrete Pavement for this site have a
minimum thickness of 5 inches for light duty automobile parking over 6-inches of
aggregate base or lime treatment. Concrete thickness should be increased to
7-inches for fire lanes, heavy-duty traffic areas (bus lanes), dumpster pads and
service areas, over 8-inches of aggregate base or lime treatment as described above.
Actual traffic loading, frequency and intensity may require an increase in these
minimum recommendations, as may local governing design criteria. The more
stringent of the recommendations in this report or the design criteria for the governing
agency should be followed.
18
Northlake, Texas
G23-2009
• Recommended minimum design compressive strength: 3,500 psi with nominal

aggregate size no greater than 1 inch.
• 15 to 20 percent flyash may be used with the approval of the Civil Engineer of
record
• Curing compound should be applied within one hour of finishing operations.
8.6 Pavement Joints and Cutting

The performance of concrete pavement depends to a large degree on the design,
construction, and long-term maintenance of concrete joints. The following
recommendations and observations are offered for consideration by the Civil
Engineer and/or pavement Designer-of-Record.
The concrete pavements should have adequately-spaced contraction joints to control

shrinkage cracking. Past experience indicates that reinforced concrete pavements
with sealed contraction joints on a 12 to 15-foot spacing, cut to a depth of one-quarter
to one-third of the pavement thickness, have generally exhibited less uncontrolled
post-construction cracking than pavements with wider spacing. The contraction joint
pattern should divide the pavement into panels that are approximately square where
the panel length should not exceed 25 percent more than the panel width. Saw cut,
post placement formed contraction joints should be saw cut as soon as the concrete
can support the saw cutting equipment and personnel and before shrinkage cracks
appear, on the order of 4 to 6 hours after concrete placement.
Isolation joints should be used wherever the pavement will abut a structural element
subject to a different magnitude of movement, e.g., light poles, retaining walls, existing
pavement, stairways, entryway piers, building walls, or manholes.
In order to minimize the potential differential movement across the pavement areas,
all joints including contraction, isolation and construction joints should be sealed to
minimize the potential for infiltration of surface water. Rubberized asphalt, silicone or
other suitable flexible sealant may be used to seal the joints. Maintenance should
include periodic inspection of these joints and resealed as necessary.
8.7 Pavement Reinforcing Steel

We recommend that a minimum of 0.1 percent of steel be used for all concrete
pavements. For 5- to 7-inch thick concrete pavement section, this reinforcement ratio
is approximately equivalent to No. 3 bars spaced at 18-inches on-center.
Reinforcement requirements may increase depending on specific traffic loading and
design life parameters.
9.0 CORROSION POTENTIAL
Laboratory tests to assess soil corrosion potential were performed on a selected soil
sample from Borings B6 & B9. These tests include pH, chloride ion, electrical resistivity,
19
Northlake, Texas
G23-2009
redox potential, and sulfides. Soluble sulfate tests were performed for samples recovered
at this site. All samples were selected to be representative of the various subsurface
material types at and above utility line depths. A summary of the corrosion suite of the
range of test results is provided in Table 4.
Table 4. Soil Corrosion Potential/Chemical Parameters

Chloride Soluble Redox Electrical
Boring, Depth Sulfides
pH Ion Sulfates Potential Resistivity
(ft) (ppm)
(ppm) (ppm) (mV) (Ohm-cm)
B6 (2 - 4) 8.9 <0.127 120 <134 208 6,292
B9 (0 - 2) 8.4 4.93 640 <134 212 2,431
The susceptibility of buried concrete elements to chemical attack is generally evaluated

on the basis of soil pH and water-soluble sulfate content. The pH levels (above pH = 6)
indicate a negligible potential for the attack of buried concrete due to an acidic
environment. Sulfate ions can react adversely with the hydrated lime and hydrated calcium
aluminate in cement paste to form calcium sulfate and calcium sulfoaluminate, which can
be accompanied by considerable expansion and disruption of the paste matrix within the
porous concrete. A concentration of soluble sulfates less than 1,000 ppm (mg/kg) is
considered to be negligible with regard to exposure of buried concrete to sulfate attack.
In general, the aggressiveness of sulfate soils on buried concrete can be evaluated by
comparison with values summarized In Table 5. The measured soluble sulfate
concentrations of up to 640 ppm indicate a low susceptibility for concrete degradation and
no special requirement for cement type is recommended.
Table 5. Recommendations for protection of concrete from sulfate

Severity of Sulfate in Soil, Maximum Water
Type of Cement
Exposure ppm Cement Ratio
No special requirement for
Low 0 - 1,000 0.53
sulfate resistance
Moderate 1,000 to 2,000 0.5 Type II
High 2,000 to 20,000 0.45 Type V
Type V plus pozzolan or

Very High 20,000 or greater 0.4
slag
The soil pH, resistivity, and chloride content are important in the evaluation of possible
corrosion of buried steel elements and reinforcing steel embedded in concrete exposed to
these soils. In general, the aggressiveness of soils on buried steel can be evaluated by
comparison with values summarized as follows:
20
Northlake, Texas
G23-2009
Table 6. Potential for Chemical Attack of Buried Steel Elements

Soil Resistivity, Soluble Chlorides in Corrosion
Soil pH
ohm-cm Soil, ppm Potential
0 - 1,000 > 500 0 - 4.5 Very High
1,000 - 2,000 > 500 4.5 - 5.5 High
2,000 - 5,000 < 500 5.5 - 6.5 Moderate
> 5,000 < 500 > 6.5 Mild
Each of the columns in this table should be used independently of the others when
evaluating corrosion potential. (For example, it is not necessary to have a soil resistivity
between 0 and 1,000 ohm-cm and a pH between 0 and 4.5 to indicate a very high potential
for corrosion of steel).
In summary, the results of the soil chemistry corrosivity tests obtained to date indicate a
low potential for corrosion of buried concrete and a mild to moderate potential for corrosion
of buried steel. Corrosivity tests on additional soil samples can be performed (if needed)
for a more comprehensive evaluation of soil corrosion potential.
10.0 OTHER CONSTRUCTION
10.1 Utility and Service Lines

To reduce the potential for post-construction vertical movement due to soil moisture
changes, we recommend capping existing soil moistures beneath wet utility flowlines
by placing a minimum 15-mil vapor barrier across the bottoms of utility trench
excavations, followed by placement of a minimum 4-inch thick layer of flowable fill or
lean concrete (e.g., 1 to 2 sack mix) over the barrier to form the cap at the bottom of
the trench. Standard trench widths should be adequate with this procedure. The
edges of the vapor barrier should extend up sufficiently to allow wrapping of the
bedding material and the pipe after installation and prior to backfilling the trench with
compacted soil. We anticipate that dry to dry-of-average soils will be present along
the trench bottoms. These materials should be undercut 12-inches and reworked and
recompacted to between 95% of ASTM D698 (Standard Proctor) and to a moisture
content that is at least two percentage points above the optimum (≥+2%).
Backfill above utility lines should consist of on-site material and should be placed in
accordance with the following recommendations. The on-site fill soil should be placed
in maximum 8-inch compacted lifts, be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of the
maximum dry density, as determined by ASTM D698 (standard Proctor), and placed
at a moisture content that is at least two percentage points above the optimum, as
determined by that same test (≥+2%). It is not uncommon to realize some settlement
along the trench backfill. We also recommend that the utility trenches be visually
inspected during the excavation process to ensure that undesirable fill that was not
21
Northlake, Texas
G23-2009
detected by the test borings does not exist at the site. This office should be notified
immediately if any such fill is detected.
Utility lines intersecting to the structure may experience differential movement in

response to changing moisture conditions in expansive soil. These movements may
result in damage to the lines. Provisions should be included to accommodate potential
movements, including the moisture capping described above. Oversized penetration
sleeves or other suitable methods may also be considered to account for potential
differential movement between the building and utilities. Alternatively, utilities should
extend below structural elements when crossing to enter the structure footprint.
Utility excavations should be sloped so that water within excavations will flow to a low
point away from the active construction where it can be removed before backfilling.
Compaction of bedding material should not be water-jetted. Compacted backfill above
the utilities should be on-site clays to limit the percolation of surface water. Utility
trenches extending under structures should include fat clay or concrete cut-off collars
at the perimeter/edge to prevent the transmission of water along trench lines.
10.2 Exterior Flatwork

In areas where exterior flatwork for entryways, and other walkway areas are planned,
provisions should be made for potential post-construction upward movement (PVM)
of adjacent flatwork. We recommend that all access and entry slabs to the building
be similarly prepared to the structure floor slab. To prevent tripping hazards, the entry
slabs should be noticeably elevated above the adjacent ground supported sidewalks
and pavement slabs.
Consideration may be given to improving the subgrade beneath the ground supported
sidewalks and similar flatwork. The preferred option would be to provide a lime treated
subgrade similar to the parking and drive areas as described in the section entitled
“Pavement Recommendations”. This would improve the strength properties of the
subgrade soils, provide a working platform, and provide a more uniform subgrade.
As an alternative to treating the subgrade soils beneath flatwork with lime, a 6-inch
layer of crushed limestone may be placed atop the subgrade soils.
Concrete flatwork should include high tensile steel reinforcement to reduce the
formation and size of cracks. Flatwork should also include frequent and regularly
spaced expansion/control joints and dowels to limit vertical offsets between
neighboring flatwork slabs. Structure entrances should either be part of the structure
or designed to tolerate vertical movement without inhibiting access. The moisture
content of the subgrade should be maintained up to the time of concrete placement.
If subgrade soils are allowed to dry below the levels recommended herein, additional
moisture conditioning of the soils will be required. D&S should confirm the moisture
content of the subgrade before concrete placement. These recommendations are
intended to reduce possible distress to exterior flatwork, but will not prevent
movement and/or vertical offsets between slabs.
22
Northlake, Texas
G23-2009
10.3 Surface Drainage

Proper drainage is critical to the performance and condition of the building foundation,
pavements and flatwork. Positive surface drainage should be provided that directs
surface water away from the building, pavements and flatwork. Where possible, we
recommend that the exterior grades slope away from foundations at the rate of five
(5) percent in the first five (5), and preferably ten (10) feet away. The slopes should
direct water away from the structure, and these grades should be maintained
throughout construction and the life of the structure.
The location of gutter downspouts, and other features, should be designed such that
these items will not create moisture concentrations at or beneath the structure or
flatwork. Downspouts should discharge well away from the structure, and should not
be allowed to erode surface soil.
The potential for moisture-induced structure distress can be positively addressed by

constructing continuous exterior flatwork that extends to the building line. Where this
occurs, the joints created at the interface of the flatwork and building line should be
sealed with a flexible joint sealer to prevent the infiltration of water. Open cracks that
may develop in the flatwork should also be sealed. The joint and any cracks that
develop should be resealed as they become apparent, and should be part of a
periodic inspection and maintenance program.
However, we understand that sidewalks are not always practical or desired around
the full perimeters of some facilities. Where landscaping will be present adjacent to
building perimeters, diligent post-construction maintenance should be employed to
prevent excessive wetting or drying of those adjacent soils.
10.4 Landscaping
Landscaping against and around the exterior of the structure can adversely affect
subgrade moisture resulting in localized differential movements if not properly
maintained. If used, landscaping should be kept as far away from the foundation as
possible, and positive drainage away from the structure should be designed,
constructed, and maintained. Landscaping elements (such as edging) should not
prohibit or slow the drainage of water that could result in water ponding next to
foundations or edges of flatwork. When feasible, irrigation lines and heads should
not be placed in close proximity to the foundation to prevent the collection of water
near the foundation or flatwork, particularly in the event of leaking lines or sprinkler
heads.
Trees (if planned) should not be placed in proximity to the structure or movement
sensitive flatwork, as trees are known to cause in localized soil shrinkage due to
desiccation of the soil by the root system, possibly leading to differential movements
of the structure. The desiccation zone varies by tree, but trees should not be planted
closer to structures than the mature tree height, and in no case, should the drip-line
23
Northlake, Texas
G23-2009
of the mature tree extend closer than 10-feet of rooflines. A moist but not overly wet
soil condition should be maintained at all times in all landscaped areas near the
building after construction to minimize soil volume changes caused by changing soil
moisture conditions.
10.5 Site Grading

Expansive clay cut and fill slopes should be gentle and preferably should not exceed
4 horizontals to 1 vertical (4H: 1V).
Excess water ponding on and beside roadways, sidewalks, and ground-supported

slabs can cause unacceptable heave of these structures. To reduce this potential
heave, good surface drainage should be established. In addition, final grades in the
vicinity of structures, pavements, and flatwork should provide for positive drainage
away from these elements.
10.6 Excavations
Excavations into limestone/shale bedrock during site grading, utility and foundation
construction may require the use of special construction equipment to facilitate. Such
heavy equipment should be of a sufficient size and weight to excavate through the
hard layers to reach the desired bearing stratum. Excavators equipped with rock-
buckets may be adequate for smaller areas or narrower trenches. Larger excavations
in the area have utilized large dozer equipment outfitted with a single-tooth ripper to
loosen the rock; however, where natural rock joints, fractures and other mass defects
are present, this method can result in large over-breakage. Wheel-cutters or hoe-ram
equipment types are sometimes used to facilitate neat cuts where over-breakage is
a concern. Other types of excavation equipment may safely and efficiently produce
an equal or better result.
Excavations greater than 5 feet in height/depth should be in accordance with OSHA

29CFR 1926, Subpart P. Temporary construction slopes should incorporate
excavation protection systems or should be sloped back. Where the excavation does
not extend close to building lines, these areas may be laid back. Where space allows,
temporary slopes should be sloped at 1 horizontal to 1 vertical (1H:1V) or flatter.
Excavations in weathered limestone or shale can often be excavated as steep as ½
to ¾ H:1V, whereas the fresh gray limestone can often be excavated near vertical.
The contractor’s competent person should verify in situ conditions as the excavation
proceeds.
Where excavation slopes greater than five (5) feet in height cannot be laid back, these
areas will require installation of a temporary retention system or shoring to protect the
existing construction, restrain the subsurface soils and maintain the integrity of the
excavation. We recommend that monitoring points be established around the
retention system and that these locations be monitored during and after the
excavation activities to confirm the integrity of the retention system.
24
Northlake, Texas
G23-2009
The slopes and temporary retention system should be verified by and designed by
the contractor's engineer and should not be surcharged by traffic, construction
equipment, or permanent structures. The slopes and temporary retention system
should be adequately maintained and periodically inspected to ensure the safety of
the excavation and surrounding property.
11.0 SEISMIC CONSIDERATION
North Texas is generally regarded as an area of low seismic activity. There does
not appear to be a significant hazard from slope instability, liquefaction, or subsurface
rupture due to faulting or lateral spreading that would occur during earthquake motion.
The 2018 International Building Code (IBC) requires certain geotechnical seismic design
criteria to aid the Structural Engineer in their analysis to develop an appropriate structure
design to accommodate earthquake loading. The Spectral Acceleration values were
determined using publicly available information from the United States Geological Survey
(USGS). Seismic Site Class was determined using ASCE 7-16 Table 20.3-1 based on
the average blow counts and unconfined compressive strength in the top 100 feet. The
other information below was determined using USGS US Seismic Design Maps based
on 2012/2018 IBC. The criteria pertaining to this classification are shown in Table 7
below:
Table 7. Seismic Design Parameters
Design Parameters Values

Site Class C
Spectral Acceleration for 0.2 sec Period, Ss (g) 0.115
Spectral Acceleration for 1.0 sec Period, S1 (g) 0.056
Site Coefficient for 0.2 sec Period, Fa 1.2
Site Coefficient for 1.0 sec Period, Fv 1.7
12.0 LIMITATIONS
The professional geotechnical engineering services performed for this project, the findings
obtained, and the recommendations prepared were accomplished in accordance with
currently accepted geotechnical engineering principles and practices.
Variations in the subsurface conditions are noted at the specific boring locations for this
study. As such, all users of this report should be aware that differences in depths and
thicknesses of strata encountered can vary between the boring locations. Statements in
the report as to subsurface conditions across the site are extrapolated from the data
obtained at the specific boring locations. The number and spacing of the exploration
borings were chosen by others to obtain geotechnical information for the design and
construction of a lightly to moderately loaded institutional structure foundation. If there are
25
Northlake, Texas
G23-2009
any conditions differing significantly from those described herein, D&S should be notified
to re-evaluate the recommendations contained in this report.
Recommendations contained herein are not considered applicable for an indefinite period
of time. Our office must be contacted to re-evaluate the contents of this report if
construction does not begin within a one-year period after completion of this report.
The scope of services provided herein does not include an environmental assessment of
the site or investigation for the presence or absence of hazardous materials in the soil,
surface water, or groundwater.
All contractors referring to this geotechnical report should draw their own conclusions
regarding excavations, construction, etc. for bidding purposes. D&S is not responsible for
conclusions, opinions or recommendations made by others based on these data. The
report is intended to guide preparation of project specifications and should not be used as
a substitute for the project specifications.
Recommendations provided in this report are based on our understanding of information
provided by the Client to us regarding the scope of work for this project. If the Client notes
any differences, our office should be contacted immediately since this may materially alter
the recommendations.
26
APPENDIX A - BORING LOGS AND SUPPORTING DATA
**BORING LOCATIONS ARE INTENDED FOR GRAPHICAL REFERENCE ONLY**
PLAN OF BORINGS SHEET NO.

N.T.S.
ARGYLE ISD ES#5 (HARVEST SCHOOL SITE)
G1
DATE DRILLED
NORTHLAKE TEXAS March 15-28, 2022

**BORING LOCATIONS ARE INTENDED FOR GRAPHICAL REFERENCE ONLY**
PLAN OF BORINGS SHEET NO.

N.T.S.
ARGYLE ISD ES#5 (HARVEST SCHOOL SITE)
G2
DATE DRILLED
NORTHLAKE TEXAS March 15-28, 2022

KEY TO SYMBOLS AND TERMS
LITHOLOGIC SYMBOLS CONSISTENCY OF SOILS

CONSISTENCY: FINE GRAINED SOILS
Asphalt PP (tsf)
Consistency SPT (blowcounts)
Very Soft 0-2 < 0.25
Soft 3-4 0.25 - 0.5
ARTIFICIAL
Aggregate Base Medium Stiff 5-8 0.5 - 1.0

Stiff 9 - 15 1.0 - 2.0
Very Stiff 16 - 30 2.0 - 4.0
Concrete Hard > 30 > 4.0
CONDITION OF SOILS
Fill CONDITION: COARSE GRAINED SOILS
Condition SPT (blowcounts) TCP (values) Relative Density (%)
Very Loose 0-4 <8 0 - 15
CH: High Plasticity Clay Loose 5 - 10 8 - 20 15 - 35
Medium Dense 11 - 30 20 - 80 35 - 65
Dense 31 - 50 80 - 5 in./100 65 - 85
CL: Low Plasticity Clay Very Dense > 50 0 in. - 5 in./100 85 - 100
SECONDARY COMPONENTS
GP: Poorly-graded Gravel QUANTITY DESCRIPTORS
Trace < 5% of sample
Few 5% to 10%
SOIL
GW: Well-graded Gravel Little 10% to 25%

Some 25% to 35%
With > 35%
SC: Clayey Sand
RELATIVE HARDNESS OF ROCK MASS
Designation Description
SP: Poorly-graded Sand Very Soft Can be carved with a knife. Can be excavated readily with
point of pick. Pieces 1" or more in thickness can be broken
by finger pressure. Readily scratched with fingernail.
Soft Can be gouged or grooved readily with knife or pick point.
SW: Well-graded Sand Can be excavated in chips to pieces several inches in size
by moderate blows with the pick point. Small, thin pieces
can be broken by finger pressure.
Medium Hard Can be grooved or gouged 1/4" deep by firm pressure on
Limestone knife or pick point. Can be excavated in small chips to
pieces about 1" maximum size by hard blows with the point
of a pick.
Moderately Hard Can be scratched with knife or pick. Gouges or grooves 1/4"
Mudstone deep can be excavated by hard blow of the point of a pick.
Hand specimens can be detached by a moderate blow.
Hard Can be scratched with knife or pick only with difficulty.
Hard blow of hammer required to detach a hand specimen.
Shale
Very Hard Cannot be scratched with knife or sharp pick. Breaking of hand
specimens requires several hard blows from a hammer or pick.
ROCK
Sandstone WEATHERING OF ROCK MASS

Designation Description
Fresh No visible sign of weathering
Weathered Limestone Slightly weathered Penetrative weathering on open discontinuity surfaces,
but only slight weathering of rock material
Moderately weathered Weathering extends throughout rock mass, but the rock
material is not friable
Weathered Shale Highly weathered Weathering extends throughout rock mass, and the rock
material is partly friable
Completely weathered Rock is wholly decomposed and in a friable condition but
the rock texture and structure are preserved
Weathered Sandstone Residual Soil A soil material with the original texture, structure, and
mineralogy of the rock completely destroyed

3

"9

!
9

" ,-)'.$/'',01/' %2

! ,-)'.$/'',01/'%2
"9

! 9

" ,-)'.$/'',01/' %2

! ,-)'.$/'',01/'%2
56/-7#$%&'%-%2
/(%4)++$,-)

8%2#$%&'()$%*++$,-)

#$%&'%-%2/(%4)++$,-)

#$%&'()$%*++$,-)

BORING LOG B1
PAGE 1 OF 2
PROJECT: Argyle ISD ES#5 (Harvest School Site) LOCATION: Northlake, TX

CLIENT: Argyle ISD GPS COORDINATES: N33.121668, W97.236713
PROJECT NUMBER: G23-2009 GROUND ELEVATION: Approx. 746 feet
START DATE: 3/17/2023 FINISH DATE: 3/17/2023 DRILL METHOD: Air Rotary
LOGGED BY: Jeremy Manzala (D&S) DRILLED BY: Kraatz Drilling
Hand Legend:
S-Shelby Tube Atterberg Limits
Pen. (tsf) REC Passing
N-Standard Penetration Total
Depth Sample or Graphic
T-Texas Cone Penetration
(%) MC #200
Suction
Clay Swell DUW Unconf.
Compr.
(ft) Type SPT Log RQD (%) LL PL Sieve (%) (%) (pcf) Str (ksf)
C-Core PI (pF)
or (%) (%) (%) (%)
B-Bag Sample
0 TCP - Water Encountered
SANDY LEAN CLAY (CL); very stiff; 20.9 68
S 4.0 dark brown, brown, light brown; some
calcareous nodules and gravel;
occasional weathered limestone
seams 15.3 44 15 29 1.2 117.2
S 4.0
S NR
5 5.0 ft
T 50=1.5",
LIMESTONE; slightly weathered; soft 741.0 ft
50=1.0"
to hard; tan; frequent clay seams;
intermittent gray limestone layers;
argillaceous
58
C
23
10 10.0 ft
T 50=0.5",
50=0.5" LIMESTONE; fresh; medium hard to 736.0 ft
very hard; gray; intermittent shale
layers
55
C
0
15
T 50=0.5",
50=0.25"
94
C
0
20
T 50=0.25",
50=0.25"
14
C
0
25
T 50=1.25",
50=1.25"
50
C
20
30 30.0 ft
T 50=0.75",
50=0.75" SHALE; fresh; medium hard to hard; 716.0 ft
dark gray
87
C
27
35
BORING LOG B1
PAGE 2 OF 2

Hand Legend:
(%) MC #200
Suction
Compr.
C-Core PI (pF)
or (%) (%) (%) (%)
B-Bag Sample
T 50=0.75", SHALE; fresh; medium hard to hard;
50=0.5" dark gray
64
C
7
40
T 50=0.75",
50=0.25"
42
C
0
45 45.1 ft
T 50=0.5",
50=0.5" End of boring at 45.1' 700.9 ft
Notes:
-seepage at 14 feet during drilling
-dry upon completion
50
55
60
65
70
BORING LOG B2
PAGE 1 OF 1

LOGGED BY: Ismael Hernandez (D&S) DRILLED BY: Kraatz Drilling
Hand Legend:
(%) MC #200
Suction
Compr.
C-Core PI (pF)
or (%) (%) (%) (%)
B-Bag Sample
FAT CLAY WITH SAND (CH); stiff; 15.3 60 17 43 82 0.3 117.3
S 2.5 light brown, tan; few to little calcareous
nodules
5 5.0 ft
T 50=2.0",
LIMESTONE; slightly to moderately 741.0 ft
50=0.5"
weathered; tan; soft to medium hard;
argillacious
43
C
0
10 10.0 ft
T 50=0.5",
50=0.25" LIMESTONE; fresh; hard; gray; 736.0 ft
occasional ferrous laminations
80
C
7
15
T 50=0.5",
50=0.25"
78
C
0
20 20.0 ft
T 50=1.5",
SHALE; fresh; medium hard to hard; 726.0 ft 16.8 120.7 11.9
50=1.0"
dark gray
81
C
55
25
T 50=1.0",
50=1.0"
83
C
13
30 30.2 ft
T 50=1.0",
Notes:
-water at 28 feet upon completion
-Shelby Tube refusal at 2 feet
35
BORING LOG B3
PAGE 1 OF 1

Hand Legend:
(%) MC #200
Suction
Compr.
C-Core PI (pF)
or (%) (%) (%) (%)
B-Bag Sample
FAT CLAY WITH SAND (CH); very 20.9 80
S 4.0 stiff; brown; trace calcareous nodules
2.0 ft
LEAN CLAY (CL); very stiff; light 744.0 ft 24.2 33 12 21 0.8 100.8
S 4.5+ brown; some calcareous nodules
S 4.5+
5 5.0 ft
T 50=1.5",
50=1.0"
weathered; soft to medium hard; tan;
argillaceous
62
C
14
10
T 50=1.0",
50=0.5"
39
C
0
15 15.0 ft
T 50=0.25",
intermittent shale layers
83
C
0
20 20.0 ft
T 50=1.5",
SHALE; fresh; medium hard to hard; 726.0 ft
50=1.25"
dark gray
33
C
7
14.7 120.2 12.7

25
T 50=1.0",
50=0.75"
74
C
10
30 30.1 ft
T 50=1.0",
Notes:
-water at 20 feet after 24 hours of
completion
35
BORING LOG B4
PAGE 1 OF 2

Hand Legend:
(%) MC #200
Suction
Compr.
C-Core PI (pF)
or (%) (%) (%) (%)
B-Bag Sample
FAT CLAY WITH SAND (CH); soft;
S 0.75 dark brown
33.5
32.8 77 16 61 0.1 92.2
S 1.0
32.4 83
5 1.0
S
6.0 ft
LEAN CLAY (CL); very stiff to hard; 738.0 ft
S 4.5+ light brown; trace to few calcareous
nodules 13.1 42 12 30 112.3 1.4
S 4.5+ 14.4
10 B 10.0 ft
T 50=2.0", LIMESTONE; slightly to moderately 734.0 ft
50=1.0" weathered; soft to hard; tan;
argillaceous
61
C
0
15 15.0 ft
T 50=0.5",
50=0.5" LIMESTONE; fresh; hard; gray 729.0 ft
70
C
0
20 20.0 ft
T 50=3.0", SHALE; fresh; medium hard to hard; 724.0 ft
50=2.5" 17.4
dark gray
83
C
42
25
T 50=1.0",
50=1.0"
44
C
21
30
T 50=0.75",
50=0.75"
58
C
23
35
BORING LOG B4
PAGE 2 OF 2

Hand Legend:
(%) MC #200
Suction
Compr.
C-Core PI (pF)
or (%) (%) (%) (%)
B-Bag Sample
T 50=0.75", SHALE; fresh; medium hard to hard; 13.3 122.7 12.7
50=0.5" dark gray
63
C
48
40
T 50=0.75",
50=0.25"
53
C
7
45 45.1 ft
T 50=0.75",
Notes:
-seepage at 12.5 feet during drilling
50
55
60
65
70
BORING LOG B5
PAGE 1 OF 1

Hand Legend:
(%) MC #200
Suction
Compr.
C-Core PI (pF)
or (%) (%) (%) (%)
B-Bag Sample
SANDY FAT CLAY (CH); stiff to very 28.7 75 17 58 0.3 92.2
S 2.75 stiff; dark brown, brown
24.6 53
S 4.25
4.0 ft
LEAN CLAY (CL); very stiff to hard; 738.0 ft 15.6 116.3 4.6
5 4.5+ light brown; some calcareous nodules
S
and deposits
6.0 ft
argillcaeous
54
C
0
10
T 50=0.5",
50=0.25"
63
C
0
7.8 131.6
15 15.0 ft
T 50=0.25",
intermittent shale seams
63
C
0
20 20.0 ft
T 50=2.0", SHALE; fresh; medium hard; dark 722.0 ft
50=1.0" gray
36
C
20
25
T 50=1.5",
50=1.25"
63
C
32
30 30.1 ft
T 50=1.0",
Notes:
35
BORING LOG B6
PAGE 1 OF 1

Hand Legend:
(%) MC #200
Suction
Compr.
C-Core PI (pF)
or (%) (%) (%) (%)
B-Bag Sample
FAT CLAY (CH); stiff; dark brown 28.3 70 23 47 90 0.9 92.6
S 3.0
2.0 ft
LEAN CLAY (CL); very stiff; light 740.0 ft
S 4.5 brown, tan
S 4.0
5 5.0 ft
50=1.5" weathered; soft to medium hard; tan;
argillaceous
55
C
0
10
T 50=0.75",
50=0.5"
12.5 ft 43
C
LIMESTONE; fresh; hard; gray 729.5 ft 0
15
T 50=0.25",
50=0.25"
59
C 18.0 ft 7
SHALE; fresh; medium hard to hard; 724.0 ft
dark gray
20
T 50=1.5",
50=1.25"
83 15.7 128.2
C
51
25
T 50=2.0",
50=1.0"
57
C
22
30 30.1 ft
T 50=1.0",
Notes:
35
BORING LOG B7
PAGE 1 OF 2

Hand Legend:
(%) MC #200
Suction
Compr.
C-Core PI (pF)
or (%) (%) (%) (%)
B-Bag Sample
FAT CLAY WITH SAND (CH); stiff; 30.2 68 17 51 74 0.5 93.1
S 3.0 dark brown
2.0 ft
LEAN CLAY (CL); very stiff to hard; 742.0 ft 15.8 118.9 3.3
S 4.5+ light brown; trace to few calcareous
nodules
5 B 5.0 ft
argillaceous
37
C
0
10
T 50=0.75",
50=0.5"
70
C
0
15 15.0 ft
T 50=0.25",
68
C
7
20 20.0 ft
T 50=2.5", SHALE; fresh; medium hard to hard; 724.0 ft
50=1.5" dark gray
15
C
0
25
T 50=2.0",
50=1.25" 14.5 122.5 12.3
75
C
24
30
T 50=1.5",
50=1.0"
93
C
16
35
BORING LOG B7
PAGE 2 OF 2

Hand Legend:
(%) MC #200
Suction
Compr.
C-Core PI (pF)
or (%) (%) (%) (%)
B-Bag Sample
T 50=1.75", SHALE; fresh; medium hard to hard; 12.3 123.6 31.9
50=1.25" dark gray
93
C
47
40
T 50=1.0",
50=1.0"
18
C
0
45 45.1 ft
T 50=0.5",
Notes:
50
55
60
65
70
BORING LOG B8
PAGE 1 OF 2

Hand Legend:
(%) MC #200
Suction
Compr.
C-Core PI (pF)
or (%) (%) (%) (%)
B-Bag Sample
FILL: FAT CLAY (CH); soft; dark 48.6
S 1.5 brown; trace to few calcareous
nodules and gravel
26.5 70 15 55 0.7 92.6

S 1.0
4.0 ft
SANDY FAT CLAY (CL); very stiff to 738.0 ft 30.6 92.5 3.0
5 3.0 hard; dark brown, light brown; trace to
S
few calcareous nodules
14.8 59 15 44
S 4.5+
S 2.5 15.7
10 B 10.0 ft
T 50=0.5",
50=0.5" LIMESTONE; slightly to moderately 732.0 ft
weathered; soft to hard; tan;
argillaceous
60
C
0
15 15.0 ft
T 50=0.25",
74
C
0
20 20.0 ft
T 50=3.0", SHALE; fresh; medium hard; dark 722.0 ft
50=2.5" gray
15
C
0
25
T 50=1.0",
50=0.5"
13
C
0
30
T 50=1.5",
50=1.25"
0
C
0
35
BORING LOG B8
PAGE 2 OF 2

Hand Legend:
(%) MC #200
Suction
Compr.
C-Core PI (pF)
or (%) (%) (%) (%)
B-Bag Sample
T 50=1.25", SHALE; fresh; medium hard; dark
50=1.0" gray
53
C
17
13.5 122.6
40
T 50=0.75",
50=0.25"
6
C
0
45 45.1 ft
T 50=0.5",
Notes:
50
55
60
65
70
BORING LOG B9
PAGE 1 OF 1

Hand Legend:
(%) MC #200
Suction
Compr.
C-Core PI (pF)
or (%) (%) (%) (%)
B-Bag Sample
FAT CLAY/FAT CLAY WITH SAND
S 4.5+ (CH); very stiff to hard; dark brown;
light brown; trace to few calcareous
nodules
17.9 55 13 42 85 0.3 112.2
S 4.5+
S 4.5+
5 5.0 ft
T 50=1.0",
argillaceous
44
C
0
10 10.0 ft
T 50=0.25",
occasional shale seams
53
C
0
15
T 50=0.75",
50=0.25"
72
C
0
20 20.0 ft
T 50=1.0",
50=0.5" SHALE; fresh; medium hard to hard; 724.0 ft
dark gray
48
C
0
25
23
C
0
30 30.0 ft
End of boring at 30.0' 714.0 ft
Notes:
-dry during drilling
35
BORING LOG B10
PAGE 1 OF 2

Hand Legend:
(%) MC #200
Suction
Compr.
C-Core PI (pF)
or (%) (%) (%) (%)
B-Bag Sample
FAT CLAY WITH SAND (CH); stiff; 19.8 83
S 3.0 dark brown
2.0 ft
LEAN CLAY (CL); stiff to very stiff; 740.0 ft 17.2 45 11 34 0.2 112.3
S 4.25 light brown, brown; trace to few
calcareous nodules
S 2.5
5 5.0 ft
T 50=1.5",
50=1.0"
argillaceous
45
C
0
10
T 50=0.5",
50=0.5"
53
C 13.0 ft 0
LIMESTONE; fresh; hard; gray 729.0 ft
15
T 50=0.5",
50=0.25"
17.0 ft
SHALE; fresh; medium hard to hard; 725.0 ft 45
C
dark gray 0
20
T 50=2.0",
50=1.5" 18.7 112.2
58
C
38
25
T 50=2.0",
50=1.25"
72
C
7
30
T 50=2.0",
50=1.0"
92
C
86
35
BORING LOG B10
PAGE 2 OF 2

Hand Legend:
(%) MC #200
Suction
Compr.
C-Core PI (pF)
or (%) (%) (%) (%)
B-Bag Sample
T 50=1.25", SHALE; fresh; medium hard to hard;
50=0.75" dark gray
80
C
53
40
T 50=0.75",
50=0.25"
83
C
48
45 45.1 ft
T 50=0.5",
Notes:
50
55
60
65
70
BORING LOG P1
PAGE 1 OF 1

Hand Legend:
(%) MC #200
Suction
Compr.
C-Core PI (pF)
or (%) (%) (%) (%)
B-Bag Sample
FAT CLAY WITH SAND (CH); stiff; 28.9 51 22 29
S 1.75 dark brown; trace calcareous nodules
27.0 78
S 1.5
4.0 ft
LEAN CLAY (CL); very stiff; light 742.0 ft 28.7
5 4.5+ brown; trace calcareous nodules and
S
deposits and ferrous nodules;
occasional weathered limestone
S 4.5+ seams 7.0 ft
B occasional clay seams; argillaceous
10 10.1 ft
T 50=0.5",
Notes:
15
20
25
30
35
BORING LOG P2
PAGE 1 OF 1

Hand Legend:
(%) MC #200
Suction
Compr.
C-Core PI (pF)
or (%) (%) (%) (%)
B-Bag Sample
FAT CLAY WITH SAND (CH); stiff to 19.6 75
S 1.5 very stiff; brown, dark brown; trace
calcareous nodules; trace weathered
limestone fragments
26.5 75 25 50
S 4.25
S 4.5+ 20.3
5 5.0 ft
T 50=0.5",
weathered; hard; tan; argillaceous
10 10.1 ft
T 50=0.25",
Notes:
15
20
25
30
35
BORING LOG P3
PAGE 1 OF 1

Hand Legend:
(%) MC #200
Suction
Compr.
C-Core PI (pF)
or (%) (%) (%) (%)
B-Bag Sample
FAT CLAY WITH SAND/SANDY FAT 28.0
S 2.0 CLAY (CH); stiff; dark brown; few to
little calcareous nodules; trace ferrous
nodules; occasional weathered
limestone seams 22.4 68 30 38 70
S 4.5
4.5+ 13.2
5 S
5.5 ft
argillaceous
B
10 10.1 ft
T 50=0.25",
Notes:
-Shelby Tube refusal at 5.5 feet
15
20
25
30
35
BORING LOG P4
PAGE 1 OF 1

Hand Legend:
(%) MC #200
Suction
Compr.
C-Core PI (pF)
or (%) (%) (%) (%)
B-Bag Sample
SANDY FAT CLAY (CH); stiff to very 29.1 66 27 39
S 3.25 stiff; brown, dark brown, light brown;
some calcareous nodules; trace
ferrous nodules
17.8 68
S 3.25
4.0 ft
B LIMESTONE; slightly to moderately 742.0 ft
5 weathered; soft to hard; tan;
T 50=3.0", argillaceous
50=2.0"
10 10.1 ft
T 50=0.75",
Notes:
15
20
25
30
35
BORING LOG P5
PAGE 1 OF 1

Hand Legend:
(%) MC #200
Suction
Compr.
C-Core PI (pF)
or (%) (%) (%) (%)
B-Bag Sample
FAT CLAY (CH); very stiff; brown, 31.3 52 21 31
S 4.5+ light brown; some calcareous nodules;
trace weathered limestone fragments
2.0 ft
B argillaceous
5
T 50=1.0",
50=0.5"
10 10.1 ft
T 50=1.0",
Notes:
15
20
25
30
35
BORING LOG P6
PAGE 1 OF 1

Hand Legend:
(%) MC #200
Suction
Compr.
C-Core PI (pF)
or (%) (%) (%) (%)
B-Bag Sample
B FILL: AGGREGATE BASE
1.0 ft
LEAN CLAY (CL); very stiff; dark 745.0 ft 29.0
S 2.5 brown, brown, light brown; trace
ferrous nodules; some calcareous 16.1 47 20 27
nodules; occasional weathered
limestone seams
S 3.5
24.2
5
S 4.5+
7.0 ft
B argillaceous
10 10.2 ft
T 50=1.5",
Notes:
15
20
25
30
35
BORING LOG P7
PAGE 1 OF 1

Hand Legend:
(%) MC #200
Suction
Compr.
C-Core PI (pF)
or (%) (%) (%) (%)
B-Bag Sample
FILL: AGGREGATE BASE with clay
B and sand
2.0 ft
FAT CLAY WITH SAND (CH); stiff; 738.0 ft 27.7
S 2.25 dark brown; trace calcareous nodules
35.6 61 22 39 84
5 1.5
S
31.5
S 2.0
8.0 ft
LEAN CLAY (CL); very stiff; light 732.0 ft
S 4.5+ brown; some calcareous nodules
10 10.0 ft
End of boring at 10.0' 730.0 ft
Notes:
15
20
25
30
35
BORING LOG P8
PAGE 1 OF 1

Hand Legend:
(%) MC #200
Suction
Compr.
C-Core PI (pF)
or (%) (%) (%) (%)
B-Bag Sample
LEAN CLAY (CL); stiff to very stiff; 15.3
S 2.0 light brown; trace ferrous nodules; few
to little calcareous nodules and
deposits; few to little weathered
limestone fragments 19.6 31 16 15
S 3.5
S 4.5+ 13.3
5 5.0 ft
T 50=2.0", LIMESTONE; highly to slightly 739.0 ft
S 4.5+ argillaceous
10 10.2 ft
T 50=1.75",
Notes:
15
20
25
30
35
UNCONFINED COMPRESSION TEST
PROJECT: Argyle ISD ES#5 (Harvest School Site) CLIENT: Argyle ISD
PROJECT NUMBER: G23-2009 LOCATION: Northlake, TX
90
80
70
60
50
STRESS (psi)
40
30
20
10
0
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
STRAIN, %
Borehole Depth Description MC%

B2 20.0 SHALE; dark gray 120.7 16.8
90
80
70
60
50
STRESS (psi)
40
30
20
10
0
0 0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6
STRAIN, %

11
10
6
STRESS (psi)
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
STRAIN, %

B4 7.0 LEAN CLAY (CL); light brown 112.3 13.1
90
80
70
60
50
STRESS (psi)
40
30
20
10
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6
STRAIN, %

35
30
25
20
STRESS (psi)
15
10
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
STRAIN, %

B5 4.0 LEAN CLAY (CL); light brown, tan 116.3 15.6
24
22
20
18
16
14
STRESS (psi)
12
10
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
STRAIN, %

B7 2.0 LEAN CLAY (CL); light brown 118.9 15.8
90
80
70
60
50
STRESS (psi)
40
30
20
10
0
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
STRAIN, %

240
220
200
180
160
140
STRESS (psi)
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
STRAIN, %

22
20
18
16
14
12
STRESS (psi)
10
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
STRAIN, %

B8 4.0 SANDY FAT CLAY (CH); dark brown, light brown, tan 92.5 30.6
SWELL TEST RESULTS
Boring Depth Initial Moisture Final Moisture Applied Pressure, Vertical Swell, %
Number feet Content, % Content, % psf
B1 2-3 15.3 18.3 263 1.2

B2 0-1 15.3 17.6 260 0.3
B3 2-3 24.2 25.7 263 0.8
B4 2-3 32.8 32.9 263 0.1
B5 0-1 28.7 30.5 127 0.3
B6 0-1 28.3 30.8 126 0.9
B7 0-1 30.2 32.0 129 0.5
B8 2-3 26.5 31.9 259 0.7
B9 2-3 17.9 18.4 260 0.3
B10 2-3 17.2 17.7 259 0.2
SOLUBLE SULFATE CONTENT RESULTS
TEX 145-E
PROJECT: Argyle ISD ES#5 (Harvest School Site) PROJECT NUMBER: G23-2009
CLIENT: Argyle ISD LOCATION: Northlake, TX
Soluble Sulfate
Boring Number: Depth (feet): Soil Description
Content (ppm)
P1 0-1 FAT CLAY WITH SAND (CH); dark brown 100
P2 0-1 FAT CLAY WITH SAND (CH); brown, dark brown 120
P3 0-1 FAT CLAY WITH SAND/SANDY FAT CLAY (CH); dark brown 120
P4 0-1 SANDY FAT CLAY (CH); brown, dark brown, light brown 100
P5 0-1 FAT CLAY (CH); brown, light brown 100
P6 1-2 LEAN CLAY (CL); dark brown, brown, light brown 140
P7 2-3 FAT CLAY WITH SAND (CH); dark brown 160
P8 0-1 LEAN CLAY (CL); light brown 600
APPENDIX B - GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PROCEDURES
ANALYTICAL METHODS TO PREDICT MOVEMENT
CLASSIFICATION TESTS
Classification testing is perhaps the most basic, yet fundamental tool available for predicting
potential movements of clay soils. Classification testing typically consists of moisture content,
Atterberg Limits, and Grain-size distribution determinations. From these results a general
assessment of a soil’s propensity for volume change with changes in soil moisture content can
be made.
Moisture Content
By studying the moisture content of the soils at varying depths and comparing them with the
results of Atterberg Limits, one can estimate a rough order of magnitude of potential soil
movement at various moisture contents, as well as movements with moisture changes. These
tests are typically performed in accordance with ASTM D2216.
Atterberg Limits
Atterberg limits determine the liquid limit (LL), plastic limit (PL), and plasticity index (PI) of a soil.
The liquid limit is the moisture content at which a soil begins to behave as a viscous fluid. The
plastic limit is the moisture content at which a soil becomes workable like putty, and at which a
clay soil begins to crumble when rolled into a thin thread (1/8” diameter). The PI is the numerical
difference between the moisture constants at the liquid limit and the plastic limit. This test is
typically performed in accordance with ASTM D4318.
Clay mineralogy and the particle size influence the Atterberg Limits values, with certain minerals
(e.g., montmorillonite) and smaller particle sizes having higher PI values, and therefore higher
movement potential.
A soil with a PI below about 15 to 18 is considered to be generally stable and should not
experience significant movement with changes in moisture content. Soils with a PI above about
30 to 35 are considered to be highly active and may exhibit considerable movement with changes
in moisture content.
Fat clays with very high liquid limits, weakly cemented sandy clays, or silty clays are examples of
soils in which it can be difficult to predict movement from classification testing alone.
Grain-size Distribution
The simplest grain-size distribution test involves washing a soil specimen over the No. 200 mesh
sieve with an opening size of 0.075 mm (ASTM D1140). This particle size has been defined by
the engineering community as the demarcation between coarse-grained and fine-grained soils.
Particles smaller than this size can be further distinguished between silt-size and clay-size
particles by use of a Hydrometer test (ASTM D422). A more complete grain-size distribution test
that uses sieves to relative amount of particles according is the Sieve Gradation Analysis of Soils
(ASTM D6913). Once the characteristics of the soil are determined through classification testing,
a number of movement prediction techniques are available to predict the potential movement of
the soils. Some of these are discussed in general below.
TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION METHOD 124-E
The Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) has developed a generally simplistic method
to predict movements for highways based on the plasticity index of the soil. The TxDOT method
is empirical and is based on the Atterberg limits and moisture content of the subsurface soil. This
method generally assumes three different initial moisture conditions: dry, “as-is”, and wet.
Computation of each over an assumed depth of seasonal moisture variation (usually about 15
feet or less) provides an estimate of potential movement at each initial condition. This method
requires a number of additional assumptions to develop a potential movement estimate. As such,
the predicted movements generally possess large uncertainties when applied to the analysis of
conditions under building slabs and foundations. In our opinion, estimates derived by this method
should not be used alone in determination of potential movement.
SWELL TESTS
Swell tests can lead to more accurate site-specific predictions of potential vertical movement by
measuring actual swell volumes at in situ initial moisture contents. One-dimensional swell tests
are almost always performed for this measurement. Though swell is a three-dimensional process,
the one-dimensional test provides greatly improved potential vertical movement estimates than
other methods alone, particularly when the results are “weighted” with respect to depth, putting
more emphasis on the swell characteristics closer to the surface and less on values at depth.
POTENTIAL VERTICAL MOVEMENT
A general index for movement is known as the Potential Vertical Rise (PVR). The actual term
PVR refers to the TxDOT Method 124-E mentioned above. For the purpose of this report the term
Potential Vertical Movement (PVM) will be used since PVM estimates are derived using multiple
analytical techniques, not just TxDOT methods.
It should be noted that all slabs and foundations constructed on clay or clayey soils have at least
some risk of potential vertical movement due to changes in soil moisture contents. To eliminate
that risk, slabs, and foundation elements (e.g., grade beams) should be designed as structural
elements physically separated by some distance from the subgrade soils (usually 6 to 12 inches).
In some cases, a floor slab with movements as little as 1/4 of an inch may result in damage to
interior walls, such as cracking in sheet rock or masonry walls, or separation of floor tiles.
However, these cracks are often minor, and most people consider them 'livable'. In other cases,
movement of one inch may cause significant damage, inconvenience, or even create a hazard
(trip hazard or others).
Vertical movement of clay soils under slab on grade foundations due to soil moisture changes
can result from a variety of causes, including poor site grading and drainage, improperly prepared
subgrade, trees, and large shrubbery located too close to structures, utility leaks or breaks, poor
subgrade maintenance such as inadequate or excessive irrigation, or other causes. A sampling
of more common moisture control procedures to reduce the potential for movement due to these
causes is presented in Appendix B.
PVM is generally considered to be a measurement of the change in height of a foundation from
the elevation it was originally placed. Experience and generally accepted practice suggest that if
the PVM of a site is less than one inch, the associated differential movement will be minor and
acceptable to most people.
SETTLEMENT
Settlement is a measure of a downward movement due to consolidation of soil. This can occur
from improperly placed fill (uncompacted or under-compacted), loose native soil, or from large
amounts of unconfined sandy material. Properly compacted fill may settle approximately 1 percent
of its depth, particularly when fill depths exceed 10 feet.
SPECIAL COMMENTARY ON CONCRETE AND EARTHWORK
RESTRAINT TO SHRINKAGE CRACKS

One of the characteristics of concrete is that during the curing process shrinkage occurs and if
there are any restraints to prevent the concrete from shrinking, cracks can form. In a typical slab
on grade or structurally suspended foundation there will be cracks due to interior beams and piers
that restrict shrinkage. This restriction is called Restraint to Shrinkage (RTS). In post tensioned
slabs, the post tensioning strands are slack when installed and must be stressed at a later time.
The best procedure is to stress the cables approximately 30 percent within one to two days of
placing the concrete. Then the cables are stressed fully when the concrete reaches greater
strength, usually in 7 days. During this time before the cables are stressed fully, the concrete may
crack more than conventionally reinforced slabs. When the cables are stressed, some of the
cracks will pull together. These RTS cracks do not normally adversely affect the overall
performance of the foundation. It should be noted that for exposed floors, especially those that
will be painted, stained, or stamped, these cracks may be aesthetically unacceptable. Any tile
which is applied directly to concrete or over a mortar bed over concrete has a high probability of
minor cracks occurring in the tile due to RTS. It is recommended if tile is used to install expansion
joints in appropriate locations to minimize these cracks.
UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION

Trench excavation for utilities should be sloped or braced in the interest of safety. Attention is
drawn to OSHA Safety and Health Standards (29 CFR 1926/1910), Subpart P, regarding trench
excavations greater than 5 feet in depth.
FIELD SUPERVISION AND DENSITY TESTING

Construction observation and testing by a field technician under the direction of a licensed
geotechnical engineer should be provided. Some adjustments in the test frequencies may be
required based upon the general fill types and soil conditions at the time of fill placement.
We recommend that all site and subgrade preparation, proofrolling, and pavement construction
be monitored by a qualified engineering firm. D&S would be pleased to provide these services in
support of this project. Density tests should be performed to verify proper compaction and
moisture content of any earthwork. Inspection should be performed prior to and during concrete
placement operations.
14805 Trinity Boulevard, Fort Worth, Texas 76155
Geotechnical 817.529.8464 Corporate 903.420.0014
www.dsenglabs.com
Texas Engineering Firm Registration # F‐12796
Oklahoma Engineering Firm Certificate of Authorization CA 7181
DOCUMENT 00 41 00
PROPOSAL FORM
SUBMITTED BY: _________________________________________________________
(Name of Proposer)
_________________________________________________________
(Address)
Dear Sir:
Undersigned, having examined Drawings, Project Manual, related documents, and site of
proposed work, and being familiar with all of conditions surrounding work, including availability
of materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, and equipment required
for:
Argyle Elementary School No. 4 for Argyle Independent School District, Argyle, Texas, in
accordance with Drawings and Project Manual prepared by Corgan Associates, Inc., for the
lump sum BASE PROPOSAL amount of:
BASE PROPOSAL Dollars ($ ).
NOTE: Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, amount
shown in words shall govern. Above amount does not include State of Texas
Sales Tax and Renovation Tax.
PROPOSED CONTRACT TIME (calendar days)______________________________________
Undersigned affirms that above stipulated base proposal sum represents entire cost in
accordance with Drawings, Project Manual, and Addenda and that no claim will be made on
account of any increase in wage scales, material prices, taxes, insurance, cost indexes, or any
other rates affecting construction industry or this project.
Undersigned proposer agrees that this proposal shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a
period of 45 calendar days after scheduled closing time for receiving proposals.
Undersigned proposer understands that the Owner reserves right to reject any or all proposals
and to waive any informalities in proposal.
The successful proposer's proposal security will be retained until the contract has been
executed and payment and performance bonds have been executed and delivered. The Owner
reserves the right to retain the security of the next two lowest proposers until the lowest
proposer enters into contract or until 60 days after proposal opening, whichever comes first. All
other proposal securities will be returned as soon as practicable.
If written notice of acceptance of this proposal is received within 45 days after date designated
for opening of proposals, undersigned, within 10 days of receipt of the Contract, will sign and
deliver to the Owner the Contract required Performance Bond, Labor and Material Payment
Bond, Certificate of Insurance, and insurance policies required by the Contract Documents.
Proposal Form 00 41 00 - 1
Should undersigned fail to deliver signed Contract or required bonds and insurance policies
within 10-day period, the Owner reserves right to terminate relationship.
ALLOWANCES
Proposer is required to include all Allowances Scheduled within Section 01 21 00 Allowances

within the base proposal amount.
TIME OF COMPLETION
Undersigned agrees to commence work under this Contract within 10 days of receipt of written
Notice to Proceed from the Owner, and to Substantially Complete entire work as stipulated by
the Contract.
ADDENDA
Undersigned hereby acknowledges receipt of following Addenda to Drawings and Project

Manual, all of provisions and requirements of which addenda have been taken into
consideration in preparation of this proposal.
Addendum No. Dated ________________
PROPOSAL SECURITY
Proposal Security must accompany this Proposal. Security shall be made payable to Argyle
Independent School District in amount of five percent of total Proposal Sum. Security shall be
by certified check, cashier's check, or acceptable proposal bond by surety licensed to do
business in Texas. Enclosed with this proposal is required proposal security in Sum of:
Dollars ($ ).
Date: Signed
Title
Name of Firm
Organized as a: (Mark one)
Proprietorship
Partnership
Corporation
Under the law of the State of:
Legal Address:
(Date)
Telephone No. __________________________
If Proposal is by a corporation, affix seal above address.
END OF DOCUMENT
DOCUMENT 00 43 13
PROPOSAL BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That we ______________________________

as Principal, and ______________________________________________________________
as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the Argyle Independent School District, hereinafter
called the Owner, in the penal sum of __________________________________ Dollars (
____________________), lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well
and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors,
jointly and several firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that whereas the Principal has submitted
the accompanying Bid, dated _____________________, 20 _____, being for the construction of
the Argyle Phase 03 High School - New Irrigation Well, with appurtenances thereto, the kind
and extent of work involved being set forth in detail in the proposed Contract Documents cited
herein.
NOW, THEREFORE if the Owner shall notify the Principal of the acceptance of the Bid of the
Principal within 30 days of the date of the submittal of the Bid, or such longer period as Owner
and principal may agree in writing, and if the Principal shall within 10 days of receipt of such
notification enter into a contract with the Owner in accordance with the bidding or Contract
Documents, including furnishing acceptable Performance and Payment Bonds each in the
amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the total contract sum, or in the event of failure of the
Principal to enter into such contract and submit such bonds within the specified time, if the
Principal shall pay to the Owner the difference between the aggregate amount specified in said
bid and the aggregate amount for which the Owner may in good faith enter into contract for the
same work with another bidder, then the above obligation shall be void and of no effect,
otherwise to remain in full force and effect.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above bounded parties have executed this instrument under their
several seals this ___________ day of ___________________ 20____, the name and
Corporate Seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed and these presents duly signed by
its undersigned representatives, pursuant to authority of its governing body.
_________________________________________
(Business Address) (Individual Principal)
_________________________________________
(Business Address) (Corporate Principal)
Proposal Bond 00 43 13 - 1
ATTEST:
_________________________________________
(Secretary) (President)
_________________________________________
(Surety Business Address) (Corporate Surety)
ATTEST: BY:
END OF DOCUMENT
Proposal Bond 00 43 13 - 2
SECTION 01 11 00
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Project; Work covered by Contract Documents.
2. Contracts.
3. Work by Owner.
4. Owner furnished Documents.
5. Owner furnished products.
6. Contractor use of site and premises.
7. Future work.
8. Work Sequence.
9. Owner occupancy.
1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Work of this Contract comprises general construction including architectural, civil,

plumbing, mechanical, and electrical of Argyle Elementary School No.4 for Argyle
Independent School District, Owner.
1.3 CONTRACT METHOD
A. Construct Work under single lump sum segregated contract. Project is tax exempt and
Contract will be executed with separate contract sums for materials and services to
comply with requirements of 1991 Texas House Bill 11.
B. Contract for this Project will be AIA A101 - Standard Form of Agreement Between
Owner and Contractor, 1997 Edition. Contract Form may be examined in office of
Architect.
C. Items noted "NIC" (Not in Contract) will be furnished and installed by Owner.
D. Owner will enter into separate contracts for furnishing and installation:
1. Project FF&E.
E. Assigned Contracts:
1. Employ subcontractors assigned by Owner for following: None to Date.
2. Relations and responsibilities between Contractor and assigned subcontractor
shall be identical to that between Contractor and subcontractors he has selected.
Summary of Work 01 11 00 - 1
1.4 OWNER FURNISHED DOCUMENTS
A. These documents are not part of the Contract Documents and are included by
reference only. Contract may include other Owner-Furnished Documents not herein
listed.
B. By offering a Proposal, Contractor accepts responsibility for conclusions drawn from

Owner-furnished documents. By executing the Agreement, Contractor accepts
responsibility for subsequent action taken based upon his conclusions.
C. These documents take precedence over the Contract Documents Specifications with
regard to existing above-ground and subsurface conditions.
D. Following are pending; Document are responsibility of Owner:

1. Soils report:
a. Compiled By:
b. Dated:
2. Legal Description:
a. Compiled By:
b. Dated:
3. Boundary Survey:
a. Compiled By:.
b. Dated:
4. Topographic Survey:
a. Compiled By:.
b. Dated:
1.5 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS
A. Products furnished and paid for by Owner for installation by Contractor, are described
in following specification Sections: [ described as follows: ]
1. [ Section _____ - __________. ]
2. [ Section _____ - __________. ]
3. [ Section _____ - __________. ]
B. Owner's Responsibilities:
1. Arrange for and deliver necessary shop drawings, product data and samples to
Contractor.
2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site.
3. On delivery, examine products jointly with Contractor.
4. Examine existing items to be relocated jointly with Contractor for proper quantity
and visible damage prior to commencing salvage operations.
5. Submit claims for transportation damage.
6. Arrange for replacement of damaged, defective, or missing items.
7. Arrange for manufacturer's warranties, bonds, service or inspections as required.
C. Contractor's Responsibilities:
1. Designate delivery dates for each product in Construction Schedule for Owner's
approval.
2. Review shop drawings, product data and samples; submit to Architect with
notification of discrepancies or problems anticipated in use of product.
3. Remove and store existing products to be reused.
4. Receive and unload products at site.
5. Examine products jointly with Owner for completeness and for damage.
6. Handle, store, install and finish products.
7. Protect items from damage or exposure to elements.
8. Repair or replace items damaged by Work of this Contract.
1.6 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE
A. Contractor shall have complete and exclusive use of immediate premises of Project
site.
B. Coordinate use of premises under direction of Architect and Owner. Contractor shall
be responsible for monitoring use of premises by employees and sub-contractors.
C. Access routes for delivery of materials and equipment shall be as indicated on

drawings. Do not use access routes other than those indicated without permission of
Architect.
D. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of products under this
Contract, stored on project site. Store materials and products only in those areas
indicated for staging.
E. Move stored products, under Contractor's control, which interfere with operations of
Owner or as required by Architect. Do not unnecessarily encumber project site with
materials and equipment.
F. Staging and material storage shall be limited to areas indicated by Architect. Obtain
specific permission from Architect for use of other areas for storage and staging.
G. Do not overload existing or new structures with weight that would compromise safety.
Verify design loads for structure if necessary prior to loading structure.
H. Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas needed for operations.
I. Protect existing lawns, sidewalks, pavements, curbs and utilities subject to damage by
work under this Contract. Repair or replace existing work damaged by Contractor.
Replace existing lawns damaged by Contractor's activities with sodded lawn seed to
provide full stand of replacement grass.
J. Parking areas for Contractor's personnel shall be as indicated by Architect and shall be
acceptable to Owner.
K. Obtain proper permits for concrete batch plants and rock crushing operations. Obtain
approval of Architect for location and access.
1.7 WORK SEQUENCE
A. Minimum disruption of operation and use of adjacent facilities and access to those
facilities is required. Cooperation with Owner to minimize inconvenience is essential.
B. Construct Work to minimize public inconvenience. Do not close off public use of
facilities until completion of one stage of construction will provide alternative usage.
C. Owner may require certain work to be performed after normal working hours or on
holidays or weekends.
1.8 PARTIAL OWNER OCCUPANCY
A. Schedule construction operations for completion of portions of Work, as designated, for

Owner's occupancy prior to Substantial Completion of entire Work.
B. Contractor agrees to use and occupancy of portion of Project by Owner prior to

Substantial Completion of entire Project.
C. Use and occupancy prior to Substantial Completion of entire Project does not relieve
Contractor of responsibility to maintain specified insurance coverage on 100 percent
basis for benefit of Owner, Contractor and subcontractors until Project is complete and
accepted by Owner.
D. After Owner occupancy, allow following:

1. Access for Owner's personnel.
2. Access for public.
3. Operation of heating, ventilating, air-conditioning and electrical systems.
4. Operation of elevator.
E. During partial occupancy, mutually acceptable arrangements shall be negotiated

between Owner and Contractor regarding warranties and insurance requirements
respecting portion of Work affected by partial occupancy and regarding operation and
cost of building services so that costs attributable to partial occupancy shall be borne
by Owner and costs attributable to performance of Work shall be borne by Contractor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS - ASBESTOS
A. Owner requires, under terms of this Contract, that products and materials used meet
the following requirements:
1. The Texas Administrative Code, Title 25, Part 1, Chapter 295, Subchapter C
Texas Asbestos Health Protection.
2. Contain not more than 1.0% of any kind or combination of asbestos, as

determined by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) recommended test
methods as listed in EPA/600R-93/116 July 1993 “Method for the Determination
of Asbestos in Bulk Building Materials”. This means one material component or a
structure or layer of a material sample. Composite sample analysis is not
allowed.
B. Contractor, by executing this Contract, accepts responsibility for prohibiting materials

or products containing asbestos from being used on this Project.
C. Should Contractor furnish, use, or install products or materials containing asbestos,

knowingly or otherwise, he has not met the requirements of this Contract.
D. Asbestos Survey: Provide an asbestos survey, meeting the same criteria as required
for new building permits, by an inspector licensed by the Texas Department of Health]
as required by the [Texas Administrative Code, Title 25, Part 1, Chapter 295,
Subchapter C Texas Asbestos Health Protection.
1. Preliminary Survey: Contractor shall submit preliminary survey of materials
installed at time of Substantial Completion with request for Substantial
Completion to the Architect.
2. Final Survey: Contractor shall submit revised survey reflecting materials install
after Substantial Completion to the Architect for transmittal to the Owner prior to
release of Retainage.
2.2 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS – MOLD
A. If mold is present on the inside of the building; determine source of moisture and correct
prior to performing the following:
1. Non-porous Surfaces: Mold growing on steel, aluminum or other non-porous
materials may be cleaned using methods recommended by an Environmental
Inspector licensed by the Texas Department of Health.
2. Porous Surfaces: Entire mold-contaminated surface must be removed and disposed
of using methods recommended by an Environmental Inspector licensed by the
Texas Department of Health.
3. Following elimination of mold provide a report prepared by an Environmental
Inspector licensed by the Texas Department of Health that the building is free from
mold contamination.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01 21 00
ALLOWANCES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Include in contract sum allowances stated in Contract Documents.
2. Designate in construction progress schedule delivery dates for Products
specified under each allowance.
3. Designate in Schedule of Values quantities of materials required under each unit
cost allowance.
1.2 ALLOWANCES FOR PRODUCTS
A. Amount of Each Allowance Includes:

1. Cost of Product to Contractor or subcontractor, less applicable trade discounts.
2. Delivery to site.
3. Labor required under allowance, except when labor is specified not to be
included in allowance.
B. In addition to amount of each allowance, include in contract sum Contractor's costs for:
1. Handling at site, including unloading, uncrating, and storage.
2. Protection from elements and from damage.
3. Labor for installation and finishing where labor is specified not to be a part of
allowance.
4. Other expenses required to complete installation.
5. Contractor’s and Subcontractor's overhead and profit.
1.3 SELECTION OF PRODUCTS UNDER ALLOWANCES
A. Architect's Duties:
1. Consult with Contractor in consideration of Products and suppliers or installers.
2. Make selection in consultation with Owner. Obtain Owner's written decision,
designating:
a. Product, model and finish.
b. Accessories and attachments.
c. Supplier and installer as applicable.
d. Cost to Contractor, delivered to site or installed, as applicable.
e. Manufacturer's Warranties.
3. Transmit Owner's decision to Contractor.
Allowances 01 21 00 - 1
4. Prepare Change Orders.
B. Contractor's Duties:
1. Assist Architect and Owner in determining qualified suppliers or installers.
2. Obtain proposals from suppliers and installers when requested by Architect.
3. Make appropriate recommendations for consideration of Architect.
4. Notify Architect promptly of:
a. Reasonable objections Contractor may have against supplier, or party
under consideration for installation.
b. Effect on Construction Schedule anticipated by selections under
consideration.
1.4 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY FOR PURCHASE, DELIVERY AND INSTALLATION
A. On notification of selection, execute purchase agreement with designated supplier.
B. Arrange for and process Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, as required.
C. Make arrangements for delivery.
D. Upon delivery, promptly inspect products for damage or defects.
E. Submit claims for transportation damage.
F. Install and finish products in compliance with requirements of referenced specification

sections.
1.5 ADJUSTMENT OF COSTS
A. Should net cost be more or less than specified amount of allowance, contract sum will
be adjusted accordingly by Change Order.
1. Amount of Change Order will recognize changes in handling costs at site, labor,
installation costs, overhead, profit, and other expenses caused by selection
under allowance.
2. For products specified under unit cost allowance, unit cost shall apply to quantity
listed in Schedule of Values.
3. For products specified under unit allowance, unit cost allowance shall apply to
quantities actually used with nominal amount for waste, as determined by
receipts, invoices or by field measurement.
B. Submit claims for anticipated additional costs at site, or other expenses caused by
selection under allowance, prior to execution of work.
C. Submit documentation for actual additional costs at site, or other expenses caused by
selection under allowance within 60 days after completion of execution of Work.
D. Failure to submit claims within designated time will constitute waiver of claims for
additional costs.
E. At contract closeout, reflect approved changes in contract amounts in final statement of

accounting.
1.6 CONSTRUCTION CONTINGENCY
A. Following shall apply to construction contingency allowance:

1. It shall be used only to cover cost of hidden, concealed or otherwise unforeseen
conditions that develop during project.
2. Work which is clearly change in scope shall be authorized and paid for only by
means of change order executed in accordance with established Owner
procedures.
3. Bidder shall include in his base bid on project his profit and overhead to cover
amount of contingency; as each contingency authorization is processed, it will
not include profit or overhead for Contractor.
4. Contractor shall proceed with accomplishing work only after receiving properly
executed contingency authorization executed by Owner.
5. Contractor shall not bill Owner for work authorized by this procedure until work
has been accomplished.
6. Balance of contingency allowance which is not used during construction of
project shall be returned to Owner.
7. At completion of project, Architect will reconcile work accomplished through
properly executed contingency allowance authorizations, and provide for refund
of unused portion of contingency to Owner through properly executed change
order.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES
A. Allow sum of $75,000.00 for Owner’s Construction Contingency Allowance.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01 23 00
ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work
defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base
bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the
amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment,
systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.
B. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the
Agreement.
C. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the
Contract Sum to incorporate alternates into the Work. No other adjustments are made
to the Contract Sum.
1.3 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely

integrate work of the alternate into Project.
1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and
similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not
indicated as part of alternate.
B. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
C. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification

Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to
achieve the work described under each alternate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Not Used.
Alternates 01 23 00 - 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. ALTERNATE 1: Provide open cell spray foam insulation in lieu of closed cell insulation
as specified in Section 07 21 19 - Foamed-in-Place Insulation.
B. ALTERNATE 2: Single source and warranty for exterior envelope system at metal
panel cladding.
1. Base Bid: Submit pricing based on Work of the following Sections, comprising
total wall assemblies:
a. 07 27 26 “Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barriers”
b. 07 21 00 “Thermal Insulation”
c. Metal panel types MP-1 and MP-2, including thermally-broken girt and
framing system specified Section 07 42 13.
2. Alternate: Submit alternate price for single source responsibility and warranty at
Work of MP-1 and MP-2 for total wall system including metal panels, air barrier,
mineral wool insulation and impaling pins, and girts/framing.
a. Air Barrier: Comply with requirements specified in Section 07 27 26 “Fluid
Applied Membrane Air Barriers” for STPE or silicone-based, vapor
permeable, fluid-applied air barrier with butyl tape at detailing such as
joints, transitions, changes in plane and materials, and related conditions.
b. Insulation: Comply with Section 07 21 00 “Thermal Insulation” for insulation
and related impaling pins and fasteners.
c. Girts: Thermally broken as specified in Section 07 42 13
d. Metal Panels: Custom, concealed fastener panels and trim, as specified in
Section 07 42 13.
END OF SECTION
Alternates 01 23 00 - 2
SECTION 01 25 00
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of

construction from those required by the Contract Documents, and proposed by
Contractor, prior to award of Contract.
1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due
to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory
changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.
2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that
are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer
advantage to Contractor or Owner.
B. Substitutions requested by Bidders during the bidding period, and accepted prior to
award of Contract, are considered as included in the Contract Documents, and are not
subject to requirements specified in this Section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Architect will consider only written requests from Contractor for
any substitution of products in place of those specified, using form provided at the end
of this Section.
1. Submit one PDF copy of each request for consideration. Identify product or
fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section
number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the
following, as applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation
cannot be provided, if applicable.
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and
separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed
substitution.
Substitution Procedures 01 25 00 - 1
c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with

those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable
Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as
performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design
characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements
indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and
fabrication and installation procedures.
e. Samples, where applicable or requested.
f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and
interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated.
i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for
Project, from ICC-ES or other applicable code organization.
j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the
overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction
cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from
manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of
purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.
k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract
Sum.
l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with
requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution
request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for
applications indicated.
m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may
subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed
substitution to produce indicated results.
3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for
substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of
proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of
receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.
a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or
Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a
proposed substitution within time allocated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed

substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to
perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.
1.5 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the

approved substitutions.
1.6 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION
A. In making formal request for substitution Contractor represents that:

1. He has investigated proposed product and has determined that it is equal to or
superior in respects to that specified.
2. He will provide same warranties or bonds for substitution as for product specified.
3. He will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into Work, and will make
such changes as may be required for Work to be complete.
4. He waives claims for additional costs caused by substitution which may
subsequently become apparent.
5. Cost data is complete and includes related costs under his Contract, but not
costs under separate contracts.
1.7 ARCHITECT DUTIES
A. Architect will determine acceptability of proposed substitutions.
B. Review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness.
C. Notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject requested substitution.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS, GENERAL
A. Properties including, but not limited to following, will be considered as applicable:

1. Physical dimension requirements to satisfy space limitations.
2. Static and dynamic weight limitations, structural properties.
3. Audible noise levels.
4. Vibration generation.
5. Interchangeability of parts or components.
6. Accessibility for maintenance, possible removal or replacement.
7. Colors, textures and compatibility with other materials, products, assemblies and
components.
8. Equipment capacities and performance characteristics.
B. Substitutions will not be considered for acceptance when:

1. They are indicated or implied on Shop Drawings, Product Data Submittals, or
Requests for Information (RFIs).
2. They are requested directly by subcontractor or supplier.
3. Acceptance would require substantial revisions to Contract Documents or

Contract time.
4. Additional cost to Owner is involved.
C. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance of

Architect. If proposed substitution is not accepted, provide specified product or
materials.
D. Burden of proof for merits of proposed substitute is upon proposer. Architect's decision
of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution will be final.
E. Review of Architect, acceptance or failure to take exceptions to substitutions or other

review documents, shall not relieve Contractor of his responsibility for compliance with
performance or other requirements of Contract Documents.
F. Contractor shall be responsible for and pay for any expenses incurred by Owner or
Architect for changes to Contract Documents ultimately required by accepted
Contractor requests for substitutions.
2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of

need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and
review of related submittals.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,
Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with
these requirements:
a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will
produce indicated results.
b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction
schedule.
d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities
having jurisdiction.
e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the
Work.
g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested
substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is
uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is
acceptable to all contractors involved.
B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if

received within 30 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received after
that time may be considered or rejected at sole discretion of Architect.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,
Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with
these requirements:
a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time,
energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional
responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities
may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation
services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar
considerations.
b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents.
c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will
produce indicated results.
d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction
schedule.
f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities
g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the
Work.
i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested
substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is
uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is
acceptable to all contractors involved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
To Architect:
Project
Name:
SPECIFIED ITEM:
Section Page Paragraph Description

The undersigned Contractor requests consideration of the following:
PROPOSED
SUBSTITUTION:
1. Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs,
performance
and test data adequate for evaluation of the request; applicable portions of the data
are clearly
identified, both on the proposed substitution and the original specified product.
2. Attached data also includes description of changes to Contract Documents, which
proposed
Substitution will require for its proper installation.
The undersigned Contractor states that the following paragraphs, unless modified on
attachments, are correct.
1. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions on Drawings.
2. The undersigned Contractor will pay for changes to the building design, including
architectural or engineering design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the
requested substitution.
3. The proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades, the construction
schedule, or specified warranty requirements.
4. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed substitution.
The Contractor further states that the function, appearance and quality of the
Proposed Substitution are equivalent or superior to the Specified Item. The
Contractor further warrants that the intent of specification section 01 25 00, Article 1.6
has been met.
1. Cost Reduction to the $
Owner:
ACCEPTANCES:
1. Contractor Acceptance: Representing:
Date
:
2. Owner Acceptance: Representing
Date
:
3. Architect Acceptance: Representing
Date Corgan
:
Accepted as Noted
Not Accepted
Received too late
Resubmit with complete information
SECTION 01 29 00
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Applications for Payment to Architect in accordance with schedule established by
Conditions of Contract, and Agreement Between Owner and Contractor.
2. Schedule of Values allocated to various portions of Work in accordance with
schedule established in this Section. Upon request of Architect, support values
with data which substantiate correctness.
3. Unit Prices.
4. Change Order Procedures.
1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Preparation:
1. Coordinate preparation of Schedule of Values with preparation of Construction
Progress Schedule.
2. Correlate line items in Schedule of Values with other required administrative
schedules and forms, including following:
a. Construction Progress Schedule, in CPM or bar chart format.
b. Application for Payment form.
c. List of subcontractors.
d. Schedule of alternates.
e. List of products.
f. List of principal suppliers and fabricators.
g. Schedule of submittals.
3. Submit initial Schedule of Values to Architect within 14 days of Notice to
Proceed.
4. Submit revised Schedule of Values at earliest possible date, but no later than
minimum of 20 days before scheduled date of Initial Application for Payment.
B. Form and Content:

1. Arrange Schedule of Values on 8-1/2" x 11" tabular form on white paper in format
acceptable to Architect.
2. Use bar chart or CPM chart as guide to establish format; compile information
based on completed tasks.
3. Project Identification:
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of Architect.
c. Project number.
Measurement and Payment 01 29 00 - 1

d. Contractor's name and address.

e. Date of submittal.
f. Owner's contract designation.
4. Provide columns to indicate following for each item listed:
a. Generic name.
b. Specific task description.
c. Change Orders numbers that have affected value.
d. Dollar value.
e. Percentage of Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to
total 100 percent.
5. Follow table of contents of Project Manual as format for listing component items;
identify each line item with number and title of respective major section of
specifications.
6. Provide breakdown of Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports.
7. Break principal subcontract amounts down into several line items by completed
task in various locations.
8. For each major line item, list sub-values of major products or operations under
item.
9. Round amounts off to nearest whole dollar, total of listed values shall equal total
Contract Sum.
10. For each part of Work where Application for Payment includes materials or
equipment purchased, fabricated, and stored, but not yet installed, include
separate line items on Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of Work.
C. Margins of Cost:
1. Show line items for indirect costs, and margins on actual costs, only to extent
that such items will be listed individually in Applications for Payment.
2. Each item in Schedule of Values and Application for Payment shall be complete,
including its total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit
margin.
3. At Contractor's option, temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not
direct costs of actual work-in-place may be shown as separate line items in
Schedule of Values.
4. Furnish line item cost for each of following general cost items:
a. Bonds.
b. Insurance.
c. Field supervision and layout.
d. Temporary facilities and controls.
e. Testing.
D. Resubmittal:
1. After review by Architect, revise and resubmit schedule as necessary.
2. Resubmit revised schedule monthly in same manner.
E. Subschedule of Unit Material Values:

1. Submit subschedule of unit costs and quantities for following:

a. Products on which progress payments will be requested for stored
products.
2. Form and Content:
a. Form of submittal shall parallel that of Schedule of Values, with each item
identified same as line item in Schedule of Values.
b. Unit quantity for bulk materials shall include an allowance for normal waste.
3. Unit values for materials shall be broken down as follows:
a. Cost of material, delivered and unloaded at Project Site, with taxes paid.
b. Installation costs, including overhead and profit.
4. Installed unit value multiplied by quantity listed shall equal cost of that item in
Schedule of Values.
5. After review by Architect, revise and resubmit subschedules as necessary.
6. Resubmit revised subschedules monthly in same manner.
1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Progress payments shall be made as Work proceeds at intervals stated in Contract.
B. Work covered by Progress Payments shall, at time of payment, become property of

Owner.
C. Form of Application for Payment will be notarized AIA Document G702 - Application
and Certification for Payment, supported by AIA Document G703 - Continuation Sheet,
submitted in quadruplicate.
D. Contractor shall submit to Architect within 15 days of execution of Owner -Contractor

Agreement proposed sample of Lien Waiver and Bills Paid Affidavit forms for review
and acceptance by Architect for use on this Contract.
E. Conditions governing regular schedule for applications, payment, and retainage are as
stated in Contract.
F. Monthly Applications for Payment shall include Waivers of Liens for Work included in
previous months' Application for Payment. Waiver of Liens for subcontractors and
materialmen shall be total amount paid prior to previous month's Application for
Payment.
G. With each Application for Payment, Contractor shall certify that such Application for
Payment represents just estimate of cost reimbursable to Contractor under terms of
Contract, and shall also certify that there are no Mechanics' or Materialmens' Liens
outstanding at date of Application for Payment, that due and payable bills with respect
to Work have been paid to date or shall be paid from proceeds of Application for
Payment, and that there is no known basis for filing of Mechanics' or Materialmens'
Liens against surety in connection with Work, and that Waivers and Bills Paid Affidavit
forms from subcontractors and materialmen have been, or will be, obtained in form
specified in Contract.
H. Preparation of Application:

1. Format and data required:

a. Submit itemized applications on AIA Document G702 - Application and
Certification for Payment Form, with AIA Document G703 Continuation
Forms.
b. Provide itemized data on continuation sheets with format, schedules, line
items, and values stipulated in Schedule of Values and acceptable to
Architect.
2. Application Form:
a. Fill in required information, including Change Orders executed prior to date
of submittal of applications.
b. Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with respective totals indicated on
continuation sheets.
c. Execute certification with signature of responsible officer of Contract firm.
3. Continuation Sheets:
a. Fill in total list of scheduled component items of Work with item number
and scheduled dollar value for each item.
b. Fill in dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when Work
has been performed or products stored.
c. Round off values to nearest dollar or as specified for Schedule of Values.
d. List each Change Order executed prior to date of submission at end of
continuation sheets.
e. List by Change Order number and description as for original component
item of Work.
I. Initial (First) Application for Payment:

1. Contractor to submit to Architect within 15 days of execution of Owner-Contractor
Agreement proposed sample of Lien Waiver and Bills Paid Affidavit forms for
review and acceptance by Owner for use on this Contract.
2. Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with
submittal of first Application for Payment include, but are not limited to, the
following:
3. List of subcontractors, with indications of MBE or WBE Owner firms.
a. List of principal suppliers and fabricators.
b. Schedule of Values.
c. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).
d. Submittal Schedule (preliminary if not final).
e. Copies of building permits.
f. Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for
performance of Work.
g. Initial progress report.
h. Report of Pre-Construction meeting.
i. Certificates of Insurance and insurance policies.
j. Additional items as required in General Conditions.
J. Typical Monthly Application for Payment:

1. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous Applications for
Payments reviewed by Architect and paid by Owner.
2. Review pencil copy of Application for Payment with Architect at last scheduled
job meeting each month, or at other agreeable time as can be scheduled.

3. Submit monthly Application for Payment on 15th day of each month.

4. Period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is period
ending 15 days prior to date for each progress payment and starting day
following end of proceeding period.
5. Work covered by Progress Payments shall, at time of payment, become property
of Owner.
6. Form of Application for Payment will be on specified forms, submitted in
quadruplicate.
7. Complete each entry on forms, including notarization and execution by person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor.
8. Incomplete Applications for Payment will be returned without action.
9. Entries shall match data of Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction
Schedule.
10. Use updated schedules if revisions have been made.
11. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued
prior to last day of construction period covered by application.
12. Transmit executed copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by means
ensuring receipt within 24 hours.
13. Transmit each copy with complete transmittal form listing attachments, and
recording appropriate information related to Application in acceptable manner.
14. Waiver of Liens:
a. With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanics liens from
each contractor, subcontractor and materialman who may be lawfully
entitled to file mechanics lien arising out of Contract, and related to Work
covered by payment application.
b. Submit waivers of lien on forms, and in manner, acceptable to Architect.
c. Waiver of liens shall be total paid prior to previous month's Application for
Payment.
15. With each Application for Payment, Contractor certifies the following:
a. Application for Payment represents just estimate of cost reimbursable to
Contractor under terms of Contract.
b. That there are no Mechanics' or Materialmens' Liens outstanding at date of
this Application for Payment.
c. That due and payable bills with respect to the Work have been paid to date
or shall be paid from proceeds of that Application for Payment.
d. That there is no known basis for filing of Mechanics' or Materialmens' Liens
against surety in connection with Work, and that Waivers and Bills Paid
Affidavit forms from subcontractors and materialmen have been, or will be,
obtained in form specified in Contract.
16. Progress payments will be made in accordance with General Conditions.
K. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion:

1. Following issuance of Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit Application
for Payment with following administrative actions and submittals that must
precede or coincide with application:
2. Proper training of Owner's personnel.
3. Occupancy permits and similar required approvals.

4. Warranties and maintenance agreements.

5. Test, adjust, and balance records.
6. Maintenance instructions.
7. Start-up performance reports.
8. Change-over information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
9. Final cleaning.
10. Application for reduction of retainage, and Consent of Surety.
11. Advise on shifting insurance coverage.
12. List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate of
Substantial Completion.
13. Transmittal of required Project construction records to Owner.
14. Removal of temporary facilities and services.
15. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements.
16. Additional items as required by General Conditions.
1.4 UNIT PRICES
A. Unit price is defined as amount stated in construction Contract as price for each unit of
measurement for materials or services.
B. Owner to determine if unit prices for rock, unsuitable soils, or other conditions are
required. Coordinate with Work of Section 01 22 00.
1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. Submit to Architect within 15 days of execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement name

of individual authorized to accept changes on behalf of Contractor, and shall be
responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ of changes in Work.
B. Change Order forms will be furnished and issued by Architect.
C. Contractor Documentation of Changes:

1. Maintain detailed records of Work done on accounting basis acceptable to
Architect and Owner.
2. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes.
3. Document each quotation for a change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow
evaluation of quotation.
4. On request, provide additional data to support computations:
a. Quantities of products, labor and equipment.
b. Insurance and bonds.
c. Overhead and profit.
d. Justification for change in Contract Time.
e. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented.

5. Support each request for additional costs, and for Work proposed on time and
material basis, with description of products, equipment, cost of labor and
subcontracts, completely documented.
6. Computation for changes in Work will be computed in one of manners described
in Conditions of the Contract.
D. Initiation of Changes:
1. Architect may submit Proposal Request which includes detailed description of
change with supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications.
2. Contractor may initiate proposed change by submittal of request to Architect
describing proposed change with statement of reason for change, and proposed
effect on Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation, and
statement of effect on Work of separate contractors.
3. Document requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
4. Submission of such requests and receipt of same by Architect does not mean
acceptance or approval of proposed change.
E. Authorization:
1. Owner may request, through Architect, Construction Change Directive, in writing,
instructing Contractor to proceed with changes in Work, for subsequent inclusion
in Change Order that is pending.
2. Directive will propose basis for necessary adjustments, to Contract Sum or Time.
3. Changes that affect Contract Sum or Contract Time will require Change Order
signed by Owner and Architect.
4. Contractor's signature indicates agreement.
5. Orders, written or oral, by Owner through Architect or by Architect shall be
treated as Change Order only if Contractor gives Owner proper written notice as
described in Conditions of Contract.
6. Promptly execute change in Work only upon receipt of approved Change Order
or Owner's written Construction Change Directive.
F. Execution:
1. Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in
Conditions of Contract.
2. Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record
each authorized Change Order as separate line item and adjust Contract Sum as
shown on Change Order.
3. Promptly revise Progress Schedules to reflect change in Contract Time, revise
subschedules to adjust times for other items of Work affected by Change, and
resubmit Schedule.
4. Promptly enter Changes in Project Record Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 01 31 00
PROJECT COORDINATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project
including, but not limited to, the following:
a. General coordination procedures.
b. Digital project management procedures.
c. Coordination of Submittals.
d. Requests for Information (RFIs).
e. Coordination of space and installation.
f. Coordination of finishes.
g. Coordination of Contract closeout.
B. Related Work:
1. Section 01 31 19 “Project Meetings”
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. BIM: Building Information Modeling.
B. RFI: Request for Information. Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking
information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.
1.3 GENERAL COORDINATION
A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of various Sections of Specifications to

assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of construction elements with
provisions for accommodating items furnished by Owner to be installed by Contractor.
B. Coordinate construction operations included under different sections of Project Manual

that are dependent upon each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
C. Contractor shall review and coordinate requirements of Divisions 21, 23 and 26 in

Project Manual and MEP&FP drawings with other Work. Report discrepancies to
Architect.
D. Contractor shall maintain services of major subcontractors throughout duration of

Contract, except as required by provisions of Conditions of Contract. Contractor shall
notify Architect in writing of intention to replace subcontractors, outlining reasons for
action and naming proposed replacement subcontractor.
Project Coordination 01 31 00 - 1
E. Each subcontractor shall ensure that devices and equipment installed under their
subcontract is operational. Subcontractor shall inform Contractor when completion and
operation of their system is dependent on Work of other trades. Arbitrate and resolve
coordination conflicts between subcontractors to ensure complete and operational
systems.
F. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of Work of subcontractors, and for

recording subcontractor installation data on Project Record Documents in accordance
with Section 01 78 39.
G. Communications to Owner from Contractor regarding Contract requirements shall be

through Architect.
1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. Refer to Section 01 31 19 “Project Meeting.”
1.5 DIGITAL PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES
A. Use of Architect's Digital Data Files: Digital data files of Architect's BIM model are
available from the Architect for the express purpose of preparing coordination
drawings, Shop Drawings, and Project record drawings.
1. Digital Data Software Program: The Drawings are available in Revit RVT format,
operating in Microsoft Windows operating system.
2. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital
data files as they relate to the Drawings.
3. Execution of the Architect's Release Form is required to obtain the digital data
files of the Drawings. Provision of the digital data files is subject to both the
terms described herein and on the Release Form. It is offered at the Architect's
sole discretion, and may be withheld by the Architect for reasons deemed
appropriate.
a. A copy of the Architect's Release Form is available upon request.
B. Web-Based Project Software: Use Architect's web-based Project software site for
purposes of hosting and managing Project communication and documentation until
Final Completion.
C. At completion of Project, provide digital archive in format that is readable by common

desktop software applications in format acceptable to Architect. Provide data in locked
format to prevent further changes.
D. PDF Document Preparation: Where PDFs are required to be submitted to Architect,

prepare as follows:
1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating
submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with
links enabling navigation to each item.
2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision
identifier.
3. Certifications: Where digitally submitted certificates and certifications are

required, provide a digital signature with digital certificate on where indicated.
1.6 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule and coordinate submittals.
B. Coordinate Work of various trades having interdependent responsibilities for installing,

connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.
C. Coordinate requests for substitutions to assure compatibility of space, of operating

elements, effect on Work of other trades, and on Work scheduled for early completion.
1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)
A. Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the

Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.
1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by
Contractor with no response.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in
Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.
B. RFIs will be accepted and processed by the Architect only on Contract Documents
prepared by the Architect or its consultants that are sealed and have been issued for
construction.
1. Requests for information or interpretation of preliminary Drawings or
Specifications shall be made by normal correspondences, not by RFI. Architect's
responses to such requests do not constitute Contract requirements of the Work.
C. Submission of an RFI constitutes representation that the Contractor requires additional

information about the Contract Documents after having made careful study and
comparison of the Contract Documents, field conditions, other Owner provided
information, Contractor prepared coordination drawings, and prior project
correspondence or documentation.
1. Architect will not respond to requests where information is conveyed or contained
in the Contract Documents or other documents and/or methods as outlined in
paragraph above.
D. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information
or interpretation and the following:
1. Project name.
2. Project number.
3. Date.
4. Name of Contractor.
5. Name of Architect.
6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
7. RFI subject.
8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.

9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the
Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
12. Contractor's signature.
13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product
Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to
fully describe items needing interpretation.
a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of
affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.
E. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated
above, acceptable to Architect.
F. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and
respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs
received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following
working day.
1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:
a. Requests for approval of submittals.
b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.
d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional
information.
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal
according to Section 01 29 00.
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract
Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of
receipt of the RFI response.
G. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI
response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if
Contractor disagrees with response.
H. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI
number. Submit log weekly. Include the following:
1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
3. Name and address of Architect.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date Architect's response was received.
8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change
Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.
9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal
Request, as appropriate.
1.8 COORDINATION OF CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
A. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site by requirements of

individual Specification Sections regarding correction of defective Work and Work not
in accordance with Contract Documents. Minimize disruption of Owner's operations.
B. Assemble and coordinate Closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 77 00.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01 31 19
PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Preconstruction meeting.
2. Progress meetings.
1.2 GENERAL PROCEDURES
A. Contractor shall schedule and administer pre-construction meeting, periodic progress

meetings, and specially called meetings and conferences throughout progress of Work.
Contractor shall:
1. Prepare agenda for meetings.
2. Distribute written notice of each meeting four working days minimum in advance
of meeting date.
3. Make physical arrangements for meetings.
4. Preside at meetings.
B. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors and suppliers attending meetings shall

be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of each represents.
C. Architect reserves the right to attend meetings to ascertain that Work is expedited
consistent with Contract Documents and construction schedules.
D. Contractor will record attendees and minutes of meetings, including significant

proceedings and decisions. Contractor will reproduce and distribute copies of minutes
after each meeting to attendees and to parties affected by decisions made at meeting.
1.3 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Pre-construction meeting will be held at construction job site prior to beginning of work
at time designated by Architect, but not later than 15 days after date of Notice to
Proceed.
B. Representatives of Owner, Architect and Contractor, Contractor's Superintendent, and

major subcontractors shall be present.
C. Minimum Agenda:
1. Major subcontractors and suppliers.
2. Tentative construction schedule.
Project Meetings 01 31 19 - 1
3. Critical work sequencing and phasing of construction.

4. Major equipment deliveries and priorities.
5. Designation of responsible personnel.
6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, proposal requests, submittals,
color coordination, change orders and applications for payment.
7. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents.
8. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents.
9. Review of Shop Drawings.
10. Use of premises.
11. Construction facilities, controls and construction aids.
12. Temporary utilities.
13. Security procedures.
14. Housekeeping procedures.
15. Discussion of project quality control procedures and requirements.
1.4 PROJECT PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Schedule regular periodic progress meetings at project field office, as required.
B. Hold additional meetings as necessary by progress of construction activity.
C. Representatives of Architect and his consultants as needed, Owner's project

representative as needed, Contractor's Superintendent and major subcontractors as
appropriate to agenda, shall be present.
D. Minimum Agenda:
1. Review and accept memorandum of previous meeting.
2. Review of work progress since previous meeting.
3. Field observations, problems, conflicts.
4. Problems which impede Construction Schedule.
5. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules.
6. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule.
7. Revisions to Construction Schedule.
8. Progress schedule for succeeding work period.
9. Coordination of schedules.
10. Review submittal schedules and status of submittals.
11. Maintenance of quality standards.
12. Pending changes and substitutions.
13. Review proposed changes for effect on construction schedule, on completion,
date and effect on other contracts of Project.
14. Other applicable business.
E. Additional progress meetings shall be held by Contractor at project field office as

required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01 32 00
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for schedules required

for proper performance of the Work.
1.2 FORMAT
A. Prepare Schedules as horizontal bar chart with separate bar for each major portion of
Work or operation, identifying first work day of each week, or prepare network analysis
system using critical path method, as outlined in The Associated General Contractors
of America (AGC) publication "The Use of CPM in Construction - A Manual for General
Contractors".
B. Sequence of Listings: Chronological order of start of each item of Work according to

Table of Contents of this Project Manual.
C. Scale and Spacing: To provide space for notations and revisions.
D. Sheet Size: Multiples of 8-1/2" x 11".
1.3 CONTENT
A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and
completion of each element of construction.
B. Identify each item by specification Section number.
C. Provide sub-schedules for each stage of Work identified in Section 01 11 00.
D. Provide sub-schedules to define critical portions of entire Schedule.
E. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of

Work completed, as of first day of each month.
F. Provide separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, and
samples, including dates reviewed submittals will be required from Architect. Indicate
decision data for selection of finishes.
G. Coordinate content with Schedule of Values.
Construction Progress Schedules 01 32 00 - 1

1.4 REVISIONS TO SCHEDULES
A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal, and projected completion date of
each activity.
B. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope, and other
identifiable changes.
C. Provide narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on
Schedule. Report corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit initial Schedules within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed.
After review, resubmit required revised data within 10 days.
B. Submit revised Progress Schedules with each Application for Payment.
C. Submit number of opaque reproductions which Contractor requires, plus two copies
which will be retained by Architect.
1.6 DISTRIBUTION
A. Distribute copies of reviewed Schedules to project site file, Subcontractors, suppliers,

and other concerned parties.
B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections

indicated in Schedules.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
Construction Progress Schedules 01 32 00 - 2

SECTION 01 33 23
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Submittal schedule requirements.
2. Administrative and procedural requirements for Submittals.
1.2 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order

by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering,
manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional
time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and
additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.
1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values,
and Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include
submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals
required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early
because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.
3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of
Contractor's construction schedule.
a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and
timing for submittals.
4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:
a. Scheduled date for first submittal.
b. Specification Section number and title.
c. Submittal category: Action; informational.
d. Name of subcontractor.
e. Description of the Work covered.
f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
g. Scheduled date of fabrication.
h. Scheduled dates for purchasing.
i. Scheduled dates for installation.
j. Activity or event number.
1.3 SUBMITTAL FORMATS
A. Submittal Information: Include the following information in each submittal:

1. Project name.
Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 01 33 23 - 1

2. Date.
3. Name of Architect.
5. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
6. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
7. Unique number for each Submittal, including revision identifier as follows:
a. Include Specification Section number, followed by sequential alphanumeric
identifier, followed by sequential alphanumeric suffix for resubmittals
(e.g., 06 10 53 – 001 – 00).
b. Update sequential alphanumeric suffix for each subsequent resubmittal
(e.g., 06 10 53 – 001 – 01).
8. Category and type of submittal.
9. Submittal purpose and description.
10. Number and title of Specification Section, with paragraph number and generic
name for each of multiple items.
12. Indication of full or partial submittal.
13. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
14. Other necessary identification.
15. Remarks.
16. Signature of review and transmitter.
B. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.
C. Deviations and Additional Information: On each submittal, clearly indicate deviations

from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and
limitations; include relevant additional information and revisions, other than those
requested by Architect on previous submittals. Indicate by highlighting on each
submittal or noting on attached separate sheet.
1. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in Submittals from requirements of
Contract Documents is not relieved by Architect's review of Submittals unless
Architect gives specific written acceptance for each specific deviation.
D. Electronic Submittal Requirements:

1. Prepare submittals as PDF package, assembling complete submittal package
into a single, indexed PDF file incorporating transmittal form and all submittal
requirements of a Specification Section with internal bookmark links enabling for
navigation to each item. Name PDF file with Submittal number.
2. Provide electronic stamp to permanently record Contractor's review and approval
markings and space for electronic stamp for action taken by Architect and
Consultants as needed.
3. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic
submittal file metadata:
a. Project name.
b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
c. Manufacturer name.

d. Product name.
4. Post electronic submittals in Adobe PDF format directly to Newforma Info
Exchange at https://projects.corgan.com/.
5. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an
electronic Project record document file.
E. Transmittals for Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for
transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will
return without review submittals received from sources other than Contractor. Provide
locations on form for the following information:
1. Project name.
2. Date.
3. Destination (To:).
4. Source (From:).
5. Name and address of Architect.
6. Name of Construction Manager.
8. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
9. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
10. Type of submittal.
11. Submittal purpose and description.
12. Specification Section number and title.
13. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for
each of multiple items.
15. Indication of full or partial submittal.
16. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.
17. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
18. Remarks.
19. Signature of transmitter.
1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of

submittals required are indicated in individual Specification Sections.
1. Email Submittals: Prepare submittals as PDF package, and transmit to Architect
by sending via email. Include PDF transmittal form. Include information in email
subject line as requested by Architect.
a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as a
digital Project Record Document file.
2. Web-Based Project Software: Prepare submittals in PDF form, and upload to
web-based Project software website. Enter required data in web-based software
site to fully identify submittal.

a. Post electronic submittals in Adobe PDF format directly to Newforma Info

Exchange at https://projects.corgan.com/.
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of

construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently
unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved
submittal schedule.
3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same
Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.
4. Coordinate transmittal of submittals for related parts of the Work specified in
different Sections so processing will not be delayed because of need to review
submittals concurrently for coordination.
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as
follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No
extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit
submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow seven days for initial review of each submittal. Allow
additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect
will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for
coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same
manner as initial submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow seven days for review of each resubmittal.
4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's
consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 14 days for initial review
of each submittal.
5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that
submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's
consultants, allow 10 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned
to Architect before being returned to Contractor.
D. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial

submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal.
2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent
of revision.
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's
action stamp.
E. Distribution: Furnish copies of final Submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors,

suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary
for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

1. Distribute accepted samples as directed by Architect.
F. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only
final Submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's review stamp.
1.5 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of
construction and type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard
published data are unsuitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product
Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are
applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
c. Standard color charts.
d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
e. Testing by recognized testing agency.
f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
g. Notation of coordination requirements.
h. Availability and delivery time information.
4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
a. Wiring diagrams that show factory-installed wiring.
b. Printed performance curves.
c. Operational range diagrams.
d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on
accompanying Shop Drawings.
5. Submit Product Data before Shop Drawings, and before or concurrent with
Samples.
B. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not

base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed
data.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the
following information, as applicable:
a. Identification of products.
b. Schedules.
c. Compliance with specified standards.
d. Notation of coordination requirements.
e. Notation of dimensions established or confirmed by field measurement.
f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
C. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of
these characteristics with other materials.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories

together in one submittal package.
2. Identification: Permanently attach label on unexposed side of Samples that
includes the following:
a. Project name and submittal number.
b. Generic description of Sample.
c. Product name and name of manufacturer.
d. Sample source.
e. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
f. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.
3. Paper Transmittal: Include paper transmittal including complete submittal
information indicated.
4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for
quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity.
Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction
associated with each set.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition
at time of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as
Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.
5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of
units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns
available.
a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set of available choices where color,
pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from
manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options
selected.
6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated,
prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in
manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for
use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples
include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or
fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of
repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color
range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.
a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one
Sample set; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned
Sample set as a project record Sample.
1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship,
fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar
characteristics are to be demonstrated.
2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent
in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three
sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.
D. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written

summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location.
Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the
Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.
2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.
3. Number and name of room or space.
4. Location within room or space.
E. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and

experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
F. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information indicating compliance
with indicated performance and design criteria in individual Specification Sections.
Include list of assumptions and summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable.
Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Number each page
of submittal.
G. Certificates:
1. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Submit a statement that includes
signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and
certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign
documents on behalf of that entity. Provide a notarized signature where
indicated.
2. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead
certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents
and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
3. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's
letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the
Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where
required.
4. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead
certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
5. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead
certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
6. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and
personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record
of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS
forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.
H. Test and Research Reports:

1. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency,
on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of
compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written
recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
2. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of
field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is
installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract
Documents.

3. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on

testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material
for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
4. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing
agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of
tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance
requirements in the Contract Documents.
5. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product
produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract
Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and
witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by
a qualified testing agency.
6. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building
code in effect for Project. Include the following information:
a. Name of evaluation organization.
b. Date of evaluation.
c. Time period when report is in effect.
d. Product and manufacturers' names.
e. Description of product.
f. Test procedures and results.
g. Limitations of use.
1.6 DELEGATED DESIGN SERVICES
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications

by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract
Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and
design criteria indicated.
1. If criteria indicated are insufficient to perform services or certification required,
submit a written request for additional information to Architect.
B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data,

and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF file and one paper copy of
certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product
and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design
professional.
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria
in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in
performing these services.
2. BIM Incorporation: If so established, incorporate delegated-design drawing and
data files into BIM established for Project.
C. Prepare delegated-design drawings in same digital data software program, version,

and operating system as original Drawings.
1.7 CONTRACTOR’S REVIEW

A. Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the
Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field
dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
1. Submittals without Contractor's stamp and Submittals which, in the opinion of the
Architect or Owner, are incomplete, contain numerous errors, have not been
reviewed, or have only been reviewed superficially, will be returned without
Architect’s review or comments. Resultant schedule delays incurred are
Contractor's responsibility.
B. Contractor's Approval: Indicate Contractor's review and approval for each submittal
with a uniform approval stamp. Include name of reviewer, date of Contractor's
approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and
approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
1. Architect will not review submittals received from Contractor that do not have
Contractor's review and approval.
1.8 ARCHITECT’S REVIEW
A. Architect’s review of Submittals is for general design conformance and compliance with
information provided in Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for meeting
requirements and characteristics of products and systems specified; dimensions and
quantities to be confirmed and correlated at the Project site; and information that
pertains solely to fabrication processes, installation techniques, and coordination of
work required by other trades. Architect’s review and indication of action to be taken
shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for deviation from requirements of Contract
Documents.
B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, indicate corrections or revisions
required, and return it. Architect will indicate, via markup on each submittal, the
appropriate action as follows:
1. Final Unrestricted Release: When submittal is marked "No Exception Taken",
that part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies
with requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend upon
that compliance.
2. Final-But-Restricted Release: When submittal is marked "Comments Included",
that part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies
with both the Architect's notations and comments on the submittal and
requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend upon that
compliance.
3. Returned for Resubmittal: When submittal is marked "Revise and Submit", do
not proceed with that part of the Work covered by the submittal, including
purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new
submittal in accordance with the Architects notations or corrections; resubmit
without delay.
a. Do not permit submittals marked "Revise and Submit" to be used at the
Project site or elsewhere where construction is in progress.

4. Rejected: When submittal is marked "Rejected" do not proceed with that part of
the work as submission is either incomplete, not coordinated, or does not
conform to requirements of Contract Documents. Resubmission of the same
submittal will not be considered. Prepare and submit new submittal meeting
requirements of Contract Documents.
5. Not Reviewed: When submittal is marked "Not Reviewed. Submittal not required
by Contract Documents" it has not been reviewed because the submittal was
neither requested nor required by Contract Documents.
6. Close-Out Submittal: When submittal is marked "Reviewed for Project Close-Out
Requirements Only” it has only been reviewed only for compliance with close-out
submission requirements. It has not been reviewed for accuracy or
completeness. Burden of accuracy and completeness rests with the Contractor.
7. Substitution Request: When a submittal is marked "Proposed Substitution.
Resubmit. Comply with Section 01 25 00" submission does not conform to
requirements of Contract Documents. Contractor may elect to resubmit under the
provisions, conditions, and procedures outlined in Section 01 25 00 “Substitution
Procedures,” or prepare and submit new submittal meeting requirements of
Contract Documents.
B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or
will return it if it does not comply with requirements.
C. Partial Submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of
partial Submittals has received prior approval from Architect.
D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be

returned for resubmittal without review.
E. Architect will return without review submittals received from sources other than
Contractor.
F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will be returned by Architect

without action.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 01 41 00
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: General regulatory requirements.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International
1. ASTM E 119: Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

1. UL 263: Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Additional information with legal implications regarding applicable governing

laws and jurisdictions can be found in Conditions of Contract.
B. Codes:
1. Where references are made on Drawings or Specifications to codes, they shall
be considered an integral part of the Contract Documents as minimum
standards. Nothing contained in Contract Documents shall be so construed as to
be in conflict with law, bylaw or regulation of municipal, State, Federal or other
authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Perform Work in compliance with Codes as shown on Construction Drawings.
a. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code and other applicable NFPA Standards.
C. Contractor shall, without additional expense to Owner, obtain necessary licenses and
permits, and be responsible for complying with Federal, state, county, and municipal
laws, codes, and regulations applicable to performance of Work, including, but not
limited to, laws or regulations requiring use of licensed contractors to perform parts of
Work.
D. Environmental Requirements: Contractor shall comply with applicable local, state, and
federal air and water quality standards with pollution control laws; and with such rules,
regulations and directives as may be lawfully issued for the protection of the
environment in the areas surrounding the confines of this contract.
1. Obtain certificates of registration, issued by The Texas Water Commission, for
work involving the installation removal, or repair of underground storage tank
systems, including piping.
Regulatory Requirements 01 41 00 - 1
E. Occupancy Permit: The General Contractor shall be responsible for securing a

Certificate of Occupancy permit at completion of project and shall deliver such permit
to Owner. Final Payment shall be retained until permit has been received by Owner.
1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
Regulatory Requirements 01 41 00 - 2
SECTION 01 42 00
REFERENCES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. "Acceptance", "acceptable", or words of similar import: Acceptance, acceptable or

similar words shall be as determined by Architect.
B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals,

applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and
responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. Approval does not release
Contractor from responsibility to fulfill Contract Document requirements.
C. "At no extra cost to Owner", "With no extra compensation to Contractor", "At

Contractor's own expense", or words of similar import: Terms shall be understood to
mean that Contractor shall perform or provide specified operation of Work at no
increase to Contract Sum stated in executed Contract.
D. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"

"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as
"directed."
E. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking,
assembly, installation, and similar operations.
F. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on

Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including
"shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
No limitation on location is intended except as specifically noted.
G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,

assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing,
curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
H. "Installer" is entity engaged by Contractor, either as employee, subcontractor or sub-

subcontractor for performance of particular construction activity, including installation,
erection, application and similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced
in operations they are engaged to perform. Term "experienced", when used with term
"installer", means having minimum five previous projects similar in size and scope to
this Project, and familiar with precautions required, and has complied with
requirements of authority having jurisdiction.
References 01 42 00 - 1
I. "NIC": Work of this Project which is not being performed or provided as part of
Contract; term shall mean "Not in This Contract" or "Not Part of Work to be Performed
or Provided by Contractor". "NIC" work is indicated as aid to Contractor in scheduling
amount of time and materials necessary for completion of Contract.
J. "Other acceptable manufacturer", "equal", "acceptable equal", "equivalent", or words of

similar import: It shall be understood that words are followed by expression "at sole
discretion of Architect" even though words may not appear in print.
K. "Perform": Contractor, at his own expense, shall perform operations necessary to

complete Work, including furnishing of necessary labor, tools and equipment, and
further including and installing of materials indicated, specified or required to complete
performance.
L. "Project Site" is space available to Contractor for performance of Work, either

exclusively or in conjunction with others performing construction as part of Project.
Extent of Project Site is shown on Contract Drawings, and may or may not be identical
with description of land upon which Project is to be built.
M. "Provide": Contractor, at his own expense, shall furnish and install Work complete in
place and ready for use, including furnishing of necessary labor, materials, tools,
equipment and transportation. Definitions apply same to future, present and past
tenses, except word "provided" may mean "contingent upon" where context is
apparent.
N. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities

having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction
industry that control performance of the Work.
O. "Require" and words of similar import: As required to complete Work and as required
by Architect.
P. "Testing Laboratory" is independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or

tests, either at Project Site or elsewhere, and to report on, and if required, to interpret
results of those inspections or tests.
1.2 SPECIFICATION SENTENCE STRUCTURE
A. Specifications are written in modified brief style. In general, words "the", "a", "an",
"shall", "shall be", and "all" are not used. Requirements indicated and specified apply
to work of same kind, class, and type even though word "all" is not stated.
B. Simple imperative mood of sentence structure is used in Specification Sections which

places verb as first word in sentence. Where "perform", "provide", "install", "erect",
"furnish", "connect", "test", or words of similar import are used, it shall be understood
that words include meanings of phrase "Contractor Shall..." before words.
C. Standard paragraph titles and other identifications of subject matter in Specifications

are intended as aid in locating and recognizing various requirements in Specifications.
Titles do not define, limit or otherwise restrict Specifications text. Capitalizing of words
in text does not signify or mean that words convey special or unique meanings having
precedence over other parts of Contract Documents. Specification text shall govern
over titling and shall be understood to be interpreted as a whole.
1.3 DOCUMENT ORGANIZATION
A. Organization of Project Manual and Contract Drawings are not intended to control or to
lessen responsibility of Contractor in dividing Work among his subcontractors, or in
establishing extent of Work to be performed by each trade.
1.4 SYMBOLS
A. Graphic symbols used in Contract Documents are those symbols recognized in

construction industry for indicated purposes. Where not otherwise noted, symbols are
those defined in "Architectural Graphics Standards", published by John Wiley & Sons,
Inc., Eighth Edition.
B. Graphic symbols used on mechanical and electrical drawings are generally aligned
with symbols recommended by ASHRAE. Where appropriate, mechanical and
electrical symbols are supplemented by more specific symbols recommended by
technical associations including ASME, ASPE, IEEE, and similar organizations.
Request clarification from Architect if symbols are unfamiliar.
1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent

requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and
effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent
referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
1. When conflict exists between requirements of reference standards and Contract
Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract

Documents unless otherwise indicated.
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be

familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of
applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Make reference standards available as requested or required by Architect or
Owner. Maintain copies of standard at project site throughout construction
period.
2. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction
activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.
1.6 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. Language used on Drawings and in Specifications is of the abbreviated type in certain

instances and implies abbreviations listed on the Drawings.
B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications

or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in
the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate
as of the date of the Contract Documents.
1. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com.
2. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association; www.aamanet.org.
3. AAPFCO - Association of American Plant Food Control Officials;
www.aapfco.org.
4. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials;
www.transportation.org.
5. AATCC - American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists;
www.aatcc.org.
6. ABMA - American Bearing Manufacturers Association;
www.americanbearings.org.
7. ABMA - American Boiler Manufacturers Association; www.abma.com.
8. ACI - American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI International);
www.abma.com.
9. ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concrete-pipe.org.
10. AEIC - Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.org.
11. AF&PA - American Forest & Paper Association; www.afandpa.org.
12. AGA - American Gas Association; www.aga.org.
13. AHAM - Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; www.aham.org.
14. AHRI - Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The);
www.ahrinet.org.
15. AI - Asphalt Institute; www.asphaltinstitute.org.
16. AIA - American Institute of Architects (The); www.aia.org.
17. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org.
18. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute; www.steel.org.
19. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction; www.aitc-glulam.org.
20. AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.;
www.amca.org.
21. ANSI - American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org.
22. AOSA - Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.; www.aosaseed.com.
23. APA - APA - The Engineered Wood Association; www.apawood.org.
24. APA - Architectural Precast Association; www.archprecast.org.
25. API - American Petroleum Institute; www.api.org.
26. ARI - Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI).
27. ARI - American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI).
28. ARMA - Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.org.
29. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asce.org.

30. ASCE/SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute;
(See ASCE).
31. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers; www.ashrae.org.
32. ASME - ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers);
www.asme.org.
33. ASSE - American Society of Safety Engineers (The); www.asse.org.
34. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering; www.asse-plumbing.org.
35. ASTM - ASTM International; www.astm.org.
36. ATIS - Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.org.
37. AWEA - American Wind Energy Association; www.awea.org.
38. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org.
39. AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada;
www.awmac.com.
40. AWPA - American Wood Protection Association; www.awpa.com.
41. AWS - American Welding Society; www.aws.org.
42. AWWA - American Water Works Association; www.awwa.org.
43. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association;
www.buildershardware.com.
44. BIA - Brick Industry Association (The); www.gobrick.com.
45. BICSI - BICSI, Inc.; www.bicsi.org.
46. BIFMA - BIFMA International; (Business and Institutional Furniture
Manufacturer's Association); www.bifma.org.
47. BISSC - Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee; www.bissc.org.
48. BWF - Badminton World Federation; (Formerly: International Badminton
Federation); www.bissc.org.
49. CDA - Copper Development Association; www.copper.org.
50. CEA - Canadian Electricity Association; www.electricity.ca.
51. CEA - Consumer Electronics Association; www.ce.org.
52. CFFA - Chemical Fabrics and Film Association, Inc.;
www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com.
53. CFSEI - Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.org.
54. CGA - Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com.
55. CIMA - Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.cellulose.org.
56. CISCA - Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org.
57. CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org.
58. CLFMI - Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org.
59. CPA - Composite Panel Association; www.pbmdf.com.
60. CRI - Carpet and Rug Institute (The); www.carpet-rug.org.
61. CRRC - Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.org.
62. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org.
63. CSA - Canadian Standards Association; www.csa.ca.
64. CSA - CSA International; (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services);

www.csa-international.org.
65. CSI - Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csinet.org.
66. CSSB - Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.org.
67. CTI - Cooling Technology Institute; (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute);
www.cti.org.
68. CWC - Composite Wood Council; (See CPA).
69. DASMA - Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association;
www.dasma.com.
70. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org.
71. ECA - Electronic Components Association; (See ECIA).
72. ECAMA - Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association; (See
ECIA).
73. ECIA - Electronic Components Industry Association; www.eciaonline.org.
74. EIA - Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA).
75. EIMA - EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com.
76. EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.ejma.org.
77. ESD - ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); www.esda.org.
78. ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association; (See PLASA).
79. EVO - Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo-world.org.
80. FCI - Fluid Controls Institute; www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org.
81. FIBA - Federation Internationale de Basketball; (The International Basketball
Federation); www.fiba.com.
82. FIVB - Federation Internationale de Volleyball; (The International Volleyball
Federation); www.fivb.org.
83. FM Approvals - FM Approvals LLC; www.fmglobal.com.
84. FM Global - FM Global; (Formerly: FMG - FM Global); www.fmglobal.com.
85. FRSA - Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association,
Inc.; www.floridaroof.com.
86. FSA - Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.com.
87. FSC - Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org.
88. GA - Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org.
89. GANA - Glass Association of North America; www.glasswebsite.com.
90. GS - Green Seal; www.greenseal.org.
91. HI - Hydraulic Institute; www.pumps.org.
92. HI/GAMA - Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association; (See
AHRI).
93. HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM).
94. HPVA - Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; www.hpva.org.
95. HPW - H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.; www.hpwhite.com.
96. IAPSC - International Association of Professional Security Consultants;
www.iapsc.org.
97. IAS - International Accreditation Service; www.iasonline.org.
98. IAS - International Approval Services; (See CSA).

99. ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC).
100. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.
101. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; www.icea.net.
102. ICPA - International Cast Polymer Alliance; www.icpa-hq.org.
103. ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org.
104. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission; www.iec.ch.
105. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org.
106. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering
Society of North America); www.ies.org.
107. IESNA - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; (See IES).
108. IEST - Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.org.
109. IGMA - Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; www.igmaonline.org.
110. IGSHPA - International Ground Source Heat Pump Association;
www.igshpa.okstate.edu.
111. ILI - Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; www.iliai.com.
112. Intertek - Intertek Group; (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA);
www.intertek.com.
113. ISA - International Society of Automation (The); (Formerly: Instrumentation,
Systems, and Automation Society); www.isa.org.
114. ISAS - Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The); (See ISA).
115. ISFA - International Surface Fabricators Association; (Formerly: International
Solid Surface Fabricators Association); www.isfanow.org.
116. ISO - International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.org.
117. ISSFA - International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; (See ISFA).
118. ITU - International Telecommunication Union; www.itu.int/home.
119. KCMA - Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; www.kcma.org.
120. LMA - Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA).
121. LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org.
122. MBMA - Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com.
123. MCA - Metal Construction Association; www.metalconstruction.org.
124. MFMA - Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.maplefloor.org.
125. MFMA - Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.;
www.metalframingmfg.org.
126. MHIA - Material Handling Industry of America; www.mhia.org.
127. MIA - Marble Institute of America; www.marble-institute.com.
128. MMPA - Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; www.wmmpa.com.
129. MPI - Master Painters Institute; www.paintinfo.com.
130. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry
Inc.; www.mss-hq.org.
131. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers;
www.naamm.org.
132. NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers

International); www.nace.org.
133. NADCA - National Air Duct Cleaners Association; www.nadca.com.
134. NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.naima.org.
135. NBGQA - National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; www.nbgqa.com.
136. NBI - New Buildings Institute; www.newbuildings.org.
137. NCAA - National Collegiate Athletic Association (The); www.ncaa.org.
138. NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org.
139. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org.
140. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org.
141. NeLMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.org.
142. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.org.
143. NETA - InterNational Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.org.
144. NFHS - National Federation of State High School Associations; www.nfhs.org.
145. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association; www.nfpa.org.
146. NFPA - NFPA International; (See NFPA).
147. NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org.
148. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com.
149. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org.
150. NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (See NWFA).
151. NOMMA - National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association;
www.nomma.org.
152. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net.
153. NRMCA - National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org.
154. NSF - NSF International; www.nsf.org.
155. NSPE - National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org.
156. NSSGA - National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association; www.nssga.org.
157. NTMA - National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com.
158. NWFA - National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org.
159. PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org.
160. PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org.
161. PLASA - PLASA; (Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology
Association); www.plasa.org.
162. RCSC - Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.org.
163. RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com.
164. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service; www.redwoodinspection.com.
165. SAE - SAE International; www.sae.org.
166. SCTE - Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org.
167. SDI - Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.org.
168. SDI - Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org.
169. SEFA - Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (The);
www.sefalabs.com.
170. SEI/ASCE - Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers;

(See ASCE).
171. SIA - Security Industry Association; www.siaonline.org.
172. SJI - Steel Joist Institute; www.steeljoist.org.
173. SMA - Screen Manufacturers Association; www.smainfo.org.
174. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association;
www.smacna.org.
175. SMPTE - Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers; www.smpte.org.
176. SPFA - Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance; www.sprayfoam.org.
177. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org.
178. SPRI - Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spri.org.
179. SRCC - Solar Rating & Certification Corporation; www.solar-rating.org.
180. SSINA - Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com.
181. SSPC - SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings; www.sspc.org.
182. STI - Steel Tank Institute; www.steeltank.com.
183. SWI - Steel Window Institute; www.steelwindows.com.
184. SWPA - Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.swpa.org.
185. TCA - Tilt-Up Concrete Association; www.tilt-up.org.
186. TCNA - Tile Council of North America, Inc.; www.tileusa.com.
187. TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.tema.org.
188. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association (The); (Formerly: TIA/EIA -
Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance);
www.tiaonline.org.
189. TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries
Alliance; (See TIA).
190. TMS - The Masonry Society; www.masonrysociety.org.
191. TPI - Truss Plate Institute; www.tpinst.org.
192. TPI - Turfgrass Producers International; www.turfgrasssod.org.
193. TRI - Tile Roofing Institute; www.tileroofing.org.
194. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com.
195. UNI - Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association; www.uni-bell.org.
196. USAV - USA Volleyball; www.usavolleyball.org.
197. USGBC - U.S. Green Building Council; www.usgbc.org.
198. USITT - United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.; www.usitt.org.
199. WASTEC - Waste Equipment Technology Association; www.wastec.org.
200. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.wclib.org.
201. WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.org.
202. WDMA - Window & Door Manufacturers Association; www.wdma.com.
203. WI - Woodwork Institute; www.wicnet.org.
204. WSRCA - Western States Roofing Contractors Association; www.wsrca.com.
205. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpa.org.
C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
following list. This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract
Documents.
1. DIN - Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V.; www.din.de.
2. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials;
www.iapmo.org.
3. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.
4. ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org.
D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in

Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of
the entities in the following list. Information is subject to change and is up to date as of
the date of the Contract Documents.
1. COE - Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil.
2. CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov.
3. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and
Technology; www.nist.gov.
4. DOD - Department of Defense; www.quicksearch.dla.mil.
5. DOE - Department of Energy; www.energy.gov.
6. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov.
7. FAA - Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov.
8. FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov.
9. GSA - General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.
10. HUD - Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.gov.
11. LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy
Technologies Division; www.eetd.lbl.gov.
12. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov.
13. SD - Department of State; www.state.gov.
14. TRB - Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research
Program; The National Academies; www.trb.org.
15. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity
Laboratory; www.ars.usda.gov.
16. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov.
17. USDJ - Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of
Justice; www.ojp.usdoj.gov.
18. USP - U.S. Pharmacopeial Convention; www.usp.org.
19. USPS - United States Postal Service; www.usps.com.
E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in

the standards and regulations in the following list. This information is subject to change
and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.
1. ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA); Architectural Barriers Act (ABA);
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Available from U.S. Access
Board; www.access-board.gov
2. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office;
www.gpo.gov/fdsys.
3. DOD - Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available
from DLA Document Services; www.quicksearch.dla.mil.
4. DSCC - Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS).
5. FED-STD - Federal Standard; (See FS).
6. FS - Federal Specification; Available from DLA Document Services;
www.quicksearch.dla.mil.
7. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil.
8. Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.
9. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design
Guide; www.wbdg.org/ccb.
10. MILSPEC - Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD).
11. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov.
12. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board;
(See USAB).
F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in

the entities in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to
be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.
1. CBHF; State of California; Department of Consumer Affairs; Bureau of Electronic
and Appliance Repair, Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation;
www.bearhfti.ca.gov.
2. CCR; California Code of Regulations; Office of Administrative Law; California
Title 24 Energy Code; www.calregs.com.
3. CDHS; California Department of Health Services; (See CDPH).
4. CDPH; California Department of Public Health; Indoor Air Quality Program;
www.cal-iaq.org.
5. CPUC; California Public Utilities Commission; www.cpuc.ca.gov.
6. SCAQMD; South Coast Air Quality Management District; www.aqmd.gov.
7. TFS; Texas A&M Forest Service; Sustainable Forestry and Economic
Development; www.txforestservice.tamu.edu.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01 43 39
MOCK-UP WALL CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A An Envelope Pre-construction meeting shall be held with all of the subcontractors

responsible for erecting the envelope related materials.
1. Attendees shall include (but are not limited to): General Contractor, framing and
sheathing subcontractor, masonry subcontractor, weather barrier subcontractor,
storefront and glazing subcontractor, roofing and sheet metal subcontractors,
ACM and metal panel subcontractor, mechanical and electrical subcontractors,
and any other trade that will install products in the exterior building envelope, or
penetrate through the exterior envelope.
B. Work includes: Constructing mock-up, including all reviewed submittals required by the
Contract Documents, to establish compliance with the design intent as well as the
specified requirements to provide a complete and watertight facility.
C. Providing a photo manifest of as-built conditions as the mock-up is being constructed.

Photos shall be kept at the job site during construction for reference.
D. Mock-up fabrication must be completed and reviewed and approved by the Owner and
Architect prior to starting installation of building envelope construction.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 32 16 – Construction Progress Schedule.
B. Individual sections of these specifications for each material indicated for use in the
mock-up wall construction.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, layout, joints, construction details, methods of

anchorage, etc. as required for items to be installed in the mock-up wall construction.
C. All submittals for materials required in the mock-up walls shall be approved prior to
beginning work on the mock-up wall construction.
Mock-up Wall Construction 01 43 39 - 1

1.4 PURPOSE
A. The mock-up wall panels are to be constructed as indicated on the drawings, including
toothed masonry construction to allow exposed flashings, etc. Construction of the
mock-up walls are intended to:
1. Provide an acceptable quality standard for the completed work.
2. Identify color and finish selections of the various materials used, as well as the
acceptable range of color and variations within those materials.
3. Establish the required coordination between trades and the sequence of
necessary installations to provide a complete and watertight building envelope.
A. Coordination of product submittals and construction installation:

1. Prior to each submittal, carefully review and coordinate all aspects of each item
being submitted.
2. Verify that each item being submitted is in conformance in all respects with the
specified requirements.
3. By affixing the Contractor's signature to each submittal for the mock-up, the
contractor certifies that this coordination has been performed.
4. Contractor shall construct the site built mock-up with the same manner of
specified construction as the new construction.
5. Contractor shall construct the site built mock-up with the same workmanship and
quality as being implemented on the new construction.
6. All material to be installed shall be reviewed by architect and consultants for
conformance.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MOCK-UP REQUIREMENTS
A. Build mock-ups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Mock-up wall construction
shall be coordinated by the General Contractor and constructed by the subcontractor
responsible for the actual construction work. All conditions and materials to be used on
the job shall be included in the mock-up. Build mock-ups to comply with the listed
requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work.
B. Contractor shall start the construction of the mock-up based on, but not limited to, the
following list:
1. Foundation if subgrade is present
2. Waterproofing membrane
3. Damproofing material
4. Flexible Through-Wall Flashing Membrane
5. Metal Through-Wall Flashing

6. Preformed Flashing Pieces

7. Face Brick with Mortar and Weeps
8. CMU with mortar and weeps
9. Wall Ties
10. Weather Barrier
11. Portland Cement Plaster
12. Metal Panels, Wall and Soffit
13. Metal Roof Panels
14. Low Slope Roof System
15. Weeps
16. Window Unit
17. Louver Unit
C. Samples and Manufacturer's Submittals: Submit prior to delivery or installation.

1. Samples of all building system components including all specified accessories.
2. Submit samples of proposed warranties complete with any addenda necessary to
meet the warranty requirements as specified.
3. Submit latest edition of manufacturer's specifications and installation procedures.
Submit only those items applicable to this project.
4. A written statement from the materials manufacturer approving the installer,
specifications and drawings as described and/or shown for this project and
stating the intent to guarantee the completed project.
5. Follow submitted shop drawings, product data of all sheet metal.
D. Scale and Measurements: Make Shop Drawings accurately to a scale sufficiently large
enough to show all pertinent aspects of the item and its method of connection to the
work.
E. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Provide manufacturer's approved details of all
conditions, projection conditions, and any additional special job conditions which
require details other than indicated in the drawings.
1. Manufacturer's Details: All termination details and other details normally required
by the manufacturer's Technical Specifications, including both standard details
and special details, shall be furnished by the Contractor and shall be approved in
writing by the manufacturer, the company project manager, and the Owner's
representative prior to final installation.
F. Provide manufacturer's approved details, of all perimeter conditions, project conditions,

and any additional special job conditions which require details other than indicated in
the drawings.
2.2 MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE
A. Work provided on the mock-up shall follow all of the submitted literature from
manufacturers.

B. Manufacturer’s literature shall be the minimum for basis of design and shall be in
conjunction with construction documents. All manufacturers' warranties shall remain in
effect as specified.
2.3 SAMPLES
A. Provide sample or samples identical to the precise article proposed to be provided.
2.4 COLORS AND PATTERNS
A. Unless the precise color and pattern are specifically called out in the Contract
Documents, and whenever a choice of color or pattern is available in the specified
products, submit accurate color and pattern charts to the Architect/Project Manager for
selection in advance of the Envelope Pre-Construction meeting.
B. Contractor shall coordinate with Architect for exact layout or design of patterns and
textures and how they are to be installed on the mock-up.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 ENVELOPE PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Convene a minimum of one week prior to initiation of the mock-up wall construction.
B. Verify that all required submittals have been approved and that color/finish selections
have been made.
C. Establish coordination between trades and establish sequencing of material

installations to ensure a complete and watertight assembly.
D. Distribute meeting minutes and agreed upon sequencing to all subcontractors.
E. Construct mock-up walls in accordance with the established procedures and

installation sequencing.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF MATERIALS
A. Contractor shall install all materials on mock-up in same manner required for the main
structure. Refer to specification sections for basis of design of all material being
installed on this mock-up.
B. During installation, Contractor shall maintain a photo manifest of mock-up construction

for Architect and Owner to review.
C. Quality of installation is of utmost importance and shall be monitored for completeness

and conformance with the design intent and manufacturer's installation
recommendations.

D. Once mock-up is complete, it shall be reviewed by the Architect and Owner’s

Representative for conformance to construction documents.
E. Contractor shall install material in same sequencing as required by industry standards.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF WINDOWS AND ASSOCIATED FLASHING
A. Installer shall coordinate the installation of the window with associated trades to
maintain proper compatibility of material.
B. Installation shall be in accordance with referencing specifications.
C. Install all perimeters flashing as detailed to create a sealed and watertight condition.
D. Once window and flashing has been installed, Contractor shall notify Architect, Owner
and Consultants for review for conformance and shall provide a water test of all wall
flashing. Contractor shall notify Architect, Owner and Consultants to observe the
testing. All tests shall be in accordance with referencing specifications.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF FLASHING AT THROUGH-WALL LOCATION
A. Installer shall coordinate the installation of the wall flashing with associated trades to
maintain proper compatibility of material.
B. Installation shall be in accordance with referencing specifications.
C. Once flashing has been installed, Contractor shall notify Architect, Owner and
Consultants for review for conformance and shall provide a water test of all wall
flashing. Contractor shall notify Architect, Owner and Consultants to observe the
testing. All tests shall be in accordance with referencing specifications.
3.5 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Once installation sequences have been determined and mock-up wall construction has
been approved, modify the Construction Schedule to reflect the established
sequencing of material installations and testing requirements. Distribute revised
schedule.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 01 45 16
CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes Contractor’s administrative and procedural requirements for quality

assurance and quality control.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 45 29 "Testing Agency Services" for testing and inspecting
requirements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and

during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and
substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during

and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the
Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include
contract enforcement activities performed by Architect or Construction Manager.
C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are
constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review
coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and
to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not
Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by
which the Work will be judged.
D. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an

employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction
operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require
that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized
individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
E. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having

successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and
extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having
complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Contractor's Quality Control 01 45 16 - 1

1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the
standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or
quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting
requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before
proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified
shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply
exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum
within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values
are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer
uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For mockups.

1. Provide plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and size of mockup
construction.
2. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components.
3. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two
dimensions.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITALS
A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities

and responsibilities.
B. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel.
C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having

jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having
jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems:
1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed
in the designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.
2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the
wind-force-resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.
1.6 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN
A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice to

Proceed, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in
format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions,
tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and
quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule.

B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained

and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control
procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.
1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent.
C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements

through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of
personnel responsible for submittal review.
D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of

Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following:
1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed
tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-
elected tests and inspections.
2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on
the "Statement of Special Inspections."
3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents.
E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection

during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to
testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to
bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract
requirements and approved mockups.
F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of
approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming
or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into
compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.7 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information

documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified
in other Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report.
2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of
product.
3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed
performance complies with requirements.
6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

B. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information

documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and
inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service
representative making report.
2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements.
3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed
performance complies with requirements.
4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits,
licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices,
receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar
documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on
performance of the Work.
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification

levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems

similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or

assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project,
whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service
performance.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified

to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in
material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities

shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations.
Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for
the activities indicated.
1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for
specialists.

G. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative

of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect
installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to
those indicated for this Project.
H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized

representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect
installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to
those indicated for this Project.
I. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for
each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements,
using materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ
workers that will be employed during the construction at Project.
4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or
construction.
a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.
6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed Work.
7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.
1.9 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation,
including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 01 33
23 "Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples."
B. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's

technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical
representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences,
examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of
Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of
written reports.
C. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required testing,

quality-assurance, and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid
necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and
inspecting.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION

Argyle Elementary School No. 4 Project 22296.0000
SECTION 01 45 23
STRUCTURAL TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and
quality control to be provided by Owner’s designated Testing Agency.
B. Testing and inspection services are required to verify compliance with requirements
specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for
compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
1. Specific quality-assurance and quality-control requirements for individual work
results are specified in their respective Specification Sections. Requirements in
individual Sections may also cover production of standard products.
2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other
quality-assurance and quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Field Quality-Control Tests and Inspections: Tests and inspections that are performed
on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.
B. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an

employee, subcontractor, or sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction
operation, including installation, erection, application, assembly, and similar operations.
C. Source Quality-Control Tests and Inspections: Tests and inspections that are performed
at the source (e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop).
D. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. The
term "testing laboratory" shall have the same meaning as the term "testing agency."
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent

report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in
other Sections. Include the following:
Structural Testing and Inspection Services 01 45 23 - 1

1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample-taking and testing
and inspection.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies
with the Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
B. The testing agency shall provide all appropriate signed and sealed Special Inspection
Certificates as part of the project’s close-out documents. These certificates shall confirm
that all work requiring special inspection has been adequately performed and the special
inspections have been made by an individual or firm qualified to make special
inspections per the referenced Building Code.
A. Testing and Inspecting Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent

agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated,
as documented in accordance with ASTM E329, and with additional qualifications
specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction,
that is acceptable to authorities.
1.6 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's

responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspection they
are engaged to perform.
2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated
by Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to
Contractor.
B. Contractor Responsibilities:
1. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that
requires testing or inspection will be performed.

2. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having

jurisdiction, when they so direct.
C. Contractor's Associated Requirements and Services: Cooperate with agencies and

representatives performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control
services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency
sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
D. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-

assurance and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity
of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspection.
1.7 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to
conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the
responsibility of Owner as indicated in the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1. Date test or inspection was conducted.
2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.
3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access
to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
1. Submit log at Project closeout as part of Project Record Documents.
3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspection, sample-taking, and similar services, repair

damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore
patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that
are as invisible as possible.
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of

responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 01 45 29
TESTING AGENCY SERVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements
specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for
compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction
activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements
in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.
2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other
quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
3. Requirements for Contractor to provide testing or inspections services required
by Architect, Engineer, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by
provisions of this Section.
4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.
1. Section 01 45 16 "Contactor’s Quality Control" for Contractor quality assurance
and quality control requirements.
1.2 REFERENCES
1. ASTM E 329: Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction
Inspection and/or Testing
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project

before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or
compliance with specified criteria.
B. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or
a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified
requirements.
C. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the
source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop.
Testing Agency Services 01 45 29 - 1

D. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for
installation of the Work and for completed Work.
E. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both.

Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance"

Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications
in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized
authority.
B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1. Specification Section number and title.
2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
3. Description of test and inspection.
4. Identification of applicable standards.
5. Identification of test and inspection methods.
6. Number of tests and inspections required.
7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
8. Requirements for obtaining samples.
9. Unique characteristics of each testing service.
A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in
other Sections. Include the following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and
testing and inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies
with the Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification

levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with

the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as
documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in
individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is
acceptable to authorities.
1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary
Laboratory Accreditation Program.
C. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction

testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods,
comply with the following:
1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:
a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and
construction.
b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and
analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, and mockups to
adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance
requirements.
d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will
perform same tasks for Project.
e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and
methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.
f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies,
and mockups; do not reuse products on Project.
2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test,
inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect and Engineer, with
copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report
whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract
Documents.
1.7 TESTING SERVICES
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where testing services are indicated as Owner's

responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting
they are engaged to perform.
2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated

by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to
Contractor.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are
Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional testing activities required to verify that
the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide testing services specified and those required
by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform testing services required of Contractor
by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.
2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified
testing agency to perform these testing services.
a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed
to in writing by Owner.
3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that
requires testing or inspecting will be performed.
4. Where testing services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each testing service.
5. Engagement of Testing Agency and specified tests, inspections and related
actions are not intended to limit the Contractor's quality-control procedures and in
no way relieves his obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements
of Contract Documents.
6. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
7. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having
jurisdiction, when they so direct.
C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were

Contractor's responsibility, provide testing services, including retesting and
reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract
Documents at no additional cost to Owner.
D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Engineer, and Contractor

in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and
inspections.
1. Notify Architect, Engineer, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or
deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ
tests are conducted.
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether
tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar
testing service through Contractor.
5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or
approve or accept any portion of the Work.
6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
7. Do not stop the Work.

E. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections,

and similar testing services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested.
Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel.
Provide the following:
1. Access to the Work.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing
and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by
testing agency.
7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at
Project site.
F. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required testing,

quality-assurance, and testing services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity
of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
G. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and

similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of
Contractor's quality-control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's
construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses.
1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, Engineer, testing agencies,
and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and
inspections are required.
1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency or special
inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having
jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows:
1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control
procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to
perform the Work.
2. Notifying Architect, Engineer and Contractor promptly of irregularities and
deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-
control service to Architect and Engineer, with copy to Contractor and to
4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial
Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the
following:
1. Date test or inspection was conducted.
2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.
3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide
access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services,

repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore
patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams
that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document
requirements for cutting and patching in Section 01 73 29 "Cutting and Patching."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for testing service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of

responsibility for testing services.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 01 50 00
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Requirements for temporary services and facilities including but not
limited to the following:
1. Temporary Utilities:
a. Water service and distribution.
b. Lighting.
c. Electrical power service and distribution.
d. Telephone and facsimile service.
e. Computer Internet service
f. Storm and sanitary sewers.
2. Temporary construction and support facilities:
a. Temporary heat.
b. Field offices and storage sheds.
c. Sanitary facilities, including drinking water.
d. Temporary enclosures.
3. Security and protection facilities:
a. Temporary fire protection.
b. Barricades, warning signs, and lights.
c. Webcam
d. Enclosure fence.
1.2 REFERENCE
A. National Fire Protection Association:

1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical.
2. NFPA 70E - Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces.
3. NFPA 241 - Safeguarding Construction, Alteration and Demolition Operations.
1.3 USE OF PERMANENT FACILITIES
A. Permanent facilities shall not be used for field office or for storage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 01 50 00 - 1

A. Materials may be new or used, adequate in capacity for required usage, must not
create unsafe conditions, and must not violate requirements of applicable codes and
standards.
B. Provide warning signs to help prevent damage and injury.
C. Should it become necessary to temporarily remove safety items, replace item

immediately, in conformance with applicable regulations.
D. Wood materials used in barricades and barriers within building and in material storage
areas shall be fire-retardant.
2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING
A. Contractor shall pay for temporary power used during construction. Arrange with utility
company to provide service required for power and lighting of construction trailers,
facilities and for construction operations.
B. Install circuit and branch wiring, with weather-resistant area distribution boxes located
so that power and lighting is available throughout construction by use of construction-
type power cords.
C. Provide adequate artificial lighting for areas of work when natural light is not adequate
for work, and for areas accessible to public.
D. Provide construction lighting throughout construction areas as necessary to maintain

safety and security. Maintain lighting on daily basis, including weekends, holidays, and
foul-weather days so construction site is adequately lighted.
2.3 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION
A. Provide temporary heat and ventilation as required to maintain adequate environmental

conditions to facilitate progress of Work, to meet specified minimum conditions for
installation of materials, and to protect materials and finishes from damage due to
temperature or humidity.
B. Provide adequate forced ventilation of enclosed areas for curing of installed materials,
to disperse humidity, and to prevent hazardous accumulations of dust, fumes, vapors
or gases. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substance.
C. Portable heaters shall be standard units complete with controls.
D. Pay costs of installation, maintenance, operation and removal, and for fuel consumed.
E. Open flame heating equipment is not permissible.
2.4 TEMPORARY WATER

A. Contractor shall pay for temporary water used for construction purposes. Arrange with
utility company to provide services required for water used during construction.
B. Pay costs for installation, maintenance and removal.
C. Install branch piping with taps located so that water is available throughout construction
by use of hoses. Protect piping and fittings against freezing.
2.5 COMMUNICATION SERVICES
A. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for

use by all construction personnel. Install [one] <Insert number> telephone line(s) for
each field office.
1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following:
a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field
office.
b. Provide one telephone line(s) for Owner's use.
2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.
a. Police and fire departments.
b. Ambulance service.
c. Contractor's home office.
d. Architect's office.
e. Engineers' offices.
f. Owner's office.
g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.
3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use
when away from field office.
B. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field

office adequate for use by Architect and Owner to access project electronic documents
and maintain electronic communications. Equip computer with not less than the
following:
1. Processor: Intel Core i5 or i7.
2. Memory: 4 gigabyte.
3. Disk Storage: 500 gigabyte hard disk drive and combination DVD-RW/CD-RW
drive.
4. Display: 24 inch (610 mm) LCD monitor with 256-Mb dedicated video RAM.
5. Full size keyboard and mouse.
6. Network Connectivity: 10/100BaseT Ethernet or Gigabit.
7. Operating System: Microsoft Windows 10 Professional.
8. Productivity Software:
a. Microsoft Office Professional, 2013 or higher, including Word, Excel, and
Outlook.
b. Adobe Reader 11.0 or higher.
c. WinZip 7.0 or higher.

9. Printer: All in one unit equipped with printer server, combining color printing,
photocopying, scanning, and faxing, or separate units for each of these three
functions.
10. Internet Service: Broadband modem, router and ISP, equipped with hardware
firewall, providing minimum 1.0 Mbps upload and 15 Mbps download speeds at
each computer.
11. Internet Security: Integrated software, providing software firewall, virus, spyware,
phishing, and spam protection in a combined application.
12. Backup: External hard drive, minimum 2 terabyte, with automated backup
software providing daily backups.
C. Pay costs for installation, maintenance and removal, and service charges for local
calls. Toll charges shall be paid by party who places call.
2.6 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide temporary sanitary facilities outside building for use of Contractor's employees.
B. Provide chemical-type sanitary facilities in compliance with applicable health laws, and
State and local regulations and ordinances.
C. Service, clean and maintain facilities and enclosures.
2.7 TEMPORARY SEWER AND DRAIN CONNECTIONS
A. When existing sewers have to be taken up or removed, provide and maintain

temporary outlets and connections for public or private drains and sewers.
B. Take care of sewage and drainage which will be received from these drains and
sewers. Provide and maintain, adequate pumping facilities and temporary outlets or
diversions.
C. Construct troughs, pipes, or other structures necessary. Dispose of drainage and

sewage received from temporary connections until permanent connections are built
and in service.
D. Keep existing sewers and connections in service and maintained under Contract,
except where specified or ordered to be abandoned by Owner.
E. Dispose of water or sewage in satisfactory manner so that no nuisance is created and

that Work under construction will adequately be protected.
2.8 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION
A. During construction, provide temporary fire protection in accordance with local Fire
Department Protection Code and applicable governing authorities.

B. Take necessary precautions in welding or cutting operations to keep work area free of
combustible materials. Do not use welding equipment around flammable liquids or
vapors.
C. Keep welding and cutting equipment outdoors wherever possible. Remove welding
and cutting equipment wherever practical from building daily.
D. At completion of work operations, examine work and adjacent area for hazards. When
work operation is near building opening, examine areas above, below or adjacent to
work area for hazards.
E. Do not open, turn off, interfere with, attach pipe or hose to, or connect to existing fire
hydrant, stop valves, or stop clock, or tap water main without prior written permission of
proper authority or owner.
2.9 SCAFFOLDING
A. Provide scaffolding, ramps, runways, platforms, guardrails, stairs and ladders as

required by job conditions.
2.10 LIFTING AND HOISTING
A. Provide hoists, cranes or other lifts as required for material handling.
B. Determine need, provide appropriate equipment, coordinate installation and location

with Architect and Owner.
2.11 CONSTRUCTION AND INSPECTION AIDS
A. Provide construction aids, inspection aids, and equipment required by Contractor’s

personnel to facilitate execution of Work.
B. Provide Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) for use by Architect’s personnel while on
jobsite that meets or exceeds Contractor’s jobsite safety program and local OSHA
requirements.
2.12 BARRICADES
A. Provide barriers to prevent public entry, to protect existing trees and plants, to provide
for Owner's use of site, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from
damage.
B. Cover trenches and holes when not in use. Erect barriers at sharp changes in plane of
more than 3 feet.
2.13 CONSTRUCTION FENCE

A. Prior to start of Work at Project site, install enclosure fence with locked entrance gates.
B. Provide construction fence around material storage and construction areas to prevent
unauthorized access.
1. Construct 6'-0" high chain link fence of 2" x 2" mesh maximum; galvanized steel
angle iron or pipe post; securely anchored line, corner and gate posts.
2. Provide lockable gates, padlocked during nonworking hours.
3. Locate personnel gates, as necessary, to provide controlled entry from
construction parking to construction area.
2.14 FIELD OFFICES
A. Provide and maintain temporary field office during entire construction period for use of
Contractor.
B. Field office shall be structurally sound, weathertight, with floors raised above ground.
At Contractor's option, portable or mobile buildings may be used. Do not use mobile
buildings for living quarters. Size as required for Contractor's needs and to provide
space for project meetings.
C. Field office shall have operable, screened windows with locks. Secure entrance door
with one key for each occupant.
D. Sanitary Facilities: Furnish private lavatory-toilet facilities with soap and towel
dispensers and trash can.
E. Heating and Air Conditioning: Provide as dictated by outside temperature.
F. Fire Extinguisher: Furnish appropriate type at each office and each storage area.
G. Office for Architect and Owner's Representatives:

1. Furnish self-contained space for use of Architect and Owner's representatives
within Contractor's field office.
2. Furnishings: Provide two standard size desks, with drawers, two swivel chairs,
one drafting table and stool, two lockable four-drawer legal metal file cabinets,
two visitor chairs, and one plan rack.
2.15 STORAGE SHEDS
A. Construct to protect products stored within. Size for storage requirements of products
in individual Sections. Allow for access and orderly provision for maintenance and for
examination of products.
B. Heat and ventilate as needed to maintain products in accordance with Contract

Documents. Light adequately for maintenance and examination of products.
C. Store products that could be damaged by environmental conditions. Replace if

damaged by storage conditions.

2.16 DRINKING WATER
A. Furnish potable water for personnel connected with Work.
B. Pipe or transport to keep clean and fresh.
C. Provide drinking water in suitable containers or dispensers and paper cups located in
close proximity to where work is in progress.
D. Provide field offices with bottled drinking water, dispenser and cooling apparatus.
Contractor shall pay for service; maintain daily and remove when offices are removed.
2.17 TEMPORARY SECURITY
A. Provide temporary security as necessary to protect project site, existing building, and
Contractor's staging areas during construction.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine site and review conditions and factors which affect construction procedures
and construction facilities, including adjacent properties and public facilities which may
be affected by execution of Work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Fill and grade sites for temporary structures to provide drainage away from buildings.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with applicable requirements of each Specification Section.
B. Install facilities of neat and reasonable, uniform appearance, structurally adequate for
required purposes. Maintain during entire construction period.
C. Prior to start of Work at project site, install enclosure fence with locked entrance gates.
D. Install office spaces ready for occupancy 15 days after date fixed in Notice to Proceed.
Construct or locate construction offices and sheds on proper foundation, with utility
connections, provide steps and landing at entrances. Locate construction offices and
sheds as directed by Architect.
E. Locate thermometer in convenient location, out of direct sunlight.
F. Keep working and storage areas free from standing water. Do not pump or drain water
onto adjacent property. Distribute discharge to prevent erosion.

3.4 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintain and clean construction office, sheds, furnishings, and equipment as required.
Periodically clean storage sheds.
B. Maintain approach walks free of mud, water, and snow.
C. Maintain and operate systems to assure continuous service. Modify and extend
systems as work progress requires.
3.5 DEBRIS CONTROL
A. Maintain areas under Contractor's control free of extraneous debris and litter.
B. Initiate and maintain specific program to prevent accumulation of debris at construction

site, storage and parking areas, or along access roads and haul routes.
1. Furnish on-site containers for collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish.
2. Prohibit overloading of trucks to prevent spillages on access and haul routes.
3. Periodically examine traffic areas to enforce requirements.
4. Remove waste material, debris and rubbish from site daily.
5. Do not drop or throw materials from heights.
6. Lower waste materials in controlled manner with as few handlings as possible.
C. Hazards Control:
1. Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers.
2. Remove containers from premises daily.
3. Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions.
4. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances.
D. Conduct disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws.
E. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on Project site. Do not dispose of
wastes into streams or waterways. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral
spirits, oil or paint thinner in storm or sanitary drains.
3.6 DUST CONTROL
A. Provide positive methods and apply dust control materials to minimize raising dust from
construction operations and provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from
dispersing into atmosphere.
B. Wet down materials and rubbish to prevent blowing dust.
3.7 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

A. Plan and execute construction and earthwork by methods to control surface drainage
from cuts and fills, and from borrow and waste disposal areas, to prevent erosion and
sedimentation.
B. Hold areas of bare soil exposed at one time to minimum. Provide temporary control
measures such as berms, dikes, and drains.
C. Construct fills and waste areas by selective placement to eliminate surface silts or
clays which will erode.
D. Periodically examine earthwork to detect evidence of start of erosion, apply corrective

measures as required by erosion control.
3.8 POLLUTION CONTROL
A. Provide methods, means and facilities required to prevent contamination of soil, water
or atmosphere by discharge of noxious substances from construction operations.
B. Perform emergency measures required to contain spillage and to remove

contaminated soil or liquids. Excavate and dispose of contaminated earth off site and
replace with suitable compacted fill and topsoil.
C. Prevent harmful substances from entering public waters. Prevent disposal of wastes,
effluence, chemicals or other substances adjacent to streams or in sanitary or storm
sewers.
D. Provide systems for control of atmospheric pollutants. Prevent toxic concentrations of

chemicals. Prevent harmful dispersal of pollutants into atmosphere.
3.9 REMOVAL
A. Remove temporary materials and equipment when no longer required and when
acceptable to Architect.
B. Remove construction office, sheds, and barriers including foundations and contents at
completion of project.
C. Grade site to required elevation and clean area.
D. Replace landscaping damaged by Contractor's operations.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or temporary facilities.
3.11 ADJUSTING
A. Restore existing facilities used for temporary services to specified or original condition.

B. Restore permanent facilities used for temporary services to specified condition.
C. Prior to final inspection, remove temporary lamps and install new lamps.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 01 58 00
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Project identification signs.
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of proposed project signs within 15 days of
written Notice to Proceed showing content, layout, lettering, color, foundation details,
structural materials, sizes and grades of members.
A. Sign Painter Qualifications: Experienced as a professional sign company.
1.4 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintain signs and supports in a neat, clean condition. Repair damages to structure,
framing or finish of sign.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements:
1. Design sign and structure to withstand 70 mph wind velocity.
2. Sign Construction: Project identification signs shall be constructed of new
materials and painted new for the project.
3. Finishes/Painting: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping for
duration of Construction.
2.2 SIGN MATERIALS
A. Structure and Framing:

1. Sign Posts: Use 4-inch by 4-inch treated wood posts, sized to fix top of sign at 6
feet above grade.
Project Identification and Signs 01 58 00 - 1

2. Sign Supports: Treated 2-inch by 4-inch wood framing material.

3. Fasteners:
a. Use galvanized steel fasteners.
b. Use 3/8-inch by 5-1/2-inch button head carriage bolts to attach sign to
posts. Secure with nuts and flat head washers at locations as
recommended by Sign Manufacturer.
c. Cover button heads with white reflective film or paint to match sign
background.
B. Sign and Sign Header: Use medium density overlaid marine plywood, minimum 3/4-
inch thick. Use full-size 4-foot by 8-foot sheets for sign and a single piece for header to
minimize joints; do not piece wood to fabricate a sign face.
C. Paint and Primers: White paint used to prime surfaces and to resist weathering shall be
an industrial grade, fast-dying, oil-based paint with gloss finish. Paint structural and
framing members white on all sides and edges to resist weathering. Paint sign and sign
header material white on all sides and edges to resist weathering. Paint all sign
surfaces with this weather-protective paint prior to adding any sign paint or adhered
graphic image applications.
D. Colors and Graphics: Follow criteria provided by Architect.
2.3 SIGNAGE
A. Project Identification Sign:

1. Painted sign of size, lettering and construction shown on drawing provided by
Architect.
2. Location and number on site as indicated by Architect.
3. Paint graphics in styles and sizes as selected by Architect.
B. Other Informational Signs:

1. Painted signs with painted lettering, or standard products.
2. Size of signs and lettering to be as required by regulatory agencies, or as
appropriate to usage.
3. Colors to be as required by applicable regulatory agencies, or otherwise of
uniform colors throughout job as selected by Architect.
4. Erect informational signs at locations necessary to provide required information.
5. Graphics in styles and sizes as provided by Architect.
6. Install at height for optimum visibility, on ground-mounted poles or as attached to
temporary structural surfaces.
3.1 PREPARATION

A. Construct and erect project signs at locations directed by Architect or as required by

governing authority.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install project identification signs within 30 days of written Notice to Proceed.
B. Install additional informational signage as required by regulatory agencies or as

appropriate to usage.
C. Sink posts a mínimum of 30-inches below grade in 10-inch diameter postholes.

Stabilize posts with sharp sand or concrete to minimize lateral motion. Leave a
mínimum of 8-feet of post above existing grade for mounting of the sign and header.
D. Erect sign level and plumb. Cut off post tops extending above sign after erected.
3.3 RELOCATION/REMOVAL
A. Remove signs, framing, supports and foundations at completion of Project.
B. Relocate informational signs as required by progress of work.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 01 60 00
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Administrative and procedural requirements governing the selection of products
for use in the project.
2. Product delivery, storage, and handling.
3. Manufacturers' standard and special warranties on products.
4. Manufacturers' instructions and certifications.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for
Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the
terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including
make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's
published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another
project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not
considered new products.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through
submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function,
dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other
characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific

manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design
product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the
significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance,
physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating
comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.
C. Subject to Compliance with Requirements: Where the phrase "Subject to compliance

with requirements" introduces a product selection procedure in an individual
Specification Section, provide products qualified under the specified product
procedure. In the event that a named product or product by a named manufacturer
does not meet the other requirements of the specifications, select another named
product or product from another named manufacturer that does meet the requirements
of the specifications.
Product Requirements 01 60 00 - 1
A. Proposed Products List: Within period of 30 days after award of Contract, submit to
Architect five (5) copies of complete list of major Products, which are proposed for
installation.
1. Tabulate products by Specification Section number, title, and Article number.
2. For products specified only by reference standards, list for each such product:
a. Name and address of manufacturer.
b. Trade name.
c. Model or catalogue designation.
d. Manufacturer's Data including reference standards and performance test
data.
3. Architect will reply promptly in writing stating whether there is reasonable
objection to any listed items. Failure to object to a listed item shall not constitute
waiver of requirements of Contract Documents.
B. Comparable Product Request Submittal: Submit request for consideration of each

comparable product. Identify basis-of-design product or fabrication or installation
method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing
numbers and titles.
1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in
"Comparable Products" Article.
2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a comparable
product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of
proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or
seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is
later.
a. Form of Architect's Approval of Submittal: As specified in Section 01 33 00
"Submittal Procedures."
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a
comparable product request within time allocated.
C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section

01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
A. Materials specified are to a define standard of quality or performance and to establish

basis for evaluation of proposals and substitutions.
B. Comply with individual Specification Sections and referenced standards as minimum

requirements.
C. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more

products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously
selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods
compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.
2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but
incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.
D. Source Limitations: Components required to be supplied in quantity within

Specification Section shall be of same manufacturer and shall be interchangeable.
E. Nameplates and Labels: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach
or imprint manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trade marks on surfaces of
products which will be exposed to view.
1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface or,
where required for observation after installation, on an accessible surface
approved by Architect and governing authorities.
2. Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected
or power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface which is
inconspicuous in occupied spaces.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent
damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for
items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to
deterioration, theft, and other losses.
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's
original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and
instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract
Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly
protected.
C. Storage:
1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of
units.
2. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a
weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent
condensation.
3. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature,
humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
4. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
5. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials
and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.
1.6 INSTRUCTIONS
A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with
manufacturers printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of instructions to
parties involved in installation, including two copies to Architect, prior to commencing
work.
1. Maintain one set of complete instructions at job site during installation and until
complete.
2. Maintain one set of complete instructions for Project Record Documents.
B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accord with
manufacturer's instructions and in conformity with specified requirements.
1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's
instructions, notify Architect in writing for further instructions.
2. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions.
C. Perform Work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit preparatory

steps of installation procedures unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract
Documents.
1.7 CERTIFICATION
A. Prior to Final Acceptance of Work, for items designated in Specification Sections, an

authorized representative of each manufacturer of materials or equipment installed
under work of that Section shall examine installation and operation of his materials,
system and equipment to determine they are correctly installed and operating properly.
B. Examination and testing shall be accomplished for work which will be concealed during
execution of Work, after completion of installation and prior to concealment and for
Work which will not be concealed, at completion of Work.
C. Each representative shall submit signed statement to Owner, through Contractor,

certifying to his examination and to correct installation and proper operation of
materials, systems or equipment. Certification shall list items included.
D. Contractor shall transmit certifications to Architect at or prior to Final Acceptance

Inspection. Transmittal shall include list of certifications included.
1.8 MAINTENANCE
A. For electrical equipment in long-term storage, provide manufacturer's service

instructions shown on exterior of package.
B. Service equipment on a regular basis as recommended by manufacturer. Maintain log

of maintenance services. Submit log as Project Record Document in accordance with
requirements of Section 01 78 39.
1.9 WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with,
other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and
limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer
for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to
provide specific rights for Owner.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information
and properly executed.
2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications,
prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed.
3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements
for submitting special warranties.
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract
Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of
installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other
items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard
options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been
produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in
conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the
Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.
6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or
equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in
"Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
B. Product Selection Procedures: Product selection is governed by the Contract

Documents and governing regulations, not by previous Project experience.
1. Sole Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product,
provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable
products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
a. Sole product may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide the following: …"
2. Sole Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or
source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies
with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's
convenience will not be considered.
a. Sole manufacturer/source may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: …"
3. Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both
manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with
requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience
will be considered unless otherwise indicated.
a. Limited list of products may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: …"
4. Non-Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of
both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or
an unnamed product, which complies with requirements.
a. Non-limited list of products is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to
compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated
in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: …"
5. Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of
manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that
complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for
Contractor's convenience will be considered unless otherwise indicated.
a. Limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: …"
6. Non-Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of
available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or
a product by an unnamed manufacturer, which complies with requirements.
a. Non-limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to
compliance with requirements, available manufacturers whose products
may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following: …"
7. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a
product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the
specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other
named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles,
dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named.
Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of
an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.
a. For approval of products by unnamed manufacturers, comply with
requirements in Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" for
substitutions for convenience.
C. Performance Specifications Requirements: Where specifications require compliance

with performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements,
and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated.
D. Compliance with Standards, Codes and Regulations: Where specifications require

compliance with an imposed code, standard or regulation, select a product that
complies with the code, standard or regulations specified.
E. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's

sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's
sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other
specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00
"Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.
F. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected
by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that
complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or
texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium
items.
2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for

comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following
conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to
record noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract
Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those
named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as
performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and
requirements indicated.
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
5. Samples, if requested.
B. Submittal Requirements: Approval by the Architect of Contractor's request for use of

comparable product is not intended to satisfy other submittal requirements. Comply
with specified submittal requirements.
2.3 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Refer to Section 01 25 00 – “Substitution Procedures.”
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Make periodic examinations of stored materials to verify that products are maintained
under specified conditions and are free from damage or deterioration.
B. Verify that storage facilities comply with manufacturer's product storage requirements.
C. Verify that manufacturer required environmental conditions are maintained continually.
D. Verify that surfaces of products exposed to elements are not adversely affected and
that weathering of finishes is within acceptable tolerances under requirements of
Contract Documents.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Furnish protection against weather. Cover building openings to protect interior of

building from weather.
B. Maintain work, materials, apparatus and fixtures free from damage.
C. Protect items having factory finish to prevent damage to finish and equipment.
D. At end of day's work, cover new work likely to be damaged or otherwise protect as
necessary.
E. After installation, secure substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed

products from damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations.
F. Remove protection when no longer needed. Upon completion of work, remove storage
facilities from site.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Do not use materials in work which have deteriorated, become damaged or are
otherwise unfit for use.
B. Replace stored items damaged by inadequate protection or environmental controls.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01 71 23
FIELD ENGINEERING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements

for field engineering services, including, but not limited to the following:
1. Land Survey Work.
2. Civil Engineering Services.
1.2 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Land Surveyor: Registered in the State of Texas and acceptable to Architect.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit name, address, and telephone number of Land Surveyor before starting survey
work.
B. On request of Architect, submit documentation to verify accuracy of survey.
C. Submit certificate signed by Land Surveyor that elevations and locations of Work are in
conformance with Contract Documents.
1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.
B. On completion of major site improvements, prepare certified survey showing

dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and site work.
C. Record data on Project Record Documents in accordance with requirements of Section

01 78 39.
D. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Advise Architect when deviations
that exceed indicated or recognized tolerances are detected.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
Field Engineering 01 71 23 - 1
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work.
B. Verify grades, lines, levels, and dimensions indicated.
C. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered.
3.2 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS
A. Owner will locate and protect survey control and reference points.
B. Control datum for survey is that established by Owner provided survey.
C. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work. Preserve permanent reference
points during construction.
D. Promptly report to Architect loss or destruction of reference point or relocation required

because of changes in grades or other reasons.
E. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no
changes without prior written notice to Architect.
3.3 SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide field engineering services. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices.
B. Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on site, referenced to established

control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
C. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and
similar appropriate means:
1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil
placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations.
2. Grid or axis for structures.
3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations.
D. Periodically verify layouts by same means.
3.4 SURVEYS FOR MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Perform surveys to determine quantities of unit cost work, including control surveys to
establish measurement reference lines. Notify Architect prior to starting work.
B. Contractor's Engineer shall sign surveyor's field notes or keep duplicate field notes.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01 73 29
CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Requirements and limitations of cutting and patching of Work.
2. Execute cutting, fitting and patching, including attendant excavation and backfill,
required to complete Work or to:
a. Make its several parts fit together properly.
b. Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work.
c. Remove and replace defective work.
d. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract
Documents.
e. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing.
f. Make routine penetrations of non-structural surfaces for installation of
mechanical, electrical and plumbing Work.
g. Uncover work that has been covered prior to Architect's required
observation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit written request to Architect in advance of executing cutting or alteration, other

than required by Contract Documents, which affects:
1. Work of Owner or separate contractor.
2. Structural value or integrity of any element of Project.
3. Integrity or effectiveness of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements or
systems.
4. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance or safety of operational elements.
5. Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements.
B. Request shall include:

1. Identification of Project.
2. Location and description of affected work.
3. Necessity for cutting, alteration or excavation.
4. Effect on work of Owner or separate contractor, or on structural or weatherproof
integrity of Project.
5. Description of proposed work:
a. Scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation.
b. Trades who will execute work.
c. Products proposed to be used.
Cutting and Patching 01 73 29 - 1

d. Extent of refinishing to be done.

e. Cost proposal when applicable.
6. Alternatives to cutting and patching.
7. Written permission of separate contractor whose work will be affected.
C. Should conditions of Work or schedule indicate change of products from original

installation, Contractor shall submit request for substitution as specified in Section 01
25 00.
D. Submit written notice to Architect designating date and time work will be uncovered or
altered.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Where warranties are in force for existing work, coordinate cutting and patching work
with manufacturer and installer of warranted product to avoid voiding warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Comply with specifications and standards for each specific product involved.
1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction
practices and procedures, use products for patching that comply with sustainable
design requirements.
B. Should conditions of work or schedule indicate change of products from original

installation, submit request for substitution as specified in Section 01 25 00.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine existing conditions of Project, including elements subject to damage or to

movement during cutting, patching, excavating, and backfilling.
B. After uncovering work, examine conditions affecting installation of Products, or

performance of work.
C. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to Architect in writing. Do not proceed

with work until Architect has provided further instructions.
3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to assure structural value or

integrity of affected portion of Work.
B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage.
C. Provide protection from elements for that portion of the Project which may be exposed
by cutting and patching work.
D. Maintain excavations free from water.
3.3 DUST CONTROL
A. Provide positive methods of dust control and apply dust control materials to minimize
raising dust from cutting and patching operations.
B. Conform to requirements for temporary barriers, enclosures and controls described in

Section 01 50 00 “Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls.”
3.4 PERFORMANCE
A. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other work,
and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs.
B. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide finished installation to comply

with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes.
C. Restore work which has been cut or removed. Install new products to provide Work in
accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
D. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through
surfaces.
E. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide even finish to match adjacent finishes:
1. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection.
2. For assembly, refinish entire unit.
F. Employ original installer or fabricator of work performed under this Contract to perform
cutting and patching for:
1. Weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements.
2. Sight-exposed finished surfaces.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 01 74 13
CONSTRUCTION CLEANING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Cleaning and disposal of waste materials, debris, and rubbish during
construction.
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Hazard Control: Store volatile waste in covered metal containers and remove
from premises daily.
2. Pollution Control: Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local
codes, ordinances, and anti-pollution laws.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT
A. Provide acceptable covered containers for deposit of waste materials, debris and
rubbish.
B. Use only cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health and property, and
which will not damage surfaces.
C. Use only those cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be

cleaned.
D. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material

manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Execute daily "broom-clean" construction cleaning to keep Work, site and adjacent
properties free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and debris. Maintain
site in a clean and orderly condition including the following:
Construction Cleaning 01 74 13 - 1
1. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and
other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.
2. Provide on-site dump containers for collection of waste materials, rubbish and
debris.
3. Do not allow waste materials, rubbish and debris to accumulate and become an
unsightly and hazardous condition. Provide additional collection and dispose of
debris whenever periodic schedule is inadequate to prevent accumulation.
B. At not less than every week during progress of Work, clean up site and access, and
legally dispose of waste materials, rubbish, and debris away from site.
C. Do not overload trucks to prevent spillage on access and haul routes. Periodically
examine traffic areas and maintain clear routes.
3.2 DUST CONTROL
A. Sprinkle dusty debris with water.
B. Schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning
process will not fall on wet and newly painted surfaces.
3.3 DISPOSAL
A. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site daily and dispose off-site.
B. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner in storm or
sanitary sewer. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible
waste material and debris. Enforce requirements strictly.
C. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days when
temperature is expected to rise above 80 degrees F.
D. Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other

waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material in lawful manner.
E. Do not dispose of wastes into streams or waterways. Do not burn or bury rubbish and
waste material on Project site.
F. Disposal of waste in Owner's containers on site is not permitted.
END OF SECTION
Construction Cleaning 01 74 13 - 2
SECTION 01 74 23
FINAL CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for final cleaning at

1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Conduct cleaning and waste disposal operations in full

compliance with federal and local environmental and anti-pollution regulations, ordinances
and laws.
1. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner in storm
or sanitary drains.
2. Burning or burying of debris, rubbish or other waste material on the premises will not
be permitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents:
1. Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by the manufacturer or fabricator
of surface to be cleaned.
2. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property, or
that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING AT SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. General:
1. Complying with manufacturer's instructions, clean each surface or unit of Work to
the condition expected from a commercial building cleaning and maintenance
program using experienced workers or professional cleaners.
2. Complete cleaning operations and conduct an examination of Work areas with
Owner and Architect before requesting inspection for Certification of Substantial
Completion for the entire Project or a portion of the Project.
Final Cleaning 01 74 23 - 1
B. Remove grease, petro-chemical spills, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints,
labels, and other foreign materials from sight-exposed exterior surfaces.
C. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including shafts, trenches,
equipment vaults, manholes, and similar spaces.
D. Remove labels that are not permanent labels.
E. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains.
F. Repair, patch and touch up marred surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.
G. Broom clean exterior paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds.
A. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
END OF SECTION
Final Cleaning 01 74 23 - 2
SECTION 01 77 00
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for project closeout,

including but not limited to:
1. Substantial Completion.
2. Inspection procedures.
3. Closeout submittals.
4. Payments and release of liens.
5. Post construction examinations.
1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. When Contractor considers Work is substantially complete, submit to Architect:

1. Written certification that Work, or designated portion thereof, is substantially
complete.
2. List of items to be completed or corrected, value of incomplete construction and
reasons the Work is not complete.
B. Within seven calendar days after receipt of such certificate, Architect will make
examination to determine status of completion.
C. Should Architect determine that Work is not substantially complete:

1. Architect will promptly notify Contractor in writing, giving reasons.
2. Contractor shall remedy deficiencies in Work, and send second written notice of
substantial completion to Architect.
3. Architect will re-examine Work.
D. When Architect concurs that Work is substantially complete, he will:

1. Prepare Certificate of Substantial Completion on AIA Form G704, accompanied
by Contractor's list of items to be completed or corrected, as verified and
amended by Architect.
2. Submit Certificate to Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of
responsibilities assigned to them in Certificate.
E. After Work is substantially complete, Contractor shall:

1. Allow Owner occupancy of Project under provisions stated in Certificate of
Closeout Procedures 01 77 00 - 1
2. Obtain and submit Certificate of Occupancy, operating certificates and similar

releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work.
3. Complete work listed for completion or correction within designated form.
4. Advise Owner of pending insurance change-over requirements.
5. Perform final cleaning in accordance with Section 01 74 23 “Final Cleaning.”
6. Make final change-over of permanent locks and transmit keys to Owner.
1.3 FINAL INSPECTION
A. When Contractor considers Work is complete, submit written certification that:

1. Contract Documents have been reviewed.
2. Work has been examined for compliance and completed in accordance with
Contract Documents.
3. Equipment and systems have been tested in presence of Owner's representative
and are operational.
4. Work is completed and ready for final examination.
B. Architect will make examination to verify status of completion within seven calendar
days after receipt of such certification.
C. Should Architect consider that Work is incomplete or defective:

1. Architect will promptly notify Contractor in writing, listing incomplete or defective
work.
2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy stated deficiencies, and send
second written certification to Architect that Work is complete.
3. Architect will re-examine Work.
D. When Architect finds that Work is acceptable under Contract Documents, he shall
request Contractor to make closeout submittals.
1.4 REINSPECTION FEES
A. Should Architect perform re-examinations due to failure of Work to comply with claims
of status of completion made by Contractor:
1. Owner will compensate Architect for such additional services.
2. Owner will deduct amount of such compensation from final payment to
Contractor.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities:

1. Certificate of Occupancy.
2. Certificates of Inspection: Mechanical and Electrical systems as required by
respective sections.
B. Project Record Documents: Comply with Section 01 78 39.
C. Operating and Maintenance Data: Comply with Section 01 78 23.
D. Warranties and Bonds: Comply with Section 01 78 30.
E. Spare Parts and Maintenance Material:

1. Provide products, spare parts, and maintenance materials in quantities specified
in each specification section in addition to that required for completion of Work.
2. Coordinate with Owner, deliver to Project site, store properly, and obtain receipt
prior to final payment.
F. Certificate of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations.
1.6 EVIDENCE OF PAYMENTS AND RELEASE OF LIENS
A. Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims: AIA G706.
B. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens: AIA G706A.
C. Attachment to Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens:

1. Consent of Surety to Final Payment: AIA G707.
2. Contractor's Release or Waiver of Liens.
3. Separate releases of waivers of liens from subcontractors, suppliers and others
with lien rights against property of Owner, together with list of those parties.
D. Submittals shall be duly executed before delivery to Owner.
1.7 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS
A. Submit final statement of accounting to Architect.
B. Statement shall reflect adjustments to Contract Sum:

1. Original Contract Sum.
2. Additions and deductions resulting from:
a. Previous Change Orders.
b. Allowances.
c. Unit Prices.
d. Deductions for uncorrected Work.
e. Penalties and Bonuses.
f. Deductions for liquidated damages.
g. Deductions for re-examination payments.
h. Other adjustments.
3. Total Contract Sum, as adjusted.
4. Previous payments.
5. Sum remaining due.
C. Architect will prepare final Change Order, reflecting approved adjustments to Contract
Sum which were not previously made by Change Orders.
1.8 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
A. Contractor shall submit final Application for Payment in accordance with procedures
and requirements stated in Conditions of the Contract.
1.9 ADDITIONAL ADJUSTMENT
A. No adjustments to Contract requested by Contractor will be allowed if asserted after

execution of Final Payment of Contract.
1.10 POST-CONSTRUCTION EXAMINATION
A. Prior to expiration of one year from Date of Substantial Completion, Owner will make
visual examination of Project in company of Contractor to determine whether further
correction of Work is required in accordance with provisions of Contract.
B. Owner will promptly notify Contractor, in writing, of observed deficiencies.
C. Contractor will contact Owner to arrange time and establish schedule for correction of
deficiencies.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01 78 23
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements the preparation and

submittal for operating and maintenance manuals including the following:
1. Operating and maintenance manuals for systems or equipment.
2. Instruction manual covering the care, preservation and maintenance of products
and finishes.
3. Instruction of Owner's operating personnel in operation and maintenance of
systems and equipment.
1.2 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. Prepare instructional manuals and data bound in commercial quality 3-ring binders:
1. Organize with index tabs according to sequence of Specification Sections.
2. Identify each volume with type or printed title as instructed by Architect.
1.3 CONTENT OF MANUALS
A. Arrange typewritten table of contents for each volume, in systematic order:

1. List of each product required to be included with name, address, and telephone
number of:
a. Subcontractor or installer.
b. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate.
c. Local source of supply for parts and replacement.
2. Identifying each product by product name and other identifying symbols.
B. Product Data:
1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to specific product with product
clearly identified.
2. Delete references to inapplicable information.
3. Annotate each sheet to clearly identify specific product or part installed, and data
applicable to installation.
C. Drawings:
1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate
relations of component parts of equipment and systems and control and flow
diagrams.
Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 23 - 1

2. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure

correct illustration of completed installation.
D. Written Text: As required to supplement product data for particular installation to

provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, organized in a consistent
format and in logical sequence of instructions for each procedure.
E. Recommended Spare Parts: Furnish a list of recommended spare parts for each
equipment item that will be needed to support that item of equipment for a 12 month
period. Spare parts list shall contain the following information:
1. Parts Descriptions.
2. Manufacturer's Part Number.
3. Shelf Life.
4. Recommended Quantity.
5. Unit Price.
6. Name and address of the part manufacturer.
7. Name and address of a local supplier for the part.
1.4 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS MANUAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit three copies of completed manuals in final form.
B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate:

1. Description of unit and component parts.
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
2. Operating procedures:
a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Regulation, control, stopping, shutdown and emergency instructions.
c. Summer and winter operating instructions.
d. Special operating instructions.
3. Maintenance Procedures:
a. Routine operations.
b. Guide to "trouble-shooting".
c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
d. Alignment, adjusting and checking.
4. Servicing and lubrication schedule, including list of lubricants required.
5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer.
7. Original manufacturer's parts list, price lists, illustrations, assembly drawings and
diagrams required for maintenance, predicted life of parts subject to wear and
items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
8. As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.
9. Each subcontractor's coordination drawings including as-installed color coded
piping diagrams.

10. Charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve.
11. Water treatment procedures and tests.
12. Final balancing reports for mechanical systems.
13. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and
recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
14. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications.
C. Content, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate:

1. Description of system and component parts.
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
2. Circuit directories of panelboards.
a. Electrical service.
b. Controls.
c. Communications.
3. As-installed color coded wiring diagrams.
4. Operating procedures:
a. Routine and normal operating instructions.
b. Sequences required.
c. Special operating instructions.
5. Maintenance procedures:
a. Routine operations.
b. Guide to "trouble-shooting".
c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
d. Adjustment and checking.
6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.
7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and
recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications.
D. Include warnings of detrimental maintenance practices.
E. Prepare and include additional data when need for such data becomes apparent during
instruction of Owner's personnel or as required under pertinent Specification Section.
F. Refer to individual Sections of Project Manual for additional requirements for operating
and maintenance data.
G. Provide complete information for products and equipment specified in:

1. Division 22: Plumbing
2. Division 26: Electrical Systems.
1.5 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. Submit one copy of completed data in final form 30 days prior to demonstrations of
equipment.

B. Copy will be returned approved or with comments for revisions.
C. Submit specified number of copies of approved data in final form within 10 days prior to
equipment demonstrations and prior to final inspection or acceptance.
1.6 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. Prior to final inspection, instruct the Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and
maintenance of products equipment and systems. Provide instruction at mutually
agreed upon times.
1. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction during
other seasons.
2. Use operation and maintenance manuals for each piece of equipment or system
as the basis of instruction. Review contents in detail to explain aspects of
operation and maintenance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 01 78 30
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: General administrative and procedural requirements for warranties

and bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturer’s standard
warranties on products and special warranties.
1. Compile specified warranties and bonds.
2. Compile specified service and maintenance contracts.
3. Co-execute submittals when so specified.
4. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents.
5. Submit to Architect for review and transmittal to Owner.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Standard Product Warranties: Reprinted written warranties published by individual

manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the
manufacturer to the Owner.
B. Special Warranties: Written warranties required by the Contract Documents, either to

extend time limits provided standard product warranties or to provide greater rights for
the Owner.
C. Emergency Repairs: Owner reserves right to make emergency repairs as required to

keep equipment or materials in operation or to prevent damage to persons or property
without voiding Contractor's warranty or bond, or relieving Contractor of his
responsibilities during contract, warranty or bond periods.
1.3 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS
A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted Work that has failed,
remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or
that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted
Work.
B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty by written

endorsement.
1. Reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable
adjustment for depreciation but not less than 50% of the original warranty period
of time.
Warranties and Bonds 01 78 30 - 1

C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed,
replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of
Contract Documents.
1. Cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner
has benefited from use of the Work through its anticipated useful service life is
the Contractor's responsibility.
D. Rejection of Warranties: Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit
selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract
Documents.
E. Acceptance of Work: Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept Work for the Project
where a special warranty is required on such Work or part of the Work, until evidence
is presented that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do
so.
1.4 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Assemble warranties, bonds, service contracts and maintenance contracts, executed

by each of respective manufacturers, suppliers, and subcontractors.
B. Number of original signed copies required: Two each.
C. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in orderly sequence and provide complete information
for each item.
1. Product or work item.
2. Firm, with name of principal, address and telephone number.
3. Scope.
4. Date of beginning of each warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract.
5. Duration of warranty, bond or service maintenance contract.
6. Provide information for Owner's personnel:
a. Proper procedure in case of failure.
b. Instances which might affect validity of warranty or bond.
7. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.
1.5 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. Prepare in duplicate packets.
B. Format:
1. Size 8-½" x 11", punch sheets for standard 3-ring binder.
2. Fold larger sheets to fit into binders.
3. Cover: Identify each packet with typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND
BONDS".
4. List:
a. Title of Project.

b. Name of Contractor.
C. Binders: Commercial quality, 3-ring, with durable and cleanable plastic covers.
1.6 TIME OF SUBMITTALS
A. Submit warranties to Architect prior to date certified for Substantial Completion or on

date specified in Architect Certificate of Substantial Completion:
1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by
the Owner submit properly executed warranties to Architect within fifteen days of
completion of that designated portion of the Work.
2. For items of work, where acceptance is delayed materially beyond Date of
Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after
acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period.
1.7 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED
A. Submit warranties, bonds, service contracts and maintenance contracts as specified in

each respective Specification Section.
B. Refer to each individual Section of Project Manual for specific warranty and bond
submittal requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 01 78 39
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record

Documents including but not limited to the following:
1. Marked-up copies of Contract Documents including field records for variable and
concealed conditions.
2. Marked-up copies of submittals, shop drawings, product data, and samples.
3. Newly prepared drawings.
1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES
A. For duration of Project, maintain at job site following:

1. One copy of Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, shop drawings, product data,
miscellaneous requested submittal data, change orders and other modifications
to Contract, field orders, field tests or written instructions.
2. One copy of transmittal letters.
3. One set of samples.
B. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used
for construction.
1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents.
2. Provide locked cabinet or secure storage space for storage of samples.
3. Do not permit record documents to be used for construction purposes.
C. File documents and samples in accordance with CSI 50-division format.
D. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use
record documents for construction purposes.
E. Make documents and samples available for examination by Architect.
F. Incomplete or out of order documents and samples will be grounds for not approving
application for payment.
G. Provide felt tip marking pens for recording information in color code designated by
Architect.
Project Record Documents 01 78 39 - 1

H. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat large printed letters. Keep record
documents current. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not
conceal any work until required information is recorded.
1. Prior to creation of paper or electronic copies of record documents, remove
Architect’s and Engineer’s seals from all documents.
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit [one] <Insert number> set(s) of marked-up record
prints.
a. Initial Submittal: Submit one paper copy set of marked-up record prints.
Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional
information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.
b. Final Submittal: Submit one paper copy set and one PDF electronic files of
marked-up record prints. Print/PDF each Drawing file, whether or not
changes and additional information were recorded.
B. Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project's

Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.
C. Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each
submittal.
1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance
manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.
D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for

miscellaneous record-keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various
construction activities. Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each
submittal.
E. Reports: Submit written report monthly indicating items incorporated in Project record
documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including modifications, concealed
conditions, field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated.
1.4 BURDEN OF ACCURACY
A. Contractor shall bear costs of damages incurred by Owner due to inaccuracies or

incompleteness of submitted Record Documents for a period of time following
Substantial Completion as defined by Conditions of the Contract.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings
and Shop Drawings.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation
varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained
record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar
entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record
prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would
be difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.
c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic
documentation.
2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.
b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
c. Depths of foundations below first floor.
d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.
e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.
g. Actual equipment locations.
h. Duct size and routing.
i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.
j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
k. Changes made following Architect's written orders.
l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately.
Utilize personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of
marked-up record prints.
4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to
distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same
location.
5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or
omitted from original Drawings.
6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable
B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial
Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare
a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows:
1. Formats:
a. Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the
original Contract Drawings.
b. Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.
2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record
prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.
3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution.

4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract
Drawings for use in recording information.
a. Refer to Section 01 31 00 “Project Coordination” for requirements related to
use of Architect's digital data files.
b. Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in
separate layers.
C. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing record
Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor
Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation.
1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of
accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification.
2. Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required
to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction.
Integrate newly prepared record Drawings into record Drawing sets; comply with
procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.
D. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT
RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into
manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include
identification on cover sheets.
2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.
3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate
electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name
each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data
file.
4. Identification: As follows:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
d. Name of Architect.
e. Name of Contractor.
2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where

installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract
modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations
that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials,
and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information
necessary to provide a record of selections made.
4. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where
applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file.
2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where
installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations
that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes
in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where
applicable.
B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file, and scanned
PDF electronic file(s) of marked up paper copy of Product Data.
1. Include record Product Data directory organized by specification section number and
title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for

miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of
the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued
use and reference.
B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file, and scanned
PDF electronic file(s) of marked up miscellaneous record submittals.
1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by specification
section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous
record submittals.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 RECORDING
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for
project record document purposes. Post changes and modifications to the Documents
as they occur. Do not wait until the end of the project. Architect will periodically review
record documents to assure compliance.
B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and

Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction.
Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record
documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from
deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's
reference during normal working hours

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01 78 46
EXTRA MATERIALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for stocking of extra

material.
B. Divisions 02 - 41: Specific quantities of extra material required by individual specifications

sections.
1.2 PRODUCTS REQUIRED
A. Provide quantities of extra materials specified in individual specification sections to Owner,

in addition to quantities required for completion of Work.
B. Products to be identical to those installed in Work. Include quantities in original purchase

from supplier or manufacturer to avoid variations in manufacture.
1.3 STORAGE AND MAINTENANCE
A. Temporarily store extra materials with products to be installed in Work, under provision of
Section 01 60 00 “Product Options,” or in other location acceptable to Owner.
B. When adequate, secure storage facilities available at Site, capable of maintaining

conditions required for storage and not required for Contract Work or storage; extra
materials may be stored in available space.
C. Maintain extra materials in manufacturer's unopened original containers with labels intact
and legible, until delivery to Owner.
1.4 DELIVERY
A. Coordinate final delivery of extra materials with Owner prior to Substantial Completion.
B. Deliver, unload, store, and account for specified quantities of extra materials in presence
of Owner's representative.
C. Owner will indicate final placement in building of extra materials.
D. Obtain written acceptance from Owner's representative of receipt of specified quantities of

extra materials.
Extra Materials 01 78 46 - 1
E. Provide proportional quantity of spare parts and maintenance materials.

1. Owner to review, modify, and approve list prior to purchase of parts.
2. Record quantities delivered with Owner's representative.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
Not Used.
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
Extra Materials 01 78 46 - 2
SECTION 01 79 00
SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATIONS AND TRAINING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's

personnel, including the following:
1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
3. Demonstration and training video recordings.
1.2 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS
A. Instruction Program: Prior to the execution of any demonstrations or training, submit

outline of instructional program, including a list of training modules and a schedule of
proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each
training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.
A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within 15 days of
end of each training module.
1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following
information:
a. Name of Project.
b. Name and contact information for videographer.
c. Name of Contractor.
d. Date of video recording.
2. Transcript: Prepared in PDF electronic format. Include a cover sheet with same
label information as the corresponding video recording and a table of contents
with links to corresponding training components. Include name of Project and
date of video recording on each page.
3. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's in PDF
electronic file format on compact disc.
A. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, experienced in

operation and maintenance procedures and training.
Systems Demonstrations and Training 01 79 00 - 1

B. Videographer Qualifications: A professional videographer who is experienced

photographing demonstration and training events similar to those required.
C. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site with Owner’s

personnel. Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction.
2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational
materials, instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to
avoid delays.
3. Review required content of instruction.
4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather
conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required

to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's
personnel.
B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of

instruction time, and course content.
C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation,

and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM
A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training

modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by
individual Specification Sections.
B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module.
Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to
master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the
system, equipment, or component:
1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the
following:
a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design
responsibility.
c. Operating standards.
d. Regulatory requirements.
e. Equipment function.
f. Operating characteristics.

g. Limiting conditions.
h. Performance curves.
2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:
a. Emergency manuals.
b. Operations manuals.
c. Maintenance manuals.
d. Project record documents.
e. Identification systems.
f. Warranties and bonds.
g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.
3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:
a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error
messages.
b. Instructions on stopping.
c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.
e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.
f. Special operating instructions and procedures.
4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:
a. Startup procedures.
b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
c. Routine and normal operating instructions.
d. Regulation and control procedures.
e. Control sequences.
f. Safety procedures.
g. Instructions on stopping.
h. Normal shutdown instructions.
i. Operating procedures for emergencies.
j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.
k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
m. Special operating instructions and procedures.
5. Adjustments: Include the following:
a. Alignments.
b. Checking adjustments.
c. Noise and vibration adjustments.
d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.
6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:
a. Diagnostic instructions.
b. Test and inspection procedures.
7. Maintenance: Include the following:
a. Inspection procedures.
b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
d. Procedures for routine cleaning
e. Procedures for preventive maintenance.
f. Procedures for routine maintenance.
g. Instruction on use of special tools.
8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions.
b. Repair instructions.
c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and
reassembly instructions.
d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.
e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and

training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in
coordination with requirements in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data."
B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.
3.2 INSTRUCTION
A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and

maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.
B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that

requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.
1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.
C. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed
and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training
using final operation and maintenance data submittals.
D. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each

participant's mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test.
E. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove
instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before
initial training use.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS
A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and

training video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom
instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student
practice.
1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning
objective and lesson outline.

B. Video: Provide minimum 640 x 480 video resolution converted to format file type
acceptable to Owner, on electronic media.
1. Electronic Media: Read-only format compact disc acceptable to Owner, with
commercial-grade graphic label.
2. File Hierarchy: Organize folder structure and file locations according to project
manual table of contents. Provide complete screen-based menu.
3. File Names: Utilize file names based upon name of equipment generally
described in video segment, as identified in Project specifications.
4. Contractor and Installer Contact File: Using appropriate software, create a file for
inclusion on the Equipment Demonstration and Training DVD that describes the
following for each Contractor involved on the Project, arranged according to
Project table of contents:
a. Name of Contractor/Installer.
b. Business address.
c. Business phone number.
d. Point of contact.
e. E-mail address.
C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise

necessary to adequately cover area of demonstration and training. Display continuous
running time.
1. Film training session(s) in segments not to exceed 15 minutes.
a. Produce segments to present a single significant piece of equipment per
segment.
b. Organize segments with multiple pieces of equipment to follow order of
Project Manual table of contents.
c. Where a training session on a particular piece of equipment exceeds 15
minutes, stop filming and pause training session. Begin training session
again upon commencement of new filming segment.
D. Light Levels: Verify light levels are adequate to properly light equipment. Verify
equipment markings are clearly visible prior to recording.
1. Furnish additional portable lighting as required.
E. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by audio narration by live microphone

or dubbing audio narration off-site after video recording is recorded. Include
description of items being viewed.
F. Transcript: Provide a transcript of the narration. Display images and running time
captured from videotape opposite the corresponding narration segment.
G. Preproduced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of

training modules in same format as recordings of live training.
END OF SECTION

90 Percent
90% ReviewProgress Set 20 April 2023
SECTION 01 91 00
BUILDING SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Commissioning this project shall include MEP systems installation and operations.
The commissioning process shall generally follow the ASHRAE Guideline-0 and
ASHRAE Standard 90.1. Commissioning for this project shall be as necessary for full
compliance with 2015 IECC commissioning requirements.
B. Commissioning Agent (CA): The owner will engage the CA under separate contract.
C. Mechanical and plumbing commissioning shall be done by the registered design

professional or approved agency.
D. For electrical commissioning the registered design professional shall provide

evidence that the system is operating in accordance with the construction documents.
E. Commissioning: Commissioning is a systematic process of ensuring that all building

systems perform interactively according to the design intent and the owner’s
operational requirements. Commissioning during the construction phase is intended
to achieve the following specific objectives according to the Contract Documents:
1. Observe and document equipment and systems installations and operations.
2. Observe and document proper performance of equipment and systems per the
construction documents.
3. Review systems manual and closeout documentation.
F. The commissioning process does not take away from or reduce the responsibility of
the system designers or installing contractors to provide a finished and fully
functioning product, equipment or system.
G. Abbreviations: The following are common abbreviations used in the specifications and
in the Commissioning Plan.
A/E Architect & Design Engineers FT Functional Performance Test
CA/CxA Commissioning Agent GC General Contractor
CC Construction Manager MC Mechanical Contractor
Cx Commissioning PC Project Checklist
CxP Commissioning Plan Subs Sub Contractors
EC Electrical Contractor MC Mechanical Contractor
PLC Plumbing Contractor TAB Test And Balance Contractor
FC Fire Alarm Contractor SC Security Contractor
CTC Controls Contractor TC Technology Contractor
H. Divisional specifications sections related to commissioning activities are as follows:

1. Division 01 - General Requirements
2. Division 22 - Plumbing
3. Division 23 - HVAC&R
Building Systems Commissioning 01 91 00 - 1

EMA Engineering & Consulting
90 Percent
4. Division 26 - Electrical
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Commissioning Team. The members of the commissioning team consist of the

Commissioning Agent (CA), the owner’s Project Manager (PM), the designated
representative of the owner’s Construction Management firm (CM), the General
Contractor (GC or Contractor), the architect and design engineers (particularly the
mechanical engineer), the Mechanical Contractor (MC), the Electrical Contractor
(EC), the TAB representative, the Controls Contractor (CC), any other installing
subcontractors or suppliers of equipment. If known, the Owner’s building or plant
operator/engineer is also a member of the commissioning team.
B. Management. The CA will report directly to the Owner for commissioning related
functions and copy the Architect and Contractor as required. The CA directs and
coordinates the commissioning activities and reports with the CM and PM. All team
members work together to fulfill their contracted responsibilities and meet the
objectives of the Contract Documents.
C. Scheduling. The CA will work with the CM and GC according to established protocols
to schedule the commissioning activities. The CM will notify the CA as to the
readiness of systems and equipment for functional testing. The CA will provide
sufficient notice to the CM and GC for scheduling commissioning activities for such
equipment and systems upon notification from the CM that said systems will be ready
for testing and or commissioning. The GC will integrate all commissioning activities
into the master project schedule and will provide a copy of the schedule, including all
updates, to the CA for his use for commissioning this project. All parties will address
scheduling problems and make necessary notifications in a timely manner in order to
expedite the commissioning process. It is understood that the progress for
commissioning of systems will be dependent upon the progress of the following:
D. Response Times. Timelines for delivering information requested, required or

providing responses to the CA is essential to providing the construction product to the
owner on time as well as facilitating the commissioning process. The contractor shall
adhere to the following to meet this objective:
E. Written response to Issue Log, Punchlist, Site Observation report or request for
information, clarification or other documentation necessary to facilitate and carryout
the commissioning process: 07 Calendar days from date request was received by
contractor in writing.
F. Discrepancies identified in record drawings during the construction phase: 15

calendar days.

90 Percent
1.3 COMMISSIONING PROCESS
A. Commissioning Plan. The Commissioning Plan provides guidance in the execution of

the commissioning process. The CA will update the plan which is then considered the
“final” plan, though it will continue to evolve and expand and be updated on a regular
basis for content by the CA as the project progresses. The Specifications will take
precedence over the Commissioning Plan.
B. Commissioning Process. The following narrative provides a brief overview of the

typical commissioning tasks during construction and the general order in which they
occur.
C. Equipment documentation is submitted to the CA during normal submittals and

concurrent with the design team submittal submission, including detailed start-up
procedures.
D. In general, the check-out and performance verification proceeds from simple to

complex; from component level to equipment to systems and intersystem levels with
CHECKLISTS being completed before functional testing.
E. The Subs, under their own direction, execute and document the CHECKLISTS and
perform start-up and initial check-out.
F. The checklist procedures are executed by the contractor responsible for their
respective systems and under their respective scope of work. An example of a
coordinated procedure would be an AHU that requires Electrical, FA Duct Smoke
Detector, DDC Controls and a VFD for operation. This would require a signature from
the Mechanical, Electrical, Fire Alarm, Controls contractor and TAB sub.
G. Functional Testing of the MEP SYSTEMS shall be scheduled by the CA and GC and
shall be conducted by the appropriate sub-contractor. The CA will direct the testing
and sub-contractor will carry out the test.
H. Items of non-compliance in material, installation or setup are corrected and the

system is to be retested at the contractor’s expense.
I. The CA reviews the O&M documentation for completeness.
J. Commissioning is completed before Substantial Completion.
K. Deferred or seasonal testing is to be conducted as specified and as required.
1.4 RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Commissioning Team: The responsibilities of various parties in the commissioning

process are provided in this section and are typically referenced as follows: Division
01 - General Requirements, Division 22 - Plumbing, Division 23 - HVAC & R, 26 -
Electrical. It is noted that the services for the Owner’s Project Manager, Construction
Manager, Architect, MEP, Special systems design consultants and Commissioning
Agent are not provided for in this contract. That is, the Contractor is not responsible

90 Percent
for providing their services except where stated in other divisional specs sections.
Their responsibilities are listed here to clarify the commissioning process.
1. The commissioning team, at a minimum, shall consist of the following:
a. Owner
b. Commissioning Authority
c. Architect
d. Design Engineer
e. Prime Contractor
f. Divisional Contractors and Sub contractors
g. Vendors or Factory reps where required by the divisional specs
B. All Parties
1. Follow the Commissioning Plan and specifications.
2. Attend commissioning scoping meeting and commissioning meetings as
necessary.
3. Assist the CA in carrying out commissioning process activities.
C. Architect (A/E)
1. Construction and Acceptance Phase
a. Owner Manages the CA contract.
b. Attend the commissioning scoping meeting and selected commissioning
team meetings.
c. Perform normal submittal review, construction observation, as-built drawing
preparation, O&M manual preparation, etc., as contracted. Provide
submittals for MEP the CA concurrent with the design consultant’s submittal
review.
d. Provide all design narrative documentation and updates as requested by the
CA for systems to be commissioned.
e. Coordinate resolution of system and component deficiencies identified
during commissioning activities.
f. Copy the CA on all responses to RFI/RFC/Revisions as issued by the design
team related to systems being commissioned.
g. Furnish a copy of all construction documents, addenda, change orders,
RFI’s, ASI’s and approved submittals and shop drawings related to
commissioned equipment to the CA.
h. Review and approve O&M documentation.
i. Warranty Period
j. Coordinate resolution of design non-conformance issues, design
deficiencies and contractor related deficiencies identified during warranty-
period commissioning.
D. MEP & Special Systems Designers/Engineers (of the A/E)

a. Perform normal submittal review, construction observation, as-built drawing
preparation, etc., as contracted. Conduct site observations as contracted
and required by the owner and A/E.

90 Percent
b. Provide an updated design narrative and sequences documentation

requested by the CA for functional testing of MEP systems. The designers
shall assist (along with the contractors) in clarifying the operation and control
of commissioned MEP equipment in areas where the specifications, control
drawings or equipment documentation is not sufficient for writing detailed
testing procedures.
c. Attend commissioning scoping meetings and other selected commissioning
team meetings.
d. Participate in the resolution of system deficiencies identified during
commissioning, according to the contract documents.
e. Prepare and submit the final as-built design intent and operating parameters
documentation. Review and approve the O&M manuals.
f. Review, comment and approve the functional test procedures for sufficiency
prior to their use.
g. Utilizing the sampling method, review and provide comments and
recommendations for the checklists for major pieces of equipment for
sufficiency prior to their use.
h. Warranty Period
i. Participate in the resolution of non-compliance, non-conformance and
design deficiencies identified during commissioning during warranty-period
commissioning.
E. Commissioning Agent (CA)

a. The CA is not responsible for design concepts, design criteria, compliance
with codes and industry design standards, design or general construction
scheduling, cost estimating, test and balance or construction management.
The CA may assist with issue resolution for non-conformance or
deficiencies, but ultimately that responsibility resides with the general
contractor and the A/E. The primary function of the CA is to develop and
coordinate the execution of a testing plan, observe and document and verify
using sampling techniques that systems are functioning in accordance with
the documented OPR and the Construction Documents. The Contractors will
provide all of their own tools to install, start, check-out and functionally test
equipment and systems.
b. Coordinates and directs the commissioning activities in a logical, sequential
and efficient manner using consistent protocols and forms, centralized
documentation, clear and regular communications and consultations with all
necessary parties, frequently updated timelines and schedules and technical
expertise.
c. Coordinate the commissioning work and, with the GC and CM, ensure that
commissioning activities are being scheduled into the master project
schedule.
d. Revise the Commissioning Plan during the construction phase as necessary.
e. Request and review information required to perform commissioning tasks,
including O&M materials, contractor start-up and check-out procedures as
necessary.

90 Percent
f. Before start-up, gather and review the current control sequences and
interlocks and work with contractors and design engineers until sufficient
clarity has been obtained, in writing, to be able to write testing procedures
as necessary.
g. Write and distribute systems functional performance Test requirements.
h. Attend selected planning and job-site meetings to obtain information on
construction progress. Review construction meeting minutes for revisions
and substitutions relating to the Commissioning process. Assist in resolving
discrepancies.
i. Perform site observations as necessary to observe component and system
installations for testing of systems.
j. Oversee sufficient functional testing of the control system.
k. With assistance from installing contractors and A/E, write the functional
performance test procedures for equipment and systems. This may include
energy management control system trending or manual functional testing.
l. Analyze any functional performance trend logs and monitoring data as
required to verify performance.
m. Coordinate, witness, and approve manual functional performance tests
performed by installing contractors. Coordinate retesting with the GC and
A/E as necessary or required.
n. Maintain a master issue and resolution log and a separate testing record.
Provide the owner and CM/GC with periodic written progress reports and
test results with recommended actions.
o. Witness performance testing of control systems and document these tests
and include this documentation in Commissioning Record in O&M manuals.
p. Compile and maintain a commissioning record and review building systems
manual.
q. Review and approve the preparation of the O&M manuals.
r. Provide a final commissioning report.
s. Warranty Period: Coordinate and supervise required seasonal or deferred
testing and deficiency corrections.
F. Construction Manager-Owner’s Representative (CM) as applicable

a. Facilitate the coordination of the commissioning work by the CA, working
with the GC, to ensure that commissioning activities are being scheduled
into the master project schedule.
b. Review and be familiar with the commissioning specifications and final
Commissioning Plan-Construction Phase.
c. Attend the commissioning scoping meeting and other commissioning team
meetings.
d. Perform the normal review of Contractor submittals.
e. Furnish a copy of all construction documents, addenda, change orders and
approved submittals and shop drawings related to commissioned equipment
to the CA.
f. Review the functional performance test procedures submitted by the CA,
prior to testing.
g. When necessary, observe and witness checklists, start-up and functional
testing of selected equipment.
h. Review commissioning progress and deficiency reports.

90 Percent
i. Coordinate the resolution of non-compliance and design deficiencies

identified in all phases of commissioning.
j. Sign-off (final approval) on individual commissioning tests as completed and
passing. Recommend completion of the commissioning process to the
Project Manager.
k. Assist the GC in coordinating the training of owner personnel.
l. Warranty Period: Assist the CA as necessary in the seasonal or deferred
testing and deficiency corrections required by the contract documents.
G. Owner’s Project Manager (PM)

2. Assist the CA as necessary to carry out commissioning activities.
3. Manage the contract of the CA, A/E and the GC.
4. Arrange for facility operating and maintenance personnel to attend various field
commissioning activities and field training sessions.
5. Provide final approval for the completion of the commissioning work.
6. Warranty Period: Ensure that any seasonal or deferred testing and any deficiency
issues are addressed or that a plan is in place to address issues pending
resolution
H. General Contractor (GC)

1. Note: Contractor and their subcontractors and vendors shall assign capable,
skilled and knowledgeable representatives with expertise and authority to act on
their behalf and schedule them to participate in and to perform commissioning
process activities and
a. Facilitate the coordination of the commissioning work by the CA and ensure
that commissioning activities are being addressed in the master construction
project schedule.
b. Include the cost of commissioning tasks to be carried out by the contractor
and subs, for commissioning of the building systems in the contract price.
This will not include the CA’s contract. The CA’s contract for commissioning
services shall be between the owner and CA.
c. In each purchase order or subcontract written, include requirements for
submittal data, O&M data, commissioning tasks and training.
d. Ensure that all Subs execute their commissioning responsibilities according
to the Contract Documents and schedule.
e. A representative shall attend a commissioning scoping meeting and other
necessary meetings scheduled by the CA to facilitate the Cx process.
f. Coordinate and conduct owner training on building and systems operation
for equipment provided and installed.
g. Prepare close out documents including O&M documents, according to the
Contract Documents, including clarifying and updating the original control
sequences of operation and As-built drawings.
h. Warranty Period: Ensure that Subs execute seasonal or deferred functional
performance testing, to be witnessed by the CA, according to the
specifications
i. Ensure that Subs correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to
O&M manuals and final as-built drawings and warranty documents for
applicable issues identified in any seasonal and deferred testing.

90 Percent
I. Equipment Suppliers
a. Provide all requested submittal data, including detailed start-up procedures,
blank start up docs and checklists and specific responsibilities of the Owner
to keep warranties in force.
b. Assist in equipment start up, energizing and pre-testing per agreements with
Subs.
c. Include all special tools and instruments (only available from vendor, specific
to a piece of equipment) required for testing equipment according to these
Contract Documents in the base bid price to the Contractor, except for stand-
alone data logging equipment that may be used by the CA. Such tools not
required for routine maintenance, operation and service and not required to
be turned over to the owner under other divisional spec sections, shall be
returned to the user providing such tools. Examples of this intent would be a
flow hood used by the TAB contractor would be returned and remain the
property of the TAB contractor where as a special key for unlocking the
chiller control cabinet would be turned over to the owner.
d. Provide information requested by CA regarding equipment sequence of
operation and testing procedures.
e. Review system start up and test procedures for equipment installed by
factory representatives.
J. Mechanical Contractor
1. Provide start-up for all HVAC equipment.
2. Assist and cooperate with the TAB contractor and CA by:
a. Putting all HVAC equipment and systems into operation and continuing the
operation during each working day of TAB and commissioning, as required.
b. Including cost of sheaves and belts that may be required by TAB.
Providing test holes in ducts and plenums where directed by TAB to allow
air measurements and air balancing. Provide an approved rubber or steel
plug to seal
traverse holes.
c. Providing temperature and pressure taps according to the Construction
Documents for TAB and commissioning testing.
3. Install a P/T plug at each water sensor which is an input point to the control
system and both inlet and discharge side of ALL pumps for TAB.
4. List and clearly identify on the as-built drawings the locations of all air-flow
stations.
5. Notify the GC or CA depending on protocol, when pipe and duct system testing,
flushing, cleaning, start-up of each piece of equipment and TAB will occur. Be
responsible to notify the GC or CA, ahead of time, when commissioning activities
not yet performed or not yet scheduled could delay construction. Be proactive in
seeing that commissioning processes are executed and that the CA has the
scheduling information needed to efficiently execute the commissioning process.
K. Controls Contractor
1. Sequences of Operation Submittals. The Controls Contractor’s submittals of
control

90 Percent
drawings shall include complete detailed sequences of operation for each piece
of equipment, regardless of the completeness and clarity of the sequences in the
specifications or drawings. The engineer shall be provided written documentation
for any revisions to the HVAC&R design documents including engineered
approved control sequences. Upon review of the DDC control submittals, the
engineer shall provide his approval or rejection in writing to the controls
contractor. The Controls Contractor’s submittals of control drawings shall include:
a. An overview narrative of the system (1 or 2 paragraphs) generally describing
its purpose, components and function.
b. All interactions and interlocks with other systems.
c. Detailed delineation of control between any packaged controls and the
d. Building automation system, listing what points the BAS monitors only and
what BAS points are control points and are adjustable.
e. Written sequences of control for packaged controlled equipment.
(Equipment manufacturers’ stock sequences may be included but will
generally require additional narrative).
f. Start-up sequences.
g. Warm-up mode and Optimum Start sequences.
h. Normal operating mode sequences.
i. Unoccupied mode sequences.
j. Shutdown sequences.
k. Capacity control sequences and equipment staging.
l. Temperature and pressure control: setbacks, setups, resets, etc.
m. Detailed sequences for all control strategies, e.g., economizer control,
optimum start/stop, staging, optimization, demand limiting, etc.
n. Effects of power or equipment failure with all standby component including
HVAC and Emergency powered systems with VFD’s and responses
(Restart, Alarm, etc.).
o. Sequences for all alarms and emergency shut downs.
p. Seasonal operational differences and recommendations.
q. Initial and recommended values for all adjustable settings, setpoints
parameters that are typically set or adjusted by operating staff; and any other
control settings or fixed values, delays, etc. that will be useful during testing
and operating the equipment.
r. Schedules, if known and provided by owner.
s. All sequences shall be written in small statements, each with a number for
reference. For a given system, numbers will not repeat for different sequence
sections, unless the sections are numbered.
2. Control Drawings Submittal
a. The control drawings shall have a key and legend to all abbreviations and
symbols.
b. The control drawings shall contain graphic schematic depictions of the
systems and each component.
c. The schematics will include the system and component layout of any
equipment that the control system monitors, enables or controls, even if the
equipment is primarily controlled by packaged or integral controls.
d. Provide a full points list with at least the following included for each point:
(1) Controlled system Point abbreviation
(2) Point description
(3) Display unit

90 Percent
(4) Control point or setpoint (Yes / No)

(5) Monitoring point (Yes / No)
(6) Intermediate point (Yes / No)
(7) Calculated point (Yes / No)
• Key:
• Point Description: DB temp, airflow, etc.
• Control or Setpoint: Point that controls equipment and can have
its setpoints changed (OSA, SAT, etc.)
• Intermediate Point: A Point whose value is used to make a
calculation which then controls equipment (space temperatures
that are averaged to a virtual point to control reset).
• Monitoring Point: A Point that does not control or contribute to
the control of equipment; but is used for the operations,
maintenance or performance verification.
• Calculated Point: “Virtual” point generated from calculations of
other point values. The Controls Contractor shall keep the CA
informed of all changes to this list during programming and setup
in all phases of the project.
3. An updated as-built version of the control drawings and sequences of operation
shall be included in the final controls O&M manual submittal.
4. Assist, coordinate and cooperate with the TAB contractor in the following manner:
a. Meet with the TAB contractor prior to beginning TAB work and review the
TAB plan to determine the capabilities of the control system toward
completing TAB. Provide the TAB any needed unique instruments for setting
terminal unit boxes and instruct TAB in their use (handheld control system
interface for use around the building during TAB, etc.).
b. For a given area, have all required checklists, calibrations, start-up and
selected
c. Pre-commissioning documentation of the system available during TAB
activities.
d. Provide a qualified technician to operate the controls, to assist the TAB
contractor in performing TAB work, during scheduled TAB activities. Remote
operation of control system, during scheduled TAB and Functional Testing,
will not be acceptable. The Controls contractor may provide training to the
TAB technician for inputting data into the control software and logic.
However, the controls contractor shall be ultimately responsible for entering
and saving the data, provided by the TAB contractor, into the control system.
5. Assist and cooperate with the CA in the following manner:
a. Execute the functional testing of the controls system as specified for the
controls contractor in Controls Specification Section.
b. Assist in the functional testing of all equipment specified.
c. Execute all control system trend logs specified.
6. Provide a signed and dated certification to the CA and GC upon completion of
the check-out of each controlled device, equipment and system prior to TAB and
functional testing. This shall be for each piece of equipment or system,
Confirmation that all system programming, installation of control components,
debugging, pre-testing, checkout is complete and the control system is made fully
operational as to all respects of the Contract Documents. This shall be completed
prior to any TAB work or functional testing of the building systems under DDC
control.

90 Percent
7. Beyond the control points necessary to execute all documented control

sequences provide monitoring, control and virtual points.
8. List and clearly identify on the as-built duct and piping drawings the locations of
ALL: static and differential pressure sensors (air, water and building pressure),
hydronic control valves/actuators, electrical control relays for lighting and control
boards.
9. The Controls Contractor shall be responsible for Pre-commissioning of all control
system and components provided and installed by the controls contractor. See
other sections of this specification and divisional specifications for training
requirements. During TAB and functional testing, the controls contractor shall
produce, at the request of the engineer or commissioning authority, graphic
screen shots of the building systems operation as indicated on the building
controls graphics.
L. Test and Balance Contractor (TAB)

1. Prior to starting TAB, submit to the CA and GC, the lead TAB technicians contact
information.
2. Submit the outline of the TAB plan, to the CA, GC and Controls Contractor prior
to starting the TAB. The TAB contractor will be provided with a set of final
approved mechanical and
3. HVAC&R control submittals by the GC, 60 calendar days prior to beginning TAB
activities.
4. The submitted TAB plan may include:
a. Certification that the TAB contractor has reviewed the construction
documents and the systems with the design engineers and contractors to
sufficiently understand the design intent for each system.
b. An explanation of the intended use of the building control system. The
controls contractor will comment on feasibility of the plan.
c. All field check-out sheets and logs to be used that list each piece of
equipment to be tested, adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be
gathered for each.
d. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct and
piping drawings during the process.
e. Final test report forms to be used.
f. Detailed step-by-step procedures for TAB work for each system and issue.
g. Terminal flow calibration (for each terminal type), diffuser proportioning,
branch and submain proportioning, total flow calculations, rechecking,
diversity issues, expected problems and solutions, etc. Criteria for using air
flow straighteners or relocating flow stations and sensors will be discussed.
Provide the analogous explanations for the water side.
h. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiency
measurements to be performed and a description of specific test procedures,
parameters, formulas to be used.
i. Details of how total flow will be determined (Air: sum of terminal flows via
BAS calibrated readings or via hood readings of all terminals, supply (SA)
and return air (RA) pitot traverse, SA or RA flow stations. Water: pump
curves, circuit setter, flow station, ultrasonic, etc.).
j. The identification and types of measurement instruments to be used and
their most recent calibration date.

90 Percent
k. Specific procedures that will ensure that both air and water side are
operating at the lowest possible pressures and provide methods to verify
this.
l. Confirmation that TAB understands the outside air ventilation criteria under
all operational conditions.
m. Details of whether and how minimum outside air cfm will be verified and set
and for what level (total building, zone, etc.).
n. Details of how building static and exhaust fan / relief damper capacity will be
checked.
o. Proposed selection points for sound measurements and sound
measurement methods.
p. Details of methods for making any specified coil or other system plant
capacity measurements.
q. Details of any TAB work to be done in phases (by floor, etc.), or of areas to
be built out later.
r. Details regarding specified deferred or seasonal TAB work.
s. Details of any specified false loading of systems to complete TAB work.
t. Details of all exhaust fan balancing and capacity verifications, including any
required room pressure differentials.
u. Details of any required interstitial cavity differential pressure measurements
and calculations.
v. Plan for hand-written field technician logs of discrepancies, deficient or
uncompleted work by others, contract interpretation requests and lists of
completed tests (scope and frequency).
w. Plan for formal progress reports (scope and frequency).
x. Plan for formal deficiency reports (scope, frequency and distribution).
5. A running log of events and issues shall be kept by the TAB field technicians.
Submit hand-written reports of discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by
others, contract interpretation requests and lists of completed TAB work. All
issues found during daily TAB activities shall be provided to the GC on site and
prior to leaving the job site for the day.
6. Communicate in writing to the controls contractor all setpoint and parameter
changes made or problems and discrepancies identified during TAB which affect
the control system setup and operation.
7. Provide a draft TAB report within five calendar days of starting Functional Testing
of the HVAC & R systems. Field notes that are legible shall be allowed to be
submitted in place of a full draft TAB report.
8. Provide the CA with requested system data findings, gathered or collected during
TAB work, but not shown on the TAB reports.
9. Provide a final and complete TAB report for the CA and A/E within 15 calendar
days from end of TAB work and as requested by the CA. Punch list items or
issues discovered during scheduled TAB activities, reported to the GC for
correction by the GC’s subs or vendors, which cause delay in the TAB
contractors ability to complete his work on time per the project schedule, will
have the additional time required to complete the TAB work, charged to the GC
who may choose to back charge his/her subs. Charges shall be on a Time and
Material basis and shall be documented with a line item breakdown for
Manpower, time, systems TAB’ d and date of work. Such documentation shall
be made available for review by the GC and A/E, prior to any approval by the
GC.

90 Percent
10. Assist the CA as needed and required to carry out all HVAC & R functional
testing. Conduct functional performance tests and checks on the original TAB as
specified for TAB in Division 23 and controls specification section. Make follow
up visits to the site as necessary and required to correct any work deficiencies
or variances to contract documents made by the TAB technician.
M. Electrical Contractor
1. Include the cost of commissioning by the electrical sub in the contract price.
2. Include requirements for submittal data, O&M data and owner training.
3. Attend a commissioning scoping meeting and other necessary meetings
scheduled by the CA to facilitate the Cx process.
4. Contractor shall provide normal cut sheets and shop drawing submittals to the
CA of electrical systems to be commissioned.
5. Provide requested electrical systems documentation to the CA when requested
by the CA, for development of functional testing procedures.
a. Typically, this will include detailed manufacturer installation and start-up,
operating,
b. troubleshooting and maintenance procedures, full details of any owner-
contracted tests, fan and pump curves, full factory testing reports, if any, and
full warranty information, including all responsibilities of the Owner to keep
the warranty in force clearly identified. In addition, the installation and check-
out materials that are actually shipped inside the equipment and the actual
field check-out sheet forms to be used by the factory or field technicians shall
be submitted to the Commissioning Agent.
c. The Commissioning Agent may request further documentation necessary for
the commissioning process.
d. This data request may be made prior to or post normal submittals.
6. Provide a copy of the electrical systems O&M manuals submittals of
commissioned equipment, through normal channels, to the CA.
7. Contractors shall assist (along with the design engineers) in clarifying the
operation and control of electrical commissioned equipment in areas where the
specifications, control drawings or equipment documentation is not sufficient for
writing detailed electrical testing procedures.
8. Provide assistance to the CA in for developing and conducting all CA directed
electrical testing. Subs shall review all test procedures to ensure feasibility,
safety and equipment protection and provide necessary written alarm limits to be
used during the tests.
9. In a clear and legible format, document all completed installation, start-up and
system operational check-out procedures, providing a copy to the A/e and CA.
10. Address current A/E punch list and Cx Issues Log items before final payment is
released.
11. Provide skilled technicians to execute energizing and starting of electrical
equipment and to execute all required electrical tests. Ensure that they are
available and present during the agreed upon schedules and for sufficient
duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments and issue resolution.
12. Perform functional performance testing under the direction of the CA or A/E for
specified electrical equipment tests. Assist the CA in interpreting any monitoring
data, as necessary.
13. Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed performance)
as interpreted by the CA, GC and A/E and retest the equipment.

90 Percent
14. Prepare O&M manuals and red-line as-built drawings according to the Contract
Documents, including updating the electrical as-built conditions.
15. Provide training of the Owner’s operating personnel as specified.
16. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to
maintain the validity of the warranty.
17. Warranty Period: Execute and assist the CA in carrying out deferred functional
performance testing according to the specifications.
18. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to electrical systems O&M
manuals and electrical as-built drawings for applicable issues identified in any
seasonal or deferred testing.
N. Plumbing Contractor
1. Provide installation and operation for all plumbing equipment.
2. Assist and cooperate with the CA by putting all plumbing equipment, fixtures,
domestic water systems, water heaters and recirc pumps, etc., into operation as
requested by the CA for testing and confirming the operation of such equipment
and components installed under the plumbing scope of services.
3. List and clearly identify on the as-built drawings the locations of all plumbing
valves installed above ceiling, in building walls and underground.
4. Be responsible to notify the GC and CA, ahead of time, when commissioning
5. Activities related to plumbing systems not scheduled could delay construction.
6. Include the cost of commissioning by the plumbing sub in the contract price.
7. Include requirements for plumbing submittal data, O&M data and participation in
owner training for plumbing systems.
8. Attend a commissioning scoping meeting and other necessary meetings
scheduled by the CA to facilitate the Cx process.
9. Contractor shall provide normal cut sheets and shop drawing submittals to the CA
for plumbing systems to be commissioned. Submissions shall follow proper
protocol for distribution of materials. Typically, from Vendor to Sub to GC to
Architect, or CM to CA.
10. Provide requested plumbing systems documentation to the CA when requested
by the CA for development of plumbing checklists and testing procedures.
11. Typically, this will include detailed manufacturer installation and start-up,
operating, troubleshooting and maintenance procedures, full details of any owner-
contracted tests and pump curves, factory test reports, if any, and full warranty
information, including all responsibilities of the Owner to keep the warranty in
force clearly identified. In addition, the installation and check-out materials that
are actually shipped inside the plumbing equipment and the actual field check-out
sheet forms to be used by the factory or field technicians shall be submitted to the
Commissioning Agent.
12. The Commissioning Agent may request further documentation necessary for the
commissioning process.
13. This data request may be made prior to or post normal submittals.
14. Provide a copy of the plumbing systems O&M manuals submittals of
commissioned equipment, through normal channels, to the CA.
15. Contractors shall assist (along with the design engineers) in clarifying the
operation and control of plumbing systems commissioned, in areas where the
specifications, control drawings or equipment documentation is not sufficient for
writing detailed testing procedures.

90 Percent
16. Provide assistance to the CA for developing and conducting all CA directed
plumbing system and equipment testing. Subs shall review all test procedures to
ensure feasibility, safety and equipment protection and provide necessary written
alarm limits to be used during the tests.
17. Develop a full installation check-out plan using manufacturer’s installation, start-
up procedures and the checklists from the CA and other requested equipment
documentation to CA and A/E for review.
18. During the start-up and initial check-out process for Plumbing systems, equipment
requiring electrical power, will require coordination with the electrical sub to
execute and document the electrical-related portions of the plumbing checklists
and likewise for HVAC and Electrical devices where plumbing systems and
equipment are installed as part of the complete HVAC or electrical system, the
plumbing sub must coordinate with those disciplines for sign off of the checklist
documents.
19. In a clear and legible format, document all completed installation, start-up and
system operational check-out procedures, providing a copy to the A/E and CA
through the GC.
20. Provide skilled technicians to execute energizing and starting of electrical
equipment and to execute all required electrical tests. Ensure that they are
available and present during the agreed upon schedules and for sufficient
duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments and issue resolution.
21. Perform functional performance testing under the direction of the CA or A/E for
specified plumbing equipment tests.
22. Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed performance)
as interpreted by the CA, GC and A/E and retest the equipment.
23. Address current A/E punch list and Cx Issues Log items before final payment is
released.
24. Prepare O&M manuals and red-line as-built drawings according to the Contract
Documents, including updating the plumbing as-built conditions.
25. Provide training of the Owner’s operating personnel for operation and
maintenance of plumbing systems.
26. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to
maintain the validity of the warranty.
27. Warranty Period: Execute and assist the CA in carrying out deferred testing
according to the specifications.
28. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to plumbing systems O&M
manuals and as-built drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal or
deferred testing.
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. Acceptance Phase - Phase of construction after start-up and initial check-out when
functional performance tests, O&M documentation review and training occurs.
B. Approval - Acceptance that a piece of equipment or system has been properly

installed and is functioning in the tested modes according to the Contract Documents.
C. Architect / Engineer (A/E) - The prime consultant (architect) and sub-consultants who
comprise the design team; generally the HVAC mechanical designer/engineer and
the electrical designer/engineer.

90 Percent
D. Basis of Design (BoD) - The basis of design is the documentation of the primary
thought processes and assumptions behind design decisions that were made to meet
the design intent. The basis of design describes the systems, components, conditions
and methods chosen to meet the intent. Some reiterating of the design intent may be
included.
E. Checklist (PC) - A list of items to inspect and elementary component tests to conduct
to verify proper installation of equipment. Checklists are primarily static inspections
and procedures to prepare the equipment or system for initial operation (e.g., belt
tension, oil levels OK, labels affixed, gages in place, sensors calibrated, etc.).
However, some Checklists items entail simple testing of the function of a component,
a piece of equipment or system (such as measuring the voltage imbalance on a three
phase pump motor of a chiller system). The word pre-functional refers to before
functional performance testing. Checklists augment and are combined with the
manufacturer’s start-up checklist. Even without a commissioning process, contractors
typically perform some checklists items. However, few contractors document in
writing the execution of these checklist items. Therefore, for most equipment, the
contractors execute the checklists on their own.
F. Commissioning Agent (CA) - An independent agent, not otherwise associated with

the A/E team members or the Contractor, though CA may be hired as a subcontractor
to them. The CA directs and coordinates the day-to-day commissioning activities. The
CA does not take an oversight role like the CM. The CA is part of the Construction
Manager (CM) team or shall report directly to the CM.
G. Commissioning Plan - An overall plan, developed before or after bidding that provides
the structure, schedule and coordination planning for the commissioning process.
H. Contract Documents - The documents binding on parties involved in the construction

of this project (drawings, specifications, change orders, amendments, contracts, Cx
Plan, etc.).
I. Contractor - The general contractor or authorized representative.
J. Control system – The central building energy management control system.
K. Construction Manager (CM) - The Owner’s representative in the day-to-day activities

of construction. In general, the construction management services contractor (CM) is
hired by the owner to assist in the overall management of the project including
supervising and on-site managing authority over a project’s construction. The General
Contractor reports to the CM. The CM is the owner’s on-site representative.
L. Data logging - Monitoring flows, currents, status, pressures, etc. of equipment using
DDC control system.
M. Deferred Functional Tests - FTs that are performed later, after substantial completion,
due to partial occupancy, equipment, seasonal requirements, design or other site
conditions that disallow the test from being performed.

90 Percent
N. Deficiency - A condition in the installation or function of a component, piece of

equipment or system that is not in compliance with the Contract Documents (it does
not perform properly or is not complying with the design intent).
O. Design Intent - A dynamic document that provides the explanation of the ideas,
concepts and criteria that are considered to be very important to the owner. It is
initially the outcome of the programming and conceptual design phases.
P. Design Narrative or Design Documentation - Sections of the Design Intent or BoD.
Q. Factory Testing - Testing of equipment on-site or at the factory by factory personnel

with an Owner’s representative present.
R. Functional Performance Test (FT) - Test of the dynamic function and operation of
equipment and systems using manual (direct observation) or monitoring methods.
Functional testing is the dynamic testing of systems (rather than just components)
under full operation (e.g., the chiller pump is tested interactively with the chiller
functions to see if the pump ramps up and down to maintain the differential pressure
setpoint). Systems are tested under various modes, such as during low cooling or
heating loads, high loads, component failures, unoccupied, varying outside air
temperatures, fire alarm, power failure, etc. The systems are run through all the
control system’s sequences of operation and components are verified to be
responding as the sequences state. Traditional air or water test and balancing (TAB)
is not functional testing, in the commissioning sense of the word. TAB’s primary work
is setting up the system flows and pressures as specified, while functional testing is
verifying that which has already been set-up. The commissioning agent develops the
functional test procedures in a sequential written form, coordinates, oversees and
documents the actual testing, which is usually performed by the installing contractor
or vendor. FTs are performed after CHECKLISTS and start-up is complete.
S. General Contractor (GC) - The prime contractor for this project generally refers to all
the GC’s subcontractors as well. Also is referred to as the Contractor in some
contexts.
T. Indirect Indicators - Indicators of a response or condition, such as a reading from a

control system screen reporting a damper to be 100% closed.
U. Manual Test - Using hand-held instruments, immediate control system readouts or

direct observation to verify performance (contrasted to analyzing monitored data
taken over time to make the “observation”).
V. Monitoring - The recording of parameters (flow, current, status, pressure, etc.) of

equipment operation using data loggers or the trending capabilities of control
systems.
W. Non-Compliance – See the definition of Deficiency.
X. Non-Conformance – See the definition of Deficiency.

90 Percent
Y. Over-written Value - Writing over a sensor value in the control system to see the
response of a system (e.g., changing the outside air temperature value from 50°F to
75°F to verify economizer operation). See also “Simulated Signal.”
Z. Owner-Contracted Tests - Tests paid for by the Owner outside the GC’s contract and
for which the CA does not oversee. These tests will not be repeated during functional
tests if properly documented.
AA. Phased Commissioning - Commissioning that is completed in phases (by floors, for
example) due to the size of the structure or other scheduling issues, in order minimize
the total construction time.
BB. Project Manager (PM) - The contracting and managing authority for the owner over
the design and/or construction of the project.
CC. Sampling - Functionally testing only a fraction of the total number of identical or near
identical pieces of equipment.
DD. Seasonal Performance Tests - FT that are deferred until the system(s) will experience
conditions closer to their design conditions.
EE. Simulated Condition - Condition that is created for the purpose of testing the response
of a system (e.g., applying a heated air to a space sensor using a hair dryer to see
the response in the HVAC system).
FF. Simulated Signal - Disconnecting a sensor and using a signal generator to send an
amperage, resistance or pressure to the transducer and DDC system to simulate a
sensor value.
GG. Specifications - The construction specifications of the Contract Documents.
HH. Start-up - The initial starting or activating of dynamic equipment, including executing
Checklists.
II. Subs - The subcontractors to the GC who provide and install building components
and systems.
JJ. Systems/Subsystems/Equipment & Components – Where these terms are used

together or separately, they shall mean “As-Built” systems, subsystems, equipment
and component.
KK. Test Procedures - The step-by-step process which must be executed to fulfill the test
requirements. The test procedures are developed by the CA.
LL. Test Requirements - Requirements specifying what modes and functions, etc. shall
be tested. The test requirements are not the detailed test procedures. The test
requirements are specified in the Contract Documents.
MM.Trending - Monitoring using the building control system.

90 Percent
NN. Vendor - Supplier of equipment.
OO. Warranty Period - The Warranty period for the entire project, including equipment
components. Warranty begins at Substantial Completion and extends for at least one
year, unless specifically noted otherwise in the Contract Documents and accepted
submittals.
1.6 SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED
A. The following systems and their sub components are anticipated to be commissioned
on this project. The actual systems commissioned will be based on the systems listed
in the commissioning contract with the owner. Systems included for this project will
be confirmed during the CA construction phase.
B. These systems and sub-components will be commissioned using sampling

techniques. Percentage of sampling shall be determined by the CA in the field but no
less than 20% of like systems shall be sampled for HVAC systems and Lighting
systems. All chillers, space heat boilers and cooling towers, (except existing systems),
shall be tested. No sampling will be allowed for these major components (chillers,
space heat boilers and cooling towers). Reference the Mechanical, Electrical and
Plumbing systems equipment schedules and sheets contained in the contract
drawings for equipment design information.
Cx Systems Require Fx Items Tested

Testing
HVAC
__ Chilled Water Plants Yes Controls, Sequence
of Operations, Alarms
__ Hot Water Plants Yes Controls, Sequence
__ Air Handling Units Yes Controls, Sequence
of Operations,
Alarms, Economizer
__ Packaged Units (RTU and HP) Yes Controls, Sequence
of Operations,
Alarms, Economizer
__ Terminal Units/VAV’s Yes Controls, Sequence
of Operations,
Alarms, Economizer
__ Exhaust and Relief fans Yes Controls, Sequence
__ DDC Control System (Component installation and Yes System calibration
System Operation) and function
Electrical Systems
__ Lighting Controls Yes Control Software and

Hardware Properly
Adjusted and
Programmed
__ Occupancy Sensors Yes Aiming, Status
Indicator, Light
Staging

90 Percent
Cx Systems Require Fx Items Tested

Testing
__ Time Switch Controls Yes Programmed
Schedules, Battery
Backup, Override
Limit, Simulate
Occupied and
Unoccupied
Conditions
_ Daylight Responsive Controls Yes Accurate Locations,
Calibration, Setpoint,
Threshold
Plumbing Systems
__ Service Water Heating Systems Yes Controls, Sequence

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. All standard testing equipment required to perform start-up and initial check-out and
required functional performance testing shall be provided by the primary Division
contractor for the equipment being tested. For example, the mechanical contractor of
Division 23 shall ultimately be responsible for all standard testing equipment for the
HVAC system and controls system in Division 23, except for equipment specific to
and used by TAB in their commissioning responsibilities. Two-way radios shall be
provided as necessary for communication between the CA and contractors during
performance testing, by the Division Contactor.
B. Special equipment, tools and instruments (only available from vendor, specific to a
piece of equipment) required for testing equipment, according to these Contract
Documents shall be included in the base bid price to the Contractor and turned over
to the owner for his use and shall become the sole property of the owner, except for
temporary stand-alone data logging equipment that may be used by the CA and any
special testing and inspection equipment used for testing of piping, ductwork and
electrical and special systems unless such equipment is required for such systems to
function and operate.
C. Any and all data logging by electronic device shall be by the DDC control system
where applicable, and as otherwise contracted by the owner with others.
D. All testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure
system performance with the tolerances specified. If not otherwise noted, the
following minimum requirements apply: Temperature sensors and digital
thermometers shall have a certified calibration within the past year and a resolution
of + or - 0.3ºF. Pressure sensors shall have an accuracy of + or - 2.0% of the value
range being measured (not full range of meter) and have been calibrated within the
last year. All equipment shall be calibrated according to the manufacturer’s
recommended intervals and when dropped or damaged. Calibration tags shall be
affixed or certificates readily available.

90 Percent
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REPORTING
A. The CA will regularly communicate with all members of the commissioning team,
keeping them apprised of commissioning progress and scheduling changes through
memos, progress reports, etc.
B. Non-conformance and deficiency issues will be recorded on the commissioning

issues log and a copy will be provided to the GC for making corrections. A copy will
be provided to the owner and made available to other project team members as
directed by the owner. Frequency of these reports will be determined by the progress
of construction and issues discovered during the CA and owner site observations.
Issues recorded on the Cx Issues Log will be noted as complete and the CA will initial
the date and verified by block only after the CA has confirmed that the item has been
corrected by the contractor or noted in writing, by the owner, as accepted as is by the
owner.
C. A final summary report (about four to six pages, not including backup documentation)
by the CA will be provided to the owner, focusing on evaluating commissioning
process issues and identifying areas where the process could be improved. All
acquired documentation, logs, minutes, reports, deficiency lists, communications,
findings, unresolved issues, etc., will be compiled in appendices and provided with
the summary report. As appropriate, checklists, functional tests and monitoring
reports may be included to supplement the summary report. These documents will
also be included in the Project Commissioning Record.
3.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Normal submittal: For MEP Systems, submittals will be provided by the GC to the CA
through the Architect and concurrently with the A/E consultants review period. At a
minimum, the submittal will include the manufacturer and model number, the
manufacturer’s printed installation and detailed start-up procedures, full sequences of
operation, O&M data, performance data, any performance test procedures, control
drawings and details of owner contracted tests. In addition, the installation and check-
out materials that are actually shipped inside the equipment and the actual field
check-out sheet forms to be used by the factory or field technicians shall be submitted
to the Commissioning Agent. All documentation requested by the CA will be included
by the Subs in their O&M manual contributions. Where items are uploaded to an ftp
or web based site, the CA will be notified.
B. The CA may request additional design narrative from the A/E and Controls Contractor,
depending on the completeness of the design intent documentation and sequences
provided with the Specifications.

90 Percent
3.3 PHASED COMMISSIONING
A. Where the project requires TAB, start-up and performance testing to be executed in
phases, phasing shall be coordinated with the owner, GC, CA, and A/E and be
reflected in the overall project schedule and shall include commissioning activities in
the schedule by the contractor. Final performance testing of all systems will be as
required by the phasing plan. The performance testing of the “systems as a whole”
will be performed before final turnover of the project.
3.4 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING
A. Requirements. The performance testing shall demonstrate that each system is

operating according to the documented design intent and contract documents.
Performance testing facilitates bringing the systems from a state of individual
substantial completion to full dynamic operation. Additionally, during the testing
process, areas of deficient performance are identified, corrected and the system
retested, improving the operation of the systems.
B. Coordination and Scheduling. The contractor shall provide sufficient notice, regarding
their completion schedule for the construction checklists and start-up of all equipment
and systems to allow the performance testing to be scheduled. The commissioning
team shall oversee, witness, and document the performance all equipment and
systems. The contractor in association with the subcontractors shall execute the tests.
The CA shall witness and document the results of the test. Performance testing shall
be conducted after the construction checklists, and start-up has been satisfactorily
completed. The control system shall be sufficiently tested and approved by the CA
and engineer of record before it is used, to verify performance of other components
or systems. The air side balancing and water side balancing shall be completed
before performance testing of air or water-related equipment or systems. Testing
proceeds from components to sub-systems to systems. When the proper
performance of all interacting individual systems has been achieved, the coordinated
response between systems shall be verified.
C. Development of Test Procedures.

1. Before test procedures are finalized, the contractor shall provide to the A/E and
the CA all requested documentation including changes affecting equipment or
systems, an updated control points list, control schematics, control sequences,
and testing parameters. Using the testing parameters and requirements in the
technical specifications, the CA shall develop and update specific testing
requirements and documentation for the purpose of verifying and documenting
the actual performance of the related systems and equipment. Each respective
contractor/subcontractor or vendor shall provide assistance to the CA as
necessary and required in developing the final equipment and systems test
procedures. Should the CA test and the manufacturer test requirement be at
variance with one another, the manufacturer operational test requirements shall
prevail.

90 Percent
2. Before test procedures are written, the CA shall obtain all requested
documentation and a current list of change orders affecting equipment or
systems, including an updated points list, program code, control sequences and
parameters. The CA shall develop specific test procedures and forms to verify
and document proper operation of each piece of equipment and system. Each
Sub or vendor responsible to execute a test, shall provide assistance to the CA
in developing the procedures review (answering questions about equipment,
operation, sequences, etc.). Prior to execution, the CA shall provide a copy of the
test procedures to the contractor who shall review the tests for feasibility, safety,
equipment and warranty protection. The CA may submit the tests to the A/E for
review and comment prior to performing the test.
D. Test Methods.
1. Functional performance testing and verification may be achieved by manual
testing (persons manipulate the equipment and observe performance) or by
monitoring the performance and analyzing the results using the building DDC
control system.
2. Simulated Conditions. Simulating conditions (not by an overwritten value) shall
be allowed, though timing the testing to experience actual conditions is
encouraged wherever practical.
3. Overwritten Values. Overwriting sensor values to simulate a condition, such as
overwriting the outside air temperature reading in a control system shall be
allowed, but simulating a condition is preferable. e.g., for the above case, by
heating the outside air sensor with a portable hot air device in lieu of overwriting
the setpoint.
4. Simulated Signals. Using a signal generator which creates a simulated signal to
test and calibrate transducers and DDC constants is generally recommended
over using the sensor to act as the signal generator via simulated conditions or
overwritten values.
5. Altering Setpoints. Rather than overwriting sensor values, and when simulating
conditions is difficult, altering setpoints to test a sequence is acceptable. For
example, to see the AC compressor lockout work at an outside air temperature
below 55°F, when the outside air temperature is above 55°F, temporarily change
the lockout setpoint to be 2°F above the current outside air temperature.
6. Indirect Indicators. Relying on indirect indicators for responses or performance
shall be allowed only after visually and directly verifying and documenting, over
the range of the tested parameters, that the indirect readings through the control
system represent actual conditions and responses. Much of this verification is
completed during prefunctional testing.
7. Setup. Each function and test shall be performed under conditions that simulate
actual conditions as close as is practically possible. The Sub executing the test
shall provide all necessary materials, system modifications, etc. to produce the
necessary flows, pressures, temperatures, etc. necessary to execute the test
according to the specified conditions. At completion of the test, the Sub shall
return all affected building equipment and systems, due to these temporary
modifications, to their pre-test condition.

90 Percent
8. Sampling. Multiple identical pieces of non-life-safety or otherwise non-critical

equipment may be functionally tested using a sampling strategy. Significant
application differences and significant sequence of operation differences in
otherwise identical equipment invalidates their common identity. A small size or
capacity difference, alone, does not constitute a difference. The specific
recommended sampling rates are listed in these documents. It is noted that no
sampling by Subs is allowed in CHECKLIST execution. A common sampling
strategy referenced in the Specifications as the “xx% Sampling-yy% Failure Rule”
is defined by the following example:
a. xx = the percent of the group of identical equipment to be included in each
sample.
b. yy = the percent of the sample that if failing, will require another sample to
be tested.
9. The example below describes a 20% Sampling—10% Failure Rule.
a. Randomly test at least 20% (xx) of each group of identical equipment. In no
case test less than three units in each group. This 20%, or three, constitute
the “first sample.”
b. If 10% (yy) of the units in the first sample fail the functional performance
tests, test another 20% of the group (the second sample).
c. If 10% of the units in the second sample fail, test all remaining units in the
whole group.
d. If at any point, frequent failures are occurring and testing is becoming more
troubleshooting than verification, the CA may stop the testing and require the
responsible Sub to perform and document a check-out of the remaining
units, prior to continuing with functionally testing the remaining units.
E. Coordination and Scheduling:

1. The Subs shall provide sufficient notice to the CA regarding their completion
schedule for the CHECKLISTS and start-up of all equipment and systems. The
CA will schedule functional tests through the GC.
2. The CA shall observe and document the results of functional testing if the results
shall be provided to the owner and A/E for review and record.
3. The Subs shall execute the tests. In general, functional performance testing is
conducted after checklist verification and start-up has been satisfactorily
completed and start-up reports and checklists have been reviewed by the A/E.
The control system is sufficiently tested for completeness, by the controls
contractor and prior to TAB work. The controls sub will provide written notification
to the GC, A/E and CA that the controls have been inspected and pre-Tested
prior to beginning TAB and any Functional testing work. The air balancing and
water balancing is then completed and debugged before functional testing of air-
related or water-related equipment or systems. Testing proceeds from
components to subsystems to systems. When the proper performance of all
interacting individual systems has been achieved, the interface or coordinated
responses between systems is checked.
a. Test Equipment. All standard testing equipment required to perform start-up
and initial check-out and required functional performance testing shall be
provided by the Division contractor for the equipment being tested. All testing
equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test or measure
system performance as required by the construction documents and
specifications and functional performance testing.

90 Percent
b. Problem Solving. The CA will recommend solutions to issues discovered,

however the burden of responsibility to solve, correct and retest problems is
with the GC, Subs and A/E.
3.5 DOCUMENTATION, NON-CONFORMANCE AND APPROVAL OF TESTS
A. Documentation. The CA shall witness and document the results of all functional
performance tests using the specific procedural forms developed for that purpose.
Prior to testing, these forms are provided to the A/E and GC for review and approval.
B. Non-Conformance.
1. The CA will record the results of the functional test on the test form. All
deficiencies or non-conformance issues shall be documented and reported to the
GC for correction and a copy provided to the A/E and owner.
2. Corrections of minor deficiencies identified may be made during the tests at the
discretion of the CA. In such cases the deficiency and resolution will be
documented on the procedure form.
3. Every effort will be made to expedite the testing process and minimize
unnecessary delays, while not compromising the integrity of the procedures.
However, the CA will not be pressured into overlooking deficient work or
loosening acceptance criteria to satisfy scheduling or cost issues, unless there is
an overriding reason to do so at the request of the PM and CM. Any issue that
requires more than 30 minutes to correct or multiple issues with a combined total
of 90 minutes in any given day, shall be deemed failed and shall be documented
as such by the Cx agent. A copy of the discrepancy shall be provided to the GC
for correction and the project team members for record. Upon written notification
from the GC, that the issue or issues are corrected and the system is fully
operational and ready for retest, the CA will schedule with the GC for a retest of
the failed system. Five working days shall be required by the GC in writing to the
CA for any retest.
4. As tests progress and a deficiency is identified, the CA discusses the issue with
the executing contractor.
5. When there is no dispute on the deficiency and the Sub accepts responsibility to
correct it:
a. The CA documents the deficiency and the Sub’s response and intentions
and they go on to another test or sequence. The CA submits the non-
compliance reports to the GC, A/E and owner. A copy is to be provided to
the appropriate Sub by the GC. The Sub corrects the deficiency, signs the
statement of correction at the bottom of the form certifying that the equipment
is ready to be retested and sends it back to the GC for verification. The GC
provides a copy of the signed form to the A/E and CA for record.
b. The CA reschedules the test and the test is repeated.
6. If there is a dispute about a deficiency, regarding whether it is a deficiency or who
is responsible:
a. The deficiency shall be documented with the Sub’s response and a copy
given to the GC, A/E, PM and CA and to the Sub representative assumed to
be responsible.
b. Resolutions are made at the lowest management level possible. Other
parties are brought into the discussions as needed. Final interpretive
authority is with the A/E. Final acceptance authority is the owner.

90 Percent
c. The CA documents the resolution process.

d. Once the interpretation and resolution have been decided, the GC and CA
will reschedule the test and the test is repeated.
7. Cost of Retesting.
a. If a system scheduled for a Functional Performance Test fails to pass and
perform as designed, due to improper installation of start-up by the
contractor, the cost for retest including the CA’s time and travel, will be
charged to the General Contractor who may choose to back charge his subs
to recover any losses. Minor corrections will be made on site and the test will
continue where the total time for any given system to be corrected and made
fully operational, is less than 15 minutes.
b. For a deficiency identified, not related to any Checklists or start-up fault, the
following shall apply: The CA and GC will direct the retesting of the system
once at no “charge” to the sub or vendor for their time. However, the CA’s
time and expenses, incurred due to additional retests of any system beyond
the one retest, will be charged to the GC, who will choose to recover costs
from the responsible Sub.
c. The time for the CA and GC to direct any retesting required because a
specific Checklists or start-up test item, reported to have been successfully
completed, but determined during functional testing to be faulty, will be back
charged to the GC, who may choose to recover costs from the party
responsible for executing the faulty functional test.
8. The Contractor shall respond in writing to the CA, A/E and PM at least as often
as Commissioning meetings are being scheduled, concerning the status of each
apparent outstanding discrepancy identified during commissioning. Discussion
shall cover explanations of any disagreements and proposals for their resolution.
9. The CA retains the original Cx Issues Log until the end of the project.
C. Approval. The CA notes each satisfactorily demonstrated function on the test form.
Formal approval of the functional test is made after review by the CA,A/E and PM.
The CA documents the results of each test.
3.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Standard O&M Manuals.

1. The specific content and format requirements for the Standard O&M manuals are
detailed in the A/E’s project specifications.
2. CA Review and Approval. Prior to substantial completion, the CA shall review the
O&M manuals, documentation and redline as-builds for systems that were
commissioned and as otherwise listed in these documents, to verify compliance
with the Specifications. The CA will communicate deficiencies in the manuals to
the GC, PM or A/E, as requested. Upon a successful review of the corrections,
the CA recommends approval and acceptance of these sections of the O&M
manuals to the GC, PM or A/E. The CA also reviews the MEP and special
systems equipment warranty information. This review by the CA does not
supersede the A/E’s responsibility to review the O&M manuals according to the
A/E’s contract.
B. Commissioning Record in O&M Manuals.

1. The CA shall include the commissioning record as part of the close out

90 Percent
documentation or as a supplement to the O&M records. This shall be in electronic

format for final deliverables to the owner. The intended format is PDF format
provided on electronic medium/discs.
3.7 DEFERRED TESTING
A. Unforeseen Deferred Tests. If any check or test cannot be completed due to the
building structure, required occupancy condition or other deficiency, execution of
checklists and functional testing may be delayed upon approval of the PM. These
tests will be conducted in the same manner as the seasonal tests as soon as possible.
Services of necessary parties will be negotiated.
B. Seasonal Testing. Where seasonal testing is necessary or required to verify systems

performance under designed conditions, these Tests will be scheduled by the GC, in
coordination with the Owner and CA, and executed by the responsible Subs. The
owner’s facilities staff and the CA shall be notified in writing, by the GC, of the dates
such testing will be conducted and shall be available for observing the testing. All
such tests shall be scheduled no later than 60 days from substantial completion and
shall be conducted no later than seven months from substantial completion. The
owner shall have final approval for seasonal test dates. Any adjustments required for
updating the accuracy of the O&M manuals, warranties and as-builts due to the
testing will be made by the contractor.
3.8 WRITTEN WORK PRODUCTS
A. The commissioning process generates a number of written work products described

in various parts of the Specifications. The Commissioning Plan-Construction Phase,
lists all the formal written work products, describes briefly their contents, who is
responsible to create them, their due dates, who receives and approves them and the
location of the specification to create them. In summary, the written products are:
Product Developed By
1. Final commissioning plan CA
2. Commissioning schedule GC/CA
3. Equipment documentation submittals GC/Subs/A/E
4. Sequence clarifications A/E/Vendors
5. Issues log (deficiencies) CA/GC
6. Commissioning Progress Record CA
7. Deficiency reports CA/A/E/PM/GC
8. Functional test forms CA/AE
9. Filled out functional tests CA/GC/Subs
10. O&M manuals GC/Subs
11. Commissioning record book CA
12. Final commissioning report CA
13. Final TAB report TAB

90 Percent
3.9 SAMPLE COMMISSIONING PLAN TEMPLATE
A. This section contains a sample commissioning plan in a document format. The

sample commissioning plan is displayed here to provide contractors with an example
of a format and rigor of the required documentation. The commissioning plan is
subject to modification based upon project requirements. Functional test will be
issued for MEP systems during the submittal phase.

Argyle Elementary School #4
90% Review
IECC COMMISSIONING REPORT TEMPLATE
DATE
PROJECT NAME
PROJECT ADDRESS
ENGINEERING & CONSULTING
328 S. BROADWAY
TYLER, TEXAS 75702
903 581 2677
REGISTRATION NO. F-893
____________________________
“Engineer’s Signature”
1
90% Review
Commissioning Plan template

“PROJECT TITLE”
1. Commissioning Plan Overview ...................................................................................................................... 3
2. Abbreviations and Definitions........................................................................................................................ 3
3. Commissioning Process Description ............................................................................................................ 5
4. Construction Phase......................................................................................................................................... 6
5. Occupancy and Operations Phase ................................................................................................................ 7
6. Contact Information ........................................................................................................................................ 9
7. Schedule Requirements................................................................................................................................ 11
8. Index of Appendices ..................................................................................................................................... 12

Appendix A – Project Specifications .................................................................................................................... 13
Appendix B – Communication Structures ............................................................................................................ 13
Appendix C – Roles and Responsibilities ............................................................................................................ 14
Appendix D – Commissioning Process Issues .................................................................................................... 17
Appendix E – Commissioning Test Procedures ................................................................................................... 17
Appendix F – Systems Manual ............................................................................................................................ 17
Commissioning Plan Template Page 2

Version 05/16
90% Review
1. Commissioning Plan Overview
The Project Commissioning Plan provides a general description of the commissioning process
to be used for the “PROJECT TITLE” project. The goals, intent, requirements, and timing of the
process are included in the plan to provide a guide on how the process is to be executed and
documented. A listing of the systems included in the commissioning process scope of work for
this project is included in one of the appendices. These contract documents describe the
process in more detail and also provide the Test Procedures, forms, and other requirements
necessary to guide the commissioning activities.
The Project Commissioning Plan shall be supplemented and enhanced by the Commissioning
Authority (CxA), Construction Manager (CM), and other contractors throughout the construction
process to form the Project Commissioning Record at the end of the project. Throughout the
commissioning process, the CxA shall revise the specific commissioning procedures and forms
as necessary to suit project field conditions and actual approved manufacturer’s equipment, to
incorporate test data and procedure results, and to provide detailed scheduling for all
commissioning tasks. The completed Commissioning Plan shall become the owner’s
Commissioning Record and shall provide a reference to system setup, test results, and
operational data for the systems commissioned. Once complete and approved, the Project
Commissioning Record is then re-organized and combined with other project closeout
documentation to form the Systems Manual for the project.
2. Abbreviations and Definitions
The following are common abbreviations and definitions used in this document and throughout
the commissioning process documentation:
A/E Architect/Design Engineers TP Test Procedure

CxA Commissioning Authority GC General contractor
CC Controls contractor MC Mechanical contractor
Cx Commissioning CC Construction Checklist
EM Energy Manager OR Owner’s representative
Cx Plan Commissioning Plan Subs Subcontractors to GC
EC document
Electrical contractor TAB Test and balance contractor
FM Facility Manager MS Maintenance Staff
Acceptance: A contractually defined action that permits an activity to commence or continue.

Basis of Design: A document that records the concepts, calculations, decisions, and product
selections used to meet the Owner’s Project Requirements and to satisfy applicable regulatory
requirements, standards, and guidelines. The document includes both narrative descriptions
and lists of individual items that support the design process.
Commissioning: See Commissioning Process.
Commissioning Activity: A component of the Commissioning Process.

Version 05/16
90% Review
Commissioning Authority: An entity identified by the owner who plans, schedules, and
coordinates the commissioning team to implement the Commissioning Process.
Commissioning Field Report: A document that records the activities and results of the
Commissioning Process.
Commissioning Plan: A document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of
resources, and documentation requirements of the Commissioning Process.
Commissioning Process: A quality-focused process for enhancing the delivery of a project.
The process focuses on verifying and documenting that the facility and all of its systems and
assemblies are planned, designed, installed, tested, operated, and maintained to meet the
Owner's Project Requirements.
Commissioning Process Progress & Approval Form: A document that indicates activities
completed as part of the Commissioning Process, approval status of the activities, and
significant findings from those activities; it is continuously updated during the course of a project.
Commissioning Team: The individuals, who through coordinated actions, are responsible for
implementing the Commissioning Process.
Construction Documents: This includes a wide range of documents, which will vary from
project to project, owner’s needs, regulations, laws, and countries. Construction documents
usually include the project manual (specifications), plans (drawings) and General terms of the
contract, especially those required by subcontractors and vendors, suppliers and manufacturers
of equipment, assemblies and systems.
Contract Documents: This includes a wide range of documents, which will vary from project
to project, owner’s needs, regulations, laws, and countries. It frequently includes price
agreements, construction management process, subcontractor agreements or requirements,
requirements and procedures for submittals, changes, and other construction requirements,
timeline for completion, and the Construction Documents.
Coordination Drawings: Drawings showing the work of all trades to illustrate that equipment
can be installed in the space allocated without compromising equipment function or access for
maintenance and replacement. These drawings graphically illustrate and dimension
manufacturers’ recommended maintenance clearances.
Issues Log: A formal and ongoing record of problems or concerns – and their resolution – that
have been raised by members of the Commissioning Team during the course of the
Commissioning Process.
Owner’s Project Requirements: A written document that details the functional requirements
of a project and the expectations of how it will be used and operated. This includes project and
design goals, measurable performance criteria, budgets, schedules, success criteria, and
supporting information.
Probabilistic Tools: Tools and methods based upon an estimated, uniform or known
probability/statistical distribution of outcome that can be predicted or an underlying outcome
distribution that can be expected or estimated. The distribution of outcome should be within a
reasonably close range to the mean expected outcome or measured value, be it known or
estimated.
Systems Manual: A system-focused composite document that includes the Commissioning
Record, operation manual, maintenance manual, and additional information of use to the owner
during the Occupancy and Operations Phase.
Test Procedure: A written protocol that defines methods, personnel, and expectations for tests
conducted on components, equipment, assemblies, systems, and interfaces among systems.
Verification: The process by which specific documents, components, equipment, assemblies,

systems, and interfaces among systems are confirmed to comply with the criteria described in
the Owner’s Project Requirements.

Version 05/16
90% Review
3. Commissioning Process Description
The Commissioning Plan is a document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of
resources, and documentation requirements of the Commissioning Process. The BCA defines
the basic purpose of commissioning as: "The basic purpose of building commissioning is to
provide documented confirmation that building systems function in compliance with criteria set
forth in the project contract documents to satisfy the owner's operational needs. Commissioning
of existing systems may require the development of new functional criteria in order to address
the owner's current systems performance requirements." This definition is based on the critical
understanding that the owner must have some means of verifying that their functional needs
are rigorously addressed during construction and acceptance.
The three main goals of the commissioning process are:
1. Facilitate the final acceptance of the project at the earliest possible date.
2. Facilitate the transfer of the project to the owner’s maintenance staff.
3. Ensure that the comfort systems meet the requirements of the occupants.
Commissioning is also intended to achieve the following specific objectives:

• Document that equipment is installed and started per manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• Document system performance with thorough functional performance testing and
monitoring.
• Verify the completeness of operations and maintenance materials.
• Control point-to-point checks.
The contractor verifies installation, provides scheduling and coordination of commissioning

activities, conducts test, corrects deficiencies, performs re-tests, and provides documentation
of the process. The Commissioning Authority (CxA) provides the owner an unbiased, objective
view of the systems installation, documentation, operation, and performance. Commissioning
procedures and results are observed by the CxA. The contractor is expected to verify the
functional readiness of systems to be tested prior to performing the tests in the presence of the
witnesses. A high rate of test failure will indicate that the contractor has not adequately verified
the readiness of the systems.
This plan is the key means for the CxA to inform all parties as to how each system functions
independently and with respect to other systems. This plan shall be updated regularly and
redistributed to the commissioning team for review and comment.
The following marked systems will be commissioned in this project. All general
references to equipment in this document refer only to equipment that is to be
commissioned.
System Equipment Quantity Functional Tests

HVAC System Chillers Sequence of operation,
economizer, alarms, controls
Pumps

Version 05/16
90% Review
System Equipment Quantity Functional Tests

Cooling tower
Boilers
Piping systems
Ductwork
Variable frequency drives
Air handlers
Packaged AC units
Packaged HP units
Terminal units
Unit heaters
Heat exchangers
Fume hoods
Lab room pressures
Exhaust fans
HVAC control system
Fire and smoke dampers
Electrical Sweep or scheduled lighting Sequence of operation, settings,

System controls sensitivity, controls
Daylight dimming controls
Lighting occupancy sensors
Time Switch Controls
Other Service water heaters
4. Construction Phase
Submittals
The general contractor will provide the CxA with a set of equipment and system submittals. This
equipment data includes installation and start-up procedures, O&M data, performance data and
temperature control drawings. The subcontractors, GC or A/E notify the commissioning authority of
any new OPR or operating parameter changes, added control strategies and sequences of
operation, or other change orders that may affect commissioned systems.

Version 05/16
90% Review
Verification during the Construction Phase

Verification is a systematic process of ensuring that all building systems perform interactively
according to the OPR and operational needs. This is achieved by beginning in the Construction
Phase and continuing through the occupancy and operations period with actual verification of
performance prior to occupancy.
Verification during the construction of this project is intended to achieve the following specific
objectives according to the Contract Documents:
• Ensure that applicable equipment and systems are installed properly

• Verify and document proper performance of equipment and systems compared to what
design calls for compared to what design calls for.
• Ensure that O&M documentation is complete.
• Verify that adequate and accurate system and assembly documentation is provided to the
owner.
• Utilize quality-based sampling techniques to detect systemic problems.
• At minimum, testing shall affirm winter and summer design conditions and full outside air
conditions.
Commissioning Record
The Project Commissioning Record is the original Project Commissioning Plan updated throughout
the project and augmented with completed checklists, Test Procedures and data, and other
attachments and reports collected through the commissioning process. The Commissioning Record
is incorporated in the final project Systems Manual.
5. Occupancy and Operations Phase
Commissioning Issues and Retesting

The CxA records the results of the functional test on the procedure or test form. All deficiencies
identified during the verification testing are documented on an issues list standard form and reported
to the owner. The deficiency report includes all details of the components or systems found to be
non-compliant with the parameters of the test plans. The report details the adjustments or alterations
required to correct system operation, at which time owner will identify the responsible party.
Corrections of minor deficiencies identified may be made during the tests at the discretion of the
CxA with the concurrence of the owner. In such cases the deficiency and resolution will be
documented on the procedure form. Every effort will be made to expedite the testing process and
minimize unnecessary delays, while not compromising the integrity of the procedures.
For identified deficiencies:
If there is no dispute on the deficiency and the responsibility to correct it:

Version 04/10
90% Review
The CxA documents the deficiency and the adjustments or alterations required to correct it.
The contractor corrects the deficiency and notifies the CxA that the equipment is ready to
be retested. The CxA reschedules the test and the test is repeated.
If there is a dispute about a deficiency or who is responsible:
The deficiency is documented on the issues form and a copy given the CM/OR.
Resolutions are made at the lowest management level possible. Final interpretive authority
is with the CM/OR and the A/E. The CxA documents the resolution process.
Once the interpretation and resolution have been decided, the appropriate party corrects the
deficiency and notifies the CxA that the equipment is ready to be retested. The CxA reschedules
the test and the test is repeated until satisfactory performance is achieved.
Deferred Testing
Unforeseen Deferred Tests: If any test cannot be completed due to the building structure,
required occupancy condition, or other deficiency, the functional testing may be delayed
upon approval of the owner. These tests are conducted in the same manner as the
seasonal tests as soon as possible.
Seasonal Testing: Seasonal variation in operations or control strategies may require

additional testing during the opposite season to verify performance of the HVAC system
and controls. During the warranty period, seasonal testing and other deferred testing is
completed as required to fully test all sequences of operation. Operation coordinates these
activities. Tests are executed and documented, with deficiencies corrected by the
appropriate contractors. Any final adjustments to the O&M manuals and as-builts due to the
testing are also completed.
Facility Staff Participation:

The facilities operating staff at the direction of the owner may participate in the testing
process.
Sampling:
At the discretion of the CxA, multiple identical pieces of non-life-safety or otherwise non-
critical equipment may be functionally tested using a sampling strategy.
Sequence of testing:
1. The verification begins with equipment or assembly delivery and continues through
start-up and testing.
2. Other sequencing requirements, depending upon the specific system, may be required
to ensure the proper conditions are present or can be created.
3. A specified test is run per construction documents or per manufacturer’s requirements.

Version 04/10
90% Review
Standard O&M Manuals

As part of the commissioning process, the CxA reviews the O&M manuals, documentation and
redline as-builts for systems that were commissioned to verify compliance with the OPR and
Specifications.
Systems Manual
The Systems Manual is intended to be a usable information resource containing all of the
information related to the systems, assemblies, and commissioning process in one place with
indexes and cross references.
Final Commissioning Report

After completion of all commissioning activities, the Commissioning Authority will write a final report
documenting the overall results of the commissioning process and recommending acceptance of the
commissioning process and related documentation to the owner.
The final commissioning report will include an overview or summary of the commissioning process,
major results of the process, the final commissioning issues log and resolutions, commissioning
progress and field reports, a deferred testing log, an unresolved issues log, a lessons-learned
evaluation, and concluding with a recommendation to accept the process as complete.
6. Contact Information
The following table indicates individual contacts for each organization involved in the
commissioning process:
Voice, office, cell, fax,

Team Member Contact Names email address
Owner: Address
Project Manager: City/State/Zip
Phone
Cell/Fax
E-Mail
Other Contact: Address
City/State/Zip
Phone
Cell/Fax
E-Mail
Construction Address
Manager:
Phone
Cell/Fax
E-Mail
Project Engineer: Address
City/State/Zip
Phone
Cell/Fax
E-Mail

Version 04/10
90% Review
Commissioning Address
Authority:
Commissioning City/State/Zip
Authority:
Phone
Cell/Fax
E-Mail
Project Manager: Address
City/State/Zip
Phone
Cell/Fax
E-Mail
Architect/Engineer: Address
Architect: City/State/Zip
Phone
Cell/Fax
E-Mail
Mechanical Engineer: Address
City/State/Zip
Phone
Cell/Fax
E-Mail
Electrical Engineer: Address
City/State/Zip
Phone
Cell/Fax
E-Mail
General Contractor: Address

Phone
Cell/Fax
E-Mail
Superintendent: Address
City/State/Zip
Phone
Cell/Fax
E-Mail
TAB Contractor: Address
Phone
Cell/Fax
E-Mail
BAS Contractor: Address
Phone
Cell/Fax
E-Mail

Version 04/10
90% Review
7. Schedule Requirements
The following sequential priorities are followed:

1. System verification testing is not begun until Construction Checklists and start-up and TAB is completed, for a
given system. System ready to balance checklist must be submitted to Operations.
2. The controls system and equipment it controls are not functionally tested until all points have been calibrated
and Construction Checklists are completed.
3. TAB is not performed until the controls system has been started, sufficiently functionally tested, and approved
by the A/E.
4. TAB is not performed until the envelope is completely enclosed and ceilings are complete, unless the return are
is ducted.

Version 04/10
90% Review
8. Index of Appendices
Appendix A - Project Specifications
Appendix B - Communication Structures
Appendix C - Roles and Responsibilities
Appendix D - Commissioning Process Issues
Appendix E - Commissioning Test Procedures
Appendix F - Systems Manual

Version 04/10
90% Review
Appendix A – Project Specifications
Commissioning language in the specifications details the scope of commissioning for this
project. The following table lists the sections of the specifications that may include
commissioning related language required for this project. Additional requirements may be
included in each sub section.
Mechanical and lighting systems are to be commissioned per 2015 IECC code and
requirements.
Appendix B – Communication Structures
General Management Plan and Protocols

The following protocols will be used on this project:
Table D.1: General Management Protocols

Issue Protocol
For requests for information (RFI) The CxA goes first through the CM or OR
or formal documentation
requests:
For minor or verbal information The CxA goes direct to the CM or OR

and clarifications:
For notifying contractors of The CxA documents deficiencies through the CM or OR, but
deficiencies: may discuss deficiency issues with contractors prior to
notifying the CM or OR
For scheduling tests or training: The CxA provides input and coordination of testing and
training. Scheduling is done through the CM or OR.
For scheduling commissioning The CP selects the date and schedules through the CM or OR.
meetings:
For making a request for The CxA has no authority to issue change orders.
significant changes:
For making minor changes in Any required changes in sequences of operations required to
specified sequences of correct operational deficiencies must be approved and
operations: documented by the CM/OR and A/E team. The CxA may
recommend changes in sequences of operation to improve
efficiency or control.
Subcontractors disagreeing with Resolve issues at the lowest level possible. First with the CxA,
requests or interpretations by the who obtains approval from the CM or OR then with the GC.
CxA shall: Some issues may require input from the A/E team.

Version 04/10
90% Review
Appendix C – Roles and Responsibilities
Descriptions and explanations of the roles and responsibilities of those in the commissioning
process are found below:
General Descriptions of Roles

General descriptions of the commissioning roles are as follows:
CxA: Coordinates the CX process, writes Construction Checklists and test

Procedures and reviews testing plans, start-up procedures and directs and
documents performance testing.
OR: Facilitates and supports the CX process and gives final approval of the CX work.
FM: Coordinates maintenance staff participation in commissioning activities.
GC: Facilitates the CX process, ensures that Subs perform their responsibilities and
integrates CX into the construction process and schedule.
Subs: Demonstrate correct system performance.
Staff: Participate in commissioning tasks and performance testing, review O&M
documentation, and attend training.
A/E: Perform construction observation, approve O&M manuals and assist in resolving
problems.
Mfr.: Equipment manufacturers and vendors provide documentation to facilitate the
commissioning work and perform contracted startup.
Specific Roles and responsibilities

Owner’s Representative (OR):
1. Assign operations and maintenance personnel and schedule them to participate in
the various meetings, training sessions, and observations/inspections as follows:
a. Construction Phase coordination meetings.
b. Initial owner training session at initial placement of major equipment.
c. Maintenance orientation and inspection.
d. System testing verification meetings.
e. Procedures meeting for testing systems.
f. Owner's training session.
g. Verification demonstrations.
h. Systems and assemblies tests.
i. Final review at acceptance meeting.
2. Review and approve any changes made to Owner’s Project Requirements.
3. Review and approve the Construction Documents.
4. Review and comment on the Commissioning Authority’s Commissioning Process
Progress Reports.
5. Review and comment on the Commissioning Authority's verification reports.
6. Review and accept the Commissioning Authority's Commissioning Process Report.

Version 04/10
90% Review
Commissioning Authority (CxA):

1. Organize and lead the Commissioning Team.
2. Identify specialists who will be responsible for accomplishing the Commissioning
Process activities for specific systems and assemblies
3. Provide Commissioning Process activities to the GC for inclusion into the project
schedule
4. Execute the Commissioning Process through the writing and review of
Commissioning Process Reports, organization of all Commissioning Team meetings,
tests, demonstrations, and training events described in the Contract Documents and
approved Commissioning Plan.
5. Organizational responsibilities include preparation of agendas, attendance lists, and
arrangements for facilities, and timely notification to participants for each
Commissioning Process activity.
6. The Commissioning Authority shall act as chair at all commissioning events and
ensure execution of all agenda items.
7. Review the following submittals: coordination drawings, shop drawings, product data,
and training program for compliance with the Owners Project Requirement.
8. Develop Test Procedures to carry out the tests that are accomplished during this
phase
9. Develop the initial format to be used for Issues Logs throughout and for each phase
of the Commissioning Process.
10. Review proposed contractor-provided training program to verify that the Owner’s
Project Requirements are achieved.
11. Attend a portion of the contractor-provided training sessions to verify that the
Owner’s Project Requirements are achieved.
12. Update the Systems Manuals to incorporate materials generated during the
Construction Phase. Update material that originated in earlier phases of the project.
Add new materials such as the following to the manuals, such as Test Procedures
and test data records, training plans, training records and record drawings. Verify
that it achieves the Owner’s Project Requirements. Insert systems descriptions as
provided by the design professional(s) in the Systems Manual.
13. Identify diagnose, and track issues and deviations relating to the Construction
Documents and the Owner’s Project Requirements and document resolution of
same.
14. Supervise the Commissioning Team members in completion of tests. The test data
will be part of the Commissioning Process Report.
15. Verify that the Systems Manual and all other design and construction records have
been updated to include all modifications made during the Construction Phase.
16. Repeat implementing of tests to accommodate seasonal tests or to correct any
performance deficiencies. Revise and resubmit the Commissioning Process Report
as required.

Version 04/10
90% Review
17. Prepare the final Commissioning Process Report.

18. Assemble the final documentation, which includes the Commissioning Process
Report, the Systems Manual, and all record documents. Submit this documentation
to the owner for review and acceptance.
19. Recommend acceptance of the individual systems and assemblies to the owner (in
accord with the defined project requirements.
20. Keep the Commissioning Team informed of decisions that result in modifications to
the Owner’s Project Requirements.
Design Professional (A/E):

1. Document the Basis of Design.
2. Attend the pre-construction meetings as scheduled by the Commissioning Authority.
3. Participate in the initial operation and maintenance personnel and occupant training
session by presenting the project Basis of Design.
4. Participate in other training as detailed in the training program.
5. Review Test Procedures submitted by the Commissioning Authority.
6. Review and comment on the Commissioning Authority's periodic Commissioning
Process Progress Reports and Issues Log reports.
7. Review and accept record documents as required by Contract Documents.
8. Review and comment on the final Commissioning Process Report.
9. Recommend final acceptance of the systems to the owner.
Construction Manager (CM):

1. Include Commissioning Process requirements and activities in all contractors'
contracts.
2. Provide acceptable representation with the means and authority to prepare and
coordinate implementation of the Commissioning Process as detailed in the Contract
Documents.
3. Issue a statement certifying that all work has been completed and that the facility is
operational, in accordance with Contract Documents.
4. Issue the appropriate final reports to the design professionals for review and
acceptance.
5. Facilitate the remedy of deficiencies identified by the Commissioning Authority during
verification of the installation or testing.
6. Review and comment on the final Commissioning Process Report.
Contractor (GC):
1. Include Commissioning Process requirements and activities in each purchase order
or subcontract written.
2. Obtain cooperation and participation of all subcontractors and manufacturers.
3. Attend the pre-construction and Commissioning Team meetings.

Version 04/10
90% Review
4. Implement the training program as detailed in the Contract Documents.

5. Provide submittals to the owner, design professionals, and the Commissioning
Authority.
6. Notify the Commissioning Authority when systems and assemblies are ready for
testing.
7. Demonstrate the performance of assemblies and/or operation of systems to the
Commissioning Authority.
8. Complete the Construction Checklists as the work is accomplished. Provide the
completed Construction Checklists to the Commissioning Authority through the
owner.
9. Continuously maintain the Record Drawings and submit as detailed in the Contract
Documents.
Manufacturers, Vendors, Suppliers (Mfr.):

1. Provide all information required for the operation and maintenance of the system or
assembly as part of the initial submittal.
2. Provide the requirements to maintain the warranty as part of the initial submittal.
3. Coordinate and accomplish factory tests as detailed in the Contract Documents.
4. Provide training as detailed in the training program contained in the Contract
Documents.
Demonstrate operation and performance of the system or assembly as detailed in the
Contract Documents
Appendix D – Commissioning Process Issues
<Insert Punch list>
Appendix E – Commissioning Test Procedures
<Insert test procedure forms and attachments>
Appendix F – Systems Manual
<Refer to Systems Manual Requirements document for further information. Insert requirements
for Systems Manual here.>
END OF SECTION

Version 04/10
SECTION 03 10 00
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. Form-Facing Material: Temporary structure or mold for the support of concrete while
the concrete is setting and gaining sufficient strength to be self-supporting.
B. Formwork: The total system of support of freshly placed concrete, including the mold or
sheathing that contacts the concrete, as well as supporting members, hardware, and
necessary bracing.
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site or location or method as

mutually agreed upon.
1. Review the following:
a. Special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field
quality control.
b. Construction, movement, contraction, and isolation joints
c. Forms and form-removal limitations.
d. Shoring procedures.
e. Anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances.
A. Product Data: For each of the following:

1. Exposed surface form-facing material.
2. Concealed surface form-facing material.
3. Forms for cylindrical columns.
4. Void forms.
5. Form liners.
6. Form ties.
7. Waterstops.
8. Form-release agent.
B. Shop Drawings: Prepared by, and signed and sealed by, a qualified Structural
Engineer licensed to practice in the state in which the project is located responsible for
their preparation, detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of forms.
1. Submit size and layout of sleeves and openings in structural members, required
by trades, prior to submitting reinforcing and formwork shop drawings for review.
Concrete Forming and Accessories 03 10 00 - 1

2. For exposed vertical concrete walls, indicate dimensions and form tie locations.
3. Indicate dimension and locations of construction and movement joints required to
construct the structure in accordance with ACI 301 and Contract Drawings.
4. Indicate location of waterstops.
5. Reproductions of contract drawings shall not be used for shop drawings.
6. Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping of forms and shoring
removal.
7. Indicate form liner layout and form line termination details.
8. Indicate location of void forms.
9. For architectural exposed concrete, submit layout of form tie spacing.
C. Samples:
1. For Form Liners: 12-inch by 12-inch sample, indicating texture.
A. Qualification Data: For testing and inspection agency.
B. Minutes of preinstallation conference.
A. Form Liners: Store form liners under cover to protect from sunlight.
B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil,
and other contaminants.
C. Store materials off ground and protected from weather.

1. Prevent warping, twisting, and excessive moisture gain of wood materials.
2. Discard damaged or deformed materials.
D. Protect smooth faces of form liner materials from abrasion, denting, or scarring during
handling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Concrete Formwork: Design, engineer, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork,
shores in accordance with ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic
loads, loading induced by post-tensioning and construction loads that might be applied,
until structure can support such loads, so that resulting concrete conforms to the
required shapes, lines, and dimensions.
1. Design wood panel forms in accordance with APA's "Concrete Forming
Design/Construction Guide."

2. Design formwork to limit deflection of form-facing material to 1/240 of center-to-

center spacing of supports.
2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. As-Cast Surface Form-Facing Material:

1. Provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces.
2. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
3. Acceptable Materials: As required to comply with Surface Finish designations
specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-In-Place Concrete, and as follows:
a. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.
b. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with
DOC PS 1, and as APA Plyform Class I, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge
sealed.
B. Concealed Surface Form-Facing Material: Lumber, plywood, metal, plastic, or another

approved material.
1. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced

plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that produce surfaces without spiral or vertical seams not
exceeding specified formwork surface class.
1. Provide forms with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads
without detrimental deformation.
D. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally
sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.
E. Form Liners:
1. As indicated by the Architect or Landscape.
2.3 WATERSTOPS
A. Self-Expanding Rubber Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal

strip, bentonite-free hydrophilic polymer-modified chloroprene rubber, for adhesive
bonding to concrete, 3/8 by 3/4 inch.
2.4 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet.
Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or
debris.
B. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch thick,
with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent
intrusion of concrete or debris.

C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.
D. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.
E. Expansion-contraction joint filler material: Bonded fabric of thickness indicated on

drawings composed of cellular fibers securely bonded together and uniformly saturated
with asphalt complying with ASTM D 1751
F. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond
with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent
treatments of concrete surfaces.
1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
2. Form release agent for form liners shall be acceptable to form liner manufacturer.
G. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or

metal form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to
prevent spalling of concrete on removal.
1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of
exposed concrete surface.
2. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in
concrete surface.
3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive
dampproofing or waterproofing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF FORMWORK
A. Comply with ACI 301.
B. Construct formwork, so concrete members and structures are of size, shape,

alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117 and to
comply with the Surface Finish designations specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-In-
Place Concrete" for as-cast finishes.
C. Limit concrete surface irregularities as follows:

1. Surface Finish-1.0: ACI 117 Class D, 1 inch.
2. Surface Finish-2.0: ACI 117 Class B, 1/4 inch.
3. Surface Finish-3.0: ACI 117 Class A, 1/8 inch.
D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

1. Minimize joints.
2. Exposed Concrete: Symmetrically align joints in forms.
E. Construct removable forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against
concrete surfaces.

1. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete

surfaces.
2. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.
3. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and other accessories, for easy removal.
F. Do not use rust-stained, steel, form-facing material.
G. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve
required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces.
1. Provide and secure units to support screed strips
2. Use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
H. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of
formwork is inaccessible.
1. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent
loss of concrete mortar.
2. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.
I. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
J. At construction joints, overlap forms onto previously placed concrete not less than 12
inches.
K. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and
bulkheads required in the Work.
1. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
2. Obtain written approval of Architect prior to forming openings not indicated on
Drawings.
L. Construction and Movement Joints:

1. Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
2. Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations
indicated or as approved by Architect.
3. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement.
4. Locate joints as indicated on Structural Drawings.
5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated on Drawings.
a. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in
concealed locations where possible.
M. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning

and inspection.
1. Locate ports and openings in bottom of vertical forms, in inconspicuous location,
to allow flushing water to drain.
2. Close temporary ports and openings with tight-fitting panels, flush with inside
face of form, and neatly fitted, so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete
surfaces.

N. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust,
dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.
O. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar
leaks and maintain proper alignment.
P. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's

written instructions, before placing reinforcement.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining
work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete.
1. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished
with items to be embedded.
2. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with
tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303.
3. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in
outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels,
shelf angles, and other conditions.
4. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures, as indicated on Drawings.
5. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, level and
plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.
6. Clean embedded items immediately prior to concrete placement.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF WATERSTOPS
A. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations

indicated on Drawings, according to manufacturer's written instructions, by adhesive
bonding, mechanically fastening, and firmly pressing into place.
1. Install in longest lengths practicable.
2. Locate waterstops in center of joint unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
3. Protect exposed waterstops during progress of the Work.
3.4 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A. Formwork removal as indicated on Structural Drawings.
B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work.

1. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material are
unacceptable for exposed surfaces.
2. Apply new form-release agent.
C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close
joints.

1. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets.

2. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by
Architect.
3.5 SHORING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and
as indicated on Structural Drawings.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and
inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Inspections:
1. Inspect formwork for shape, location, and dimensions of the concrete member
being formed.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 03 20 00
CONCRETE REINFORCING
PART 1 - GENERAL

quality control.
b. Steel-reinforcement installation.
A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Each type of steel reinforcement.
2. Bar supports.
3. Mechanical splice couplers.
B. Shop Drawings: Comply with ACI 315R-18:

1. Include placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement.
2. Include bar sizes, lengths, materials, grades, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent
bar diagrams, bar arrangement, location of splices, lengths of lap splices, details
of mechanical splice couplers, details of welding splices, tie spacing, hoop
spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.
3. Do not reproduce structural drawings for use as shop drawings.
4. Submit in writing any requests for modifications to Drawings and Specifications.
Submitting shop drawings for review does not constitute “in writing”.
C. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to build the
structure. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.
A. Qualification Statements: For testing and inspection agency.

1.
B. Welding certificates.
1. Reinforcement To Be Welded: Welding procedure specification in accordance
with AWS D1.4/D1.4M
Concrete Reinforcing 03 20 00 - 1
C. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency:
1. Steel Reinforcement:
a. For reinforcement to be welded, mill test analysis for chemical composition
and carbon equivalent of the steel in accordance with ASTM A706/A706M.
2. Mechanical splice couplers.
D. Minutes of preinstallation conference.
A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending
and damage and to avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement.
1. Store reinforcement to avoid contact with earth.
2. Prevent build up of rust and dirt on reinforcing.
3. Protect reinforcing from contamination that would prevent bonding of concrete.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, as indicated on Structural Drawings, deformed.
B. Low-Alloy Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A706, deformed.
C. Headed-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A970.
D. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A184, fabricated from ASTM A615, as indicated on Structural
Drawings, deformed bars, assembled with clips.
E. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A1064, plain, fabricated from as-drawn

steel wire into flat sheets.
F. Deformed-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A1064, flat sheet.
G. Reinforcing bars to be welded: ASTM A706 as indicated on Structural Drawings.
2.2 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends
square and free of burrs.
B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place.
1. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete in
accordance with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive
strength than concrete and as follows:
a. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports
contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire, all-plastic bar
supports, or CRSI Class 2 stainless steel bar supports.
b. For supports in contact with soil or vapor retarded, provide precast
concrete blocks or chairs with bearing plates.
C. Mechanical Splice Couplers: ACI 318 Type 1, Type 2, or as indicated on Structural

Drawings, same material of reinforcing bar being spliced.
D. Steel Tie Wire: ASTM A1064, annealed steel, not less than 0.0508 inch in diameter.
1. Finish: Plain.
2.3 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protection of In-Place Conditions:

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder.
2. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, oil, grease, and other
foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing and supporting
reinforcement.
B. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement.

1. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum
concrete cover.
2. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.
3. Maintain position of reinforcing mats in walls with metal spacers between mats.
C. Preserve clearance between bars of not less than 1 inch, not less than one bar
diameter, or not less than 1-1/3 times size of large aggregate, whichever is greater.
D. Provide concrete coverage in accordance with ACI 318 and Structural Drawings.
E. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
F. Splices: Lap splices as indicated on Structural Drawings.
1. Mechanical Splice Couplers: Install in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.
2. Weld reinforcing bars in accordance with AWS D1.4, where indicated on
Structural Drawings.
G. Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths.

1. Support welded-wire reinforcement in accordance with CRSI "Manual of
Standard Practice."
a. For reinforcement less than W4.0 or D4.0, continuous support spacing
shall not exceed 12 inches.
H. Support reinforcing in slabs-on-grade and slabs-on-deck on bolsters or blocks. Do not

lift reinforcing during concrete placement.
3.3 JOINTS
A. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at
locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
2. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated.
3. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and
slabs.
B. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated.
Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length, to prevent concrete bonding to one
side of joint.
3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Comply with ACI 117.
A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and
inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 03 30 00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of

the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and
silica fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements.
B. Water/Cement Ratio (w/cm): The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.

1. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place
concrete to attend, including the following:
a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.
c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.
d. Concrete Subcontractor.
e. Special concrete finish Subcontractor.
quality control.
b. Construction joints, control joints, isolation joints, and joint-filler strips.
c. Semirigid joint fillers.
d. Vapor-retarder installation.
e. Anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances.
f. Cold and hot weather concreting procedures.
g. Concrete finishes and finishing.
h. Curing procedures.
i. Methods for achieving specified floor and slab flatness and levelness.
j. Floor and slab flatness and levelness measurements.
k. Concrete repair procedures.
l. Concrete protection.
m. Initial curing and field curing of field test cylinders (ASTM C31.)
n. Protection of field cured field test cylinders.
A. Product Data: For each of the following.
Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 1
1. Portland cement.
2. Fly ash.
3. Slag cement.
4. Blended hydraulic cement.
5. Silica fume.
6. Performance-based hydraulic cement
7. Aggregates.
8. Admixtures:
a. Include limitations of use, including restrictions on cementitious materials,
supplementary cementitious materials, air entrainment, aggregates,
temperature at time of concrete placement, relative humidity at time of
concrete placement, curing conditions, and use of other admixtures.
9. Fiber reinforcement.
10. Vapor retarders.
11. Curing materials.
12. Joint fillers.
13. Repair materials.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture, include the following:

1. Mixture identification.
2. Minimum 28-day compressive strength.
3. Durability exposure class.
4. Maximum w/cm.
5. Air content.
6. Nominal maximum aggregate size.
7. Steel-fiber reinforcement content.
8. Synthetic micro-fiber content.
9. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site if
permitted.
10. Intended placement method.
11. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project
conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to
construct the structure.
a. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.
D. Samples: As requested by the Architect.
E. Concrete Schedule: For each location of each Class of concrete indicated in "Concrete
Mixtures" Article, including the following:
1. Concrete Class designation.
2. Location within Project.
3. Exposure Class designation.

4. Formed Surface Finish designation and final finish.
5. Final finish for floors.
6. Curing process.
7. Floor treatment if any.
A. Qualification Data: For the following:

1. Installer: Include copies of applicable ACI certificates.
2. Ready-mixed concrete manufacturer.
B. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials.
2. Admixtures.
3. Fiber reinforcement.
4. Curing compounds.
5. Floor and slab treatments.
6. Bonding agents.
7. Adhesives.
8. Vapor retarders.
9. Semirigid joint filler.
10. Joint-filler strips.
11. Repair materials.
C. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency:
1. Portland cement.
2. Fly ash.
3. Slag cement.
4. Blended hydraulic cement.
5. Silica fume.
6. Performance-based hydraulic cement.
7. Aggregates.
8. Admixtures:
D. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements report, indicating compliance with
specified tolerances.
E. Preconstruction Test Reports: For each mix design.
F. Minutes of preinstallation conference.
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs Project personnel qualified as

an ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is a certified
ACI Flatwork Concrete Finisher/Technician or an ACI Concrete Flatwork Technician.
1. Post-Installed Concrete Anchors Installers: ACI-certified Adhesive Anchor
Installer.
B. Ready-Mixed Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in

manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C94
requirements for production facilities and equipment.
1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform

preconstruction testing on each concrete mixture.
1. Include the following information in each test report:
a. Admixture dosage rates.
b. Slump.
c. Air content.
d. Seven-day compressive strength.
e. 28-day compressive strength.
A. Comply with ASTM C94 and ACI 301.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 306.1 and as follows.
1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be
caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.
2. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for
three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within
the temperature range required by ACI 301.
3. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.
4. Do not place concrete in contact with surfaces less than 35 deg F, other than
reinforcing steel.
5. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents
or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture
designs.
B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 305.1, and as follows:
1. Maintain concrete temperature at time of discharge to not exceed 95 deg F. If
ice is used to control temperature, use water equivalent of ice to calculate total
amount of mixing water.
2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete.
Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL
A. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless modified by requirements in the
Contract Documents.
2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Materials:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, as indicated on Structural Drawings.
2. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. Carbon content shall not exceed 3 percent.
3. Slag Cement: ASTM C989, Grade 100 or 120.
4. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C595, as indicated on Structural Drawings.
5. Silica Fume: ASTM C1240 amorphous silica.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33, coarse aggregate or better, graded as

indicated on Structural Drawings.
1. Alkali-Silica Reaction: Comply with one of the following:
a. Expansion Result of Aggregate: Not more than 0.04 percent at one-year
when tested in accordance with ASTM C1293.
b. Expansion Results of Aggregate and Cementitious Materials in
Combination: Not more than 0.10 percent at an age of 16 days when tested
in accordance with ASTM C1567.
c. Alkali Content in Concrete: Not more than 4 lb./cu. yd. for moderately
reactive aggregate or 3 lb./cu. yd. for highly reactive aggregate, when
tested in accordance with ASTM C1293 and categorized in accordance
with ASTM C1778, based on alkali content being calculated in accordance
with ACI 301.
2. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
3. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260.
D. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other

admixtures that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those
permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing
calcium chloride.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A.
2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494, Type B.
3. Water-Reducing and -Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494, Type D.
4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type F.
5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and -Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494, Type G.

6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C1017, Type II.
E. Water and Water Used to Make Ice: ASTM C94, potable.
2.3 FIBER REINFORCEMENT
A. Synthetic Monofilament Micro-Fiber: Monofilament polypropylene micro-fibers

engineered and designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C1116/C1116M,
Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches long.
B. Synthetic Fibrillated Micro-Fiber: Fibrillated polypropylene micro-fibers engineered and

designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C1116/C1116M, Type III, 1 to 2-
1/4 inches long.
2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Sheet Vapor Retarder, Class A: ASTM E1745, Class A, except with maximum water-
vapor permeance of less then 0.1 perms; not less than 15 mils thick. Include
manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.
2.5 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for

application to fresh concrete.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf,
weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C171, polyethylene film burlap-polyethylene sheet.

1. Color:
a. Ambient Temperature Below 50 deg F: Black.
b. Ambient Temperature between 50 deg F and 85 deg F: Any color.
c. Ambient Temperature Above 85 deg F: White.
D. Water: Potable or complying with ASTM C1602.
E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming, Dissipating Curing Compound: ASTM C309,

Type 1, Class B with a VOC content of 200g/L or less.
F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming, Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C1315,

Type 1, Class A with a VOC content of 200g/L or less.
2.6 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic

fiber or ASTM D1752, cork or self-expanding cork.
B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a
Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 in accordance with ASTM D2240.
C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C1059, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene.
D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid
curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and
of grade and class to suit requirements, and as follows:
1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to
hardened concrete.
E. Floor Slab Protective Covering: Eight-feet- wide cellulose fabric.
2.7 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can

be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match
adjacent floor elevations.
1. Cement Binder: ASTM C150/C150M portland cement or hydraulic or blended
hydraulic cement, as defined in ASTM C219.
2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate,
conditions, and application.
3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand, as
recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested in
accordance with ASTM C109.
B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can

be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface
to match adjacent floor elevations.
1. Cement Binder: ASTM C150 portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic
cement, as defined in ASTM C219.
2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions,
and application.
3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as
recommended by topping manufacturer.
4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested in
2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the
basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, in accordance with ACI 301.
1. Use a qualified testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture
designs, based on laboratory trial mixtures.
B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other

than portland cement in concrete as indicated in Structural Drawings.
C. Admixtures: Use admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

Water soluble chloride ions exceeding 0.01 percent by weight of cement are not
permitted.
D. Limit water-soluble chloride ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight
of cement.
2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Proportion concrete mixture as indicated in Structural Drawings.
2.10 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete in accordance with
ASTM C94, and furnish batch ticket information.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions:
1. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of concrete forms, accessories,
and reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required
inspections have been performed.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide reasonable auxiliary services to accommodate field testing and inspections,

acceptable to testing agency, including the following:
1. Daily access to the Work.
3. Secure space for storage, initial curing, and field curing of test samples, including
source of water and continuous electrical power at Project site during site curing
period for test samples.
4. Security and protection for test samples and for testing and inspection equipment
at Project site.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining
Work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete.
1. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished
with items to be embedded.
2. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with
tolerances in Section 7.5 of ANSI/AISC 303.
3. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in
outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is indicated at
lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDER
A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder in accordance
with ASTM E1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install vapor retarder with longest dimension parallel with direction of concrete
pour.
2. Face laps away from exposed direction of concrete pour.
3. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
4. Terminate vapor retarder at the top of grade beams, piers, and pier caps, sealing
entire perimeter.
5. Seal penetrations in accordance with vapor retarder manufacturer's instructions.
6. Protect vapor retarder during placement of reinforcement and concrete.
a. Repair damaged areas by patching with vapor retarder material,
overlapping damages area by 6 inches on all sides, and sealing to vapor
retarder.
3.5 JOINTS
A. Construct joints true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Coordinate with floor slab pattern and concrete placement
sequence.
1. Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations
indicated on Drawings or as approved by Architect.
a. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise
indicated.
3. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated on Drawings.

4. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against
hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
C. Control Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: Form weakened-plane control joints, sectioning

concrete into areas as indicated. Construct control joints for a depth indicated on
Structural Drawings as follows:
1. Grooved Joints: Form control joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of control joints after
applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form control joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut joints as indicated on Structural
Drawings into concrete when cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise
damage surface and before concrete develops random cracks.
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at

slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade
beams, and other locations, as indicated.
1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished
concrete surface unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch
below finished concrete surface, where joint sealants are specified or indicated.
3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one
length is required, lace or clip sections together.
E. Doweled Joints:
1. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated on Drawings.
2. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel bar length to prevent concrete
bonding to one side of joint.
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, embedded

items, and vapor retarder is complete and that required inspections are completed.
1. Immediately prior to concrete placement, inspect vapor retarder for damage and
deficient installation, and repair defective areas.
2. Provide continuous inspection of vapor retarder during concrete placement and
make necessary repairs to damaged areas as Work progresses.
B. Notify Architect and testing and inspection agencies 24 hours prior to commencement
of concrete placement.
C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject
to limitations of ACI 301, but not to exceed the amount indicated on the concrete
delivery ticket.
1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures
to mixture.
D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that
no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or
planes of weakness.
1. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as
indicated.
2. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
3. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design
pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
4. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment in accordance
with ACI 301.
a. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms.
b. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to
rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer.
c. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose
plasticity.
d. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to
consolidate concrete, and complete embedment of reinforcement and other
embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.
E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within
limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1. Do not place concrete floors and slabs in a checkerboard sequence.
2. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly
worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
3. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
4. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
5. Level concrete, cut high areas, and fill low areas.
6. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
7. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-
textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface.
8. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. As-Cast Surface Finishes:

1. ACI 301 Surface Finish SF-1.0: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing
material.
a. Patch voids larger than 1-1/2 inches wide or 1/2 inch deep.
b. Remove projections larger than 1 inch.
c. Tie holes do not require patching.
d. Surface Tolerance: ACI 117 Class D.
e. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
2. ACI 301Surface Finish SF-2.0: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing
material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of
seams.
a. Patch voids larger than 3/4 inch wide or 1/2 inch deep.
b. Remove projections larger than 1/4 inch.

c. Patch tie holes.
d. Surface Tolerance: ACI 117 Class B.
e. Locations: Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a
rubbed finish, or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied
directly to concrete.
3. ACI 301 Surface Finish SF-3.0:
a. Patch voids larger than 3/4 inch wide or 1/2 inch deep.
b. Remove projections larger than 1/8 inch.
c. Patch tie holes.
d. Surface Tolerance: ACI 117 Class A.
e. Locations: Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a
rubbed finish, or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied
directly to concrete.
B. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to as cast surface finishes where indicated on
Drawings:
1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish:
a. Perform no later than one day after form removal.
b. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another
abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture.
c. If sufficient cement paste cannot be drawn from the concrete by the
rubbing process, use a grout made from the same cementitious materials
used in the in-place concrete.
d. Maintain required patterns or variances as indicated on Drawings or to
match design reference sample.
C. Related Unformed Surfaces:

1. At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to
formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a color and texture matching
adjacent formed surfaces.
2. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing
operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Scratch Finish:
1. While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-
floated or darbied.
2. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile depth of 1/4 inch in one
direction.
3. Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive concrete floor toppings or to receive
mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes.
C. Float Finish:
1. When bleedwater sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened
sufficiently to permit operation of specific float apparatus, consolidate concrete
surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or
inaccessible to power-driven floats.
2. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform,
smooth, granular texture and complies with ACI 117 tolerances for conventional
concrete.
3. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated on Drawings and/or to receive trowel finish
or to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane
roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.
D. Trowel Finish:
1. After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand
or power-driven trowel.
2. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks
and uniform in texture and appearance.
3. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings
or floor coverings.
4. Do not add water to concrete surface.
5. Do not apply hard-troweled finish to concrete, which has a total air content
greater than 3 percent.
6. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated on Drawings and/or exposed to view or
to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a
cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system.
7. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, in accordance with ASTM E1155, for
a randomly trafficked floor surface:
a. Slabs on Ground:
1) Carpeted Areas: Specified overall values of flatness, FF 25; and of
levelness, FL 20; with minimum local values of flatness, FF 17; and of
levelness, FL 15.
2) Sealed Concrete and Vinyl Tile Areas: Specified overall values of
flatness, FF 35; and of levelness, FL 25; with minimum local values of
flatness, FF 24; and of levelness, FL 17.
3) Gym (WF-1): Specified Overall Value (SOV): FF 25 and FL 20 with
minimum local value (MLV): FF 17 and FL 15.
b. Suspended Slabs:
1) Specified overall values of flatness, FF 25; with minimum local values
of flatness, FF 17.
E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces indicated on
Drawings, or where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thinset
method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom
perpendicular to main traffic route.
1. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.
2. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.
F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and
locations indicated on Drawings.
1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming
with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.
2. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling In:
1. Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after Work of other trades is
in place unless otherwise indicated.
2. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction.
3. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the
Work.
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is
still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners,
intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.
C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and
foundations as indicated on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment
at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer
furnishing machines and equipment.
D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and
associated items.
1. Cast-in inserts and accessories, as indicated on Drawings.
2. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete surfaces.
3.10 CONCRETE CURING
A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures.
1. Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 306.1 for cold weather protection during curing.
2. Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 305.1 for hot-weather protection during curing.
3. Maintain moisture loss no more than 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h), calculated
in accordance with ACI 305.1,) before and during finishing operations.
4. Duration of curing: Curing shall continue until cumulative number of days or
fraction, not necessarily consecutive, during which temperature of air in contact
with concrete is above 55 degrees F has totaled 7 days.
B. Curing Formed Surfaces: Comply with ACI 308.1 as follows:

1. Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs,
and other similar surfaces.
2. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms.
3. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of
curing period, as follows:
a. Continuous Fogging: Maintain standing water on concrete surface until final
setting of concrete.
b. Continuous Sprinkling: Maintain concrete surface continuously wet.
c. Absorptive Cover: Pre-dampen absorptive material before application;
apply additional water to absorptive material to maintain concrete surface
continuously wet.
d. Water-Retention Sheeting Materials: Cover exposed concrete surfaces with
sheeting material, taping, or lapping seams.
e. Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous
operation by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions.
1) Recoat areas subject to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial
application.
2) Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing
period.
3) Do not use on surfaces against which additional concrete or other
cementitious finishing materials are to be bonded, over surfaces to
receive waterproofing, or on surfaces on which curing compound is
prohibited by Specifications.
C. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Comply with ACI 308.1 as follows:

1. Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete.
2. Absorptive Cover: As soon as concrete has sufficient set to permit application
without marring concrete surface, install prewetted absorptive cover over entire
area of floor.
a. Lap edges and ends of absorptive cover not less than 12-inches.
b. Maintain absorptive cover water saturated, and in place, for duration of
curing period, but not less than seven days.
3. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-
retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides
and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive.
a. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover
material and waterproof tape.
b. Cure for not less than seven days.
4. Ponding or Continuous Sprinkling of Water: Maintain concrete surfaces
continuously wet for not less than seven days, utilizing one, or a combination of,
the following:
a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
5. Curing Compound:
a. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
b. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial
application.
c. Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period.
d. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound
without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing
compound manufacturer[ unless manufacturer certifies curing compound

does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project].
6. Floors to Receive Curing and Sealing Compound:
a. Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by
power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
b. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial
application.
c. Repeat process 24 hours later, and apply a second coat. Maintain
continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period.
3.11 TOLERANCES
A. Conform to ACI 117.
3.12 JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six month(s).
2. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave
contact faces of joints clean and dry.
C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in
formed joints. Overfill joint, and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete:
1. Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect.
2. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's
approval.
B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to
2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for
handling and placing.
C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities,
cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on
the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids
more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete.
a. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch.
b. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface.
c. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding
agent.
d. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried.
e. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with
bonding agent.
2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement
and standard portland cement, so that, when dry, patching mortar matches
surrounding color.
a. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color
match before proceeding with patching.
b. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding
surface.
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that will affect concrete's durability
and structural performance as determined by Architect.
D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces:

1. Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish, and verify surface
tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces
sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
2. Repair finished surfaces containing surface defects, including spalls, popouts,
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing, and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm)
wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced
sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.
3. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
4. Correct localized low areas during, or immediately after, completing surface-
finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar.
Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
5. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair
underlayment.
a. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane,
and level surface.
b. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
6. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with repair topping.
a. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to
match adjacent floor elevations.
b. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane,
and level surface.
7. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in
diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete.
a. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts, and expose steel
reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around.
b. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply
bonding agent.
c. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete,
except without coarse aggregate.
d. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete.
e. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

8. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching
mortar.
a. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete, and clean off
dust, dirt, and loose particles.
b. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent.
c. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried.
d. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete.
e. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy

adhesive and patching mortar.
F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to
Architect's approval.
A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector to perform field tests and
inspections and prepare testing and inspection reports.
B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to
perform tests and inspections and to submit reports.
1. Testing agency shall be responsible for providing curing container for composite
samples on Site and verifying that field-cured composite samples are cured in
2. Testing agency shall immediately report to Architect, Contractor, and concrete
manufacturer any failure of Work to comply with Contract Documents.
3. Testing agency shall report results of tests and inspections, in writing, to Owner,
Architect, Contractor, and concrete manufacturer within 48 hours of inspections
and tests.
a. Test reports shall include reporting requirements of ASTM C31,
ASTM C39, and ACI 301, including the following as applicable to each test
and inspection:
1) Project name.
2) Name of testing agency.
3) Names and certification numbers of field and laboratory technicians
performing inspections and testing.
4) Name of concrete manufacturer.
5) Date and time of inspection, sampling, and field testing.
6) Date and time of concrete placement.
7) Location in Work of concrete represented by samples.
8) Date and time sample was obtained.
9) Truck and batch ticket numbers.
10) Design compressive strength at 28 days.
11) Concrete mixture designation, proportions, and materials.
12) Field test results.
13) Information on storage and curing of samples before testing,

including curing method and maximum and minimum temperatures
during initial curing period.
14) Type of fracture and compressive break strengths at seven days and
28 days.
C. Batch Tickets: For each load delivered, submit copies of batch delivery ticket to testing
agency, indicating quantity, mix identification, admixtures, design strength, aggregate
size, design air content, and amount of water that can be added at Project site.
D. Inspections: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
E. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained in

accordance with ASTM C 172 shall be performed in accordance with the following
requirements:
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each
concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for
each additional 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof.
a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength
tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least
five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are
used.
2. Air Content: ASTM C231 pressure method, for normal-weight concrete.
a. One test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each
day's pour of each concrete mixture.
3. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064:
a. One test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below or 80 deg F
and above, and one test for each composite sample.
4. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31:
a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two 6-inch by 12-inch cylinder
specimens for each composite sample.
b. Cast, initial cure, and field cure additional standard cylinder specimens as
required for determination of concrete strength for form removal, etc.
c. Add one cylinder specimen per set if using 4-inch by 8-inch cylinders.
5. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C39.
a. Test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at seven days and one set
of two specimens at 28 days.
b. Test one set of field-cured specimens at age required for form removal.
c. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength
from a set of specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested
at age indicated.
6. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion
laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide
corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.
7. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any
three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified
compressive strength, and no compressive-strength test value falls below
specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi if specified compressive
strength is 5000 psi less, or no compressive strength test value is less than 10
percent of specified compressive strength if specified compressive strength is
greater than 5000 psi.
8. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive
device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for
approval or rejection of concrete.
9. Additional Tests:
a. Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete
when test results indicate that, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or
other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect.
b. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy
of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42 or by other
methods as directed by Architect.
1) Acceptance criteria for concrete strength shall be in accordance with
ACI 301.
10. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to
determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
11. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not
comply with the Contract Documents.
F. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness in accordance with ASTM E1155 within
48 hours of completion of floor finishing and promptly report test results to Architect.
3.15 PROTECTION
A. Protect concrete surfaces as follows:

1. Protect from petroleum stains.
2. Diaper hydraulic equipment used over concrete surfaces.
3. Prohibit vehicles from interior concrete slabs.
4. Prohibit use of pipe-cutting machinery over concrete surfaces.
5. Prohibit placement of steel items on concrete surfaces.
6. Prohibit use of acids or acidic detergents over concrete surfaces.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 03 39 00
CONCRETE SEALING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Application of curing and sealing compounds to concrete flooring.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials:

1. ASTM C 42 - Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete.
2. ASTM C 309 - Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.
3. ASTM C 1315 - Liquid Membrane - Forming Compound Having Special Properties
For Curing And Sealing Concrete.
4. ASTM C 672 - Test Method for Critical Dilation of Concrete Specimens Subjected to
Freezing.
5. ASTM C 805 - Rebound Number of Hardened Concrete.
6. ASTM D 3359 - Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test.
A. Product Data: Submit technical information and installation instructions.
1.4 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Applicator Qualifications: Acceptable to manufacturer, with minimum three years

documented experience applying specified systems.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages. Protect from freezing, direct sun
exposure and exposure to moisture.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work with concrete curing specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place

Concrete".
1. Combination curing and sealing" products are to be used only for finished flooring
applications.
2. Do not use combination curing and sealing products for concrete curing.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Grout: Non-shrink, non-metallic grout as recommended by sealer manufacturer.
Concrete Sealer 03 39 00 - 1
B. Curing and Sealing Compound:

1. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound:
ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.
2. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Master Builders Systems; MasterKure CC 250 SB.
b. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Super Diamond Clear.
c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Lumiseal Plus.
d. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; CS-309-30.
C. Cleaners: As recommended by manufacturer.
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify concrete floors are clean and have obtained adequate strength.
B. Verify curing compounds and their residue have been removed before applying sealing
compounds, hardeners (densifiers), and other concrete finishing systems.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove grease, dirt, form oil, and curing compound residue.
B. Patch holes in slabs with grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Protect adjacent surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period.
1. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without
damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound
manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with
bonding of floor covering used on Project.
B. Sealing Compounds: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous

operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect floor surfaces from soiling and damage until sealing compound has properly dried
and cured.
3.5 SCHEDULE
A. Provide at exposed floor slabs in rooms where no other finished flooring products are
scheduled such as storage rooms, MEP closets, etc.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 03 54 16
HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Section includes hydraulic-cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling
underlayment for application below interior floor coverings.
1.2 REFERENCES
1. ASTM C 109/C 109M: Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic
Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or 50-mm Cube Specimens)
2. ASTM C 150/C 150M: Specification for Portland Cement
3. ASTM C 219: Terminology Relating to Hydraulic Cement
4. ASTM E 90: Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements
6. ASTM E 413: Classification for Rating Sound Insulation
7. ASTM E 492: Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Impact Sound
Transmission through Floor-Ceiling Assemblies Using the Tapping Machine
8. ASTM E 989: Standard Classification for Determination of Impact Insulation
Class (IIC)
9. ASTM F 1869: Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of
Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride
B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

1. Fire Resistance Directory
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans indicating substrates, locations, and average depths of
underlayment based on survey of substrate conditions.
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering

systems certifying that products are compatible.
C. Minutes of preinstallation conference.
A. Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of

underlayment products required for this Project.
Hydraulic Cement Underlayment 03 54 16 - 1

B. Product Compatibility: Manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems

certify in writing that products are compatible.
C. Sound Transmission Characteristics: Where indicated, provide hydraulic-cement

underlayment systems identical to those of assemblies tested for STC and IIC ratings
per ASTM E 90 and ASTM E 492 by a qualified testing agency.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
A. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent

deterioration from moisture or other detrimental effects.
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for

substrate temperature, ventilation, ambient temperature and humidity, and other
conditions affecting underlayment performance.
1. Place hydraulic-cement-based underlayments only when ambient temperature
and temperature of substrates are between 50 and 80 deg F.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate application of underlayment with requirements of floor-covering products

and adhesives, to ensure compatibility of products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HYDRAULIC-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENTS
A. Underlayment: Hydraulic-cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that

can be applied in minimum uniform thickness of 1/4 inch and that can be feathered at
edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Ardex Americas; K-15 Self-Leveling Underlayment Concrete.
b. Master Builders Systems; Mastertop 110SL.
c. Dayton Superior Corporation; EconoLevel.
d. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Level Magic.
e. MAPEI Corporation; Ultraplan 1 Plus.
2. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement, or hydraulic or blended hydraulic
cement as defined by ASTM C 219.
3. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4000 psi at 28 days when tested according
to ASTM C 109/C 109M.
4. Underlayment Additive: Resilient-emulsion product of underlayment
manufacturer, formulated for use with underlayment when applied to substrate
and conditions indicated.
B. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch; or coarse sand as
recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

1. Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer

for underlayment thickness required.
C. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F.

D. Reinforcement: For underlayment applied to wood substrates, provide galvanized
metal lath or other corrosion-resistant reinforcement recommended in writing by
underlayment manufacturer.
E. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate,

conditions, and application indicated.
1. VOC Content: Provide coating with VOC content of 100 g/L or less.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written
instructions to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through
underlayment.
2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.
B. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents,
dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond.
1. Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869.
Proceed with installation only after substrates do not exceed a maximum
moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
C. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with
underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after
application recommended in writing by manufacturer.
2. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-
substrate and intercoat adhesion.
3. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same
width to continue through underlayment.
B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.
C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface.

1. Apply a final layer without aggregate to product surface.

2. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
D. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent

contamination during application and curing processes.
E. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in
writing by underlayment manufacturer.
F. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate,
including areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction
period.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 04 20 00
UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Concrete masonry units.

2. Lintels.
3. Brick.
4. Split ashlar stone
5. Mortar and grout materials.
6. Reinforcement.
7. Ties and anchors.
8. Embedded flashing.
9. Accessories.
10. Mortar and grout mixes.
B. Products Installed but not Furnished under This Section:
1. Steel lintels in unit masonry.

2. Steel shelf angles for supporting unit masonry.
3. Cavity wall insulation adhered to masonry backup.
C. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 43 39 "Mockups" for integrated exterior mockup requirements.

2. Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation" for cavity wall insulation.
3. Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal flashing and for
furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).
B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
Unit Masonry 04 20 00 - 1
B. Shop Drawings: For the following:
1. Masonry Units: Indicate sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.
2. Reinforcing Steel: Indicate bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry
reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315R. Indicate elevations of reinforced walls.
3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special
applications.
4. Weeps and ventilation: Show locations of weeps and cell vents used for ventilation.
Show installation of each type of application to ensure proper flow of water at
weeps and free flow of air at vents.
5. Mockup shop drawings: Submit integrated shop drawings including backup
system, air barrier, insulation, ties, anchors, flashing, weeps, and cladding. Include
one typical transition to fenestrations specified in Division 08 including means of
controlling and diverting water to weeps. Coordinate submittal with related Work
submittals to allow design team to review the complete extent of Work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection:
1. Clay face brick soaps mounted to board with nominal 3/8 inch space between
samples to allow insertion of mortar samples.
2. Cured colored mortar in metal sleeves, nominal 3/8 inch wide, to permit insertion
and removal from brick sample boards.
3. Weep/cavity vents.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:
1. Clay face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks.

2. Pigmented and colored-aggregate mortar. Make Samples using same sand and
mortar ingredients to be used on Project.
3. Weep/cavity vents.
4. Cavity drainage material.
5. Flashing
6. Accessories embedded in masonry.
E. Delegated Design Submittals: For masonry anchors and ties, including analysis data
signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
A. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together
with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch
numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used.
Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates.
1. Submittal is for information only. Receipt of list does not constitute approval of
deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically
brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing.
B. Material Certificates: For each type of the following:
1. Masonry units.
a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.

b. For brick, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls
within specified tolerances.
c. For exposed brick, include test report for efflorescence in accordance with
ASTM C67/C67M.
d. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations
establishing average net-area compressive strength of units.
2. Integral water repellent used in CMUs.

3. Cementitious materials. Include name of manufacturer, brand name, and type.
4. Mortar admixtures.
5. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.
6. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
7. Reinforcing bars.
8. Joint reinforcement.
9. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.
C. Qualification Statements: For testing agency.
D. Delegated design engineer qualifications.
E. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and
proportions of ingredients.
1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification.
Test in accordance with ASTM C109/C109M for compressive strength,
ASTM C1506 for water retention, and ASTM C91/C91M for air content.
2. Include test reports, in accordance with ASTM C1019, for grout mixes required to
comply with compressive strength requirement.
F. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit

type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of
masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry
determined in accordance with TMS 602.
G. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials,

and equipment to be used to comply with requirements.
A. Qualifications:
1. Installers: All masonry flashing installers must complete the International Masonry
Institute Flashing Upgrade training course.
2. Delegated Design Engineer: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in state of Texas and who is experienced in providing engineering services
of the type indicated.
3. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified in accordance with ASTM C1093 for

testing indicated.
1.7 MOCKUPS
A. Sample Panel Mockups: Build sample panels to verify selections made under Sample
submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in
Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements" for mockups.
1. Build sample panels for typical exterior wall and stack bond at Commons Room
interior wall in sizes approximately 60 inches long by 48 inches high by full
thickness.
2. Build exterior sample panels facing south.
3. Clean one-half of exposed faces of exterior panels with masonry cleaner indicated.
4. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant
membrane.
5. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units;
relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints;
aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities
specifically approved by Architect in writing.
a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from

the Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless Architect
specifically approves such deviations in writing.
B. Wall Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution and
to set quality standards for installation.
1. Build mockups for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 60 inches long by 48
inches high by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories.
a. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches long demonstrating brick

expansion joint.
b. Include lower corner of window opening at upper corner of exterior wall
mockup. Make opening approximately 12 inches wide by 16 inches high.
c. Include through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inch length in corner of
exterior wall mockup approximately 16 inches down from top of mockup, with
a 12-inch length of flashing left exposed to view (omit masonry above half of
flashing).
d. Include metal studs, sheathing, water-resistive barrier, sheathing joint-and-
penetration treatment, veneer anchors, flashing, cavity drainage material,
and weep holes in exterior masonry-veneer wall mockup.
e. Include stack bond clay face brick on one face of interior unit masonry wall
mockup.
2. Clean one-half of exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated.

3. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.
4. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such
deviations by Change Order.
5. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of

the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an
enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied.
If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained
and contamination avoided.
D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers. Store preblended,

dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms in a dry location or in covered
weatherproof dispensing silos.
E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and

accumulation of dirt and oil.
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls, and hold cover
securely in place.
2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other
wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed
wythe, and hold cover in place.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for
at least three days after building masonry walls or columns.
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be
left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact
with such masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by
spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with
painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain
from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated

with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry
damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction
requirements contained in TMS 602.
1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is
40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than
seven days after completing cleaning.
E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements

contained in TMS 602.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOURCE LIMITATIONS
A. Obtain each type of exposed masonry unit, cementitious mortar component, and mortar
aggregate from single source, producer, or manufacturer.
B. For exposed masonry units and cementitious mortar components, obtain each color and
grade from single source with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties.
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in

Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements".
B. Seismic Performance: Masonry to withstand the effects of earthquake motions

determined in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7.
C. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths
at 28 days.
1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area

compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method)
in accordance with TMS 602.
2. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms
in accordance with ASTM C1314.
2.3 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL
A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602, except as modified by requirements in the
Contract Documents.
B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of
units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units
where such defects are exposed in the completed Work.
C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with requirements for fire-resistance-rated assembly

designs indicated.
1. Where fire-resistance-rated construction is indicated, use the equivalent thickness

method for masonry units in accordance with ACI 216.1.
2.4 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching
exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints,
headers, bonding, and other special conditions.
2. Provide square-edged or bullnose units for outside corners as indicated.
B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed
units.
1. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that

does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent,
when tested in accordance with ASTM E514/E514M as a wall assembly made with
mortar containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive, with test
period extended to 24 hours, will show no visible water or leaks on the back of test
specimen.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to the following:
1) ACM Chemistries.
2) Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.
3) GCP Applied Technologies Inc.
4) Master Builders Solutions.
5) Moxie International.
C. CMUs: ASTM C90, normal weight at exterior wall and lightweight at interior and fire-rated
walls unless otherwise indicated.
1. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions.
D. Concrete Building Brick: ASTM C55.
1. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches wide by 7-5/8 inches long by height shown
or required for conditions shown.
2.5 LINTELS
A. Solid Concrete Masonry Lintels: ASTM C1623, matching CMUs in color, texture, and
density classification; and with reinforcing bars indicated. Provide lintels with net-area
compressive strength of not less than that of CMUs.
B. Concrete Lintels: Precast or formed-in-place concrete lintels complying with

requirements in Section 03 20 00 "Concrete Reinforcing," and with reinforcing bars
indicated.
C. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam
CMUs matching adjacent CMUs in color, texture, and density classification, with
reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels
before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.
D. Offset Angle Supports: Steel plate brackets anchored to structure, allowing continuous
insulation behind shelf angle supporting veneer. Component and anchor size and
spacing engineered by manufacturer.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to the following:
a. FERO Corporation.
b. Halfen USA, Inc.
c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304.
2.6 BRICK
A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish
and color of exposed faces of adjacent units:
1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose
unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed
surfaces finished.
2. Provide special shapes for applications shown.
B. Clay Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C216, Grade SW, Type FBS.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

products indicated on Drawings and Finish Schedule or comparable products by
one of the following:
a. Acme Brick Company.

b. Belden Brick Company (The).
c. Boral Bricks, Inc; Boral Limited.
d. Endicott Clay Products Co.
e. General Shale Brick, Inc.
f. Glen-Gery Corporation.
2. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested in
accordance with ASTM C67/C67M.
3. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested in accordance with
ASTM C67/C67M and is rated "not effloresced."
4. Sizes: As shown.
5. Application: Use where brick is exposed unless otherwise indicated.
2.7 STONE ST-1
A. Natural stone ST-1 as listed in Finish Schedule on Drawings, nominal 4 inches deep, for
installation methods similar to brick veneer.
2.8 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-
weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce
mortar color specified.
1. Alkali content will not be more than 0.1 percent when tested in accordance with
ASTM C114.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime
containing no other ingredients.
D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91/C91M. Not permitted
E. Mortar Cement: ASTM C1329/C1329M.
F. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded
for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C979/C979M. Use only pigments with
a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.
G. Colored Cement Products: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated
lime and mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no
other ingredients.
1. Colored Masonry Cement: Not permitted

2. Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as
selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
3. Pigments do not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.
4. Pigments do not exceed 5 percent of mortar cement by weight.
H. Preblended Dry Mortar Mix: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated
lime, sand, water repellents, and admixtures and complying with ASTM C1714/C1714M.
I. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C144.
1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural
sand or crushed stone.
2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing
the No. 16 sieve.
3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.
4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to

produce required mortar color.
J. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404.
K. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use

with CMUs containing integral water repellent from same manufacturer.
L. Water: Potable.
2.9 REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M or ASTM A996/A996M,

Grade 60.
B. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning
masonry unit cells and to hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from
0.148-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for
number of bars indicated.
C. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A951/A951M.
1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel.

2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel.
3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.187-inch diameter.
4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.187-inch diameter.
5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.187-inch diameter.
6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c.
7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 ft., with prefabricated corner and tee units.
D. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Ladder or truss type with single
pair of side rods.
E. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry: One of the following:
1. Ladder type with one side rod at each face shell of hollow masonry units more than
4 inches wide, plus one side rod at each wythe of masonry 4 inches wide or less.
2. Tab type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each face shell of
backing wythe and with rectangular tabs sized to extend at least halfway through
facing wythe, but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face.
3. Adjustable (two-piece) type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each
face shell of backing wythe and with separate adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye
connections having a maximum horizontal play of 1/16 inch and maximum vertical
adjustment of 1-1/4 inches. Size ties to extend at least halfway through facing
wythe but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Ties have hooks or clips to
engage a continuous horizontal wire in the facing wythe.
F. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Veneers Anchored with Seismic Masonry-Veneer

Anchors: Single 0.187-inch-diameter, hot-dip galvanized carbon steel continuous wire.
2.10 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. General: Ties and anchors extend at least 1-1/2 inches into veneer but with at least a
5/8-inch cover on outside face.
B. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials
that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A1064/A1064M, with

ASTM A153/A153M, Class B-2 coating.
2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial
Steel, with ASTM A153/A153M, Class B coating.
3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.
C. Corrugated-Metal Ties: Not permitted.
D. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches wide.
1. Z-shaped ties with ends bent 90 degrees to provide hooks not less than 2 inches
long for masonry constructed from solid units.
2. Where wythes do not align or are of different materials, use adjustable ties with
pintle-and-eye connections having a maximum adjustment of 1-1/4 inches.
3. Wire: Fabricate from 1/4-inch-diameter, wire.
E. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that
allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces
perpendicular to plane of wall.
1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch-diameter, hot-dip

galvanized steel wire.
2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie made from 0.25-inch-diameter, hot-dip
galvanized steel wire.
F. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or
horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane
of wall.
1. Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and
attached to tie section; furnished by Work of Division 03 for installation as Work of
this Section.
G. Partition Top Anchors: 0.105-inch-thick metal plate with a 3/8-inch-diameter metal rod 6
inches long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows
rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
H. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 24 inches
long, with ends turned up 2 inches or with cross pins unless otherwise indicated.
1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A153/A153M.
I. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors:
1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist a 100 lbf load in
both tension and compression perpendicular to plane of wall without deforming or
developing play in excess of 1/16 inch.
a. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts at brick
and CMU veneer from 0.1084-inch-thick steel sheet, galvanized after
fabrication.
b. Fabricate anchor sections and other sheet metal parts at Stone ST-1 from
0.109-inch thick Type 304 stainless steel.
c. Fabricate wire ties at brick and CMU veneer from 0.25-inch-diameter, hot-
dip galvanized-steel wire unless otherwise indicated.
d. Fabricate wire ties at Stone ST-1 from 0.25 inch diameter Type 304 stainless
steel.
2. Masonry-Veneer Anchors; Single-Barrel Screw: Self-drilling, single-barrel screw

designed to receive wire tie. Screw has a smooth barrel the same thickness as
insulation with factory-installed gasketed washer to seal at face of insulation and
sheathing.

include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Pos-I-Tie; Heckmann Building Products.
3. Masonry-Veneer Anchors; Single-Barrel Screw with Double-Pintle Wingnut: Self-

drilling, single-barrel screw with thermally resistant wingnut head or thermally
resistant clip designed to receive double-pintle wire tie. Screw has a smooth barrel
the same thickness as insulation with factory-installed gasketed washer to seal at
face of insulation and sheathing.

1) Pos-I-Tie; Heckmann Building Products.
4. Polymer-Coated, Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: ASTM C954 except
manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene or EPDM washer, No. 10
diameter by length required to penetrate steel stud flange with not less than three
exposed threads, and with organic polymer coating with salt-spray resistance to
red rust of more than 800 hours in accordance with ASTM B117.
2.11 EMBEDDED FLASHING
A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual" and as follows:
1. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304, 0.016 inch
thick.
2. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches long minimum, but not

exceeding 12 ft.. Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing.
3. Fabricate through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where
indicated to receive counterflashing.
4. Fabricate metal drip edges from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall
and 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.
5. Fabricate metal sealant stops from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into
wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on
itself for 3/4 inch and down into joint 1/4 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant
backer rod.
6. Fabricate metal expansion-joint strips from stainless steel to shapes indicated.
7. Solder metal items at corners.
B. Flexible Flashing: As specified in Section 04 27 23 “Through-Wall Flashing” or at

Contractor’s option use one of the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Stainless Steel Fabric Flashing: Composite, flashing product consisting of 2-mil of

Type 304 stainless steel sheet, bonded to a layer of polymeric fabric, to produce
an overall thickness of 40-mil.

1) Multi-Flash SS SA; York Flashing.

b. Applications: Use 10-mil-thick flashing at windows, doors, and small wall
penetrations; not at base of walls.
2. Drainage Plane Flashing: Fabricate from stainless steel and drainage membrane
to shapes indicated, including weep tabs, termination bar, and drip edge. Provide
flashing materials as follows:

1) Flash Vent SS; York Flashing.
3. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 60 inches long, minimum.

4. Accessories: Provide preformed corners, end dams, other special shapes, and
seaming materials produced by flashing manufacturer.
C. Single-Wythe CMU Flashing System: System of CMU cell flashing pans and interlocking
CMU web covers made from UV-resistant, high-density polyethylene. Cell flashing pans
have integral weep spouts designed to be built into mortar bed joints and that extend into
the cell to prevent clogging with mortar.
D. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Section 07 62 00 "Sheet
Metal Flashing and Trim."
1. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B32, Grade Sn96, with acid flux of type
recommended by stainless steel sheet manufacturer.
2. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C920, chemically curing STPE or STPU sealant; of
type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal
flashing and remain watertight.
E. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard
products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets
to each other and to substrates.
F. Termination Bars for Flexible Flashing: Stainless steel bars nominal 1 by 1/8 inch,
prepunched at 6 inches on center.
2.12 ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from
urethane or PVC.
B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound,

complying with ASTM D2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with
ASTM D2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain
lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated felt complying with ASTM D226/D226M, Type I

(No. 15 asphalt felt).
D. Weep/Cavity Vents: Use integral self-weeping flashing membrane or the following:
1. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant

polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch
less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.
a. Basis of Design: Quadro-Vent by Hohmann & Barnard.
E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not
degrade within the wall cavity.
1. Mortar Deflector: Strips, full depth of cavity and 10 inches high, with dovetail-
shaped notches or dimpled surface that prevent clogging with mortar droppings.
F. Proprietary Acidic Masonry Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed

for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from
new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly
approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units
being cleaned. Do not use acidic cleaners until water and detergents or other methods
have been used based on BIA and NCMA guidelines.
2.13 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,

retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.

2. Use portland cement-lime or mortar cement mortar unless otherwise indicated.
3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be
exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is
consistent.
B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix.
Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend
ingredients before delivering to Project site.
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C270, Proportion Specification. Provide the
following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.
1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M.

2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S.
3. For mortar parge coats, use Type S or Type N.
4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing, nonload-bearing walls, and parapet walls;
for interior load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing partitions; and for other
applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.
5. For interior nonload-bearing partitions, Type N.
D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with
other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement
products.
1. Pigments do not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.

2. Pigments do not exceed 5 percent of mortar cement by weight.
3. Mix to match Architect's sample.
E. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates

and natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color.
1. Mix to match Architect's sample.
F. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C476.
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse)
that will comply with TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.
2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.1.2 for
specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi.
3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured in accordance with
ASTM C143/C143M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions
detrimental to performance of the Work.
2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
4. Verify that substrates are free of substances that impair mortar bond.
B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify
actual locations of piping connections.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full
thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units
of widths indicated.
B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.
C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing
equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to opening.
D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous
pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean,
sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is
specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors
and textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
F. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing
masonry.
G. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq.
in. per minute when tested in accordance with ASTM C67/C67M. Allow units to absorb
water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.
3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:
1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2
inch or minus 1/4 inch.
2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus
or minus 1/2 inch.
3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than
plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.
B. Lines and Levels:
1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more
than 1/4 inch in 10 ft., or 1/2-inch maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do
not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 ft., 1/4 inch in 20 ft., or 1/2-inch
maximum.
3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10
ft., 3/8 inch in 20 ft., or 1/2-inch maximum.
4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10
ft., 1/4 inch in 20 ft., or 1/2-inch maximum.
5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 ft., 3/8
inch in 20 ft., or 1/2-inch maximum.
6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than
1/4 inch in 10 ft., or 1/2-inch maximum.
7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by
more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances
specified for warpage of units.
C. Joints:
1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8
inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.
2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses
by more than 1/8 inch.
3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus
3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch.
4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus
or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses
by more than 1/8 inch.
5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight
line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next.
3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and
offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where
possible, at other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry
in running bond except provide stack bond at Commons Room walls shown; do not use
units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping
not less than 4 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not
use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course from
those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that
are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required
before laying fresh masonry.
E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other
Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer
of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into
core.
H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels,
posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.
I. Build nonload-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or
roof structure above unless otherwise indicated.
1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure
above.
2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout
cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors, and push tubes down into
grout to provide 1/2-inch clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube.
Space anchors 48 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
3. Wedge nonload-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile,
slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above
approaches final position.
4. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure
above to comply with Section 07 84 43 "Joint Firestopping."
3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay CMUs as follows:
1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings.
4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings
where cells are not grouted.
5. Fully bed units and fill cells with mortar at anchors and ties as needed to fully
embed anchors and ties in mortar.
B. Lay solid masonry units and hollow brick with completely filled bed and head joints; butter
ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow
bed joints or slush head joints.
C. Set cast-stone trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor,
and similar holes.
1. Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with
clear water.
2. Allow cleaned surfaces to dry before setting.
3. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar.
4. Rake out mortar joints for pointing with sealant.
D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than
joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.
E. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other
than paint) unless otherwise indicated.
F. Cut joints flush where indicated to receive cavity wall insulation or air barriers unless
3.6 COMPOSITE MASONRY
A. Bond wythes of composite masonry together using one of the following methods:
1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as indicated installed in horizontal joints, but not
less than one metal tie for 2.67 sq. ft. of wall area spaced not to exceed 24 inches
o.c. horizontally and 16 inches o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses.
Provide additional ties within 12 inches of openings and space not more than 36
inches apart around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls,
provide ties at no more than 24 inches o.c. vertically.
a. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable-type (two-piece-

type) ties.
2. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.
a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement

extending across both wythes.
b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable-type (two-piece-
type) reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached
to ties.
3. Header Bonding: Provide masonry unit headers extending not less than 3 inches
into each wythe. Space headers not more than 12 inches clear horizontally and 16
inches clear vertically.
B. Bond wythes of composite masonry together using bonding system indicated on

Drawings.
C. Collar Joints: Solidly fill collar joints by parging face of first wythe that is laid and shoving
units of other wythe into place.
D. Collar Joints in Clay Tile Masonry: After each course is laid, fill the vertical, longitudinal
joint between wythes solidly with mortar at exterior walls, except cavity walls , and interior
walls and partitions.
E. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at corners
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide continuity with masonry-joint reinforcement at corners by using

prefabricated L-shaped units as well as masonry bonding.
F. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are indicated
at juncture, bond walls together as follows:
1. Provide individual metal ties not more than 8 inches at stack bond and 16 inches
o.c. typically.
2. Provide continuity with masonry-joint reinforcement by using prefabricated T-
shaped units.
3. Provide rigid metal anchors not more than 24 inches o.c. If used with hollow
masonry units, embed ends in mortar-filled cores.
3.7 CAVITY WALLS
A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods:
1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as indicated installed in horizontal joints, but not
less than one metal tie for 2.67 sq. ft. of wall area spaced not to exceed 24 inches
o.c. horizontally and 16 inches o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses.
Provide additional ties within 12 inches of openings and space not more than 36
inches apart around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls,
provide ties at no more than 24 inches o.c. vertically.
a. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable-type (two-piece-

type) ties.
b. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use
adjustable-type (two-piece-type) ties to allow for differential movement
regardless of whether bed joints align.
2. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.
a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement

extending across both wythes.
b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable-type (two-piece-
type) reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached
to ties.
c. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use
adjustable-type (two-piece-type) reinforcement with continuous horizontal
wire in facing wythe attached to ties to allow for differential movement
regardless of whether bed joints align.
3. Header Bonding: Provide masonry unit headers extending not less than 3 inches
into each wythe. Space headers not more than 8 inches clear horizontally and 16
inches clear vertically.
4. Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Comply with requirements for anchoring masonry
veneers.
B. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using bonding system indicated on Drawings.
C. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel
beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to
trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into cavity.
D. Installing Cavity Wall Insulation: Place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately 12
inches o.c. both ways, on inside face of insulation boards, or attach with plastic fasteners
designed for this purpose. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining
obstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against
inside wythe of masonry or other construction as indicated.
1. Fill cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation
and masonry.
3.8 ANCHORED MASONRY VENEERS
A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing and concrete and masonry backup with
masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements:
1. Fasten screw-attached anchors through sheathing to wall framing and to concrete

and masonry backup with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners
unless anchor design only uses one fastener.
2. Embed tie sections in masonry joints.
3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up
and down.
4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 25
inches o.c. horizontally, with not less than one anchor for each 2.67 sq. ft. of wall
area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not
exceeding 36 inches, around perimeter.
B. Provide not less than 1 inch of airspace between back of masonry veneer and face of
insulation.
1. Keep airspace clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction.
Bevel beds away from airspace, to minimize mortar protrusions into airspace. Do
not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into airspace.
3.9 MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of
5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6
inches. Comply with Structural Drawings for engineered masonry reinforcing spacing.
1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c.

2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet
walls.
3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and
extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns,
offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.
3.10 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE
A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete, where masonry abuts or faces
structural steel or concrete, to comply with the following:
1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch wide between masonry and structural
steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and
other rigid materials.
2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to
structure.
3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36
inches o.c. horizontally.
3.11 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. General: Install control- and expansion-joint materials in unit masonry as masonry

progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision
to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.
B. Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods:
1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of CMUs on one side of control
joint. Fill resultant core with grout, and rake out joints in exposed faces for
application of sealant.
2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.
3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at
joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar, or rake out joint for application of
sealant.
4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints, and remove filler when unit
masonry is complete for application of sealant.
C. Form expansion joints in brick as follows:
1. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4 inches in
direction of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal
expansion joints if any.
2. Build flanges of factory-fabricated, expansion-joint units into masonry.
3. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated.
4. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than
1/2 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Section 07 92 00
"Joint Sealants."
D. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an airspace or inserting a

compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in
Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch.
1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting

masonry.
3.12 LINTELS
A. Install steel lintels where indicated.
B. Provide concrete, masonry, or offset angle support lintels where indicated and where
openings of more than 12 inches for brick-size units and 24 inches for block-size units
are indicated without structural steel or other supporting lintels.
C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
3.13 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND CAVITY VENTS
A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels,
ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install
cavity vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in
cavities, and where indicated.
B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:
1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could
puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing
on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal
penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by
flashing manufacturer.
2. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer
wythe, turned up a minimum of 8 inches, and 1-1/2 inches into the inner wythe.
3. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across airspace behind
veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches; with upper edge tucked under
water-resistive barrier, lapping at least 4 inches. Fasten upper edge of flexible
flashing to sheathing through termination bar.
4. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing 6 inches minimum, to edge of next full
unit at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches minimum, to edge of
next full unit and turn ends up not less than 2 inches to form end dams.
5. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop
flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall, and adhere flexible flashing
to top of metal drip edge.
C. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to
comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned
edges located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned
with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover upturned edges of CMU cell
pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell.
D. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are
indicated to be built into masonry.
E. Install weep holes in exterior wythes and veneers in head joints of first course of masonry
immediately above embedded flashing.
1. Use specified weep/cavity vent products or self-draining flashing membrane to

form weep holes.
2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
3. Cover cavity side of weep holes with plastic insect screening at cavities insulated
with loose-fill insulation.
F. Place cavity drainage material in cavities and airspace behind veneers to comply with
configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in "Accessories" Article.
G. Install cavity vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated or, if not
indicated, at maximum 15 feet on center vertically. Locate vents in head joints in line
with, and at same spacing as, weeps. Use specified weep/cavity vent products to form
cavity vents.
1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated to
promote convection drying of the wall and masonry components. Install through-
wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.
3.14 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support
reinforced masonry elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry

as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout.
Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction
and curing of reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have
hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and that of other loads that may be
placed on them during construction.
B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 602.
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained
enough strength to resist grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements in TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement,
including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas as needed to perform tests and
inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements will be
at Contractor's expense.
B. Inspections: Special inspections in accordance with Level 2 in TMS 402.
1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-
prepared mortar.
2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of
grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.
3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.
C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.
D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.
E. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, in accordance with
ASTM C67/C67M for compressive strength.
F. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, in accordance with
ASTM C140/C140M for compressive strength.
G. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, in
H. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, in accordance with
ASTM C780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength.
I. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, in accordance with
ASTM C1019.
J. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, in accordance with ASTM C1314 at
7 days and at 28 days.
3.16 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or
otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match
adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent
construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant

application, where indicated.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as
follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic
scrape hoes or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned
for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before
proceeding with cleaning of masonry.
3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by
covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and
waterproof masking tape.
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly
by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA
Technical Notes 20.
6. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in
NCMA TEK 8-4A.
7. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic masonry cleaner applied according to
3.17 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are

Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.
B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or
soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and
mixing with fill material as fill is placed.
1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension.

2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of
masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving."
3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.
C. Masonry Waste Recycling: Return broken CMUs not used as fill to manufacturer for
recycling.
D. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as
fill, as described above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off
Owner's property.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 04 27 23
THROUGH-WALL AND WALL SUBSTRATE FLASHING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. Contractor shall review American Concrete Institute 530.1 mandatory specification

checklist for additional requirements necessary for specific project.
B. Flashing system shall be provided and installed by a qualified waterproofing contractor.
C. Contractor shall maintain a photo log of all through wall flashing installations including
starts, stops, and transitions in plane, no exceptions. This log will contain a floor plan of
the building showing where the photos were taken. No through wall flashing shall be
covered up until that portion of work has been documented by photograph and logged in.
D. It is the intent of this specification that the new work will provide a watertight facility
(restricted to the location where work is to be performed). The attached specifications
describe the minimum acceptable standards of construction and finish.
E. Contractor shall water test all through-wall flashings once veneer is twelve inches (12”)
above installed flashing. Coordinate test with Architect and Consultant.
F. Manufacturer of cloak flashing shall have a representative inspect the installed work a
minimum of two times per week. The representative shall not be the installer.
G. All vertical flashing to be installed full height of the vertical surface.
H. Refer to Spec Section 08 41 13 for aluminum window coordination.
I. The design intent is to have windows installed, flashed and water tested prior to veneer
installation.
A. At a scheduled pre-construction meeting with all trades, contractor shall review flashing for
the project and how the flashing shall be sequenced with the following: below grade
waterproofing, air and vapor system, window installation, sealant installation, relief angles
and roofing.
B. Membrane being utilized shall be compatible with all wall materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Contractor shall provide from the manufacturer a review of the flashing
design for the project and location of preformed shapes on reduced floor plan.
Through-Wall and Wall Substrate Flashing System 04 27 23 - 1

A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and rolls with all labels
intact and legible including labels indicating appropriate warnings, storage conditions, lot
numbers, and usage instructions. Materials damaged in shipping or storage shall not be
used.
B. Manufacturer's packaging and/or roll plastic is not acceptable for exterior storage.
Tarpaulin with grommets shall be minimum acceptable for exterior coverings. All
materials stored as above shall be a minimum of four inches (4") off the substrate, and
the tarpaulin tied off with rope.
C. Deliver materials in sufficient quantity to allow continuity of work.
D. Handle and store material in such a manner as to avoid damage.
E. Protect materials against damage by construction traffic.
F. Storage: All materials should be stored under cover to avoid site damage. During cool
weather construction, store materials inside at 50º F or higher.
G. The proper storage of materials is the sole responsibility of the contractor and damaged
materials shall be discarded, removed from the project site, and replaced prior to
application.
1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Job Condition Requirements: Coordinate the work of the contractor with the work to be
performed by the Owner's personnel, to ensure proper sequencing of the entire work. The
contractor shall follow local, state, and federal regulations, safety standards, and codes.
When a conflict exists, use the stricter document.
B. Protection of Work and Property:

1. Work: The contractor shall maintain adequate protection of all his work from damage
and shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from injury or loss arising from
this contract. He shall provide and maintain at all times any OSHA required danger
signs, guards, and/or obstructions necessary to protect the public and his workmen
from any dangers inherent with or created by the work in progress. All federal, state,
and city rules and requirements pertaining to safety and all EPA standards, OSHA
standards, NESHAP regulations shall be fulfilled by the contractor as part of his
proposal.
2. Property: Protect existing planting and landscaping as necessary or required to
provide and maintain clearance and access to the work of this contract. Examples of
two categories or degrees of protection are generally as follows: a) removal,
protection, preservation, or replacement and replanting of plant materials; b) protection
of plant materials in place, and replacement of any damage resulting from the
contractor's operations.

C. Damage to Work of Others: The contractor shall repair, refinish, and make good any
damage to the building or landscaping resulting from any of his operation. This shall
include, but is not limited to, any damage to plaster, tile work, wall covering, paint,
ceilings, floors, or any other finished work. Damage done to the building, equipment, or
grounds shall be repaired at the successful contractor's expense holding the Owner
harmless from any other claims for property damage and/or personal injury.
D. Measurements: It will be the contractor's responsibility to obtain and/or verify any

necessary dimensions by visiting the job site, and the contractor shall be responsible for
the correctness of same. Any drawings supplied are for reference only.
E. Cleaning and Disposal of Materials:

1. Contractor shall keep the job clean and free from all loose materials and foreign
matter. Contractor shall take necessary precautions to keep outside walls clean.
2. All waste materials, rubbish, etc., shall be removed from the Owner's premises as
accumulated. Rubbish shall be carefully handled to reduce the spread of dust. At
completion, all work areas shall be left clean and all contractor's equipment and
materials removed from the site.
3. Debris shall be deposited at an approved disposal site.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Flashing Manufacturer: Project shall be installed in such a manner that the flashing
material manufacturer will furnish a written ten (10) year materials warranty from the
date of substantial completion of the completed project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BUILT-IN FLASHING MEMBRANE (ELVALOY® SHEET)
A. The built-in flashing membrane shall be 40 mil flexible sheet material, consisting of a
blend of elastomeric and thermal plastic polymers, incorporating DuPont Elvaloy® The
membrane shall be reinforced with synthetic fibers, calendered into sheet form, rolled
and cut to width.
B. Cloaks shall be pre-formed, three dimensional flexible units used for detail corners, level
changes, stop ends, and special applications.
Physical Properties
Elongation 175% ASTM D412
Tensile Strength 650 psi ASTM D412
Tear Strength 280 psi ASTM D624
Low Temperature Flexibility -25º F Pass ASTM D146
Water Absorption Less than 0.1% ASTM D471
C. Cloak color shall be as selected by Architect and/or shall match mortar color. Reference
manufacturer's list of colors for selection.

2.2 RELATED MATERIALS FOR BUILT-IN FLASHING MEMBRANE
A. Flashing Membrane Adhesive: Flashing adhesive exceeds the requirements of

TTS00230C Type II, Class B, ASTM C 92094 and Canadian Spec CAN 19, 13M82.
The product is terra cotta (dull red) in color.
Physical Properties
Hardness Shore A 24 ± 3 ASTM C 661
Shear Strength 75 psi ASTM D 1002
Tack Free Time 25 minutes ASTM C 679
Slump (sag) Zero slump ASTM C 697
Shrinkage No measurable shrinkage after 14 days
after 14 days
Low Temperature Flexibility -20° F pass 1/4 inch mandrel
Service Temperature -40° F to 200° F continuous service
Shelf Life One year
2.3 SURFACE-ADHERED WITH DRIP FLASHING MEMBRANE

(ELVALOY® SHEET)
A. Surface-adhered with drip membrane shall be a composite 40 mil membrane consisting

of 25 mils of elastomeric/thermal plastic membrane incorporating DuPont Elvaloy® and
15 mils of SBS asphaltic adhesive. The membrane shall be reinforced with synthetic
fibers, calendered into sheet form, rolled and cut to standard widths.
B. Standard Sheet Dimensions: Thickness 40 mil

Roll length 75 ft
Roll widths 12, 18, 24, 36 in
C. Cloaks shall be pre-formed, three dimensional flexible units used for detail corners, level
changes, stop ends, and special applications.
Physical Properties
Elongation 225% ASTM D412
Tensile Strength 875 psi ASTM D412
Tear Strength 270 psi ASTM D624
Low Temperature Flexibility -25º F Pass ASTM D146
Water Absorption Less than 0.1% ASTM D471

2.4 RELATED MATERIALS FOR SURFACE ADHERED FLASHING MEMBRANE
A. Asphalt Primer: Shall be a two-sided, self-adhering tape used to seal the top of cloaks
against the back-up wythe. Adhesive may be used as an alternative.
B. Primer:
Physical Properties
Solids by Weight 68%
Viscosity 758 cps
Weight per Gallon 9.3 lbs.
Elongation >656% no Breakage, Exceeded Travel of Instron ASTM
D 2370
Tensile Strength 85.1 psi ASTM D 2370
pH 10
Hardness Shore A 59
Peel Strength Aluminum No Fail at 4.60 pli
Concrete No Fail at 3.86 pli
C. Mastic: Shall be used at all laps and joints, and top terminations.
D. Fiberglass Coated membrane/mesh: Shall be used in three course termination locations.

A non-rotting, non-absorbent woven fiberglass membrane/mesh having a vinyl coating
designed for membrane reinforcement. Compatible with asphaltic bitumen, having ten
(10) open-weave squares per inch.
E. Termination Bars: Aluminum termination bar strip shall be extruded channel bar with a
mill finish, width one inch (1"), thickness 0.100" ± .008", leg height one-fourth inch (1/4")
top and bottom, leg angle ninety degrees (90°), for perimeter and curb anchorage,
having predrilled holes six inches (6") on center, as manufactured by Olympic Fasteners,
or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
specific conditions.
3.2 GENERAL
A. Laying Masonry Walls: Use an inverted lintel CMU or fully grouted hollow CMU as a
base for flashing at sills, floor joints, and other similar conditions.
B. Preparation: All sharp protrusions and mortar droppings must be removed from the
substrate, and the surface must be clean and dry.
C. Where brick work occurs about the roof elevation, provide solid protection of the existing
roof system until work is complete.

D. Flashing shall be fully supported when crossing the cavity except at sill and coping
locations.
E. Flashing shall be fully adhered around all wall penetrations prior to veneer installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF BUILT-IN FLASHING MEMBRANE (ELVALOY® SHEET)
A. Flashing membrane and cloaks shall be installed in a bed of fresh mortar and should
extend through the outer wythe a minimum of one-fourth inch (1/4") and left exposed.
Flashing membrane is UV resistant.
B. Weep holes shall be provided immediately above all flashing at 24-inch centers. A
minimum of two weeps shall be installed above any wall opening.
C. All joints in the flashing membrane shall be lapped a minimum of four inches (4") using
flashing membrane adhesive.
D. Flashing membrane shall be installed six inches (6") above finished grade level.
E. Cloaks and end dams shall be installed at all window and door heads and sills.
F. Vertical flashing at wall openings shall extend into the wall opening four inches (4"). The
door/window frame shall be installed with the flashing extending onto the back of the
frame.
G. Cleaning: Flashing membrane shall not be damaged by cavity cleaning after installation.
Precautions to be taken during subsequent work are:
1. Use of cavity battens to prevent mortar droppings;
2. Removal of droppings before they harden;
3. Never use implements such as steel rods for cleaning the cavity; and
4. Inspection of cavity flashing for damage as the work proceeds.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF SURFACE-ADHERED FLASHING WITH DRIP

MEMBRANE (ELVALOY® SHEET)
A. Priming: All flashing substrates shall be primed. Flashing primer shall be applied with a
brush, roller or sprayed. Coverage is approximately 400 square feet per U.S. gallon
(3.78L). Drying time may vary depending on temperature, humidity, and air movement;
drying time should be approximately 45 minutes.
B. Flashing System Installation: Starting at a corner, mount cloak to substrate flashing

adhesive. Cut surface adhered membrane into workable sections (8'-10'). Remove the
release sheet and adhere the membrane to the inner leaf of construction lapping the
membrane onto the cloak four inches (4"). Use firm hand pressure and a steel roller to
totally adhere membrane in place. Extend membrane completely through the outer leaf
and leave it exposed one-fourth inch (1/4") minimum. The surface-adhered membrane is
UV resistant. Apply a bead of flashing mastic to all top termination edges.
C. Termination Bar: The surface-adhered membrane shall be installed using a termination

bar for additional attachment to the inner leaf (optional). Termination bar shall be made
watertight using three-course fabric and mastic as detailed and specified.

D. Weep holes shall be provided immediately above all flashing at 24-inch centers. A
minimum of two baffle weeps shall be installed above any wall opening.
E. Flashing membrane shall be installed six inches (6") above finished grade level.
F. Stop end cloaks shall be installed at all windows, door heads, sills, and through-wall starts,
stops, steps, etc.
G. Enveloped vertical flashing at wall openings shall extend onto the window unit
one inch (1"). The door/window frame shall be installed with the flashing extending onto
the back of the frame.
H. Enveloped vertical flashing shall be installed at all abutments of dissimilar exterior wall
treatments: inside and outside nineties (90°), etc.
I. Cleaning: Flashing membrane shall not be damaged by cavity cleaning after installation.
Precautions to be taken during subsequent work are:
1. Use of cavity battens to prevent mortar droppings;
2. Removal of droppings before they harden;
3. Never use implements such as steel rods for cleaning the cavity; and
4. Inspection of cavity flashing for damage as the work proceeds.
3.5 FLASHING MEMBRANE ADHESIVE
A. Application:
1. Flashing adhesive shall be applied to clean, dry and relatively smooth surfaces.
2. When joint two (2) pieces of flashing membrane, or joining flashing membrane to
Cloaks:
a. Apply two (2) one-fourth inch (1/4") beads of adhesive approximately one-half inch
(1/2") and one and one-half inch (1-1/2"), respectively, from the edge of the bottom
membrane along the entire width of the bottom membrane. Overlap the top
membrane over the bottom membrane two inches (2") and roll lap with steel hand
roller, causing excess to extrude the entire length of the overlap.
3. Do not remove excess adhesive.
B. Safety, Storage and Handling: Keep container tightly closed when not in use. Store at
room temperature. Clean up tools and hands with waterless hand cleaner.
3.6 SUBSTRATE PRIMER
A. Surface Preparation: Areas to be primed should be dry.
B. Application: may be applied using a soft roller or brush. It can be removed from masonry
with soapy water while wet and a solvent-based cleaner if dry (mineral spirits or citrus
cleaner).
C. Coverage: Depending on the condition of the surface, coverage may vary from as little as
150 square feet to 200 square feet per gallon.

D. Caution:
1. Primer should not be applied when temperatures are below 40° F or when rain is
imminent.
2. Keep substrate primer from freezing.
3. During hot weather, the product should be stored in a cool shaded area.
4. Do not thin this product.
5. Curing rates will vary depending on the ambient temperature relative humidity, wind
speed, sky condition and the proper rate of application. Generally speaking,
Substrate primer will dry within 15 to 30 minutes when applied at 70° F or above. At
50° F, on a cloudy day, cure time may be extended to as much as one hour.
6. Check several places on primed area for dryness prior to proceeding with the
flashing application.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 05 12 00
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as

described in ANSI/AISC 303 or herein.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply
with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop
primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other

construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal
templates, instructions, and directions for installation.

A. Product Data:
1. Structural-steel materials.
2. High-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies.
3. Shear stud connectors.
4. Deformed bar anchors
5. Anchor rods.
6. Threaded rods.
7. Forged-steel hardware.
8. Slide bearings.
9. Shop primer.
10. Galvanized-steel primer.
11. Galvanized repair paint.
12. Shrinkage-resistant grout.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and erection details of structural-steel components.
Structural Steel Framing 05 12 00 - 1

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent
data.
2. Include embedment Drawings including templates for installation of anchor bolts
and other embedded items.
3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field
welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are
to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.
4. Include field installed shear stud connectors on erection drawings.
5. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field
bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections.
6. Identify members not to be shop primed.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For structural-steel connections indicated on Drawings to

comply with design loads, include analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer, licensed in the state in which the project is located, responsible
for their preparation.
A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.
C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop

primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
D. Mill test reports for structural-steel materials, including chemical and physical
properties.
E. Product Test Reports: For the following:

1. Bolts, nuts, and washers, including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.
2. Direct-tension indicators.
3. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies.
4. Shear stud connectors.
5. Shop primer.
F. Source quality-control reports.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality

Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category BU or is
accredited by the IAS Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (Acceptance
Criteria 172).
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified Installer who participates in the AISC Quality

Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with

AWS D1.1.
A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel
members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and
spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and
deterioration.
1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion,
damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace
damaged materials or structures as directed.
B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels

intact.
1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency
observes repackaging and seals containers.
2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.
3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating
ASTM F3125, Grade F1852 bolt assemblies and for retesting bolt assemblies
after lubrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. ANSI/AISC 303.
2. ANSI/AISC 360.
3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts."
B. Connection Design Information: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
C. Moment Connections: Type FR, fully restrained.
D. Construction: System as indicated on Structural Drawings.
2.2 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS
A. W-Shapes: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
B. Channels, Angles, M-Shapes, S-Shapes as indicated on Structural Drawings.
C. Plate and Bar: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: As indicated on Structural Drawings.

E. Steel Pipe: As indicated on Structural Drawings.

1. Weight Class: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
2. Finish: Black except where indicated to be galvanized on Structural Drawings.
F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
2.3 BOLTS AND CONNECTORS
A. High-Strength A325 Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125, Grade A325, Type 1,
heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563, Grade DH, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts;
and ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.
1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F959/F959M, Type 325-1, compressible-
washer type with plain finish.
B. Zinc-Coated High-Strength A325 Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125,

Grade A325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563, Grade DH, heavy-
hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers.
1. Finish: Hot-dip or mechanically deposited zinc coating.
2. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F959, Type 325-1, compressible-washer type
with mechanically deposited zinc coating finish.
C. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F3125,

Grade F1852, Type 1, heavy-hex or round head assemblies, consisting of steel
structural bolts with splined ends; ASTM A563, Grade DH, heavy-hex carbon-steel
nuts; and ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers.
1. Finish: Plain or Mechanically deposited zinc coating as indicated on Structural
Drawings.
D. Shear Stud Connectors: ASTM A108, AISI C-1015 through C-1020, headed-stud type,
cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B.
E. Deformed Bar Anchors: ASTM A1064, Type C, 80 ksi, diameter and length as
2.4 RODS
A. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade as indicated on Structural Drawings.

1. Configuration: Straight.
2. Nuts: ASTM A563 heavy-hex carbon steel.
3. Plate Washers: ASTM A36 carbon steel.
4. Washers: ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel.
5. Finish: Plain or Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B695, Class 50 as
B. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade as indicated on Structural Drawings,

weldable, straight.


2. Plate Washers: ASTM A36 carbon steel.
C. Threaded Rods: As indicated on Structural Drawings.

2.5 FORGED-STEEL STRUCTURAL HARDWARE
A. Clevises and Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished carbon-steel bars, ASTM A108,
AISI C-1035.
B. Eye Bolts and Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon-steel bars, ASTM A108, AISI C-
1030.
C. Sleeve Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon-steel bars, ASTM A108, AISI C-1018.
2.6 SLIDE BEARINGS
A. Structural Slide Bearings: Low-friction assemblies, of configuration indicated, that

provide vertical transfer of loads and allow horizontal movement perpendicular to plane
of expansion joint while resisting movement within plane of expansion joint.
1. Mating Surfaces: PTFE and PTFE or mirror-finished stainless steel.
2. Coefficient of Friction: Not more than 0.05 or as indicated on Structural Drawings.
3. Design Load: Not less than 5,000 psi or as indicated on Structural Drawings.
4. Total Movement Capability: 2 inches or as indicated on Structural Drawings.
2.7 PRIMER
A. Steel Primer: Fabricator’s standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-

inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20.
2.8 SHRINKAGE-RESISTANT GROUT
A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic

aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency
suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. Compressive strength of grout

(2x2 cubes) shall be not less than 5,000 psi at 7 days and 7,000 psi at 28 days when
tested in accordance with ASTM C109.
2.9 FABRICATION
A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate
in accordance with ANSI/AISC 303 and to ANSI/AISC 360.
1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated.
2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up.
3. Identify high-strength structural steel in accordance with ASTM A6 and maintain
markings until structural-steel framing has been erected.
4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.
5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting
shop-priming operations.
B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in
AWS D1.1.
C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.
D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing
loads.
E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted in accordance
with SSPC-SP3.
F. Shear Stud Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of

shear connectors. Weld using automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors
in accordance with AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions.
G. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other
work to pass through steel members.
1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut
bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning.
2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes
perpendicular to steel surfaces.
3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive
other work.
2.10 SHOP CONNECTIONS
A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts in accordance with RCSC's

"Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts" for type of bolt and type
of joint specified.
1. Joint Type: Snug tightened, Pretensioned, or Slip critical as required or as

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.8 where required for
tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods
used in correcting welding work.
1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of
axes without exceeding tolerances in ANSI/AISC 303 for mill material.
2.11 GALVANIZING
A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel
in accordance with ASTM A123.
1. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they
function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
2. Galvanize items indicated on Structural Drawings.
2.12 SHOP PRIMING
A. Shop prime steel surfaces, except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded
members to a depth of 2 inches.
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Surfaces within 3” of contact area of high-strength bolted, slip-critical
connections.
4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing).
5. Galvanized surfaces.
B. Surface Preparation of Steel: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill
scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces in accordance with the
following specifications and standards:
C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a
minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage
of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
1. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or
erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing
surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for
compliance with requirements.

1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces,

anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions,
locations, angles, and elevations.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep
structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads
and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when
permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise
indicated on Drawings.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and in

accordance with ANSI/AISC 303 and ANSI/AISC 360.
B. Baseplates, Bearing Plates and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing
surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates.
Clean bottom surface of plates.
1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.
3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and
plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with
edge of plate before packing with grout.
4. Promptly pack shrinkage-resistant grout solidly between bearing surfaces and
plates, so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and
allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for
grouting.
C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within ANSI/AISC 303.
D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before
permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces
that are in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to
compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. Slope roof framing members to
slopes indicated on Drawings.
2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and
mean temperature when structure is completed and in service.
E. Splice members only where indicated.
F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish
thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1.

G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that
must be enlarged to admit bolts.
3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS
A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts in accordance with RCSC's

"Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts" for bolt and joint type
specified.
1. Joint Type: Snug tightened, Pretensioned, or Slip critical as indicated on
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.8, where required, for
tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods
used in correcting welding work.
1. Comply with ANSI/AISC 303 and ANSI/AISC 360 for bearing, alignment,
adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent
to field welds.
2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where indicated, back gouge, and grind steel
smooth.
3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of
axes without exceeding tolerances in ANSI/AISC 303 for mill material.
3.5 REPAIR
A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing, and

repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780.
B. Touchup Painting:
1. Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or
missing, and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply
with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
a. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-
SP 3 power-tool cleaning.
A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector to perform the following
special inspections:
1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details.
2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds.
3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections.
B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
inspections.
1. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test bolted connections in accordance with
RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts."

2. Headed Stud Welding: Inspect headed stud welding in accordance with AWS
D1.1 and as follows:
a. Visually inspect studs for complete fusion and full 360 deg. weld flash (or
fillet). Studs which reveal complete fusion and full weld flash shall be
considered acceptable. If visual inspection reveals any stud that does not
show complete fusion or weld flash or any stud repaired by welding, check
stud by bending to an angle of 15 deg. from its original axis in a direction
opposite missing weld fillet. Studs that crack in weld, base metal or shank
shall be replaced. Studs that show no sign of failure shall be considered
acceptable. Replace any stud that fails test.
b. In addition to visual inspection of stud welds, select, at random, six
members per floor on which five studs shall be bent to an angle of 15 deg.
from its original axis. Not more than one of five studs shall show any sign
of failure. If more than one stud fails, check all studs on member. Any stud
that shows any sign of failure shall be replaced. For each member with
any defective studs, test an additional member.
c. Any bent stud shall be left bent if no portion of stud is less than one inch
from a proposed concrete surface, in which case, stud shall be
straightened. Required bending and straightening shall be accomplished
by mechanical means without heating.
3. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds in accordance with AWS D1.1.
a. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds in accordance
with AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures:
1) Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164. All penetration welds.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 05 12 13
ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements regarding the appearance and surface preparation of

Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel (AESS) framing.
1. Refer to Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel Framing" for all other requirements
regarding steel work not included in this section.
2. This section applies to any members noted on architectural and structural
drawings as AESS 1, AESS 2, AESS 3, AESS 4 and AESS C; and in the areas
defined as AESS below.
a. The following structural steel elements and connections are to be supplied
and erected per AESS 1: N/A
b. The following structural steel elements and connections are to be supplied
and erected per AESS 2: Cafetorium Trusses, Main Entry/Library high roof
c. The following structural steel elements and connections are to be supplied
d. The following structural steel elements and connections are to be supplied
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 45 23 "Testing and Inspection Services".
2. Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel Framing".
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel: Structural Steel conforming to one of the

categories of Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel or AESS. Refer to ANSI/AISC
3013-16 Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges
B. AESS 1: Structural Steel designated as AESS 1 in the Contract Documents and

conforming to ANSI/AISC 301-16, Section 10 definition of AESS 1. These are basic
elements with workmanship requirements exceeding those in non-AESS construction.
C. AESS 2: Structural Steel designated as AESS 2 in the Contract Documents and

conforming to ANSI/AISC 303-16, Section 10 definition of AESS 2. These are feature
elements viewed at a distance greater than 20 feet. The art of metalworking is
intended to be visible to the viewer.
Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing 05 12 13 - 1

D. AESS 3: Structural Steel designated as AESS 3 in the Contract Documents and

conforming to ANSI/AISC 303-16, Section 10 definition of AESS 3. These are feature
elements viewed at a distance less than 20 feet. The art of metalworking is intended to
be visible to the viewer.
E. AESS 4: Structural Steel designated as AESS 4 in the Contract Documents and

conforming to ANSI/AISC 303-16, Section 10 definition of AESS 4. These are
showcase elements with special surface and edge treatment beyond fabrication. The
intent is the form as the only feature showing in an element.
A. Product data for each type of product specified.
B. Fabrication Documents: Detailing for fabrication of AESS components.

1. Provide erection documents clearly indicating which members are AESS
members and the AESS category of each part.
2. Include details that clearly identify all the requirements listed in sections 2.3
"Fabrication” and 3.3 “Erection" of this specification for each part. Provide
connections for exposed AESS consistent with concepts shown on the
architectural or structural drawings.
3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field
welds, and show size, length and type of each weld. Identify grinding, finish and
profile of welds as defined herein.
4. Indicate orientation of HSS seams and mill marks (where applicable).
5. Indicate type, size, finish and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and
field bolts. Identify high-strength bolted slip-critical, direct-tensioned shear/
bearing connections. Indicate which direction bolt heads should be oriented.
6. Clearly indicate which surfaces or edges are exposed and what class of surface
preparation is being used.
7. Indicate special tolerances and erection requirements as noted on the drawings
or defined herein.
8. Indicate vent or drainage holes for HSS and galvanized members.
C. Mockup: Provide mockups of the nature and extent indicated on the contract
documents.
1. Locate mockups on site or in the fabricator’s shop as directed by Architect.
Mockups shall be full-size unless the Architect approves smaller models.
Alternatively, when a mockup is not practical, the first piece of an element or
connection can be used to determine acceptability.
2. Notify the Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups
will be available for review.
3. Demonstrate all applicable AESS characteristics for the specified category of
AESS on the elements and joints in the mockup.
4. Build mockups using member sizes and materials indicated for final Work.
5. The mockup shall demonstrate weld quality and contouring of the welds at the
aligned walls of the members.
6. The mockup shall demonstrate the specified surface preparation and finish
coating.
7. HSS members shall extend at least 6 inches from the joint in the mockup.
8. Obtain Architect’s written approval of mockups before starting fabrication.

9. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as

a standard for judging the completed work.
10. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial
Completion may become part of the completed work.
D. Samples: Provide samples of specific AESS characteristics. Samples may be small-

size samples or components of conventional structural steel demonstrating the
following specific AESS characteristics.
1. Continuous weld appearance.
2. Sharp edges ground smooth.
3. Surface preparation.
4. Fabrication mark removal.
5. Weld show-through.
Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the “Quality Assurance” Submittal
to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects
names and address, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other
information specified. For each project, submit photographs showing detail of installed
AESS.
A. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the “Quality Assurance” Submittal
to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects
names and address, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other
information specified. For each project, submit photographs showing detail of installed
AESS.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: In addition to those qualifications listed in Section 05 12 00,

“Structural Steel Framing,” engage an AISC Certified Fabricator, experienced in
fabricating AESS similar to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-
service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to fabricate AESS
without delaying the Work.
B. Erector Qualifications: In addition to those qualifications listed in Section 05 12 00,

“Structural Steel Framing,” engage an AISC Certified Erector, experienced in erecting
AESS work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicted for this Project and
with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Comply with applicable provisions of AISC 303, Section 10.
A. Deliver AESS to Project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure continuity of
installation. All tie-downs on loads shall be nylon straps or shall use softeners when
using chains or wire rope slings to avoid damage to edges and surfaces of members.
The standard for acceptance of delivered and erected members shall be equivalent to
the standard employed at fabrication.

B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel
members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel
members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. Use special care in
handling to prevent twisting or warping of AESS members.
C. Handle finish pieces using nylon type slings, or chains with softeners, or wire ropes
with softeners such that they are not damaged.
A. Field Measurements: Where AESS is indicated to fit against other construction, verify
actual dimensions by field measurements before fabrication.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply
with paint and coating manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that shop primers
and topcoats are compatible with one another.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS
A. General: Meet requirements of Section 05 12 00 “Structural Steel Framing,” as

amended below:
B. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Heavy hex heads and nuts. Provide rounded
bolt heads with twist off bolts where noted in the drawings. Provide standard carbon
steel or mechanically galvanized finish as noted in the drawings.
2.2 PAINT SYSTEM
A. Compatibility: All components/procedures of the AESS paint system shall conform to

the coating system specified, submitted, and approved per Division 9. As a minimum
identify required surface preparation, primer, intermediate coat (if applicable), and
finish coat. Primer, intermediate coating and finish coating shall be from a single
manufacturer combined in a system documented by the manufacturer with adequate
guidance for the fabricator to procure and execute.
B. Primer: As specified in Division 9. Primer shall comply with all federal standards for
VOC, lead and chromate levels.
C. Zinc-Rich Primer: High-zinc-dust-content paint for galvanized steel, with dry film
coating not less than 90 percent zinc dust by weight.
D. Finish Coating: Field-apply intermediate and top coats per Division 9 specifications.

2.3 FABRICATION: AESS 1
A. Use special care in handling and shipping of AESS both before and after shop painting
minimize damage to any shop finish. Use Nylon type slings or softeners when using
chains or wire rope slings.
B. The permissible tolerances for member depth, width, out of square, and camber and
sweep shall be as specified in ASTM A6, ASTM A500, and ASTM A1085.
C. Fabricate and assemble AESS in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Locate field
joints in AESS assemblies at concealed locations or as approved by the Architect.
Detail AESS assemblies to minimize field handling and expedite erection.
D. Remove blemishes or unsightly surfaces resulting from temporary braces or fixtures.
E. Remove all backing and run out tabs and grind welds smooth.
F. Grind all sharp edges smooth, including all sheared, punched, or flame-cut edges
G. Provide a continuous appearance to all welded joints, including tack welds.

Intermittent welds shall be made continuous with additional welding, caulking, or body
filler. Where continuous welding is noted on the drawings, provide welds of a uniform
size and profile.
H. Appearance and quality of welds shall be consistent. Assemble and weld built-up
sections by methods that will maintain alignment of members without warp exceeding
the tolerance of this section.
I. Install all bolts on the same side of the connection, oriented uniformly in the direction
indicated, consistent from one connection to another.
J. Remove all weld spatter, slivers, and similar surface discontinuities.
K. Grind off projections larger than 1/16 inch at butt and plug welds.
L. At members with hot-dip galvanized finish, fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed
in the finished work.
A. Fabricate to the requirements of Section 2.3 and as follows.
B. The as-fabricated straightness tolerance shall be one-half of that specified in ASTM

A6, ASTM A500, or ASTM A1085.
C. For curved structural members, whether composed of a single standard structural

shape or built-up, the as-fabricated variation from the theoretical curvature shall be
equal to or less than the standard camber and sweep tolerances permitted for straight
members in the applicable ASTM standard.

D. The tolerance on overall profile dimensions of welded built-up members shall one-half
of that specified in AWS D1.1.
E. Member markings made during fabrication and erection shall not be visible after
erection.
B. Fabricate AESS with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and of surface quality
consistent with the approved mockup.
C. Grind projections at butt and plug welds to be smooth with the adjacent surface.
D. HSS seams shall be oriented away from view or as indicated on the contract
documents.
E. Copes, miters, and cuts in surfaces exposed to view shall have a maximum gap of 1/8”
in an open joint. If the gap is shown to be in contact, the contact shall be uniform
within 1/16”.
F. Mill marks shall not be exposed to view. If it is not possible to hide mill marks, then the
mill marks are to be removed by appropriate length cutting of mill material. If this is not
possible, the fabricator shall remove the mill mark, grind, and fill the surface to be
consistent with the approved mockup.
G. The matching of abutting cross sections is required.
B. Welds shall be contoured and blended. Welded transitions between members shall be
contoured and blended.
C. At locations where welding on the opposite side of an exposed connection creates

distortion, weld show-through shall be minimized to conform to the approved mockup.
D. Steel surface imperfections and open holes shall be filled with weld metal or body filler
and smoothed by grinding or filling to the standards applicable to the shop fabrication
of the materials.
E. HSS seams shall be treated so they are not apparent.
2.7 GALVANIZING
A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel
according to ASTM A 123.

1. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless
indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off
smooth.
2.8 SHOP PRIMING
A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded
members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm).
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.
4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.
5. Galvanized surfaces.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted to SSPC-SP6. Remove grease

and oil using a solvent cleaner. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or
flux deposits.
C. Preparing Galvanized Steel for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean steel
of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.
D. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to

minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in
full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
1. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or
erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Upon delivery, examine AESS for twists, kinks, warping, gouges, and other
imperfections which may result in rejection of the appearance of the member.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep
AESS secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads
equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent
structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.
1. If possible, locate welded tabs for attaching temporary bracing and safety cabling
where they will be concealed from view in the completed Work.
3.3 ERECTION
A. During erection, hold AESS to the standards applicable to the shop fabrication of the
material.

B. Employ special care to handle and erect AESS. Erect finish pieces using nylon straps
or chains with softeners such that they are not damaged.
C. AESS Erection Tolerances: Erection tolerances shall meet the requirements of

standard frame tolerances for structural steel per Chapter 7 of AISC 303.
D. Remove all backing and run-out tabs.
E. When temporary braces or fixtures are required to facilitate erection, care shall be
taken to avoid any blemishes, holes, or unsightly surfaces resulting from the use or
removal of such temporary elements. Remove such markings if they occur.
F. Align bolt heads on the same side of the connection as indicated on the approved
fabrication or erection documents.
G. Do not enlarge holes in members by burning or by using drift pins. Ream holes that
must be enlarged to admit bolts. Replace connection plates that are misaligned where
holes cannot be aligned with acceptable final appearance.
H. Obtain permission for any torch cutting or field fabrication from the Architect. Finish
sections thermally cut during erection to a surface appearance consistent with AESS
requirements.
I. At AESS 4 elements, where holes must be cut in the web at the intersection with
flanges on W shapes and structural tees to permit field welding of the flanges, they
shall be filled with body filler. Other open holes shall be filled with weld metal or body
filler and smoothed by grinding or filling to the standards applicable to the shop
fabrication of the materials
A. Architect will observe AESS in place to determine acceptability relating to aesthetic

effect. The Quality Assurance Agency has no responsibility for enforcing the
requirements of this section.
3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as
used for shop painting.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 05 21 00
STEEL JOIST FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. SJI's "Specifications": Steel Joist Institute's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and
Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders."
B. Special Joists: Steel joists requiring modification by manufacturer to support nonuniform,

unequal, or special loading conditions that invalidate load tables in SJI's "Specifications"
including, but not limited to, joists designed for uplift.
A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacing of joists.
2. Include joining and anchorage details; bracing, bridging, and joist accessories;
splice and connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction.
3. Indicate locations and details of bearing plates to be embedded in other
construction.
4. Shop Drawings containing special joists shall be submitted with a design load
summary for each special joist design. Load summary will be reviewed and
returned with the joist submittal. Shop drawings containing special joists submitted
without the specified load summary will be returned unchecked as an incomplete
submittal. Shop drawings containing special joists shall be signed and sealed by
the qualified professional engineer responsible for the design of the joists.
5. Do not make shop drawings using reproductions of, or referring to, Contract
Drawings.
6. Submit, in writing, any request for modification to Drawings and Specifications.
Submitting shop drawings for review does not constitute “in writing”.
A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
C. Manufacturer certificates.
D. Mill Certificates: For each type of bolt.
Steel Joist Framing 05 21 00 - 1

E. Comprehensive engineering analysis of special joists signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for its preparation.
F. Field quality-control reports.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists

complying with applicable standard specifications and load tables in SJI's
"Specifications" and "Standard Specification for Composite Steel Joists, CJ-Series" in
"Standard Specifications for Composite Steel Joists, Weight Tables and Bridging Tables,
Code of Standard Practice."
1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing qualified professional engineering
services for designing special joists to comply with performance requirements.
B. Joist Erector: Joist erector shall have not less than five (5) years experience in erection
of steel joists.
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify field-welding procedures and personnel according to

AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI.
B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage,
and handling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding

design loads indicated on Drawings.
1. Use ASD; load data are given at service level.
2. Design special joists to withstand design loads with live-load deflections no greater
than indicated on Drawings.
2.2 STEEL JOISTS
A. K-Series Steel Joist: Manufactured steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard
Specification for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-
angle top- and bottom-chord members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord. Single
chord members are not permitted. Single chord members are not permitted.
1. Joist Type: K-series steel joists.

2. K-Series Steel Joist Substitutes: Manufacture according to "Standard

Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with
steel-angle or -channel members.
3. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to
joists. Reduce carrying capacity proportionately for reduction in chord area.
4. Top-Chord Extensions: Extend top chords of joists with SJI's Type S top-chord
extensions where indicated on Drawings.
5. Extended Ends: Extend bearing ends of joists with SJI's Type R extended ends
where indicated on Drawings, complying with SJI's "Specifications."
6. Camber joists according to SJI's "Specifications." or as indicated on Drawings,
whichever is greater.
7. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped
shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches.
B. Long-Span Steel Joist: Manufacture steel joists according to "Standard Specification for
Longspan Steel Joists, LH-Series and Deep Longspan Steel Joists, DLH-Series" in SJI's
"Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members; of joist type and end
and top-chord arrangements as indicated on Drawings. Single chord members are not
permitted.
1. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for ship welding, appearance,
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
2. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to
joists. Reduce carrying capacity proportionately for reduction in chord area.
3. Camber long-span steel joists according to SJI's "Specifications" or as indicated
on Drawings, whichever is greater.
4. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped
shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches.
C. Composite Steel Joist: Manufacture steel joists according to "Standard Specifications for
Composite Steel Joists, CJ-Series" in SJI's "Standard Specifications for Composite Steel
Joists, Weight Tables and Bridging Tables, Code of Standard Practice," with steel-angle
top- and bottom-chord members and parallel top chord, and with underslung ends.
Single chord members are not permitted.
1. Camber composite steel joists as indicated on Drawings.
2.3 PRIMERS
A. Primer:
1. SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with
performance requirements in SSPC-Paint 15.
2.4 STEEL JOIST ACCESSORIES
A. Bridging:
1. Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of
material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" and "Standard

Specification for Composite Steel Joists, CJ-Series" in "Standard Specifications for

Composite Steel Joists, Weight Tables and Bridging Tables, Code of Standard
Practice" for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. Furnish additional erection
bridging if required for stability.
2. Schematically indicated. Detail and fabricate according to SJI's "Specifications"
and "Standard Specification for Composite Steel Joists, CJ-Series" in "Standard
Specifications for Composite Steel Joists, Weight Tables and Bridging Tables,
Code of Standard Practice." Furnish additional erection bridging if required for
stability.
B. Fabricate steel bearing plates from ASTM A36 steel with integral anchorages of sizes
and thicknesses indicated on Drawings. Shop prime paint for interior exposure or Hot-
dip zinc coat according to ASTM A123 for exterior or weather exposure.
C. Furnish ceiling extensions, either extended bottom-chord elements or a separate

extension unit of enough strength to support ceiling construction.
1. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch of finished wall surface unless otherwise indicated
on Drawings.
2. Finish: Shop primer.
D. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125, Grade A325, Type 1, heavy-hex
steel structural bolts; ASTM A563, Grade DH, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and
ASTM F436/F436M, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers.
1. Finish: Plain.
E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
F. Furnish miscellaneous accessories including splice plates and bolts required by joist
manufacturer to complete joist assembly.
2.5 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING
A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated
joists and accessories by power-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3.
B. Do not prime paint joists and accessories to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.
C. Apply one coat of shop primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a
continuous, dry paint film not less than 1 mil thick.
D. Prevent stacking and bundling of joist while paint is wet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
A. Protect steel joists and accessories in transit.

B. Care shall be exercised at all times to avoid damage through careless handling during
unloading, storing and erecting. Dropping of joists is not permitted.
C. When stored at site, store steel joists above ground on platforms, pallets, skids, or other
supports and provide weatherproofing covering. Keep joists free of dirt and other foreign
matter.
D. Support steel joists in such a manner as to prevent distortion of members and injury to
shop paint. Where shop paint is damaged, repaint to prevent corrosion.
E. Store and maintain welding electrodes in accordance with AWS D1.1.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural

framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured.
B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to
supporting construction according to SJI's Specifications and joist manufacturer's written
instructions, and requirements in this Section.
1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece.
2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening.
3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to
ensure that joists are stabilized during construction.
4. Delay rigidly connecting bottom-chord extensions to columns or supports until
dead loads are applied.
C. Field weld joists to supporting steel. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with
placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using carbon-steel bolts.
E. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts. Comply with
RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490Bolts" for
high-strength structural bolt installation and tightening requirements.
F. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads
are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls
or beams.

3.4 REPAIRS
A. Touchup Painting:
1. Immediately after installation, clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field
connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists and
accessories.
a. Clean and prepare surfaces as originally specified.
b. Apply a compatible primer of same type as primer used on adjacent
surfaces.
2. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to
manufacturer and installer, that ensure that joists and accessories are without
damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
B. Correct deficiencies in Work that inspections and test reports have indicated are not in
compliance with specified requirements.
3.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer shall inspect joists to the extent to assure fabrication is in compliance with
the Contract Documents and SJI Specifications.
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
inspections for conformance with the Contract Documents and referenced standards.
B. Check qualifications of field welders, welding procedures and techniques.
C. Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1.

1. In addition to visual inspection, test field welds according to AWS D1.1 and the
following procedures, at testing agency's option:
a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165.
b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709.
c. Ultrasonic Testing: ASTM E164.
d. Radiographic Testing: ASTM E94.
D. Visually inspect bolted connections.
E. Visually inspect placement of erected steel joists including damage, proper seat bearing,
spacing, and installation of bridging.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
G. Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with

END OF SECTION

SECTION 05 31 00
STEEL DECKING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1. Roof deck
2. Acoustical roof deck
3. Composite floor deck
4. Cellular acoustical composite floor deck
5. Noncomposite form deck
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels,
pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other
construction.
2. Indicate deck type, fastening methods, fastener layout, shear/headed stud
connector layout, deck layout plan, support locations, projections, openings and
reinforcement, pertinent details, and accessories.
3. Do not make shop drawings using reproductions of, or referring to, drawings.
4. Submit in writing any request for modifications to Drawings and Specifications.
Submitting shop drawings for review does not constitute "in writing”.
A. Welding certificates.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck.
C. Product Test Reports: For tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that
each of the following complies with requirements:
1. Power-actuated mechanical fasteners.
2. Acoustical roof deck.
D. Field quality-control reports.
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3,

"Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
Steel Decking 05 31 00 - 1
B. FM Approvals' RoofNav Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FM Approvals and
listed in its RoofNav for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-90 windstorm ratings. Identify
materials with FM Approvals Certification markings.
A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery,
storage, and handling.
B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a
waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.
C. Architect reserves the right to reject any material that has become damaged because of
improper storage.
1. Protect and ventilate cellular acoustical floor and roof deck with factory-installed
insulation to maintain insulation free of moisture.
2. Store and maintain welding electrodes in accordance with AWS D1.1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck

according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel
Structural Members."
B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E119; testing by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the
listings of another qualified testing agency.
2.2 ROOF DECK
A. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI
Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," and with the following:
1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A653, Structural Steel (SS), minimum yield
strength as indicated on Structural Drawings, zinc coating as indicated on
2. Deck Profile: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
3. Profile Depth: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
5. Span Condition: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
6. Side Laps: Overlapped or interlocking seam at Contractor's option.
2.3 ACOUSTICAL ROOF DECK
A. Acoustical Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply
with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication
No. 31, and with the following:
strength as indicated on Structural Drawings zinc coating as indicated on Structural
Drawings.
2. Deck Profile: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
7. Acoustical Perforations: Deck units with manufacturer's standard perforated
vertical webs.
8. Sound-Absorbing Insulation: Manufacturer's standard premolded roll or strip of
glass or mineral fiber unless otherwise noted on Drawings.
9. Acoustical Performance: NRC 0.70 minimum, tested according to ASTM C423.
2.4 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK
A. Composite Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs
and interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for
Composite Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, with the minimum section
properties indicated, and with the following:
2.5 CELLULAR ACOUSTICAL COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK
A. Cellular Acoustical Composite Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, consisting of a top section
with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs welded to a lower perforated bottom sheet
with interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for
Composite Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, with the minimum section
properties indicated, and with the following:
5. Acoustical Perforations: Deck units with manufacturer's standard perforated lower

panel.
6. Sound-Absorbing Insulation: Manufacturer's standard premolded roll or strip of
glass or mineral fiber unless otherwise noted on Drawings.
7. Acoustical Performance: NRC 0.70 minimum, tested according to ASTM C423
2.6 NONCOMPOSITE FORM DECK
A. Noncomposite Form Deck: Fabricate ribbed-steel sheet noncomposite form-deck panels

to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Noncomposite Steel Form
Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, with the minimum section properties indicated, and
with the following:
1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008, Structural Steel (SS), minimum yield
strength as indicated on Structural Drawings with top and underside surface shop
primed with manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer.
a. Color: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise noted on Drawings.
3. Profile Depth: as indicated on Structural Drawings.
4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: as indicated on Structural Drawings.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with
B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or

pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.
C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-

steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.
D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.
E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of
33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and
finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.
F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi), of
same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI
Publication No. 31 for overhang and slab depth.
G. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, ridge and valley plates and Cover Plates:
Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated.
H. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0598 inch thick, with
factory-punched hole of 3/8-inch minimum diameter.
I. Flat Sump Plates: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and finish
as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field.
J. Recessed Sump Pans: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and
finish as deck, with 3-inch- wide flanges and sloped recessed pans of 1-1/2-inch
minimum depth. For drains, cut holes in the field.
K. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A780.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and

commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and
requirements in this Section.
B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection
limitations.
C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.
D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately
aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not
stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.
1. Align cellular deck panels over full length of cell runs and align cells at ends of
abutting panels.
E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or
deflection.
F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work
projecting through or adjacent to deck.
G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength,
continuity of deck, and support of other work.
H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.
I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical
fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions as indicated
on Structural Drawings.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF ROOF DECK
A. Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the
surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less
than 1-1/2 inches long, and as follows:
1. Weld Diameter: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
2. Weld Spacing: as indicated on Structural Drawings.
3. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location.
B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of
panels between supports, at intervals indicated on Structural Drawings if deck is less
than 22 gauge:
1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon-steel
screws.
2. Mechanically clinch or button punch.
C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-
1/2 inches, with end joints as follows:
1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum or butted at Contractor's option.
D. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and
mechanically fasten flanges to top of deck. Space mechanical fasteners not more than
12 inches apart with at least one fastener at each corner.
1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and weld or
mechanically fasten.
E. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end
closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.
Weld or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.
1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise
indicated.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR DECK
A. Fasten floor-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the
surface diameter indicated and as follows:
1. Weld Diameter: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
2. Weld Spacing: Space and locate welds as indicated on Structural Drawings.
3. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location if deck is less than 22
gauge.
B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of
panels between supports, at intervals indicated on Structural Drawings.
1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon-steel
screws.
2. Mechanically clinch or button punch.
3. Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch- long welds.
C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-
1/2 inches, with end joints butted.
D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting
structure according to SDI recommendations unless otherwise indicated.
E. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to
deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends
of ribs and sides of deck.
3.5 REPAIR
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces
of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A780 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
inspections.
1. Qualification of field welders, welding electrodes, procedures, and techniques.
2. Verification of deck type, depth, gauge, and finish.
3. Inspect end and side laps.
4. Inspect welds to supporting members and side lap attachments.
B. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 05 40 00
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Exterior non-load bearing wall framing.
2. Interior load bearing wall framing, where indicated on Drawings.
3. Sound isolation mat decoupler.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Iron and Steel Institute

1. AISI S100: North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel
Structural Members
2. AISI S200: North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General
Provisions
3. AISI S210: North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Floor and
Roof System Design
4. AISI S211: North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Wall Stud
Design
5. AISI S212: North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header
Design
6. AISI S213: North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Lateral
Design
B. American Society for Testing and Materials:

1. ASTM A 36/A 36M: Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
2. ASTM A 123/A123M: Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on
Iron and Steel Products
3. ASTM A 653/A 653M: Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
4. ASTM A 780: Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip
Galvanized Coatings
5. ASTM A 1003/A 1003M: Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and
Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members
6. ASTM C 1513: Specification for Steel Tapping Screws for Cold-Formed Steel
Framing Connections
7. ASTM E 488: Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry
Elements
8. ASTM E 1190: Test Methods for Strength of Power-Actuated Fasteners Installed
in Structural Members
C. American Welding Society:

1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
2. AWS D1.3 - Light Steel Welding Code - Sheet Steel.
Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05 40 00 - 1

D. ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.

1. ICC-ES AC70: Fasteners Power-Driven into Concrete, Steel and Masonry
Elements
2. ICC-ES AC193: Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements
E. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings

1. SSPC-Paint 20: Paint Specification No. 20: Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I,
"Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic")
F. Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers

1. SEI/ASCE 7: Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
A. Preinstallation Conference: Before starting cold-formed metal framing installation,

conduct conference at Project site.
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, testing and inspecting agency representative, cold-
formed metal framing Installer, Installer’s professional engineer responsible for
cold-formed metal framing design, and other installers whose work interfaces
with or affects cold-formed metal framing installation. Agenda shall include at a
minimum:
a. Review methods and procedures related to cold-formed metal framing
installation, including attachment to primary structural elements.
b. Review accommodations for thermal movement, floor deflection under
load, and other special conditions.
c. Review sequencing and interfacing with other related trades.
d. Review governing regulations and requirements.
e. Review inspection and testing procedures during construction and repair
procedures in the event they are required.
A. Product Data: Submit Technical Data to verify the section properties of studs shown
on the architectural and structural drawings and instructions for securing studs to
tracks and other framing connections.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate component details including size and gage designations, bracing,
splices, bridging, framing openings, bearing, anchorage, loading, temporary
bracing, welds, type and location of mechanical fasteners and accessories, or
items required of other work for complete installation.
2. Detail stud layout.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

A. Certificates: Certify that each welder has satisfactory passed AWS qualification test for
welding process involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
A. Qualifications:
1. Professional Engineer: Licensed to practice in state where project is located and
is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated.
2. Welders: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with
AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3.
A. Protect light gage steel framing members from weather exposure and damage. Deliver
to project site in bundles, fully identified with name, type and grade. Store off ground in
dry, ventilated space or protect with suitable, venting waterproof coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01

45 16 "Contractor’s Quality Control," to design cold-formed metal framing.
B. Design Criteria:
1. Comply with AISI Specification for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members.
2. Calculate structural properties of framing members in accordance with AWCI,
MFMA, or AWS D1.3 requirements.
C. Structural Loads:
1. Wind Loads: Design and size components of cold-formed metal framing to
withstand loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to
plane of wall as calculated in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7 to establish wind
pressure based on the criteria identified on Structural Drawings.
2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
D. Maximum Allowable Deflection:

1. For stud behind Stone veneer: L/720 for stud assembly.
2. For stud behind brick/masonry veneer: L/600 for stud by itself and L/660 for the
complete wall system.
3. For stud behind metal panel: L/240 for stud by itself.
E. Design system to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint
seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal
or cyclic day/night temperature ranges.
F. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building

structural members, and clearances of intended openings.

G. Cold-Formed Steel Framing Design Standards:

1. Floor and Roof Systems: AISI S210.
2. Wall Studs: AISI S211.
3. Headers: AISI S212.
4. Lateral Design: AISI S213.
H. AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated,
comply with AISI S100 and AISI S200.
I. Stud spacing and depth shall be as indicated on drawings.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Studs, Track, Bracing, Furring and Bridging:

1. Exterior Framing: Formed galvanized sheet steel G-90 complying with ASTM A
653, Grade A, ASTM A 1003.
2. Interior Framing: Formed galvanized sheet steel G-40 or equivalent complying
with ASTM A 653, Grade A, ASTM A 1003.
3. Studs: Studs lighter than 43 mils (nominal 18 gage) shall not be used.
a. For 43 mils units, fabricate metal framing components of commercial
quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 33,000 psi; ASTM A
1003 unless delegated design requires higher yield point steel.
b. For 54 mil (nominal 16 gage) and heaver units, fabricate metal framing
components of structural quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of
50,000 psi; ASTM A 1003.
4. Open box shaped sections, punched web for studs and solid web for track.
5. Structural properties of sections shall be computed in accordance with AISI.
B. Angles, Plates, Gussets, Clips: Galvanized formed steel, thickness determined for
conditions encountered, 20 gage minimum, manufacturer's standard shapes.
C. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-

tapping steel drill screws.
1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard
elsewhere.
D. Anchorage Devices: Power driven or powder actuated fasteners, drilled expansion

bolts or screws with sleeves.
E. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3.
F. Repair Material for Galvanized Surfaces: ASTM A780/A780M.
2.3 SOUND ISOLATION MAT DECOUPLER
A. Molded fiberglass mat decoupler for isolating cold-formed metal framing from structure.
1. Mat Thickness: Nominal 0.50 inches
2. Lengths: Precut to 48 inch lengths. Customize in field.
3. Widths: use combination of 3 inch and 5 inch wide mats to provide proper
support and noise and vibration isolation.

4. Anchor isolation bushings: For securing slip-tracks and framing runner channels
at isolation mats.
a. Provide anchoring device and grommet including the following:
1) Spacer: ½ inch diameter
2) Washer
3) Elastomeric elements
b. Nominal Free Height, Grommet: 0.80 inches
c. Basis of Design: KAI S-38 by Kinetics Noise Control
5. Basis of Design: WallMat by Kinetics Noise Control
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Galvanize, touch-up and prime metal materials used on exterior wall framing.
B. Fabricate assemblies and framed sections of sizes and profiles required with joints
fitted, secured, reinforced and braced to suit design requirements.
C. Attach similar components by welding. Attach dissimilar components by welding,

bolting or screw fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do
not wire tie framing components.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION
A. Install metal framing system in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Joining of members shall be made with self-drilling screws or welding. Wire tying of
framing members shall not be permitted.
C. Metal framing may be attached with sheet metal screws at joints according to
manufacturer's recommendations except where noted to be welded on details.
D. Attachments made with screws shall be self-drilling screws or hardened screw-shank

nails at maximum fastener spacing as specified by applicable governing codes.
E. Connections to concrete shall be made with self-tapping screws specially designed for
that purpose.
F. Align floor and ceiling tracks, locating to wall or partition layout. Secure in place with
screws or welding at maximum 24" on center. Provide fasteners at corners and ends
of track.
G. Place studs plumb at 16" on center maximum not more than 2" from abutting walls and
at each side of openings. Connect studs to tracks using screws or welding in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where stud system abuts column
or wall, including masonry, anchor ends of stiffeners to supporting structure.

H. Construct corners with minimum three studs. Double stud at door, windows, and
sidelight jambs. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to match wall
stud spacing.
I. Provide deflection allowance of L/360 below supported horizontal building framing in

ceiling or head track for nonload-bearing framing
J. Install framing between studs for attachment of electrical boxes and other mechanical
and electrical items.
K. Erect load-bearing studs one piece full length where possible. Non welded splicing
and wire tying of components is not permitted. Join members forming trusses by
welding.
L. Erect load-bearing studs, brace and reinforce to develop full strength to meet design
requirements.
M. Make provision for erection stresses. Provide temporary alignment and bracing.
N. Provide bridging at 1/3 points, or as recommended by manufacturer for loading

conditions, whichever is more stringent.
O. Frame both sides of expansion and control joints with separate studs. Do not bridge
joint with any component of wall system, including tracks.
P. Install insulation, specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation," in built-up exterior

framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings,
that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.
Q. Ensure framing provides true and flat surfaces.
3.2 ISOLATORS
A. Install per manufacturer's instructions at 16 inches on center.
B. Drill through runner channel and isolation mat to properly seat grommet.
C. Anchor in-place in top and bottom runner tracks.

1. At top track, mount isolation mats between slip track and structural deck.
2. Anchor mats through tracks to secure in place.
D. Seal board joints with mat manufacturer’s acoustical sealant.
3.3 WELDING
A. Where welding is required, use special low amperage welding equipment and small
diameter rods to prevent blow holes in material.
B. Welds shall be 1/8" fillet continuous across contact joint.

C. Puddle welds shall be 3/4" diameter full fusion. Weld washers shall be used where
welds are made to material 3/16" or more in thickness.
1. Use splices or butt welds at all butt joints in runner track. No splices shall be
permitted in track over lintels, diaphragm sheathing, or diagonal bracing.
A. Testing and Inspection:

1. Engage same qualified professional engineer responsible for design of cold-formed
steel framing to perform inspections of cold-formed metal framing installation during
construction, at 30, 60, and 90 percent completion, for compliance with approved
Shop Drawings.
2. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform
at least one field inspection and prepare reports.
B. In addition to inspections for compliance with approved Shop Drawings, field and shop
welds will also be subject to testing and inspection.
C. Contractor’s engineer and independent testing and inspection agency will report
inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
D. Cold-formed steel framing will be considered defective if it does not pass inspections.
E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Touch-up field welds and scratched or damaged galvanizing.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 05 43 00
SLOTTED CHANNEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Slotted channel framing for equipment.
2. Slotted channel framing for mechanical and electrical equipment.
3. Slotted channel framing for acoustical baffle ceiling suspension system.
4. Slotted channel framing for applications where framing and supports are not
specified in other Sections.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of slotted channel framing that is anchored to or that receive

other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing
anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral
anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate plan layout, typical elevations, details and anchoring
methods.
A. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with

sealed by the qualified professional engineer, within the State of the Project,
responsible for their preparation.
B. Submit following:
1. Certificates verifying AWS qualifications within previous 12 months for each
welder employed for Work.
2. Manufacturer’s certification that products furnished for Project meet or exceed
Slotted Channel Framing 05 43 00 - 1

A. Engineer Qualifications: Registered professional engineer licensed to practice

structural engineering in jurisdiction where Project is located, with minimum of five
years experience in design of slotted channel framing support systems.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing, fabricating, and

installing Products specified in this Section with minimum five years experience.
A. Comply with Division 01 Section “Product Requirements.”

1. Deliver components of system required to be installed by other trades in
sufficient time not to delay work of project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Slotted Channel Framing:

1. Atkore Unistrut, Harvey, IL.
2. Cooper B-Line Strut Systems, Inc., Highland, IL.
3. Flex-Strut, Inc. Metal Framing Products, Warren, OH.
4. GS Metals Corporation, “Globe Strut.”
5. Hilti, Inc., “Hilti Strut MQ.”
6. Unistrut Corporation
A. Requirements: Drawings are diagrammatic and are intended to establish basic

dimension of units, sight lines, ceiling heights, and profiles of units.
B. Manufacturer: Responsible for designing system, including anchorage to structural

system and necessary modifications to meet specified requirements and maintain
visual design concepts.
1. Employ registered professional engineer, licensed to practice structural
engineering in jurisdiction where Project is located, to engineer each component
of support systems.
C. Attachment Considerations: Account for site peculiarities and expansion and

contraction movements so there is no possibility of loosening, weakening and
fracturing connection between units and building structure or between components
themselves.
1. Make modifications only to meet field conditioned and ensure fitting of system
components.

2. Obtain Architect's approval of modifications and for connections to building

elements at locations other than indicated on Drawings.
D. Support Structure: Locate support members in order to maintain scheduled ceiling

planes indicated on Drawings. Make possible attachment of equipment support rails at
any point along support system without drilling or welding into system.
1. Ceiling Anchorage: For framing scheduled to be mounted to ceilings, attach to
ceiling by means of imbedded concrete inserts, through bolts or direct
attachment to structural framing.
2. Rigidly fix and brace support structure against sway.
E. Loading: Design support structure to support vertical load, maximum eccentricity of

vertical load from support point, transverse force acting on longitudinal rail, longitudinal
force acting on longitudinal rail, and deflection criteria established for each piece of
supported equipment.
1. If loads are not defined for piece of supported equipment assume concentrated
load of 1500 pounds at any point along equipment rails. Concentrated load is
maximum encountered by positioning of equipment at extremities of its travel
(maximum load configuration).
2. Safety Factor: Design support structure for minimum safety factor of three based
on ultimate strength under static loading conditions. Structure shall not deflect
more than 1/720 span vertically or horizontally when maximum loading conditions
of equipment operation are applied on either rail.
F. Interface with Adjacent Systems: Integrate design and connections with adjacent
construction.
1. Accommodate allowable tolerances and deflections for structural members in
installation.
2. Coordinate with reflected ceiling plan and other items indicated to be placed in or
above ceiling to ensure support system does not interfere with or dislocate other
items.
2.3 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless
otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work,
provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
2.4 SLOTTED CHANNEL FRAMING
A. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with
MFMA-4.
1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches, with flange edges returned toward web
with 9/16 inch wide slotted holes in webs at 2 inches on center.
2. Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A1008/A1008M, commercial steel, Type B or
structural steel, Grade 33
3. Metal Thickness: As required by design, but not less than 0.0528-inch minimum
thickness; coated with rust-inhibitive, baked-on, acrylic enamel for interior
applications, and hot-dip galvanized after fabrication for exterior applications.

4. Width, Depth, Thickness: As required by design to meet structural performance.
B. Materials:
1. Steel Sheet Structural Quality: ASTM A 570, Grade 33.
2. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Quality SQ, Grade 33, G90.
3. Hot-Rolled Steel Bar: ASTM A 575.
4. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 569.
C. Finishes:
1. Framing System Components: Manufacturer’s standard corrosion resistant
factory-painted acrylic enamel finish.
2. Color:
a. Ceiling Suspension System: Matte black.
b. All Other Applications: Manufacturer’s standard.
3. Hardware: Electro-galvanized.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless steel fasteners for
exterior use, and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633 or
ASTM F1941/F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, for interior use. Select fasteners for type, grade,
and class required.
B. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts)

complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches by length indicated with anchor straps or
studs not less than 3 inches long at not more than 8 inches o.c. Provide with temporary
filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with
ASTM B633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
decorative formed metal.
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for
installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment,
and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and
measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Do not weld, cut, or
abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication
and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where

metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide
threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through
bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF SLOTTED CHANNEL FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. Support Systems: Install in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and

manufacturer’s installation instructions and recommendations.
B. Structural Assembly: Install supporting framework plumb and true.
C. Installation Tolerances:
1. Mount surfaces of support structure horizontal within tolerance of 1/32 inch in
24 inches and within 1/16 inch in 18 foot length.
2. Elevation of one rail mounting surface to other shall be within 1/16 inch in any
24 inches length of rails.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Division 01 Section “Execution.”
END OF SECTION

SECTION 05 50 00
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports.
2. Steel angle track supports for overhead coiling and for operable partitions.
3. Steel tube reinforcement for low partitions.
4. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment, where loads
exceed the capacity of slotted channel framing.
5. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not
6. Engineered aluminum framing and supports for countertops and vanities.
7. Fabricated metal swing gates for exterior enclosures.
8. Bollards
9. Lintels and shelf angles
10. Miscellaneous steel trim.
11. Elevator hoistway fabrications:
a. Machine beams and hoist beams.
b. Steel framing and supports for elevator guide rails.
c. Steel shapes for supporting elevator door sills.
d. Steel grate covers for elevator sump pit.
e. Elevator pit ladder.
12. Roof access ladders
13. Ladder fall arrest system
14. Crawl space access ladders
15. Ships ladder to access mezzanine
16. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in
other Sections.
17. Swing hook strut support system for OFOI swings at Motor Lab for attachment to
above-ceiling joists.
B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:
1. Loose steel lintels.
2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts
indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.
3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they
are not specified in other Sections.
Metal Fabrications 05 50 00 - 1
1. Section 04 20 00 " Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and
other items built into unit masonry.
2. Section 05 12 00 "Structural Steel Framing" for steel framing, supports, elevator
machine beams, hoist beams, divider beams, door frames, and other steel items
attached to the structural-steel framing.
3. Section 05 43 00 “Slotted Channel Framing”.

1. Fasteners.
2. Shop primers.
3. Shrinkage-resisting grout.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations,
sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and
accessory items.
1. Steel framing and supports for operable partitions.
2. Structural steel door frames for overhead doors.
3. Steel framing and supports for equipment.
4. Steel tube reinforcement for low partitions.
5. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
6. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not
7. Elevator machine beams, hoist beams.
8. Steel framing and supports for elevator guide rails.
9. Steel shapes for supporting elevator door sills.
10. Steel grate covers for elevator sump pit.
11. Metal ladders and fall arrest system.
12. Shelf angles.
13. Ship ladders
14. Metal bollards.
15. Pipe and downspout guards.
16. Loose bearing and leveling plates not specified in other Sections.
A. Delegated-Design Submittals:
1. For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and
design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation, licensed in the state
where the Project is located.
2. For structural performance of gate frameworks, including analysis data signed

and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer's experience with providing delegated-

design engineering services of the kind indicated, including documentation that
engineer is licensed in the jurisdiction in which Project is located.
C. Mill Certificates: Signed by stainless steel manufacturers, certifying that products

furnished comply with requirements.
D. Welding certificates.
E. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop

primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
F. Research Reports: For post-installed anchors.
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with the

following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, floor slabs, decks, and other
construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before
fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

40 00 "Quality Requirements," using performance requirements and design criteria
indicated.
1. Design Calculations: Submit design calculations for the following:
a. Ladders.
b. Gratings and supports.
c. Partial height partitions.
d. Gate frameworks.
B. Structural Performance, Gate frameworks shall withstand the design wind loads and
stresses for gate height(s) and under exposure conditions indicated according to
ASCE/SEI 7.
1. Design Wind Load: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/240 of the span.
C. Structural Performance of Ladders: Ladders shall withstand the effects of loads and
stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3.
D. Gratings and Supports: Provide sizes and spacing of bars as required to support a
minimum live load of 100 lbs. per sq. ft., or concentrated load of 2,000 lbf, whichever
produces the greater stress.
E. Support for Partial Height Partitions:

1. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.
2. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.
3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
4. Maximum deflection of L/240.
F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling,
opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other
detrimental effects.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.2 METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless
otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work,
provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise
indicated.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless steel fasteners for
exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633 or
ASTM F1941/F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type,
grade, and class required.
1. Provide stainless steel fasteners for fastening aluminum or stainless steel.
B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A307, Grade A; with hex
nuts, ASTM A563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade A325, Type 3,
heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563, Grade DH3, heavy-hex carbon-steel
nuts; and where indicated, flat washers.
D. Stainless Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless steel bolts,
ASTM F593; with hex nuts, ASTM F594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy
Group 1.
E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A563;
and, where indicated, flat washers.
1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item
being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
F. Anchors, General: Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the
load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when
installed in concrete, as determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E488/E488M,
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
G. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded or wedge type unless otherwise

indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A47/A47M malleable iron or
ASTM A27/A27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip
galvanized per ASTM F2329/F2329M.
H. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply
with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941/F1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy
Group 1 stainless steel bolts, ASTM F593, and nuts, ASTM F594.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Shop Primers: As specified in Section 09 96 59 “High-Performance Coatings,”

compatible with finish paint systems indicated.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A780/A780M and compatible with
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible.

Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use
connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for
reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to
a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or
rough areas on exposed surfaces.
C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation
or otherwise impairing work.
D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended
so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches
that of adjacent surface.
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips
flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least
conspicuous.
G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to
exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware,
screws, and similar items.
I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space
anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated
loads.
J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with
integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch
embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units
and 24 inches on center unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed
to complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless
otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as
necessary to receive adjacent construction.
1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.
2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.
C. Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes
indicated with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as indicated. Drill or
punch bottom flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes
where indicated on operable partition Shop Drawings.
D. Partial-Height Partition Supports: At Contractor’s option provide one of the following:

1. Fabricate supports for partial height partition supports from steel shapes of size
required to limit the specified deflection with attached bearing plates, anchors,
and braces.
2. Manufactured minimum 14 gage steel tube and 3/8-inch thick steel base plate
assembly, of height required to brace less than full-height, free-standing gypsum
board partitions, with pre-punched holes for attachment or anchorage to concrete
subfloor substrate.
a. Acceptable Products:
1) NoFlex Corporation, Huntington Beach, CA.
2) “R-15” bank rail support post as manufactured by RACO.
E. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer, galvanize exterior
components or where indicated on Drawings.
2.7 STEEL ANGLE SUPPORTS FOR OVERHEAD DOORS
A. Fabricate door track supports for overhead doors from continuous steel angles of sizes
indicated with anchors and braces as required to secure angles to wall construction.
Continuously weld exposed joints.
B. Shop Finishes for Support Angles:

1. Interior Overhead Doors: Shop prime paint.
2. Prepare to receive high-performance coatings specified in Section 09 96 59.
2.8 SHELF ANGLES
A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to
concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced
not more than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners.
2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open
joint approximately 2 inches larger than expansion or control joint.
B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup
masonry and concrete.
C. Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls or where otherwise indicated.
D. Prime shelf angles located in interior walls with zinc-rich primer. Prepare to receive
high-performance coatings specified in Section 09 96 59.
E. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to
cast-in-place concrete.
2.9 METAL LADDERS
A. General:
1. Comply with ANSI A14.3 unless otherwise indicated.
2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.
B. Steel Ladders:
1. Space siderails 18 inches apart unless otherwise indicated.

2. Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges.
3. Ladder Rungs: Serrated steel channel with slip-resistant finish, and as follows:
a. Material: Carbon steel, hot rolled pickled and oiled (HRPO), mill finish,
0.1196 inches thick (11 gage), with 2-rows of sheared-hole serrations.
b. Minimum Load Capacity: 515 lbs (234 kg) concentrated load at mid-span,
for 48-inch (1220 mm) length.
c. Size: 1-1/4 inches (31.8 mm) wide by 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) channel depth.
d. Basis of Design: “TRACTION TREAD” ladder rung plank, model number
M6LRST2448 as manufactured by McNichols.
4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
5. Provide platforms as indicated fabricated from welded or pressure-locked steel
bar grating, supported by steel angles. Limit openings in gratings to no more
than 1/2 inch in least dimension.
6. Provide self-closing safety gate at the top of all ladders.
7. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with
welded or bolted steel brackets.
8. Galvanize exterior ladders and ladders in elevator pits, including brackets and
fasteners.
9. Prime interior ladders, including brackets and fasteners, unless noted otherwise.
10. Label load rating at access points for platforms and ladders.
C. Ladder Fall Arrest System: Provide OSHA compliant system where indicated and
where required by Code. Coordinate ladder fabrication for attachment and loading
requirements. Provide supports where required for complete installation.
D. Ship’s Ladder: ANSI A14.3
1. Basis of Design: Model H70 (370)-70o Roof Hatch Access Ladder by AALCO
2. Angle: Nominal 70 degrees or as shown
3. Vertical Height Parallel to Wall: Nominal 14’-8” or as shown
4. Distance of ladder feet from face of wall: Nominal 70 inches.
5. Description: Fabricated from 6061-T6 aluminum shapes. Furnish with handrails
and brackets. Tread depth: 4 inches. Tread spacing: 12 inches on center. Tread
width: 24 inches. Handrails: 1-1/4 inch diameter serrated aluminum tubing with
cast aluminum fittings. Finish: Clear anodized or as selected by Architect.
2.10 ELEVATOR PIT SUMP COVERS
A. Metal Bar-Grating: Form elevator sump pit cover to configurations shown from metal
bar grating; fabricate to comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual."
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide metal bar
grating products by one of the following:
a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation.
b. All American Grating, Inc.
c. Barnett/Bates Corp.
d. IKG Industries; a Harsco Company.
e. Ohio Gratings, Inc.

2. Fabricate from welded steel grating with 1-1/4-by-3/16-inch bearing bars at 15/16
inch o.c. and crossbars at 4 inches o.c., NAAMM designation: W-15-4 (1-1/4 x
3/16) STEEL.
3. Surface: Serrated.
4. Finish: Galvanized.
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of
profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter
corners and use concealed field splices where possible.
B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and

installation with other work.
1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or
masonry construction.
C. Galvanize and shop prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim. Prepare to receive high-
performance coatings specified in Section 09 96 59.
2.12 METAL BOLLARDS
A. Fabricate metal bollards from 6 inch diameter Schedule 40 steel pipe unless otherwise
shown.
1. Fill bollards with concrete grout, minimum 2500 psi compressive strength. Form
top of concrete in dome shape above top of steel.
B. Surface-Mount on In-Place Construction: Fabricate bollards with 3/8-inch- thick, steel

baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill baseplates at all four corners for 3/4-inch
anchor bolts.
1. Where bollards are to be anchored to sloping concrete slabs, angle baseplates
for plumb alignment of bollards.
C. Within Grade / Paving: Fabricate bollards to extend a minimum of 36-inches below

grade / paving with four (4) 12-inch long pieces of #4 rebar welded to each side of pipe.
D. Galvanize and shop prime steel bollards. Prepare to receive high-performance

coatings specified in Section 09 96 59.
2.13 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or
concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
B. Galvanize bearing and leveling plates.
2.14 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES
A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items
supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each
unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in
concrete.
2.15 FRAMING AND SUPPORTS FOR VANITIES AND COUNTERTOPS
A. ADA- compliant, fully welded extruded aluminum bracket system, engineered for
vanities and countertops shown.
B. Basis of Design: Rakks ADA Compliant Vanity Support Brackets, EH-Series, by

Rangine Corporation. Sizes and models to suit conditions shown.
1. Load Capacity: 450 pounds per bracket. Locate end brackets within 12 inches of
edge of vanities and countertops and space at not greater than 32 inches on
center, centered at studs. Ensure that cold-formed metal framing specified in
Section 05 40 00 supports walls to receive vanities and countertops.
2. Finish: Mill finish aluminum
2.16 SWING HOOK
A. Swing hook strut support system for OFOI swings at Motor Lab for attachment to
above-ceiling joists:
1. Basis of Design: Southpaw Prefab Joist 3-6 Ft. Drop Ceiling Kit Model 7061 by
Southpaw Enterprises. System includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Strut
b. Threaded Rod
c. Brackets
d. Fasteners, hardware, and connectors for attachment and support of OFOI
swings.
2.17 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURE GATES
A. General: Form gates from steel tubes and shapes of fully welded construction and as
indicated on Drawings, with intermediate framing to support scheduled hardware and
formed metal panel cladding.
1. Gate Configuration: Double leaf.
2. Gate Frame Height: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Gate Opening Width: As indicated on Drawings.
4. Finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA Guideline 1, Finish #2 - completely
sanded joint, some undercutting and pinholes okay.
5. Gate Finish: High performance coating as specified in Section 09 96 00.
a. Color: Match formed metal panels
B. Galvanized-Steel Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from square tubes of size
and configuration as required to meet performance requirements, but not less than 3
by 3 inches formed from not less than 0.1875-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet and
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
1. Frame Corner Construction: Fully welded and 3/8-inch- diameter, adjustable
truss rods or fully welded steel bars for panels 4 feet wide or wider.
2. Additional Rails and Pickets: Provide as indicated, complying with formed metal
panel manufacturer’s requirements for fastener spacing required to comply with
design wind loads, but not less than 2 by 2 inches formed from not less than
0.1875-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet and hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
3. Infill: Concealed-fastener, flush metal wall panels, MP-1 as specified in Section
07 42 13.13 Formed Metal Wall Panels.
C. Hardware: Equip gates with the following:

1. Hinges: Grade 1, suitable for exterior use.
a. Function: 6-inch tear-drop profile, with antifriction brass washer.
b. Material: Wrought steel, forged steel, cast steel, or malleable iron;
galvanized.
c. Basis of Design: FES150 as manufactured by Baer Hardware.
2. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13, Grade 1, suitable for exterior use.
a. Function: F17 – Deadlock.
b. Basis of Design: Schlage L460 single cylinder, keyed entry mortise lock
dead bolt, Model #L460P630.
c. Finish: Satin stainless steel.
3. Mounting Box: Configuration necessary to enclose locks. Fabricate from 1/8-
inch- thick, steel plate; galvanized.
4. Gate Pulls: 8 inches (center to center) by 3 inches3/4-inch- diameter, round steel
bars, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Coordinate final fabricated size with
formed metal panels to ensure mounting points occur between flutes, and tight to
gate frame. Provide 2 pulls per gate leaf.
5. Keepers for each gate leaf more than 4 feet wide. Provide center gate stops and
cane bolts for pairs of gates.
a. Cane Bolts: Provide for inactive leaf of pairs of gates. Fabricated from 3/4-
inch- diameter, round steel bars, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
Finish to match gates. Provide galvanized-steel pipe strikes to receive
cane bolts in both open and closed positions.
D. Concrete for Gate Post Footings: As specified in Section 03 30 53 “Miscellaneous

Cast-in-Place Concrete.”
2.18 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend
into surrounding surface.
2.19 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A153/A153M

for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A123/A123M for other steel and iron
products.
1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint
adhesion.
2. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: Comply with Section 09 96 59.
B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be
embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Shop prime with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is indicated.
C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated
below:
1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,
"Commercial Blast Cleaning."
3. Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 09 96 59 "High-
Performance Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
4. Other Steel Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
5. Galvanized-Steel Items: SSPC-SP 16, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning of Coated and
Uncoated Galvanized Steel, Stainless Steels, and Non-Ferrous Metals."
D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application
Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where

metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide
threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through
bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.
B. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact
with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:
1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint.
2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being
supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on
Shop Drawings.
B. Anchor supports for operable partitions and overhead doors securely to, and rigidly
brace from, building structure.
C. Anchor shelf angles securely to existing construction with through-bolts.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF METAL BOLLARDS
A. Surface-Mount on In-Place Construction: Anchor bollards to horizontal construction

with expansion anchors. Provide four 3/4-inch bolts at each bollard unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Embed anchor bolts at least 4 inches in concrete.
B. Within Grade / Paving: Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and
align bollards in holes 3 inches above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and
vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete
has cured.
C. Bollards Indicated to Receive Concrete Fill: Fill bollards solidly with concrete,
mounding top surface to shed water.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and

roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing
members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove
wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before
packing with shrinkage-resistant grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces
and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
3.5 SWING HOOK
A. Swing hook strut support system for OFOI swings at Motor Lab for attachment to
above-ceiling joists:
1. Locate exactly where swing is required. Coordinate with Owner.
2. Follow kit manufacturer’s printed instructions.
3. Prepare ceiling panels to uninterrupted installation of swing assembly.
4. Install ceiling panels with threaded rod extending through hole in panel.
5. When lubricating assembly, protect ceiling panels to prevent damage or soiling of
panels.
3.6 GATE INSTALLATION
A. Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts in firm, undisturbed soil.
Excavate holes to a diameter of not less than 5 times post size and a depth of not less
than 30 inches plus 3 inches for each foot or fraction of a foot that fence height
exceeds 4 feet.
B. Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil.
1. Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and
hold in position during setting with concrete or mechanical devices.
2. Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation.
Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter.
a. Concealed Concrete: Top 2 inches below concrete paving subgrade grade
to allow covering with surface material. Slope top surface of concrete to
drain water away from post.
C. Install gates, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach
hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in
concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware and lubricate for smooth operation.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp,
excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or
malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that cane bolts and locks
engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.
B. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.
3.8 REPAIRS
A. Touchup Painting:
1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
a. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 05 51 13
METAL PAN STAIR ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Preassembled steel stairs with precast portland cement terrazzo treads and risers
with abrasive strips.
2. Stainless steel tube railings attached to metal stairs.
3. Stainless steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs.
A. Product Data: Technical data for metal pan stairs including:
1. Precast portland cement terrazzo stair treads.

2. Abrasive strip embeds.
3. Woven wire mesh.
4. Welded wire mesh.
5. Paint products.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
1. Show detailed construction, metal thickness, jointing, methods of installation,

fastening and supports location and sizes of welds, anchoring, hangers and other
pertinent data.
2. Submit plans and section of steel stairs, drawn to scale at not less than 1/4 inch (6
mm) per foot (3005 mm). Where conditions in three or more consecutive stories
are exactly alike, drawings may be broken and noted to include duplicate runs
3. Indicate sizes of metal sections, thickness of metals, profiles, holes, and field
joints.
4. Include plan at each level.
5. Indicate locations of anchors, weld plates, and blocking for attachment of wall
mounted handrails.
6. Indicate profile and dimensions of precast terrazzo treads.
C. Samples: Submit samples for each type and finish of riser and tread.
D. Delegated Design Submittal: Submit data for stair assembly, railings and guards, and
precast terrazzo treads, indicated to comply with performance requirements and design
criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
Metal Pan Stair Assemblies 05 51 13 - 1

A. Qualification Data: Submit professional engineer's experience with providing delegated

design engineering services of the kind indicated, including documentation that engineer
is licensed in the State in which Project is located.
C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: Certification from manufacturers of topcoats applied over

shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M Structural Welding Code - Steel.

2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at site.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with
paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings,

templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts,
anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or
masonry. Ensure delivery to site in time for installation.
C. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they do not
encroach on required stair width and are within the fire resistance rated stair enclosure.
D. Schedule installation of railings and guards so wall attachments are made to completed
walls.
1. Do not support railings and guards temporarily by means that do not satisfy
structural performance requirements.
A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification.
1. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other
supports and spacers.
2. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.
3. Do not store materials on structure that contributes to distortion, damage, or
overload to members or supporting structures.

a. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Delegated Design: Design stair assemblies, railings and guards, and precast terrazzo
treads, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional
engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads
and loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. (4.79 kN/sq. m).

2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf (1.33 kN) applied on an area of 4 sq. in. (2580 sq.
mm).
4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in
addition to loads specified above.
5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch (6.4
mm), whichever is less.
C. Structural Performance of Railings: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads
and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.

b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq.

ft. (0.093 sq. m).
b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
3. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes.
a. Temperature Change: 120 degrees F, ambient; 180 degrees F, material

surfaces.
D. Seismic Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. Component Importance Factor: 1.0.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Metal Surfaces: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.
1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
D. Steel Pipe for Railings and Guards: ASTM A53/A53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A,
Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by
structural loads.
1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
E. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M,
F. Uncoated, Cold Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, either commercial steel,
Type B, or structural steel, Grade 25 (Grade 170), unless another grade is required by
design loads; exposed.
G. Uncoated, Hot Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, either commercial steel,
Type B, or structural steel, Grade 30 (Grade 205), unless another grade is required by
design loads.
H. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating, either commercial
steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 33 (Grade 230), unless another grade is required
by design loads.
I. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6.
J. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.
K. Stainless Steel:
1. Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.

2. Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 304.
3. Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8 or CF 20.
4. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
5. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
6. Woven Wire Mesh: Intermediate crimp, pattern as shown, 2 inch (50 mm) woven
wire mesh, made from 0.135 inch (3.5 mm) nominal diameter wire complying with
ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304.
L. Fasteners: Provide zinc plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or
ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5
where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

1. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A
(ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M);
and, where indicated, flat washers.
2. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts,
ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.
a. Provide mechanically deposited or hot dip, zinc coated anchor bolts for stairs
indicated to be galvanized and stairs indicated to be shop primed with zinc
rich primer.
3. Post Installed Anchors: Torque controlled expansion anchors capable of

sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when
installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in
concrete, determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by
a qualified independent testing agency.
a. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon steel components zinc plated to

comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5,
M. Accessories:
1. Handrail Wall Brackets: Cast stainless steel, center of rail 2-1/2 inches from face
of wall.
2. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
N. Miscellaneous Materials:
1. Universal Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast curing, lead free and chromate free
universal modified alkyd primer, organic zinc rich primer, complying with SSPC-
Paint 20 and compatible with topcoat. Use primer containing pigments that make
it easily distinguishable from zinc rich primer.
a. Product: Provide 10-99 (red) or 10-09 (gray) by Tnemec Company.
2. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for use over zinc coated
metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.
3. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in
steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
a. Product: Provide Tneme-Zinc 90-97 by Tnemec Company.
2.3 PRECAST TREADS
A. Precast Concrete Terrazzo Treads and Risers: As scheduled in Finish Schedule on

Drawings.
B. Abrasive Strips: Three line abrasive inserts at nosings. Silicon carbide or aluminum
oxide, or combination of both, in epoxy resin binder and set in channel.
1. Width: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).

2. Depth: As required by terrazzo thickness.

3. Length: 4 inches (100 mm) less than stair width.

4. Color: Selected by Architect.
C. Precast Treads: Provide mechanical anchoring devices recommended by precast stair

tread fabricator for anchorage and support of units for conditions of installation and
support.
D. Sealer: Slip and stain resistant, penetrating type sealer, chemically neutral; does not
affect terrazzo color or physical properties; and recommended by sealer manufacturer.
1. Surface Friction: Not less than 0.42 wet according to ANSI A326.3.
2. Acid Base Properties: With pH factor between 7 and 10.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings,
clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor
stairs and platforms on supporting structure.
1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated.

2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
B. Assembled Stairs: Shop assemble stairs greatest extent possible. Disassemble units as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
coordinated installation.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a
radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or
D. Form bent metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
E. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
F. Weld connections. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop
strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Remove welding flux immediately.
3. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA Voluntary
Joint Finish Standards for Type 1 welds.
G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat head
(countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least
conspicuous.

2.5 STEEL FRAMED STAIR FABRICATION
A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for
Fixed Metal Stairs in NAAMM AMP 510 Metal Stairs Manual, Architectural Class, unless
more stringent requirements are indicated.
B. Stair Framing:
1. Fabricate stringers of steel plates or steel channels or steel rectangular tubes as

a. Stringer Size: As required to comply with performance requirements

Indicated on Drawings.
b. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel and rectangular tube stringers.
c. Finish: Shop primed.
2. Construct platforms of steel plate or channel or rectangular tube headers and

miscellaneous framing members as required to comply with performance
requirements and as indicated on Drawings.
a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel and rectangular tube framing.
b. Finish: Shop primed.
3. Weld stringers to headers; weld framing members to stringers and headers.

4. Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum board shaft wall assemblies, provide
hanger rods or struts to support landings from floor construction above or below.
a. Locate hanger rods and struts where they do not encroach on required stair
width and are within the fire resistance rated stair enclosure.
5. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts
designed for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry.
C. Metal Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown
from steel sheet of thickness necessary to comply with performance requirements, but
not less than 0.067 inch (1.7 mm).
1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated cold or hot rolled steel sheet unless otherwise indicated.
2. Steel Sheet: Galvanized steel sheet , where indicated.
3. Directly weld metal pans to stringers; locate welds on top of subtreads where they
are concealed by concrete fill. Do not weld risers to stringers.
4. Attach risers and subtreads to stringers with brackets made of steel angles or bars.
Weld brackets to stringers and attach metal pans to brackets by welding, riveting,
or bolting.
5. Shape metal pans to include nosing integral with riser.
6. Provide subplatforms of configuration indicated or the same as subtreads. Weld
subplatforms to platform framing.
a. Smooth Soffit Construction: Construct subplatforms with flat metal under

surfaces to produce smooth soffits.

2.6 STAIR RAILINGS AND GUARDS
A. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 05 52 13.
B. Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings and guards to comply with requirements indicated
for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of
member, post spacings, wall bracket spacing, and anchorage, but not less than that
needed to withstand indicated loads.
1. Rails and Posts: 1-5/8 inch diameter top and bottom rails and 1-1/2 inch square
posts.
2. Fabricate newels of square steel tubing and provide newel caps as shown.
3. Mesh Infill: Woven or Welded wire mesh crimped into 1 inch by 1/2 inch by 1/8
inch steel channel frames. Orient wire mesh with patterns shown.
C. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at

connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around
at connections, including at fittings.
1. Fabricate connections exposed to weather to exclude water. Provide weep holes

where water may accumulate internally.
4. Remove flux immediately.
5. Finish welds to comply with NOMMA Voluntary Joint Finish Standards for Type 1
welds: no evidence of a welded joint shown in NAAMM AMP 521.
D. Form changes in direction of railings:
1. As detailed.
2. By radius bends of radius indicated or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings of
radius indicated.
E. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for
each repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout
entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed
surfaces of components.
1. Rails may be bent at corners, rail returns, and wall returns, instead of using
prefabricated fittings.
F. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
G. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close
ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less.
H. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated.
I. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges,
miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to

other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or
masonry work.
1. For galvanized railings, provide galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves,

and other ferrous metal components.
2. For nongalvanized railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets,
fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry
and concrete construction.
3. Provide type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded
hanger bolt and that provides 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) clearance from inside face of
handrail to finished wall surface.
J. Filler: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or suitably crush resistant material, where
necessary to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size
fillers to suit wall finish thickness to produce adequate bearing area to prevent bracket
rotation and overstressing of substrate.
2.7 FINISHES
A. Finish metal stairs after assembly.
B. Galvanizing: Hot dip galvanize components to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel
and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for steel and iron products.
adhesion.
2. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished work, unless indicated to
remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with
SSPC-SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning.
D. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with
galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field,
and Maintenance Painting of Steel, for shop painting.
E. Field Finish: Refer to finish schedule and Section 09 96 59 for field applied High-
Performance Coatings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify elevations of floors, bearing surfaces and locations of bearing plates, and other
embedments for compliance with requirements.
1. For wall mounted railings, verify locations of concealed reinforcement within

gypsum board and plaster assemblies.

B. Proceed with installation after correcting unsatisfactory conditions.
3.2 INSTALLING METAL PAN STAIR ASSEMBLY
A. Fastening to In Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where

necessary for securing metal stairs to in place construction. Include threaded fasteners
for concrete and masonry inserts, through bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from
established lines and levels and free of rack.
C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into
concrete unless otherwise indicated.
1. Grouted Baseplates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond

reducing materials and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates.
a. Clean bottom surface of plates.

b. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts.
c. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and
plumbed.
d. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of
plate before packing with grout.
e. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids
remain.
1) Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure.

2) Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for
shrinkage resistant grouts.
D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections
that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping
size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot
dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
F. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding.
G. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Section 03 30 00.
1. Install abrasive nosings with anchors fully embedded in concrete. Center nosings
on tread width.
H. Precast Concrete Stair Treads: Install precast concrete treads with adhesive supplied
by manufacturer.
I. Precast Terrazzo Stair Treads: Install precast terrazzo stair treads using method
recommended in writing by NTMA and manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. Comply
with requirements of selections listed in Finish Schedule.

1. Do not install units that are chipped, cracked, discolored, or improperly finished.
2. Apply abrasive strips to each stair tread.
3. Apply sealer to each stair tread in accordance with sealer manufacturer’s
recommendations.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF RAILINGS AND GUARDS
A. Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
Space posts at spacing indicated or required by design loads. Plumb posts in each
direction within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.
1. Align rails and guards so variations from level for horizontal members and
variations from parallel with rake of stairs for sloping members do not exceed 1/4
inch in 12 feet.
2. Secure posts, rail ends. and guards to building construction:
a. Anchor posts to steel by welding or bolting to steel supporting members.

b. Anchor handrail ends to concrete and masonry with steel round flanges
welded to rail ends and anchored with postinstalled anchors and bolts.
B. Install railing gates level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference.
1. Attach hardware using tamper resistant or concealed means.

2. Adjust hardware for smooth operation.
C. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Locate brackets at spacing required to support
structural loads. Secure wall brackets to building construction as required to comply with
performance requirements.
1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled in expansion shields and
hanger or lag bolts.
2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
3. For steel framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into fire retardant treated
wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing
members.
3.4 REPAIR, ADJUSTING, AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for
shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0 mil (0.05 mm) dry film thickness.
repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 05 52 13
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Steel pipe and tube railings attached to walls.
2. Stainless steel pipe and tube railings attached to walls and floor supported.
3. Infill panels, balusters, and fittings.
A. Product Data: Technical data including manufactured product lines of mechanically

connected railings, railing brackets, and accessory materials including but not limited to
grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
C. Samples: Submit 24 inch (610 mm) sample of handrail showing bends, elbows, tee, wall
bracket, escutcheon, and end stop for each type of exposed finish required.
D. Delegated Design Submittal: Submit analysis data including structural design

calculations for specified load requirements signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for preparation.
A. Welding Certificates: Submit current certificates for each welder certifying it had passed
AWS qualifications testing for welding process.
B. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that

products furnished comply with requirements.
C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop

primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
D. Product Test Reports: Submit test reports performed by a qualified testing agency,
according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935 for handrails and railings.
E. Evaluation Reports: Submit ICC-ES report for post installed anchors, from ICC-ES.
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M Structural Welding Code - Steel.
2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.
Pipe and Tube Railings 05 52 13 - 1

3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel.
B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: Licensed to practice in state where project is

located and is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single
manufacturer.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with
paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates,

and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry.
Deliver to project site in time for installation.
C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made to completed walls. Do not support
railings temporarily by means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.
A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous
with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer experienced in the design

of railings, including attachment to building construction.
B. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall

withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits
and under conditions indicated:
1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq.
ft. (0.093 sq. m).
b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

C. Pipe Railing Standard: Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI/NAAMM AMP 521
Pipe and Railing Systems Manual.
D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating
metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
1. Temperature Change: 120 degrees F (67 degrees C), ambient; 180 degrees F
(100 degrees C, material surfaces).
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel Pipe and Tube Railings:

1. Basis of Design: FOLD by VIVA Railings, LLC.
a. Pattern, Infill Panels: PG-08 CHRILI powder coated steel
2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements
established by Basis of Design, provide products by one of the following:
a. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc.
b. CR Laurence: Blumcraft
c. Livers Bronze Company
d. Stainless Fabricators, Inc.
e. Kane Sterling (Dula) Architectural Products, Inc. / KaneSterling.
f. Tri Tech, Inc.
g. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc.
h. Tuttle Railing Systems.
2.3 METALS
A. Metal Surfaces: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller
marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and
finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded
hanger bolt and that provides 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) clearance from inside face of
handrail to finished wall surface.
C. Steel and Iron:

1. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.
2. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight
(Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.
Galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
3. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
4. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron,
ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Stainless Steel:
1. Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.
2. Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 304.
3. Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8 or CF 20.

4. Plate and Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
5. Woven Wire Mesh: Intermediate crimp, pattern shown, 2 inch (50 mm) woven wire
mesh, made from 0.141 inch (3.57 mm) diameter wire complying with
ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304.
E. Fasteners:
1. Ungalvanized Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633
or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.
2. Hot Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless steel or hot dip zinc coated steel
fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating.
3. Stainless Steel Railings: Type 304 stainless steel fasteners.
4. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and
texture, of railings.
5. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type,
grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to
other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
6. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:
a. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for
attaching to other work, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for
attaching to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the
standard fastening method for railings indicated.
c. Provide tamper resistant square or hex socket flat head machine screws for
exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
7. Post Installed Anchors: Torque controlled expansion anchors capable of
sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed
in unit masonry and 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as
determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
a. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon steel components zinc-plated to
comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5,
F. Miscellaneous Materials:
1. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for
metal alloy welded.
a. For stainless steel railings, provide type and alloy recommended by producer
of metal to be welded and necessary for color match, strength, and
compatibility in fabricated items.
2. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Solution of acid and detergents designed to
remove grease and oil residue from metal surfaces resulting in clean, lightly etched
surface promoting adhesion of coating system.
3. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint complying with SSPC-
Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
4. Universal Shop Primer: Fast curing, lead and chromate free, universal modified
alkyd primer and compatible with topcoat. Use primer containing pigments that
make it easily distinguishable from zinc rich primer.
5. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc
coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.
a. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-
rich primer.

6. Epoxy Zinc Rich Primer: Zinc rich primer compatible with topcoat.
7. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc
coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.
8. Bituminous Paint: Cold applied asphalt emulsion complying with
ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
9. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout
specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member
sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to
support structural loads.
B. Shop assemble railings to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that
maintain structural value of joined pieces.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a
radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or
D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
E. Fabricate connections that are exposed to weather to excludes water. Provide weep
holes where water may accumulate. Locate weep holes in inconspicuous locations.
F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar
items.
G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded and nonwelded connections as indicated.
H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use

fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
3. Remove flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining
surfaces.
I. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and

fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
J. Form Changes in Direction: By radius bends of radius indicated on drawings or by

inserting prefabricated elbow fittings of radius indicated.
1. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature
for each repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member

throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming

exposed surfaces of components.
K. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
L. Provide wall returns at ends of wall mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close
ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less.
M. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous
fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise
indicated.
1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide
crush resistant fillers or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to
structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.
N. Provide inserts and anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry
work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings.
Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
O. Woven Wire Mesh Infill Panels: Fabricate infill panels from woven wire mesh crimped
into 1 inch by 1/2 inch by 1/8 inch (25 mm by 13 mm by 3 mm) metal channel frames.
Make wire mesh and frames from same metal as railings in which they are installed.
1. Orient wire mesh with as indicated on Drawings.
P. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at
edge of open sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Steel and Iron:

1. Galvanized Railings:
a. Hot dip galvanize exterior and where indicated steel railings, including
hardware, after fabrication.
b. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot dip galvanized railings.
c. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot dip galvanized hardware.
d. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with
paint adhesion.
e. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished work, unless
indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off
smooth.
f. For galvanized railings, provide hot dip galvanized fittings, brackets,
fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components.
g. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing,
thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter,
and treat with etching cleaner.
2. Nongalvanized Steel Railings: Provide nongalvanized ferrous metal fittings,
brackets, fasteners, and sleeves; however, galvanize anchors to be embedded in
exterior concrete or masonry.
3. Shop-applied powder coat primer:
a. At ferrous metal: Zinc-rich
b. At galvanized metal: Manufacturer’s standard galvanizing primer.

4. Shop Powder Coat Finish at Infill Panels: AAMA 2605 FEVE.

a. Color: Selected by Architect.
B. Stainless Steel:
1. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
2. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish
indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.
3. Stainless Steel Tubing Finishes:
a. 180 Grit Polished Finish: Uniform, directionally textured finish.
4. Stainless Steel Sheet and Plate Finishes:
a. Directional Satin Finish: ASTM A 489/A 480M, No. 4.
5. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded
foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine field conditions for acceptability and ready to receive work.
B. Attached Railings: Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to
receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements are clearly marked
for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.
C. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
B. Furnish items necessary to cast into concrete, embedded in masonry, or placed in

partitions with setting templates.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately
in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and
free of rack.
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that are coated or
finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical
or other means without further cutting or fitting.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m).
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from
parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch
in 12 feet (6 mm in 3.5 m).
C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating
metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

1. Coat, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint, concealed surfaces of aluminum that
are in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals.
D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
E. Fastening to In Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where

necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in place
construction.
3.4 RAILING CONNECTIONS
A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting

railing components. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement
filler colored to match finish of railings.
B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing
components. Comply with requirements for welded connections whether welding is
performed in the shop or in the field.
C. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than
required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip joint internal sleeve extending
2 inches (50 mm) beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side,
and locate joint within 6 inches (150 mm) of post.
3.5 ANCHORING POSTS
A. Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts are
inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's
B. Form or core drill holes not less than 5 inches (125 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (20 mm)
larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material,
insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's
C. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, welded to post after placing
anchoring material.
D. Leave anchorage joint exposed with anchoring material flush with adjacent surface.
E. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as necessary
for conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members:
1. For stainless steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to supporting
surfaces.
2. For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.
F. Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip fit metal sockets cast in
concrete.

3.6 ATTACHING RAILINGS
A. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction and welded
to railing ends or connected to railing ends using nonwelded connections as shown on
Drawings.
B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and welded
to railing ends or connected to railing ends using nonwelded connections as shown on
Drawings.
C. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets. Locate brackets as indicated or at spacing
required to support structural loads.
1. Provide brackets with 1-1/2 inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished
wall surface.
2. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded
hanger bolt.
D. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction:

1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled in expansion shields and
hanger or lag bolts.
2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
3. For steel framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into fire retardant
treated wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate
backing members or use self tapping screws fastened to steel framing or to
concealed steel reinforcements.
3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean stainless steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with
clean water.
B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used
for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop-painted
surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0 mil (0.05 mm) dry film thickness.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and
repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary
protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at
time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 05 53 00
GRATINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Fabricated cast gratings and frames.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 123 - Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated From Rolled,

Pressed and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip.
B. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's load tables, dimension diagrams, anchor details
and installation instructions of prefabricated items.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage,

size and type of fasteners and accessories.
C. Samples: Submit samples of materials and finish as requested by Architect.
A. Welder Qualifications: AWS D1.1.
A. Deliver items to be set in concrete, including anchor bolts or inserts in sufficient time to
be set and checked before concrete is placed.
B. Store products clear of ground and cover to avoid damage by elements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. Grating:
1. Type: Electro-pressure welded construction with bearing bars spaced at 1-3/16"
centers and 1/2" x 3/16" cross bars spaced at 4" centers.
2. Wearing surface of bearing bars and cross bars to be plain.
Gratings 05 53 00 - 1
3. Material: Galvanized steel, painted one shop coat of red oxide primer.
4. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard hold-down clip, four minimum.
5. Bearing bar sizes:
a. Up to 4'-0" span: 1" x 1/8".
b. Up to 5'-0" span: 1-1/4" x 1/8".
c. Up to 6'-0" span: 1-1/2" x 1/8".
d. Up to 7'-0" span: 1-1/2" x 3/16".
e. Up to 8'-0" span: 1-3/4" x 3/16".
f. Up to 9'-0" span: 2" x 3/16".
g. Up to 10'-0" span: 2-1/4" x 3/16".
6. Acceptable Product: Type 1R4 by Reliance Steel Products Company.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 or D1.4.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Set gating and frame level, true to line and plumb.
B. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Retouch abraded surfaces which will not receive finish painting. Use zinc compound
touch up paint.
END OF SECTION
Gratings 05 53 00 - 2
SECTION 06 10 53
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Light framing.
2. Wood blocking.
3. Rough hardware.
4. Rated plywood at electrical closets.
5. Fire-retardant and preservative treated wood.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. APA - Plywood Construction Guide
B. American Society for Testing and Materials: ASTM E 84 - Surface Burning

Characteristics of Building Materials.
C. American Wood Preservers Association:

1. AWPA C20 - Structural Lumber, Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes.
2. AWPA C27 - Plywood, Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes.
3. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood.
D. U.S. Product Standards:

1. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.
2. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.
E. NFPA - National Design Specification for Stress Grade Lumber and its Fastening.
A. Structural Requirements:
1. Identify lumber and plywood by official grade mark.
2. Preservative treated lumber and plywood shall comply with American Wood
Preservers Bureau, Quality Mark.
3. Comply with Underwriters Laboratories for treated lumber and plywood, and ASTM E
84, maximum flame spread of 25.
A. Preservative Treated Certification:

1. Certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure
process used, net amount of preservative retained and compliance with applicable
standards.
2. For water-borne treated products include statement that moisture content of treated
materials was reduced to 25 percent maximum prior to shipment to Project site.
Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 06 10 53 - 1

B. Fire-Retardant Treated-Certification: Certification by treating plant stating that treated

materials comply with specified standard, governing ordinances and that treatment will
not bleed through finish paint coats.
A. Immediately upon delivery to job site, place materials in area protected from weather.
B. Do not store seasoned materials in wet or damp portions of building.
C. Protect fire-retardant materials against high humidity and moisture during storage and
erection.
D. Stack lumber and plywood, and provide air circulation within stacks.
E. Protect installed carpentry work from damage by work of other trades until acceptance of
work.
1.6 SEQUENCING
A. Time delivery and installation of work to avoid delaying other trades whose work is
dependent on or affected by work of this section, and to comply with protection and
storage requirements.
B. Correlate locations of furring, nailers, blocking and similar supports so that attached
work will comply with design requirements.
C. Coordinate location of required blocking for base and wall cabinets with approved
millwork shop drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Lumber:
1. Grading Rules: PS 20.
2. Dimensions: Lumber dimensions are nominal; actual dimensions conform to industry
standards established by American Lumber Standards Committee and rules writing
agencies.
3. Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing; kiln dry
to 15 percent moisture content after wood treatment except wood in contact with
ground.
4. Surfacing: Surface four sides (S4S).
5. Species: No. 2 grade Southern Yellow Pine or equivalent West Coast Douglas Fir.
B. Plywood: Comply with PS-1 "US Product Standard for Construction and Industrial
Plywood" for plywood construction panels and, for products not manufactured under PS-1
provisions, with APA PRP-108.
1. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide
fire-retardant-treated plywood panels with grade designation, APA C-D Plugged,
Exposure 1, in thickness indicated but not less than 15/32 inch.

C. Fire Retardant Treatment:

1. Lumber: AWPA C20.
2. Plywood: AWPA C27.
3. Provide appropriate treatment for intended use that will not corrode metal fasteners or
steel studs.
4. If used in contact with roof, provide treatment that will not deteriorate when exposed
to temperatures of 160 degrees or higher.
D. Preservative Treated Wood: AWPA U1 treatment process; Use Categories (UCs) as

follows.
1. Above Ground:
a. Interior: AWPA UC2.
b. Exterior: UC3b.
2. Ground Contact: AWPA UC4a.
3. Use treatment which is noncorrosive to metal.
a. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and
containing no arsenic or chromium.
4. Use only stainless steel fasteners for connecting or attaching preservative treated
wood.
E. Fasteners:
1. Bolts: FS FF-B-575 or FF-B-584.
2. Nuts: FS FF-N-836.
3. Expansion Shields, Lag Screws and Bolts: FS FF-B-561C.
4. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588.
5. Wood Screws: FS FF-S-111.
6. Nails and Staples: FS FF-N-105.
7. Metal Nailing Discs: Flat caps, minimum 1" diameter; 30 gage minimum sheet metal;
formed to prevent dishing; bell or cup shapes not acceptable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Climatize materials according to material manufacturer's recommendations.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work and units which
are too small to fabricate work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement.
B. Set carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines, with members plumb and
true, and accurately cut and fitted. Construct members of continuous pieces of longest
possible lengths.
C. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as required by

recognized standards. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where
opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight
connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood. Pre-drill as
necessary. Comply with APA E30a requirements for plywood. Install fasteners at

spacings recommended by NFPA National Design Specifications for Stress Grade

Lumber and Its Fastening, for lumber and APA Form E30a.
D. Wood Grounds, Nailers, and Blocking:

1. Provide where required for screeding or attachment of other work.
2. Form to shapes cut as necessary for true line and level of work to be attached.
3. Coordinate location with other work involved.
4. Attach to substrate to support applied loading.
5. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces and built into masonry work.
6. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement.
7. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key-beveled lumber not
less than 1-1/2" wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact
thickness of material involved.
8. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
E. Apply two coats of same preservative used in original treatment to cut surfaces of
treated wood.
3.3 CLEANUP
A. Remove stain and soil that would show through finish or interfere with painting. Repair or
replace work damaged after installation.
3.4 SCHEDULE
A. Wood Blocking:
1. In cavities of framed walls for support of washroom accessories, handrails, millwork,
countertops, cabinets, shelves and miscellaneous wall mounted fixtures.
a. All upper cabinet and millwork units to receive a minimum of 2 rows of 2x6
blocking.
2. Miscellaneous blocking as indicated on Drawings.
B. Plywood: Use exterior grade plywood where edge of surface is permanently exposed to
weather, in contact with roofing, and where indicated.
C. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood:

1. All interior rough carpentry items including blocking in walls, at and around door
frames and jambs.
D. Preservative Treated Wood: Provide pressure-treated wood for framing, blocking,

furring, or nailing strips built into or in contact with exterior masonry walls or concrete.
E. Rough Hardware: Bolts, nuts, washers, nails, screws, anchors, powder actuated
anchorage devices, toggle type fasteners, and expansion anchorage devices.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 06 15 33
WOOD PATIO DECKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Composite decking, stairs, and benches.
1.
2. Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal flashing used
with patio decking.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Boards: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal in thickness and 2 inches nominal or
greater in width.
B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal
in least dimension.
C. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal or greater in least dimension.
D. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the
following:
1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.

2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service.
4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
A. Product Data: For composite/plastic decking and for metal framing anchors.
1. For preservative-treated wood products. Include chemical treatment

manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing
treated material.
2. For plastic decking and metal framing anchors. Include installation instructions.
Wood Patio Decking 06 15 33 - 1

B. Samples: For plastic decking, not less than 24 inches long, showing the range of
variation to be expected in appearance of decking, including surface texture.
A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1. For composite decking and fastening system: ICC ESR 3168 for basis of design
product or equivalent.
2. For composite railing: ICC ESR 3947 or equivalent.
3. Metal framing anchors.
4. Decking fasteners.
A. Store materials under cover and protected from weather and contact with damp or wet
surfaces. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
B. Handle and store plastic lumber to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufactures warranty against rot, decay, splitting, checking, splintering, fungal
damage, and termite damage for a period of 10.
B. Provide additional warranty against fading and attaining, including damage from food
staining and fading beyond 5 Delta E (CIE units) for a period of 10 years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Structural Performance:
1. Deck: Uniform Load – 100 lbf/sq.ft.
2. Tread of Stairs: Concentrated Load: 750 lbf/sq.ft. and 1/8 inch maximum deflection
with a concentrated load of 300 lbf on area of 4 square inches.
B. Fire-Test Response Characteristics: Class A per ASTM E-84.
2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A. Framing:
1. Construction or No. 2 grade and any of the following species:

a. Hem-fir (North); NLGA.

b. Southern pine; SPIB.
c. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA.
d. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
e. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
f. Douglas fir-south; WWPA.
g. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA.
h. Douglas fir-larch (North); NLGA.
i. Spruce-pine-fir (South); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
2.3 POSTS
A. Dimension Lumber Posts Up To 4 by 4 inches: Construction or No. 2 grade and any of

the following species:
1. Hem-fir or hem-fir (North); NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

2. Douglas fir-larch, Douglas fir-larch (North), or Douglas fir-south; NLGA, WCLIB, or
WWPA.
3. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
4. Spruce-pine-fir or spruce-pine-fir (South); NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
5. Northern species; NLGA.
6. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.
7. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
B. Timber Posts 6 by 6 inch or larger:
1. Balsam fir, Douglas fir-larch, Douglas fir-larch (North), eastern hemlock tamarack
(North), hem-fir, southern pine, western hemlock, or western hemlock (North);
No. 1; NeLMA, NLGA, SPIB, WCLIB, or WWPA.
2. Alaska cedar; No. 1; WCLIB.
3. Southern pine; No. 1; SPIB.
C. Round Wood Poles: Clean-peeled wood poles complying with ASTM D3200, with at
least 80 percent of inner bark removed and with knots and limbs cut flush with the
surface.
2.4 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
A. Pressure treat boards and dimension lumber with waterborne preservative in accordance
with AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the
ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.
B. Pressure treat timber with waterborne preservative in accordance with AWPA U1; Use
Category UC4a.
C. Pressure treat poles with waterborne preservative in accordance with AWPA U1; Use
Category UC4a.
D. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Do not use chemicals containing arsenic or chromium.
E. Use process for dimension lumber that includes water-repellent treatment.
F. After treatment, redry dimension lumber, timber, and poles to 19 percent maximum
moisture content.
G. Mark treated wood with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by
ALSC's Board of Review.
1. For items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark each piece on
surface that will not be exposed or omit marking and provide certificates of
treatment compliance issued by inspection agency.
H. Application: Treat all wood unless otherwise indicated.
2.5 PLASTIC DECKING
A. Plastic Lumber, General: Products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction with

current model code evaluation reports that show compliance with building code in effect
for Project for indicated type of construction.
1. Allowable loads and spans, as documented in evaluation reports or in information

referenced in evaluation reports, are not to be less than design loads and spans
indicated.
B. Composite Plastic Lumber: Solid shapes made from a mixture of cellulose fiber and
polyethylene or polypropylene.
1. Basis of Design: Trex Transcend Composite Decking With 1 inch Square Edge
2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers include but are not limited to the following:
a. Azek
3. Decking Standard: ICC-ESR-3168 for Basis-of-Design product and ICC-
ES AC109 for decking and ICC-ES AC174 for rails.
4. Decking Size: As shown.
5. Provide composite plastic decking, stairs, railings, and benches.
6. Surface Texture: Manufacturer's standard based on basis-of-design product.
7. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations or as selected by Architect
from manufacturer's full range.
2.6 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and
manufacture. Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length, to penetrate not less than 1-
1/2 inches into wood substrate.
1. Use stainless steel fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

B. Nails: ASTM F1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: ICC-ES AC70.
D. Wood Screws and Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1, ASME B18.6.1, or ICC-ES AC233.
E. Carbon-Steel Bolts: ASTM A307 with ASTM A563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat
washers all hot-dip zinc coated.
F. Stainless Steel Bolts: ASTM F593, Alloy Group 1 or 2; with ASTM F594, Alloy Group 1
or 2 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
G. Postinstalled Anchors: Stainless steel, torque-controlled expansion anchors with

capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when
installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when
installed in concrete as determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E488 conducted
by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.
1. Stainless steel bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F593 and ASTM F594, Alloy
Group 1 or 2.
2.7 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by
decking manufacturer, that meet or exceed those of basis-of-design products.
Manufacturer's published values are to be determined from empirical data or by rational
engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a
qualified independent testing agency.
B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with

ASTM A653/A653M, G185 coating designation.
C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304.
D. Joist Hangers: U-shaped, with 2-inch-long seat and 1-1/4-inch-wide nailing flanges at
least 85 percent of joist depth.
1. Thickness: 0.062 inch.
E. Top Flange Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers, full depth of joist, formed from metal strap
with tabs bent to extend over and be fastened to supporting member.
1. Strap Width: 2 inches.

F. Post Bases: Adjustable-socket type for bolting in place with standoff plate to raise post
1 inch above base and with 2-inch-minimum side cover, socket 0.062 inch thick, and
standoff and adjustment plates 0.108 inch thick.
G. Joist Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying joists together over supports.

1. Width: 1-1/4 inches.

3. Length: As indicated.
2.8 CONCEALED DECKING FASTENERS
A. Basis of Design: Trex Universal Hideaway Hidden Fasteners
B. Deck Splines: Corrosion-resistant metal or plastic splines that fit in grooves routed into
the sides of decking material and are fastened to deck framing with screws. Splines
provide uniform spacing of decking material.
C. Deck Clips: Black-oxide-coated, stainless steel clips designed to be fastened to deck

framing with screws, and to secure decking material with teeth that also provide uniform
spacing of decking material.
D. Deck Tracks: Formed metal strips designed to be fastened to deck framing and to secure
decking material from underside with screws. Made from epoxy-powder-coated, hot-dip
galvanized steel or stainless steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B. Stain wood, including both faces and edges. Cut to required lengths and stain ends.
A. Set work to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted.
Fit work to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA WCD1 unless otherwise indicated. Do not use
composite plastic units for structural applications.
C. Install plastic lumber to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Secure decking, stairs, benches, and railing to framing as required by decking

manufacturer.
E. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
G. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials,
fixtures, specialty items, and trim.
H. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or
with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere
with function of members or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of
joints or optimum joint arrangement.
I. Apply copper naphthenate field treatment to comply with AWPA M4, to cut surfaces of
preservative-treated lumber other than Southern Yellow Pine.
J. Securely attach exterior rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening
as indicated, complying with the following:
1. ICC-ES AC70 for power-driven fasteners.

2. "Fastening Schedule" in ICC's International Building Code.
3. "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members" and "Alternate Attachments" in ICC's
International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings.
K. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members,
with fasteners evenly spaced and with adjacent rows staggered.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF ELEVATED DECK JOIST FRAMING
A. General: Install joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not
less than 1-1/2 inches of bearing on wood or metal, or 3 inches on masonry. Attach floor
joists where framed into wood supporting members by using wood ledgers as indicated
or, if not indicated, by using metal joist hangers. Do not notch joists.
B. Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers; double
headers and trimmers where span of header exceeds 48 inches.
C. Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams or girders not less than 4 inches or
securely tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal
thickness by depth of joist over supports.
D. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal thickness by depth of joist at intervals of 96

inches o.c., between joists.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF STAIRS
A. Provide stair framing members of size, space, and configuration indicated or, if not
indicated, to comply with the following requirements:
1. Stringer Size: 2 by 12 inches nominal, minimum.

2. Notching: Notch stringers to receive treads, risers, and supports; leave at least 3-
1/2 inches of effective depth.
3. Stringer Spacing: At least three stringers for each 36-inch clear width of stair.
B. Provide stair framing with no more than 3/16-inch variation between adjacent treads and
risers and no more than 3/8-inch variation between largest and smallest treads and risers
within each flight.
C. Treads and Risers: Install according to manufacturer's printed instructions.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF RAILINGS
A. Balusters, Posts, and Railings: Fit to railings and install according to manufacturer’s
printed instructions.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 06 16 63
MOISTURE-RESISTANT SHEATHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Glass- mat faced gypsum sheathing on steel studs in exterior walls
(behind exterior finish).
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International:
1. ASTM B 117: Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.
2. ASTM C 954: Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs
from 0.033 in. to 0.112 in. in thickness.
3. ASTM C 1002: Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board.
4. ASTM C 1177: Specifications for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing
5. ASTM C 1396: Specification for Gypsum Sheathing Board.
6. ASTM D 3273: Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of
Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber.
7. ASTM E 84: Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
8. ASTM E 119: Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
9. ASTM F 1667: Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples.
B. Gypsum Association (GA):

1. GA-253: Application of Gypsum Sheathing
2. GA-254: Fire Resistant Gypsum Sheathing.
3. GA-600: Fire Resistance Design Manual, Eleventh Edition.
4. GA-801: Handling and Storage of Gypsum Panel Products
A. Fire Resistance Ratings: Provide fire resistance rated assemblies identical to those
indicated by reference to design designation in UL Fire Resistance Directory, GA 600, or
in listing of other testing and inspection agencies acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where gypsum sheathing is part of fire-resistance rated

assemblies, provide materials and construction which are identical to those of assemblies
whose fire resistance rating has been determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and
inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Moisture Resistant Sheathing 06 16 63 - 1

A. Deliver gypsum sheathing board and related materials in original packages bearing brand
name and identification of manufacturer.
B. Store gypsum sheathing board to protect against damage from weather, direction
sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, and construction traffic. Stack gypsum
sheathing boards flat on leveled supports off ground under protective covering.
C. Handle gypsum sheathing board to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence installation of gypsum sheathing board with exterior cladding so that sheathing
board is not exposed to weather for longer than one month. If sheathing board will be
exposed to the weather for longer than one month, protect cutouts, corners, and joints in
sheathing by filling with flexible sealant at time sheathing is applied, but do not leave
exposed for more than four months.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GYPSUM SHEATHING MATERIALS
A. Fire-Resistive Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing:

1. ASTM C 1177, Type X fire resistant, non-combustible gypsum core incorporating
water resistant material, surfaced on face and back with inorganic glass fiber mats,
unsurfaced square edges; 5/8" thick x 4'-0" wide x 8'-0" long.
2. Acceptable Products:
a. M-Glass Exterior Sheathing by American Gypsum Company.
b. Dens-Glass Exterior Sheathing by Georgia Pacific Corporation.
c. EXP Fire-Shield Sheathing by National Gypsum Company.
d. Securock by USG Corporation.
B. Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers: Refer to Section 07 27 26.
2.2 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with
ASTM C 834, compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing and recommended by tape
and sheathing manufacturers for use with glass-fiber sheathing tape and for covering
exposed fasteners.
1. Sheathing Tape: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, minimum 2 inches (50 mm) wide, 10
by 10 or 10 by 20 threads/inch (390 by 390 or 390 by 780 threads/m), of type
recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion
sealant in sealing joints in glass-mat gypsum sheathing and with a history of
successful in-service use.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. For steel framing:

1. Screws: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for

thickness of sheathing board to be attached, with organic-polymer or other

corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours
according to ASTM B 117.
a. For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch (0.835 mm) thick, attach sheathing to
comply with ASTM C 1002.
b. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick, attach
sheathing to comply with ASTM C 954.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable,

rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene
film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch (0.8 mm).
a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing.
b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.; Vycor Plus Self-
Adhered Flashing.
c. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Polyguard 300.
B. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing

for substrate.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with GA-253, GA-254 and with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws.
2. Install boards with a 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) gap where non-load-bearing construction
abuts structural elements.
3. Install boards with a 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where they abut masonry or similar
materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.
B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into
facing.
C. Install board edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those
of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud.
1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. and set back a minimum of
3/8 inch (9.5 mm) from edges and ends of boards.
2. Provide blocking for support wherever end joints do not bear against stud framing.
D. Do not bridge building expansion or deflection joints with gypsum sheathing. Cut and
space edges to match spacing of structural support elements. Cover joint with flexible
flashing in order to maintain continuity of sheathing plane.
E. Seal sheathing joints as follows:

1. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and
trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply
sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal
other penetrations and openings. Seal all miscellaneous wall penetrations including

abandoned holes.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 06 20 23
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Field fabricated and field finished carpentry items including display
cabinets, shelving, window sills, miscellaneous standing and running trim, wood trim at
underside of gymnasium trusses, and required attachment accessories.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute

1. ANSI A208.1: Particleboard
2. ANSI A208.2: Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) for Interior Applications
B. Architectural Woodwork Institute/Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of

Canada /Woodwork Institute
1. Architectural Woodwork Standards.
C. ASTM International
1. ASTM D 3498: Specification for Adhesives for Field-Gluing Plywood to Lumber
Framing for Floor Systems
2. ASTM E 84: Test Method for Surface-Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
D. California Department of Public Health

1. Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical
Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers. 2010.
E. Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association

1. HPVA HP-1-2009: American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative
Plywood
F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association

1. NEMA LD 3-2005: High Pressure Decorative Laminates (ANSI) (Available in PDF at
www.nema.org)
G. U.S. Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology

1. DOC PS 1: Construction and Industrial Plywood
2. DOC PS 20: American Softwood Lumber Standard
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
Standards" (AWS) for grades of architectural wood cabinets indicated for construction,
finishes, installation, and other requirements.
A. Shop Drawings:
Interior Finish Carpentry 06 20 23 - 1

1. Show sizes, quantities, markings, materials, wood species, finishes and accessories.
2. Include assembly and installation drawings to show methods of fastening, bracing,
jointing and connecting to work of other trades.
B. Samples: Submit duplicate 12" long samples for each type wood species to be stained
and finish; stepped finished as one side and one edge.
A. Do not deliver finish carpentry items until site conditions are adequate to receive work of
this Section. Protect materials from weather while in transit.
B. Store indoors, in ventilated areas with constant but minimum temperature of 60-degree F
and maximum relative humidity of 25 to 55 percent.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER PRODUCTS

A. Softwood Lumber: DOC PS 20; graded in accordance with requirements of AWS;
maximum moisture content of 6 percent; Douglas Fir or White Pine.
B. Solid Lumber Stock:

1. Hardwood and Softwood Solid Stock for shelves, display cabinet, Standing and
Running Trim: AWS Section 3 Lumber grading rules; surfaced four sides (SFS).
2. Hardwood for Stain or Transparent Finish: Custom Grade Select White Maple, plain
sawn, selected for color and grain match.
3. Hardwood for underside of trusses at Gymnasium: WD-2 as listed in Finish Schedule
on Drawings.
a. Dimensions: As shown on Drawings.
b. Fasteners: Strong-Drive TB Wood-to-Steel Screw by Simpson Strong-Tie or
equivalent by Powers, Hilti, or Olympic Fasteners.
4. Softwood for Concealed Structures and Supports: Custom Grade, Western Pine.
C. Composite Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of

referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless
1. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1 medium-density overlay.
2. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1.
3. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished
with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with
requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and
3.10.
D. Hardwood Edge Banding: 1/4" thick, Custom Grade; match species of natural finished
faces.
E. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, Nails, and Screws: Size and type to suit application,
paint finish in concealed locations and stain in exposed locations.
F. Wood Screws: FS FF-S-111.

G. Anchors: Nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts as required for
corrosion resistance.
2.2 HARDWARE
A. Hardware: Heavy duty brackets, anchors and shelf supports and all other hardware used
to build trophy case as detailed on construction drawings.
B. Door Slide:
1. Ball bearing top and bottom track assembly.
2. Acceptable Product: Rollesy P992 Sliding Glass Door Hardware by KV.
C. Touch Latch:
1. Magnetic push latch.
2. Acceptable Product: No. 245.61. by Hafele.
D. Door Lock: No. 986 by Knape and Vogt.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Comply with AWS "Custom Grade Work" provision for grading and workmanship.
B. Moisture Content: Kiln-dry interior millwork to average not more than 7 percent to 10
percent.
C. Machine and sand woodwork to comply with requirements of AWS.
D. Rout or groove back of flat trim members, kerf backs of other wide flat members except
plywood or veneered members.
E. Window Sills, and Trim: Fabricate with no field splices in runs where single length is
available; 12'-0" minimum.
2.4 PREPARATION FOR FINISHING
A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and leave ready to receive site
applied finishes.
C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding
surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes.
D. Seal, stain, and varnish concealed and semi-concealed surfaces, brush applied only.
E. Prime surfaces in contact with cementitious materials.
F. Verify location of cutouts from on-site dimensions.
2.5 SHOP FINISHING
A. Factory Finish – Transparent:

1. Grade: AWS Custom.

2. Finish: AWS System #7 catalyzed vinyl or AWS System #11 catalyzed polyurethane.
3. Staining: As selected by Architect.
4. Effect: Open grain finish.
5. Sheen: Semigloss, 46-60 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM
D 523.
B. Factory seal top and bottom edges and cutouts with low sheen system compatible with
finish system.
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to

installing.
B. Before proceeding with woodwork required to be fitted to other construction, obtain

measurements and verify dimensions of shop drawing details for accurate fit.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Set and secure materials and components in place, rigid, plumb, and square.
B. Shim as required using concealed shims.
C. Cut to fit to exact size. Where woodwork abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for
accurate fit. Where necessary to fit at site, provide ample allowance for cutting and
fitting.
D. Install trim and base single in unjointed lengths for openings and for runs less than
maximum length of lumber available.
E. Stagger joints in adjacent members.
F. Miter bases at returns and miter at corners.
G. Attach woodwork securely in place with uniform joints providing for thermal and building
movements, blind nail where possible. Secure woodwork to anchors or blocking built-in
or directly attached to substrate.
H. Use fine finishing nails where exposed. Set exposed nails for filling.
I. Clean woodwork and fill nail holes. Where woodwork is to receive transparent finish, use
matching wood filler.
J. Ensure mechanical and electrical items affecting this work are properly placed, complete,
and have been examined by Architect prior to commencement of installation.
K. Where exposed screw heads are required, counterbore holes and install wood plugs of
species and grain to match trim. Install plugs with glue, and flush with surface.

3.3 CLEANING
A. Repair and replace defective work.
B. Clean woodwork, touch-up finish and refinish damaged or soiled areas of finish.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 06 41 16
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Shop or mill fabricated plastic laminate faced wood cabinets, countertops and niches.
2. Hardware and attachment accessories.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute

1. ANSI A208.1: Particleboard
2. ANSI A208.2: Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) for Interior Applications
B. Architectural Woodwork Institute/Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of

Canada/Woodwork Institute
1. Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS).
C. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association

1. BHMA A156.9: Cabinet Hardware
2. BHMA A156.11: Cabinet Locks
3. BHMA A156.16: Auxiliary Hardware
4. BHMA A156.18: Materials and Finishes
D. California Department of Health Services

1. Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources
Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers.
E. Code of Federal Regulations

1. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D-2005: National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards
for Architectural Coatings
F. Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association

1. HPVA HP-1: American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood
G. National Electrical Manufacturers Association

2. NEMA LD 3: High Pressure Decorative Laminates
H. U.S. Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology

1. DOC PS 1: U.S. Product Standard for Structural Plywood
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Surfaces:
1. Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed.
2. Bottoms of cases more than 4'-0" above finish floor.
Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets 06 41 16 - 1

3. Back and edges of hinged doors exposed when opened.
B. Semi-Exposed Surfaces:
1. Surfaces that becomes visible when drawers and doors are open.
2. Tops of cases 6'-0" or more above finish floor.
C. Concealed Surfaces: Surfaces not visible after installation.
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
Standards" (AWS) for grades of architectural wood cabinets indicated for construction,
finishes, installation, and other requirements.
1. The Contract Documents may contain selections chosen from options in the quality
standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with
those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.
B. Design Requirements:
1. Design requirements shown by the drawings are intended to show design intent,
establish basic dimensions of units, profiles, and sight lines of members.
2. Within these limitations this Contractor is responsible for the design of the entire cabinet
system, including its attachment to the structure and shall make whatever modifications
and additions to the details as may be required to fulfill the performance requirements.
C. Performance Requirements: Provide millwork in accordance with Architectural Woodwork

Standards (AWS), Custom Grade.
1. Casework: AWS Section 10.
2. Countertops: AWS Section 11.
3. Miscellaneous Work: AWS Section 6.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Draw profiles, sections, and views of items specifically manufactured for this work, at
scale large enough to permit checking for design conformity.
2. Show sizes, quantities, markings, materials, wood species, finishes and accessories.
3. Include assembly and installation drawings to show methods of fastening, bracing,
jointing and connecting to work of other trades.
4. Include size and location of all wood blocking required for anchoring base and wall
cabinets.
C. Samples:
1. Shop prepare one typical cabinet front required for job, complete with hardware and
applied finishes.
2. Sample units will be examined to ascertain degree of quality and conformity to AWS
standards specified in this Section.
3. Samples may be used as part of work when conforming to requirements indicated and
with permission of Architect.
4. Solid sample finished on one side and one edge.
5. 12" x 12" plastic laminate of each type specified.

A. AWS Catalog: Catalog numbers indicated on the drawings and in the specifications are for
the convenience of identifying specific cabinet types. Unless modified by notation on the
drawings or otherwise specified, current description for indicated number, together with
indicated or specified options or accessories, constitutes requirements for each cabinet.
1. Catalog numbers and specific requirements indicated on the drawings and in the
specification are given for the purpose of establishing standard design and quality of
materials, construction, and workmanship.
2. Catalog numbers noted on the drawings are based upon AWS, Appendix A.
A. Do not deliver millwork items until wet trades, including concrete plaster, tile and painting are
completed in same area.
B. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas which meet the
specified environmental conditions.
C. Protect cabinets during delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and
deterioration.
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install cabinets until HVAC system has been balanced to
anticipated temperature and humidity expected in the finished areas where these materials
will be finally located. HVAC system shall remain in continuous operation until final
acceptance by Owner.
B. Field Measurements:
1. Verify dimensions with accurate field measurement before fabrications wherever work
adjoins other work that precede it in construction.
2. Allow for trimming and fitting of cabinet work and trim as may be required.
3. Do not erect or install cabinet work in areas which still require work by other trades which
might cause damage or disfigure work.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work with other trades affected by installation.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Furnish warranty with provisions for making good or replacing, at no cost to Owner,
cabinetwork and other millwork items which exhibit defects in material and workmanship
within a period of two years.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Plastic Laminate Manufacturers:

1. Abet Laminati, Inc.
2. ArpaUSA
3. Formica Corporation.
4. Lamin-Art, Inc.
5. Panolam Industries International, Inc.
6. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
B. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality
standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use plain-sawn softwood lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches
(75 mm) wide.
2. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.
B. Composite Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced
quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no
urea formaldehyde.
2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
3. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
4. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1.
5. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with
thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with
requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.
C. Softwood Lumber: PS 20 of any sound species.
D. High Pressure Decorative Laminate – PL- - PL-6:

1. NEMA LD 3, HPDL; Grades as Scheduled at the end of this Section.
2. Color and Patterns: Refer to Finish Schedule.
3. Acceptable Products: Refer to Finish Schedule.
F. Plastic Laminate Backing: High pressure paper base laminate without decorative finish,
minimum 0.028" thick.
G. Upholstery – F-1 – F-5:

1. Type: Vinyl/Faux Leather
2. Finish: Antimicrobial, Knit Backed
3. Abrasion Test 1: Wyzenbeek Wire Mesh – 200,000 Double Rubs
4. Pattern: Solid, Texture.
5. Composition: Silicone – 100%
6. Colors: Refer to Finish Schedule.
7. Acceptable Manufacturer: Refer to Finish Schedule.
2.3 HARDWARE
A. General: BHMA A156.9 and as follows.

B. Standards and Brackets:

1. Cabinet – Mortise-Mount.
a. Pilaster Standards: #255.
b. Shelf Supports: #256.
c. Finish: White.
d. Capacity: 500 lbs. per shelf.
e. Manufacturer: Knape & Vogt.
2. Wall – Regular Duty:
a. Standards: #80.
b. Brackets: #180-12.
c. Finish: Satin Chrome.
d. Capacity: 320 lbs. per pair.
e. Manufacturer: Knape & Vogt.
C. Work Surface Support Bracket:

1. Stamped metal.
2. 24-1/4” x 18-1/4”; 400 lb. capacity per pair; maximum depth 26”
3. Finish: Crinkle Powder Coat; color as selected by Architect.
4. Acceptable Product: SWS4 by Mockett.com
D. Cabinet Hinges:
1. Fully concealed adjustable overlay cabinet hinges; self-latching, 120 degree opening,
with mounting plates and accessories as required.
a. Wide Angle – Salice by Hafele.
b. 71T5580 Blum
F. Cabinet Hinges:
1. Fully concealed adjustable overlay cabinet hinges; self-latching, 90 degree opening for
cabinet door adjacent to walls or limited 90 degree opening space.
a. 200 Series – Salice by Hafele.
b. No. 3606 by Grass America Inc.
H. Drawer and Cabinet Pulls:

1. 3-1/2" aluminum pull.
2. Acceptable Product: No. 4483-1/2 by Stanley Security Solutions, Inc.
I. Drawer Slide:
1. Full extension slides, 75 lb. capacity.
2. Acceptable Product: KV8400 by Knape & Vogt.
J. Drawer Slide:
1. Full extension slides for box, card file and utility drawers.
2. Acceptable Product: No. 7434 by Accuride.
K. Drawer Slide:
1. Full extension slides for file drawers.
2. Acceptable Product: No. C4034 by Accuride.
L. Door Catch: MSUPEC12 Duo/Magna Latch by Selby.

M. Touch Latch:
1. Magnetic pressure catch.
2. Acceptable Product: No. 245.61.322 by Hafele.
Q. Drawer and Door Lock: No. 986 by Knape and Vogt.

1. Provide locks at every drawer and cabinet in clinic, at teachers’ wardrobes, and at
locations shown on Drawings.
2. Key locks using Owner’s keying system.
3. Provide 2 keys for each lock.
R. Bar Grille:
1. 8" wide by 3'- 10" long extruded solid bronze bar grille.
2. Acceptable Product: EP111-3/4 SE10 Flange by Register & Grille Manufacturing
Company, Inc.
S. Hanging Rods:
1. Closet Shelf and Rod Supports:
a. Aluminum; painted white
b. 11”L x 10” H;
c. 1195 by Knape & Vogt
2. Center Support:
a. 24” Length; 1-1/16” od tubing; anochrome finish
b. 760 by Knape and Vogt
3. Tubing: Stainless Steel; 1-1/16” diameter; 660 by Knape & Vogt
4. Tubing Flange: 1/16” o.d. mounted with two 5mm pins.
5. End Cap: 730 by Knape and Vogt.
T. Coat Hooks:
1. Finish: Burnish cast aluminum double hook.
2. Acceptable Product: No. 580 by Ives (if double hook).
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate cabinetwork to comply with AWS Custom Grade standards.
B. Moisture Content: Kiln-dry interior millwork to average not more than 7 to 10 percent.
C. Before proceeding with millwork required to be fitted to other construction, obtain

measurements and verify dimensions of shop drawing details for accurate fit.
D. Machine and sand millwork to comply with requirements of AWS for specified grade.
E. Assemble in mill in as large units as practicable to minimize field cutting and fitting.
F. Shop assemble cabinetwork items for delivery to site in sizes easily handled to ensure
passage through building opening.
G. Mill apply face edge and backing laminates with heat activated using presses. Contact
adhesive shall not be permitted.

H. When necessary to cut and fit on site, make material with ample allowance for cutting.
Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
I. Apply plastic laminate in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Face
laminates to overlap edge laminates, edge laminates to overlap backing sheets.
J. Form corners and joints hairline tight. Slightly bevel arises. Cap exposed edges with plastic
laminate.
K. Use exposed fastening devices or nails only when unavoidable; arrange neatly.
L. Mechanically fasten splash backs and aprons to counter tops with concealed steel brackets
at 16" on center maximum.
M. Provide cutouts for inserts, appliances, outlet boxes and other fixtures and fittings. Verify
locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions.
N. Provide 1/2" minimum thick drawer bottom sheet for drawers.
O. Apply upholstery per detail on construction drawings. Use upholster in roll in pattern
sequence.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Installer: Verify and approve size and location of required wood blocking prior to finished wall
surface being installed.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install work in accordance with AWS Custom Grade standards.
B. Set and secure cabinetwork items in place rigid, plumb and square. Shim as required with
concealed shims.
C. Use fixture attachments designed for wall mounted components.
D. Anchor cabinet and counter bases to floor using angles and anchorages.
E. Counter-sink semi-concealed anchorage devices used to wall mount components and

conceal with solid plugs of species to match surrounding finish.
F. Place flush with surrounding surfaces.
G. Carefully scribe cabinetwork which is against other building materials leaving gaps of 1/32"
maximum. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose.
H. Install cabinet hardware.
3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving and operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.
3.4 SCHEDULE
A. Exposed Surfaces:
1. Edge-banding: Grade HGS.
2. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS.
3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS.
B. Semi-Exposed Surfaces:
1. Edge-banding: Grade VGS.
3. Vertical Surface: Thermoset Decorative Panels.
C. Concealed Surfaces: Grade BKL.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings and fixtures.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 06 64 00
PLASTIC PANELING (“FRP”)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes plastic sheet paneling (“FRP”).
1.2 REFERENCES
1. ASTM D 5319: Specification for Glass-Fiber Reinforced Polyester Wall and
Ceiling Panels
2. ASTM E 84: Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
B. Samples: For plastic paneling and trim accessories.
A. Testing Agency: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING
A. Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Paneling – FRP- & FRP-2:

1. Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic panels complying with
ASTM D 5319 and USDA requirements.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
a. Crane Composites, Inc.
b. Glasteel.
c. Marlite.
d. Nudo Products, Inc.
a. Fire-X Glasbord Plus by Crane Composites.
b. Standard FRP by Marlite.
c. Fiber-Lite by Nudo.
d. Glasliner by Graham/Stabilit/Glasteel
4. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows when tested by a qualified testing
agency according to ASTM E 84. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
Plastic Paneling (FRP) 06 64 00 - 1

a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
5. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch.
6. Surface Finish and Color: As indicated on Finish Schedule.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to

retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside
corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges.
1. Color: Match panels.
B. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and with a VOC content

of 50 g/L or less.
C. Sealant: Mildew-resistant, single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant

recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in
Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair adhesive bond, including oil, grease,
dirt, and dust.
B. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation

according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
C. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints to provide equal panels at ends
of walls not less than half the width of full panels.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive.
C. Install trim accessories with adhesive and nails or staples. Do not fasten through
panels.
D. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels, and bed inside
corner trim in a bead of sealant.
E. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant.
F. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent
recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no
residue remains.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 07 16 16
CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes crystalline waterproofing for negative-side application to concrete and

concrete unit masonry.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include [construction details,]
material descriptions and installation instructions for crystalline waterproofing.
A. Qualification Data: For Applicator.
B. Product Certificates: For waterproofing, patching, and plugging materials, from

manufacturer.
C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by

manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for crystalline waterproofing.
A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in applying crystalline waterproofing

similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Mockups: Provide mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of typical surfaces shown on Drawings 10 sq. ft. in size.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves
such deviations in writing.
3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with application only when existing and forecasted
weather conditions permit crystalline waterproofing to be performed according to
B. Proceed with waterproofing work only after pipe sleeves, vents, curbs, inserts, drains,
and other projections through the substrate to be waterproofed have been completed.
Crystalline Waterproofing 07 16 16 - 1
Proceed only after substrate defects, including honeycombs, voids, and cracks, have
been repaired to provide a sound substrate free of forming materials, including reveal
inserts.
C. Ambient Conditions: Proceed with waterproofing work only if temperature is

maintained at 40 deg F or above during work and cure period, and space is well
ventilated and kept free of water.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WATERPROOFING MATERIALS
A. Crystalline Waterproofing: Prepackaged, gray or white-colored proprietary blend of

portland cement, specially treated sand, and active chemicals that, when mixed with
water and applied, penetrates into concrete and concrete unit masonry and reacts
chemically with the byproducts of cement hydration in the presence of water to develop
crystalline growth within substrate capillaries to produce an impervious, dense,
waterproof substrate; that has VOC content complying with limits of authorities having
jurisdiction; with properties meeting or exceeding the criteria specified below.
a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; A-H Hydrocap.
b. AQUAFIN, Inc.; AQUAFIN-IC.
c. Master Builders; MasterSeal 500.
d. Conproco Corporation; Conpro Super Seal.
e. Euclid Tamms; HEY'DI K-11
f. ICS Penetron International Ltd.; Penetron.
g. International Chem-Crete, Inc.; Chem-Cretex Cem 600.
h. IPA Systems, Inc.; Drycon.
i. Kryton Group of Companies (The); Krystol T1 & T2 Waterproofing System.
j. Vandex USA LLC; Vandex Super/Super White.
k. Xypex Chemical Corporation; Xypex.
2. Water Permeability: Maximum zero for water at 30 feet when tested according to
CE CRD-C 48.
3. Compressive Strength: Minimum 3500 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Patching Compound: Factory-premixed cementitious repair mortar, crack filler, or

sealant recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for filling and patching tie holes,
honeycombs, reveals, and other imperfections; compatible with substrate and other
materials indicated; and VOC content complying with limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Plugging Compound: Factory-premixed cementitious compound with hydrophobic

properties and recommended by waterproofing manufacturer; resistant to water and
moisture but vapor permeable for all standard applications (vertical, overhead, and
horizontal surfaces not exposed to vehicular traffic); compatible with substrate and
other materials indicated; and VOC content complying with limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
D. Sand: ASTM C 144.
E. Polymer Admixture for Protective Topping: Polymer bonding agent and admixture
designed to improve adhesion to prepared substrates and not to create a vapor barrier.
F. Water: Potable.
2.3 MIXES
A. Crystalline Waterproofing: Add prepackaged dry ingredients to water according to

manufacturer's written instructions. Mix together with mechanical mixer or by hand to
required consistency.
B. Protective Topping: Measure, batch, and mix portland cement and sand in the
proportion of 1:3 and water. Blend together with mechanical mixer to required
consistency.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for suitable
conditions where waterproofing is to be applied.
B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C. Notify Architect in writing of active leaks or defects that would affect system
performance.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect other work from damage caused by cleaning, preparation, and application of
waterproofing. Provide temporary enclosure to ensure adequate ambient temperatures
and ventilation conditions for application.
B. Do not allow waterproofing, patching, and plugging materials to enter reveals or

annular spaces intended for resilient sealants or gaskets, such as joint spaces between
pipes and pipe sleeves.
C. Stop active water leaks with plugging compound according to waterproofing

D. Repair damaged or unsatisfactory substrate with patching compound according to

1. At holes and cracks in substrate, remove loosened chips and cut reveal with
sides perpendicular to surface, not tapered, and approximately 1 inch deep. Fill
reveal with patching compound flush with surface.
E. Surface Preparation: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to

remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, mortar spatter, grease, oils, paint, curing
compounds, and form-release agents to ensure that waterproofing bonds to surfaces.
1. Clean concrete surfaces according to ASTM D 4258.
a. Scratch- and Float-Finished Concrete: Etch with 10 percent muriatic
(hydrochloric) acid solution according to ASTM D 4260.
b. Prepare smooth-formed and trowel-finished concrete by mechanical
abrading or abrasive-blast cleaning according to ASTM D 4259.
2. Clean concrete unit masonry surfaces according to ASTM D 4261.
a. Lightweight Concrete Unit Masonry: Etch with 10 percent muriatic
(hydrochloric) acid solution or abrade surface by wire brushing. Remove
acid residue until pH readings of water after rinse are not more than 1.0 pH
lower or 2.0 pH higher than pH of water before rinse.
b. Medium- and Normal-Weight Concrete Unit Masonry: Sandblast or
bushhammer to a depth of 1/16 inch.
3. Concrete Joints: Clean reveals according to waterproofing manufacturer's
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Comply with waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions for application

and curing.
1. Saturate surface with water for several hours prior to application and maintain
damp condition until applying waterproofing. Remove standing water.
2. Apply waterproofing to surfaces indicated on Drawings.
3. Number of Coats: Number required for specified water permeability.
4. Application Method: Brush. Apply to ensure that each coat fills voids and is in
full contact with substrate or previous coat.
5. Dampen surface between coats.
B. Final Coat Finish: Smooth.
C. Curing: Moist-cure waterproofing for three days immediately after final coat has set,
followed by air drying, unless otherwise recommended in writing by manufacturer.
D. Waterproofing Treatment Extensions: Extend waterproofing treatment as follows:

1. Onto columns integral with treated walls.
2. Onto interior nontreated walls intersecting exterior treated walls, for a distance of
24 inches for cast-in-place concrete and 48 inches for masonry.
3. Onto exterior walls and onto both exterior and interior columns, for a height of 12
inches, where floors, but not walls, are treated.
4. Onto every substrate in areas indicated for treatment, including pipe trenches,
pits, sumps, and similar offsets and features.
E. Protective Topping: Apply 1-inch- thick, protective topping over floor surfaces.
1. Exception: Elevator pit floor, unless required by manufacturer.
A. Inspection: Engage manufacturer's representative to inspect completed application

and provide a written report that application complies with manufacturer's written
instructions.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 07 21 00
THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Extruded polystyrene foam-plastic board insulation.
2. Polyisocyanurate foam-plastic board insulation.
3. Glass-fiber blanket insulation.
4. Glass-fiber board insulation.
5. Mineral-wool blanket insulation.
6. Rigid mineral-fiber insulation.
7. Low-rise detailing foam insulation.
1. Section 01 23 00 “Alternates” for alternate at exterior building envelope including
metal wall panels, insulation, girts, and air barrier.
2. Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry" for masonry.
3. Section 07 42 13.13 “Formed Metal Wall Panels” for wall panel cladding.
4. Section 07 21 19 "Foamed-in-Place Insulation" for spray-applied polyurethane
foam insulation.
5. Section 09 21 16 “Gypsum Board Assemblies” for sound attenuation blanket
insulation.

1. Extruded polystyrene foam-plastic board insulation.
2. Polyisocyanurate foam-plastic board insulation.
3. Glass-fiber blanket insulation.
4. Glass-fiber board insulation.
5. Mineral-wool blanket insulation.
6. Mineral-wool board insulation.
7. Low-rise detailing foam insulation.
A. Installer's Certification: Listing type, manufacturer, and R-value of insulation installed in

each element of the building thermal envelope.
Thermal Insulation 07 21 00 - 1
1. For blown-in loose-fill insulation, indicate initial installed thickness, settled

thickness, settled R-value, installed density, coverage area, and number of bags
installed.
2. Sign, date, and post the certification in a conspicuous location on Project site.
B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing
agency.
C. Research Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during
installation.
B. Protect foam plastic board insulation:

1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and
concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam plastic board materials to
Project site until just before installation time.
3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam plastic board insulation in
each area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation from single source with
resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical
properties without delaying progress of Work.
A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Identify products with appropriate markings of

applicable testing and inspecting organization.
1. Surface Burning Characteristic: ASTM E 84.
a. Flame Spread Index: Maximum 25.
b. Smoke Developed Index: Maximum 450.
2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
B. National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA) 255 Test of Surface Burning

Characteristics of Building Materials.
C. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) 723 Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials.
2.3 POLYISOCYANURATE FOAM PLASTIC BOARD
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products

from one of the following:
1. Atlas Roofing Corporation.
2. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; Hunter Panels.
3. Dow Chemical Company; Thermax.
4. Rmax, Inc.
B. Polyisocyanurate Board, Foil Faced: ASTM C 1289, foil faced, Type I, Class 1 or 2.
1. Flame Spread Index: Not more than 25 when tested in accordance with
ASTM E84.
2. Smoke Developed Index: Not more than 450 when tested in accordance with
ASTM E84.
3. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved
assembly.
4. Labeling: Provide identification of mark indicating R-value of each piece of
insulation 12 inches and wider in width.
5. Thermal Resistivity: Minimum aged R value of 6.0/in; R of total thickness.
6. Compressive Strength: Grade 2; 20 psi (138 kPa) minimum per ASTM D 1621.
7. Water Absorption: Less than 1-1/2 percent by volume maximum in accordance
with ASTM D 2842.
C. General Applications: Continuous insulation at metal-stud-framed backup at exterior

walls, and elsewhere as indicated on Drawings. Comply with NFPA 285.
1. Insulation Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
2.4 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM PLASTIC BOARD

from one of the following:
1. DiversiFoam Products.
2. Foamular; Owens Corning.
3. GreenGuard; Kingspan.
4. Styrofoam, Dow Chemical Company (The).
B. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation, Type X: ASTM C578, Type X, 15-psi minimum
compressive strength; unfaced.
1. Flame-Spread Index: Not more than 25 when tested in accordance with
ASTM E84.
ASTM E84.
assembly.
C. General Applications: Continuous insulation at foundations, underslab, and elsewhere

as indicated on Drawings.
1. Thickness: 2 inches (50 mm) unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
2.5 GLASS FIBER BLANKET
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:
1. CertainTeed Corporation.
2. Johns Manville.
3. Owens Corning.
B. Glass Fiber Blanket, Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type I; passing ASTM E 136 for
combustion characteristics.
1. General Applications: Batt insulation in stud cavities between metal-studs in
framed backup exterior walls, and elsewhere as indicated on Drawings.
2. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a. CertainTeed Corporation; CertaPro CB 150.
b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway Company; Insul-Shield 100 or 150.
c. Owens Corning; 701 or 711.
ASTM E84.
ASTM E84.
2.6 MINERAL WOOL BLANKETS
A. Mineral Wool Blanket, Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane
facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame spread and smoke developed indexes
of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion
characteristics.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
a. ROCKWOOL Group.
b. Thermafiber, Inc.; an Owens Corning company.
ASTM E84.
ASTM E84.
2.7 RIGID MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION
A. Mineral Wool Board, Unfaced: ASTM C 612, Type IVB; water repellent for use at
continuous insulation when indicated for compliance with NFPA 285.
of the following:
a. CavityRock, ROCKWOOL Group.
b. RainBarrier; Thermafiber, Inc.; an Owens Corning company.
2. R-value: 4.3 per inch
ASTM E84.
4. Smoke Developed Index: Not more than zero when tested in accordance with
ASTM E84.
5. Combustibility: ASTM E136 Non-combustible.
6. Fungi Resistance: ASTM C1338
7. Water Vapor Sorption: ASTM C1104 – 0.03 percent by volume for unfaced board.
2.8 MINERAL WOOL BOARD AT CURTAIN WALL
A. Mineral Wool Board, Unfaced: ASTM C 612, Types IA and IB; water repellent; passing
ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
of the following:
a. Owens Corning; Thermafiber Firespan 40.
b. CurtainRock; ROCKWOOL Group.
ASTM E84.
3. Smoke Developed Index: Not more than zero when tested in accordance with
ASTM E84.
4. Nominal density of 4 lb/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m).
2.9 INSULATION FASTENERS
A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable
of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position with self-locking washer
in place.
1. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.762 mm) thick by
2 inches (50 mm) square.
2. Spindle: Copper coated, low carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) in
diameter; length to suit depth of insulation.
B. Adhesively Attached, Angle-Shaped, Spindle-Type Anchors: Angle welded to projecting

spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position with self-
locking washer in place.
1. Angle: Formed from 0.030-inch- thick, perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet
with each leg 2 inches square.
2. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter;
length to suit depth of insulation.
C. Insulation Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016 inch (0.41 mm)
thick galvanized steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required
to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) square or in
diameter.
1. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert
to ensure permanent retention of cap in the following locations:
a. Crawl spaces.
b. Ceiling plenums.
c. Attic spaces.
D. Insulation Standoff: Spacer fabricated from galvanized mild steel sheet for fitting over
spindle of insulation anchor to maintain air space of 2 inches (50 mm) between face of
insulation and substrate to which anchor is attached.
E. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors

securely to substrates without damaging insulation, fasteners, or substrates.
2.10 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water
barrier materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to
substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.
B. Low-Expansion Detailing Foam Insulation: Two-component urethane foam with low-
expansion pressure, 10 percent flexibility, and 1.75 to 2.0 lb/cu. ft. density, suitable for
filling enclosed structural members where indicated, and gaps and voids adjacent to
doors, fenestration, and louvers. Provide product complying with the following:
1. ASTM C 1029, Type II, closed cell.
2. ASTM E 84: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed indexes of 75 and
450, respectively.
3. AAMA 812.
4. Basis of Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one
of the following:
a. Dow Chemical; Froth Pak.
b. Zerodraft Products, Inc.; Zero Draft Foam Sealant.
C. Insulation for Filling Miscellaneous Voids:

1. Glass Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame
spread and smoke developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing

projections capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with
insulation attachment.
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and

applications.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed
to ice, rain, or snow at any time.
C. Install insulation with manufacturer's R-value label exposed after insulation is installed.
D. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions
and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
E. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses,
widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are
otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF SLAB INSULATION
A. On vertical slab edge and foundation surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's
recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches below exterior
grade line.
B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.
1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 36 inches in from
exterior walls.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF FOUNDATION WALL INSULATION
A. Butt panels together for tight fit.

1. Anchor Installation: Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively
attached, spindle-type insulation anchors as follows:
2. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive
according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Space anchors according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions for
insulation type, thickness, and application.
4. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated on
Drawings between concrete substrate and insulation.
5. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position
over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers,
taking care not to compress insulation.
6. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped
washers to tips of spindles.
B. Adhesive Installation: Install with adhesive or press into tacky waterproofing or

dampproofing according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION
A. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation at Brick: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately

24 inches o.c. both ways on inside face and as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges
butted tightly in both directions, and with faces flush.
2. Press units firmly against inside substrates.
3. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece
wall ties designed for this purpose and specified in Section 04 22 00 "Concrete
Unit Masonry."
B. Mineral-Wool Board Insulation: Install insulation fasteners 4 inches from each corner of
board insulation, at center of board, and as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Fit courses of insulation between wall panel girts and other obstructions, with
edges butted tightly in both directions, and with faces flush.
2. Press units firmly against inside substrates.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the

following requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members.
If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will
produce a snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit
between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. Maintain 3-inch (76 mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures
not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.
4. For metal framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm),
support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping
flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.
B. Low-Expansion Detailing Foam Insulation: Fill gaps and voids between heads, jambs,
and sills and their rough openings, at the following openings in exterior walls:
1. Doors.
2. Windows.
3. Entrances and storefront.
4. Louvers.
5. Through-wall penetrations.
C. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where
required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:
1. Glass Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum
volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m).
3.7 CURTAIN WALL INSULATION
A. Install board insulation in curtain wall construction according to curtain wall

1. Hold insulation in place by securing metal clips and straps or integral pockets
within window frames, spaced at intervals recommended in writing by insulation
manufacturer to hold insulation securely in place without touching spandrel glass.
2. Maintain cavity width of dimension indicated on Drawings between insulation and
glass.
3. Install insulation to fit snugly without bowing.
3.8 ROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical
abuse, and other causes.
B. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and

cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after
installation.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 07 21 19
FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Spray-applied closed-cell polyurethane foam insulation.
2. Spray-applied thermal barrier.
B. Alternate: Open cell insulation
1.2 REFERENCES
1. ASTM C 1029: Specification for Spray-Applied Rigid Cellular Polyurethane
Thermal Insulation.
2. ASTM E 84: Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 285: Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation
Characteristics of Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing
Combustible Components.

A. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter
conditions requiring special treatment.
B. Qualification Data: For Installer.
C. Test and Evaluation Reports:

1. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by qualified testing
agency.
Foamed-In-Place Insulation 07 21 19 - 1
2. Research Reports: For spray-applied polyurethane foam-plastic insulation, from

ICC-ES showing compliance with requirements.
3. Evaluation Reports: For mastic and intumescent thermal barrier coating, from
ICC-ES.
A. Installer Qualifications, Foam Insulation: An authorized representative who is trained

and approved by foam insulation manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications, Thermal Barrier: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or

otherwise qualified by intumescent fire-resistive thermal barrier coating manufacturer as
experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according
to specified requirements.
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and
protecting during installation.
B. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging,
with labels clearly indicating manufacturer and material.
C. Store materials in an area protected from freezing and overheating, damage, and in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
D. Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage and contamination.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply products when ambient or substrate

temperature is 50 deg F or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to
maintain temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours
after product application.
B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of products, providing
complete air exchanges according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use natural
means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fire protection dries
thoroughly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2. Smoke-Development Index: 450 or less.
B. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E119 testing identical products

(based on a 4-inch minimum thickness) by a qualified testing agency. Identify products
with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
C. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved

assembly.
D. Compressive Strength: Minimum 40 psi (ASTM C1029, Type II).
2.2 SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION
A. Closed-Cell Spray Polyurethane Foam, Base Bid: ASTM C 1029, Type II, minimum
density of 2.0 lb/cu. ft. and minimum aged R-value of 6.5 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75
deg F per 1 inch of thickness.
of the following:
a. BASF Corp. - Construction Chemicals.
b. CertainTeed Corporation.
c. Demilec (USA) Inc.
d. Dow Chemical Company (The).
e. Henry Company.
f. Icynene, Inc.
g. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified
testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.
3. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an
approved assembly.
4. Thermal Resistivity: Not less than R-19.5 for three inches thickness.
5. Thickness: Not less than thickness required to achieve specified thermal
resistivity.
B. Open-Cell Spray Polyurethane Foam, Alternate: Spray-applied polyurethane foam using

water as a blowing agent. Minimum density of 0.4 lb/cu. ft. and minimum aged R-value
at 1-inch thickness of 3.4 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F.

Huntsman Building Solutions; HBS Classic Ultra or a comparable product by one
of the following:
a. Carlisle Spray Foam Insulation.

b. Gaco; Holcim Building Envelope.
c. Henry Company; a Carlisle company.
d. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
e. Master Builders Solutions.
f. NCFI Polyurethanes; a division of Barnhardt Manufacturing Company.

g. SES Foam LLC.
h. SWD Urethane Company.
2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified

agency.


assembly.
4. Thermal Resistivity: Not less than R-19.5
a. Thickness: Not less than thickness required to achieve specified thermal
resistivity.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Material recommended by insulation manufacturer where required for adhesion

of insulation to substrates.
B. Thermal Barrier: Material barrier intended to prevent flame-source access to foam and
delay temperature-rise of foam during a fire event.
1. Thermal Barrier Coating: Fire-protective intumescent coating formulated for
application over polyurethane foam plastics, compatible with insulation, and
passes NFPA 275 testing as part of an approved assembly.
2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified
agency.
3. Topcoat: 8- to 12-mil-thick, water-based latex-based paint or heavy-duty
protective coating recommended in writing by intumescent thermal barrier
manufacturer as compatible with substrate materials.
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard options.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Verify that substrates are clean, dry, and free of substances that are harmful to insulation.
B. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fire protection materials
during application.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fire protection.
D. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by insulation manufacturer. Apply

primer to comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to
areas to be insulated; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and

applications.
B. Spray insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated and fill voids.
C. Apply in multiple passes to not exceed maximum thicknesses recommended by

manufacturer. Do not spray into rising foam.
D. Do not apply insulation within 3 inches of heat-emitting devices or where temperature

exceeds 200 deg F per ASTM C411, or in accordance with applicable codes.
E. Install thermal barrier material.

1. Do not cover insulation prior to any required spray foam insulation inspections.
F. Apply barrier coatings in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and to

comply with requirements for listing and labeling for fire-propagation characteristics and
surface-burning characteristics specified.
1. Use equipment and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material
applied as recommended by coating manufacturer.
2. Apply coatings to prepared surfaces as soon as practical after preparation and
before subsequent surface soiling or deterioration.
3. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays,
laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface
imperfections. Produce sharp lines and color breaks.
G. Cure thermal barrier according to mastic and intumescent coating manufacturer's written
instructions.
H. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after foamed-in-place insulation

assembly has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to
deficient applications.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test

and inspect spray foam insulation installation, including accessories. Report results in
writing.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of

Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and
clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation system from damage resulting from construction operations
or other causes, so insulation and thermal barrier are without damage or deterioration at
END OF SECTION
SECTION 07 22 16
ROOF BOARD INSULATION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES (INCLUDING LATEST REVISIONS)
A. Comply with governing local, state, and federal regulations, safety standards, and codes.
B. Testing Laboratory Services: Test results shall meet or exceed established standards.
C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (Roofing Covering): Class A fire hazard classification.
D. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM)

1. C 177 Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus
2. C 209 Methods of Testing Insulating Board (Cellulosic Fiber), Structural and
Decorative
3. C 728 Perlite Thermal Insulation Board
4. D 41 Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing and Waterproofing
5. D 312 Asphalt Used in Roofing
6. D 1621 Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics
7. D 4601 Asphalt Coated Glass Fiber Base Sheet Used in Roofing
E. The National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) - Roofing and Waterproofing Manual
F. American National Standards Institute/Single Ply Roofing Industry (ANSI/SPRI)
G. American Society of Civil Engineers - ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and
Other Structures (for wind uplift criteria)
A. Regulatory Requirements
1. Classified by Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) as Class A roof covering.
2. Follow local, state, and federal regulations, safety standards, and codes.
B. Installation
1. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's current published application
procedures, NRCA general recommendations, and ASCE 7 wind uplift criteria.
2. Roof system manufacturer's technical specifications shall be considered part of this
specification and shall be used as reference for specific application procedures.
C. Contract Documents
1. In the case of an inconsistency between the drawings and specifications or within
either document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of
work shall be provided in accordance with the Project Manager's/Architect's
interpretation.
Roof Board Insulation 07 22 16 - 1

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's product data sheets for each product.
B. Shop Drawings: Layout of roof plan showing tapered design, tapered insulation pattern,
direction of slope, amount of slope, spot elevations indicating thicknesses at high and low
points.
C. Certification: Submit roof manufacturer's certification in writing that insulation is acceptable

as substrate for application of specified roof system.
A. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. When stored outdoors:

1. Tarp and shield insulation from moisture and ultraviolet rays.
2. Elevate insulation above substrate four inches minimum.
3. Secure insulation to resist high winds.
4. Distribute insulation stored on roof deck to prevent concentrated loads that would
impose excessive stress or stain on deck or structural members. Verify that structure
can accommodate additional loading.
5. Wet insulation, or insulation that has been wet but which has dried, may not be used
and shall be removed completely and immediately from the job site.
6. Do not double stack bundles of insulation on the roof top.
A. Substrate Acceptance: Roof system manufacturer's representative shall inspect roof deck
and associated substrates and provide written acceptance of conditions.
B. Manufacturer's approved roofing contractor shall inspect and approve deck and substrates.
C. Plan roof layout with respect to roof deck slope to prevent rainwater drainage into completed
roofing.
D. Do not install more insulation than can be covered with complete roof system in same day.
1.6 PRODUCT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Apply roofing and insulation in dry weather.
2. Do not proceed with roof construction during inclement weather or when precipitation
is predicted 40% or more possibility.
3. Do not apply insulation over wet or moist deck or in foggy conditions.
4. Days with wind speeds of 30 mph or greater shall be considered "Bad Weather" days.
B. Emergency Equipment: Maintain on-site equipment and material necessary to apply

emergency temporary seals I the event of sudden storms or inclement weather.
C. Costs for emergency roofing shall be borne by Contractor.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 NAILBASE FOR STEEP SLOPE
A. Factory fabricated polyisocyanurate nailbase clad rigid insulation with nominal

three-fourths inch (3/4") exterior grade plywood cladding to achieve a minimum total
R-value of 30. Verify compatibility with roofing membrane manufacturer.
1. Rmax, “Nailable Base-3”
2. Hunter Panels, “H-Shield NB”
2.2 INSULATION – FLAT STOCK
A. All insulation shall be approved in writing by the membrane manufacturer as to thickness,

type, and manufacturer. All insulation must be approved for the specific application,
Underwriters Laboratory approved, and be listed in the FM Global Approval Guide.
B. Polyisocyanurate Roof Insulation: Insulation shall be two layers of rigid polyisocyanurate

foam board; meeting Federal Specification No. HH-I-1972/1 or 2 with 20 psi minimum
compressive strength and 2.0 pcf minimum density. First layer shall be a minimum
thickness of two and one-half inch (2-1/2"). R-value over each roof area shall meet or
exceed R-25. Board shall be surfaced on two (2) sides with non-asphaltic facer material.
2.3 INSULATION – TAPERED
A. Factory Tapered Polyisocyanurate for Field of Roof: Shall be tapered polyisocyanurate

board, with a 20 psi minimum compressive strength and nominal 2.0 pcf density.
Insulation shall be of thickness required for one-fourth inch (1/4") slope per foot to roof
drains as shown on drawings with a minimum edge thickness of one and one-half inch (1-
1/2"). R-value over each roof area shall meet or exceed R-25. Insulation shall be
surfaced on two (2) sides with a non-asphaltic facer material.
B. Factory Tapered Polyisocyanurate Crickets: Factory cut twenty-four inch by forty-eight

inch (24" x 48") polyisocyanurate board cut to one-half inch (1/2") per foot slope used in
conjunction with standard thickness of polyisocyanurate board to provide positive slope.
2.4 COVER BOARD
A. Shall be fiberboard thickness of 1/2", board size four feet by eight feet (4' x 8'),
impregnated six (6) sides with asphalt, Underwriters Laboratory approved and listed in the
FM Global Approval Guide.
2.5 ASPHALT ROOF PRIMER
A. Quick-dry asphalt-based primer for priming of asphalt roof surfaces, as manufactured by

GAF, or approved equal.

Applicable Federal Specification SS-A-701B

ASTM D 41
Flash Point 105° F
Viscosity at 80° F (ASTM D 217) 50-60 K.U.
Weight per gallon 7.4 pounds
Drying time (to touch) Min. 4 hours
2.6 BITUMEN
A. Shall be ASTM D 312 Type IV extra steep asphalt.
B. Contractor shall mix with the hot asphalt an additive that eliminates the asphalt odor, such
as descent, as manufactured by ArrMaz Custom Chemicals, or approved equal.
2.7 COLD INSULATION ADHESIVE
A. Shall be a single component, moisture-cured polyurethane adhesive, free of conventional

solvents; Insta-Stik® as manufactured by The Dow Chemical Company, or approved equal.
2.8 FASTENERS
A. Fasteners and fastening plates and/or termination bars shall be FM Approved and shall be
listed in the FM Global Approval Guide, and as recommended by the insulation/fastener
manufacturer for the specific application to meet the minimal requirements for wind uplift as
required by the local jurisdiction and/or FM Global.
B. Standard Fastener for Steel Applications for 18-24 gauge Steel Substrates: Shall be a #14
fastener with a minimum .220 thread diameter and .12.5 buttress threads and a 30 degree
spade point. Fasteners shall be fluorocarbon coated with CR-10 corrosion resistant coating
when subjected to 30 Kesternich cycles (DIN 50018) shows less than 15% red rust which
surpasses FM Global Approval Standard 4470, as manufactured by OMG Roofing Products,
or approved equal. All fasteners shall be used in conjunction with the manufacturers
approved round pressure plate. Fasteners, plates, and/or bars shall be FM approved and
listed in the FM Global Approval Guide.
C. Heavy Duty Fastener for Steel Applications for 18-22 gauge Steel and Wood Substrates:
Shall be a #14 fastener with a minimum .190 diameter shank and a thread diameter of .245
with ten (10) threads per inch and a 30 degree spade point. Fasteners shall be fluorocarbon
coated with CR-10 corrosion resistant coating when subjected to 30 Kesternich cycles (DIN
50018) shows less than 15% red rust which surpasses FM Global Approval Standard 4470,
as manufactured by OMG Roofing Products, or approved equal. All fasteners shall be used
in conjunction with the manufacturers approved round pressure plate. Fasteners, plates,
and/or bars shall be FM approved and listed in the FM Global Approval Guide.
3.1 PROTECTION OF ROOFING
A. Provide special protection from traffic on yet to be removed roofing.
B. Provide special protection from traffic on completed work.

3.2 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Do not install until defects are corrected and deck substrate meets roof system
manufacturer's requirements.
B. Do not apply insulation unless asphalt application temperature, EVT of approximately 375° F
to 425° F, can be maintained or when water or moisture is present on substrate. Do not
heat asphalt above flashing point, or 525° F.
C. Examine substrate and related surfaces, and verify that there are no conditions such as
inadequate anchorage, foreign materials, moisture, ridges, depressions, or other conditions
which would prevent satisfactory installation of roof system.
D. Start of work constitutes acceptance of deck substrate and site conditions.
E. Sweep deck substrate clean of dust and debris immediately prior to installation of tapered
insulation.
3.3 NAILBASE FOR STEEP SLOPE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.
1. Install one (1) layer of nailbase insulation under area of roofing in required thickness to
achieve specified 'R' value. Install insulation in a continuous straight line with end
joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps
exceeding one-fourth inch (1/4") with insulation.
2. Attach insulation to deck as recommended by the insulation manufacturer in the
required pattern to achieve the design wind uplift loading specified.
3. Use Wind Rated fasteners as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
4. Apply no more insulation than can be covered in the same work day.
5. No insulation is required above uninsulated spaces, i.e. canopies and exterior porches.
3.4 APPLICATION OF INSULATION – GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
A. Manufacturer's Instructions: In regard to attachment, the manufacturer's instructions or

specifications shall determine the suitability for an application. Installation must meet ASCE
7 criteria and meet local governing building codes.
B. Precautions: The surface of the insulation must not be ruptured due to overdriving of
fasteners.
C. Thermal insulation boards shall be laid on the substrate in parallel rows with end joints
staggered and butted as close as possible. All joints shall be tight and at the roof perimeter
and roof penetrations, insulation shall be cut neatly and fitted to reduce openings to a
minimum. All openings one-fourth inch (1/4") or larger shall be filled with insulation.
D. Insulation shall be tapered or feathered at drains and scuppers to provide proper drainage (if
applicable).
E. No more insulation shall be installed than can be covered by the completed roof system by
the end of the day or the onset of inclement weather.

F. Tapered insulation and crickets, when specified, shall be placed in accordance with the
drawings and/or as required to minimum of NRCA standards.
3.5 APPLICATION OF INSULATION - FULLY ADHERED IN HOT OVER CONCRETE
A. After proper priming of the concrete deck, specified flat stock insulation shall be bonded to
the deck with a solid mopping of steep asphalt Type IV, as required by slope (NRCA), at the
minimum rate of twenty-five pounds (25#) ±20%, per one hundred (100) square feet of
surface, and immediately walked in place over venting base sheet.
B. The top surface of the first layer of flat stock insulation shall be coated with hot asphalt using
twenty-five pounds (25#) ±20%, per one hundred (100) square feet of surface, and
specified flat stock insulation shall be applied using offset joints, so that each layer breaks
joints to a minimum of six inches (6") both ways with the preceding layer, and immediately
walked in place.
C. The top surface of preceding insulation shall be coated with hot asphalt using twenty-five
pounds (25#) ±20%, per one hundred (100) square feet of surface, and specified tapered
insulation shall be applied using offset joints, so that each layer breaks joints to a minimum
of six inches (6") both ways with the preceding layer, and immediately walked in place.
D. The top surface of the preceding insulation shall be coated with hot asphalt using twenty-
five pounds (25#) ±20%, per one hundred (100) square feet of surface, and specified cover
board shall be applied using offset joints, so that each layer breaks joints to a minimum of
six inches (6") both ways with the preceding layer, and immediately walked in place.
3.6 APPLICATION OF INSULATION OVER METAL DECK - MECHANICALLY

FASTENED/ADHERED
A. Specified flat stock insulation shall be mechanically fastened to conform to the ASCE 7
criteria for wind uplift as dictated by wind zone applicable to location of project. Fasteners
and fastening patterns shall be determined by building height, location and geographical
area of the United States. It is the contractor's responsibility to consult current publications,
literature, and bulletins of IBC and the manufacturer that are in effect at the time of this
project. Boards shall be staggered and butted as close as possible with voids over
one-fourth inch (1/4") to be filled.
B. Insulation shall be laid with edges parallel to flutes and bearing on deck surface/flats. The
long dimension of base insulation layer must be fully supported by the top flange of the
metal deck. The edges of insulation boards must not cantilever over the flutes of the metal
deck.
C. The top surface of the mechanically fastened layer of flat stock insulation shall be coated
with hot asphalt using twenty-five pounds (25#) ±20%, per one hundred (100) square feet of
surface, and a second layer of specified flat stock insulation shall be applied using offset
joints, so that each layer breaks joints to a minimum of six inches (6") both ways with the
preceding layer, and immediately walked in place.

D. The top surface of the preceding layer of insulation shall be coated with hot asphalt using
specified tapered insulation shall be applied using offset joints, so that each layer breaks
joints to a minimum of six inches (6") both ways with the preceding layer, and immediately
walked in place.
E. The top surface of the preceding layer of insulation shall be coated with hot asphalt using
specified cover board shall be applied using offset joints, so that each layer breaks joints to
a minimum of six inches (6") both ways with the preceding layer, and immediately walked in
place.
3.7 BACKNAILING/STRAPPING
A. On slopes greater than one inch (1") in twelve inches (12"), refer to NRCA and/or
manufacturer's guidelines for backnailing procedures and follow the more stringent
guidelines for all specified materials.
Slope Interply& Top Pour Backnail Strap

0 - ½" per 12" Type IV No No
½" - 2" per 12" Type IV Yes Strap if possible
2" - 3" per 12" Type IV Yes Yes
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Remove insulation which has been damaged (broken, cracked, punctured, wet, etc.) and
install acceptable new units before installation of roof system.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Remove debris and material wrappers from jobsite. Leave insulation clean and dry, ready to
receive roofing membrane.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 07 27 26
FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Vapor permeable, fluid applied air barriers with extruded silicone detailing tape for
silicone-based systems or with poly or foil-faced butyl-based sheet detailing tape
for STPE-based systems.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Air Barrier Material: A primary element that provides a continuous barrier to the
movement of air.
B. Air Barrier Accessory: A transitional component of the air barrier that provides continuity.
C. Air Barrier Assembly: The collection of air barrier materials and accessories applied to
an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air
movement through the wall.
1. Review air-barrier requirements and installation, special details, mockups, air-

leakage and bond testing, air-barrier protection, and work scheduling that covers
air barriers.
A. Product Data: Technical data for each type of product including manufacturer's written
instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating each substrate; technical data; dry
film thickness; and tested physical and performance properties of products.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit plans and details for air barrier assemblies.
1. Show locations and extent of air barrier materials, accessories, and assemblies
specific to conditions.
2. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, counterflashing strips, penetrations,
inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie ins with adjoining construction.
3. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier system.
Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barriers-Stpe 07 27 26 - 1

A. Qualification Data: Submit data for Installer.
B. Product Certificates: From air barrier manufacturer, certifying compatibility of air barriers
and accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact
with the barrier.
C. Product Test Reports: Submit report for each air barrier assembly for tests performed by
a qualified testing agency.
D. Field quality control reports.
A. Installer Qualifications: Entity having minimum 5 years documented experience that

employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.
1. Installer shall be licensed by ABAA according to ABAA's Quality Assurance

Program and shall employ ABAA certified installers and supervisors.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain primary air-barrier materials and air barrier accessories from
single source from single manufacturer.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build integrated mockups of exterior wall assembly, 150 sq. ft. (14 sq. m),
incorporating backup wall construction, external cladding, window, storefront, door
frame and sill, insulation, ties and other penetrations, and sheet membrane and
tape flashing to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment,
application of air barriers, and sealing of gaps, terminations, transitions, and
penetrations of air barrier assembly.
a. Coordinate construction of mockups to permit inspection of air barrier before

insulation and cladding are installed.
b. Include junction with roofing membrane, building corner condition, and
foundation wall intersection.
c. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements,
reconstruct mockups and apply air barrier until mockups are approved.
deviations in writing.
the completed work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
A. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.

B. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended in writing by air barrier manufacturer.
1. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect air barrier

performance.
2. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or
mist.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary air-barrier materials and air-barrier accessories from
A. Air Barrier Performance: Air barrier assembly and seals with adjacent construction shall
be capable of performing as continuous air barrier and as a liquid water drainage plane
flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air
barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of
sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes,
penetrations, tie ins to installed waterproofing, and transitions at perimeter conditions
without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits.
B. Air-Barrier Assembly Air Leakage: Maximum 0.04 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57
lbf/sq. ft., when tested according to ASTM E 2357.
2.3 MEDIUM BUILD AIR BARRIERS, VAPOR PERMEABLE
A. Medium Build, Vapor Permeable Air Barrier: Silicone or STPE with an installed dry film
thickness, according to manufacturer's written instructions over smooth, void free
substrates.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or

equivalent by manufacturers and systems approved by Architect.
a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc; Barrithane VP with BRT-801 Black

HDPE Butyl Flashing Tape.
b. DuPont de Nemours, Inc.; DuPont Tyvek Fluid Applied WB with Duragard-
CW butyl flashing tape.
c. GCP; Grace Perm-A-Barrier VPL 50RS UV Stable Membrane with Grace
Ultra butyl flashing tape.

d. GE/Momentive; GE Elemax 2600 AWB with factory-extruded silicone

detailing membranes and accessories, set in continuous bed of silicone
sealant.
2. System using liquid flashings or rubberized asphalt based sheet in lieu of butyl
detailing and flashing sheet not permitted:
3. Physical and Performance Properties:
a. Air Permeance: Maximum 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft.
(0.02 L/s x sq. m of surface area at 75-Pa) pressure difference;
ASTM E 2178.
b. Vapor Permeance: Minimum 10 perms (580 ng/Pa x s x sq. m);
ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant Method, Procedure A.
c. Ultimate Elongation: Minimum 250 percent; ASTM D 412, Die C.
d. Adhesion to Substrate: Minimum 16 lbf/sq. in. (110 kPa) when tested
according to ASTM D 4541.
e. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an
approved assembly.
f. UV Resistance: Can be exposed to sunlight for 150 days according to
2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Provide primers, transition strips, termination strips, joint reinforcing fabric and strips,
joint sealants, counterflashing strips, flashing sheets and metal termination bars,
termination mastic, substrate patching materials, adhesives, tapes, foam sealants, lap
sealants, and accessory materials recommended in writing by air barrier manufacturer
to produce a complete air barrier assembly and compatible with primary air barrier
material and adjacent construction to which they may seal.
B. Primer: Liquid primer recommended for substrate by air barrier material manufacturer.
C. Polyester-film with butyl adhesive:
1. Basis of Design: As listed above with air barrier products or Wicked Flashing by
York Flashing.
2. Rubberized asphalt based sheet products not permitted.
D. Stainless Steel:
1. Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.0187 inch (0.5 mm) thick, and
Series 300 stainless steel fasteners.
2. Self-Adhering Fabric Flashing: Type 304 self-adhering stainless steel by York
Flashing or Multi-Flash SS by Hohmann & Barnard.
E. Engineered Transition Assembly (ETA): Pre-engineered assembly of extruded

aluminum adapters and cured, extruded silicone, sized to fit opening widths and glazing
pockets, with a single-component, neutral-curing, Class 100/50 (low-modulus) silicone
sealant for bonding silicone extrusions to substrates.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may

be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Tremco Incorporated; ETA Proglaze
F. Preformed Silicone Extrusion: System consisting of cured low modulus silicone

extrusion, sized to fit opening widths, with single component, neutral curing,
Class 100/50 (low modulus) silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates.

of the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 123 Silicone Seal.

b. Momentive Performance Materials Inc.; US11000 UltraSpan.
c. Pecora Corporation; Sil-Span.
d. Tremco Incorporated, an RPM company; Spectrem Simple Seal.
G. Roof Cements, asphalt-based materials, and rubberized asphalt products: Not permitted.
H. Joint Sealants: Refer to Section 07 92 00 “Joint Sealants.”
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements and
conditions affecting performance of the work.
1. Verify substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or
contaminants.
2. Verify substrates have cured and aged for minimum time recommended in writing
by air barrier manufacturer.
3. Verify substrates are visibly dry and free of moisture. Test concrete substrates for
capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
4. Verify that masonry joints are flush and filled with mortar.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean, prepare, treat, fill, and seal substrate and joints and cracks in substrate according
to manufacturer's written instructions and details. Provide clean, dust free, and dry
substrate for air barrier application.
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray
affecting other construction.
C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form release agents, paints, curing compounds, and
penetrating contaminants or film forming coatings from concrete.

D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate
pockets, holes, and voids in concrete or masonry substrates with patching material.
E. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp

corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.
F. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to
another with stainless steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide
continuous support for air barrier.
G. Bridge isolation joints, expansion joints, and discontinuous wall to wall, deck to wall, and
deck to deck joints with air barrier accessory material that accommodates joint
movement according to manufacturer's written instructions and details.
3.3 ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A. Install accessory materials according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions

and details to form a seal with adjacent construction and ensure continuity of air and
water barrier.
1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and
base flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane.
2. Install transition strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of
3 inches (75 mm) of coverage is achieved over each substrate.
3. Unless manufacturer recommends in writing against priming, apply primer to
substrates at required rate and allow it to dry.
4. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas
that will be covered by air barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed
for more than 24 hours.
B. Connect and seal exterior wall air barrier material continuously to roofing membrane air
barrier, concrete below grade structures, floor to floor construction, exterior glazing and
window systems, glazed curtain wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers,
exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using
accessory materials.
1. Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of window systems,

glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, and exterior
door framing. Apply engineered transition assembly (ETA) or preformed silicone-
sealant extrusion so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over
each substrate. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm bearing to perimeter
frames with not less than 1 inch of full contact.
a. Engineered Transition Assembly (ETA): Set in full bed of silicone sealant

applied to walls, frame, and membrane.
b. Preformed Silicone-Sealant Extrusion: Set in full bed of silicone sealant
applied to walls, frame, and membrane.
C. At end of each day, seal top edge of strips and transition strips to substrate with
termination mastic.

D. Apply joint sealants forming part of air-barrier assembly within manufacturer's

recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant
cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
E. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors,
and miscellaneous penetrations of air barrier material with foam sealant.
F. Seal strips and transition strips around masonry reinforcing or ties and penetrations with
termination mastic or sealant.
G. Seal top of through wall flashings to air barrier with an additional 6 inch (150 mm) wide,
transition strip.
H. Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not
concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic or
sealant.
I. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit
and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches (150
mm) beyond repaired areas in strip direction.
3.4 PRIMARY AIR BARRIER MATERIAL INSTALLATION
A. Apply air barrier material to form a seal with strips and transition strips and to achieve a
continuous air barrier according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions and
details. Apply air barrier material within manufacturer's recommended application
temperature ranges.
1. Unless manufacturer recommends in writing against priming, apply primer to

substrates at required rate and allow it to dry.
2. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air barrier material on same day.
Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.
3. Where multiple prime coats are needed to achieve required bond, allow adequate
drying time between coats.
B. Medium Build Air Barriers: Apply continuous unbroken air barrier material to substrates
according to the specified thickness. Apply an increased thickness of air barrier material
in full contact around protrusions such as masonry ties.
1. Vapor Permeable, Medium Build Air Barrier: Total dry film thickness recommended
in writing by manufacturer to comply with performance requirements, but not less
than 22 mils, applied in one or more equal coats. Apply additional material as
needed to achieve void and pinhole free surface, but do not exceed thickness on
which required vapor permeability is based.
C. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by testing agency.
D. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements;
repair substrates and reapply air barrier components.

inspections.
B. Inspections: Air barrier materials, accessories, and installation are subject to inspection
for compliance with requirements. Inspections may include the following:
1. Continuity of air barrier system has been achieved throughout the building
envelope with no gaps or holes.
2. Air barrier dry film thickness.
3. Continuous structural support of air barrier system has been provided.
4. Masonry and concrete surfaces are smooth, clean, and free of cavities,
protrusions, and mortar droppings.
5. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates have been
maintained.
6. Maximum exposure time of materials to UV deterioration has not been exceeded.
7. Surfaces have been primed, if applicable.
8. Laps in strips and transition strips have complied with minimum requirements and
have been shingled in the correct direction (or mastic has been applied on exposed
edges), with no fishmouths.
9. Termination mastic has been applied on cut edges.
10. Strips and transition strips have been firmly adhered to substrate.
11. Compatible materials have been used.
12. Transitions at changes in direction and structural support at gaps have been
provided.
13. Connections between assemblies (air barrier and sealants) have complied with
requirements for cleanliness, surface preparation and priming, structural support,
integrity, and continuity of seal.
14. All penetrations have been sealed.
C. Tests: Determined by testing agency from among the following tests:
1. Air Leakage Location Testing: Air barrier assemblies will be tested for evidence of
air leakage according to ASTM E 1186, chamber pressurization or
depressurization with smoke tracers.
2. Air Leakage Volume Testing: Air barrier assemblies will be tested for air leakage
rate according to ASTM E 779.
3. Adhesion Testing: Air barrier assemblies will be tested for required adhesion to
substrate according to ASTM D 4541 for each 600 sq. ft. (56 sq. m) of installed air
barrier or part thereof.
D. Air barriers are considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
1. Apply additional air barrier material, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, where inspection results indicate insufficient thickness.
2. Remove and replace deficient air barrier components for retesting as specified
above.
E. Repair damage to air barriers caused by testing; follow manufacturer's written

instructions.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect air barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction
period, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as
recommended in writing by manufacturer. If exposed to these conditions for longer
than recommended, remove and replace air barrier or install additional, full
thickness, air barrier application after repairing and preparing the overexposed
materials according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Protect air barrier from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not
approved by air barrier manufacturer.
B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed
work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended in writing by manufacturer of
affected construction.
C. Remove masking materials after installation.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 07 42 13
FORMED METAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Custom, concealed-fastener formed metal wall and soffit panels, MP-1 and MP-2,
and thermally-broken framing system.
2. Exposed fastener, lap-seam, perforated metal wall panels at dumpster enclosure.
B. Base Bid: Submit pricing based on Work of the following Sections, comprising total wall
assemblies:
1. 07 27 26 “Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barriers”

2. 07 21 00 “Thermal Insulation”
3. Metal panel types MP-1 and MP-2, including thermally-broken girt and framing
system specified in this Section.
C. Alternate: Submit alternate price for single source responsibility and warranty at Work of
MP-1 and MP-2 for total wall system including metal panels, air barrier, mineral wool
insulation and impaling pins, and girts/framing.
1. Air Barrier: Comply with requirements specified in Section 07 27 26 “Fluid Applied

Membrane Air Barriers” for STPE or silicone-based, vapor permeable, fluid-applied
air barrier with butyl tape at detailing such as joints, transitions, changes in plane
and materials, and related conditions.
2. Insulation: Comply with Section 07 21 00 “Thermal Insulation” for insulation and
related impaling pins and fasteners.
3. Girts: Thermally broken as specified in this Section
4. Metal Panels: Custom, concealed fastener panels and trim, as specified in this
Section.
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, metal panel Installer,
metal panel manufacturer's representative, structural-support Installer, and
installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal panels, including installers of
doors, windows, and louvers.
2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,
Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
Formed Metal Wall Panels 07 42 13 - 1

3. Review methods and procedures related to metal panel installation, including

4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment
between and attachment to structural members.
5. Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition
of other construction that affect metal panels.
6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and
tests and inspections if applicable.
7. Review temporary protection requirements for metal panel assembly during and
after installation.
8. Review of procedures for repair of metal panels damaged after installation.
9. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and
furnish copy of record to each participant.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge

conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim,
flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.
2. Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim, and anchorage systems, at a
scale of not less than 3 inches per 12 inches.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For formed metal wall panels indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed
by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Certify compliance of total wall assembly with NFPA 285.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal panel indicated with factory-applied
finishes.
1. Include Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish, prepared on Samples of size
indicated below:
1. Metal Panels: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, closures,
and other metal panel accessories.
A. Delegated Design Submittals: For total metal panel wall system, including air barrier,
girts/framing, insulation, and metal panels. Include analysis data signed and sealed by

the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation showing compliance
with specified performance requirements including continuous insulation.
C. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing
agency.
A. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
B. Maintenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained
and approved by manufacturer.
B. UL-Certified, Portable Roll-Forming Equipment: UL-certified, portable roll-forming

equipment capable of producing metal panels warranted by manufacturer to be the same
as factory-formed products. Maintain UL certification of portable roll-forming equipment
for duration of work.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup of typical metal panel assembly as shown on Drawings, including

corner, soffits, supports, attachments, and accessories.
a. Include custom trim conditions including full-formed corners with no miter.
2. Water-Spray Test: Conduct water-spray test of metal panel assembly mockup,

testing for water penetration according to AAMA 501.2.
A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be

damaged or deformed. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and
handling.
B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting,
and surface damage.

C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable

weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive
slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal panels in contact with other materials
that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation.
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted
weather conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to
manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction
of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive
installation.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair

or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.

b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which

manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of
deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to

ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to
ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

45 16 "Contractor’s Quality Control," to design formed metal wall panel systems.
B. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the

effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:
1. Wind Loads: Caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to
plane of wall as calculated in accordance with SEI/ASCE 7 to establish wind
pressure based on the criteria listed on Drawings.
3. Deflection Limits: Not to exceed 1/240 of the span.
C. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to
ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference:
1. Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..
D. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according
to ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference:
1. Test-Pressure Difference: 12 lbf/sq. ft.
E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental
effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat
gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
F. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the
listings of another qualified testing agency.
2.2 CONCEALED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS
A. General: Provide factory-formed metal panels designed to be field assembled by lapping

and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through
panel to supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required
for weathertight installation.
B. Concealed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels – MWP-1: Formed with vertical panel edges and
intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between panel edges.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, LATITUDE

Wall System by IMETCO, Innovative Metals Company, Inc. or comparable product
by one of the following:
C. Vertical-Rib, Standing-Seam Metal Panels – MWP-2: With separate mechanically field

crimped batten seam cap: Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges, pencil beads and
intermediate stiffening rib symmetrically spaced between ribs; designed for 2-direction
installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located
under one side of panels and engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, attaching a
separate batten seam cap and mechanically seaming panels together.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, Series 300

System by IMETCO, Innovative Metals Company, Inc. or comparable product by
D. Other acceptable manufacturers include but not limited to the following:
1. AEP Span; a BlueScope Steel company.

2. ATAS International, Inc.
3. CENTRIA Architectural Systems.
4. Fabral.
5. MBCI; a division of NCI Building Systems, L.P.
6. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC
7. Morin; a Kingspan Group company.
E. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with

ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation, Class AZ50 coating designation;
structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with
ASTM A 755/A 755M.
1. Nominal Thickness: 22 Gauge, 0.029-inchnominal thickness.

2. Exterior Finish:
a. MWP-1: AAMA 2605; Two-coat fluoropolymer.
1) Color, MP-1- Basis of Design: IMETCO’s “Tin Lizzie” or as selected by

Architect
b. MP-2: AAMA 2605; Two-coat fluoropolymer.
1) Color, MP-2- Basis of Design: IMETCO’s Da Vinci “Carmine Blush” or

as selected by Architect
3. Panel orientation: Horizontal.

4. Configuration: Panel shall be 12” wide (nominal) with interlocking seams
incorporating concealed anchor clips allowing thermal movement.
5. Panel Depth (Concealed Leg Height): 1 7/16 inches , nominal.
6. Anchor clips: Clips shall be 18 gauge galvanized steel designed to allow thermal
movement of the panel in each direction along the longitudinal dimension.
7. Panel length: Up to 25 feet maximum length.

8. Corner Units: For horizontally oriented panel installations only, provide factory
fabricated mitered corner units of the same profile(s) as specified. Corner units
shall be furnished for outside and inside corner conditions.
9. Pre-notched closure angle: In trim areas where the metal panel foam closures can
be seen, a pre-notched closure angle piece that matches the metal panel profile is
to be factory fabricated by the manufacturer for these conditions.
F. Flush-Profile, Concealed-Fastener Metal Soffit Panels: As scheduled on Drawings.
2.3 EXPOSED FASTENER PANELS AT DUMPSTER GATES
A. Provide factory-formed metal panels designed to be field assembled by lapping side

edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed
fasteners in side laps.
B. Tapered-Rib-Profile, Exposed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Formed with raised,

trapezoidal major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between
major ribs.
McElroy Metal, Inc; R-Panel, perforated as shown on Drawings, or a comparable
product by one of the following:
a. ATAS International, Inc.
b. Fabral; a brand of OmniMax International.
c. MBCI; Cornerstone Building Brands.
d. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation.
e. PAC-CLAD; Petersen Aluminum Corporation; a Carlisle company.
2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with
ASTM A653/A653M, G90 coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel
sheet complying with ASTM A792/A792M, Class AZ50 coating designation;
structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with
ASTM A755/A755M and AAMA 2605.
a. Nominal Thickness: 0.022 inch.
b. Exterior Finish: AAMA 2605; Two-coat fluoropolymer.
c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
A. Thermally-broken framing and girts: Provide engineered systems by one of the following
for securing insulation and for mounting metal wall panels. Fabricate and design to
accommodate continuous insulation requirements and specified performance
requirements.
1. Acceptable manufacturers include but are not limited to:
a. Cascadia Clip; Cascadia Window
b. Knight Wall Systems
c. Smartci; Advanced Architectural Products
B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel

system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings,

sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of
metal panels unless otherwise indicated.
1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal
panels.
2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from
material recommended by manufacturer.
3. Closure Strips:
a. Face: Prefinished metal matching metal panels fabricated to match metal

panel profile including thickness and finish. Match detailing of approved
mockup.
b. Back-up: Provide behind prefinished metal closure panels; closed-cell,
expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell
laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or
premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips to ensure
weathertight construction.
C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels
as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations
include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed
openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and
trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.
1. Corners: Do not miter. Provide custom corner fabrications matching approved

mockups. Locate trim to panel joints not less than 12 inches from corners.
D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping, round-headed, tamper-resistant, stainless steel

designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with round heads
matching color of metal panels by means of factory-applied coating. Provide PVC for
interior and EPDM for exterior sealing washers for exposed fasteners.
E. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are

compatible with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.
1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene

compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic,
nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.
2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric STPE, STPU, or silicone sealant as
specified in Section 07 92 00; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required
to seal joints in metal panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in
writing by metal panel manufacturer.
3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by
manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated
performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated
profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

B. On-Site Fabrication: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, metal

panel trim may be fabricated on-site using UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment
if panels are of same profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory-formed
panels. Fabricate according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and to
comply with details shown.
C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full
length of panel.
D. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that
provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise
from movements.
E. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with
manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics
of item indicated.
1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed
edges folded back to form hems.
2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form
seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
3. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate
sealant and to comply with SMACNA standards.
4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners
are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal
panel manufacturer.
a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"

or metal wall panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness
of metal being secured.
2.6 FINISHES
A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying
a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces

are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable
variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other
components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are
assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
C. Steel Panels and Accessories:
1. MWP-1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621 or AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer

finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat.

Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
2. MWP-2. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621 or AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer
finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat.
coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
3. Exposed Fastener Panel. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621 or AAMA 2605.
Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in
color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to
comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
4. Colors: As listed or as selected by Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
requirements for installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions
1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other
structural panel support members and anchorage have been installed within
alignment tolerances required by metal wall panel manufacturer.
2. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or
blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal wall
panel manufacturer.
a. Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers have been installed over

sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water
penetration.
B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify
actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before
installation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel

support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel
manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.3 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Install metal panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in

orientation, sizes, and locations indicated. Install panels perpendicular to supports
unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work
securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.

1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels.

2. Flash and seal metal panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping
screws. Do not begin installation until air- or water-resistive barriers and flashings
that will be concealed by metal panels are installed.
3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.
4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
5. Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds.
6. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel
splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.
7. Align bottoms of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping
screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self-
tapping screws.
8. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels.
B. Fasteners:
1. Aluminum Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces

exposed to the exterior; use aluminum or galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces
exposed to the interior.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.
D. Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped
joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.
1. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib. Apply panels and associated items true to
line for neat and weathertight enclosure.
2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on
weather side of metal panels.
3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without
rupture of washer.
4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to
compress washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels.
Install screws in predrilled holes.
5. Flash and seal panels with weather closures at perimeter of all openings.
E. Watertight Installation:
1. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal lapped joints of metal panels,
using sealant or tape as recommend by manufacturer on side laps of nesting-type
panels; and elsewhere as needed to make panels watertight.
2. Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and
accessories.
3. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with sealant and
fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.
F. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and

weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with
flashings and other components.

1. Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim,
copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips,
and similar items. Provide types indicated by metal wall panel manufacturer; or, if
not indicated, provide types recommended by metal panel manufacturer.
G. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written

installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide
concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated.
Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight.
1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks, and that
is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and achieve waterproof
performance.
2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24
inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be
used or would not be sufficiently waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing
hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed
within joints).
inspections.
B. Water-Spray Test: After installation, test area of assembly once every 10,000 sq. ft. of
wall area, or fraction thereof, for water penetration according to AAMA 501.2 at locations
directed by Architect.
C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test

and inspect completed metal wall panel installation, including accessories.
D. Remove and replace metal wall panels where tests and inspections indicate that they do
not comply with specified requirements.
E. Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, are performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are
installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by
metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
B. After metal panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions,
dirt, and sealant.

C. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful
repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 07 52 16
MODIFIED ASPHALT BITUMINOUS ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 AREAS COVERED
A. Refer to roof plans for areas to be included in the scope of work
1.2 DEFINITIONS
ACM Asbestos Containing Materials

ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
EPDM Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer
EPS Expanded Polystyrene
EVT Equiviscous Temperatures
FM Factory Mutual
IBC International Building Code
KEE Ketone Ethylene Ester
NDL No Dollar Limit
NESHAP National Emissions Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants
NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association
OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration
SBS Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene
SDI Steel Deck Institute
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry
UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
1.3 REFERENCES (INCLUDING LATEST REVISIONS)
A. Comply with governing local, state, and federal regulations, safety standards, and
codes.
B. Testing Laboratory Services: Test results shall meet or exceed established

standards.
C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (Roofing Covering): Class A fire hazard

classification.
D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
E. The National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) - Roofing and

Waterproofing Manual
Modified Asphalt Bituminous Roofing 07 52 16 - 1

F. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) -

Architectural Sheet Metal Manual
G. American Society of Civil Engineers – ASCE 7
1.4 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS
A. Roofing installer must be:

1. Currently prequalified with the Owner in accordance with Owner's
prequalification requirements.
2. Currently in good standing with the manufacturer.
3. Installer must be an experienced single firm specializing in the type of roofing
repair and/or removal and replacement work required, employing only
experienced workers for the class of work in which they are employed, having
at least five (5) years successful experience on projects similar in size and
scope and acceptable as applicators by the Project Manager/Architect.
4. Contractor must have successfully completed previous projects warranted by
the manufacturer.
B. It shall remain each Bidder's responsibility to determine his current status with the
manufacturer's certification plan.
1.5 MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS
A. A qualified manufacturer is one that is UL listed and has FM approvals for a

membrane roofing system similar to that used for this project for a minimum of
fifteen (15) years.
1.6 CONTRACT DOCUMENT QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. In the case of an inconsistency between the drawings and specifications or within

either document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of
work shall be provided in accordance with the Project Manager's/Architect's
interpretation.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Provide manufacturer's approved details of all perimeter

conditions, projection conditions, and any additional special job conditions which
require details other than indicated in the drawings.

B. Refer to Specification Section 01 33 00 for Submittal requirements
A. Typical: Two-ply, Modified Bitumen Roofing System with factory applied cool roof
coating; reinforced modified bitumen cap sheet applied in mopping of hot asphalt
over modified bitumen base ply mopped to rigid insulation; with top surface coated
with Energy Star compliant factory applied reflective coating.
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and rolls with all
labels intact and legible including labels indicating appropriate warnings, storage
conditions, lot numbers, and usage instructions. Materials damaged in shipping or
storage shall not be used.
B. Manufacturer's packaging and/or roll plastic is not acceptable for exterior storage.
Tarpaulin with grommets shall be minimum acceptable for exterior coverings. All
materials stored as above shall be a minimum of four inches (4") off the substrate,
and the tarpaulin tied off with rope.
C. Deliver materials requiring fire resistance classification to the job with labels
attached and packaged as required by labeling service.
D. Deliver materials in sufficient quantity to allow continuity of work.
E. Handle and store material and equipment in such a manner as to avoid damage.
Liquid products shall be delivered sealed, in original containers.
F. Handle rolled goods so as to prevent damage to edge or ends.
G. Select and operate material handling equipment so as not to damage existing

construction or applied roofing.
H. Moisture-sensitive products shall be maintained in dry storage areas and properly

covered. Provide continuous protection of materials against wetting and moisture
absorption. Store roofing and flashing materials on clean raised platforms with
weather protective covering when stored outdoors.
I. Store rolled goods on end.
J. Protect materials against damage by construction traffic.
K. The proper storage of materials is the sole responsibility of the contractor and any
wet or damaged roofing materials shall be discarded, removed from the project
site, and replaced prior to application.
L. Comply with fire and safety regulations, especially with materials which are
extremely flammable and/or toxic. Use safety precautions indicated on labels.

M. Products liable, such as emulsions, to degrade as a result of being frozen shall be

maintained above 40° F in heated storage.
N. No storage of materials shall be permitted on roof areas other than those materials
that are to be installed the same day. Any exception must be in written form.
O. The contractor is to erect a temporary chain link fence, minimum six feet (6') in
height, around work area stage and kettles. Fence is to be secured on a daily
basis.
1.10 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Job Condition Requirements:

1. Coordinate the work of the contractor with the work to be performed by other
trades, to ensure proper sequencing of the entire work. The contractor is to
schedule his work so that adequate time is allowed for other trades to
perform their work.
2. Apply roofing in dry weather.
3. Do not apply roofing when ambient temperature is below 45° F.
4. Proceed with roofing work only when weather conditions are in compliance
with manufacturer's recommended limitations, and when conditions will
permit the work to proceed in accordance with specifications.
5. Schedule the work so the building will be left watertight at the end of each
day. Do not remove more roofing materials than can be reinstalled in any
working day.
6. Load placed on the roof at any point shall not exceed the safe load for which
the roof is designed.
7. All surfaces to receive new roofing shall be smooth, dry, and free from dirt,
debris, and foreign material before any of this work is installed. Competent
operators shall be in attendance at all times equipment is in use. Materials
shall be stored neatly in areas designated by the Project Manager/Architect.
8. The contractor is to be aware of the potential for roof leaks on the existing
roof as a result of ruptured blisters and/or roof mat damage caused by the
vacuum process, foot traffic, or material and equipment storage. The
contractor is to take all necessary precautions to prevent damage to the
existing roof. All damage to the existing roof that could result in roof leaks is
to be repaired on a daily basis by the roofing contractor.
9. The contractor shall follow local, state, and federal regulations, safety
standards, and codes for the removal, handling, and disposal of asbestos
containing materials, if present. When a conflict exists, follow the stricter
document.
10. Due caution should be exercised so as not to alter the structural integrity of
the deck. When cutting through any deck, care should be taken so as not to
damage the deck or any part of the deck, such as post tension cables, etc.
11. All kettles shall have a fume recovery system, automatic thermostat control,
and visible temperature gauge all in working order.
12. The contractor is to verify the location of all interior ducts, electrical lines,
piping, conduit, and/or similar obstructions. The contractor is to perform all
work in such a manner as to avoid contact with the above mentioned items.

13. Surface and air temperatures should be a minimum 40° F during applications
of cleaner and waterproof coating and remain above 40° F for a minimum of
four (4) hours following applications. Verify compatibility of cleaner with
coatings, paints, primers and joint sealers specified. Advise Project
Manager/Architect of any problems in this regard prior to commencing
cleaning operations.
14. Temporary Sanitary Facilities:
a. The contractor shall furnish and maintain temporary sanitary facilities for
employees use during this project, including temporary toilets, wash
facilities, and drinking water fixtures.
b. Toilet units shall be self-contained, single-occupant, of the chemical,
aerated recirculation, or combustion type, properly vented and fully
enclosed with a glass fiber reinforced polyester shell or similar
nonabsorbent material.
c. Facilities shall be installed where they will best service the project's needs,
with Owner's/Owner's Representative's approval.
d. Contractor shall provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar
disposable materials for each facility. Provide covered waste containers for
used material.
e. All portable facilities shall comply with local laws, codes, and regulations.
f. Contractor shall be responsible to see that the units are removed in a
timely manner after the completion of the project.
B. Protection of Work and Property:

1. Work: The contractor shall maintain adequate protection of all his work from
damage and shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from injury or
loss arising from this contract. Contractor shall provide and maintain at all
times any OSHA required danger signs, guards, and/or obstructions
necessary to protect the public and his workmen from any dangers inherent
with or created by the work in progress. All federal, state, and city rules and
requirements pertaining to safety and all EPA standards, OSHA standards,
NESHAP regulations pertaining to asbestos as required shall be fulfilled by
the contractor as part of his proposal.
2. Property: Protect existing planting and landscaping as necessary or required
to provide and maintain clearance and access to the work of this contract.
Examples of two categories or degrees of protection are generally as follows:
a) removal, protection, preservation, or replacement and replanting of plant
materials; b) protection of plant materials in place, and replacement of any
damage resulting from the contractor's operations.
3. Finished roof areas shall be protected from damage by the contractor during
construction.
4. Twenty-four Hour Call: The contractor shall have personnel on call 24 hours
per day, seven (7) days per week for emergencies during the course of a job.
The Owner/Project Manager/Architect is to have the 24 hour numbers for the
contact. Contractor must be able to respond to any emergency call and have
personnel on-site within two (2) hours after contact. Numbers available to the
Owner/Project Manager/Architect are to be both mobile, and office numbers
for:
a) Job Foreman
b) Job Superintendent
c) Owner or Company Officer

C. Damage to Work of Others: The contractor shall repair, refinish, and make good
any damage to the building or landscaping resulting from any of his operation.
This shall include, but is not limited to, any damage to plaster, tile work, wall
covering, paint, ceilings, floors, or any other finished work. Damage done to the
building, equipment, or grounds must be repaired at the successful contractor's
expense holding the Owner harmless from any other claims for property damage
and/or personal injury.
D. Measurements: It will be the contractor's responsibility to obtain and/or verify any

necessary dimensions by visiting the job site, and the contractor shall be
responsible for the correctness of same. Any drawings supplied are for reference
only.
E. Use of Premises:
1. The contractor is advised that the Owner will occupy the building at all times,
and the contractor must provide all safeguards required to protect personnel
and to keep noise levels as low as reasonably possible for each operation.
2. The contractor shall:
a) Coordinate work in such a manner as to not interfere with the normal
operation of the building.
b) Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of products
stored on premises.
c) Agree to hold the Owner harmless in any and all liability of every nature
and description which may be suffered through bodily injuries, including
death of any persons by reason of negligence of the contractor, agents,
employees, or subcontractors.
F. Cleaning and Disposal of Materials:

1. Contractor shall keep the job clean and free from all loose materials and
foreign matter. Contractor shall take necessary precautions to keep outside
walls clean and shall allow no roofing materials to remain on the outside
walls.
2. All waste materials, rubbish, etc., shall be removed from the Owner's
premises as accumulated. Rubbish shall be carefully handled to reduce the
spread of dust. A suitable scrap chute or hoist must be used to lower any
debris. At completion, all work areas shall be left broom clean and all
contractor's equipment and materials removed from the site.
3. All bituminous or roofing related materials shall be removed from ladders,
stairs, railings, and similar parts of the building.
4. Debris shall be deposited at an approved disposal site.
A. Coordinate roofing schedule with work of other trades.
B. Plan lay up of roofing membrane with respect to deck slope. Avoid situations
where excessive drainage could pass into completed roofing.
C. Maintain communication with roofing manufacturer's representative to inform of

progress and to schedule periodic inspections.
D. All penetrations shall be made in roof prior to beginning with roof installation.

A. Roofing System: Shall prevent water migration into roof assembly or building
interior through the roof membrane and/or membrane base flashing.
A. Work of this Section to conform to these specifications, and to the roofing material
manufacturer's application instructions. In the event of conflicts between the two,
the more stringent requirement shall be observed.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
C. Factory Technical Representative: Roofing Contractor is to arrange and schedule

the manufacturer’s technical representative to be on site the first day of the
installation of manufacturer’s roofing system. The manufacturer's technical
representative shall inspect the work of the contractor at least one time each week
during the installation of the roofing system. The manufacturer's technical
representative shall perform with the owner's representative and the roofing
contractor a final inspection of the roofing system. At the completion of the final
inspection, provide to the roofing contractor a list of punch list items (if any) to be
correct before technical acceptance of the roofing project and prior to issuance of
manufacturer's Twenty (20) Year Full System Warranty. Field reports shall be
provided after each inspection within five (5) days of site visit.
D. Pullout Tests: Conduct pullout test on deck using appropriate fastener prior to roof
system installation. Submit pullout results for manufacturer's review to determine
specific fastening pattern for this project, minimum uplift requirements shall
conform to current ASCE 7 criteria.
1.14 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of the products specified, with

five (5) years documented experience in the uninterrupted, and unmodified
manufacture of the roofing system and component elements of the roofing system
specified herein.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in the work of this Section, having a minimum of

five (5) years documented experience applying modified bitumen roofing systems,
and approved by the Manufacturer for not less than three (3) years to install the
specified roof system so as to achieve a twenty (20) year no dollar limit warranty.
1.15 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to all applicable local codes for roof assembly fire hazard requirements.
B. Provide certification of inspection confirming approval of design and installation by

authority having jurisdiction.
C. Fire Hazard Classifications: UL Class A.

1.16 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Convene a preinstallation conference two weeks prior to commencing the Work.
B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting the Work of this Section.
C. Review condition of roof deck and installation, installation procedures and

coordination with related work.
1.17 ENVIRONMENT REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not apply roofing during inclement weather.
B. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck or substrate.
1.18 WARRANTY
A. Roofing - Manufacturer: Project shall be installed in such a manner that the roofing
material manufacturer will furnish a written twenty (20) year NDL type warranty
B. Roofing - Contractor: The contractor, jointly with any subcontractors employed by

him, shall guarantee the work required and performed under this contract will be
free from defects in workmanship and materials, and that the building will be and
remain waterproof for a two (2) year warranty period, after the Owner accepts the
work as substantially complete. The warranty shall be in approved notarized
written form, to obligate the contractor and his subcontractors, if any, to make good
the requirements of the warranty.
C. Warranty repairs shall be performed by a certified installer. The repairs shall be

performed in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and
recommended procedures so as to not void the warranty (if applicable). Repair of
the system, including materials and labor, shall be done at no cost to the Owner.
D. Provide twenty (20) year Manufacturer's No-Dollar-Limit (NDL) warranty on the

above-deck roofing system. Warranty to cover costs of material and labor to
replace roofing material which fails to resist the penetration of water due to failure
of either material or workmanship, with no penal sum.
E. Manufacturer's warranty shall cover above deck roofing components against wind
uplift resulting from wind pressures based on the requirements of ASCE 7.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Samples of all materials used on the project, which are not supplied by the
membrane manufacturer, shall be submitted to the membrane manufacturer for
written approval prior to work starting.

B. All materials used on the project shall be asbestos free
2.2 MANUFACTURERS – SHEET AND BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
A. Soprema
B. Johns Manville
C. Or prior approved equal by Owner / Project Manager
2.3 FINISH MEMBRANE:

1. Cap Ply Cool Roof Rated:
a. Membrane Top Ply: High Reflectivity White Surface Cap Sheet:
1) Description: Roofing membrane shall have a fiberglass mat reinforcement and
thermofusible elastomeric asphalt. Top surface to have White High-Reflective
surface. Application is for hot asphalt.
b. Physical Properties:
1) Approximate Weight: 104 lbs/sq
2) Approximate thickness: 157 mils
3) Total System thickness: 261 mils
c. White reflective surface certifications: Shall be listed by Energy Star and CRRC:
1) Initial Solar Reflectance Value: .83
2) Weathered Reflectance Value: .80
3) Initial Emissivity Value: .91
4) Weathered Emissivity Value: .88
5) Solar Reflectance Index Value: 104
2.4 BASE PLY MEMBRANE:

1. Fiberglass reinforced modified bitumen sheet.
a. Description: Base ply membrane shall have a fiberglass reinforcement and
thermofusible elastomeric asphalt. Both sides shall have a high-brush sanded
surface. This membrane is to be applied by a hot-mopping of Type IV asphalt.
1) Approximate roll weight: 90 pounds
B. Base Flashing Membranes:

1. Base Ply Membrane– Fiberglass reinforced modified bitumen sheet.
a. Description: Base ply membrane shall have a fiberglass reinforcement and
thermofusible elastomeric asphalt. Both sides shall have a high-brush sanded
surface. This application is to be applied by a hot-mopping of Type IV asphalt.
1) Approximate roll weight: 90 pounds
2. Finish Membrane: Polyester reinforced modified bitumen flashing sheet.

a. Description: Flashing membrane shall have a non-woven polyester reinforcement
and thermofusible elastomeric asphalt. Both sides shall have a high-brush sanded
surface. Top surface to have White High-Reflective surface. This application is to be
applied by hot mopping only.

1) Approximate roll weight: 106 lbs.
2) Approximately thickness: 1570 mils
c. White reflective surface certifications: Shall be listed by Energy Star and CRRC:
1) Initial Solar Reflectance Value: .83
2) Weathered Reflectance Value: .80
3) Initial Emissivity Value: .91
4) Weathered Emissivity Value: .88
5) Solar Reflectance Index Value: 104
2.5 BITUMEN
A. Shall be ASTM D 312 Type IV extra steep asphalt.
2.6 BASE SHEET FOR USE OVER CONCRETE ROOF DECK
A. Shall be Underwriters Laboratory approved.
B. Shall be heavy duty, asphalt-coated fiber glass venting base sheet, with mineral
surfacing on one side, ASTM D4897, Type II.
2.7 WHITE HEAT- WELDED-SEAM VERTICAL FLASHING MEMBRANE
A. Membrane shall be nominal PVC self-adhered sixty (60) mil in overall thickness
consisting of a white sixty (60) mil PVC elastomeric membrane with a minimum
one and one-half inch (1-1/2") dry selvage edge for welding. The white heat-
welded-seam membrane shall be a high-performance elastomeric membrane
incorporating polyester reinforcement fibers. This membrane to be applied in cold
adhesive and adhered.
2.8 VERTICAL WALL FLASHING ADHESIVE
A. Shall be a dual component, reaction cure polyurethane adhesive, meeting the

following physical properties, or approved equal.
Density ASTM D-1622 Free Rise 3.2 lb/cf

Compressive Strength ASTM D-1621 Parallel 38 psi @ 6% deflection
Tensile Strength ASTM D 1623 35 psi
Water Absorption ASTM D 2843 5.1%
Closed Cell Content ASTM D 2856 90% min.; R-value= 3.8 new
Weight/Gallon (Liquid Components) "Part 1" Component = 10.32 lbs.
"Part 2" Component = 8.54 lbs.
"Part 1" Component = 225 cps
"Part 2" Component = 275 cp
2.9 ASPHALT ROOF PRIMER
A. Quick-dry asphalt-based primer for priming of asphalt roof surfaces, as

manufactured by Gardner-Gibson, Inc. / GAF, or approved equal.

ASTM D 41
Flash Point 105° F
Viscosity at 80° F (ASTM D 217) 50-60 K.U.
Weight per gallon 7.4 pounds
Drying time (to touch) Min. 4 hours
2.10 ASPHALT PLASTIC ROOF CEMENT
A. Trowel-applied mastic used on flanges of gravel stops, stacks, vents, and similar
applications, as manufactured by Gardner-Gibson, Inc. / Johns-Manville, or
approved equal.
ASTM D 4586
Flash Point 105° F
Weight per gallon (approximate) 11 lbs.
Viscosity @ 80° F (ASTM D 217) 270-330
% Non-Volatile (Fed. Test Method 141) 70% Min.
% Specially Processed Bitumen 30% Min.
% Total Solids, by Volume 75% Min.
Dry film thickness of 1 gal./15 sq. ft. 85 Mils
Drying time 2 to 3 days
Service Temperature, Extended Exposure -20° to +150° F
Resistance to Oils & Solvents Poor
Resistance to Sunlight Good
Resistance to Chemicals Good
Effects of Weathering Slight chalking
Water Resistance
Under Good Drainage Conditions Excellent
Under Continuous Submersion Fair
2.11 INSULATION
A. All insulation shall be in compliance with Section 07 22 16 Roof Board Insulation.
B. All insulation shall be approved in writing by the membrane manufacturer as to

thickness, type, and manufacturer. All insulation must be approved for the specific
application, Underwriters Laboratory approved
2.12 SUBSTRATE BOARDS
A. All substrate boards shall be in compliance with Section 07 22 16 Roof Board

Insulation.
2.13 CANT STRIP

A. Structural: Shall be wood where used for structural purposes meeting NRCA, FM
Global and Underwriters Laboratory guidelines.
B. Non-structural: Shall be wood fiber where used for non-structural purposes,

conforming to ASTM C208 and C209.
2.14 ROUGH LUMBER
A. All rough carpentry shall be in compliance with Section 06 10 00 Miscellaneous

Carpentry.
B. All wood nailers, structural cants, curbs, and other miscellaneous rough carpentry,
shall be lumber as recommended by NRCA, and Underwriters Laboratory
guidelines.
C. Vertical Wall Shimming Material: Shall be exterior grade plywood unless otherwise
accepted by Project Manager/Architect. Thickness shall be as required for
attachment or to make material flashing flush or level with offsets and/or
transitions, minimum three-fourths inch (3/4"). Proper selection of material is
required to achieve UL guidelines.
D. Where plywood is not used on the back of the parapet contractor to provide a
continuous 22 ga. Sheet metal strap over the face of the studs at the through wall
flashing location to accommodate the flashing fasteners.
2.15 FASTENERS
A. Fasteners and fastening plates or bars shall be as recommended by the fastener

manufacturer for the specific application.
B. All substrate boards shall be in compliance with Section 07 22 16 Roof Board

Insulation.
2.16 FIBERGLASS COATED MEMBRANE
A. A non-rotting, non-absorbent woven fiberglass membrane having a vinyl coating

designed for membrane reinforcement for all roof repairs. Compatible with either
tar or asphalt bitumens, having ten (10) open-weave squares per inch.
2.17 ROOF DRAINS
A. All roof drains shall be in compliance with Division 22- Plumbing.
B. Shall be all cast iron roof drain with dome and non-puncturing clamp ring with
integral gravel stop and medium sump with roof flange and bottom outlet, as
manufactured by Josam, or approved equal.
C. Lead Flashing: Shall be four pound (4#) lead, minimum thirty inches by thirty
inches (30" x 30"), used for flashing of internal drains
D. Drains shall be placed no closer than 42” apart.

2.18 LEAD JACKS
A. Shall be four pound (4#) lead, and of dimensions required to completely cover
existing plumbing stack.
2.19 LIQUID FLASHING SYSTEM
A. Liquid flashing system to be manufacturers recommended system comprising a

liquid compound and sheet scrim fabric or equivalent.
2.20 PIPE SUPPORTS
A. Refer to Specification Section 07 72 00 Roof Accessories for further information.
B. Pipe support system shall be a prefabricated, engineered support system designed

specifically for use on roofing without adhesive, roof penetrations, flashings, or
damage to roofing system. Supports shall be as recommended by manufacturer
as suitable for size and type of conduit or pipe being supported, or approved equal.
2.21 ROOF WALKWAY PADS
A. Walkway Pads: Manufacturer’s standard walkway pads consisting of modified

asphalt, reinforcements and fillers with a ceramic granule surface on both sides.
Thickness shall be 1/4” min.
2.22 MECHANICAL FASTENERS FOR FLEXIBLE FLASHING
A. Concrete: Drive Pin having corrosion resistant mandrel with stainless steel pin,
factory equipped with metal clad EPDM washer, Rawl Zamac
B. Concrete Masonry: Hot-dip galvanized, threaded fastener with integral rubber

sealing washer, Tap-Con by Rawl.
C. Brick Masonry: Hot-dip galvanized, threaded fastener with integral rubber sealing
washer, Tap-Con by Rawl.
D. Wood: Galvanized steel, annular ring roofing nails with integral one inch (1") cap,
roofing nail by Simplex.
2.23 ROOF PLAQUE
A. Contractor shall provide a sixteen inch by sixteen inch (16” x 16”) metal plaque on
the underside of each of the roof hatches that states the following:
1. Architect name, phone number. As project dictates
2. School district phone number.
3. School district emergency phone number,
4. Contractor name, phone number.
5. Subcontractor name, phone number.
6. Roof Consultant, name, phone number.
7. Roof system, warranty information, and

8. Roof Manufacturer, phone number.
2.24 TERMINATION/PRESSURE BARS
A. Aluminum strip shall be extruded channel bar with a mill finish, width one inch (1"),
thickness 0.100" ± .008", leg height one-fourth inch (1/4") top and bottom, leg angle
ninety degrees (90°), for perimeter and curb anchorage, having predrilled holes six
inches (6") on center, as manufactured by Olympic Fasteners, or approved equal.
2.25 SELF-ADHERING UNDERLAYMENT FOR TEMPORARY WATERPROOFING
A. A premium heavyweight, minimum 60 mil, self-adhering high temperature 260

degree min, underlayment, to use as a temporary waterproofing barrier.
2.26 ELASTOMERIC SEAM COATING
A. A one –part acrylic elastomeric seam coating per manufacturer’s

recommendations.
2.27 JOINT PRIMER/SEALER
A. Provide type of joint primer/sealer recommended by sealant manufacturer for joint

surfaces to be primed or sealed.
2.28 BOND BREAKER TAPE
A. Provide polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant

manufacturer, to be applied to sealant-contact surfaces where bond to substrate or
joint filler must be avoided for proper performance of sealant. Provide
self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.29 SEALANT BACKER ROD
A. Provide compressible rod stack of polyethylene foam, polyurethane foam,

polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam, butyl rubber foam, neoprene foam or
other flexible, permanent, durable, non-absorptive material as recommended by
sealant manufacturer for back-up of and compatibility with sealant. Where used
with hot-applied sealant, provide heat-resistant type which will not be deteriorated
by sealant application temperature as indicated.
2.30 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. All materials shall be delivered with appropriate carton and can labels indicating
appropriate warnings, storage conditions, lot numbers, and usage instructions.
Materials damaged in shipping or storage shall not be used.
2.31 PRECAUTIONS
A. Some of the indicated materials are extremely flammable and/or toxic. Use
precautions indicated on can and carton labels.

2.32 OVERNIGHT SEAL
A. Hot applied asphalt bitumen shall be provided for the purpose of night sealing the
roof system.
B. Apply a six inch (6”) wide mopping of asphalt along the exposed edges of the white
fleece backed base flashings as required to prevent wicking into the membrane.
A. Other materials shall be as specified, or of the best grade for the proposed use, as
recommended by the manufacturer of said product.
2.34 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. General: Provide field fabricated wood expansion joints where shown on the
drawings in size as indicated and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Expansion joint nailers shall extend upward a minimum of eight inches (8") above
finish roof height.
C. Existing expansion joints shall be replaced with curbed expansion joints which
extend a minimum of eight inches (8") above the finished roof surface. New
expansion joint cover shall be fabricated of sheet metal in accordance with NRCA
and/or SMACNA details and flashed in accordance with roofing material
manufacturer's recommended procedures.
D. Provide structural expansion joint in the field of the roof where the roof span exceeds
200’-0” in any direction.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 REFERENCE
A. In the instance of a conflict between these specifications and those of the

manufacturer and/or current NRCA, Underwriters Laboratory and IBC guidelines,
the more stringent specifications (better quality or greater quantity of work) shall
take precedence.
B. The manufacturer's Technical Specifications and current NRCA, Underwriters

Laboratory and IBC guidelines shall be considered a part of this specification and
shall be referred to for general application procedures and recommendations.
C. Application of materials shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations and current NRCA, Underwriters Laboratory and IBC guidelines,
except where more stringent requirements (better quality or greater quantity of
work) are shown or specified.
D. General Installation:
9. Comply with governing local, state, and federal regulations, safety standards,
and codes.

10. Protect adjacent areas with tarpaulin or other durable materials.

11. Contractor shall prevent overspray and be responsible for parking lot areas
and/or adjoining areas not part of this contract.
12. Contractor shall be responsible for sealing, as required, all openings that may
allow bitumen migration or drippage, i.e. pitch dams, envelopes, and filler
strips.
13. Prepare surfaces according to manufacturer's or applicator's published
instructions. All metal that is to receive bitumen, or come in contact with
bitumen or adhesive, shall be first primed with appropriate primer. Any
prefinished galvanized sheet steel that is to receive bitumen, or come in
contact with bitumen or adhesive, shall be scored, scuffed or abraded before
receiving primer application.
14. Use cleaning materials or primers necessary to render an acceptable
surface/substrate.
15. All surfaces/substrates shall be clean and dry prior to application of materials.
16. Prior to application of felts and or membrane, all foreign matter, gravel, etc.,
shall be removed from the insulation and/or substrate. Gravel or debris
between the insulation/substrate and plies is not acceptable.
17. Prior to application of flashing membranes, substrate shall be clean and free
of any previously installed roofing materials. Contractor shall ensure that all
components of substrate be structurally sound before application of flashing
materials.
18. Bitumen kettle shall have a fume recovery system, and visible thermometer to
provide positive monitoring of the bitumen temperature when it is heated in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
19. Ambient temperature shall be 40° F and rising.
20. The underlayment plies and field membrane are to be laid in the direction of
maximum roof slope, working from bottom of slope toward ridge.
21. Wrinkles, buckles, kinks, and fish mouths are not acceptable when laying
membranes.
22. Dry voids of membrane on membrane are not acceptable.
23. All surfaces that are to receive the self-adhered membranes shall be primed
with a fast drying asphaltic primer.
24. Application of roofing shall immediately follow the application of any insulation
as a continuous operation. Under no circumstance is insulation to be left
exposed at the end of the day. Insulation left exposed overnight will be
removed and replaced at no cost to the Owner.
25. Masonry and metal surfaces to receive roofing shall be primed with a uniform
coating of approved asphalt primer.
26. Unless otherwise noted, all layers of roofing shall be installed perpendicular
to the slope of the deck; completely free of wrinkles, creases or fishmouths.
Membrane application by the "mop and flop" technique will not be permitted.
27. Asphalt kettles or tankers employed under this Contract shall be equipped
with functioning, accurately calibrated, readable thermometers.
28. Asphalt shall be applied in uniform mopping free of voids or holidays, at a
rate recommended by the roofing manufacturer and not more than 25° F
above the asphalt's listed Equiviscous temperature (EVT).

3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive the Work of this
Section.
B. Verify that deck is secure, that it is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves,
abrupt elevation change, protrusions, or projections and properly sloped to drains.
C. Verify that deck surfaces are dry and free of frost, dew or other moisture.
D. Verify that roof openings, curbs, sleeves and vents through the roof are solidly set
and ready to receive this Work.
3.3 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION
A. New Construction: Substrate shall be smooth and free of debris, sharp edges, and
other surface irregularities prior to work starting. Substrate repair shall be
performed as required to minimum of NRCA standards.
B. Protect all building surfaces against damage from roofing work.
C. Prevent debris and bitumen from entering the building, any drains, downspouts,
plenum spaces and/or roof openings.
D. Clean surfaces of roof deck and maintain free of dirt, debris and any deleterious
material during roofing operations.
E. Metal Decks:
1. All loose rust, bitumen, or other foreign material shall be removed from the
deck before applying metal primer at the minimal rate of one and one-half
(1-1/2) gallons per one hundred (100) square feet of area.
2. Expansion/control joints shall be installed so that no one area exceeds two
hundred feet by two hundred feet (200' x 200').
F. Concrete Decks:
1. Surface irregularities shall be corrected with quick-setting mortar mix.
2. Joints should be filled with quick-setting mortar mix to provide a level surface.
3. Concrete must be primed and allowed to dry before applying any asphalt.
4. The following shall be used and passed as an acceptable means of testing
the dryness of a concrete roof deck:
a) Use approximately one (1) pint of bitumen that is specified for use in the
roof membrane, heated to a temperature that will ensure an application
temperature of 400° F.
b) Pour the bitumen on the surface of the deck. If the bitumen foams, the
deck is NOT dry enough to roof.
c) After the bitumen has cooled, an attempt should be made to strip the
bitumen from the deck surface. If the bitumen strips clean from the deck,
the deck is NOT dry enough to roof.

3.4 CATEGORY II (NON-FRIABLE) ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS (ACM)

REMOVAL
A. Owner and Contractor agree to exonerate, indemnify, defend, and hold harmless
the roofing material manufacturer from and against all claims, demands, lawsuits,
damages, expenses and losses incurred by Contractor's removal of asbestos-
containing materials from Owner's building and work site. Contractor must conduct
its operations according to applicable requirements including but not limited to
those established by:
1. Occupation Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
2. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).
3. Department of Transportation (DOT).
4. State or Local Air Pollution Control Authorities/Agencies.
5. State or Local Solid Waste or Hazardous Waste Authorities/Agencies.
6. State or Local Health Department(s).
7. State or Local Building Code Authorities.
8. Other federal, state or local agencies or authorities.
B. Contractor or Owner shall perform appropriate inspections, surveys and file timely
notifications to proper authorities prior to starting roof renovation or demolition
activities. Inspectors, project planners, project managers, contractors and workers
involved in the roof project shall have appropriate training, licenses and
registrations. Contractor and Owner shall be responsible for determining and
implementing regulatory compliance activities, including but not limited to work
practices, engineering controls, personal protection, air monitoring, testing, hazard
communication, material handling, record retention, and arranging for waste
disposal/handling.
C. Contractor must file a Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest from proper landfill site
for each load of asbestos containing material removed. Copies must be sent to
Owner and material manufacturer/specifier. Transportation of waste shall be in
accordance with applicable Department of Transportation (DOT) requirements.
3.5 ASPHALT HEATING
A. Use low burner flames during initial melt-downs. Circulate asphalt after initial
melt-down.
1. Maximum asphalt temperature shall be 25°F below the flash point.
B. Avoid prolonged heating of asphalt at high temperatures. Reduce the asphalt

temperature to below 500°F if asphalt is not being used for periods of four (4)
hours or more.
C. Kettle shall be free of contaminants.
D. Application rates: Bitumen quantities for waterstop/tie-offs, flashings,

miscellaneous detail applications, and minimum kettle capacity are not included in
application rates. To account for these factors, add approximately 25 percent
additional bitumen on a total job average basis.

3.6 ROUGH CARPENTRY
A. All rough carpentry shall be in compliance with Section 06 10 53 Miscellaneous

Carpentry.
B. Nailers shall be installed according to NRCA, Underwriters Laboratory, and IBC

guidelines.
C. Wooden nailers shall be installed at Metal edges, drip edges, expansion joints, and
on outside perimeter of building.
D. Metal Edge and drip edge nailers shall be the same height as the new insulation
being installed where required.
E. Nailers shall be raised if necessary by anchoring an additional nailer of appropriate

height to the existing nailer if the existing nailer is not to be replaced.
F. Expansion joint nailers shall extend upward a minimum of eight inches (8") above
finish roof height.
G. Where parapet wall exists, specified vertical wall shimming material shall be
installed beginning at roof height up to a minimum of twelve inches (12”) above
finished roof surface, or as detailed, to provide substrate for horizontal termination
of roof to wall flashing system.
H. Any lumber or shimming required for attachment, or to make material flashing flush
or level with offsets and/or transitions, shall be incorporated in these specifications.
3.7 CANTS
A. Provide full 45 degree cant strips (no partials) at all intersections of vertical and
horizontal surfaces, such as walls, parapet walls, curbs, expansion joints, etc., and
as recommended by membrane manufacturer.
B. Cants shall provide a four (4) inch rise above the roof’s surface.
C. Toe of cant shall be level with the surface to receive new roof membrane and in all
cases anchored according to NRCA, Underwriters Laboratory, and IBC guidelines.
D. Cant strips shall be installed at the intersection of the deck and all vertical surfaces.
E. If a wood cant is used where insulation exists, cant shall be toe nailed into treated
wood nailer under cant the same height as insulation.

3.8 ADHERED BASE SHEET OVER SUBSTRATE
A. Substrate shall be covered with specified base sheet adhered as follows:

1. The concrete deck shall be primed with concrete primer in accordance with
manufacturer's recommended procedures and allowed to dry. Following the
application of the primer, adhesion shall conform to the ASCE 7 criteria for
wind uplift as dictated by wind zone applicable to location of project.
Securement shall be determined by building height, location and
geographical area of the United States. It is the contractor's responsibility to
consult current codes, publications, literature, and bulletins of IBC and the
adhesive manufacturer that are in effect at the time of this project.
B. If slope dictates, underlayment plies shall be installed using the strapped method
going with the slope as required by membrane manufacturer.
3.9 INSULATION
A. All insulation shall be in compliance with Section 07 22 16 Roof Board Insulation.
B. All insulation shall be approved in writing by the membrane manufacturer as to

thickness, type, and manufacturer. All insulation must be approved for the specific
application, Underwriters Laboratory approved
3.10 SUBSTRATE BOARDS
A. All substrate boards shall be in compliance with Section 07 22 16 Roof Board

Insulation.
3.11 APPLICATION OF UNDERLAYMENT PLY SHEET
A. All layers shall be solid mopped in a uniform and continuous manner at the nominal
rate of thirty pounds (30#) ± 20% per one hundred (100) square feet using steep
asphalt Type IV as required by slope, properly heated and applied within the
Equiviscous Temperature (EVT) range.
B. Apply adhesive no more than ten (10) feet ahead of each roll being embedded.
C. Broom each ply from the unmopped side before adhesive cools. Ensure complete
and continuous seal and contact between bitumen and ply sheets without wrinkles,
including ends, edges, laps, fish mouths, or blisters. Broom width shall be
thirty-four inches (34") minimum. Avoid walking on plies until adhesive has set.
D. Specified layers shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations and in accordance with general practices as set forth by the
NRCA Roofing Manual.
E. Use starter sheets at all edges as required. Two-ply underlayment requires a

nineteen inch (19") starter sheet.
F. If slope dictates, underlayment plies shall be installed using the strapped method
going with the slope as required by membrane manufacturer

3.12 APPLICATION BASE MEMBRANE
A. Apply base membrane sheet over prepared substrate in mopping of hot asphalt,
providing four inch (4") side laps and six inch (6") end laps. Stagger end laps of
adjacent sheets not less than thirty-six inches (36").
B. Apply sufficient pressure to the top side of the sheet to ensure that the base ply is
adhered.
3.13 APPLICATION FINISH MEMBRANE
A. Beginning at low point of roof, apply approved cap sheet in mopping of hot asphalt.
Provide four-inch (4") side laps and six inch (6") end laps. Stagger end laps thirty-
six inches (36") from adjacent rows.
B. All layers of roofing shall be installed free of wrinkles, creases and fishmouths.
C. Prohibit foot and cart traffic from newly applied felts. Do not "walk-in" plies.
D. The asphalt must be mopped so as to extend beyond both edges of the sheet.
The amount of asphalt should be just sufficient for excess asphalt to squeeze out
along the edges.
E. If slope dictates, membrane shall be installed using the strapped method going
with the slope as required by membrane manufacturer.
F. In addition to the standard application procedures as outlined, the contractor must

be familiarized and adhere to the manufacturer's requirements for proper
installation procedures for the cool roof white cap sheet.
G. Care must be taken to ensure good alignment of the first roll. A 45° cut shall be
made on the selvage edge of underlying membrane prior to application to ensure a
good seal between the membranes.
3.14 BACKNAILING/STRAPPING
A. On slopes greater than one inch (1") in twelve inches (12"), refer to NRCA and/or
manufacturer's guidelines for backnailing procedures and follow the more stringent
guidelines for all specified materials.
Slope Interply& Top Pour Backnail Strap

0 - ½" per 12" Type IV No No
½" - 2" per 12" Type IV Yes Strap if possible
2" - 3" per 12" Type IV Yes Yes
3.15 FLASHING APPLICATION
A. Flash all penetrations, metal edge systems, walls, curbs, expansion joints, drains
as shown on details and approved shop drawings with white Elvaloy® flashing
membrane.

1. Field fabricate flashings for vent pipes, vent stacks, or other multi-angled roof
projections/penetrations.
2. Mechanically fasten flashing at terminations according to approved details.
3. Fastening membrane flashing through metal counterflashing without the use
of a termination bar is not acceptable.
B. Any lumber or shimming required for attachment or to make material flashing flush
or level with offsets and/or transitions shall be incorporated in the flashing
specifications.
C. Flashing shall be placed at all vertical junctures with the roof, and at all
penetrations. It will consist of the approved base flashing sheet applied over one
or more base ply sheets.
D. Base membrane sheet will be placed in a mopping of hot asphalt providing three
inch (3") side laps. Secure top edge with approved fasteners at six inches (6") on
center. Sheet to extend four inches (4") beyond the toe of the cant onto the
horizontal surface of the membrane; and extend not less than three inches (3")
above the top of the cant onto the vertical wall/curb surface. The top leading edge
shall be secured with a continuous termination bar, fastened at 8” o.c., the
termination bar shall be sealed with three course and mastic.
E. Flashing plies shall be cut from the end of the roll and applied vertically always
working to a selvage edge.
F. The exposed flashing membrane will be mopped into place providing three inches
(3") side laps. Top edge to be secured with approved fasteners at six inches (6")
on center. Side laps are not to coincide with side laps of reinforcing ply sheet.
G. Prime surface of membrane sheet to receive flashing.
H. Extend flashing sheet four inches (4") beyond toe of cant onto horizontal field of
the roof, and extend onto vertical face of wall/curb not less than eight inches (8")
above finished roof surface. Secure top edge termination bar and three course
mastic application. Termination bar to be fastened with approved fasteners at six
inches (6") on center.
1. At concrete or masonry surfaces, secure top edge of flashing utilizing a
continuous metal termination bar.
2. Thoroughly seal all voids in the corners and seams.
3. Application shall provide a smooth surface, free of air pockets, wrinkles,
fishmouths or tears.
3.16 HEAT WELDED-SEAM VERTICAL WALL FLASHING

(FOR USE APPROXIMATELY 8" ABOVE THE FINISHED ROOF LINE AND
EXTENDING UPWARD)
A. White self-adhered welded seam membrane flashing shall be installed on the

vertical beginning approximately eight inches (8") above the finished roof line
(where the membrane is terminated), with length of run not to exceed the width of
the material roll. Strapped flashing method shall be installed in strict accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. The termination bar used to terminate the eight inch (8") high base flashing shall
be used to terminate the lower edge of the vertical flashing. This will cause the
termination bar to be buried at the eight inch (8") minimum height. Care should be
taken to ensure the top edge of the base flashing and bottom edge of the vertical
flashing are both secured. This term bar shall be placed over the counter flashing
below as detailed.
C. All substrates receiving welded-seam flashing membrane shall be clean and

primed with primer, prior to application.
D. All vertical wall flashing shall be installed using specified vertical flashing adhesive
per manufacturer’s recommendation. All vertical flashing lap seams of the self-
adhered welded seam membrane shall be hot-air welded.
E. Flashing laps shall be minimum three inch (3") width, no maximum. Hot-air weld of
flashing lap shall be minimum one and one-half inch (1-1/2") width, no maximum.
F. Immediately following the laying of the self-adhered welded seam membrane, it

shall be pressed or rolled in the width direction of the membrane. This will prevent
excessive entrapment of air beneath the membrane. The pressing or rolling shall
be in the width direction and with the laps so as not to buck the laps.
G. Any flashing extending further than eight inches (8") up onto a vertical surface shall
be installed using the strapped method and must be fastened with a termination
bar or installed up and over the parapet wall and fastened to the nailer on the
outside of the wall.
H. The heat welded seam flashing membrane shall be run up the wall in three foot (3')
widths, run under the coping cap and be terminated on the outside of the wall six
inches (6") on center; then the coping cap shall be reset. All side laps are to be
hot-air welded.
3.17 CANTS
A. Provide full 45 degree cant strips (no partials) at all intersections of vertical and
horizontal surfaces, such as walls, parapet walls, curbs, expansion joints, etc., and
as recommended by membrane manufacturer.
B. Cants shall provide a four (4) inch rise above the roof’s surface. (Vertical, not
diagonal)
C. Toe of cant shall be level with the surface to receive new roof membrane and in all
cases anchored according to NRCA, Underwriters Laboratory, and IBC guidelines.
D. Cant strips shall be installed at the intersection of the deck and all vertical surfaces.
E. If a wood cant is used where insulation exists, cant shall be toe nailed into treated
wood nailer under cant the same height as insulation.

3.18 PROJECTION FLASHINGS
A. Plumbing Vents: Soil vent stack pipes shall receive new lead flashings installed in
strict accordance with practices set forth in the NRCA Roofing Manual. The lead
shall be carried up and over the top of the stack, and crimped down into the pipe to
form a watertight seal. Projections that cannot be sealed thus should be boxed in
and flashed as recommended by the roof membrane manufacturer.
B. Square Projections: Cut a slit in the membrane to correspond with the position of
the projection, and lay the membrane in hot asphalt. Apply another layer of
membrane in exactly the same fashion, but from the opposite direction. For metal
flange-type projections, after doing above, strip in with six inch (6") strips of
membrane.
C. Round Projections: Cut membrane square and eighteen inches (18") from
perimeter of projection. Slit square membrane with an "X" of proper size to ensure
a close fit and positive seal. Place over projection, and adhere to clean membrane
already on the roof. Cut a six inch (6") piece of membrane to apply as a collar, and
secure with an all stainless steel clamp.
3.19 CURB FLASHINGS
A. The flashing substrate shall be free of any dirt and loose material.
B. The underlayment ply or plies and the coal-tar elastomeric membrane (CTEM)
shall be brought to two inches (2") past the top of the cant strip and adhered.
C. Starting on the roof at least six inches (6") from the roofside edge of the cant strip,
adhere one (1) ply of smooth sanded modified base membrane extending over the
cant and up the vertical a minimum of eight inches (8"). Each lap of the membrane
shall be a minimum of three inches (3").
D. Over the smooth sanded modified base membrane starting on the roof at least
eight inches (8") from the roofside edge of the cant strip, adhere the finished
membrane extending over the cant and up the vertical a minimum of eight inches
(8"). Each lap of the finished membrane shall be a minimum of three inches (3"),
and shall not coincide with the laps of the underlayment sheet.
E. Fasten the top edge of the flashings on six inch (6") centers using approved
termination bar and fasteners. Cover termination bar with 3 course and mastic to
seal leading edge of the finished membrane watertight.
F. An NRCA-approved metal counterflashing shall extend down over the flashing a
minimum of four inches (4").
3.20 PIPING/CONDUIT
A. Piping/conduit shall be raised to NRCA recommended heights, and new supports

furnished. Permanent supports shall be installed upon pads approved by
membrane manufacturer. Coordinate work with Project Manager/Architect.
B. All gas lines, piping, and conduits shall be coated with industrial grade yellow paint

3.21 PIPE/EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Refer to specification section 07 72 00 Roof Accessories for further information
3.22 ROOF DRAINS
A. All roof drains shall be in compliance with Division 22- Plumbing.
B. All drain work, including installation of bowl and lines, shall be performed by a
licensed professional master plumber.
C. Drain installation shall comply with local plumbing codes.
D. Inspect and test drain and drain lines prior to start of work. Open if blocked or
clogged, and replace all broken or missing drain components and lines.
E. Inspect every drain after roofing to ensure proper seal to leader line.
F. Verify in writing to Project Manager/Architect that all drains and lines are free flowing
and watertight prior to substantial completion.
3.23 DRAIN FLASHINGS
A. Build a sump to the drain and create a smooth transition by installing tapered
insulation around the drain. The slope of the drain sump shall not exceed one inch
(1") per horizontal foot (8%). The drain sump should be eight foot by eight foot
(8' x 8') sump minimum per roof plans.
B. All drains shall receive new lead flashings. Flashings shall be installed in strict
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and with practices as set forth
in the NRCA Roofing Manual.
C. Drain shall be covered with the roofing membrane and underlayment plies as
specified, slitting the membranes over the drain hole with an "X".
D. Lead flashings as specified shall be installed and primed with asphalt base primer
and allowed to dry prior to application of flashing layers.
E. Lead flashing shall be covered with flashing membranes consisting of one layer of
2 plies of modified roofing membrane. Each layer shall be installed in a solid bed
of asphalt bitumen as specified and shall extend a minimum of twelve inches (12")
past the outer edges of the three by three foot (3' x 3') lead flashing. Flashing
membranes and lead flashing shall be slit over the drain hole with an "X", cutting
excess material from the interior of the drain bowl.

3.24 EXPANSION JOINT
A. Expansion material shall be formed and centered over the roof to roof structural EJ
locations as shown on the drawings.
B. Coordinate the location of the expansion joint framing with Structural, Architectural
and Roof drawings.
C. Framing of the expansion shall be in accordance with the details and as field
conditions dictate.
D. Expansion material shall be formed and located adjacent to roof to rise wall
structural EJ locations as shown on the drawings.
E. Wood Cants shall provide a four inch (4") rise above the roof’s surface and extend a
minimum of four inches (4") horizontally.
F. Vertical wood framing shall be attached over horizontal wood blocking as shown and
detailed.
G. Taper the top of the expansion join as required at tapered roof areas to maintain a
minimum height of 8” above finished roof surface.
3.25 ROOF HATCH
A. Refer to specification section 07 72 00 Roof Accessories for further information.
B. Plaque shall be fastened with stainless steel screws to the wall surface as
necessary at the base of the internal roof hatch ladder
3.26 INSTALLATION OF EXTERIOR ROOF ACCESS LADDER
B. Provide required structural members to properly install the roof hatch.

Examination:
1. Coordinate anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and anchorage
structural loads for fastener resistance.
2. Do not begin installation until supporting structure is complete and ladder
installation will not interfere with supporting structure work.
3. If supporting structure is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect
of unsatisfactory supporting work before proceeding.
B. Installation: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in proper

relationship with adjacent construction.
C. Protection:
1. Protect installed products until completion of project.
2. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial
Completion.

3.27 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR FIXED LADDER TO ROOF HATCH
Examination:
1. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify
Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
2. Examine materials upon arrival at site. Notify the carrier and manufacturer of
any damage.
B. Installation: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Do not attach directly to the roof hatch assembly.
D. Protection:
2. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged products before Substantial
Completion
3.28 TERMINATION OF NEW ROOF TO EXISTING
A. The final juncture of the new roof shall consist of an NRCA recommended area
divider suitably flashed and sealed for a permanent watertight installation. A water
cutoff shall be incorporated into the termination to prevent water entering the
existing roof from migrating into the new roof system.
3.29 ELASTOMERIC SEAM COATING
A. Cover bleed out blocking with elastomeric seam coating approved by

manufacturer. Coating shall be applied using a medium nap roller.
B. Temperatures at time of application must be 50 deg. F and rising during time of

application. Apply per manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.30 OVERNIGHT SEAL
A. Provide temporary weather protection during interval between demolition and

removal of existing construction on exterior surfaces and installation of new
construction to ensure that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or
interior areas of existing building.
B. Installation shall be performed according to accepted roofing practice as outlined in

the NRCA Roofing Manual.
A. Owner reserves the right to have finished Work inspected using infrared
thermography or other appropriate, non-destructive means to establish satisfactory
conditions of completed Work.
B. Correct identified defects or irregularities. Cut out and repair membrane defects
before end of each day.

3.32 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Provide manufacturer's field services as required to qualify for specified warranty.
B. Roofing materials manufacturer's representative shall visit the site and observe the
progress of the Work at a rate of not less than one time per week.
1. Site visits shall be followed up by a written report of findings which is to be
transmitted to the Owner's Representative within five (5) days of the site visit.
3.33 CLEANING
A. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces.
B. In areas where finished surfaces are marred, or soiled by Work of this Section,
consult manufacturer of soiled surface for cleaning advice and conform to their
C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by Work of this Section.
D. Roof surface shall be completely cleaned prior to final building move-in. All
discharge water to be dealt with in accordance with local EPA requirements.
3.34 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finished Work under provision of application Section.
B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof installation, protect surfaces with
minimum one-half inch (1/2") wood fiberboard insulation, under five-eighth inch
(5/8") thick plywood protective walkways ballasted in place with sandbags or the
like.
C. At all parapet and metal coping cap conditions, provide additional layer of self-
adhered high temp underlayment for temporary protection over all parapet and
coping caps conditions once roofing has been completed and prior to installation of
wood nailers and metal coping cap. Self-adhered underlayment is to cover cavity
conditions from roof side of parapet framing to outside of exterior finish to protect
cavity from moisture prior to completing parapet cap framing.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 07 61 13
STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included: The contractor shall provide all material, labor, and administration and
other items to provide a complete standing seam metal roof system complying with
performance requirements indicated and capable of withstanding structural movement,
thermally induced movement and exposure to weather without failure or infiltration of
water into the building interior.
B. Coordinate standing seam metal roof system with roofing substructure work.
C. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to,
General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of
these Specifications.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Preformed and prefinished standing seam metal roof system with continuous
mechanically seamed ribs, concealed clips and fastening devices.
B. Color coordinated ridge, hip, valley, gable, eave, corner, rake, headwall,
counterflashings and miscellaneous flashings and attaching devices.
C. Provide concealed clips, fasteners, closures and factory and field applied sealants as
necessary to meet design criteria and ensure a weathertight installation.
D. Bituthane membrane roofing underlayment.
E. Factory Fabricated Polyisocyanurate nailbase clad rigid insulation Refer to 07 22 00

Roof and Deck Insulation for nail base configuration.
A. Design Requirements:
1. The standing seam metal roof system, including: panels, flashings, attachment
clips and attachment screws shall be designed by the metal roof system
manufacturer per to meet the following design criteria:
a. 2012 version of the International Building Code, (IBC-2012).
b. A basic wind speed of 100 mph.
c. Listing of applicable loads by roof zones (interior, edges and corners).
d. The building importance factor is one - Essential Facilities.
e. Roof snow load is. per local requirements as determined by Panel
Manufacturer.
f. The building exposure factor is "C", open terrain.
Standing Seam Metal Roof System 07 61 13 - 1

2. The standing seam metal roof system manufacturer shall provide an engineered
analysis of the roofing system, sealed by a registered Structural Engineer employed
by the manufacturer and licensed in the State of Texas, verifying that the product
and attachment methods will resist wind pressures imposed upon it pursuant to the
design criteria and that the roofing system fully complies with all specified
requirements.
3. The panel system shall bear fully documented proof that it has been independent
laboratory evaluated using the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Guide Specification
(CEGS) 07416.
a. Testing shall include establishment of ultimate and allowable system uplift
capacities for both the "field" and "areas of discontinuity".
b. "Proof" shall be defined as both the manufacturer and the product being
included in the document entitled: "List of Approved Standing Seam Metal Roof
Systems" as published by the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers.
4. Provide factory preformed panel system that has been pretested and certified by
manufacturer to comply with specified requirements under installed conditions.
5. Provide factory engineered and tested end lap (splice) details at roof third points,
per ASTM 2140 water immersion testing.
6. Provide continuous mechanically seamed ribs that inherently increase load span
capability, stiffness and flexural stress handling capacity.
7. Provide continuous butyl sealant within the confines of the female flange.
8. Provide panel that has been tested and approved for a Class 4 Impact (Hail)
resistance rating per UL 2218. Listing shall be present on the UL website (Refer to
Underwriters Laboratories website at www.ul.com).
9. On-site or field manufactured panels are prohibited. Field curving of pre-
manufactured panels is acceptable.
B. Structural Requirements:
1. Panel structural properties determined in accordance with latest edition of
American Iron and Steel Institute's "Cold Formed Steel Design Manual," using
"effective width" concepts.
2. Wind uplift design for roof assemblies shall be calculated by the standing seam
metal roofing system manufacturer per ASTM E 1592. Calculations shall include
establishment of ultimate and allowable roof system uplift capacities for both the
"field" and "areas of discontinuity".
3. Provide confirmation of positive and negative buckling moments and uplift
capacity determined by full-scale tests.
C. Substrate Criteria:
1. Standing Seam Metal Roofing System: Engineer standing seam metal roof
system installed over Bituthane membrane underlayment and Polyisocyanurate
Nailbase clad rigid insulation over metal decking that is capable of withstanding the
design loads when applied at 90° to the surface and spaced as shown on the
approved shop drawings.
2. High temperature Waterproof Membrane Underlayment: Apply waterproof
bituthane membrane under entire roof surface per manufacturers written instructions.
3. Polyisocyanurate Nailbase clad Rigid Insulation: Refer to 07 22 00 Roof and
Deck Insulation for nail base configuration.

D. Environmental Requirements: Actual independent laboratory certified test results must

be submitted.
1. Resistance to air infiltration (Tite-Loc-Plus): .002 cfm per linear foot of joint when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 1680 at static test pressure differential of 12.00
psf.
2. Resistance to water infiltration (Tite-Loc-Plus): No leakage through panel joints
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 1646 at static test pressure differential of 12
psf.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, engineered detail drawings, and

installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit three (3) sets of full size (24"x36") approval / design drawings produced
by the standing seam metal roof system manufacturer indicating thickness and
dimensions of parts, fastenings and anchoring methods, details and locations of
seams, transitions and other provisions necessary for thermal expansion and
contraction.
2. Indicate roof terminations, clearly showing flashings and change of direction
caps.
3. Clearly indicate locations of field and factory applied sealant.
4. Show locations, spacing patterns and types of hold-down clips and fasteners.
5. Provide (24"x36") blue line or Auto CAD produced drawings provided by the
standing seam metal roof system manufacturer showing a complete roof plan, roof
panel layout, and cross section details for every individual condition of the entire roof
system.
C. Samples:
1. Submit two (2) samples, twelve inch (12") long by full width of panel, showing
proposed metal gauge and seam profile.
2. Submit color samples on metal for Architect's selection from manufacturer's full
range of color offerings including custom (metallic colors) colors.
D. Test Reports: Submit verification the panel system meets the Environmental Conditions
for the indicated test pressures and performance listed for Air and Water Infiltration.
E. Engineered Design Calculations:

1. Submit panel system manufacturer's design calculations verifying the panel
system meets the specified building code as defined in Section 1.03 System
Description, A. Design Requirements listed above.
2. Design calculations shall be sealed by a registered Structural Engineer employed
by the standing seam metal roof system manufacturer and licensed in the State of
Texas.
F. Certification:
1. Submit manufacturer's certification that materials and finishes meet specified
requirements.

2. Submit written verification of panel Applicator's factory installation training

performed by the standing seam metal roof system manufacturer and a copy of the
Panel Applicator's "Authorized Applicator" certificate.
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications:
1. Minimum twenty (20) years experience in the fabrication of standing seam metal
roof systems on projects of similar size and scope. Upon request, submit a minimum
of five (5) project references for Architect's review. List project address, date of
installation, Architects and Owner's name and telephone numbers.
2. No other manufacturer of standing seam metal roof systems will be accepted
without prior written approval of the Architect and based upon the manufacturer
verifying the product can meet or exceed all performance criteria listed in these
specifications.
3. Requests to be listed as an approved manufacturer must be submitted in writing
a minimum fifteen (15) days prior to bid date accompanied by product literature,
technical information, sealed engineer's calculations verifying conformance, and a
product sample. Approved manufacturers will only be set forth in a written and
issued addendum.
4. No substitutions will be permitted after the bid date.
5. Factory Technical Representative: Roofing Contractor is to arrange and
schedule the manufacturer’s technical representative to be on site the first day of the
installation of manufacturer’s roofing system. The manufacturer's technical
representative shall inspect the work of the contractor at least one time each week
during the course of the installation of the Standing Seam metal roofing system. The
manufacturer's technical representative shall perform with the owner's representative
and the roofing contractor a final inspection of the roofing system. At the completion
of the final inspection, provide to the roofing contractor a list of punch list items (if
any) to be correct before technical acceptance of the roofing project and prior to
issuance of manufacturer's Twenty (20) Year Full System Warranty. Field reports
shall be provided after each inspection within five (5) days of site visit.
B. Applicator Qualifications:
1. Panel Applicator must have a minimum of five (5) years experience in the
application of standing seam metal roof systems.
2. Panel Applicator must be factory trained by the standing seam metal roof system
manufacturer prior to the bid date in order to obtain a contract for installation.
3. Use adequate members of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and
experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the
specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work
in this Section.
4. Use equipment of adequate size, capacity and numbers to accomplish the work
of this Section in a timely manner.
5. Upon request, submit a minimum of five (5) successfully completed projects of
similar size and scope. List project address, date of installation, Architect and
Owner's name and telephone numbers.
6. Single Source Responsibility: Provide all items of the standing seam metal roof
system work specified herein by a single roofing contractor to provide undivided
responsibility.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with all requirements of applicable building codes

and other agencies having jurisdiction for positive and negative design loads of standing
seam metal roof systems.
D. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
E. Factory Technical Representative: Roofing Contractor is to arrange and schedule the

manufacturer’s technical representative to be on site the first day of the installation of
manufacturer’s roofing system. The manufacturer's technical representative shall
inspect the work of the contractor at least one time each week during the course of the
installation of the Standing Seam metal roofing system. The manufacturer's technical
representative shall perform with the owner's representative and the roofing contractor a
final inspection of the roofing system. At the completion of the final inspection, provide
to the roofing contractor a list of punch list items (if any) to be correct before technical
acceptance of the roofing project and prior to issuance of manufacturer's
Twenty (20) Year Full System Warranty. Field reports shall be provided after each
inspection within five (5) days of site visit.
A. Delivery:
1. Delivery of material shall be made only after suitable facilities for its storage and
protection area available on the site.
2. Protect products and accessories from damage and discoloration during transit
and at project site.
3. Upon receipt of prefinished preformed metal panels, flat sheets, flashings and
panel accessories, Panel Applicator shall examine each container for damage and
for completeness of the consignment.
B. Storage:
1. Store materials out of the weather in a clean, dry place. One end of each
container should be slightly elevated and covered with a loose weatherproof covering
to prevent condensation.
2. Panels and/or flashings with strippable film must not be stored in areas exposed
to direct sunlight.
3. Care should be taken to prevent contact with any substance that may cause
discoloration.
4. Store materials to provide ventilation and prevent bending, abrasion or twisting.
5. Do not overload roof structure with stored materials. Do not permit material
storage or traffic on completed roof surfaces.
C. Handling:
1. Care should be taken to avoid gouging, scratching or denting.
2. Do not allow traffic on completed roof. If required, provide cushioned walk
boards.
3. Protect installed products from damage caused by foreign objects and
construction until completion of project.
4. Comply with pertinent provisions of Supplementary General Conditions.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Furnish manufacturer's standard twenty (20) year, non-prorated labor and material
written finish warranty stating that architectural fluorocarbon finish will be:
1. Free from fading or color change in excess of five (5) NBS units as measured per
ASTM 2244-68.
2. Will not chalk in excess of a numerical rating of seven (7) when measured in
accordance with standard procedures specified in ASTM D 659-74.
3. Will not peel, crack, chip or delaminate.
B. Furnish a written warranty signed by the Panel Applicator for a two (2) year period from
the date of substantial completion of the building guaranteeing materials and
workmanship for weathertightness of the roofing system, flashings, penetrations and
against all leaks.
C. Special Weathertight Warranty: Furnish manufacturer's twenty (20) year, full system,
non-prorated, no dollar limit weathertight warranty to be jointly signed by the
manufacturer and the Panel Applicator.
D. Protect products and accessories from damage and discoloration during transit and at
project site. Store sheets and components in dry storage area to prevent condensation.
E. Do not overload roof structure with stored materials. Do not permit material storage or
traffic on completed roof surfaces.
1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Convene prior to commencing work of this Section.
B. Attendants: Panel Applicator, installer of each component of associated work, installers

of deck or substrate construction to receive roofing work, Architect, Owner or Owner's
Representative, Roofing system manufacturer's technical representative and General
Contractor.
C. Record discussion, decisions and agreements reached and furnish a copy to each
attendant.
D. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related Work.
E. Tour representative areas of roofing substrates, inspect and discuss condition of

substrates, roof drains, curbs, penetrations, wood nailers and other preparatory work
performed by other trades.
F. Review structural loading limitations of steel deck and inspect deck for loss of flatness
and as required for mechanical fastening.
G. Review roofing system requirements (approved manufacturer's shop drawings,

specifications and other contract documents.
H. Review required submittals.

I. Review and finalize construction schedule related to roofing work and verify availability
of materials, installer's personnel, equipment and facilities needed to avoid delays.
J. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures for coping with
unfavorable conditions, including possibility of temporary roofing.
K. General Contractor to document the meeting with written minutes and copy all in
attendance.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Standing Seam Metal Roof System:

1. Petersen Aluminum Corporation: Tite-Loc Plus
2. McElroy Metals
3. Berridge
4. Or prior approved equal
B. High Temperature Bituthane Membrane Waterproof Underlayment: A 40 mil self-

adhering membrane, or prior approved equal.
1. Tamko "TW Metal and Tile"
2. Grace "Ice and Water Shield HT"
3. Or Prior approved equal
C. Polyisocyanurate Nailbase-Clad Rigid Insulation: Refer to 07 22 16 Roof Board

Insulation for nail base configuration.
D. Substitutions:
1. Approved manufacturers will only be set forth in a written and issued addendum.
2. Alternate manufacturers must fully comply with all specified requirements.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Panels:
1. Prefinished Galvalume® sheet, ASTM AZ50 made of 55% aluminum, 1.6%
silicon and the balance zinc as described in ASTM specification A792.
2. Panels shall be 22-gauge with a Polyvinylidene (Kynar 500) Finish.
3. Factory fabricated panel with integral continuous overlapping seams suitable for
continuous locking or crimping by mechanical means during installation. Onsite or
field manufactured panel profiles are not acceptable.
4. Seam Size:
a. Male leg: 2" high, on Tite-Loc Plus
b. Female leg: 2" high, on Tite-Loc Plus
5. Provide butyl sealant within the confines of female seam flange, on the bottom
edge of female seam flange, designed to seal against adjacent male panel leg.
B. Clip/Fastener Assemblies:
1. Typical clip, UL-90 requirements:
a. Wind Rated Fasteners: As per approved manufacturer's engineered shop
drawings.

b. Wind Rated Clip: Sliding 22-gauge galvanized steel hook in combination with a
double fastened 18-gauge galvanized steel base, both at Fy (MIN) = 33 ksi. Clip
hook shall have a shop installed hot-melt butyl sealant for continuity of seal at clip
locations.
2. Typical Low Clip Requirements:
a. UL-90 Fasteners: As per approved manufacturer's engineered shop drawings.
b. Sliding 26-gauge at Fy=40ksi (MIN) galvanized steel hook in combination with
a double fastened 18-gauge at Fy = 50 ksi (MIN) galvanized steel base. Clip hook
shall have a shop installed hot-melt butyl sealant for continuity of seal at clip
locations.
3. Standard Flashing Fasteners: Same as Wind Rated Fasteners specified above.
C. Accessories:
1 Provide manufacturer's standard accessories and other items essential to
completeness of the standing seam metal roof installation.
2. Roof Jacks: Manufacturer's standard EPDM with an aluminum sealing base ring;
for openings twelve inches (12") or smaller, centered in panel; do not interrupt seam.
3. Roof Curbs: fabricated to the specifications of the standing seam metal roof
manufacturer, thereby assuring compatibility with the roof construction framing and
covering. Roof curbs shall be of sufficient size and design to coordinate with
requirements for support of heat and smoke vents specified in another Division 7
Section. Roof curb flashing and framing shall provide for the expected expansion
and contraction of the standing seam metal roofing system.
4. Gutters and downspouts will be fabricated to the same gauge and specification
as panel.
D. Field Sealants:
1. Color coordinated primerless silicone, urethane, or high grade, non-curing butyl
as recommended and engineered by panel manufacturer.
2. Do not use sealants containing asphalt.
E. High Temperature Bituthane Membrane Waterproof Underlayment:

1. 40 mil flexible, self-adhering rubberized asphalt sheet membrane with a
polymeric film on the surface and a removable silicone-treated release sheet on the
adhesive side
2. Bituthane membrane underlayment shall be rated for high temperature
resistance up to 260 F.
3. Bituthane membrane shall have a maximum permeance rating of 0.05 perms.
4. Minimum thickness shall be 40 mils.
F. Factory Fabricated Polyisocyanurate Nailbase Clad Rigid Insulation: Refer to 07 22 16

Roof Board Insulation for nail base configuration.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Panels:
1. Provide factory formed panel widths of sixteen inch (16"), with a one and one-half
inch (1-1/2") high standing seam.
2. On-site or field manufactured panels are prohibited. Field curving of pre-
manufactured panels is acceptable.
3. Provide panels with no end laps (splices).

4. Roof panels shall have flush horizontal and vertical surfaces to facilitate sealing
at terminations.
B. Seams:
1. Panel seams shall interlock entire length of seam, by means of a mechanically
driven rib seamer.
2. Design standing seam to lock up and resist joint disengaugement during design
wind uplift conditions as calculated to comply with local building codes and design
uplift criteria.
3. Provide factory sealant within confines on trailing edge of female seam leg to aid
in resistance of leaks and provide panel-to-panel seal while allowing expansion and
contraction movement, and the seams shall be continuously locked or crimped
together by mechanical means during installation.
C. Clips:
1. Provide Wind Rated Clips designed to allow panels to thermally expand and
contract and provide a minimum of ± one inch (1") of thermal movement. Clips shall
incorporate a self-centering feature to allow a minimum of one-half inch (1/2") of
movement in either direction for a total movement one inch (1").
2. Clips shall be designed to meet positive and negative pressures as calculated
and engineered by the standing seam metal roofing system manufacturer.
3. Fasteners shall penetrate metal deck a minimum of three-fourths inch (3/4").
D. Engineer panels to use concealed anchors that permit expansion and contraction.
E. Trim/Flashings:
1. Prefinished sheet metal designed by the manufacturer in the same gauge,
material and finish as the standing seam metal roofing system.
2. Locations, design, sealing and fastening methods as per the manufacturer's
approved engineered shop drawings.
2.4 FINISH
A. Fluorocarbon Coating:
1. Full strength 70% Kynar 500® coating baked on for fifteen (15) minutes at 450°F
to dry-film thickness of 1.0 mil.
2. 15% reflective gloss (ASTM D 523). (Low Gloss).
3. 0.3 mil baked on epoxy primer.
4. Backer side of panels to be painted with an off-white polyester coating.
5. Top Side Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of color
offerings, including metallic and custom colors
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONNECTING WORK
A. General: Provide metal roofing panels of full length from eave to ridge when possible.
1. Field cutting by torch is not permitted.
2. Do not apply roofing during inclement weather.
3. Do not apply roofing to damp or frozen deck surface.

4. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water, wind or sun damage in quantities

greater than can be weatherproofed during the same day.
5. Rigidly fasten point of fixity (high center) of metal roof panels and allow free eave
movement due to thermal expansion and contraction per the approved shop
drawings.
6. Install screws fasteners with power tools having controlled torque.
7. Locate and space fasteners per the approved shop drawings in true vertical and
horizontal alignment.
8. Install all flashings per the approved shop drawings as work progresses.
Position roof jacks only in the flat of the panel; do not alter standing seam ribs.
B. The Panel Applicator shall examine all surfaces on which their work is to be applied, and
shall notify the Architect in writing if not suitable to receive their work. Work on any
surface shall constitute acceptance of this surface by the Panel Applicator. After
beginning installation, install approximately 500 square feet of panels for Architect's
approval, before proceeding with substantial work.
C. Wood Members, Units: Comply with requirements of Section 06 14 00 Wood Blocking of

these specifications for nailers and other wood members indicated as roofing system
work. Provide wood pressure treated with water-borne preservatives for above ground
use. All nailers shall be anchored sufficiently to resist a force of 75 pounds ± per linear
foot in any direction. Provide nailers at all locations required by the roofing manufacturer
(whether shown or not) – verify conditions prior to commencement of roofing installation.
3.2 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Panel Applicator must take field measurements to verify or supplement dimensions

indicated prior to fabrication of any materials. Where field measurements cannot be
made without delaying the work, either establish opening dimensions and proceed with
fabricating panels without field measurements or allow for trimming panel units.
3.3 POLYISOCYANURATE NAILBASE CLAD RIGID INSULATION

INSTALLATION
A. Refer to 07 22 16 Roof Board Insulation for nail base configuration.
B. Comply with system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.
3.4 WATERPROOF UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Fully adhere one ply of high temperature 40 mil self-adhering waterproofing

underlayment over entire roof surface. Stagger joints perpendicular to metal roofing
panels and over parapet blocking per manufacturer's written instructions, but with not
less than six inch (6") laps at vertical (side) laps and four inch (4") horizontal (top and
bottom) laps.
B. Install an extra layer of minimum thirty-six inch (36") wide waterproof membrane down all
valley, rake wall, eaves and gable conditions, using a minimum six inch (6") horizontal
(top and bottom) lap.

3.5 METAL ROOFING INSTALLATION
A. Workmanship shall conform to standards set forth in the architectural sheet metal
manual as published by SMACNA.
B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for assembly, installation, and erection in order
to achieve a weathertight installation. Install in accordance with approved shop
drawings.
1. Anchor securely in place using clips and fasteners spaced in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations for design wind load criteria.
2. Panels should be installed in such a manner that horizontal lines are true and
level and vertical lines are plumb.
3. Field apply sealant to penetrations, transitions, and other locations as necessary
for an airtight, waterproof installation.
4. Remove all protective film, if any, before installation of materials.
C. Dissimilar Metals: Do not allow panels or flashings to come into contact with dissimilar
metals.
3.6 CLEAN UP
A. Clean exposed surfaces of work promptly after completion of installation.
B. Only minor scratches and abrasions will be allowed to be touched up. Any other
damaged material shall be replaced.
C. Leave work areas clean, free from grease, dirt, finger marks, stains and stains.
D. Remove scrap and debris from surrounding grounds and work areas daily.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Metal Roofing: Protect work as required to ensure that the standing seam metal roof
system will be without damage at time of final completion.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 07 62 00
SHEET METAL AND MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Provide flashing and sheet metal components for moisture protection.
2. Related accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit shop drawings, product data and mockups of all sheet metal.
A. Comply with governing local, state, and federal regulations, safety standards, and codes.
Provide products of acceptable manufacturers in satisfactory use in similar service for
five (5) years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle and store materials in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Reference Standards: Applicable portions of ASCE, SMACNA, ASTM and NAAMM

publications.
1.4 WARRANTIES
A. Manufacturer's Product Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard limited product

warranty signed by the manufacturer's authorized official, guaranteeing to correct
failures in product which may occur during the warranty period, without reducing or
otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which the Owner/Project Consultant may
have under the contract documents. Failure is defined to include product failure which
leads to interruption of a watertight installation. Correction may include repair or
replacement of failed product.
B. Contractor's Warranty Period: For roofing flashing and sheet metal, provide a written
warranty which shall warrant work to be free of leaks and defects in materials and
workmanship for two (2) years, starting from date of substantial completion.
C. Defects of the sheet metal occurring during the warranty period shall be promptly
corrected by the contractor, and defects of the roofing shall be promptly corrected by the
manufacturer at no additional cost to the Owner. Upon notification from the Owner or
the Owner's representative that evidence of a defect exists, the responsible party shall
immediately inform the Owner's representative of the date on which corrective work will
be scheduled, and shall notify the Owner's representative when the corrective work has
been completed.
Sheet Metal and Miscellaneous Accessories 07 62 00 - 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIAL
A. Hot-dipped Galvanized Steel for use as counterflashings (where not visible from the
ground), pitch pans and expansion joints: Minimum 24-gauge, G-90, hot-dipped
galvanized metal, commercial quality, ASTM A 525.
B. Hot-dipped Galvanized Steel for use as continuous clips: Minimum 22-gauge, G-90,
hot-dipped galvanized metal, commercial quality, ASTM A 525.
C. Prefinished Galvanized Sheet Steel (where visible from the ground): Shall be 24-gauge
flat stock, prefinished with Kynar finish meeting ASTM A 446, forty-five and one-half
inches to forty-eight inches width by one hundred twenty inches in length (45-1/2" - 48" x
120") for use as new metal edge gravel guard, cover plates, downspouts, gutters, coping
and miscellaneous metal. Standard color to be selected by Owner/Project Consultant.
D. Stainless Steel: QQ-S-766, Class 301, 302, 304, or 316; or ASTM A 167, Type 301,
302, 304, or 316; form and condition most suitable for the purpose.
E. Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Plate and Sheet: QQ-A-250; form, alloy, and temper
shall be that most suitable for the purpose.
F. Sheet Lead: QQ-L-201, Grade B.
G. Colors shall be custom colors indicated in "Color Schedule". Coordinate finish

requirements with "Color Schedule". Submittals containing colors for Architect's
review shall match the custom colors indicted in the "Color Schedule". Submittals
containing non-complaint colors will be summarily rejected in their entirety.
2.2 FASTENERS
A. Fasteners shall be same metal as flashing/sheet metal, or other non-corrosive metal as

recommended by sheet manufacturer for the specific application. Match finish of
exposed heads with material being fastened.
B. Fasteners and fastening plates or bars shall be listed in the FM Global Approval Guide.
C. Fastener for Brick: Shall be one-fourth inch by two inches (1/4" x 2"), zinc with plated
steel or stainless steel nail, one piece unit, flat head.
D. Screws: Self-taping sheet metal type with neoprene washer, as appropriate.
E. Pop Rivets: Full stainless steel Series 42 or 44, as appropriate.
F. Continuous Clip: Concealed hold-down clip type; of same materials as coping, gravel
guard, sized to suit application. Use a continuous clip, minimum 22-gauge G-90
galvanized.

2.3 RELATED MATERIAL
A. Bituminous Paint: Acid and alkali resistant, black color.
B. Plastic Cement: FS SS-C-153, cutback asphalt type.
C. Solder: QQ-S-571 composition best suited for purpose; use high tin content, minimum
60/40, for stainless steel and monel alloy.
D. Copper, Sheet, and Strip: QQ-C-576, ASTM B 370, light cold-rolled temper.
E. Lead-coated Copper: ASTM B 101, Type I or II, Class A.
F. Sealant (for Sheet Metal): One-component polyurethane, conforming to requirements of

FS TT-S-230C, non-staining and non-bleeding.
G. Miscellaneous Materials:
1. Downspout Boots: Cast iron by Neenah Foundry Company, or pre-approved equal,
provide and install.
2. Splash Blocks: Concrete, 3000 psi, 28 days. Provide and install with protection
pads at all downspouts. Dimensions shall be a minimum eighteen inches wide by
thirty-six inches long (18" x 36").
3. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar
accessory units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with
material being installed, non-corrosive, size, and gauge required for performance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts or vents through roof are solidly set,
cant strips and reglets in place, substrates are smooth and clean and nailing strips
located.
B. Verify membrane termination and base flashings are in place, sealed and secure.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work. Provide all shop drawings and
mock-ups one month prior to installation to the Owner/Project Consultant for approval.
B. Install starter and edge strips and cleats before starting installation.

3.3 FABRICATION - GENERAL
A. Shop-fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply with details shown, and with
applicable requirements of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and other
recognized industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and weather-resistant
performance; with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently
prevent leakage, damage or deterioration of the work. Form work to fit substrates.
Comply with material manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Form exposed
sheet metal work without excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line
and levels as indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
B. Fabricate gravel stops/fascia, gutters/downspouts, counterflashings, pitch pans,

expansion joints, and copings with new galvanized sheet metal as specified. Fabricate
gravel guard and fascia to size and dimensions as indicated on the drawings. Fabricate
light metal coping, gutters and downspouts as indicated.
C. Form sheet metal on bending brake.
D. Shape, trim and hand seam metal on bench insofar as practicable.
E. Form materials with straight lines, sharp angles and smooth curves.
F. Fold back edges on concealed side of exposed edge to form hem (1/2" minimum).
G. Weld or solder joints on parts that are to be permanently and rigidly assembled.
H. Submit sheet metal models for approval by the Owner/Project Consultant.
I. Limit single-piece lengths to ten feet (10').
J. Fabricate corner pieces with eighteen inch (18") extensions, metered and sealed by
forming as one piece.
K. Surface sand flange prior to applying any primers on Kynar metal.
L. Backpaint flashing in contact with masonry or dissimilar materials with bituminous paint.
M. Install new metal rooftop projections. New rooftop projection details shall be as
recommended in NRCA or SMACNA handbooks. All rooftop projections shall be
cleaned, all joints sealed, and painted with a rust inhibitive paint. Standard color to be
selected by the Owner/Project Consultant.
N. All sheet metal shall be sealed and watertight.
O. Metal work should be secured so as to prevent damage from buckling or wind. Where
clips are shown, these are to be continuous.
P. All metal to receive bitumen or adhesive shall be first primed with asphalt primer.
Q. All prefinished metal shall be sanded and/or abraded prior to receiving primer.

R. Seams: Fabricate non-moving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. For metal
other than aluminum, tin edges are to be seamed, form seams, and soldered.
S. Expansion Provisions: Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less
than one inch (1") deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
T. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non-expansion type joints are indicated or required for
proper performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric
sealant, in compliance with industry standards.
U. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from non-compatible metal or corrosive

substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with bituminous coating
or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator.
V. Bed flanges of work in a thick coat of bituminous roofing cement where required for
waterproof performance.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General: All sheet metal termination to vertical wall shall have a through-wall with receiver
installed on masonry walls or prefabricated "Z" bar flashing pre-installed to fluid applied
wall finished prior to installation of sheet metal termination. This applies to edge metal,
base flashing closures and all vertical surface intersections. Refer to NRCA, SMACNA,
and metal manufacturer's guidelines.
B. Gravel Guard/Fascia:
1. Shall be installed with expansion joints, ten feet (10') on center, one-fourth inch (1/4")
expansion leeway, with a cover plate.
2. Secure metal flashings per specifications and shall meet ES-1 securement.
3. Lock seams and end joints.
4. Form sections identical to profiles as shown or approved similar, to match existing
building.
5. Fabricate corner pieces with minimum eighteen inch (18"), maximum forty-eight
inch (48") extensions, formed and sealed with rivets and sealant, as one piece.
6. Hem exposed edges three-fourths inch (3/4") minimum.
7. Backpaint flashing in contact with masonry or dissimilar materials with bituminous
paint. Surface sand before applying primers.
8. Integrate flashing in a manner consistent with detailing.
9. Provide and install continuous clip around perimeter.
10. Apply sealant at horizontal juncture of gravel guard metal to exterior vertical wall.
11. Shall be fabricated in accordance with all SMACNA provisions.
12. Install bead of sealant at metal edge juncture at exterior wall surface.
C. Coping:
1. Install new metal coping as required for a permanent watertight installation.
2. All coping shall be manufactured with low profile standing seam metal.
3. Shall be minimum 24-gauge prefinished Kynar installed in ten foot (10') sections
maximum.
4. Vertical fascia shall extend minimum two and one-half inches (2-1/2") or be minimum
one and one-half inches (1-1/2") below bottom of nailer, whichever is greater.
5. Secure metal flashings per specifications.


building.
12. Provide and install continuous clip, minimum 22-gauge.
13. Apply sealant at horizontal juncture of coping metal to exterior vertical wall.
15. Install bead of sealant at metal edge juncture at exterior wall surface with one-fourth
inch (1/4") gap at ten feet to zero inches (10'-0") on center.
D. Expansion Joint Field and at Wall:

1. Shall be as outlined by details, and be in full compliance with all provisions of
SMACNA and FM Global requirements for attachment, installation and
recommendations.
2. Secure metal flashings per specifications.
building.
9. Provide and install continuous clip around perimeter.
E. Counterflashing: Install new metal counterflashing as required for a permanent watertight

installation.
F. Gutter and Downspout:

1. Fabrication:
a. Fabricate gutter and downspout of profile and size indicated.
b. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work.
c. Fabricate with required connection pieces.
d. Fabricate section square, true, and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths
and free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance.
e. Hem exposed edges of metal.
f. Form and seal all metal joints; provide for expansion joints per SMACNA.
2. Installation:
a. Install collector head, downspout, and accessories.
b. Join lengths with seams pop riveted and sealed watertight. Flash and seal
collector head to downspouts and accessories.
c. Seal all metal joints watertight for full metal surface contact.
d. Collector Head: SMACNA style profile; submit detail for approval.
e. Downspouts: Rectangular profile. Seal all joints, six inches by six inches (6" x 6").

f. Support Brackets, Joint Fasteners: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts.

g. Anchorage Devices: SMACNA requirements. Type recommended by fabricator.
h. Collector Head Support - Kynar: Color and Finish to match, gutter recommended
by SMACNA.
i. Downspout Supports - Straps, Kynar: Color and Finish to match gutter.
G. Bonnets/Hoods:
1. Fabricate and install above all pitch pans, where necessary, or reinstall as
applicable, metal bonnets over all pitch pans, NO EXCEPTIONS.
2. Bonnets/Hoods shall be manufactured with metal compatible with metal to which
bonnet is to be attached.
3. On beams and other steel, weld in place bonnets fabricated from one-fourth inch
(1/4") steel plate.
4. Draw band bonnets fabricated from 22-gauge galvanized steel may be used on
circular projections.
3.5 FINISH
A. Backpaint concealed metal surfaces with bituminous paint where expected to be in

contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals. Exposed surfaces to be provided
with a factory applied fluorocarbon Kynar finish meeting ASTM A 446 and AAMA
specification 605.2 for high performance coating.
B. New 24-gauge hot-dipped galvanized metal shall be painted on all locations visible from
the ground with an industrial grade paint to match existing, or standard color selected by
Owner/Project Consultant. Galvanized metal surface must be properly prepared by
removing all oil, grease, and/or protective mill coatings by solvent cleaning surface in
accordance with SSPC-SP1, and according to paint manufacturer's recommendation, to
ensure proper adhesion of paint to metal.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 07 62 13
GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Precoated galvanized steel gutters, downspouts, scuppers, brackets, spacers,
fasteners, stiffeners and caps.
2. Precast concrete splash blocks.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. ASTM A 48 – Grey Iron Castings.
2. ASTM A 167 – Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet
and Strip.
3. ASTM A 361 – Sheet Steel, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process for
Roofing and Siding.
4. ASTM A 446 – Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process,
Structural (Physical) Quality.
5. ASTM B 32 – Solder Metal.
6. ASTM B 209 – Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate.
B. Federal Specifications: FS TT-C-494 – Coating Compound, Bituminous, Solvent Type,

Acid Resistant.
C. SMACNA – Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide technical data, installation instructions, and general

recommendations for each specified sheet material and fabricated product.
B. Shop Drawings: Showing layout, profiles, jointing methods, fastening details, locations,
and installation details.
C. Samples: Submit six inch (6") long samples of factory-fabricated products illustrating
component design, finish, color and configuration.
A. Installer Qualifications: Five years documented experience installing sheet metal

systems.
Gutters and Downspouts 07 62 13 - 1

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable code for size and method or rain
water discharge. Comply with SMACNA Manual for sizing components for rainfall
intensity determined by storm occurrence of 1 in 5 years.
C. Gutters/Downspouts and all accessories shall be designed and provided by metal

roofing manufacturer providing the standing seam metal roof panels.
A. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending or abrasion, and
to provide ventilation. Slope to drain.
B. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration, staining or
damage.
A. Coordinate work with roofing work for correct sequencing of items which makes up entire
weatherproof, rain drainage and sheet metal system.
B. Coordinate work with downspout discharge pipe inlet.
C. Coordinate gutter and downspout system with installation of field fabricated flashing and
sheet metal and sheet metal roofing under Section 07600. Work of this Section shall
bring gutters and downspouts to point of connection with roofing system, with necessary
accommodations for connections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Pre-Coated Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 446, Grade A, G 90 zinc coating, 24-gauge core
steel, shop pre-coated.
B. Fasteners: Galvanized steel screws, bolts or nuts, as applicable.
C. Stiffener Angles and Supports: Formed steel, type to match gutters, 18-gauge and clad
with prefinished metal cover.
D. Solder: ASTM B 32, 50-50 percent tin/lead solder with rosin flux for use with steel.
E. Neutralized: Five percent (5%) to ten percent (10%) washing soda solution.
F. Protective Back Paint for Galvanizing: Zinc chromate or galvanized iron type.
G. Bituminous Coating: FS TT-G-494, or MIL-C-18480, or SSPC-12, cold-applied

bituminous mastic, compound, for 15 mil dry film thickness coating.
H. Wire Screen: One-half inch (1/2") mesh, stainless steel.

I. Splash Pads or Blocks: Precast concrete type; minimum 3000 psi at 28 days, with
minimum five percent (5%) air entrainment.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Gutters: SMACNA style profile as detail by Architect; same gauge as panel.
B. Downspouts: SMACNA profile as detailed by Architect; same gauge as panel.
C. Fabricate gutters and downspouts true to design and dimensions, straight and without
deformation. Finish work free from blemishes, abrasions, tool marks, burrs and other
defects which may affect strength or performance. Form corners to smallest radius
possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. Allow for
expansion and contraction.
D. Completely weld joints in gutter sections to provide watertight units. Form expansion
joints between gutter sections as shown. Weld stiffener angles to gutters 4'-0" on
center.
E. Weld angles to underside of gutters at downspout locations to form frame, weld

downspout tube to angles.
F. Form gutters in eight foot (8') or ten foot (10') long welded sections, lap joints one and
one-half inch (1-1/2"). Provide loose-locked expansion joints midway between outlet
tubes and where gutter ends adjoin walls. Fit joints with cover strips in manner to
provide watertight connections.
G. Provide outlet tubes with flanges riveted and soldered to form gutters. Extend tubes
three inches (3") into downspouts. Set gutters to slope to downspouts minimum one-
eighth inch (1/8") for each foot.
H. Form downspouts in eight foot to ten foot (8' - 10') lengths. Telescope end joints one
and one-half inch (1-1/2") and lock longitudinal joints. Fasten downspouts to walls with
three inch (3") wide straps. Space straps not more than eight feet (8') apart. Provide
shoulder of solder on each side of downspout above each strap. Fasten straps to walls
with screws in lead sleeves. Form downspouts of length to discharge water three feet to
zero inches (3' – 0") from building slab.
I. Lock and solder, or weld without flux all seams. Close tops of downspout heads with
18-gauge removable strainer type with wire screen.
J. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work.

K. Fabricate with required connection pieces.
L. Hem exposed edges of metal.
M. Support Brackets, Joint Fasteners: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts.
N. Anchorage Devices: SMACNA requirements. Type recommended by fabricator.
O. Downspout Supports – 18-gauge straps, Kynar: Color and Finish to match gutter.

P. Gutter straps and supports to be 18-gauge and clad with prefinished metal cover.as
detailed.
Q. Seal all metal joints watertight for full metal surface contact.
R. Downspouts: Rectangular profile. Seal all joints, six inches by six inches (6" x 6").
2.3 FINISHES
A. Gutter and Downspouts: 70-75 percent fluorocarbon resin equivalent to Kynar 500/Hylar
5000; custom color as selected by Architect.
B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to minimum dry
thickness of 15 mils.
C. Apply bitumen protective backing paint on surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install gutters, downspouts and accessories in accordance with SMACNA Architectural

Sheet Metal Manual.
B. Joint lengths with seams watertight. Flash and seal gutters to downspouts and
accessories.
C. Slope gutters to drain.
D. Set splash blocks under downspouts.
A. Flood test gutters and downspouts upon completion. Repair any leaks.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 07 72 00
ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY

1. Roof curbs
2. Equipment supports
3. Roof hatches
4. Wall Mounted Access Ladders
5. Roof supports
6. Preformed flashings
7. Roof Penetration Housing
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Provide manufacturer's approved details of all pertinent conditions,

projection conditions, and any additional special job conditions which require details other
than indicated in the drawings.
B. Refer to Specification Section 01 33 00 for Submittal requirements

Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details,
material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
C. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and
roof-mounted items. Show the following:
1. Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section.
2. Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure.
3. Other roof-mounted items including mechanical and electrical equipment, ductwork,
piping, and conduit.
A. Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details
for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing
indicated.
Roof Accessories 07 72 00 - 1
B. Factory Technical Representative: Roofing Contractor is to arrange and schedule the

manufacturer’s technical representative to be on site the first day of the installation of
manufacturer’s roofing system. The manufacturer's technical representative shall inspect
the work of the contractor at least one time each week during the installation of the roofing
system. The manufacturer's technical representative shall perform with the owner's
representative and the roofing contractor a final inspection of the roofing system. At the
completion of the final inspection, provide to the roofing contractor a list of punch list items
(if any) to be correct before technical acceptance of the roofing project and prior to
issuance of manufacturer's Twenty (20) Year Full System Warranty. Field reports shall be
provided after each inspection within five (5) days of site visit.
A. Pack, handle, and ship roof accessories properly labeled in heavy-duty packaging to
prevent damage.
A. Field Measurements: Verify required openings for each type of roof accessory by field
measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with (roofing membrane and base
flashing and) interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight,
secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1. With Architect's approval, adjust location of roof accessories that would interrupt
(roof drainage routes) (roof expansion joints).
1.8 WARRANTY
A. The product manufacturer shall provide a one-year full system material warranty
necessary to cover replacement of all components of the system against defects in
manufacturing. The warranty will not include Acts of God, vandalism, neglect, metal finish
or improper spacing of equipment, which would be a result of improper application.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers listed in other Part 2 articles.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

manufacturers listed in other Part 2 articles.
2.2 METAL MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coated.
B. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, AZ50 (AZM150) coated.
C. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Steel sheet metallic coated by hot-dip process
and prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coated.
2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50
(Class AZM150) coated.
3. Exposed Finishes: High-Performance Organic Finish (2-Coat Fluoropolymer):
coating and resin manufacturer's written instructions.
a) Fluoropolymer 2-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured
system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer
color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by
weight; complying with physical properties and coating performance
requirements in (AAMA 2604) (AAMA 2605), except as modified below:
(1) Humidity Resistance: 1000 hours.
(2) Salt-Spray Resistance: 1000 hours.
D. Aluminum Sheet: (ASTM B 209), alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for
type of use and mill finish.
1. Color: as selected by Architect from the manufacturer’s full range of colors including
premium and metallics.
2. Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: Cleaned with inhibited
chemicals; Chemical Finish: Acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating;
Organic Coating: As specified below). Apply baked enamel complying with paint
manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting.
a) Organic Coating: Thermosetting, modified-acrylic enamel primer/topcoat system
complying with AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mil,
medium gloss.
b) Color and Gloss: As selected by Project Manager from manufacturer's full range.
3. High-Performance Organic Finish (2-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x
(Chemical Finish: Cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: Conversion
coating; Organic Coating: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system
consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat
containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight). Prepare,
pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA 2604
and with coating and resin manufacturer's written instructions.
a) Color and Gloss: As selected by Project Manager from manufacturer's full range.
4. Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically
apply manufacturer's standard baked-polymer thermosetting powder finish. Comply
with resin manufacturer's written instructions for application, baking, and minimum
dry film thickness.
a) Color and Gloss: As selected by Project Manager from manufacturer's full range.
E. Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper
recommended by manufacturer for type of use, mill finished.
F. Stainless-Steel Shapes or Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304 or
Type 316, No. 2D finish.
G. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized to comply with

ASTM A 123/A 123M, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube, baked-enamel finished.
I. Galvanized Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube, hot-dip galvanized to comply with
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
J. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M.
A. Acrylic Glazing: ASTM D 4802, thermoformable, monolithic sheet, category as standard

with manufacturer, Type UVA (formulated with UV absorber), Finish 1 (smooth or
polished).
B. Polycarbonate Glazing: Thermoformable, monolithic polycarbonate sheets manufactured

by extrusion process, burglar-resistance rated per UL 972 with an average impact strength
of 12 to 16 ft-lbf/in. of width when tested according to ASTM D 256, Method A (Izod).
C. Cellulosic-FiberBoard Insulation: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, one inch (1") thick.
D. Glass-FiberBoard Insulation: ASTM C 726, one inch (1") thick.
E. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, one inch (1") thick.
F. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for
aboveground use, complying with AWPA C2; not less than one and one-half inches
(1-1/2") thick.
G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil
dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos
fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
H. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil thick, polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397.
I. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.
1. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized paper, minimum 3 pounds per 100 square feet.
J. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other
noncorrosive metal as recommended by roof accessory manufacturer. Match finish of
exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener
heads to exterior exposed fasteners.
K. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, or PVC;

or flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.
L. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, polyurethane sealant; of type, grade, class, and use
classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain
watertight.
M. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant,

polyisobutylene plasticized, and heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with
limited movement.
N. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for
trowel application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system.
2.4 ROOF CURBS
A. Roof Curbs: Provide metal roof curbs, internally reinforced and capable of supporting
superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction to be
supported on roof curbs. Fabricate with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints and
integral formed mounting flange at perimeter bottom. Coordinate dimensions with rough-
in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.
1. Manufacturers:
a) ThyCurb; Div. of Thybar Corporation.
b) Uni-Curb, Inc.
c) Vent Products Company, Inc.
2. Load Requirements: As required and coordinated with mechanical equipment
3. Material: Galvanized steel sheet, 0.052 inch thick.
4. Material: Aluminum sheet, 0.090 inch thick.
5. Material: Stainless-steel sheet, 0.078 inch thick.
a) Finish: Prime painted.
b) Finish: Mill.
6. Liner: Same material as curb, of manufacturer's standard thickness and finish.
7. Factory install wood nailers at tops of curbs.
8. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof
profile.
9. Factory insulate curbs with one and one-half inch (1-1/2") glass fiberboard insulation.
10. Curb height may be determined by adding thickness of roof insulation and minimum
base flashing height recommended by roofing membrane manufacturer. Fabricate
units to minimum height of fourteen inches (14"), unless otherwise indicated.
11. Sloping Roofs: Where slope of roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb units with
water diverter or cricket and with height tapered to match slope to level tops of units.
2.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. To support HVAC Duct use Model # SS2000D Duct Support. SS2000D is two 17" circular
bases with 12 ga. framing channel formed to make an “H” shaped support. Framing
channel is adjustable in both height and width.
1. Manufacturers:
a). Advanced Support Products, Inc.
B. To support heavier HVAC equipment use equipment platform Model # HV0505B Base
Platform designed by manufacturer to support the weight of the equipment and load
requirements. Equipment platform shall consist of (a) 17" circular bases supporting a
structural steel frame OR (b) galvanized steel plates, with four holes for approved
anchoring per engineering data, supporting a structural steel frame.
1. Manufacturers:
a). Advanced Support Products, Inc.
2.6 WALL MOUNTED ACCESS LADDERS
A. Fixed Ladder Design, as manufactured by O'Keefe's, Inc., Bilco, or approved equal.
B. Fixed Access Ladder

1. Tubular Rail Low Parapet Access Ladder with Platform and Return.
a) Model 503, as manufactured by O’Keeffe’s Inc.
b) Ladder safety or personal fall arrest system (1910.28(b)(i)(B))
C. Materials
1. Aluminum Sheet: Alloy 5005-H34 to comply with ASTM B209.
2. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy 6063-T6 to comply with ASTM B221.
D. Finishes
1. Mill finish. As extruded.
2. Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M10C22A41 Mechanical finish as fabricated. Architectural
Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker.
3. Paint. Urethane over chemically pretreated substrate.
a) Fire Red (RAL 2002).
b) Alert Orange (RAL 2003).
c) Warning Blue (RAL 5005).
d) Caution Yellow (RAL 1018).
e) Safety Green (RAL 6001).
f) As scheduled on drawings.
4. Furnish touchup kit for each type and color of paint finish provided.
E. Fabrication
1. Rungs: Not less than 1-1/4 inches in section and 18–3/8 inches long, formed from
tubular aluminum extrusions. Squared and deeply serrated on all sides.
a) Rungs shall withstand a 1,500 pound load without deformation or failure.
2. Channel Side Rails: Not less than 1/8 inch wall thickness by 3 inches wide.
3. Heavy Duty Tubular Side Rails: Assembled from two interlocking aluminum
extrusions no less than 1/8 inch wall thickness by 3 inches wide. Construction shall
be self-locking stainless steel fasteners, full penetration TIG welds and clean,
smooth and burr-free surfaces.
4. Ship Ladders: Not less than 1-1/4 inches high, 4-1/8 inch deep and 2 feet wide; tread
spacing shall be 1 foot on center. Handrails shall be aluminum pipe, not less than
1-1/2 inches in diameter with hemispheric end caps.
5. Walk-Through Rail and Roof Rail Extension: Not less than 3 feet 6 inches above the
landing and shall be fitted with deeply serrated, square, tubular grab rails.
6. Landing Platform: 1-1/2 inches or greater diameter, tubular aluminum guardrails and
decks of serrated aluminum treads.
7. Security Doors: Formed 1/8 inch thick aluminum sheet. Security panels shall extend
on both sides, perpendicular to the door face, to within 2 inches of the wall. Security
door shall be furnished with continuous aluminum piano hinge and heavy duty forged
steel locking hasps.
8. Ship Ladder Seismic Bottom Support: Manufacturer’s standard; two isolation
bearings per stringer.
9. Ladder Safety Post: Retractable hand hold and tie off.
10. Rail and Harness Fall Arrest System: Supplied where specified as alternate to safety
cage and landing platforms, in accordance with OSHA regulation 1910.27;
permanently mounted to ladder rungs and complete with necessary components.
B. Exterior Roof Access Ladder Warranty
1. Ladder manufacturer has responsibility for an extended Corrective Period for work of
this Section for a period of 5 years from date of Substantial Completion against all
the conditions indicated below, and when notified in writing from Owner, ladder
manufacturer shall promptly and without inconvenience and cost to Owner correct
said deficiencies.
a) Defects in materials and workmanship.
b) Deterioration of material and surface performance below minimum OSHA
standards as certified by independent third party testing laboratory. Ordinary
wear and tear, unusual abuse or neglect excepted.
c) Within the warranty period, the ladder manufacturer shall, at its option, repair,
replace, or refund the purchase price of defective ladder.
2. Ladder manufacturer shall be notified immediately of defective products, and be

given a reasonable opportunity to inspect the goods prior to return. Ladder
manufacturer will not assume responsibility, or compensation, for unauthorized
repairs or labor. Ladder manufacturer makes no other warranty, expressed or
implied, to the merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, design, sale,
installation, or use, of the ladder; and shall not be liable for incidental or
consequential damages, losses of or expenses, resulting from the use of ladder
products
2.7 ROOF PIPE SUPPORTS
A. To support conduit or pipe sized up to Ø8" when height adjustment is needed use Model #
SS1000A Adjustable Pipe Support. 17" circular base with 12 ga. framing channel, 18"L,
attached to 17" circular base using 1/2" threaded rods, 12"L, with washers and nuts.
Height of channel can be adjusted along the length of the 1/2" threaded rods. Strut
clamps are suggested to hold piping or conduit in place.
1. Manufacturers:
a) Advanced Support Products, Inc.
B. To support water or gas piping up to Ø8" or when a roller support with height adjustment is
needed use Model # SS1000RA Pipe Support with Adjustable Roller. 17" circular base
with SBR heavy duty rubber roller assembly attached to 17" circular base using 1/2"
threaded rods, 12"L, with washers and nuts. Height of roller assembly can be adjusted
along the length of the 1/2" threaded rods.
1. Manufacturers:
C. To support multiple pipe runs, piping up to Ø12" when height adjustment or pipe
suspension is needed use Model # SS4000P, SS6000P or SS8000P Adjustable Support
Bridge. SS4000P Adjustable Suport Bridge is made of four (4) 17" circular bases and
12ga. framing channel formed to make one “H” shaped support with crossbar. SS6000P
Adjustable Suport Bridge is made of six (6) 17" circular bases and 12ga. framing channel
formed to make two “H” shaped supports with crossbar. SS8000P Adjustable Suport
Bridge is made of eight (8) 17" circular bases and 12ga. framing channel formed to make
three “H” shaped supports with crossbar. Crossbar height is adjustable and offered in
18", 24", 36", and 48" lengths. Use Adjustable Support Bridge with strut clamps or roller
accessories or use optional hanger supports to suspend water or gas piping at various
heights. Optional hanger supports attached to support frame using 1/2" threaded rods.
Hangers offer complete height adjustments along the length of 1/2" threaded rods.
1. Manufacturers:
2.10 PREFORMED FLASHINGS
A. Exhaust Vent Flashings: Double-wall metal flashing sleeve, urethane insulation filled, with
integral deck flange, fourteen inches (14") high, with removable metal hood and
(perforated) metal collar, and as follows:
1. Manufacturers:
a) Thaler Metal Industries Ltd., or approved equal.
2. Metal: Aluminum sheet, 0.064 inch, mill finished.
3. Diameter: Four inches (4").
B. Vent Stack Flashing: Metal flashing sleeve, with integral deck flange, uninsulated, and as
follows:
1. Manufacturers:
a) Thaler Metal Industries Ltd., or approved equal.
2. Metal: Aluminum sheet, 0.064 inch thick, mill finished.
3. Height: Eight inches (8").
4. Diameter: As indicated.
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored and is ready to receive roof accessories.
2. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor

roof accessories securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use
fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing
roof accessory installation. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without
failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement.
B. Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by
other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with bituminous coating
where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing exposed-to-view components of roof accessories
directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and
cover with a slip sheet, or install a course of polyethylene underlayment.
3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by roof accessory
manufacturers for waterproof performance.
D. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs
in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.
3.3 Roof Curb Installation:

1. Set roof curb so top surface of roof curb is level.
2. Curb height to maintain a minimum of 8” above finished roof surface,
3. Attach roof curb according to manufacturer's written instructions
3.4 Pipe and Equipment Support Installation:

1. Install support systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved
shop drawings.
2. Accurately locate and align pre-fabricated pipe supports in locations specified as per
approved shop drawings or as required herein and by site conditions to limit pipe
and/or conduit deflection to L/240, not to exceed 10' (3m) on center and within two
feet (2") of all elevation changes, intersections, and corners. No Isolation pads are
required under the 17" circular bases.
3. Should the roofing manufacturer require a separation sheet between the roof and the
support system, place a separation sheet or protective pad conforming to the existing
roof manufacturer’s system under 17" circular bases. Do not adhere to the roof
system or 17" circular bases.
4. If required, insert frame structures into 17" circular bases as indicated by
manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Adjust height of each strut or channel and hanger or roller to its required height and
tighten with nut, but do not over-tighten. Check each support for equal weight
disbursement. Correct if necessary.
6. Remove any unused materials and packaging from job site. All gas lines, piping, and
conduit must be supported on specified stands or hangars.
7. Supports shall be attached to pipes with oversized strapping.
8. Verify that roof surface is smooth and clean to extent needed to receive materials.
Surface shall be cleaned by removing any foreign matter.
9. Install support systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved
shop drawings. Accurately locate and align pre-fabricated pipe supports in locations
specified as per approved shop drawings. Pipe supports shall be placed not to
exceed ten feet (10') on center and within two feet (2") of all elevation changes,
intersections, and corners.
12. Supports shall be set on a double layer of membrane, adhered to the roof surface
using specified silyl-terminated polyester sealant, unless noted otherwise by support
manufacturer.
13. Provide bond breaker between dissimilar metals.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF EXTERIOR ROOF ACCESS LADDER
A. Examination:
1. Coordinate anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and anchorage
structural loads for fastener resistance.
2. Do not begin installation until supporting structure is complete and ladder installation
will not interfere with supporting structure work.
3. If supporting structure is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
unsatisfactory supporting work before proceeding.
B. Installation: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in proper
relationship with adjacent construction.
C. Protection:
2. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
3.6 Preformed Flashing Installation:

1. Secure to roof membrane according to vent and stack flashing manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.7 TOUCH UP
A. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting in
accordance with Division 9 painting Sections.
repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 07 72 16
ROOF PORTALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Rooftop pipe portals/penetration vaults.
A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory.
B. Shop Drawings: For roof accessories.

1. Submit coordination with HVAC, plumbing, electrical, and data requirements at
equipment supports and for number and types of penetrations at roof pipe portals
and vaults.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
A. At storm shelters, submit certified testing reports shown compliance with FEMA
320/361 and ICC 500.
B. Sample warranties.
A. Operation and maintenance data.
A. At storm shelter roof penetration vaults and related accessories, certify compliance
with FEMA 320/361 and ICC 500 requirements.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which

manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace roof accessories that show evidence
of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within 20 years from date of Substantial
Completion.
Roof Portals 07 72 16 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOFTOP PIPE PORTALS/VAULTS
A. Curb-Mounted Pipe Portals, General: Insulated roof-curb units with welded and sealed
corner joints, straight sides, and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter
bottom; with weathertight curb cover with single or multiple collared openings and
pressure-sealed conically shaped EPDM protective rubber caps sized for piping
indicated, with stainless steel snaplock swivel clamps.
B. Typical Pipe Portals: For single or multiple openings; curb-mounted portal engineered
to facilitate air-and-water-tight installation of roof penetrations at piping, cabling, and
similar items.
1. Basis of Design: Pipe Portal Systems by Portals Plus or RPS Curbs by Hart &
Cooley or similar products by The Pate Company or ThyCurb by ThyBar.
C. Storm Shelter Vaults: Powder-coated, insulated aluminum penetration vaults with 18

inch high curbs, rated for tornado shelter use in accordance with FEMA 320/361 and
ICC 500.
1. Basis of Design: AW Series 5000 Vault by Roof Penetration Housing (RPH),
LLC. Coordinate sizes with penetration requirements of Divisions 22, 23, 25, 26,
27 and 28.
2.2 METAL MATERIALS
A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, G90 coating designation.
1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: After cleaning and pretreating, apply

manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and
thermosetting topcoat to a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.
2. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored
acrylic or polyester-backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat, with a
minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.
B. Stainless Steel Sheet and Shapes: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304.
C. Steel Shapes: ASTM A36/A36M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A123/A123M

D. Steel Tube: ASTM A500/A500M, round tube.
E. Galvanized-Steel Tube: ASTM A500/A500M, round tube, hot-dip galvanized according

to ASTM A123/A123M.
F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, galvanized.
A. Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other
miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.
B. Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C726, nominal density of 3 lb/cu. ft., thermal
resistivity of 4.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F, thickness as indicated.
C. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C1289, thickness and thermal resistivity as

indicated.
D. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for
aboveground use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, containing no arsenic or
chromium, and complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick.
E. Underlayment:
1. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting
of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-
modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide
primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
F. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for

application and metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of
material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed
fasteners. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:
G. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, PVC,

or silicone or a flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.
H. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C920, elastomeric polymer sealant as recommended by

roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of type, grade,
class, and use classifications required to seal joints and remain watertight.
I. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;

polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for expansion joints with limited movement.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories. Install roof accessories
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install roof accessories level; plumb; true to line and elevation; and without
warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.
2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting
indicated loads.
3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required
to complete installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.
4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling,

leaking, or loosening of fasteners and seals.
B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals
from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces
with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by
manufacturer.
1. Coat concealed side of stainless steel roof accessories with bituminous coating
where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or
wood substrates, install a course of underlayment and cover with manufacturer's
recommended slip sheet.
C. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.
3.2 REPAIR AND CLEANING
A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
repair galvanizing according to ASTM A780/A780M.
B. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully
repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 07 81 16
SPRAY-APPLIED FIREPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes sprayed fire-resistive materials (SFRM).
1.2 REFERENCES
1. ASTM C 423: Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption
Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method
2. ASTM D 3273: Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of
Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber
3. ASTM D 3274: Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Surface Disfigurement of
Paint Films by Microbial (Fungal or Algal) Growth or Soil and Dirt Accumulation
Materials
6. ASTM E 136: Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace
at 750 Degrees C
7. ASTM E 605: Test Methods for Thickness and Density of Sprayed Fire-Resistive
Material (SFRM) Applied to Structural Members
8. ASTM E 736: Test Method for Cohesion/Adhesion of Sprayed Fire-Resistive
Materials Applied to Structural Members
9. ASTM E 759: Test Method for Effect of Deflection on Sprayed Fire-Resistive
Material Applied to Structural Members
10. ASTM E 760: Test Method for Effect of Impact on Bonding of Sprayed Fire-
Resistive Material Applied to Structural Members
11. ASTM E 761: Test Method for Compressive Strength of Sprayed Fire-Resistive
Material Applied to Structural Members
12. ASTM E 795: Practices for Mounting Test Specimens during Sound Absorption
Tests
13. ASTM E 859: Test Method for Air Erosion of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials
(SFRM) Applied to Structural Members
14. ASTM E 937: Test Method for Corrosion of Steel by Sprayed Fire-Resistive
Material (SFRM) Applied to Structural Members
15. ASTM E 1354: Test Method for Heat and Visible Smoke Release Rates for
Materials and Products Using an Oxygen Consumption Calorimeter
16. ASTM G 21: Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric
Materials to Fungi
B. Code of Federal Regulations
1. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D: National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards
C. International Code Council
1. International Building Code. (Ch. 17, "Structural Tests and Special Inspections")
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
1. NFPA 275: Standard Method of Fire Tests for the Evaluation of Thermal
Barriers.
Spray-Applied Fireproofing 07 81 16 - 1
E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

1. UL 263: Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials (ANSI)
2. Fire Resistance Directory.
1. Review products, design ratings, restrained and unrestrained conditions,
densities, thicknesses, bond strengths, and other performance requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Framing plans, schedules, or both, indicating the following:
1. Extent of fireproofing for each construction and fire-resistance rating.
2. Applicable fire-resistance design designations of a qualified testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Color coded table outlining the fireproofing thicknesses needed to achieve
required fire-resistance rating of each structural component and assembly.
Thicknesses listed should be the result of the W/D Ratio method outlined in Fire-
resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263: Section IV: Subsection-6. Adjustment of
Thickness of Spray-applied Fire-resistive Materials for Restrained and
Unrestrained Beam
4. Manufacturer’s thickness table for each applicable UL design
5. Treatment of fireproofing after application.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, in
manufacturer's standard dimensions in size.
A. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of fireproofing.
C. Evaluation Reports: For fireproofing, from ICC-ES.
D. Preconstruction Test Reports: For fireproofing.
E. Field quality-control reports.
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by
fireproofing manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install
manufacturer's products according to specified requirements.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of each type of fireproofing and different substrate as shown on
Drawings.
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part
of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform
preconstruction testing on field mockups of fireproofing.
1. Provide test specimens and assemblies representative of proposed materials
and construction.
B. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test for compliance with
requirements for specified performance and test methods.
1. Bond Strength: Test for cohesive and adhesive strength according to
ASTM E 736. Provide bond strength indicated in referenced fire-resistance
design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2.
2. Density: Test for density according to ASTM E 605. Provide density indicated in
referenced fire-resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2.
3. Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience,
attests that primers or coatings are compatible with fireproofing.
4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the
Work.
5. For materials failing tests, obtain applied-fireproofing manufacturer's written
instructions for corrective measures including the use of specially formulated
bonding agents or primers.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply fireproofing when ambient or substrate
temperature is 44 deg F or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to
maintain temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24
hours after product application.
B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of fireproofing,
providing complete air exchanges according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Use natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fireproofing
dries thoroughly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to
requirements of each fire-resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain fireproofing from single source.
C. Fire-Resistance Design: Indicated on Drawings, tested according to ASTM E 119 or
UL 263 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
1. Steel members are to be considered unrestrained unless specifically noted
otherwise.
2. UL design listings must state that the loading was determined by Allowable
Stress Design Method or Load and Resistance Factor Design Method. UL
design listings requiring a load restriction factor are not allowed.
D. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having
jurisdiction and the following VOC limits when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.

2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L.
3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.
4. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.
E. Low-Emitting Materials: Fireproofing used within the weatherproofing system shall
comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from
Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
F. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos.
2.2 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS
A. SFRM: Interior Locations, Concealed Conditions: Manufacturer's standard, factory-
mixed, commercial density, dry formulation, complying with indicated fire-resistance
design, and mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar before
conveyance.
a. Carboline Company; RPM International; AD Southwest Fireproofing Type
5GP.
b. GCP Applied Technologies; Monokote MK-6 Series
c. Isolatek International, Inc; Cafco 300 or 400.
d. Southwest Fireproofing Products Co; Type 5GP.
2. Bond Strength: Minimum 200-lbf/sq. ft. cohesive and adhesive strength based
on field testing according to ASTM E 736.
3. Density: Not less than 15 lb/cu. ft. (240 kg/cu. m) and as specified in the
approved fire-resistance design, according to ASTM E 605.
4. Thickness: As required for fire-resistance design indicated, measured according
to requirements of fire-resistance design or ASTM E 605, whichever is thicker,
but not less than 0.375 inch.
5. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136 or ASTM E 1354.
6. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified
agency.
b. Smoke-Developed Index: 0.
7. Compressive Strength: Minimum 10 lbf/sq. in. (68.9 kPa) according to
ASTM E 761.
8. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion according to ASTM E 937.
9. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to ASTM E 759.
10. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to
ASTM E 760.
11. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.010 g/sq. ft. in 24 hours according to
ASTM E 859.
12. Fungal Resistance: Treat products with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial
formulation to result in no growth on specimens per ASTM G 21 or rating of 10
according to ASTM D 3274 when tested according to ASTM D 3273.
13. Sound Absorption: NRC of not less than 0.50 according to ASTM C 423 for
Type A mounting according to ASTM E 795.
14. Finish: Spray-textured finish.
2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and
substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.
B. Substrate Primers: Primers approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with
one or both of the following requirements:
1. Primer and substrate are identical to those tested in required fire-resistance
design by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
2. Primer's bond strength in required fire-resistance design complies with specified
bond strength for fireproofing and with requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory" or in the listings of another qualified testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, based on a series of bond tests according to
ASTM E 736.
C. Bonding Agent: Product approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with
requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listings of another qualified
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Metal Lath: Expanded metal lath fabricated from material of weight, configuration, and
finish required, according to fire-resistance designs indicated and fireproofing
manufacturer's written recommendations. Include clips, lathing accessories, corner
beads, and other anchorage devices required to attach lath to substrates and to
receive fireproofing.
E. Reinforcing Fabric: Glass- or carbon-fiber fabric of type, weight, and form required to
comply with fire-resistance designs indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing
manufacturer.
F. Reinforcing Mesh: Metallic mesh reinforcement of type, weight, and form required to
comply with fire-resistance design indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing
manufacturer. Include pins and attachment.
G. Sealer: Transparent-drying, water-dispersible, tinted protective coating recommended
in writing by fireproofing manufacturer for each fire-resistance design.
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Cafco Bond-Seal
Type X by Isolatek International or Firebond Concentrate by GCP Applied
Technologies.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work
and according to each fire-resistance design. Verify compliance with the following:
1. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill
scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, or other
foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fireproofing with substrates
under conditions of normal use or fire exposure.
2. Objects penetrating fireproofing, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and
similar items, are securely attached to substrates.
3. Substrates receiving fireproofing are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment,

or other suspended construction that will interfere with fireproofing application.
B. Verify that concrete work on steel deck has been completed before beginning
fireproofing work.
C. Verify that roof construction, installation of roof-top HVAC equipment, and other related
work is complete before beginning fireproofing work.
D. Conduct tests according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations to
verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond.
E. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials
during application.
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fireproofing.
C. Prime substrates where included in fire-resistance design and where recommended in
writing by fireproofing manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied
and is in satisfactory condition to receive fireproofing.
D. For applications visible on completion of Project, repair substrates to remove surface
imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of
fireproofing. Remove minor projections and fill voids that would telegraph through fire-
resistive products after application.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated
and products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; for thickness,
primers, sealers, topcoats, finishing, and other materials and procedures affecting
fireproofing work.
B. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials,
application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply
fireproofing; as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to
achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
C. Coordinate application of fireproofing with other construction to minimize need to cut or
remove fireproofing.
1. Do not begin applying fireproofing until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and
other items penetrating fireproofing are in place.
2. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying
fireproofing until application of fireproofing is completed.
D. Metal Decks:
1. Do not apply fireproofing to underside of metal deck substrates until concrete
topping, if any, has been completed.
2. Do not apply fireproofing to underside of metal roof deck until roofing has been
completed; prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fireproofing.
E. Install auxiliary materials as required, as detailed, and according to fire-resistance

design and fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of
exposure and intended use. For auxiliary materials, use attachment and anchorage
devices of type recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.
F. Spray apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation
in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method
recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.
G. Extend fireproofing in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected.
H. Install body of fireproofing in a single course unless otherwise recommended in writing
by fireproofing manufacturer.
I. For applications over encapsulant materials, including lockdown (post-removal)
encapsulants, apply fireproofing that differs in color from that of encapsulant over
which it is applied.
J. Where sealers are used, apply products that are tinted to differentiate them from
fireproofing over which they are applied.
K. Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for each type of
fireproofing material and matching finish approved for required mockups.
L. Cure fireproofing according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations.
M. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been
applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to deficient
applications.
N. Finishes: Where indicated, apply fireproofing to produce the following finishes:
1. Manufacturer's Standard Finishes: Finish according to manufacturer's written
instructions for each finish selected.
A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following
special inspections:
1. Test and inspect as required by Chapter 17 of the IBC, as amended by local
authority having jurisdiction.
B. Perform the tests and inspections of completed Work in successive stages. Do not
proceed with application of fireproofing for the next area until test results for previously
completed applications of fireproofing show compliance with requirements. Tested
values must equal or exceed values as specified and as indicated and required for
approved fire-resistance design.
C. Fireproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
1. Remove and replace fireproofing that does not pass tests and inspections, and
retest.
2. Apply additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test
results indicate insufficient thickness, and retest.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIRING

A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area
of Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction
and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.
B. Protect fireproofing, according to advice of manufacturer and Installer, from damage
resulting from construction operations or other causes, so fireproofing will be without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
C. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fireproofing and repair damaged
areas and fireproofing removed due to work of other trades.
D. Repair fireproofing damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction.
E. Repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using
manufacturer's recommended trowel-applied product.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 07 84 13
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Penetrations in fire resistance rated walls.
2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.
3. Penetrations in smoke barriers.
A. Product Data: Product Data: Technical data for each penetrating firestopping system
including illustration of firestopping system and design designation.
B. Product Schedule: Submit schedule for each penetration firestopping system indicating
location, illustration of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing
and inspecting agency.
1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a
qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration
firestopping system, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by
penetration firestopping system manufacturer's fire protection engineer as an
engineering judgment or equivalent fire resistance rated assembly. Obtain
approval of authorities having jurisdiction prior to submittal.
B. Product Test Reports: Submit reports for each penetration firestopping system and for
tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
A. Installer Certificates: Submit certificates from Installer indicating that penetration

firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and
Penetration Firestopping 07 84 13 - 1
A. Installer Qualifications: Entity having minimum 5 years documented experience that has
been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991 Approval of Firestop
Contractors or evaluated by UL and found to comply with its Qualified Firestop Contractor
Program Requirements and employs applicators with the required experience and
training to perform the work.
1. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetrating firestopping system products to
Contractor or to Installer does not confer qualification on buyer.
2. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install
manufacturer's products per specified requirements.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Do not cover through-penetration firestop system installations that will become

concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined
by Owner's inspecting agency and building inspector when required by authorities
1. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of penetration
firestopping installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of
installations.
B. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration

firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design.
C. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to

accommodate penetration firestopping systems.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping system when ambient

or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping system
manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other
causes.
B. Install and cure penetration firestopping materials per manufacturer's written instructions
using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Fire Test Response Characteristics:

1. Perform penetration firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Test in accordance with referenced standards. Provide rated systems complying
with the following requirements:
a. Penetration firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a

qualified testing agency.
1) UL Fire Resistance Directory.
2) FM Global Building Materials Approval Guide.
2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS
A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke
and gases, and maintain original fire resistance rating of construction penetrated.
Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the
substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.
of the following:
a. 3M Fire Protection Products.
b. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.
c. Hilti, Inc.
d. Nelson Firestop Products, Division of EGS Electrical Group.
e. Passive Fire Protection Partners.
f. RectorSeal.
g. Specified Technologies, Inc.
h. Tremco, Inc.
B. Penetrations in Fire Resistance Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with

ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure
differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).
1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings

determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure
differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).
1. F-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire resistance rating of
constructions penetrated.
2. T-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire resistance rating of
constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.
3. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping systems showing no evidence of water
leakage when tested according to UL 1479.
D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings

determined per UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.30 inch
wg (74.7 Pa).
1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.025 cu. m/s per sq. m) of penetration
opening at and no more than 50-cfm (0.024-cu. m/s) cumulative total for any 100
sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) at both ambient and elevated temperatures.
E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping Systems: Flame spread and smoke developed

indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
F. Manufactured Piping Penetration Firestopping System: Penetration firestopping

systems with ratings determined per ASTM E814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a
positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:
a. ProVent Systems, Inc.
2. F-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire resistance rating of
constructions penetrated.
3. T-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire resistance rating of
constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.
4. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping systems showing no evidence of water
leakage when tested according to UL 1479.
5. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral
nailing flange on one end for installation in cast in place concrete slabs.
6. Stack Fitting: ASTM A48/A48M, gray iron, hubless pattern wye branch with
neoprene O ring at base and gray iron plug in thermal release harness. Include
PVC protective cap for plug.
7. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.
G. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system necessary

to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use components specified by
penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and
inspecting agency for conditions indicated.
1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials.
2. Substrate primers.
3. Collars.
4. Steel sleeves.
2.3 FILL MATERIALS
A. Cast in Place Firestop Devices: Factory assembled devices for use in cast in place
concrete floors and consisting of an outer sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a flange
attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene
gasket.
B. Latex Sealants: Single component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure
during exposure to moisture.
C. Firestop Devices: Factory assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined
with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.
D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum foil faced

intumescent elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized steel sheet.
E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening, water resistant, intumescent putties containing no

solvents or inorganic fibers.
F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single component intumescent elastomeric sheets with

aluminum foil on one side.
G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic

cement, fillers and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site
to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.
H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass fiber cloth

cases filled with a combination of mineral fiber, water insoluble expansion agents, and
fire retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel reinforcing wire mesh
to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed.
I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone based liquid elastomers that, when mixed,
expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
J. Silicone Sealants: Single component, silicone based, neutral curing elastomeric

sealants.
K. Firestop Sleeve Device: Factory assembled sleeves formed from galvanized steel and
lined with intumescent material designed to fit specific diameter of penetration.
2.4 MIXING
A. Penetration Firestopping Materials: For products requiring mixing before application,

comply with penetration firestopping system manufacturer's written instructions for
accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment,
selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures
needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics
for application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing penetration firestopping systems, clean out openings
immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with requirements:
1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign
materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping materials.
2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces
capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials.
Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.
3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that

manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond;
do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting
adjoining surfaces that remain exposed on completion of the work and would otherwise
be permanently stained or damaged by contact or by cleaning methods used to remove
stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with
substrates.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's written

installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications.
B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials
during application and in the position needed to produce cross sectional shapes and
depths required to achieve fire ratings.
1. After installing fill materials and allowing to fully cure, remove combustible forming
materials and accessories not forming permanent components of firestopping.
C. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and
penetrating items to achieve required fire resistance ratings.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to
produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems

with the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using
lettering not less than 3 inches (76 mm) high and with minimum 0.375 inch (9.5 mm)
strokes.
1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic space at 15 feet (4.57 m)
from end of wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet (9.14 m).
B. Penetration Identification: Identify each penetration firestopping system with legible

metal or plastic labels.
1. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of
penetration firestopping system edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to
remove penetrating items or firestopping systems.
2. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering type labels with adhesives capable of
permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the
following information on labels:
a. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify
Building Management of Any Damage."
b. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
c. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

d. Date of installation.
e. Manufacturer's name.
f. Installer's name.
A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections according
to ASTM E 2174.
B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping system is damaged or removed

because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping system to comply with
requirements.
C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping systems with construction only after
inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping
system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure
that penetration firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion. If, despite protections, damage or deterioration occurs,
immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping
material and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified
requirements.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 07 84 46
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions.
2. Joints at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections.
3. Joints in smoke barriers.
1. Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetrations in fire-resistance-
rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers.
2. Section 07 95 00 "Expansion Control" for fire-resistive architectural joint systems.
1.2 REFERENCES
Materials
3. ASTM E 1966: Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems
4. ASTM E 2307: Test Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Perimeter Fire
Barrier Systems Using Intermediate-Scale, Multi-Story Test Apparatus
B. Code of Federal Regulations

1. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D: National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards
C. FM Global
1. FM Global 4991: Approval of Firestop Contractors (FCIA)
D. Intertek ETL SEMCO

1. Directory of Listed Building Products.
E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

1. UL 2079: Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems (ANSI)
2. Fire Resistance Directory.
3. Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements.
B. Product Schedule: For each fire-resistive joint system. Include location and design
designation of qualified testing agency.
1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing agency's
illustration for a particular fire-resistive joint system condition, submit illustration,
Fire-Resisitive Joint Systems 07 84 46 - 1

with modifications marked, approved by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's

fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-
rated assembly.

A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating fire-resistive joint systems have been
installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written
recommendations.
C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a

qualified testing agency, for fire-resistive joint systems.

A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to
FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and
found to comply with UL's "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."
B. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing fire-resistive joint systems

similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include
having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products
per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its fire-resistive joint
system products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself
confer qualification on buyer.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Fire-resistive joint systems shall comply with the

1. Fire-resistive joint system tests are performed by a qualified testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per testing standard
referenced in "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" Article. Provide rated systems
complying with the following requirements:
a. Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified
testing agency.
b. Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by reference to
designations listed by the following:
1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
2) Intertek ETL SEMKO in its "Directory of Listed Building Products."
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or

substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system
manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other
causes.
B. Install and cure fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions using
natural means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed
according to specified requirements.
B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems.

C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of fire-resistive joint
system installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of
installations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
A. Where required, provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to
resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and
other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between
which fire-resistive joint systems are installed. Fire-resistive joint systems shall
accommodate building movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage
of fire and hot gases.
B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide fire-resistive joint

systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079:
1. Joints include those installed in or between fire-resistance-rated walls, floor or
floor/ceiling assemblies, and roofs or roof/ceiling assemblies.
2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of
construction they will join.
a. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.
b. CEMCO.
c. Fire Trak Corp.
d. GCP Applied Technologies
e. Hilti, Inc.
f. Johns Manville.
g. Nelson Firestop Products.
h. NUCO Inc.
i. Passive Fire Protection Partners.
j. RectorSeal Corporation.
k. Specified Technologies Inc.
l. 3M Fire Protection Products.
m. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.
n. USG Corporation.
C. Joints at Exterior Curtain-Wall/Floor Intersections: Provide fire-resistive joint systems

with rating determined by ASTM E 119 based on testing at a positive pressure
differential of 0.01-inch wg or ASTM E 2307.
1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the
floor assembly.


a. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.
b. GCP Applied Technologies
c. Hilti, Inc.
d. Johns Manville.
e. Nelson Firestop Products.
f. NUCO Inc.
g. Passive Fire Protection Partners.
h. RectorSeal Corporation.
i. Specified Technologies Inc.
j. 3M Fire Protection Products.
k. Thermafiber, Inc.
l. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.
m. USG Corporation.
D. Exposed Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-
developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per
ASTM E 84.
E. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and

forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings
required. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer
and approved by the qualified testing agency for systems indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems
to comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the
1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere
with adhesion of fill materials.
2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing
optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning
operation.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system

manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine
primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system
from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work
and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by
cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without
disturbing fire-resistive joint system's seal with substrates.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written

installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill
materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional
shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible
forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components
of fire-resistive joint system.
C. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the
following results:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to
achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to
produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify fire-resistive joint systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels
permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of joint edge so labels will be
visible to anyone seeking to remove or penetrate joint system. Use mechanical
fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding
labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on
labels:
1. The words "Warning - Fire-Resistive Joint System - Do Not Disturb. Notify
Building Management of Any Damage."
2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
3. Designation of applicable testing agency.
4. Date of installation.
5. Manufacturer's name.
6. Installer's name.
A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
inspections.
B. Where deficiencies are found or fire-resistive joint systems are damaged or removed
due to testing, repair or replace fire-resistive joint systems so they comply with
requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive joint systems with other construction only after
inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system
manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which joints occur.
1. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that
ensure fire-resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such
protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint
systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire-resistive joint
systems complying with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 07 92 00
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Silyl-terminated polymer joint sealants at joints in masonry, metal panels,
openings, and at dynamic conditions.
2. Latex joint sealants at static joints in gypsum board substrates.
B. Related Sections
1. See Section 08 80 00 “Glazing” for silicone sealants related to glazing systems.
A. Product data.
B. Samples: Manufacturer's standard color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants

showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C. Joint-sealant schedule.
A. Field Quality-Control Submittals:
1. Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.
B. Sample warranties.
A. Qualifications:
1. Installers: Authorized representative who is trained and approved by

manufacturer.
2. Testing Agency: Qualified in accordance with ASTM C1021 to conduct the
testing indicated.
Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field
experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full

range.
2.2 POLYMER JOINT SEALANTS
A. Silyl-terminated Polymer (STPE or STPU), M or S, NS, 50, NT: Single or Multi-

component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability
nontraffic-use joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type M or S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.

be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Sika; SikaHyflex-150LM
b. Tremco; Vulkem 45SSL
c. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL Hybrid.
B. Self-leveling Sealant: One or two part polyurethane sealant, ASTM C920 Type M or S,
Grade P, Class 25, Use T.

a. Sika; Sikaflex-1C SL
b. Tremco; Dymonic-FC
c. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II-SG.
2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C834, Type OP,
Grade NF.

a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20.

b. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); 850A Siliconized Acrylic Latex Caulk.
c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.
2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates,

sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by
sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

a. Construction Foam Products; a division of Nomaco, Inc.
b. Master Builders Solutions; MasterSeal 920 & 921(Pre-2014: Sonolastic
Backer Rod).
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface
skin), Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any of the preceding types,
as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and
of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing
optimum sealant performance.
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials
or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for

adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction
joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of

sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances
capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any
way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and
surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants
to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following
requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with
adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective
coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant
manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents,
water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical

abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate
capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles
remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints
with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means
that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with
adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant

manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior
experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written
instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or
migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or
primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or
damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears.
Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for

products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C1193 for use
of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at
position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants
relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant
application, and replace them with dry materials.
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used
between sealants and backs of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same
time backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that
allow optimum sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning
or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs
below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air
pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.

2. Use tooling agents approved by sealant manufacturer that do not discolor
sealants or adjacent surfaces and provide concave joint profile in accordance
with Figure 8A in ASTM C1193 unless otherwise indicated.
G. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses
by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint
sealants and of products in which joints occur.
H. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes
so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If,
despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair
damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas
are indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 07 95 00
EXTERIOR EXPANSION CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Exterior wall expansion control systems.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: For each expansion control system specified. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, splices, attachments to other work, and line diagrams showing entire route of
each expansion control system. Where expansion control systems change planes, provide
isometric or clearly detailed drawing depicting how components interconnect.
B. Samples: For each exposed expansion control system and for each color and texture specified,
full width by 6 inches long in size.
C. Product Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of the supplier. Include the following
information in tabular form:
1. Manufacturer and model number for each expansion control system.
2. Expansion control system location cross-referenced to Drawings.
3. Nominal joint width.
4. Movement capability.
5. Materials, colors, and finishes.
6. Product options.
7. Fire-resistance ratings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General: Provide expansion control systems of design, basic profile, materials, and operation
indicated. Provide units with capability to accommodate variations in adjacent surfaces.
1. Furnish units in longest practicable lengths to minimize field splicing. Install with hairline
mitered corners where expansion control systems change direction or abut other materials.
2. Include factory-fabricated closure materials and transition pieces, T-joints, corners, curbs,
cross-connections, and other accessories as required to provide continuous expansion
control systems.
B. Coordination: Coordinate installation of exterior wall expansion control systems with roof
expansion control systems to ensure that wall transitions are watertight. Roof expansion joint
assemblies are specified elsewhere.
Exterior Expansion Control 07 95 00 - 1

2.2 EXTERIOR EXPANSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Basis of Design products listed are surface-mounted aluminum

covered expansion control systems with water barrier as manufactured by Construction
Specialties.
B. Subject to compliance with requirements, equivalent products may be accepted by one of the
following manufacturers pending review by Architect:
1. Balco, Inc.
2. MM Systems Corporation.
3. Nystrom, Inc.
4. Watson Bowman Acme Corp.; a BASF Construction Chemicals business.
C. Wall-to-Wall:
1. Basis-of-Design, 1 inch joint: Model ASM-100X.
2. Basis-of-Design, 2 inch joint: Model ASM-200X.
D. Wall-to-Corner:
1. Basis-of-Design, 1 inch joint: Model ASMC-100X.
2. Basis-of-Design, 2 inch joint: Model ASMC-200X.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6 for sheet
and plate.
1. Apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum surfaces to be placed in
contact with cementitious materials.
2. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, clips, fasteners, set screws, spacers, and other
accessories compatible with material in contact, as indicated or required for complete
installations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces where expansion control systems will be installed for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to expansion control system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, and instructions for installing expansion
control systems. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction indicated
and to provide for secure attachment of expansion control systems.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storing, handling, and installing expansion
control systems and materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
B. Metal Frames: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install expansion control systems.
1. Install in true alignment and proper relationship to joints and adjoining finished surfaces
2. Adjust for differences between actual structural gap and nominal design gap due to
ambient temperature at time of installation. Notify Architect where discrepancies occur that
will affect proper expansion control system installation and performance.
3. Cut and fit ends to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal without
buckling of frames.
4. Repair or grout blockout as required for continuous frame support using nonmetallic,
shrinkage-resistant grout.
5. Install frames in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces.
a. Shimming is not permitted.

6. Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 3 inches from
each end and not more than 24 inches o.c.
C. Seals: Install with adhesives and sealants recommended by manufacturer.
D. Terminate exposed ends of expansion control systems with field- or factory-fabricated

termination devices.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete. When
protective covering is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with manufacturer's
B. Protect the installation from damage by work of other Sections. Where necessary due to heavy
construction traffic, remove and properly store cover plates or seals and install temporary
protection over expansion control systems. Reinstall cover plates or seals prior to Substantial
Completion of the Work.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 07 95 13
INTERIOR EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes interior expansion joint cover assemblies.
B. Shop Drawings: For each expansion joint cover assembly include plans, elevations, sections,
details, splices, block-out requirement, attachments to other work, and line diagrams.
C. Samples: For each expansion joint cover assembly and for each color and texture specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION
A. Typical Expansion Joint Covers, Wall and Ceiling: Surface mounted aluminum covers including
wall-to-wall, ceiling-to-ceiling, and wall-to-ceiling conditions.
B. Typical Expansion Joint Covers, Floors: Recessed aluminum covers, including at floor-to-floor
and floor-to-wall transitions.
C. Furnish units in longest practicable lengths to minimize field splicing.
D. Include factory-fabricated closure materials and transition pieces, T-joints, corners, curbs,
cross-connections, and other accessories as required to provide continuous expansion joint
cover assemblies.
A. Seismic Performance: Expansion joint cover assemblies to withstand the effects of earthquake
B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide expansion joint cover assemblies with fire barriers identical to
those of systems tested for fire resistance according to UL 2079 or ASTM E1966 by a qualified
testing agency.
1. Hose Stream Test: Wall-to-wall and wall-to-ceiling assemblies to be subjected to hose

stream testing.
Interior Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies 07 95 13 - 1

2.3 FLOOR EXPANSION JOINT COVERS
A. Metal-to-Metal Recessed Joints: Free-floating aluminum center plate spans the joint and slides
between the fixed aluminum frame assemblies allowing movement.
1. Basis-of-Design, Floor-to-Floor Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,

provide ALS 100 and ALS-200 by Construction Specialties, or comparable product by
a. MM Systems Corporation.
b. Nystrom, Inc.
c. Watson Bowman Acme Corp.
2. Basis-of-Design, Floor-to-Wall Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

ALSW 100 and ALSW-200 by Construction Specialties, or comparable product by one of
the following:
b. Nystrom, Inc.
3. Design Criteria:
a. Nominal Joint Width, Models ALS 100 and ALSW 100: 1 inch.
b. Nominal Joint Width, Models ALS 200 and ALSW 200: 2 inches
4. Aluminum Finish: As selected by Architect.
2.4 WALL AND CEILING EXPANSION JOINT COVERS
A. Metal-to-Metal Surface-Mounted Joints: Free-floating aluminum center plate spans the joint and
slides between the fixed, gasketed aluminum frame assemblies allowing movement.
1. Basis-of-Design, Ceiling-to-Ceiling and Wall-to-Wall Products: Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide ASM 100 and ASM-200 by Construction Specialties, or
comparable product by one of the following:
b. Nystrom, Inc.
2. Basis-of-Design, Ceiling-to-Wall Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,

provide ASMC 100 and ASMC-200 by Construction Specialties, or comparable product
b. Nystrom, Inc.
3. Design Criteria:
a. Nominal Joint Width, Models ASM 100 and ASMC 100: 1 inch.
b. Nominal Joint Width, Models ASM 200 and ASMC 200: 2 inches
4. Aluminum Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

2.5 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B209, Alloy 6061-T6 for sheet and
plate.
B. Elastomeric Seals: Manufacturer's standard preformed elastomeric membranes or extrusions to

be installed in metal frames.
C. Fire Barriers: Any material or material combination, to comply with performance criteria for
required fire-resistance rating.
D. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M.
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Walls and Ceilings: Clear Anodized
B. Floor: Mill finish.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Manufacturer's standard attachment devices, as indicated or required for complete installations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Prepare substrates according to expansion joint cover assembly manufacturer's written

instructions.
B. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, and instructions for installing expansion
joint cover assemblies.
C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storing, handling, and installing expansion
joint cover assemblies and materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
D. Metal Frames: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install expansion joint cover
assemblies.
1. Repair or grout block out as required for continuous frame support using nonmetallic,
shrinkage-resistant grout.
2. Install frames in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces.
a. Shimming is not permitted.
3. Install in true alignment and proper relationship to joints and adjoining finished surfaces
4. Adjust for differences between actual structural gap and nominal design gap due to
ambient temperature at time of installation.
5. Cut and fit ends to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal without
buckling of frames.

6. Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 3 inches
from each end and not more than 24 inches o.c.
E. Seals: Install elastomeric seals and membranes in frames to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions. Install with minimum number of end joints.
1. Provide in continuous lengths for straight sections.

2. Seal transitions. Vulcanize or heat-weld field-spliced joints as recommended by
manufacturer.
3. Installation: Mechanically lock seals into frames or adhere to frames with adhesive or
pressure-sensitive tape as recommended by manufacturer.
F. Install with hairline mitered corners where expansion joint cover assemblies change direction or
abut other materials.
G. Terminate exposed ends of expansion joint cover assemblies with field- or factory-fabricated
termination devices.
H. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Coordinate installation of expansion joint cover assembly

materials and associated work so complete assemblies comply with performance requirements.
1. Fire Barriers: Install fire barriers to provide continuous, uninterrupted fire resistance
throughout length of joint, including transitions and field splices.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete.
B. Protect the installation from damage by work of other Sections.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 08 11 13
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Hollow-metal work.
B. See Section 08 17 34 “FRP Flush Doors” for requirements of hollow metal frames at
FRP doors.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute, Inc.:
1. ANSI A117.1: Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to

and Usable by Physically Handicapped People.
2. ANSI/DHI A115 Series (ANSI A115.1-1990 through ANSI A115.18-1994):
Specifications for Steel Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware.
3. ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861: Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal
Doors and Frames.
4. ANSI/SDI A250.4: Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical
Endurance for Steel Doors and Hardware Reinforcing.
5. ANSI/SDI A250.6: Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on
Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
6. ANSI/SDI A250.8: Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames.
7. ANSI/SDI A250.10: Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted
Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.
8. ANSI/SDI A250.11: Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames.
B. American Society of Civil Engineers:
1. SEI/ASCE-7: Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.]]
C. American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM A 153/A 153M: Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
2. ASTM A 591/A 591M: Specification for Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc-Coated, for
Light Coating Weight Mass Application.
3. ASTM A 653/A 653M: Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 13 - 1

4. ASTM A 1008/A 1008M: Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,

Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
Formability.
5. ASTM A 1011/A 1011M: Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot Rolled,
Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with
Improved Formability.
6. ASTM E 2074: Test Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, Including Positive
Pressure Testing of Side-Hinged and Pivoted Swinging Door Assemblies.
D. Door Hardware Institute (DHI)
1. The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames, Insulated Steel
Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware.
E. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers/Hollow Metal Manufacturers

Association (NAAMM-HMMA)
1. NAAMM-HMMA 840 – Maintenance of Installed Hollow Metal Products
F. National Fire Prevention Association:
1. NFPA 80: Fire Doors and Fire Windows.

2. NFPA 105: Installation of Smoke-Control Door Assemblies.
3. NFPA 252: Fire Test of Door Assemblies.
4. NFPA 257: Fire Test for Window and Glass Block Assemblies.
G. Steel Door Institute:
1. SDI 111C: Recommended Louver Details for Standard Steel Doors.

2. SDI 117: Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
H. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
1. UL 9: Fire Tests of Window Assemblies

2. UL 10C: Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
3. UL 1784: Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-

resistance ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Elevations of each door type.

2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal
thicknesses.
3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal
thicknesses.

4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.

5. Details of each different wall opening condition.
6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
7. Details of accessories.
8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the

supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as
those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.
D. Samples: For each type or exposed finish submit 3 by 5 inch sample using finish
system on substrate to be used on Project for selection and verification.
E. Door Schedule: Use same reference designations as listed in Contract Documents for
openings, doors, frames, hardware, fire-ratings, glazed and louver openings, and other
aspects of the Work.
A. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for
tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified

requirements.
A. Qualifications-Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products

specified in this section with a minimum of five years documented experience.
B. Regulatory Requirements.
1. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a

qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-
protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to
NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
2. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed
and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and
installed in compliance with NFPA 105.
3. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested
assemblies, provide manufacturer's certification that doors conform to all
standard construction requirements of tested and labeled fire-rated door
assemblies except for size.
4. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and
labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to
NFPA 257 or UL 9.

A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during

transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack
welded to jambs and mullions.
C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on
minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm)
space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate of door opening construction with door hardware installation and

anchor placement.
2. Coordinate grout fill of metal frames in masonry construction.
3. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1. Amweld International, LLC.

2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.
3. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.
4. Deansteel.
5. Kewaunee
6. Mesker Door Inc.
7. Pioneer Industries, Inc.
8. Rocky Mountain Metals, Inc.
9. Steelcraft; an Allegion company.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
suitable for exposed applications.
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free
of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating
designation; mill phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A
1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A
153/A 153M, Class B.
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
F. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for

application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other
accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.
G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured

according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing);

consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread
and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for
I. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film
thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers,
sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
2.3 INTERIOR HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3.
1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4.

2. Doors:
a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.

b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.
c. Face: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch.
d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Seamless.
e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,
polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, or mineral-board at manufacturer's
discretion.
f. Fire-rated Doors: Listed and labeled by approved testing agency.
3. Frames, typical:
a. Materials: Uncoated, steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch.

b. Construction: Full profile welded.
c. Exposed Finish: Prime.
d. Fire-rated Frames: listed and labeled by approved testing agency.
4. Frames at FRP Doors specified in Section 08 17 34 “FRP Flush Doors”:

a. Materials: Uncoated, steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.067 inch.

2.4 EXTERIOR HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for
materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and
clearances, and as specified.
B. Maximum-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 4.
1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4.

2. Doors:

c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.067 inch, with
minimum A40 (ZF120) coating.
d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Seamless.
e. Core: Manufacturer's standard polyurethane or polyisocyanurate at
manufacturer's discretion.
3. Frames:
a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.067 inch,

with minimum A40 (ZF120) coating.
d. At exterior fire-rated insulated windows, provide the following:
1) Fire-rated, fully welded, Mercury Series Thermally Broken Frames by

CECO Door, an AssaAbloy Company.
2.5 HOLLOW-METAL PANELS
A. Provide hollow-metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as adjacent

door assemblies.
2.6 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame

size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less
than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch
thick.

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less
than 0.042 inch thick.
3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.
4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-
inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from
frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor
location.
B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042
inch, and as follows:
1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive

fasteners.
2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,
allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at
finish floor surface.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately
form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness.
Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper
assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory
assembled before shipment.
B. Hollow-Metal Doors:
1. Fire Door Cores: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated.

2. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Provide beveled or square edges at
manufacturer's discretion.
3. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with inverted closures, except
provide flush closures at exterior doors of same material as face sheets.
4. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or
channels of same material as face sheets.
5. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to
permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water
penetration.
6. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where
required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend
minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as
required to comply with published listing of qualified testing agency.
C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or

handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of
same thickness metal as frames.
1. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no
visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten
members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.
2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed
fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to

be grouted at CMU openings. Do not grout openings in gypsum board partitions.
4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds
per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or
countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs.
5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c., to match
coursing, and as follows:
1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.

2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.
4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each
24 inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.
b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as
follows:
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.

2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.
4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each
24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.
c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame.

d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from
top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.
6. Head Anchors: Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and
mounted in metal-stud partitions.
7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door
silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.
a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door

silencers.
b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel
sheet.
E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated

mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping
according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.
1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-

mounted door hardware.
2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for
preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.

F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers
where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline
joints.
1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of
hollow-metal work.
2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that
each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.
3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior
doors and frames.
4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work.
5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and
installation types indicated.
2.8 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free

primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for
substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged
exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations
before frame installation.
C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by

grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and
invisible on exposed faces.
B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-
mounted door hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened
in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply
with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.
1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until
permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove
temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.

b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint
continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible
on exposed faces.
c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.
d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have
been properly set and secured.
f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim
as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
g. Field apply corrosion-resistant coating to backs of frames that will be in
contact with grout or plaster containing anti-freezing agents.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to
floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of

postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop
Drawings.
3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.

4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space
between frames and masonry with grout.
5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-fiber
insulation.
6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with
postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth,
flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
7. In-Place Metal Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place according to
C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances

specified below. Shim as necessary.
1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:

a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32
inch.
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32
inch.
c. At Bottom of Door: 5/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32
inch.
2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.

3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors and gaskets according to NFPA 105.
D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing" and with

hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced

uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each
corner.
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before
final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and
replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or
otherwise unacceptable.
B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after
installation.
C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged

areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing
repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 08 14 16
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Solid core doors and transom panels with wood veneer faces.
2. Fire rated wood doors.
3. Factory finishing flush wood doors.
4. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
B. Integration of Security System: The integration of a security system into the flush wood
door is required. Make provisions for and coordinate components and installation.
A. Product Data: Technical data including core materials and construction, details edge
construction, face type and characteristics, louvers, trim for openings, and factory
finishing.
1. Submit laboratory test report results of hinge loading, cycle/slam, stile edge
screw withdrawals, and stile edge split resistance for fire rated doors.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, fire protection rating, and hand of each door;
elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the
following:
1. Elevations, dimensions and locations of blocking.
2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware, lite and louver
cutouts, and glazing thicknesses.
3. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access
control systems, and security systems.
4. Dimensions and locations of blocking for hardware attachment.
5. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
6. Dimensions and locations of cutouts.
7. Clearances and undercuts.
8. Requirements for veneer matching.
9. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
10. Fire protection ratings for fire rated doors.
C. Samples:
1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10
inches (200 by 250 mm), for each material and finish. For each wood species and
transparent finish, provide set of three Samples showing typical range of color and
grain to be expected in finished work.
2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), with
door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used.
a. Provide Samples for each species of veneer and solid lumber required.
Flush Wood Doors 08 14 16 - 1

b. Provide Samples for each color, texture, and pattern of plastic laminate
required.
c. Finish veneer-faced door Samples with same materials proposed for factory-
finished doors.
3. Louver blade and frame sections, 6 inches (150 mm) long, for each material and
finish specified.
4. Frames for light openings, 6 inches (150 mm) long, for each material, type, and
finish required.
A. Certificate of Compliance for Fire Rated Doors: Provide copies of Certificate of

Compliance for all fire rated door assemblies, smoke and draft control door assemblies,
and temperature rise rated door assemblies.
B. Qualification Data: Submit data for door inspector.

1. Fire Rated Door Inspector: Submit documentation of compliance with NFPA 80,
Section 5.2.3.1.
2. Egress Door Inspector: Submit documentation of compliance with NFPA 101,
Section 7.2.1.15.4.
3. Submit copy of DHI's Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI) certificate.
C. Field quality control reports.
A. Record Documents: Submit for fire rated doors, a list of door numbers and applicable
room name and number to which door accesses.
A. Fire Rated Door Inspector Qualifications: Inspector for field quality control inspections of
fire rated door assemblies shall comply with qualifications set forth in NFPA 80,
Section 5.2.3.1 and the following:
1. DHI's Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI) certification.
B. Egress Door Inspector Qualifications: Inspector for field quality control inspections of
egress door assemblies shall comply with qualifications set forth in NFPA 101,
Section 7.2.1.15.4 and the following:
1. DHI's Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI) certification.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at site.
A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Protect wood doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and
deterioration. Store wood doors on a flat level surface in a dry, well ventilated, place.
Keep wood doors a minimum of 3-1/2 inches off floor surface and protected by a
protective covering under the bottom door and over the top door. Cover to protect wood
doors from dirt, water and abuse but allow for air circulation under and around the stack.
Do not store wood doors in direct sunlight.
C. Package doors individually in heavy duty cardboard cartons prior to shipment from
factory. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop
Drawings using temporary, removable, or concealed markings.
D. Handle wood doors with clean gloves. Lift and carry wood doors when moving around
the site, do not drag wood doors across one another.
E. Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating
and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels
during remainder of construction period.
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, wet work is complete, and HVAC
system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 degrees F and 90
degrees F (16 degrees C and 32 degrees C) and relative humidity between 25 percent
and 55 percent during remainder of construction period.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Written warranty signed by manufacturer in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
a. Delamination of veneer.
b. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42 inch by 84
inch (1067 mm by 2134 mm) section.
c. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a
3 inch (0.25 mm in a 76.2 mm) span.
2. Warranty shall include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair
or replacement of defective doors.
3. Warranty Period for Solid Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Quality Standard: Comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of AWI
Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards 2nd edition and AWI Architectural Woodwork

Standard Suite; where standards and specifications conflict the more stringent shall be
required.
B. Fire Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency for fire protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive
pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
1. Oversize Fire Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested
assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply
with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door
assemblies except for size.
2. Temperature Rise Limit: Where indicated, provide doors that have a maximum
transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 degrees F (250
degrees C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire test exposure.
3. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire protection
rating indicated.
4. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed
by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
5. Pairs: Provide fire retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications
indicated without formed steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed
intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
C. Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft
control, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with
NFPA 105.
D. Screw Holding and Cycle/Slam Capabilities for Stave Core, Structural Composite
Lumber, Particleboard Core, and Mineral Core (Rated) Doors: Extra heavy duty
performance to eliminate the use of through bolts for closers and to improve screw
holding capabilities for hardware items (No. 12 Type A fully threaded wood screws
penetrating door minimum 1-1/2 inches). Comply with ASTM D 1037 for screw
withdrawal and ASTM D 143 modified for splitting.
1. Minimum Vertical Edge Test Rating (Nonrated Stave Core or Particle Board Core):
a. Split Resistance: Minimum 525 lbs per NWWDA TM-5.
b. Hinge Loading Resistance: Minimum 930 lbs per NWWDA TM-8.
c. Screw Holding Capacity: Minimum 1000 lbs per NWWDA TM-10.
2. Minimum Vertical Edge Test Rating (Rated Mineral Core):
a. Split Resistance: WDMA I.S.1A.
1) 45 and 60 Minute: Minimum 1400 lbs.
2) 90 Minute: Minimum 1075 lbs.
b. Cycle Slam: WDMA TM-7; 1,000,000.
c. Hinge Loading Resistance: WDMA TM-8.
d. Screw Holding Capacity: WMDA TM-10.
E. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply

with applicable requirements.
1. U.S. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board Americans with
Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG) 2010.

2. ICC/ANSI A117.1 Accessible and Useable Building and Facilities.
2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

following:
1. Marshfield-Algoma; Masonite Architectural.
2. Oshkosh Door Company.
3. VT Industries Inc./Eggers Industries.
B. Solid Core Flush Wood Veneer Faced Doors for Transparent Finish:
1. Interior Doors:
a. Performance Grade:
1) ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated on
Drawings.
b. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Custom.
c. Construction: Five plies, hot pressed bonded (vertical and horizontal edging
is bonded to core), with entire unit abrasive planed before veneering.
d. Faces: Single ply wood veneer not less than 1/50 inch thick.
1) Species, Cut, and Match: As scheduled on Drawings or as selected by
Architect.
e. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Same species as faces or a compatible
species - Architectural Woodwork Standards edge Type A.
f. Fire Rated Single Doors: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals
concealed by outer stile. Comply with requirements for exposed vertical
edges.
1) Vertical Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with
intumescent seals concealed by outer stile meeting or exceeding the
specified direct screw withdrawal, split resistance, cycle slam, and
hinge loading criteria. Comply with specified requirements for exposed
edges.
a) Split Resistance: Not less than 696 pounds when tested in
accordance with WDMA TM-5; or, not less than 1305 pounds
when tested in accordance with ASTM D143.
b) Cycle/Slam: Not less than 200,000 cycles with no loosening of
hinge screws or other visible signs of failure when tested in
accordance with the requirements of WDMA TM-7; or, not less
than 502,000 cycles when tested in accordance with ANSI
A151.1.
c) Direct Screw Withdrawal: Not less than 700 pounds when tested
in accordance with WDMA TM-10; or, not less than 877 pounds
when tested in accordance with ASTM D1037 using #12 x 1-1/4
steel screws, threaded to the head with either A or AB wood
threads.
d) Hinge Loading: Not less than 684 pounds average when tested
in accordance with WDMA TM-8.
2) Fire Rated Pairs of Doors: Provide fire retardant stiles listed and
labeled for applications indicated without formed steel edges and
astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply
with specified requirements for exposed edges.

g. Mineral Core Doors: At hinge stiles, provide laminated edge construction

with improved screw holding capability and split resistance. Comply with
specified requirements for exposed edges.
1) Screw Holding Capability: 550 lbf in accordance with WDMA T.M. 10.
h. Core for Nonfire Rated Doors:
1) WDMA I.S. 10 structural composite lumber.
a) Screw Withdrawal, Door Face: 550 lbf.
b) Screw Withdrawal, Vertical Door Edge: 550 lbf.
i. Core for Fire Rated Doors: Necessary to achieve fire protection rating
1) Blocking for Mineral Core Doors: Provide composite blocking with
improved screw holding capability approved for use in doors of fire
protection ratings indicated on Drawings as necessary to eliminate
through bolting hardware.
a) 5 inch top rail blocking.
b) 5 inch bottom rail blocking, in doors indicated to have protection
plates.
c) 5 inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have armor plates.
d) 4-1/2 inch by 10 inch lock blocks, in doors indicated to have exit
devices.
2.3 LIGHT FRAMES AND LOUVERS
A. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire Rated and Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Frame
formed of 0.048 inch thick, cold rolled steel sheet; factory primed for paint finish; and
approved for use in doors of fire protection rating indicated on Drawings.
B. Wood Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire Rated Doors: Wood veneered
noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in
doors of fire protection rating indicated on Drawings. Include concealed metal glazing
clips where required for opening size and fire protection rating indicated.
C. Metal Louvers:
of the following:
a. Activar Construction Products Group, Inc.
b. Allegion plc.
c. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company.
d. ASSA ABLOY.
e. L & L Louvers, Inc.
f. McGill Architectural Products.
2. Blade Type: Vision proof, inverted V.
3. Metal and Finish: Hot dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, with baked enamel or
powder coated finish.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance
requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to
comply with DHI-WDHS-3 and accessibility regulations. Comply with final hardware
schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA-156.115-W, and hardware templates.
1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and
alignment before factory machining.
2. For doors scheduled to receive electrified locksets, provide factory installed
raceway and wiring to accommodate specified hardware.
3. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed steel edges for hardware
for pairs of fire rated doors.
C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed
surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms
and top edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles.
1. Fabricate door and transom panels with full width, solid lumber [, rabbeted,]
meeting rails. Provide factory installed spring bolts for concealed attachment into
jambs of metal door frames.
D. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply
with applicable requirements in Section 08 80 00.
3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
2.5 FACTORY FINISHING
A. Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication,
including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface
applied, before finishing.
1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may
be omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
B. Factory finish doors.
C. Transparent Finish:
1. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Premium.
2. Finish: AWI Architectural Woodwork Standards System 9, UV curable, acrylated
epoxy, polyester, or urethane, System 10, UV curable, water based, or System 11,
catalyzed polyurethane.
3. Staining, Effect, and Sheet: Selected by Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.

1. Verify installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location,
and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb
jambs.
2. Reject doors with defects.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: Refer to Section 08 71 00.
B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions

and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of
1/8 inch in 96 inches.
2. Anchor frames to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates.
a. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing.
b. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening,
countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.
1) For factory finished items, use filler matching finish of items being
installed.
3. Install fire rated doors according to NFPA 80.
4. Install smoke and draft control doors according to NFPA 105.
C. Job Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as
indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or
permitted for fire rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges
of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.
1. Machine doors for hardware.
2. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.
3. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of
doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor
finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or
scheduled, provide1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless
a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire rated doors.
4. Bevel nonfire rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge
edges.
5. Bevel fire rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock edge; trim stiles
and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency.
D. Factory Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
E. Factory Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is

required at Project site.
A. Inspection Agency: Engage a qualified inspector to perform inspections and to furnish

reports to Architect.
B. Inspections:
1. Provide inspection of installed Work through AWI's Quality Certification Program,
certifying that wood doors and frames, including installation, comply with
requirements of AWI Architectural Woodwork Standards 2nd Edition and AWI
Quality Standard Suite for the specified grade.

2. Fire Rated Door Inspections: Inspect each fire rated door in accordance with
NFPA 80, Section 5.2.
3. Egress Door Inspections: Inspect each door equipped with panic hardware, each
door equipped with fire exit hardware, each door located in an exit enclosure, each
electrically controlled egress door, and each door equipped with special locking
arrangements in accordance with NFPA 101, Section 7.2.1.15.
C. Repair or remove and replace installations where inspections indicate that they do not
comply with specified requirements.
D. Reinspect repaired or replaced installations to determine if replaced or repaired door

assembly installations comply with specified requirements.
E. Prepare and submit separate inspection report for each fire rated door assembly
indicating compliance with each item listed in NFPA 80 and NFPA 101.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with
requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements
and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 08 17 43
FRP FLUSH DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Exterior Fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP) flush doors with hollow
metal frames.
B. See Section 08 11 13 “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames” for frames required by Work of
this Section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association
1. AAMA 1503.1 - Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of

Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections.
B. ASTM International
1. ASTM B 209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

2. ASTM B 221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
3. ASTM D 256 - Determining the Pendulum Impact Resistance of Notched
Specimens of Plastics.
4. ASTM D 570 - Water Absorption of Plastics.
5. ASTM D 638 - Tensile Strength of Plastics.
6. ASTM D 790 - Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and
Electrical Insulating Materials.
7. ASTM D 1621 - Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
8. ASTM D 1623 - Tensile and Tensile Adhesion Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
9. ASTM D 2126 - Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics to Thermal and Humid Aging.
10. ASTM D 2583 - Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol
Impressor.
11. ASTM D 6670-01 - Standard Practice for Full-Scale Chamber Determination of
Volatile Organic Emissions from Indoor Materials/Products.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, including description of materials,

components, fabrication, finishes, and installation.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, including elevations, sections,

and details, indicating dimensions, tolerances, materials, fabrication, doors, panels,
glazing, framing, hardware schedule, and finish.
C. Samples:
Frp Flush Doors 08 17 34 - 1

1. Door: Submit manufacturer's sample of door showing face sheets, core, framing,
and finish.
2. Color: Submit manufacturer's samples of standard colors of doors and frames.
D. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports from qualified independent testing agency
indicating doors comply with specified performance requirements.
E. Maintenance Manual: Submit manufacturer's maintenance and cleaning instructions for

doors, including maintenance and operating instructions for hardware.
1. Continuously engaged in manufacturing of doors of similar type to that specified,

with a minimum of 25 years successful experience.
2. Door and frame components from same manufacturer.
3. Evidence of a compliant documented quality management system.
A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and

packaging, with labels clearly identifying opening door mark and manufacturer.
B. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
C. Handling: Protect materials and finish from damage during handling and installation.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warrant doors, frames, and factory hardware against failure in materials and
workmanship, including excessive deflection, faulty operation, defects in hardware
installation, and deterioration of finish or construction in excess of normal wear and tear.
B. Warranty Period: Ten years starting on date of shipment. In addition, a limited lifetime
(while the door is in its specified application in its original installation) warranty covering:
failure of corner joinery, core deterioration, delamination or bubbling of door skin.
C. Warranty Period for Factory-applied urethane finish: Five years starting on date of
substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General: Provide door assemblies that have been designed and fabricated to comply
with specified performance requirements, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's
corresponding standard systems.

Face Sheet.
1. Standard Interior and Exterior Class C 0.120” thick, Sandstone texture, through
color FRP sheet.
a. Flexural Strength, ASTM-D790: 27 x 103 psi.
b. Flexural Modulus, ASTM-D790: 0.7 x 106 psi.
c. Tensile Strength, ASTM-D638: 18 x 103 psi.
d. Tensile Modulus, ASTM-D638: 1.0 x 106 psi.
e. Barcol Hardness, ASTM-D2583: 40.
f. Izod Impact, ASTM-D256: 7.0 ft-lb/in.
g. Gardner Impact Strength, ASTM-D5420: 30 in-lb.
h. Water Absorption, ASTM-D570: 0.16%/24hrs at 77°F.
i. Surface Burning, ASTM-E84: Flame Spread ≤ 200, Smoke Developed ≤ 450.
j. Chemical Resistance.
1. Excellent Rating.
a. Acetic Acid, Concentrated.
b. Acetic Acid, 5%.
c. Bleach Solution.
d. Detergent Solution.
e. Distilled Water.
f. Ethyl Acetate.
g. Formaldehyde.
h. Heptane.
i. Hydrochloric Acid, 10%.
j. Hydrogen Peroxide, 3%.
k. Isooctane.
l. Lactic Acid, 10%.

k. USDA/FSIS Requirements.
1. FRP face sheet with surfaseal is a finished outer surface material that is rigid;
durable; non-toxic; non-corrosive; moisture resistant; a light, solid color such as
white; easily inspected; smooth or an easily cleaned texture.
2. FRP face sheet with surfaseal does not contain any known carcinogen, mutagen, or
teratogen classified as hazardous substances; heavy metals or toxic substances;
antimicrobials; pesticides or substances with pesticidal characteristics.
2. Optional Interior Face Only Class A 0.120” thick, Sandstone texture, through color
FRP sheet.
a. Flexural Strength, ASTM-D790: 14 x 103 psi.
b. Flexural Modulus, ASTM-D790: 0.4 x 106 psi.
c. Tensile Strength, ASTM-D638: 7 x 103 psi.
d. Tensile Modulus, ASTM-D638: 0.8 x 106 psi.
e. Barcol Hardness, ASTM-D2583: 45.
f. Izod Impact, ASTM-D256: 4.0 ft-lb/in notched.
g. Water Absorption, ASTM-D570: 0.16%/24hrs at 77°F.
h. Surface Burning, ASTM-E84: Flame Spread ≤ 25, Smoke Developed ≤ 450.
i. Taber Abrasion Resistance, Taber Test: 0.036% Max Wt. Loss, cs-17 wheels,
1000g. Wt., 25 cycles.
B. Door Core.
1. Density, ASTM-D1622: ≤ 5.0 pcf.
2. Compressive Properties, ASTM-D1621: Compressive Strength ≥ 60 psi,
Compressive Modulus ≥ 1948 psi.
3. Tensile and Tensile Adhesion Properties, ASTM-D1623: Tensile Adhesion, 3” x 3”
FRP Facers ≥ 53 psi, Tensile Adhesion, 1” x 1” Foam ≥ 104 psi.
4. Thermal and Humid Aging, ASTM-D2126: Volume Change at 158 °F, 100%
humidity, 14 days ≤ 13%.
5. Thermal Conductivity, ASTM-C518, Thermal Resistance ≥ 0.10 m2K/W.
C. Door Panel.

1. Indoor Air Quality, ASTM-D5116, ASTM-D6607
B.
C.
D. Pultruded structural shapes for stiles and rails, shall exhibit the following minimum
longitudinal coupon properties (per ASTM):
1. Tensile strength (D638) 30,000 psi

2. Comprehensive strength (D695) 30,000 psi
3. Flexural strength (D790) 30,000 psi
4. Flexural modulus (D790) 1,600,000 psi
5. Shear strength (D2846) 4,500 psi
6. Impact, notched (D256) 25 ft-lb/in
7. Barcol hardness (D2853) 50
E. Core material shall exhibit the following minimum coupon properties (per ASTM):
1. Core material must comply with the International Building Code (IBC) chapter 26
requirements for use with a plastic skin.
2. Shear strength, longitudinal direction (C273) 68.2 psi
3. Shear strength, transverse direction (C273) 25.8 psi
4. Shear modulus, longitudinal direction (C273) 6940 psi
5. Shear modulus, transverse direction (C273) 1878 psi
6. Shear elongation, longitudinal direction (C393 short beam) 1.79%
7. Shear elongation, transverse direction (C393 short beam) 2.72%
8. Maximum facing stress, longitudinal direction (C393 short beam) 735 psi
9. Maximum facing stress, transverse direction (C393 short beam) 289 psi
10. Maximum core shear stress, longitudinal direction (C393 short beam) 63.8 psi
11. Maximum core shear stress, transverse direction (C393 short beam) 24.9 psi
12. Modulus of elasticity (EI) per 1" width, longitudinal direction (C393 short beam)
4.92E+04 psi
13. Modulus of elasticity (EI) per 1" width, transverse direction (C393 short beam)
1.97E+04 psi
14. Maximum facing stress, longitudinal direction (C393 long beam) 9011 psi
15. Maximum facing stress, transverse direction (C393 long beam) 4727 psi
16. Maximum core shear stress, longitudinal direction (C393 long beam) 48.3 psi
17. Maximum core shear stress, transverse direction (C393 long beam) 23.5psi
18. Modulus of elasticity (EI) per 1" width, longitudinal direction (C393 long beam)
1.14E+05 psi
19. Modulus of elasticity (EI) per 1" width, transverse direction (C393 long beam)
7.23E+05 psi
20. Stiffness "D", longitudinal direction (C393 long beam) 379,270 psi
21. Stiffness "D", longitudinal direction (C393 long beam) 260,608 psi
22. Compressive strength (C365) 53 psi
23. Compressive modulus (C365) 2110 psi
24. Density (C271) 2.42 lb/ft3

F. Adhesive for bonding pultrusions shall exhibit the following minimum coupon properties
(per SAE)
1. Tensile Strength (D882-83A modified) minimum 2000 psi

2. 8 day 25º C at 100% humidity Cross Peel (SAE J1553) minimum 330 psi
3. 7 day immersion in seawater Cross Peel (SAE J1553) minimum 330 psi
4. 30 day immersion in saltwater Cross Peel (SAE J1553) minimum 330 psi
5. 72 hour immersion in gasoline Cross Peel (SAE J1553) minimum 330 psi
6. 72 hour immersion in 20% sulfuric acid Cross Peel (SAE J1553) minimum 300 psi
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Special-Lite,

Inc.; SL-20 Sandstone Texture Doors with fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP) face
sheets, or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Capitol Aluminum and Glass Corporation

2. Ceco Door Products
3. Cline Doors
4. Overly Door Company
5. Special-Lite
2.3 FRP FLUSH DOORS
A. Door Opening Size: As indicated on the Drawings.
B. Commercial Duty Non-fire rated FRP Doors
1. Design: FRP doors shall be of seamless construction. Laminated FRP face sheets
shall be bonded to an internal door stile and rail channel subframe/core assembly.
The composite door panel must be bonded over its entire surface area, not just
adhesive-bonded at perimeter stiles and rails.
2. Stiles & Rails: A 1-3/4” wide x 1-1/2” deep x 5/8” web pultruded FRP Channel
subframe is to be provided within the door. All connections shall be chemically
welded. No mechanical fasteners will be allowed. The use or inclusion of
aluminum, steel, gypsum or wood into stile and rail construction is not permitted.
3. Core: For maximum rigidity and compressive strength a triangular shaped 3/8” cell
phenolic resin impregnated kraft paper honeycomb. Molding pressure and
adhesive gel time shall be sufficient to allow for penetration of resin into the cellular
structure of the core to maximize shear and peel strengths at the skin/core
interface. The honeycomb is to be completely enclosed within the stile and rail
subframe. Use of foam or balsa wood is not permitted.
4. Internal Reinforcement: High-density polymer compression blocks, or plastic
compression blocking at all hardware locations. No wood blocking, steel or
aluminum reinforcing plates, ribs or fittings shall be used. A minimum of 900 lbs
of pullout strength is required for each factory supplied hinge screw.
5. Faces: Door facings shall utilize a chemical resistant modified polyester copolymer
resin system with fiber reinforcing layers. Supplier shall furnish door faces as
shown on the drawings and in the door elevations. Structural reinforcement of the
face skin shall be in the form of random chopped fiberglass roving.

6. Finish: The exposed FRP door faces shall have a 3-4 mils (wet) factory applied
two-part aliphatic polyurethane fully cured coating of industrial urethane. Coating
shall have a minimum hardness of H to 2H. Finish shall be a semi-gloss to minimize
the visual effects of wear and tear.
7. Glass Lites: Glass Type 2A per Section 08 80 00; factory furnished, glazed, and
installed by door fabricator. Standard glass thickness is ¼ inch (6 mm). Centered
glazing shall be installed between 45 degree pultruded FRP glazing stops and vinyl
foam tape with concealed compression retainers for ¼” glazing. No exposed
fasteners or exposed silicone will be allowed for securing ¼” glazing. Stainless
steel screws may be allowed for other glazing thicknesses. Offset glazing shall be
installed against a molded-in 5/8” wide outboard face flange with a bed of tape
caulk, square 5/8” pultruded glazing stops with stainless steel screws shall
complete the installation to secure the glazing in place and cover all unsightly
caulking. Double flush ¼” glazing shall be installed with vinyl foam tape and
silicone sealant at all edges to complete flush appearance. All glazing stop material
shall be pultrued FRP with a minimum fiberglass content of 50%. Metal, pvc, or
vinyl “Glass Kit” type lights are not acceptable for non-fire rated openings.
8. Provisions for glass lites shall be provided during manufacture, not in the field.
Cutouts are to be totally enclosed by pultruded FRP stiles and rails incorporated
into the door structure. Lite and louver cutouts that expose core material are not
acceptable.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Sizes and Profiles: Required sizes for door and frame units, and profile requirements
shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Coordination of Fabrication: Field measure before fabrication and show recorded

measurements on shop drawings.
C. Assembly:
1. Complete cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of metal before assembly.
2. Remove burrs from cut edges.
D. Welding: Welding of doors or frames is not acceptable.
E. Fit:
1. Maintain continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles.

2. Secure attachments and support at mechanical joints with hairline fit at contacting
members.
2.5 FRAMES
A. Frames: Provide extra-heavy duty frames fabricated from 0.067 inch thick steel sheet as
specified in Section 08 11 13 “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.”
2.6 FINISH
A. FRP Color: As scheduled in Finish Schedule at FRP-2 on Drawings

2.7 HARDWARE
A. Premachine doors in accordance with templates from specified hardware manufacturers

and hardware schedule.
B. Hardware Schedule: As specified in Section 08 71 00.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive doors. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely
affect installation or subsequent use. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions are corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Ensure openings to receive frames are plumb, level, square, and in tolerance.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install doors plumb, level, square, true to line, and without warp or rack.
C. Separate aluminum from other metal surfaces with bituminous coatings or other means
approved by Architect.
D. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and backseal.
E. Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as

F. Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as

determined by Architect.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors, hinges, and locksets for smooth operation without binding.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean doors promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage finish.
3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed doors to ensure that doors will be without damage or deterioration at
time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 08 31 13
ACCESS DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings at plumbing chases or other
concealed work that will require maintenance by Owner.
2. Floor access doors; water-tight.
A. Product Data: Submit specifications, details and installation instructions, including

methods of anchoring.
B. Shop Drawings: If modifications from manufacturer's details is required, submit drawings

indicating modifications, opening size, attachment details, and hardware.
1. Size Verification: Obtain location and sizes for access doors from trades requiring
access to concealed equipment and indicate on submittal schedule.
A. Regulatory Requirements: Provide access door assembly with panel door, frame, hinge
and latch from manufacturer listed in Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Classified Building
Materials Index for ratings indicated.
A. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be built into other work for installation
of access doors.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements

manufacturers that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following.
1. Acudor Products, Inc.
2. Babcock-Davis
3. Cendrex, Inc.
4. J.L. Industries, Inc.
5. Karp Associates, Inc.
6. Milcor Inc.
7. Nystrom, Inc.
2.2 NON-FIRE-RATED - WALLS AND CEILINGS
Access Doors 08 31 13 - 1
A. Frame: 16 gage steel.
B. Door Panel: 14 gage steel.
C. Hinges: Continuous type, 175 degree swing, steel with stainless steel pin.
D. Locking Device:
1. SFIC.
2. Number as recommended by manufacturer for size of door.
E. Acceptable Products - Concealed Flange:

1. Model WB by J.L. Industries, Inc.
2. NW Series by Nystrom, Inc.
3. Style DW by Milcor, Inc.
F. Acceptable Products – Concealed Flange, Recessed Door to receive Gypsum Board:

1. Model CTWB by J.L. Industries, Inc.
2. R Series by Nystrom, Inc.
3. Style DWR by Milcor, Inc.
2.3 FIRE-RATED WALLS
A. Frame: 16 gage steel, with perimeter casing bead for flush appearance.
B. Door Panel:
1. 20 gage sheet steel.
2. Two-inch thick insulated sandwich panel assembly.
3. Automatic closer and latch.
4. Interior latch release device.
5. UL 1-1/2 hour "B" Label.
C. Hinges: Concealed, pin type.
D. Locking Device:
1. SFIC.
E. Acceptable Products – Exposed Flanges:

1. Model FD by J.L. Industries, Inc.
2. IT-WP Series by Nystrom, Inc.
3. Style FR by Milcor, Inc.
2.4 FIRE-RATED – GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS
A. Frame: 16 gage steel.
B. Door Panel: 18 gage sheet steel.
C. Hinges: Continuous.
D. Locking Device:
1. SFIC.
E. Acceptable Products – Recessed Door to Receive Gypsum Board:

1. Model FRC J.L. Industries, Inc.
2. Style ATR Milcor, Inc.
3. IP Series Nystrom, Inc.
2.5 FLOOR DOORS
A. Water-tight Aluminum Floor Access Door: Single-leaf.
B. Materials:
1. Frame: Formed Steel Plate frame with integral, drainable gutter; 3/16-inch thick,
carbon steel with gray primer finish.
a. Provide with 1-inch anchor flange, EPDM gasket, and 1-1/2 inch drain coupling.
2. Door Leaf: Formed steel diamond tread plate, 3/16-inch thick, carbon steel with gray
primer finish.
C. Hardware: Stainless steel
1. Spring: Enclosed coil, Type 17-7 stainless steel

2. Hinges: Heavy-duty, Type 316 stainless steel.
3. Hold-Open Arm: Type 316 stainless steel; holds and locks cover in open position.
4. Latch: Slam latch, Type 316 stainless steel, with lever handles, and removable
threaded plug.
5. Top Handle: Recessed, fold-down T-handle
6. Lock and Cylinder: SFIC
D. Load Capacity: 300 PSF live load
E. Size: 36 inch square plus frame
F. Basis of Design: Model FDDP-P-36x36-S-WL by Nystrom.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate from cold-rolled steel, welded components, exposed welds dressed smooth
and flush with adjacent surfaces.
B. Form doors with flush panel design.
C. Furnish accessories with adjustable metal anchors for securing to substrate.
D. Furnish each access door assembly manufactured as a complete unit with parts ready for
installation.
E. Provide plastic grommets at cylinder core through sandwich panels.
2.7 LOCKING MECHANISMS

A. Locks and Cylinders: Provide Small Format Interchangeable Core (SFIC) at access doors
and panels typically unless otherwise shown or specified.
1. See Section 08 71 00 “Door Hardware” for basis of design product requirements.
2.8 FINISH
A. Manufacturer's standard baked enamel prime coated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify size and dimension requirements at site.
B. Verify that openings are correctly dimensioned to receive doors.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for secure attachment, proper relation to

adjacent finished surfaces and proper operation.
B. Set assemblies plumb and level, properly anchored in place.
3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation. Adjust latching and
locking mechanism to operate smoothly.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 08 33 23
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Stainless steel counter shutters, motorized.

2. FEMA 361/ICC-500 rated overhead coiling doors at Storm Shelter.
3. Fire-rated overhead doors with egress
4. Integration of electrified hardware, access control systems, and security systems
into door and frame assemblies.
1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports, door-

opening framing, corner guards, and bollards.
A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or
detailed in manufacturer's product data.
1. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads
imposed on structure.
2. Show locations of controls, locking devices detectors or replaceable fusible links,
and other accessories.
3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
A. Qualification Data: Submit data for Installer and testing and inspecting agency.
1. Fire Rated Door Inspector: Submit documentation of compliance with NFPA 80,
section 5.2.3.1.
2. Submit copy of DHI Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI) certificate.
B. Sample warranty.
Overhead Coiling Doors 08 33 23 - 1

A. Special warranty.
B. Maintenance data.
C. Record Documents: For fire-rated doors, list of door numbers and applicable room
name and number to which door accesses.
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are
trained and approved by manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units
required for this Project.
B. Storm Shelter Doors: Tested and certified by Texas Tech National Wind Institute, or by
an IAS accredited nationally recognized testing laboratory with comparable testing
facilities and capability, in strict accordance with FEMA 361, and ICC-500 standards for
wind rated impact of 250 mph ground speed EF-5 tornado events.
C. Fire Rated Door Inspector Qualifications: Inspector for field quality control inspections
of fire rated door assemblies shall meet the qualifications set forth in NFPA 80, section
5.2.3.1 and the following:
1. Door and Hardware Institute Fire and Egress Door Assembly Inspector (FDAI)
certification.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of doors that

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the USDOJ's "2010 ADA
Standards for Accessible Design" and ICC A117.1.
B. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Capable of withstanding the following design

wind loads:
1. Design Wind Load: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Testing: According to ASTM E330/E330M.
C. Fire Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and
labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire protection ratings indicated, based on

testing as close to neutral pressure as possible in accordance with NFPA 252 or UL

10B.
1. Smoke Control: Where indicated, provide doors that are listed and labeled with
the letter "S" on the fire rating label by a qualified testing agency for smoke and
draft control based on testing in accordance with UL 1784; with maximum air-
leakage rate of 3.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.01524 cu. m/s x sq. m) of door opening at 0.10
inch wg (24.9 Pa) for both ambient and elevated temperature tests.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
E. Seismic Performance: Overhead coiling doors withstand the effects of earthquake

2.2 DOOR/SHUTTER ASSEMBLIES, STAINLESS STEEL, MOTORIZED
A. Service Door: Overhead coiling door formed with curtain of interlocking metal slats.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
a. Alpine Overhead Doors, Inc.

b. Clopay Building Products.
c. Cookson; a CornellCookson company.
d. Cornell; a CornellCookson company.
e. McKeon Door Company.
f. Overhead Door Corporation.
g. Raynor Garage Doors.
h. Wayne Dalton; a division of Overhead Door Corporation.
i. Windsor Door.
B. Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less
than 100,000.
C. Door Curtain Material: Stainless steel.
D. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats of 2-5/8-inch center-to-center height.
E. Dimensions: As shown on Drawings.
F. Bottom Bar: Two angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8 inch thick; fabricated
from stainless steel and finished to match door.
G. Curtain Jamb Guides: Stainless steel with exposed finish matching curtain slats.
H. Hood: Match curtain material and finish.
1. Mounting: As indicated on Drawings.

I. Locking Devices: Equip door with locking device assembly.
1. Locking Device Assembly: Cremone-type, both jamb sides locking bars,

operable from inside and outside with cylinders with removable cores.
2. Interlock: Provide automatic interlock to disengage motor when door is locked.
J. Electric Door Operator:
1. Usage Classification: Heavy duty, 25 or more cycles per hour and more than 90
cycles per day.
2. Safety: Listed according to UL 325 by a qualified testing agency for commercial
or industrial use.
3. Motor Exposure: Exterior, wet, and humid.
4. Motor Electrical Characteristics:
a. Horsepower: 1/2 hp.

b. Voltage: Coordinate with Work of Division 26.
5. Emergency Manual Operation: Push-up type.

6. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic photoelectric sensor.
7. Control Station(s): Where indicated on Drawings.
K. Curtain Accessories: Equip door with push/pull handles for emergency/override

operation.
L. Sizes:
1. Door No. E100.3: 10 by 8 foot
M. Door Finish: No. 4 satin finish stainless steel
2.3 INSULATED EXTERIOR SERVICE DOORS
A. Storm-Resistant Exterior Service Door: Overhead coiling door formed with curtain of
interlocking metal slats.
1. Basis of Design: “SafeSpace 500-IS” insulated, storm-resistant service doors as

manufactured by McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company, Inc.
B. Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less
than 10,000. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed
position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position.
1. Include tamperproof cycle counter.
C. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate of 0.4 cfm/sq. ft. at 15 and 25 mph when tested
according to ASTM E283.
D. Insulated Door Curtain R-Value: 7.7 (1.35 sq. m/W).
E. Door Curtain Material: Galvanized steel.

F. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats of 3-inch center-to-center height.
1. Curtain Slats: Thickness as required to meet performance criteria, but not less
than 18 gage (0.052 inch / 1.31 mm) galvanized steel.
2. Insulation: Foamed-in-place, CFC-free polyurethane.
3. Insulated-Slat Interior Facing: Metal.
4. Gasket Seal: Manufacturer's standard continuous gaskets between slats.
G. Bottom Bar: Two angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8 inch thick; fabricated
from hot-dip galvanized steel and finished to match door.
H. Curtain Jamb Guides: Galvanized steel with exposed finish matching curtain slats.
I. Brackets:
1. Hot rolled prime painted steel to support counterbalance, curtain, and hood.
J. Hood: Minimum 0.0336-inch (0.85 mm) thick G90 galvanized steel, match curtain and
finish.
1. Shape: Manufacturer’s standard shape.

2. Mounting: Face of wall.
K. Electric Door Operator:
cycles per day.
or industrial use.
a. Horsepower: 1/2 hp.

b. Voltage: Coordinate with Work of Division 26.
5. Emergency Manual Operation: Push-up type.

6. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic photoelectric sensor.
7. Control Station(s): Where indicated on Drawings.
L. Curtain Accessories: Equip door with weatherseals, astragal, and automatic-closing

device.
M. Door Finish:
1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated Finish: Color as selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full range.
2. Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer's
full range.

2.4 FIRE RATED DOOR ASSEMBLY
A. Fire Rated Insulated Service Door: Overhead fire rated coiling door formed with curtain
of interlocking metal slats.

a. Clopay Building Products.

b. Cookson Company.
c. Cornell Iron Works, Inc.
d. McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company, Inc.
e. Overhead Door Corporation.
f. Wayne-Dalton Corp.
B. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours.
C. Door Curtain Material: Galvanized steel.
1. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats with metal exterior and interior facing
materials.
D. Curtain Jamb Guides: Galvanized steel with exposed finish matching curtain slats.
E. Pass Door(s): Hinged frame with exit hardware.
F. Hood: Match curtain material and finish.
1. Shape: Round.
2. Mounting: Indicated on Drawings.
G. Electric Door Operator:
cycles per day.
2. Operator Location: Indicated on Drawings.
3. Safety: Listed in accordance with UL 325 by a qualified testing agency for
commercial or industrial use ; moving parts of operator enclosed or guarded if
exposed and mounted at 8 feet (2.44 m) or lower.
a. Horsepower, Minimum: 1/2 hp.
6. Emergency Manual Operation: Chain type.

7. Obstruction Detection Device: Automatic photoelectric sensor.
a. Sensor Edge Bulb Color: Black.
8. Control Station(s): Indicated on Drawings.

H. Curtain Accessories: Equip door with smoke seals, automatic closing device, push/pull
handles and pull down strap.
I. Door Finish, both sides:
1. Powder Coated Finish: Color selected by Architect.
J. Pass Door(s): Swinging door and frame assembly constructed integrally with the coiling
door assembly and bearing the same fire rating. Comply with the accessibility
standard of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Door Frame and Integral Jamb Guide: Fabricate of angles or channels and
angles of same material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated,
with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate
smoothly, and to withstand loading.
2. Hinged Frame: Hinged pass door and frame that swings out of the way, as a unit,
to allow use of the full coiling door opening width. One jamb of the pass door
frame is hinged and the other jamb includes a guide for the lower, narrower part
of the coiling door curtain.
3. Rigid Frame: Rigid pass door and frame that are built into the rigid, lower part of
the door curtain and that raise with the curtain.
4. Locking Hardware:
a. Exit Hardware: Refer to Section 087100.

b. Lock Cylinders: Refer to Section 087100.
c. Keys: Three for each cylinder.
5. Thresholds: Equip pass doors with integral thresholds that comply with the
accessibility standard of authorities having jurisdiction.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

application.
2.6 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling-door curtain of interlocking metal slats,

designed to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door
without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical
properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door
indicated, and as follows:
1. Insulation: Fill slats for insulated doors with manufacturer's standard thermal
insulation complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes
of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E84 or UL 723. Enclose
insulation completely within slat faces.
2. Metal Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match metal of exterior curtain-slat face, with
minimum steel thickness of 0.010 inch.

B. Endlocks and Windlocks for Service Doors: Malleable-iron casings galvanized after
fabrication, secured to curtain slats with galvanized rivets or high-strength nylon.
Provide locks on not less than alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and
resistance against lateral movement.
C. Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles of same
material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient depth and
strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand
loading. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to
prevent overtravel of curtain.
2.7 HOODS
A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating
mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached.
Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-
mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting that projects
beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to prevent
sagging.
1. Include automatic drop baffle on fire-rated doors to guard against passage of

smoke or flame.
2. Exterior-Mounted Doors: Fabricate hood to act as weather protection and with a
perimeter sealant-joint-bead profile for applying joint sealant.
2.8 LOCKING DEVICES
A. Slide Bolt at Counter Shutters: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through
slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides,
operable from coil side.
B. Locking Device Assembly at Motorized Doors: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-
loaded dead bolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage
through slots in tracks.
1. Lock Cylinders: As specified in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware".

2. Keys: Three for each cylinder.
3. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch
to disengage power supply when door is locked.
C. Fire Protection: Make provisions for installation of electrical items; provide cutouts so
wiring can be readily removed and replaced.
1. Provide cutouts and reinforcements required for coiling doors to accept security
system and fire protection components.]

2.9 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES
A. Smoke Seals: Equip each fire-rated door with replaceable smoke-seal perimeter
gaskets or brushes for smoke and draft control as required for door listing and labeling
by a qualified testing agency.
B. Weatherseals for Exterior Doors: Equip each exterior door with weather-stripping
gaskets fitted to entire exterior perimeter of door for a weather-resistant installation
C. Push/Pull Handles: Equip each push-up-operated or emergency-operated door with

lifting handles on each side of door, finished to match door.
D. Pull-Down Strap: Provide pull-down straps for doors more than 84 inches high.
E. Automatic Closing Device: Equip each fire rated door with an automatic closing device
or holder release mechanism and governor unit complying with NFPA 80 and an easily
tested and reset release mechanism. Release mechanism for motor operated doors
shall allow testing without mechanical release of the door. Automatic closing device
shall be designed for activation by the following:
1. Replaceable fusible links with temperature rise and melting point of 165
degrees F (74 degrees C)] interconnected and mounted on both sides of door
opening.
2. UL labeled smoke detector and door holder release devices.
3. UL labeled heat detector and door holder release devices.
4. Building fire detection, smoke detection, and alarm systems.
2.10 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM
A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with

an adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and
contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-
sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.
B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of manufacturer's standard hot-formed,

structural-quality, seamless carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness
to support rolled-up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not
more than 0.03 in./ft. of span under full load.
C. Counterbalance Spring: One or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion

springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment
accessible from outside barrel. Secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft with cast-
steel barrel plugs.
1. Fire Rated Doors: Equip with auxiliary counterbalance spring and prevent tension
release from main counterbalance spring when automatic closing device
operates.
D. Torsion Rod for Counterbalance Shaft: Fabricate of manufacturer's standard cold-

rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load.

E. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled

steel plate.
2.11 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS
A. General: Equip door with manual door operator by door manufacturer.
B. Push-up Door Operation: Lift handles and pull rope for raising and lowering doors, with
counterbalance mechanism designed so that required lift or pull for door operation
does not exceed 25 lbf.
2.12 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS
A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and
provided by door manufacturer for door and operation-cycles requirement specified,
with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit,
solenoid-operated brake, clutch, control stations, control devices, integral gearing for
locking door, and accessories required for proper operation.
1. Comply with NFPA 70.

2. Control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6,
with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc.
B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not
less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door.
C. Motors: Reversible-type motor with controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure
indicated for each door assembly.
1. Electrical Characteristics: Minimum as indicated for each door assembly. If not

indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction
from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec. and not more than 12
in./sec., without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor.
2. Operating Controls, Controllers, Disconnect Switches, Wiring Devices, and
Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.
D. Obstruction-Detection Devices: External entrapment protection consisting of indicated

automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. For non-fire-
rated doors, activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel.
For fire rated doors, activation delays closing.
1. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an

obstruction in door opening without contact between door and obstruction.
E. Control Station: Three-button control station in fixed location with momentary-contact

push-button controls labeled "Open" and "Stop" and sustained- or constant-pressure
push-button control labeled "Close."
1. Interior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with

general-purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.

2. Exterior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, standard-duty, surface-mounted,

weatherproof type, NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure, key operated.
F. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for
emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door
operation does not exceed 25 lbf.
G. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated

disconnect mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing
brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting
timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include
interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency
operator is engaged.
H. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-
switch adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation.
I. Fire Protection Requirements: Coordinate provisions with installation of electrical items

including electronic hardware, security system components, and similar items having
electrical requirements; arrange so wiring can be readily removed and replaced.
1. Provide cutouts and reinforcements required for coiling doors to accept access
control and fire protection system components.
A. Comply with NAAMM/NOMMA 500 for recommendations for applying and designating
finishes.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the
range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.14 STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES
A. Stainless Steel Finishes:
1. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into
finish.
2. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of
cross scratches.
a. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.

b. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove
embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
c. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.

2.15 STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES
A. Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-on finish consisting of prime coat

and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for
cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness.
1. Colors: As selected by Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
B. Examine locations of electrical connections.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
A. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary
hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to
manufacturer's written instructions and as specified.
B. Accessibility: Install overhead coiling doors, switches, and controls along accessible
routes in compliance with the accessibility standard.
C. Fire Rated Doors: Install in accordance with NFPA 80.
D. Smoke Control Doors: Install in accordance with NFPA 80 and NFPA 105.
E. Power-Operated Doors: Install according to UL 325.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily,
free of warp, twist, or distortion.
1. Adjust exterior doors and components to be weather resistant.
B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Adjust seals to provide tight fit around entire perimeter.
A. Test doors for proper operation.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections
and to furnish reports to Architect.
C. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Test door release, closing, and alarm operations when activated by smoke
detector or building's fire alarm system. Test manual operation of closed door.
Reset door closing mechanism after successful test.
2. Fire Rated Door Inspections: Inspect each fire rated door in accordance with
NFPA 80, section 5.2.
D. Repair or remove and replace installations where inspections indicate that they do not
E. Reinspect repaired or replaced installations to determine if replaced or repaired door

F. Prepare and submit separate inspection report for each fire rated door assembly
indicating compliance with each item listed in NFPA 80 and NFPA 101.
3.5 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks in accordance with manufacturer's

2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3. Test door closing when activated by detector or alarm connected automatic
closing system. Reset door closing mechanism after successful test.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so doors operate easily, free of
warp, twist, or distortion.
1. Adjust exterior doors and components to be weather resistant.
C. Adjust seals to provide tight fit around entire perimeter.
3.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service

shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of coiling-door Installer.
Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective
components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door operation.
Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.

1. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal

working hours.
2. Include 24 hour per day, seven day per week, emergency callback service.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 08 33 26
OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Open-curtain interior overhead coiling grilles.
1. Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports, angle-
framing of grille opening.
A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling grille and accessory.
components, profiles for curtain components, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or
detailed in manufacturer's product data.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details.
2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
3. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads
imposed on structure.
4. Show locations of locking devices and other accessories.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish on the following components,
in manufacturer's standard sizes:
1. Open-curtain grille with full-size components consisting of rods, spacers, and
links as required to illustrate each assembly.
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
Overhead Coiling Grilles 08 33 26 - 1

A. Maintenance Data: For overhead coiling grilles to include in maintenance manuals.
trained and approved by manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units
required for this Project.
B. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the USDOJ's "2010 ADA
Standards for Accessible Design" and ICC A117.1.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of grilles that

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following:
1. Cookson Company.
2. Cornell Iron Works, Inc.
3. McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company, Inc.
4. Overhead Door Corporation.
5. Raynor.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain coiling grilles from single source from single manufacturer.
1. Obtain operators and controls from overhead coiling-grille manufacturer.
2.2 OPEN-CURTAIN GRILLE ASSEMBLY
A. Open-Curtain Grille: Overhead coiling counter grille with a curtain having a network of
horizontal rods that interconnect with vertical links.
1. Basis of Design Product: Upward Coiling Security Grille 671 as manufactured by
Overhead Door Corporation.
B. Operation Cycles: Grille components and operators capable of operating for not less
than 20,000. One operation cycle is complete when a grille is opened from the closed
position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position.
1. Include tamperproof cycle counter.

C. Grille Curtain Material: Stainless steel.

1. Rod Spacing: Approximately 2 inches o.c.
2. Link Spacing: Approximately 6 inches apart in a straight in-line pattern.
3. Spacers: Metal tubes matching curtain material.
D. Bottom Bar: Continuous doubled angles, fabricated from stainless steel and finished to
match grille.
E. Curtain Jamb Guides: Stainless steel shapes with exposed finish matching curtain
slats. Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal-to-metal contact and to
minimize operational noise.
F. Hood Material and Finish:

1. Exposed to View: Match curtain material and finish.
2. Concealed Above Ceiling: Galvanized steel.
3. Shape: Square.
4. Mounting: As indicated on Drawings.
G. Locking Devices: Equip grille with slide bolt for padlock.
H. Electric Grille Operator:

1. Usage Classification: Medium duty, up to 12 cycles per hour and up to 50 cycles
per day.
2. Operator Location: Front of hood unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
or industrial use.
4. Motor Exposure: Interior.
5. Motor Electrical Characteristics: As indicated on Drawings.
6. Emergency Manual Operation: Push-up.
7. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic electric sensor edge on bottom bar.
8. Control Station: Interior mounted where indicated on Drawings.
I. Curtain Accessories: Equip grille with astragal and push/pull handles.
J. Grille Finish:
1. Stainless Steel Finish: ASTM A480/A480M No. 4 (polished directional satin).

application.

2.4 GRILLE CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Open-Curtain Grilles: Fabricate metal grille curtain as an open network of horizontal

rods, spaced at regular intervals, that are interconnected with vertical links, which are
formed and spaced as indicated and are free to rotate on the rods.
1. Stainless-Steel Grille Curtain: ASTM A666 or ASTM A240/A240M, Type 300
series.
B. Bottom Bar: Manufacturer's standard continuous shape unless otherwise indicated,

finished to match grille.
1. Provide motor-operated grilles with combination bottom astragal and sensor
edge.
C. Grille Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard shape having curtain groove with
return lips or bars to retain curtain. Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent
metal-to-metal contact and to minimize operational noise; with removable stops on
guides to prevent overtravel of curtain.
2.5 HOODS AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating
mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached.
Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-
mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting that projects
beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to
prevent sagging.
1. Galvanized Steel: Nominal 0.028-inch- thick, hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet with
G90 zinc coating, complying with ASTM A653/A653M.
2. Stainless Steel: 0.025-inch- thick, stainless-steel sheet, Type 304, complying with
ASTM A666 or ASTM A240/A240M.
B. Removable Metal Soffit: Formed or extruded from same metal and with same finish as
curtain if hood is mounted above ceiling unless otherwise indicated.
C. Mounting Frame: Manufacturer's standard mounting frame designed to support grille;

factory fabricated from ASTM A36/A36M structural-steel tubes or shapes, hot-dip
galvanized per ASTM A123/A123M; fastened to floor and structure above grille; to be
built into wall construction; and complete with anchors, connections, and fasteners.
A. Push/Pull Handles: Equip push-up-operated or emergency-operated grille with lifting

handles on each side of grille, finished to match grille.
2.6 LOCKING DEVICES
A. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for
locking by padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side.
B. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated grilles with safety interlock switch to
disengage power supply when grille is locked.

2.7 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM
A. General: Counterbalance grilles by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with

an adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and
contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-
sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.
B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of manufacturer's standard hot-formed,

structural-quality, seamless or welded carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall
thickness to support rolled-up curtain without distortion of parts and to limit barrel
deflection to not more than 0.03 in./ft. of span under full load.
C. Counterbalance Spring: One or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion

springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment
accessible from outside barrel. Secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft with cast-
steel barrel plugs.
D. Torsion Rod for Counterbalance Shaft: Fabricate of manufacturer's standard cold-

rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load.
E. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled

steel plate.
2.8 ELECTRIC GRILLE OPERATORS
A. General: Electric grille operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and
provided by grille manufacturer for grille and operation cycles requirement specified,
with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit,
solenoid-operated brake, clutch, control stations, control devices, integral gearing for
locking grille, and accessories required for proper operation.
1. Comply with NFPA 70.
2. Control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6,
with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc.
B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not
less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each grille.
C. Grille Operator Location(s): Operator location indicated for each grille.

1. Front-of-Hood Mounted: Operator is mounted to the right or left grille head plate,
with the operator on coil side of the grille-hood assembly and connected to the
grille drive shaft with drive chain and sprockets. Front clearance is required for
this type of mounting.
D. Motors: Reversible-type motor with controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure
indicated for each grille assembly.
1. Electrical Characteristics: Minimum as indicated for each grille assembly. If not
indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and operate grille in either direction
from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec. and not more than 12
in./sec., without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor.

2. Operating Controls, Controllers (Disconnect Switches), Wiring Devices, and

Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.
3. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors and other
electrical devices with building electrical system and each location where
installed.
E. Limit Switches: Equip each motorized grille with adjustable switches interlocked with
motor controls and set to automatically stop grille at fully opened and fully closed
positions.
F. Obstruction-Detection Devices: External entrapment protection consisting of indicated

automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of grille opening. Activation of
sensor immediately stops and reverses downward grille travel.
1. Electric Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or
weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor activates device.
Connect to control circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-
coiling cable.
G. Control Station: Three-button control station in fixed location with momentary-contact

push-button controls labeled "Open" and "Stop" and sustained- or constant-pressure
push-button control labeled "Close."
1. Interior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with
general-purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.
H. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip electrically powered grille with capability for
emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for grille
operation does not exceed 25 lbf.
I. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated

disconnect mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing
brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting
timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include
interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency
operator is engaged.
J. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-
switch adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation.
finishes.

2.10 STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES
A. Factory Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard primer, compatible with field-applied

finish. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning,
pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness.
2.11 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross
scratches.
1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.
3. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
B. Examine locations of electrical connections.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install overhead coiling grilles and operating equipment complete with necessary
hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports, according to
manufacturer's written instructions and as specified.
B. Install overhead coiling grilles, hoods, controls, and operators at the mounting locations
indicated for each grille.
C. Power-Operated Grilles: Install according to UL 325.
D. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building
framing without distortion or stress.
E. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to
structural members only.
F. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth
operation. Install perimeter trim and closures.

3.3 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3. Test grille opening when activated by self-opening mechanism as required.
Reset grille-opening mechanism after successful test.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly, so that grilles operate easily,
free of warp, twist, or distortion.
1. Adjust exterior components to be weather resistant.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling grilles.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 08 34 73
METAL SOUND CONTROL DOOR ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Metal sound control door and frame assemblies.
2. Acoustical seals, cam-lift hinges, and related sound control hardware.
3. View windows
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for sound control door assemblies. Furnish setting
drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages. Deliver sleeves, inserts,
anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors to Project site in time for installation.
1. Review procedures for coordinating frame and anchor installation with wall
construction.
2. Review required field quality-control procedures.
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include sound ratings, construction details,
material descriptions, core descriptions, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For sound control door assemblies.
1. Include elevations of each door design.

2. Include details of cam-lift hinges, sound control seals, and thresholds.
3. Include details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details, reinforcing
for hardware, and metal thicknesses.
4. Include frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal
thicknesses.
5. Include locations of reinforcements and preparations for hardware.
6. Include details of each different wall opening condition.
7. Include details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
8. Include details of accessories.
9. Include details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
10. Include details of conduits and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
Metal Sound Control Door Assemblies 08 34 73 - 1

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish
1. Doors and Frames: Samples approximately 12 by 12 inches.
a. Doors: Include section of vertical-edge, top, and bottom construction; door

seals; core construction; glazing; cam-lift hinges, hardware and hardware
reinforcement.
b. Frames: Include profile, corner joint, floor and wall anchors, and seals.
E. Schedule: Provide a schedule of sound control door assemblies prepared using same
reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with the
Door Hardware Schedule.
A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of sound control door assembly.

1. Submit certification from assembly manufacturer’s representative that completed
Work has been observed and certified to comply with specified requirements.
C. Product Test Reports: For each sound control door and frame assembly, submit current
test reports for testing performed by qualified testing agency showing compliance with
specified sound ratings.
D. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and

exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies.
F. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranties.
A. Maintenance Data: For sound control door assemblies to include in maintenance

manuals.
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide sound control doors and frames, including

gaskets, hinges, and other hardware items essential for sound control, as a factory-
fabricated assembly. Provide assemblies by a single firm specializing in production of
this type of work for a minimum of ten (10) years.
B. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained
and approved by manufacturer.

1. Certify minimum five years of documented experience in installation of sound

control door and frame assemblies.
C. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency accredited as an

acoustical laboratory according to the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation
Program of NIST.
A. Deliver doors and frames palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during
transit and Project-site storage. Avoid the use of nonvented plastic.
1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.
C. Examine doors and frames to ensure acceptability for installation. Reject and replace
doors and frames showing damage or noncompliance with requirements.
D. Store compliant doors and frames vertically under cover at Project site with head up.
Place on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between
each stacked door to permit air circulation.
E. Protect doors, frames, and related materials until installed. Protect installed Work until
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sound control

door assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
a. Failure to meet sound rating requirements.

b. Faulty operation of sound seals.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
use or weathering.
d. Failure of wood veneer including delamination from metal face sheets,
peeling, telegraphing of core construction or substrates, deterioration of
wood veneer including stain and finish.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Sound Rating: Provide sound control door assemblies identical to those of assemblies
tested as sound-retardant units by an acoustical testing agency, and have the following
minimum rating:
1. STC Rating: As indicated in the Door Schedule as calculated by ASTM E413 when
tested in an operable condition according to ASTM E90.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers, Sound Control Door and Frame Assemblies: Subject to compliance with
requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into
the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. IAC Acoustics.
2. Krieger Specialty Products Company.
3. Noise Barriers, LLC.
B. Proposed Substitutions: In addition to meeting specified performance and aesthetic

requirements, ensure that proposed substitutions comply with requirements for factory
hung assemblies. Field fabrication and assembly of proposed substitutions will not be
accepted or permitted.
2.3 STEEL SOUND CONTROL DOORS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain steel sound control door assemblies, including doors, frames,
sound control seals, hinges, thresholds, and other items essential for sound control, from
1. Factory fabricate and assemble door and frame assemblies. Deliver to site ready
to install. Site fabrication or assembly not permitted.
B. Doors: Flush-design sound control doors, 1-3/4 inches thick typically or greater thickness
as required to provide STC rating, of seamless construction; with manufacturer's
standard sound-retardant core as required to provide STC ratings scheduled. Construct
doors with smooth, flush welded and ground surfaces without visible joints or seams on
exposed faces or stile edges. Fabricate according to NAAMM-HMMA 865.
1. Exterior Doors: Fabricate from metallic-coated steel sheet 0.067-inch nominal

thickness or thicker as required to provide STC rating indicated.
2. Interior Doors: Fabricate from metallic-coated steel sheet unless otherwise
indicated, 0.067-inch nominal thickness or thicker as required to achieve STC
rating indicated.
a. FRP veneer: Match doors specified in Section 08 17 43 with smooth face
finish.
3. Core: Manufacturer's standard sound control core.
4. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Doors: Same material as face sheets.

5. Top and Bottom Channels: Closed with continuous channels of same material as
face sheets, spot welded to face sheets not more than 6 inches o.c.
6. Hardware Reinforcement: Same material as face sheets.
C. Materials:
1. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B,

2. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
3. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Commercial Steel (CS),
Type B, with A60 zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating designation.
4. Glazing: As required by sound control door assembly manufacturer to comply with
sound control requirements.
5. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers,
or glass fibers, minimum 6 pound density.
D. Finishes: FRP
2.4 SOUND CONTROL FRAMES
A. Frames: Fabricate sound control door frames with corners mitered, reinforced, and
continuously welded the full depth and width of frame. Fabricate according to NAAMM-
HMMA 865.
1. Weld frames according to NAAMM-HMMA 820.

2. Exterior Frames: Fabricate from metallic-coated steel sheet 0.079-inch nominal
thickness or thicker as required to provide STC rating indicated.
3. Interior Frames: Fabricate from metallic-coated steel sheet unless otherwise
indicated, 0.079-inch nominal thickness or thicker as required to provide STC
rating indicated.
4. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to NAAMM-HMMA 865 of same
material as face sheets.
5. Head Reinforcement: Metallic-coated steel channel or angle stiffener, 0.108-inch
nominal thickness.
6. Jamb Anchors:
a. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit

frame size, not less than 0.064-inch nominal-thickness metallic-coated steel
with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches
long; or wire anchors not less than 0.156 inch thick.
b. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not
less than 0.048-inch nominal-thickness uncoated steel unless otherwise
indicated.
c. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum
3/8-inch-diameter, metallic-coated steel bolts with expansion shields or
inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement
plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

7. Floor Anchors: Not less than 0.079-inch nominal-thickness metallic-coated steel,

and as follows:
a. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive

fasteners.
b. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension
clips, allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of
frames at finish floor surface.
8. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 3/8-inch-thick by 2-inch-wide uncoated steel unless

9. Plaster Guards at Masonry Walls: Metallic-coated steel sheet, not less than 0.026
inch thick.
B. Materials:
1. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B,

2. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
3. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Commercial Steel (CS),
Type B, with A60 zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating designation.
4. Supports and Anchors: After fabricating, galvanize units to be built into exterior
walls according to ASTM A153/A153M, Class B.
5. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Provide items to be built into exterior walls, hot-dip
galvanized according to ASTM A153/A153M or ASTM F2329.
6. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for
application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or
other accessory devices for attaching sound control door frames of type indicated.
7. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers,
or glass fibers, minimum 6 pound density.
C. Finishes:
1. FRP: Match Work of Section 08 17 43.

2. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and
pretreating.
a. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, rust-inhibiting, lead- and

chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria;
recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with
substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.
b. Field Paint: See Division 09 for interior paint at typical installation and for
high-performance coatings at exterior assemblies.
2.5 HARDWARE
A. Sound Control Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard sound control system, including
head and jamb seals, door bottoms, cam-lift hinges, and thresholds, as required by
testing to achieve STC rating indicated.

1. Magnetic Seals, Self-Aligning: One-piece units consisting of closed-cell sponge

neoprene compression seals integral with resiliently mounted magnetic seals at
door jambs, heads, and meeting stiles, held in place by metal retainer, with retainer
cover of same material as door frame; attached with concealed screws. Seals hold
doors in closed position by magnetic force.
2. Door Bottoms: Gravity-activated, continuous, adjustable acoustic labyrinth created
with door in closed position. Ensure neoprene or silicone gasket hold securely in
place against smooth threshold by means of metal housing mortised into bottom
edge of door.
a. Raised sills and threshold drop seals: Not permitted.
3. Cam-Lift Hinges: Full-mortise template type that raises door 1/2 inch when door is
fully open; with hardened pin; fabricated from satin finish stainless steel.
a. For door leaf thickness less than or equal to 2-1/2 inches: Two hinges
required per leaf for openings up to and including 96 inches high; three
hinges per leaf for openings up to and including 120 inches high.
b. For door leaf thickness greater than 2-1/2 inches: Three hinges required per
leaf for openings up to and including 96 inches high; four hinges required per
leaf for openings up to and including 120 inches high.
4. Jamb Anchors: Corrosion-resistant. Provide to suit wall construction. Space at
maximum 12 inches OC.
5. Thresholds: Flat, smooth, unfluted type as recommended by manufacturer;
fabricated from aluminum or stainless steel to create seal with door seals and door
bottoms .
a. Finish, Aluminum: Clear anodic finish.
B. Additional Hardware: Factory install. Comply with requirements in Section 08 71 00

"Door Hardware" including:
1. Closers by LCN, Norton, or equivalent.
2. Pull Handles: 1 inch diameter by 9 inch long with 3 inch projection, clear anodized
aluminum
3. Push Plates: 4 by 16 inch by 0.050 inch thick satin stainless steel.
4. Locksets/Latchsets: See Section 08 71 00.
5. Exit Devices: See Section 08 71 00
6. Flush Bolts: Surface-mounted to inactive leaf at top and bottom of inside face of
door.
a. Basis of Design, Manufacturer: Glynn-Johnson.
7. Coordinators: Dormakaba or equivalent.
C. Hardware Reinforcing:
1. Hinges: Minimum of ¼" (6 mm) thick x 2" (51 mm) wide x 7-1/2" (191 mm) long
2. Frames: Minimum of 3/16" (5 mm) thick for strikes and #11 (3 mm) gauge for
closers.
3. Doors: Minimum of #11 (3 mm) gauge for lock boxes and closers.
2.6 SOUND CONTROL ACCESSORIES
A. Glazing: Manufacturers' factory-installed, double-glazed, tempered glass rated for

safety glazing and tested to comply with acoustical requirements when integral with door
and frame assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing." Provide

glazing units in extruded aluminum stops and moldings with mitered corners. Size as
scheduled. Provide laminated insulated glass where required to achieve STC ratings
specified. Wire glass: Not permitted.
B. Grout: Comply with ASTM C476, with a slump of not more than 4 inches as measured
according to ASTM C143/C143M. For use at masonry and concrete wall openings only.
C. Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry

film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos
fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Sound Control Assemblies: Provide prehung door and frame assemblies. Factory
fabricate and assemble; adjust doors, frames, acoustical seals, cam-lift hinges, and
related hardware. Ship assembled units to job site, ready to install into prepared
openings.
B. Steel Sound Control Door Fabrication: Provide sound control doors rigid and free of
defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with
minimum radius for thickness of metal.
1. Seamless Edge Construction: Fabricate doors with faces joined at vertical edges
by welding; welds shall be ground, filled, and dressed to make them invisible and
to provide a smooth, flush surface.
2. Exterior Doors: Close top edges flush and seal joints against water penetration.
Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to
escape.
3. Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Factory fit non-fire-rated doors accurately in frames with
the following clearances:
a. Jambs: 1/8 inch.
b. Head with Butt Hinges: 1/8 inch.
c. Head with Cam-Lift Hinges: As required by manufacturer, but not more than
3/8 inch.
d. Sill: Manufacturer's standard.
e. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch.
4. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare sound control doors to receive templated
mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping.
a. Reinforce doors to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted

door hardware.
b. Locate door hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to NAAMM-
HMMA 831, "Recommended Hardware Locations for Custom Hollow Metal
Doors and Frames."
c. Cam-Lift Hinges: Install hinges according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
5. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing" and
with sound control door assembly manufacturer's written instructions.
a. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced
uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from
each corner.

b. Glazed Lites: Factory install glazed lites according to requirements of tested

assembly to achieve STC rating indicated. Provide fixed stops and moldings
welded on secure side of door.
6. Tolerances: Fabricate doors to tolerances indicated in NAAMM-HMMA 865.
C. Sound Control Frame Fabrication: Fabricate two-piece sound control frames rigid and
free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with
minimum radius for thickness of metal. Fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant.
To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be
permanently factory assembled before shipment and notify Architect immediately.
1. Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and
invisible.
2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed
fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
3. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four
spot welds per anchor.
4. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom
of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches in height.

2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches in height.
3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches in height.
4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each
24 inches, or fraction thereof, more than 96 inches in height.
b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches in height.

2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches in height.
3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches in height.
4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each
24 inches, or fraction thereof, more than 96 inches in height.
5) Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and
mounted in metal-stud partitions.
c. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from
top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.
5. Head Reinforcement: For grouted frames more than 48 inches wide, weld
continuous head reinforcement to back of frame at head full width of opening.
6. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare sound control frames to receive templated
mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping.
a. Reinforce frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted

door hardware.

b. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to NAAMM-

HMMA 831, "Recommended Hardware Locations for Custom Hollow Metal
Doors and Frames."
7. Plaster Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware cutouts and glazing-
stop screw and sound control seal preparations to close off interior of openings in
frames to be grouted at masonry and concrete wall openings.
8. Tolerances: Fabricate frames to tolerances indicated in NAAMM-HMMA 865.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations of
sound control door frame connections before frame installation.
3.2 PREPARATION

grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to ensure that repairs are smooth, flush, and
invisible on exposed faces.
B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace pre-hung sound control door and frames
to the following tolerances:
1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90

degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel
to plane of wall.
3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line
from head to floor.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sound control door and frame assemblies plumb, rigid, properly aligned,
and securely fastened in place; comply with manufacturer's written instructions and
approved shop drawings.

1. Set accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces,
leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a. Remove temporary braces only after frames or bucks have been properly
set and secured.
b. Check squareness, twist, and plumbness of frames as walls are constructed.
Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
c. Apply corrosion-resistant coating to backs of frames to be filled with mortar,
grout, and plaster containing antifreezing agents.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to
floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of

postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop
Drawings.
3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Fully fill frames with mineral-fiber insulation.

4. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with
postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth,
flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
5. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled
expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and
fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
6. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to supporting
construction above unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural
support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to
supporting construction above. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to
frame jamb members.
7. Grouted Frames at Masonry Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and substrate
with grout. Take precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are
not deformed or damaged by grout forces.
8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust sound control door frames for squareness,
alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90

degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs
on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular
line from head to floor.
B. Sound Control Seals: Where seals have been factory prefit and preinstalled and
subsequently removed for shipping, reinstall seals and adjust according to
C. Thresholds: Set thresholds in full bed of sealant complying with requirements in

Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."

A. Testing Agency: Owner reserves the right to engage a qualified testing agency to
perform tests and inspections.
B. Manufacturer Inspections: Upon completion of the Work schedule an inspection visit to

the job site by a qualified manufacturer’s representative to certify that installation is in
conformance with specified requirements and the manufacturer’s recommendations.
C. Testing Services: Perform testing for verification that assembly complies with STC rating
requirements.
1. Acoustical testing and inspecting agency shall select one sound control door(s) at
random from sound control door assemblies that are completely installed for
testing.
2. Field tests shall be conducted according to ASTM E336, with results calculated
according to ASTM E413. Acceptable field NIC values shall be within 5 dB of
laboratory STC values.
3. Inspection Report: Acoustical testing agency shall submit report in writing to
Architect and Contractor within 24 hours after testing.
4. If tested door fails, test remainder of sound control doors at Contractor’s expense
and replace or rework every sound control door assembly required to be modified
in order to comply.
a. Additional testing, reworking, and inspecting: At Contractor's expense.

Perform to determine if replaced or additional work complies with specified
requirements.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct Owner’s designated personnel regarding proper operation and maintenance of

sound control door and frame assemblies. Establish preferred maintenance schedule for
use by Owner’s personnel.
A. Final Adjustments: Check and adjust seals, door bottoms, and other sound control
hardware items right before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper
operating condition.
B. Remove and replace defective work, including defective or damaged sound seals and
doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
1. Adjust gaskets, gasket retainers, and retainer covers to provide contact required
to achieve STC rating.

C. Grouted Frames: Clean grout off sound control door frames immediately after
installation.
D. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas
of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible, rust-inhibitive, air-drying primer.
E. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas of doors and repair with galvanizing
repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 08 39 06
TORNADO RESISTANT DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Tornado shelter steel doors.
2. Tornado shelter steel frames.
1. Section 08 11 13 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for standard hollow-metal
doors and frames.
2. Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware" for standard door hardware and keyed
cylinders.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors
and Frames.
2. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel
Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM A 336 - Standard Specification for Commercial Steel (CS) Sheet, Carbon
(0.15 Maximum Percent) Cold-Rolled.
2. ASTM A 653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
or Zinc Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
C. ICC/NSSA Standard for the Design and Construction of Storm Shelters:

1. ICC 500-2014 American National Standard.
D. Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA):

1. FEMA 361 - Design and Construction Guidance for Community Shelters.
E. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM):

1. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and
Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.
F. National Fire Protection Association:

1. NFPA 80: Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives (ANSI).
2. NFPA 105: Standard for Smoke Door Assemblies and Other Opening Protectives
(ANSI).
3. NFPA 252: Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies (ANSI).
G. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.:
Tornado Resistant Doors and Frames 08 39 06 - 1

1. UL 10C: Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

2. UL 1784: Air Leakage Tests for Door Assemblies.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-
resistance ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door type.
2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal
thicknesses.
3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal
thicknesses.
4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
5. Details of each different wall opening condition.
6. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access
control systems, and security systems.
7. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
8. Details of accessories.
9. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
C. Samples: For each type of exposed hardware finish.
D. Door, Frame, and Hardware: For tornado shelter doors, frames, and hardware,
prepared by or under the supervision of supplier. Coordinate door hardware schedule
with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function,
and finish of door hardware.
1. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers
as in the Contract Documents.
2. Content: Include the following information:
a. Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each
door and frame.
b. Show provisions for hardware conforming to FEMA 361/ICC 500
requirements.
c. Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on
floor plans and to door and frame schedule.
d. Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style,
function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product.
e. Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and
interfaces with other building control systems.
f. Fastenings and other installation information.
g. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and designations contained in door
hardware schedule.
h. Mounting locations for door hardware.

A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
B. Product Certificates: Manufacturer’s certificate that Products meet or exceed specified

requirements for FEMA 361 and ICC 500 door, frame, and hardware assemblies.
C. Product Test Reports: For each type of tornado shelter door, frame, and hardware
assembly and fire-rated door and frame assembly for tests performed by a qualified
testing agency indicating compliance with performance requirements.
A. Warranty: Submit warranty form completed in Owner’s name and registered with
manufacturer.
B. Door Hardware Inspection Report: Upon request, submit inspection report by AHC
certifying that door hardware has been installed in accordance with manufacturer’s
installation instructions, has been adjusted, and is functioning properly
C. Installation Certificate: Submit written certification of installation on form provided at

the end of this Section.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products

FEMA 361/ICC 500 storm doors and hardware as specified in this section with
minimum five years documented experience.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified for testing indicated and accredited by IAS or
ILAC Mutual Recognition Arrangement as complying with ISO/IEC Standard 17025.
C. Manufacturer Installation Instructions: Contractor shall maintain current copy of

tornado shelter storm door, frame, and hardware manufacturer’s published installation
instructions and FEMA 361/ICC 500 requirements in Project Field Office and refer to
installation instructions at all times during installation.
D. Severe Storm Shelter Openings: Provide complete door systems for hurricane or
tornado resistant storm shelters and other areas of refuge complying and tested
according to FEMA 361, Design and Construction Guidance for Community Safe
Rooms; and ICC 500-2014, ICC/NSSA Standard for the Design and Construction of
Storm Shelters.
E. Labeling: Each door and frame shall bear a permanent label indicating performance
test criteria. Label shall bear name of independent laboratory tested this assembly.
Label shall indicate test pressures, both positive and negative in pounds per square
foot; and design pressure, both positive and negative in pounds per square foot.

A. Deliver hollow-metal doors and frames palletized, packaged, or crated to provide

protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic.
C. Store hollow-metal doors and frames vertically under cover at Project site with head
up. Place on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space
between each stacked door to permit air circulation, avoid humidity build-up, and
prevent corrosion.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of

tornado shelter storm doors, frames, and hardware assemblies that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations:
1. Obtain tornado shelter storm doors, frames, and hardware from a single supplier.
2. Provide tornado shelter storm doors, frames and hardware as an integral FEMA
361/ICC 500 assembly by a single installer.
3. Tornado shelter doors, frames, and hardware shall be installed by supplier.
Installation by any other entity is not permitted
4. Door Hardware that is supplied under other Sections, may be supplied under
separate contracts but must all originate from the same manufacturer. No
exceptions.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Ceco Door; ASSA ABLOY; StormPro® Tornado Resistant Assemblies.
2. Steelcraft; an Allegion brand; PW14 Paladin™ Series.
A. Tornado shelter storm doors, frames and hardware shall be furnished and installed as
an integral FEMA 361/ICC 500 Tested and Certified assembly from a single source.
B. Design Requirements:
1. Shelter entry doors and frames shall resist design wind pressures for
components and cladding as described in Section 1 and Missile Impact Loads of
Section 2 of “National Performance Criteria for Tornado Shelters Federal
Emergency Management Agency Mitigation Directorate”, latest edition. Only
single opening and paired opening doors, and frames that can resist calculated
design wind pressures and laboratory tested missile impacts are acceptable.

2. All doors shall have sufficient points of connection to frame to resist design wind
pressure and impact loads. All doors will be attached to the frame per the door
hardware with which that the door and frame were tested.
3. Protective missile resistant barrier is permitted to protect door opening. Design
door to resist wind pressures. Size and number of shelter doors shall be
determined in accordance with applicable fire safety and building codes.
4. Door systems, both single doors and paired openings, shall be tested and must
comply with FEMA 361/ICC 500, and have verifiable third party conformance test
results and be certified by a Nationally Recognized Independent Testing
Laboratory such as Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL) or Warnock Hersey (ITS).
A. Tornado Shelter Door, Frame, and Hardware Assemblies: Assemblies complying with
FEMA 361/ICC 500 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency for severe
storm shelter openings.
B. Fire-Rated Door and Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are
listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated on Drawings, based on testing at
positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and
draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance
with NFPA 105.
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface tempera-
ture changes.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F.
2.4 TORNADO SHELTER DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Interior Doors and Frames:

1. Doors:
c. Face: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.067 inch.
d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush.
e. Core: As required by FEMA 361/ICC 500 and fire-rating indicated.
2. Frames:
a. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.067 inch.
3. Exposed Finish: Prime.
B. Exterior Doors and Frames:

1. Doors:
c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.067 inch, with
minimum A60 coating.
d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush.

e. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same
material as face sheets. Seal joints against water penetration.
f. Bottom Edges: Close bottom edges of doors where required for attachment
of weather stripping with end closures or channels of same material as face
sheets. Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit
moisture to escape.
a. Core: As required by FEMA 361/ICC 500 and fire-rating indicated.
2. Frames:
a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.067 inch,
with minimum A60 coating.
3. Exposed Finish: Prime.
2.5 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of
scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/A153M.
E. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for

application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other
accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.
F. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing);

consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread
and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E136 for
2.6 HARDWARE LOCATIONS AND REINFORCEMENTS
A. Locate hardware on doors and frames in accordance with the system manufacturer’s
specific location.
B. Hardware reinforcements are to be in accordance with the minimum standard gages as

listed in SDI-100 and FEMA 361 requirements.
C. Doors shall be mortised, reinforced and function holes provided at the factory in
accordance with the hardware schedule and templates provided by the hardware
supplier.
2.7 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free
primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer

for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite

prolonged exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors, frames, and hardware, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements including labeling for ICC 500 assembly construction, labeling fire-rated
door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting
B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring
connections before electrified door hardware installation.
C. Examine storm shelter wall openings for tolerance and proper fit of storms shelter door
frames.
1. Openings in storm shelter walls shall be constructed no more than 1/8-inchlarger
per side than the physical size of the door frame.
2. Openings in storm shelter walls shall be hand ground as required to install door
frames with no gaps exceeding 1/4-inchbetween door frame and substrate.
D. Do not order doors until door frames and bottom strikes have been installed and
dimensions of each opening have been field verified.
E. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for
size or alignment.
F. Report in writing to Architect prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory
execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION

grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and
invisible on exposed faces. Touch up factory-applied finishes where spreaders are
removed.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.
B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
C. Install doors in metal door frames in accordance with manufacturer’s published

instructions and requirements of ICC 500.
D. Install fire-rated doors in conformance with code requirements for compliance with
NFPA 80 and UL 10C.

E. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions and

requirements of ICC 500.
A. Inspection Agency: Engage a qualified inspector to perform inspections and to furnish

reports to Architect.
1. Inspect door installation, fit, and clearance.
2. Inspect door assembly for ICC 500 requirements and labeling.
3. Inspect fire door assembly for specified fire test ratings, requirements, and
labeling.
4. Inspect door hardware installation and operation for conformance with ICC 500
requirements.
B. Repair or remove and replace installations where inspections indicate that they do not
C. Reinspect repaired or replaced installations to determine if replaced or repaired door

D. Prepare and submit separate inspection report for each fire-rated door assembly
indicating compliance with ICC 500 and NFPA 80.
E. Hardware Supplier Field Services: At completion of hardware installation, provide an

inspection of tornado shelter storm door hardware installation and certify that hardware
and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer’s
installation instructions and ICC 500 requirements. Use form provided at the end of
this Section.
A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
B. Adjust closers for full closure.
C. Clean doors, frames and hardware immediately after installation.
D. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
E. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.
F. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is
without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion
END OF SECTION

TORNADO SHELTER DOORS, FRAMES & HARDWARE INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION
PROJECT:
LOCATION:
ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NUMBER:
OWNER:
CONTRACTOR: ____________________________________________________________
DOOR, FRAME & HARDWARE INSTALLER:

Name: _________________________________________________________________
Address: _______________________________________________________________
Telephone Number: ______________________________________________________
UPON COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION INSTALLER CERTIFIES THAT:

A. Installer obtained a current copy of the manufacturer's published installation
instructions and FEMA 361/ICC 500 requirements for the specific doors, frames and
hardware being installed.
B. Installer reviewed and discussed manufacturer's published installation instructions and
FEMA 361/ICC 500 requirements with Project Field Superintendent before start of
installation.
C. Installer furnished and installed specified tornado shelter doors, frames and hardware
in accordance with the Contract Documents.
D. Installer installed tornado shelter doors, frames and hardware in conformance with
door, frame and hardware manufacturer's published installation instructions and FEMA
361/ICC 500 requirements.
E. Installer provided door hardware inspection by an AHC and submitted Door Hardware
Inspection Report as required by the Contract Documents.
EXECUTED AND DELIVERED this _________________ day of ______________, 20___ .
________________________________________
(Company name)
BY: ____________________________________
(Authorized signature)
Subscribed and sworn to before me this ____________day of _____________, 20___.
________________________________________________
Notary Public
_______________________________________________
My Commission expires: Affix Seal

SECTION 08 41 13
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Exterior and interior storefront framing.
2. Storefront framing for punched openings.
3. Sliding window at interior storefront.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association

1. AAMA 501.1: Test Method for Water Penetration of Windows, Curtain Walls, and
Doors Using Dynamic Pressure
2. AAMA 501.2: Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage Field Check of
Installed Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems
3. AAMA 611: Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum
B. American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute

1. ASCE/SEI 7: Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
1. ASTM A 36/A 36M: Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
2. ASTM A 123/A 123M: Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on
Iron and Steel Products
3. ASTM A 153/A 153M: Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware
4. ASTM A 240/A 240M: Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel
Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General
Applications
5. ASTM A 1008/A 1008M: Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable
6. ASTM A 1011/A 1011M: Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled,
Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with
Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength
7. ASTM B 209: Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
8. ASTM B 221: Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,
Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes
9. ASTM B 308/B 308M: Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard
Structural Profiles
10. ASTM B 429/B 429M: Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe
and Tube
11. ASTM C 920: Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
Aluminium-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 08 41 13 - 1

12. ASTM D 2244: Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color
Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates
13. ASTM D 4214: Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior
Paint Films
14. ASTM E 283: Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage through
Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure
Differences across the Specimen
15. ASTM E 330: Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
16. ASTM E 331: Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,
Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
17. ASTM E 699: Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Involved in Testing, Quality
Assurance, and Evaluating Building Components
D. National Fenestration Rating Council

1. NFRC 100: Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-Factors
2. NFRC 200: Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain
Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence
3. NFRC 500: Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Condensation
Resistance Values
E. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings

1. SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00: Guide to Zinc-Rich Coating Systems
2. SSPC-SP COM: Surface Preparation Specifications: Surface Preparation
Commentary for Steel and Concrete Substrates

components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans,

elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.
1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for
draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.
2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of
aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, showing the following:
a. Joinery, including concealed welds.
b. Anchorage.
c. Expansion provisions.
d. Glazing.
e. Flashing and drainage.
3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor
barriers.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's
standard sizes.
E. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier,

detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures
and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames,
and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of
entrance door hardware.
F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts indicated

to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data
signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
A. Energy Performance Certificates: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts,

accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each
aluminum-framed entrance and storefront.
B. Product Test Reports: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, for tests
performed by a qualified testing agency.
C. Field quality-control reports.
A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to include in

maintenance manuals.
trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.
C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes

requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies.
Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of
components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to
adjoining construction.
1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except
with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive
explanatory data to Architect for review.
1.8 MOCKUPS

A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings.
2. Testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements in "Field
Quality Control" Article.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed

entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials
or workmanship within specified warranty period.
a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
c. Deterioration of metals, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas.
e. Failure of operating components.
2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes
or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes
within specified warranty period.
1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
ASTM D 2244.
ASTM D 4214.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

45 16 "Contractor’s Quality Control," to design aluminum-framed entrances and
storefronts.
B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as

determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing
those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication,
installation, or other defects in construction.
1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of
supporting structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column

shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and

concentrated live loads.
2. Failure also includes the following:
a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
b. Glass breakage.
c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
e. Failure of operating units.
C. Structural Loads:
1. Wind Loads: Design and size components of aluminum-framed entrances and
storefronts to withstand loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure
acting normal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7 to
establish wind pressure based on criteria listed on Drawings.
D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to
13 feet 6 inches and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than
13 feet 6 inches or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing
lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less.
2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which
reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which
reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed
components to less than 1/8 inch.
3. Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point, as
follows:
a. Perpendicular to Plane of Wall: No greater than 1/240 of clear span plus
1/4 inch for spans greater than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches or 1/175 times span,
for spans less than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches.
E. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do
not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,
assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural
distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2
percent of span.
3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10
seconds.
F. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:

1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area:
a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential
of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..
2. Entrance Doors:
a. Pair of Doors: Maximum air leakage of 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-
pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..
b. Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-
pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..

G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows:
1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when
tested according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of
positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 10 lbf/sq. ft..
H. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Test according to AAMA 501.1 as follows:
1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when
tested at dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design
pressure, but not less than 10 lbf/sq. ft..
2. Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating assemblies or
water appearing on assemblies' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources
other than condensation. Water leakage does not include water controlled by
flashing and gutters, or water that is drained to exterior.
I. Energy Performance:
1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-
factor of not more than0.45 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to
NFRC 100.
2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar
heat gain coefficient of no greater than 0.25 as determined according to
NFRC 200.
3. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-
certified condensation resistance rating of no less than 70 as determined
according to NFRC 500.
J. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface
temperature changes:
2. Thermal Cycling: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on
framing, anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested
according to AAMA 501.5.
a. High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior
metal-surface temperature of 180 deg F.
b. Low Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: 0 deg F.
c. Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product, Exterior Storefront Framing: Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide Kawneer North America; Trifab VG 451T Front Glazed or
comparable product by one of the following:
1. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope.
2. Tubelite.
3. United States Aluminum.
4. YKK AP America Inc.
B. Basis-of-Design Product, Interior Storefront Framing: Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide Kawneer North America; Trifab VG 451 or comparable product
1. EFCO Corporation.

2. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope.
3. Tubelite.
4. United States Aluminum.
5. YKK AP America Inc.
C. Basis of Design Product, Sliding Window at Interior Storefront: Subject to compliance

with requirements, provide Kawneer North America 8400TL Thermal Window with
locking mechanism to receive master-keyed core.
1. Other acceptable products: As manufactured by selected interior storefront
manufacturer for incorporation into interior storefront system provided, pending
review and approval by Architect.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront

system, including framing and accessories, from single manufacturer.
2.3 FRAMING
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of

thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Construction:
a. Exterior: Poured and debridged thermally-broken framing; 2 inch face
dimension by depths shown; for 1-inch thick IGU specified in Section 08 80
00.
b. Interior: Non thermally broken; 2 by 4 inch framing; for nominal 6 mm thick
monolithic glazing specified in Section 08 80 00.
2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
3. Glazing Plane:
a. Exterior Storefront: Front.
b. Interior Storefront: Center.
4. Finish at Storefront Framing and Entrances:
a. Exterior: Black anodized finish
b. Interior: Black anodized finish.
5. Fabrication Method: Screw Spline Fabrication.
B. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's thermally broken, continuous backer plates for framing
members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.
C. Sill Flashing: Manufacturer's standard, thermally broken, continuous sill flashing or

receptor piece, with end dams, where framing abuts adjacent construction.
D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with

nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
E. Materials:
1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and
finish indicated.
a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.
c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.
d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.

2. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant

primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after
surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods
according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces
according to applicable SSPC standard.
a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS
A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing

operation.
1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch-] [2-
inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.188-inch-thick, extruded-aluminum tubular
rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that
are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.
2. Door Design: Wide stile; 5-inch nominal width.
3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and
preformed gaskets.
a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.
2.5 LOCKING MECHANISMS
A. Locks and Cylinders: Provide Small Format Interchangeable Core (SFIC) at entrances,
doors, and locking windows typically unless otherwise shown or specified.
1. See Section 08 71 00 “Door Hardware” for basis of design product requirements.
2.6 GLAZING
A. Glazing: Comply with Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of

black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.
C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.
D. Weatherseal Sealants: ASTM C 920 for Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A,
and O; chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with structural sealant
and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by
structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and structural-sealant-glazed storefront
manufacturers for this use.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,

nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out
from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match
framing system.
B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that

accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible
with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer.
1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or
steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M
requirements.
C. Concealed Flashing: Dead-soft, 0.018-inch-thick stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M

of type recommended by manufacturer.
D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12

requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing
to maintain required glazing edge clearances.
5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior.
6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to
greatest extent possible.
C. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting
stops.
D. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using shear-block system.
E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door

operation and for installing entrance door hardware.
1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.
2. At balcony doors provide Dormakaba rain guard type threshold or equivalent as
3. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact.
Install three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on
head of frames for pairs of doors.
F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.
1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in
adjustable strip and mortised into door edge.
2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.

G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the
greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware
before applying finishes.
H. Reinforce doors and frames to receive templated and nontemplated, mortised, and
surface-mounted door hardware
I. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project

according to Shop Drawings.
A. Interior Storefront; Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I,

0.018 mm or thicker.
1. Color: Black.
B. Exterior Storefront; Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I,

1. Color: Black.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare surfaces that are in contact with structural sealant according to sealant
manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation
includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and
electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic
action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer
for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers.

2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against

corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 07
92 00 "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.
D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
E. Install glazing as specified in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
F. Install weatherseal sealant according to Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" and

according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof joints.
Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact
points.
1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather
stripping.
2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door
hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written
instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to comply with

the following maximum tolerances:
1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.
2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.
3. Alignment:
a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding
element up to 1/2 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.
b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to
1 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch.
c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch
wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch.
4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total
length.
B. Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of

aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts.
1. Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas
designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not
evidence water penetration.
a. Perform a minimum of one test on each building facade in areas directed
by Architect.

C. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts will be considered defective if they do not

pass tests and inspections.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 08 55 14
TORNADO-RESISTANT ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Tornado-resistant fixed aluminum windows.
1. Section 08 41 13 "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for coordinating
finish among aluminum fenestration units.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for tornado-resistant windows. Furnish setting

drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,
concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be
embedded in adjacent construction.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, glazing and fabrication
methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, and
finishes for aluminum windows.
B. Shop Drawings: For tornado-resistant windows.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, framing members, including internal
armoring, reinforcement, and stiffeners, and details of installation, including
anchor, flashing, and sealant installation.
2. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor
barriers.
C. Samples for Verification: For tornado-resistant windows and components required,

showing full range of color variations for finishes, and prepared on Samples of size
indicated below:
1. Exposed Finishes: 2 by 4 inches.
Tornado-Resistant Aluminum Windows 08 55 14 - 1

A. Delegated Design: For tornado-resistant window assemblies indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including structural calculations signed
and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
B. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and Installer.
C. Product Test Reports: For each type of tornado-resistant aluminum window, for tests
performed by a qualified testing agency.
E. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating FEMA 361/ICC 500

storm-rated aluminum windows that meet or exceed performance requirements
indicated and of documenting this performance by test reports and calculations.
B. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by

window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.
C. Manufacturer Installation Instructions: Maintain current copy of tornado-resistant

window manufacturer’s published installation instructions and FEMA 361/ICC 500
requirements in Project Field Office and refer to installation instructions during
installation.
D. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate installation of anchorages for tornado-

resistant windows, aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and
execution.
1. Build mockup of typical window as shown on Drawings.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements

before fabrication.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows

that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Failure to meet performance requirements.
b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage,
condensation, and air infiltration.
c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware.
d. Deterioration of materials and finishes beyond normal weathering.
2. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace

laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of
laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed
to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to
manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination
materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by
referenced laminated-glass standard.
C. Special Warranty, Glass-Clad Polycarbonate Glazing: Manufacturer agrees to replace

glass-clad polycarbonate glazing that fails in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
a. Defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass
breakage or to maintaining and cleaning glass-clad polycarbonate glazing
contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge
separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glazing,
blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced polycarbonate standard,
yellowing, and loss of light transmission.
D. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace

insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period.
1. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under
normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning
insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of
failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of
glass.
a. Defects in coated-glass lites include peeling, cracking, and other
indications of deterioration in coating.
b. Defects in laminated-glass lites include edge separation, delamination
materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those
allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.
c. Defects in glass-clad polycarbonate lites include edge separation,
delamination materially obstructing vision through glazing, blemishes
exceeding those allowed by referenced glass-clad polycarbonate standard,
yellowing, and loss of light transmission.

E. Special Finish Warranty, Anodized Finishes: Standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of
anodized finishes within specified warranty period.
a. Color fading more than 5 Delta E units when tested according to
ASTM D 2244.
ASTM D 4214.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain tornado-resistant aluminum windows from single source

from single manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes

requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of window
assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment,
and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another,
and to adjoining construction.
1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except
with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive
A. Severe Storm Shelter Openings: Provide complete window systems for hurricane- or
tornado-resistant storm shelters and other areas of refuge complying and tested
according to FEMA 361, Design and Construction Guidance for Community Safe
Rooms; and ICC 500, ICC/NSSA Standard for the Design and Construction of Storm
Shelters.
B. Labeling: Each window shall bear a permanent label indicating performance test
criteria. Label shall bear name of independent laboratory that tested the assembly.
Label shall indicate test pressures, both positive and negative in pounds per square
foot; and design pressure, both positive and negative in pounds per square foot.
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section

01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design aluminum windows.
B. Tornado Shelter Window Assemblies: Assemblies complying with FEMA 361/ICC 500
that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency for severe storm shelter
openings.

C. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as

determined by testing of tornado-resistant aluminum windows representing those
indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication,
installation, or other defects in construction.
1. Tornado-resistant aluminum windows shall withstand movements of supporting
structure, including, but not limited to, twist, column shortening, long-term creep,
and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
2. Failure also includes the following:
a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
b. Glass breakage.
c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
D. Structural Loads:
1. Design Wind Speed: 250 mph unless otherwise indicated.
2. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
E. Product Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for definitions and

minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and
fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
F. Performance Class and Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 as follows:

1. Minimum Performance Class: AW.
2. Minimum Performance Grade: 100.
G. Energy Performance: Provide windows with performance properties specified, as

indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated
below and certified in accordance with NFRC:
1. Thermal Transmittance (U-Factor): Glazing and framing areas as a whole have
U-factor of not more than 0.30 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (1.70 W/sq. m x K) as
determined in accordance with NFRC 100.
2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Glazing and framing areas as a whole
have SHGC of no greater than 0.6 as determined in accordance with NFRC 200.
H. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for
thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient
and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of
effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both
solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces.
I. Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Passes ASTM E1886 missile-impact and cyclic-

pressure tests in accordance with ASTM E1996 for Wind Zone 4 for enhanced
protection for essential facilities.
1. Large-Missile Test: For glazing located within 30 feet] of grade.
a. Tornado: Resists impact of a 15 pound 2 by 4 at 100 mph.

J. Pressure Testing: FEMA 361 Compliant: Pass static pressure tests and cyclic tests
according to FEMA 361/ICC 500 in accordance with the following:
1. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior
Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure
Difference.
2.4 TORNADO-RESISTANT ALUMINUM WINDOWS
A. Basis of Design: StormDefend™ SD-TH600 Aluminum FEMA Tornado Window

Framing System by Protective Structures, Ltd.
B. Types: Provide the following types in locations indicated on Drawings:

1. Fixed.
2. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate frames, sashes, and muntins with
an integral, concealed, low-conductance thermal barrier located between exterior
materials and window members exposed on interior side in a manner that
eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact.
C. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistant Insulating-Glass Units: ASTM E2190 with two

lites and complying with impact-resistance requirements in "Window Performance
Requirements" Article.
1. Installed glazing shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact
loads without failure, including loss or breakage attributable to defective
manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain
watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in
construction.
D. Frame Materials:
1. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221. Provide alloy and temper recommended by
manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish,
but not less than 22,000-psi ultimate tensile strength.
2. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209.
E. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces

weathertight seal and complies with performance criteria.
1. Basis of Design Product: TOR-GARD® 30 IG as manufactured by Insulgard
Security Products.
2. Materials, General:
a. Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear).
b. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I
(clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated.
1) Heat-strengthened or fully tempered, as required by performance
c. Laminated-Glass: ASTM C1172. Two or more clear glass lites bonded with
interlayer. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to
bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after
fabrication and installation.

1) Interlayer Thickness: As required by performance requirements

indicated, but not less than 0.060 inch (1.52 mm).
2) Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.
d. Polycarbonate Glazing: ASTM C1349, Appendix X1, Type II, coated, mar-
resistant, UV-stabilized polycarbonate with coating on exposed surfaces
and Type I, standard, UV-stabilized polycarbonate where no surfaces are
exposed.
3. Exterior Lite: One of the following, as required by performance requirements
indicated.
a. Laminated-Glass, with Low-E coating on #2 surface.
b. Glass-Clad Polycarbonate, with Low-E coating on #2 surface.
c. Laminated Glass and Polycarbonate, with Low-E coating on #2 surface.
d. Provide Low-E coating on #2 surfaces matching Glass Type 4B specified in
Section 08 80 00 “Glazing”
4. Interior Lite: One of the following, as required by performance requirements
indicated.
a. Laminated-Glass.
b. Glass-Clad Polycarbonate.
c. Laminated Glass and Polycarbonate.
5. Filling: Fill space between glass lites with air.
6. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface of insulated glass unit.
F. Glazing Strips and Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable

components.
G. Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware,

anchors, and other components.
1. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Subsills: Thermally broken, extruded-aluminum subsills in configurations indicated on

Drawings.
B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint containing no asbestos,

formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for

assembling components and anchoring windows.
B. Provide weep holes and internal water passages for exterior tornado-resistant windows
to conduct infiltrating water to the exterior.
C. Thermally Improved or Thermally Broken Construction: Fabricate framing with an

integral, concealed, low-conductance thermal barrier, located between exterior

materials and members exposed on interior in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-
metal contact.
D. Framing: Miter or cope corners the full depth of framing; weld and dress smooth.
1. Fabricate framing with manufacturer's standard, internal reinforcing in
thicknesses required for windows to comply with windborne-debris-impact-
resistance performance and wind load pressures indicated.
E. Glazing Stops: Finish glazing stops to match window framing.
F. Welding: Weld components to comply with referenced AWS standard. To greatest

extent possible, weld before finishing and in concealed locations to minimize distortion
or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed
surfaces by descaling or grinding.
G. Metal Protection: Separate dissimilar metals to protect against galvanic action by

painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by
manufacturer for this purpose.
H. Weather Stripping: Factory applied.
I. Preglazed Fabrication: Preglaze window units at factory. Installation orientation of

glazing to meet performance requirements.
1. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glazing
immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
2. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark
units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do
not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work.
J. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, and other work in the factory to greatest
extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and
installation.
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations for applying and
designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a

strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
A. Exterior Storefront; Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I,

1. Color: Black.

2. Match exterior aluminum entrances and storefront system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with

Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
B. Verify rough opening dimensions and levelness of sill for tolerance and proper fit of
storms shelter windows.
1. Openings in storm shelter walls shall be constructed no more than 1/8-inch (3-
mm) larger per side than the physical size of the window frame.
2. Openings in storm shelter walls shall be hand ground as required to install
window frames with no gaps exceeding 1/4-inch (6-mm) between window frame
and substrate.
3. Do not install windows in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-
tolerance for size or alignment.
C. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations of
tornado-resistant window connections before window installation.
D. Examine wall flashings, air barriers, transition strips, and other built-in components to
ensure weathertight window installation.
E. For factory-installed glazing materials whose orientation (secure or windborne-debris

side) is critical for performance, verify installation orientation.
F. Report in writing to Architect prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory
execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other window
anchors whose installation is specified in other Sections.
1. Furnish cast-in-place anchors and similar devices to other trades for installation
well in advance of time needed for coordinating other work.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install tornado-resistant windows in accordance with manufacturer’s published

instructions and requirements of ICC 500.

B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic
action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer
for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers.
2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against
corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where

necessary for securing tornado-resistant windows to in-place construction. Include
threaded fasteners for inserts, and other connectors.
D. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal
movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to
wall flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction.
E. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and
moisture migrating within windows to the exterior.
B. Inspect window installation for conformance with ICC 500 requirements.
C. Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of

tornado-resistant windows.
1. Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas
designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not
evidence water penetration.
a. Perform a minimum of two tests on each building facade in areas directed
by Architect.
D. Windows will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging

protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and
other substances.
1. Keep protective films and coverings in place until final cleaning.
B. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or
damaged during construction period.
C. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from
construction operations. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces,
remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 08 56 53
FIXED SECURITY WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Fixed security windows including monolithic glazing at interior applications and

insulated glazing at exterior applications.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for security windows. Furnish setting drawings,

templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts,
anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in adjacent
construction.
B. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on security glazing,

minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with
reasonable tolerances.

components and profiles, weights and finishes for window units.
B. Shop Drawings: For security windows.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

2. Full-size section details of framing members, including internal armoring,
reinforcement, and stiffeners.
3. Location of weep holes.
4. Glazing details.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. Window Frame: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples
of sizes indicated below:
a. Framing: 12-inch- long sections of frame members.
2. Glazing: Actual sample of finished products for each type of security glazing.
Fixed Security Windows 08 56 53 - 1

a. Size: Manufacturers' standard size, but not less than 6 inches by 6 inches
(150 mm by 150 mm).
D. Cutaway Sample: Corner of security window, made from 12-inch lengths of full-size
components, and showing details of the following:
1. Joinery.
2. Anchorage.
3. Glazing.
4. Flashing and drainage.
E. Delegated Design Submittal: For security windows indicated to comply with

A. Delegated Design Submittals:
1. For security windows indicated to comply with performance requirements and

design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
2. For security glazing, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
C. Product Test Reports:
1. For each type of security window and accessory indicated as ballistics resistant,
for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
2. For each type of security glazing, for tests performed by qualified testing agency.
D. Examination reports documenting inspections of substrates, areas, and conditions.
E. Anchor inspection reports documenting inspections of built-in and cast-in anchors.
F. Field quality-control reports documenting inspections of installed products.
1. Field quality-control certification signed by Contractor.
G. Sample Warranty: For special warranties.
A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by

manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

A. Pack security windows in wood crates for shipment. Crate glazing separate from
frames unless factory glazed.
B. Protect security glazing and glazing materials according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Prevent damage from condensation, temperature changes, direct
exposure to sun, or other causes.
C. Label security window packaging with drawing designation.
D. Store crated security windows on raised blocks to prevent moisture damage.

before fabrication.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace security windows that fail
in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
a. Structural failures including deflections exceeding 1/4 inch.

b. Failure of welds.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering and use.
2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Attack Resistance: Provide units identical to those tested for compliance with
requirements indicated, and as follows:
1. Forced Entry and Ballistics: Provide laminated security glass meeting one of the
following:
a. ASTM F3561, Class 2, including forced entry and ballistics

b. ASTM F1233 Certified Class 1.4 for 20 minutes and Ballistics Resistance,
UL 752: Level 1 in accordance with UL 752
2.2 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design, Laminated Security Glass, Glass Type 2A:

1. For ASTM F1233 and UL 752 compliant Glass: Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide tested glazing assembly similar to School Safe Premium
Ballistic Glazing by Ballistic Glass & Armor Solutions LLC. Mount in steel
reinforced aluminum frame products
2. For ASTM F3561 compliant Glass: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide tested glazing assembly consisting of two 3 mm thick glass lites with
0.060 inch thick Trosifol PVB interlayer by Kuraray. Mount in steel reinforced
aluminum frame products
B. Configuration: Fixed-glazed panel.
C. Glass: Laminated glass and Low-E tempered glass as specified in Section 08 80 00
1. Interior, Security Glass Type 2A with Cross Hatch: Nominal 9/16 inch. Print cross
hatch on interlayer.
2. At Exterior:
a. Glass Type 8-2A Insulated Glass Unit: Nominal 9/16 inch ballistic-rated
glass type 2A security glass at inboard lite, ½ inch air space, and 6 mm
tempered glass, Glass Type 4A, with Low-E coating on #2 surface at
outboard lite.
D. Framing: Fabricate perimeter framing, mullions, and glazing stops from steel
reinforced aluminum, similar to storefront system specified in Section 08 41 13.
1. Profile: Manufacturer's standard, with minimum face dimension indicated.
a. Minimum Face Dimension: Nominal 2 1/2 inches
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate security windows to provide a complete system for assembly of

components and anchorage of window units.
1. Provide units that are reglazable from the secure side without dismantling the
attack side of framing.
2. Prepare security windows for field glazing. Preglaze doors at the factory.
B. Framing: Miter or cope corners the full depth of framing; weld and dress smooth.
1. Fabricate framing with manufacturer's standard, internal opaque armoring in

thicknesses required for security windows to comply with ballistics-resistance
performance indicated.
C. Glazing Stops: Finish glazing stops to match security window framing.
1. Attack-Side (Exterior) Glazing Stops: Welded or integral to framing.

2. Secure-Side (Interior) Glazing Stops: Removable, coordinated with glazing
indicated.

D. Welding: Weld components to comply with referenced AWS standard. To greatest

extent possible, weld before finishing and in concealed locations to minimize distortion
or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed
surfaces by descaling or grinding.
E. Metal Protection: Separate dissimilar metals to protect against galvanic action by

painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by
manufacturer for this purpose.
F. Factory-cut openings in glazing for speaking apertures.
finishes.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

1. Color: Black to match storefront specified in Section 08 41 13.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Glazing Strips and Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable

components.
1. Compression Type: Molded EPDM or neoprene gaskets complying with

ASTM D2000, Designations 2BC415 to 3BC620; molded PVC gaskets complying
with ASTM D2287; or molded, expanded EPDM or neoprene gaskets complying
with ASTM C509, Grade 4.
2. Color: Black
B. Miscellaneous Glazing Materials: Provide material, size, and shape complying with
requirements of glass manufacturers and with a proven record of compatibility with
surfaces contacted in installation.
1. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket

manufacturer.
2. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85,
plus or minus 5.
3. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer
hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for
installation indicated.

4. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral

movement (side walking).
C. Anchors, Clips, and Window Accessories: Stainless steel; hot-dip, zinc-coated steel or
iron, complying with ASTM B633; provide sufficient strength to withstand design
pressures indicated.
D. Sealants: For sealants required within fabricated security windows, provide type
recommended by manufacturer for joint size and movement. Sealant remains
permanently elastic, nonshrinking, and nonmigrating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
security windows.
B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations of
security window connections before security window installation.
C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to

performance of security windows.
D. For factory-installed glazing materials whose orientation (secure or attack side) is

critical for performance, verify installation orientation.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other security
window anchors whose installation is specified in other Sections.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where

necessary for securing security windows to in-place construction. Include threaded
fasteners for inserts, security fasteners, and other connectors.
1. Install an attached or integral flange to secure side of security windows extending

over rough-in opening gap so that gap has same ballistics-resistance
performance as security window.
B. Glass and Glazing: Install in accordance with Section 08 80 00 “Glazing.”
C. Removable Glazing Stops and Trim: Fasten components with security fasteners.

D. Fasteners: Install security windows using fasteners recommended by manufacturer

with head style appropriate for installation requirements, strength, and finish of
adjacent materials. Provide stainless steel fasteners in stainless steel materials.
E. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect against
galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape
recommended in writing by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will
contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces
with bituminous paint.
A. Inspect installed products to verify compliance with requirements. Prepare inspection

reports and indicate compliance with and deviations from the Contract Documents.
B. Perform additional inspections to determine compliance of replaced or additional work.

Prepare inspection reports.
C. Prepare field quality-control certification that states installed products and their
installation comply with requirements in the Contract Documents.
A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels.
B. Clean surfaces promptly after installation of security windows. Take care to avoid
damaging the finish. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other
substances.
C. Wash security glazing on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date
scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash security
glazing as recommended in writing by security glazing manufacturer.
D. Provide temporary protection to ensure that security windows are without damage at
E. Protect security glazing from contact with contaminating substances resulting from
construction operations, including weld splatter. Examine security glazing surfaces
adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals
during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline
deposits, or stains.
1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do contact with security

glazing, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by security
glazing manufacturer. Remove and replace security glazing that cannot be
cleaned without damage.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following:
1. Swinging doors.
2. Sliding doors.
3. Other doors to the extent indicated.
B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
1. Mechanical door hardware.

2. Electromechanical door hardware.
3. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections.
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”.

2. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”.
3. Division 08 Section “Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts”.
4. Division 28 Section “Access Control Hardware Devices”.
D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.

2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code.
3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
6. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies.
7. State Building Codes, Local Amendments.
E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry
standards as applicable. Any undated reference to a standard shall be interpreted as referring to
the latest edition of that standard:
1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series.

2. UL10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
3. ANSI/UL 294 - Access Control System Units.
4. UL 305 - Panic Hardware.
Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 1
5. ANSI/UL 437- Key Locks.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and
finishes.
B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing,

fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the
final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size,
thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and
Format for the Hardware Schedule."
2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating
complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware
sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow
the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to
resubmission.
3. Content: Include the following information:
a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware
item.
b. Manufacturer of each item.
c. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor
plans and in door and frame schedule.
e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
f. Mounting locations for door hardware.
g. Door and frame sizes and materials.
h. Warranty information for each product.
4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date,
particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other
work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop
Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the
coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.
C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following:
1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring
diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access control
system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed
wiring. Include the following:
a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing

location and interconnection of major system components with respect to
their placement in the respective door openings.
b. Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring
diagrams.
c. Wiring instructions for each electronic component scheduled herein.
2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related sections the voltages and wiring details
required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings.
D. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a
separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic
format. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set
numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the
ordering of permanent cylinders/cores.
E. Informational Submittals:
1. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on
evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified
F. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance

manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required
in Division 01, Closeout Procedures.
A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of

documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this
Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance.
B. Certified Products: Where specified, products must maintain a current listing in the
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA) Certified Products Directory (CPD).
C. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both

standard and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for
this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service
performance.
D. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware

distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and
electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that
indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers
of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff
a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to
consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical
door hardware and keying.
E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section
from a single source unless otherwise indicated.
1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line

by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted.
2. Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical

door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the
referenced standards.
G. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01

Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final
keying schedule document:
1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required.

2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion.
3. Requirements for key control storage and software.
4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software.
5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys.
H. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with

requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of
Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for
receiving, handling, and installing door hardware.
1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct
the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective
products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including
electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include
the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as
required.
2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other
preparatory work performed by other trades.
3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening.
4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials.
5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures
I. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied

to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule.
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door
hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or
accessories at Project site without prior authorization.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware
Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials,

software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package
service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and
other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check
Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and
installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
B. Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of
scheduled electrified door hardware and related access control equipment with required
connections to source power junction boxes, low voltage power supplies, detection and
monitoring hardware, and fire and detection alarm systems.
C. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared,
reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified,
monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field
modifications.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties

specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other
provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or

replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures
1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.

2. Faulty operation of the hardware.
3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.
C. Warranty Period: Unless otherwise indicated, warranty shall be one year from date of
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of door hardware.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door
Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under.
B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and
other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets
at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:
1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for
each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers'
names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.
C. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and
electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in
writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01,
Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their
designated consultants.
2.2 HANGING DEVICES
A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles and other options
as specified in the Door Hardware Sets.
1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity:
2. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inchesThree Hinges: For doors with heights
61 to 90 inchesFour Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inchesFor doors with heights more
than 120 inchesprovide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30 inchesof door height greater than 120
inchesHinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for
door thickness and clearances required:
a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified.

b. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified.
3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated

bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight.
b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated
bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight.
4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following:
a. Non-removable Pins: With the exception of electric through wire hinges,

provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge
pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the all out-swinging
lockable doors.
5. Manufacturers:
a. McKinney (MK) - TA/T4A Series, 5 knuckle.
B. Continuous Geared Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26 Grade 1-600 continuous geared hinge.
with minimum 0.120-inch thick extruded 6063-T6 aluminum alloy hinge leaves and a minimum
overall width of 4 inches. Hinges are non-handed, reversible and fabricated to template screw
locations. Factory trim hinges to suit door height and prepare for electrical cut-outs.
1. Where specified, provide modular continuous geared hinges that ship in two or three
pieces and form a single continuous hinge upon installation.
2. Manufacturers:.
a. Pemko (PE).
C. Floor Closers (Heavy Duty, Offset Hung, Single Acting): Provide ANSI/BHMA A156.4
Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed floor closers available for fire rated openings
up to 3-hour assemblies to accommodate a door width up to 48” and weight up to 450 pounds
with the top pivot included. Floor closers shall be available in non-hold open or selective hold
open with a built-in positive dead stop that prevents they door from swinging beyond the desired
opening degree and shall have separate and independent valves for closing speed, latch speed
and backcheck. Floor closers shall have a 10-year warranty.
1. Provide optional features as specified:
a. Delayed action (non-hold open closers only).

b. Cold weather fluid (not available for closers with delayed action).
c. Sealed closer.
d. Lead lined for use with openings up to 1500 pounds; provided with lead lined
top and bottom pivots.
e. Models that meet ICC/ANSI A117.1 for low opening force requirements.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Norton Rixson (RF) - 27 Series.

b. No Substitution.
D. Floor Closers (Standard Duty, Offset Hung, Single Acting): Provide floor closers available
for fire rated openings up to 3-hour assemblies to accommodate a door width up to 36” and weight
up to 200 pounds with the top pivot included. Floor closers shall have a single valve for adjusting
closing speed with a built-in hydraulic backcheck. Floor closers shall have a 10-year warranty.
a. Models that meet ICC/ANSI A117.1 for low opening force requirements.
2. Manufacturers:

b. No Substitution.
E. Floor Closers (Heavy Duty, Center Hung, Single Acting): ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1
Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed floor closers to accommodate a door width up to 48” and
weight up to 350 pounds standard and 1000 pounds when specified with the top pivot included.
Floors closers shall be available in non-hold open or selective hold open with a built-in positive
dead stop prevents door from swinging beyond the desired opening degree and have separate
and independent valves for closing speed, latch speed and backcheck. Floor closers shall have
a 10-year warranty.

b. Cold weather fluid (not available for closers with delayed action).
c. Sealed closer.
d. Models that meet ICC/ANSI A117.1 for low opening force requirements.
2. Manufacturers:

b. No Substitution.
F. Floor Closers (Heavy Duty, Center Hung, Double Acting): Provide floor closers to
accommodate a door width up to 48” and weight up to 300 pounds standard and 1000 pounds
when specified with the top pivot included. Floor closers shall be available in non-hold open or
automatic hold open with adjustable closing speed valves for each direction of door swing. Floor
closers shall have a 10-year warranty.
a. Cold weather fluid available.

b. Sealed closer.
c. Models available to meet ICC/ANSI A117.1 low opening force requirements.
2. Manufacturers:
a. dormakaba (DO) - BTS80 Series.

b. Norton Rixson (RF) - 40 Series.
c. No Substitution.
G. Floor Closers (Standard Duty, Center Hung, Double Acting): Provide floor closer to
accommodate a door width up to 48” and weight up to 200 pounds with the top pivot included.
Floor closers shall be available in non-hold open or automatic hold open with adjustable closing
speed valves for each direction of door swing. Floor closers shall have a 10-year warranty.

b. Sealed closer.
2. Manufacturers:
a. dormakaba (DO) - BTS80 Series.

b. Norton Rixson (RF) - 30 Series.
c. No Substitution.
H. Floor Closers (Heavy Duty, Independently Hung, Single Acting): Provide floor closers
available for fire rated openings up to 3-hour assemblies to accommodate a door width up to 48”
and weight up to 250 pounds for use on doors independently hung with butt hinges, pocket pivots,
or continuous hinges. Floor closers shall have separate and independent valves for closing speed,
latch speed and backcheck. Floor closers shall have a 10-year warranty.

b. Sealed closer.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Norton Rixson (RF) - F327 Series.

b. No Substitution.
I. Floor Closers (Shallow Depth, Offset Hung, Single Acting): Provide floor closers available
for fire rated openings up to 3-hour assemblies to accommodate a door width up to 48” and weight
up to 250 pounds with the top pivot included. Floor closers shall be available non-hold open or
automatic hold open with separate and independent valves for closing speed, latch speed and
backcheck. Floor closers shall have a 2-year warranty.
2. Manufacturers:

b. No Substitution.
J. Floor Closers (Shallow Depth, Center Hung, Single Acting): Provide floor closers to
accommodate a door width up to 48” and weight up to 250 pounds with the top and pivot included.
Floor closers shall fit within a 2” maximum floor depth and be available non-hold open or automatic
hold open with separate and independent valves for closing speed, latch speed and backcheck.
Floor closers shall have a 2-year warranty.
2. Manufacturers:

b. No Substitution.
K. Floor Closers (Shallow Depth, Center Hung, Double Acting): Provide floor closers to
accommodate a door width up to 48” and weight up to 250 pounds with the top and pivot included.
Floor closers shall fit within a 2” maximum floor depth and be available non-hold open or automatic
hold open with separate and independent valves for closing speed, latch speed and backcheck.
Floor closers shall have a 2-year warranty.
2. Manufacturers:

b. No Substitution.
L. Floor Closers (Shallow Depth, Independently Hung, Single Acting): Provide floor closers
and weight up to 250 pounds for use on doors independently hung with butt hinges, pocket pivots,
or continuous hinges. Floor closers shall fit within a 2” maximum floor depth and have separate
and independent valves for closing speed, latch speed and backcheck. Floor closers shall have
a 2-year warranty.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Norton Rixson (RF) - F53 Series.

b. No Substitution.
M. Security Floor Closers (Heavy Duty, Offset Hung, Single Acting): Provide floor closers
and weight up to 650 pounds with the top pivot included. Floor closers shall be sealed standard
with a heavy-duty forged arm, adjustable closing speed and be furnished standard with Torx
screws. Floor closers shall have a 10-year warranty.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Norton Rixson (RF) - SEC27-180 Series.

b. No Substitution.
2.3 POWER TRANSFER DEVICES
A. Electrified Quick Connect Transfer Hinges: Provide electrified transfer hinges with
Molex™ standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to
accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets with a 1-year
warranty. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric
locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable.
1. Manufacturers:
a. McKinney (MK) - QC (# wires) Option.
B. Concealed Quick Connect Electric Power Transfers: Provide concealed wiring pathway
housing mortised into the door and frame for low voltage electrified door hardware. Furnish with
Molex™ standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to
accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Connectors plug
directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power
supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Pemko (PE) - EL-CEPT Series.

b. Securitron (SU) - EL-CEPT Series.
C. Electric Door Wire Harnesses: Provide electric/data transfer wiring harnesses with
standardized plug connectors to accommodate up to twelve (12) wires. Connectors plug directly
to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies.
Provide sufficient number and type of concealed wires to accommodate electric function of
specified hardware. Provide a connector for through-door electronic locking devices and from
hinge to junction box above the opening. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. Determine the
length required for each electrified hardware component for the door type, size and construction,
minimum of two per electrified opening.
1. Provide one each of the following tools as part of the base bid contract:
a. McKinney (MK) - Electrical Connecting Kit: QC-R001.

b. McKinney (MK) - Connector Hand Tool: QC-R003.
2. Manufacturers:
a. McKinney (MK) - QC-C Series.
D. Provide mortar guard enclosure on steel frames installed at masonry openings for each
electrical hinge specified.
2.4 DOOR OPERATING TRIM
A. Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: Provide products conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 and
A156.16, Grade 1.
1. Flush bolts to be furnished with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt retraction device
location approximately six feet from the floor.
2. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts.
3. Surface bolts to be minimum 8” in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors and U.L.
listed for windstorm components where applicable.
4. Provide related accessories (mounting brackets, strikes, coordinators, etc.) as required
for appropriate installation and operation.
5. Manufacturers:
a. Rockwood (RO).
B. Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 door pushes and pull units of type and
design specified in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as
required where conflicting hardware dictates.
1. Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inchthick, size as indicated in hardware sets,with beveled
edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated.
2. Door Pull and Push Bar Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware
sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door unless otherwise indicated.
3. Offset Pull Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum
clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door and offset of 90 degrees unless otherwise indicated.
4. Pulls, where applicable, shall be provided with a 10” clearance from the finished floor on
the push side to accommodate wheelchair accessibility.
5. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware
Sets.
6. Manufacturers:
a. Rockwood (RO).
2.5 CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing

secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy.
B. Cylinder Types: Original manufacturer cylinders able to supply the following cylinder
formats and types:
1. Threaded mortise cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application.
2. Rim cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring.
3. Bored or cylindrical lock cylinders with tailpieces as required to suit locks.
4. Tubular deadlocks and other auxiliary locks.
5. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be
flush and be free spinning with matching finishes.
6. Keyway: Match Facility Restricted Keyway.
C. Large Format Interchangeable Cores: Provide removable cores (LFIC) as specified, core
insert, removable by use of a special key, and for use with only the core manufacturer's cylinder
and door hardware.
D. Patented Cylinders: ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD)

listed cylinders employing a utility patented and restricted keyway requiring the use of a patented
key. Cylinders are to be protected from unauthorized manufacture and distribution by
manufacturer’s United States patents. Cylinders are to be factory keyed with owner having the
ability for on-site original key cutting.
1. Patented key systems shall not be established with products that have an expired patent.
Expired systems shall only be specified and supplied to support existing systems.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Medeco (MC) - X4.

b. No Substitution.
E. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed.
1. Supplier shall conduct a "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system
instructions and requirements.
2. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control
number as directed by Owner.
3. Existing System: Field verify and key cylinders to match Owner's existing system.
F. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys:
1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Three (3).

2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5).
3. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10).
4. Construction Control Keys (where required): Two (2).
5. Permanent Control Keys (where required): Two (2).
G. Construction Keying: Provide temporary keyed construction cores.
H. Key Registration List (Bitting List):
1. Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing
into key control software.
2. Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by the Owner.
2.6 KEY CONTROL
A. Key Control Software: Provide software that offers solutions for master key system design
and management, key, key ring, and item issuance, cylinder and core pinning, personal records
and inventories and building, door, and floor plans. Software shall come with the option for
additional services that provide custom data integration, on-site and virtual training, consulting,
technical support, and custom development.
1. Key Control: System shall manage all master key systems, keys, key rings, key holders
and key requests. It shall provide total key control showing outstanding keys, overdue keys (with
automatic notifications), key symbols, bittings, keyways, etc. and the ability to include all systems
(multiple key manufacturers supported) and buildings in one database.
2. Master Keying: Software shall provide a comprehensive master key system generator
compatible with multiplex systems (key sections, keyways, angles) along with a core pinning
calculator. Master keying feature shall have automatic configurable key numbering and
connection with key cutting machines.
3. Facility Management: Software shall reference every building, floor, and door of your
facilities while identifying the operating keys of every door and generate control reports.
4. Available options shall include.
a. Web Interface: Web portal option for key requests and approvals. Web users
shall have restricted access, according to their privileges.
b. Mobile Application for Key Deliveries: Display the list of keys issued, key
policy, and capture the signature in the field.
5. Manufacturers:
a. Medeco (MC) - Simple K.

b. No Substitution.
B. Key Control Cabinet: Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags
with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent
markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall have expansion capacity of 150%
of the number of locks required for the project.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Lund Equipment (LU).

b. MMF Industries (MM).
c. Telkee (TK).
2.7 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES
A. Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000,

Operational Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed.
1. Locks shall meet or exceed the requirements of ANSI/BHMA A156.2 Series 4000, Grade
1 with all standard trims, as follows:
a. Cycle Test: ANSI/BHMA A156.2 Grade 1 requirements with no lever sag.

b. Abusive Locked Lever Torque: Exceed 3,100 in-lb with no entry; lock to
maintain egress functionality in compliance with BHMA certification
requirements.
c. Offset Lever Pull: Exceed 1,600 lbs with no entry (8 times ANSI/BHMA
A156.2 requirements).
d. Latch Retraction with Preload: Exceed 100 lb preload while maintaining
ANSI/BHMA requirements for operation in warped doors (2 times
ANSI/BHMA A156.2 requirements).
2. Heavy duty cylindrical locks shall have a seven-year warranty.
3. Vertical Impact: Exceed 100 vertical impacts (20 times ANSI/BHMA A156.2 requirements).
4. Furnish with solid cast levers, standard 2 3/4” backset, and 1/2" (3/4" at rated paired
openings) throw brass or stainless steel latchbolt.
5. Locks are to be non-handed and fully field reversible.
6. Extended cycle test: Locks to have been cycle tested in ordinance with ANSI/BHMA 156.2
requirements to 20 million cycles or greater.
7. Manufacturers:
a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 10X Line.

b. No Substitution.
2.8 ELECTROMECHANICAL LOCKING DEVICES
A. Electromechanical Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): Subject to same

compliance standards and requirements as mechanical cylindrical locksets, electrified locksets to
be of type and design as specified below.
1. Electrified Lock Options: Where indicated in the Hardware Sets, provide electrified options
including: outside door lock/unlock trim control and request-to-exit signaling. Unless otherwise
indicated, provide electrified locksets standard as fail secure.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 10G70/71 Series.

b. No Substitution.
2.9 STAND ALONE ACCESS CONTROL LOCKING DEVICES
A. Stand Alone Locksets: ANSI A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1 locking mechanism complete
with integrated touchscreen or keypad as specified for access and programming. Voice-guided
programming with 12-digit PIN code selection and up to 1000 user option. Locks to accept
standard, small format interchangeable core, security and patented cylinders. Battery-operated,
with low power indicator, or hard-wired (9 Volt external power supply) option.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Yale Commercial (YA) - nexTouch Series.

b. No Substitution.
2.10 AUXILIARY LOCKS
A. Mortise Deadlocks, Small Case: ANSI/BHMA A156.36, Grade 1, small case mortise type
deadlocks constructed of heavy gauge wrought corrosion resistant steel. Steel or stainless steel
bolts with a 1" throw and hardened steel roller pins. Deadlocks to be products of the same source
manufacturer and keyway as other specified locksets.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 4870 Series.

b. No Substitution.
2.11 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES
A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt,
with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise
indicated, and as follows:
1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by

manufacturer.
2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.
3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for
aluminum framing.
4. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for
rescue hardware applications.
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13.

2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2.
3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.36.
4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.
2.12 ELECTRIC STRIKES
A. Standard Electric Strikes: Electric strikes conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.31, Grade 1,

for use on non-rated or fire rated openings. Strikes shall be of stainless steel construction tested
to a minimum of 1500 pounds of static strength and 70 foot-pounds of dynamic strength with a
minimum endurance of 1 million operating cycles. Provide strikes with 12 or 24 VDC capability,
fail-secure unless otherwise specified. Where specified provide latchbolt and latchbolt strike
monitoring indicating both the position of the latchbolt and locked condition of the strike.
1. Manufacturers:
a. HES (HS) - 1500/1600 Series.
B. Provide electric strikes with in-line power controller and surge suppressor by the same
manufacturer as the strike with the combined products having a five year warranty.
2.13 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES
A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following
criteria:
1. Exit devices shall have a five-year warranty.
2. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed
and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as required by
manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the Hardware Sets.
3. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with NFPA
80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the proper fasteners
for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for
specific requirements.
4. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the
pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on devices
where specified in Hardware Sets.
5. Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized dogging
of the push bar. The addition of filler strips is required in any case where the door light extends
behind the device as in a full glass configuration.
6. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy
duty escutcheon trim with threaded studs for thru-bolts.
a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and

designs to match that of the specified locksets.
b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide a cylinder (Rim or
Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets.
7. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Where surface or concealed vertical rod exit devices are used
at interior openings, provide as less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated. Provide dust
proof strikes where thermal pins are required to project into the floor.
8. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in

Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2” wide stiles.
9. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar.
10. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application.
11. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets.
B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 Certified
Products Directory (CPD) listed panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions
specified in the Hardware Sets. Exit device latch to be stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlock
feature.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ED4000 / ED5000 Series.

b. No Substitution.
C. Security Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 Certified
Products Directory (CPD) listed rim panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions
specified in the Hardware Sets. Exit device latch to be constructed of high grade, heat treated,
corrosion resistant nickel steel alloy, and have a full 3/4" throw projection with slide action positive
deadlocking.
1. Static Load Force Resistance: Minimum 3000 lbs certified independent tested.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ED4000S / ED5000S Series.

b. No Substitution.
D. Tube Steel Removable Mullions: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 removable steel mullions with
malleable-iron top and bottom retainers and a primed paint finish.
1. At openings designed for severe wind load conditions due to hurricanes or tornadoes,
provide manufacturer’s certified mullion and accessories to meet applicable state and local
windstorm codes.
2. Provide keyed removable feature where specified in the Hardware Sets.
3. Provide stabilizers and mounting brackets as required.
4. Provide electrical quick connection wiring options as specified in the hardware sets.
5. Manufacturers:
a. Same as exit device manufacturer.
2.14 ELECTROMECHANICAL EXIT DEVICES
A. Electromechanical Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1
Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed panic and fire exit hardware devices subject to same
compliance standards and requirements as mechanical exit devices. Electrified exit devices to be
of type and design as specified below and in the hardware sets.
1. Energy Efficient Design: Provide devices which have a holding current draw of 15mA
maximum, and can operate on either 12 or 24 volts. Locks are to be field configurable for fail safe
or fail secure operation.
2. Where conventional power supplies are not sufficient, include any specific controllers
required to provide the proper inrush current.
3. Motorized Electric Latch Retraction: Devices with an electric latch retraction feature must
use motors which have a maximum current draw of 600mA. Solenoid driven latch retraction is not
acceptable.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ED5000 Series.

b. No Substitution.
2.15 DOOR CLOSERS
A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the
same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to
be non-handed with full sized covers.
2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L.
listed for use of fire rated doors.
3. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door
closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where
closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the Americans with Disabilities Act,
provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1.
4. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in
Hardware Sets.
5. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install
closers on door for optimum aesthetics.
6. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special
mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation. Provide through-
bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets.
B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Large Body Cast Iron): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1
Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete
spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size,
frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron body
construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and
latch speed control.
1. Large body cast iron surface mounted door closers shall have a 30-year warranty.
2. Manufacturers:

b. No Substitution.
C. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Cam Action): ANSI/BHMA 156.4, Grade 1 Certified
Products Directory (CPD) listed surface mounted, high efficiency door closers with complete
frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be of the cam and roller design, one piece cast
aluminum silicon alloy body with adjustable backcheck and independently controlled valves for
closing sweep and latch speed.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Norton Rixson (NO) - 2800ST Series.

b. No Substitution.
D. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Commercial Duty): ANSI/BHMA 156.4, Grade 1 Certified
Products Directory (CPD) listed surface mounted, institutional grade door closers with complete
frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or
aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck, closing sweep, and latch speed
control valves. Provide non-handed units standard.
1. Manufacturers:

b. No Substitution.
2.16 SURFACE MOUNTED CLOSER HOLDERS
A. Electromagnetic Door Holders: ANSI A156.15 electromagnetic door holder/releases with

a minimum 20 to 40 pounds holding power and single coil construction able to
accommodate.12VDC, 24VAC, 24VDC and 120VAC. Coils to be independently wound,
employing an integral fuse and armatures to include a positive release button.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Norton Rixson (RF) - 980/990 Series.

b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 1560 Series.
2.17 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM
A. Door Protective Trim
1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the
Hardware Sets.
2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door
width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more
than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as
required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets.
3. Where plates are applied to fire rated doors with the top of the plate more than 16” above
the bottom of the door, provide plates complying with NFPA 80. Consult manufacturer’s catalog
and template book for specific requirements for size and applications.
4. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), fabricated
from the following:
a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inchthick.
5. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in

the Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes.
6. Manufacturers:
a. Rockwood (RO).
2.18 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the
Hardware Sets.
B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 door stops and wall bumpers.
Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor
or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they
will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops
and holders.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Rockwood (RO).
C. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.8, Grade 1 Certified Products
Directory (CPD) listed overhead stops and holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated
in Hardware Sets. Track, slide, arm and jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and
shock absorber spring of heavy tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting
brackets as required for proper operation and function.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Norton Rixson (RF).

b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA).
2.19 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS
A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as

specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior
doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior
applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated.
B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and
labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke
control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.
1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings.
C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings
indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C.
1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure
Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and NPFA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door
Assemblies.
D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and
inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated.
E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are
easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
F. Manufacturers:
1. Pemko (PE).
2.20 ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES
A. Push-Button Switches: Industrial grade momentary or alternate contact, back-lighted push

buttons with stainless-steel switch enclosures. 12/24 VDC bi-color illumination suitable for either
flush or surface mounting.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Alarm Controls (AK) - TS Series.

b. Securitron (SU) - PB Series.
B. Switching Power Supplies: Provide power supplies with either single or dual voltage
configurations at 12 or 24VDC. Power supplies shall have battery backup function with an
integrated battery charging circuit and shall provide capability for power distribution, direct lock
control and Fire Alarm Interface (FAI) through add on modules. Power supplies shall be
expandable up to 16 individually protected outputs. Output modules shall provide individually
protected, continuous outputs and/or individually protected, relay controlled outputs.
1. Provide the least number of units, at the appropriate amperage level, sufficient to exceed
the required total draw for the specified electrified hardware and access control equipment.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Securitron (SU) - AQD Series.
2.21 FABRICATION
A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates

generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to
manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.
2.22 FINISHES
A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware
finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes
indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.
B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition,
hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than
specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware
C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and
other conditions affecting performance.
B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types,
drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been
resolved in writing.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.
B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control
equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications.
1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and
adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices;
closing devices; and seals.
B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable
publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
2. DHI TDH-007-20: Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware.
3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1
"Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."
4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is
located.
C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and
written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into
surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and
reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections.
Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant
complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet
installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the
work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.
A. Field Inspection (Punch Report): Reference Division 01 Sections “Closeout Procedures”.

Produce project punch report for each installed door opening indicating compliance with approved
submittals and verification hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted. Include list of
items to be completed and corrected, indicating the reasons or deficiencies causing the Work to
be incomplete or rejected.
1. Organization of List: Include separate Door Opening and Deficiencies and Corrective
Action Lists organized by Mark, Opening Remarks and Comments, and related Opening Images
and Video Recordings.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door
to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and
ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect
exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware
at the latest possible time frame.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and
maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner
occupancy.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and
electromechanical door hardware.
3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS
A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect.
They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule.
Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the
architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a
hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper
application and functionality.
1. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors, or for each single door.
2. The supplier is responsible for handing and sizing all products.
3. Where multiple options for a piece of hardware are given in a single line item, the supplier
shall provide the appropriate application for the opening.
4. At existing openings with new hardware the supplier shall field inspect existing conditions
prior to the submittal stage to verify the specified hardware will work as required. Provide alternate
solutions and proposals as needed.
B. Manufacturer’s Abbreviations:
1. MK - McKinney
2. PE - Pemko
3. RO - Rockwood
4. RU - Corbin Russwin
5. YA - Yale
6. SA - SARGENT
7. AT - Accurate Lock and Hardware
8. RS - RITE Slide
9. MC - Medeco
10. HS - HES
11. RF - Rixson
12. NO - Norton
13. OT - Other
14. AK - Alarm Controls
15. SU - Securitron
Hardware Sets
Set: 1.0
Doors: V1000.1
2 Continuous Hinge CFMXXSLF-HD1 EL-CEPTx32D PE

1 Mullion CR90X(A) RU
ED5200S EO M91 M92 MELR

Rim Exit Device, Exit Only,
1 (M52 w/cylinder and core at non- 630 RU
MELR, RX
rated)
ED5200S K157ET M91 M92
Rim Exit Device, Nightlatch,
1 MELR (M52 w/cylinder and core at 630 RU
MELR, RX
non-rated)
1 Rim Cylinder 64 3X Length as Required US32D SA
322401N Keyed into Existing
1 Permanent Core 26 MC
System
2 Door Pull BF157 Mtg-Type 12XHD US32D RO
2 Surface Closer TB 281 CPS EN SA
1 Threshold 171A Pemkote MSES25SS PE
1 Rain Guard 346C TKSP PE
1 Perimeter Gasketing By Door and Frame Manufacturer OT
1 Mullion Gasketing 5110BL PE
2 Sweep 315CN TKSP PE
2 ElectroLynx Harness QC-CXXX Length as Required MK
2 ElectroLynx Harness QC-C1500P MK
2 Position Switch DPS SU
1 Power Supply AQD SU
1 Card Reader Furnished by Security Contractor OT
Notes: Coordinate hardware with Aluminum Door and Frame manufacturer. Provide special
templates, brackets, spacers, drop plates and fasteners as required.
Door normally closed and locked.

Entry by valid credential or manual key override.
Always free egress.
Upon activation of the fire alarm or loss of power, door remains locked.
Set: 2.0
Doors: C1200.6, V1002.1, V1004.1, V1004.4, V1005.2
1 Continuous Hinge CFMXXSLF-HD1 PE

1 Key Removable Mullion CR90XBKM RU
ED5200S(A) EO (M52 w/cylinder
1 Rim Exit Device, Exit Only 630 RU
and core at non-rated)
ED5200S K157ET M91 M92
MELR, RX
non-rated)
64 4X Length and Cam as
1 Mortise Cylinder US32D SA
Required

System

Always free egress.
Set: 3.0
Doors: V1004.3, V1005.1

Set: 3.1
Doors: C1200.7

ED5200S(A) TH950ET
2 Rim Exit Device, Dummy SPAR05579 (M52 w/cylinder and 630 RU
core at non-rated)
2 Surface Closer TB 281 OTB EN SA
Set: 4.0
Doors: C1200.5, V1000.2

Required
System
Set: 4.1
Doors: C1000.10, C1000.4

ED5200S(A) TH950ET
core at non-rated)
Required
System
2 Surface Closer TB 281 OTB EN SA
1 Threshold 2005AT MSES25SS PE
Set: 4.2

MELR, RX
rated)
Required
System

Set: 5.0
Doors: 1019.2

ED5200S(A) K157ET (M52
1 Rim Exit Device, Nightlatch 630 RU
w/cylinder and core at non-rated)
System
Set: 5.1
Doors: C1000.3, C1000.9, C1200.8

ED5200S(A) TH950ET
core at non-rated)
ED5200S TH957ET SPAR05579
1 Rim Exit Device, Nightlatch (M52 w/cylinder and core at non- 630 RU
rated)

System
2 Cam Action Surface Closer 2800ST SN-134 689 NO
1 Threshold 2005AT MSES25SS PE
Set: 6.0
Doors: 1004.4

ED5200S(A) K157ET (M52
System
Set: 7.0
Doors: V1000.3

MELR, RX
rated)
ED5200S K157ET M91 M92

MELR, RX
non-rated)
System

Always free egress.
Set: 8.0
Doors: V1000.4

MELR, RX
rated)
Required
System
Set: 9.0
Doors: V1002.2, V1004.2, V1005.3, V1005.4

2 Dummy Bar, Exit Only ED5000DB EO 630 RU
Set: 10.0
Doors: 1020.1

1 Fail Secure Lock RX WBS 28 64 10G71 LL US26D SA
System
1 Door Release TS-18 AK

Entry by valid credential, remote release or manual key override.
Always free egress.
Set: 11.0
Doors: 1017.4
2 Continuous Hinge CFMXXHD1 EL-CEPTx32D PE

MELR, RX
rated)
ED5200S K157ET M91 M92
MELR, RX
non-rated)
Required
System
1 Gasketing 2891AS TKSP8 PE
1 Astragal Set 303AS TKSP PE
Notes: Door normally closed and locked.

Always free egress.
Set: 12.0
Doors: 1017.3
2 Continuous Hinge CFMXXHD1 PE

ED5200S(A) K157ET (M52

System
Notes:
Set: 13.0
Doors: 1013

ED5200S(A) K157ET (M52
Required
System
Notes:
Set: 14.0
Doors: 1004.3

ED5200S K157ET M91 M92
MELR, RX
non-rated)
System
Notes: Access control locking device to be furnished by Authorized Channel Partner (ACP) and
installed by Certified Integrator (CI).

Always free egress.
Set: 15.0
Doors: 1005.3

ED5200S K157ET M91 M92
MELR, RX
non-rated)
System
1 Surface Closer TB 281 CPSH EN SA
1 Kick Plate K1050 10" CSK BEV US32D RO

1 Viewer 622 DCRM RO

Always free egress.
Provide doorbell at door 1005N.
Set: 16.0

ED5200S(A) K157ET (M52
System
Set: 16.1
Doors: 1008

1 Storeroom/Closet Lock WBS 28 64 10G04 LL US26D SA
System

1 Latch Protector 320CL US32D RO
Set: 16.2

System
Set: 17.0
Doors: 1007

System

Always free egress.
Set: 18.0
Doors: 1004.2, 1019.1

ED5200S(A) N955ET (M52
2 Rim Exit Device, Classroom 630 RU
Required
System
2 Closer TB 1431 CPS EN SA
Set: 19.0
Doors: 2025

1 Entry/Office Lock WBS 28 64 10G05 LL US26D SA
System
1 Door Closer TB 1431 O/P10 EN SA
1 Wall Stop 406/409/441H US32D RO
Set: 20.0
Doors: 1017A.1
TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP as

6 Hinge, Full Mortise US26D MK
Required)
2 Manual Flush Bolt 555 US26D RO
1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO
System
1 Gasketing S88BL PE
1 Astragal S772BL PE
Set: 21.0
Doors: 1017.1
TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP as

Required)
ED5200S(A) N955ET (M52
Required
System
1 Acoustic Seal Set PEMKOSTCSET-1A BL PE
Notes: All hardware (hinges, locksets, backsets, closer arms, seals, thickness, etc.) to be
coordinated with STC assembly manufacturer.
Set: 22.0
Doors: C1000.2
T4A3786 5" x 4-1/2" (NRP as

6 Hinge, Full Mortise, Hvy Wt US26D MK
Required)
ED5470(B) EO M55 (M52
1 Surface Vert Rod Exit, Exit Only 630 RU
ED5470(B) N955ET M55 (M52
1 Surface Vert Rod Exit, Classroom 630 RU
System
2 Electromagnetic Holder 994M 689 RF
1 Astragal S772BL PE
Set: 23.0
Doors: 1002A, 1003
TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP as

Required)
2 Manual Flush Bolt 555 US26D RO
1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO
System
2 Silencer 608 RO
Set: 24.0
Doors: C0009, C1000.1
T4A3786 5" x 4-1/2" (NRP as

Required)
ED5470(B) EO M55 (M52
1 Surface Vert Rod Exit, Exit Only 630 RU
ED5470(B) N955ET M55 (M52
1 Surface Vert Rod Exit, Classroom 630 RU
System
2 Electromagnetic Holder 994M 689 RF
2 Silencer 608 RO
Set: 25.0
TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP as

Required)
1 Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 QC 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK
System
3 Silencer 608 RO


Always free egress.
Set: 26.0
Doors: 1018
TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP as

Required)
1 Access Control Mort Lock AUR NTM627-NR LC 626 YA
Required
System

Always free egress.
Upon loss of battery power, door remains locked.
Set: 27.0
Doors: 1001, 1010, 1019D, 1024, 1024A, 1028, 1039, 1100, 1114A, 1122, 1204A, 1208, 1211,
1212, 2012, 2013A, 2014, 2021, 2021A, 2026, 2103, 2109, 2114A
TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP as

Required)
System
3 Silencer 608 RO
Set: 28.0
Doors: 1017B
T4A3786 5" x 4-1/2" (NRP as

Required)
System
3 Silencer 608 RO
Set: 29.0
Doors: 1006, 1021A, 1108.3, 1108.4, 1109.3, 1109.4, 1112A, 1112B, 1116.3, 1116.4, 1118A,
1201.1, 1201.2, 1216.3, 1216.4, 2010A
TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP as

Required)
System
3 Silencer 608 RO
Set: 30.0
Doors: 1014A
TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP as

Required)
System
1 Surf Overhead Stop 9-X36 (w/Bracket as required) 630 RF
3 Silencer 608 RO
Set: 31.0
Doors: 1020.3, 1021.1, 1022.1, 1102, 1105, 1106, 1107, 1108, 1109, 1110, 1111, 1112, 1113,
1115, 1116, 1117, 1118, 1123, 1124, 1125, 1126, 1127, 1128, 1129, 1131, 1201, 1202, 1203,
1205, 1206, 1207, 1213, 1214, 1215, 1216, 1217, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007,
2008, 2009, 2010, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2022, 2023, 2100, 2101, 2102, 2104, 2105, 2110, 2111,
2112, 2113, 2115, 2116, 2117, C1029
TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP as

Required)
System
3 Silencer 608 RO
Set: 31.1
Doors: 1014, 1101.1, 1104
TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP as

Required)
System
Set: 32.0
Doors: 1130
TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP as

Required)
System
Set: 33.0
Doors: 1011, 1017C, 1019A, 1020.2, 1022.2, 1023, 1027, 1030, 1031, 1032, 1033, 1034,
1035, 1036, 1037, 1038
TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP as

Required)
System
3 Silencer 608 RO
Set: 34.0
Doors: 1019C, 1114, 1122A, 1204, 2013, 2114
TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP as

Required)
ED5200S(A) N959ET (M52
1 Rim Exit Device, Storeroom 630 RU
System
3 Silencer 608 RO
Set: 35.0
Doors: 1022A
TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP as

Required)
ED5200S(A) N959ET (M52
1 Rim Exit Device, Storeroom 630 RU
System

3 Silencer 608 RO
Set: 36.0
Doors: 1001.1
T4A3786 5" x 4-1/2" (NRP as

Required)
ED5200S(A) N955ET (M52
System
3 Silencer 608 RO
Set: 37.0
TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP as

Required)
1 Communicating Lock WBS 28 64 10G30 LL US26D SA
System
3 Silencer 608 RO
Set: 38.0
Doors: 1005.1, 1005.2
TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP as

Required)
1 Classroom Lock WBS 28 64 10G37 LL US26D SA
System
1 Door Closer TB 1431 CPSH EN SA
3 Silencer 608 RO
Set: 39.0
Doors: 1103.1, 1103.2
TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP as

Required)
1 Dormitory/Exit Lock V44 64 8225 LNL US26D SA
System
3 Silencer 608 RO
Set: 40.0
Doors: 1009
TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP as

Required)
1 Privacy Lock WBS 28 10U65 LL US26D SA
3 Silencer 608 RO
Set: 41.0
Doors: 1019B, 1021B
TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP as

Required)
1 Privacy Lock WBS 28 10U65 LL US26D SA
3 Silencer 608 RO
Set: 42.0
Doors: 1108.1, 1108.2, 1109.1, 1109.2, 1116.1, 1116.2, 1118B, 1201.3, 1201.4, 1216.1,
1216.2
TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP as

Required)
1 Privacy Lock V40 8265 LNL US26D SA
3 Silencer 608 RO
Set: 43.0
Doors: 1102.1, 1102.2
TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP as

Required)
1 Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 QC 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" US26D MK
1 Fail Safe Lock RX WBS 28 64 10G70 LL US26D SA
System
3 Silencer 608 RO

Always free egress.
Upon loss of power, door is unlocked.
Set: 44.0
Doors: 1025, 1026, 1120, 2019, 2106
TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP as

Required)
1 Access Control Mort Lock AUR NTM627-NR LC 626 YA
Required
System
3 Silencer 608 RO

Always free egress.
Upon loss of battery power, door remains locked.
Set: 45.0
Doors: 1017D, 1017E
TA2714 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" (NRP as

Required)
1 Classroom Deadlock 64 4877 US26D SA
System
1 Push Plate 70C US32D RO
1 Pull Plate 111x70C US32D RO
3 Silencer 608 RO
Set: 46.0
Doors: 1103.3, 1103.4
1 Privacy Lock S9540 202 630 RS

1 Balance of Hardware By Rite Slide OT
Set: 47.0
Doors: 1017.2, 1017.5, 1017.6, 1017A.2, 1504.3, C0011.1

Required
System
1 Balance of Hardware By Door Manufacturer OT
Notes: Verify cylinder requirements with door manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 08 80 00
GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Insulated and monolithic glass for windows, doors, borrowed lites, curtain wall, and
storefront framing.
2. Laminated/Security glass.
3. Spandrel glass
4. Security film
5. Fire-rated glazing
6. Glazing sealants and accessories.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association
1. AAMA 800: Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Sealants
B. American National Standard Institute:
1. ANSI Z97.1 - Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety Performance

Specifications and Methods of Test.
1. ASTM C 509 - Specification for Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and

Sealing Material
2. ASTM C 920 - Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
3. ASTM C 1036 - Flat Glass.
4. ASTM C 1048 - Heat Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated
Glass.
5. ASTM C 1087 - Test Method for Determining Compatibility of Liquid-Applied
Sealants with Accessories Used in Structural Glazing Systems.
6. ASTM C 1115 - Specification for Dense Elastomeric Silicone Rubber Gaskets and
Accessories.
7. ASTM C 1281 - Specification for Preformed Tape Sealants for Glazing Applications
8. ASTM C 1376 - Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on
Flat Glass.
9. ASTM E 1300 - Practice for Determining the Minimum Thickness of Annealed
Glass Required to Resist a Specified Load.
10. ASTM E 1996 - Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,
Doors and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in
Hurricanes.
11. ASTM E 2188 - Standard Test Method for Insulating Glass Unit Performance.
Glazing 08 80 00 - 1
12. ASTM E 2189 - Standard Test Method for Testing Resistance to Fogging in
Insulating in Insulating Glass Units.
13. ASTM E 2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and
Evaluation.
D. Code of Federal Regulations
1. 16 CFR 1201: Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials

2. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D-2006: National Volatile Organic Compound Emission
Standards for Architectural Coatings.
E. Glass Association of North America:
1. Engineering Standards Manual.

2. Glazing Manual.
F. Texas Department of Insurance Evaluation Report: For exterior fenestrations.
G. Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance
1. IGMA TB-3001: Guidelines for Sloped Glazing.

2. SIGMA TM-3000: North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass
Units for Commercial and Residential Use
H. Sealed Insulated Glass Manufactures Association:
1. SIGMA TM-3000 - Vertical Glazing Guidelines.
I. Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers:
1. SEI/ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
J. Underwriters Laboratories:
1. UL 972 – Burglary-Resisting Glazing Material.
A. Product Data:
1. Glass: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size

limitations, special handling or installation requirements.
2. Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental
characteristics, limitations, special application requirements.
3. Identify available colors; indicate special precautions required.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Sections and details of glass installation at framing members including head,

mullions, transoms, jambs and sills.
Glazing 08 80 00 - 2
2. Submit engineered shop drawings for back-painted glass and mounting systems
showing fabrication and installation requirements to ensure installation and
removal of individual glass units without requiring removal of adjacent units.
a. Show transitions
C. Samples: Submit 12" x 12" samples of each type and thickness of tint, patterned, coated,
and back-painted glass.
A. Certificates: Submit glass and glazing manufacturer's certifications that materials meet
Specification requirements and are compatible with each other.
A. Fabricator Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E

Coatings: A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved and certified by
coated-glass manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project
who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer
Program.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16 CFR Part 1201 break
safe characteristics.
D. Heat-Strengthened and Fully-Tempered Glass:
1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process.

2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.
3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated
glass).
4. Orientation: Orient roller-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as
installed unless otherwise indicated.
a. If width of any glass units indicated on Drawings exceeds fabrication limits,

roller-wave distortion shall be oriented in a consistent direction for the entire
project.
E. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at

least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.
F. Mock-Ups:
1. Erect mock-ups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and quality of materials and

execution using materials indicated for final unit of work.
2. Accepted mock-ups in undisturbed condition at time of Substantial Completion
may become part of completed Work.
Glazing 08 80 00 - 3
A. Deliver glass to job in original containers bearing manufacturer's label indicating quality
of contents of each package.
B. Store glass under cover at site and protect from edge and surface damage.
C. Do not remove labels until glass has been installed. Keep glass free from contamination
by materials capable of staining glass. Do not apply marking materials to either side of
glass.
1. Do not install glazing materials when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees
F. unless recommended by glazing material manufacturer.
2. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after
installation of glazing compounds.
3. Do not install glazing materials when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain,
frost, condensation, or other causes.
A. Coordinate Work with glazing frames, wall openings, and perimeter air and vapor seal
to adjacent Work.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to

replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration
of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed
to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's
written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of
deterioration in coating.
B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace

insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of
insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not
attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to
manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by
dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Glazing 08 80 00 - 4
A. Manufacturers/Fabricators, Glass Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,

provide products by one of the following:
1. Cardinal Glass
2. Guardian Industries Corp.
3. Oldcastle Building Envelope.
4. Pilkington North America.
5. Schott North America, Inc.
6. Viracon, Inc.
7. Vitro Glass
B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for
each glass type.
1. Obtain tinted glass from single source from single manufacturer.

2. Obtain coated glass from single source from single manufacturer.
C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single
manufacturer for each product and installation method.
A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind
and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage
attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of
sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials;
or other defects in construction.
B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01

45 16 "Contractor's Quality Control," to design glazing including impact-resistant glazing
at alternates complying with Texas Department of Insurance requirements..
C. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits
and under conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E 1300.
1. Wind Loads: Design and size components of glazing systems to withstand loads
caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall as
calculated in accordance with SEI/ASCE 7 to establish wind pressure based on
the criteria listed on Structural Drawings.
2. Probability of Breakage for Sloped Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped more than
15 degrees from vertical, design glass for a probability of breakage not greater
than 0.001.
3. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-
glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side
length or 1 inch (25 mm), whichever is less.
4. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential
shading within individual glass lites.
D. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is required, provide glazing that complies with 16
CFR 1201, Category II.
Glazing 08 80 00 - 5
E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties
specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures
indicated below:
1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick.
2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for
overall unit and for each lite.
3. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's
WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x
K).
4. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,
according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.
5. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.
2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product

manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are
indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section
or in referenced standards.
1. GANA: "GANA Glazing Manual."

3. IGMA TM-3000: "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass
Units for Commercial and Residential Use."
4. IGMA TM-3100: "Voluntary Guidelines for the Identification of Visual Obstructions
in the Air Space of Insulating Glass Units."
B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing
with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction or manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name,
type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at

least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.
D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that

complies with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated.
1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: 6 mm.
E. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated
throughout Project.
F. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-
strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with
"Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated,
provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply
with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated,
provide fully tempered float glass.
Glazing 08 80 00 - 6
2.4 GLASS - FLOAT GLASS
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality-Q3 (glazing select),
Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted, heat-absorbing and light-reducing).
B. Glass Types:
1. Type 0A - Clear.
2.5 GLASS - HEAT-STRENGTHENED GLASS
A. Heat-Strengthened Glass: ASTM C 1048, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality-Q3

(glazing select), Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted, heat-absorbing and light-reducing),
Kind HS (heat-strengthened), Condition A (uncoated).
B. Glass Types:
1. Type 1A - Clear. Provide where shown and in lieu of 0A when required by

performance requirements.
2.6 GLASS - FULLY TEMPERED
A. Fully Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality-Q3
(glazing select), Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted, heat-absorbing and light-reducing),
Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated).
B. Glass Types:
1. Type 2A - Clear.
2.7 COATED GLASS - HEAT-STRENGTHENED GLASS
A. Coated Heat-Strengthened Glass: ASTM C 1376 and ASTM C 1048, Type I (transparent
glass, flat), Quality-Q3 (glazing select), Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted, heat-absorbing
and light-reducing), Kind HS (heat-strengthened), Condition C (other coated glass).
B. Basis-of-Design Product, Typical Exterior Vision Lite: Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide Solarban R100 coating on the #2 (inner) surface of a clear glass
outer-lite, that, when paired with a clear inner-lite in an insulated unit configuration,
results in comparable appearance and performance characteristics as follows:
1. Performance Requirements:
a. Visible Light Transmittance: 42 percent minimum.

b. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 (Btu/hr*ft2*°F) maximum.
c. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.23 maximum.
d. Outdoor Visible Light Reflectance: 32 percent maximum.
C. Glass Types:
1. Type 3A – Clear, Low-E
Glazing 08 80 00 - 7
2.8 COATED GLASS - FULLY TEMPERED
A. Fully Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1376 and ASTM C 1048, Type I (transparent glass,
flat), Quality-Q3 (glazing select), Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted, heat-absorbing and
light-reducing), Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition C (other coated glass).
B. Basis-of-Design Product, Typical Exterior Vision Lite: Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide Solarban R100 coating on the #2 (inner) surface of a clear glass
outer-lite, that, when paired with a clear inner-lite in an insulated unit configuration,
results in comparable appearance and performance characteristics as follows:
1. Performance Requirements:
a. Visible Light Transmittance: 42 percent minimum.

b. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 (Btu/hr*ft2*°F) maximum.
c. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.23 maximum.
d. Outdoor Visible Light Reflectance: 32 percent maximum.
C. Glass Types:
1. Type 4A – Clear, Low-E
2.9 LAMINATED GLASS
A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency
to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and
installation.
1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer or ionoplast interlayer

to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions.
2. For use at security windows specified in Section 08 56 53, sound-rated windows
specified in Section 08 56 73, and tornado-rated windows specified in Section 08
55 14.
3. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than 0.030 or that indicated and
as needed to comply with requirements.
4. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.
5. Type 2A with Hatch Pattern, Base Bid: Laminated Security Glass; Thickness:
Nominal 9/16 inch as specified in Section 08 56 53 “Fixed Security Windows”
a. For ASTM F1233 and UL 752 compliant Glass: Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide tested glazing assembly similar to School Safe
Premium Ballistic Glazing by Ballistic Glass & Armor Solutions LLC. Mount
in steel reinforced aluminum frame products
b. For ASTM F3561 Forced Entry and Ballistic Resistance Rated, Level 2,
Basis of Design: Tested assembly of two lites of 1/8-inch (3 mm) clear
tempered glass with 0.060 inch thick clear PVB interlayer.
1) Interlayer Basis of Design: Trosifol PVB by Kuraray.
6. Type 8-2A: Laminated Insulated Security Glass Spandrel
Glazing 08 80 00 - 8
a. Basis of Design: As specified in Section 08 56 53 “Fixed Security Windows”
1) Outboard lite: Type 4A

2) 1/2 inch air space
3) Inboard lite: Glass Type 2A with Hatch Pattern.
2.10 INSULATED GLASS
A. Insulated Glass: Sealed units of glass lites separated by dehydrated air spaces
complying with ASTM E 2188, ASTM E 2189, and ASTM E 2190, with the following
indicated requirements:
1. For types, classes, kinds, and conditions of each glass lite refer to specified glass
types.
2. Sealing System: Dual seal, primary and secondary using manufacturer's standard
sealants.
3. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard metal.
4. Air Space Width: Nominal 1/2 inch measured perpendicularly from surfaces of
glass lites at unit edge.
B. Glass Types:
1. Type 8-1: Heat-strengthened or Annealed coated insulated glass units
a. Outer Lite: Type 3A

b. Air Space: ½ inch air
c. Inner Lite: Type 0A or 1A where required for fire-department access or by
Code.
2. Type 8-2: Tempered insulated coated glass units
a. Outer Lite: Type 4A

b. Air Space: ½ inch air
c. Inner Lite: Type 2A.
3. Type 8-2A: Laminated Insulated Security Glass Spandrel
a. Basis of Design: As specified in Section 08 56 53 “Fixed Security Windows”
1) Outboard lite: Type 4A

2) 1/2 inch air space
3) Inboard lite: Glass Type 2A with Hatch Pattern.
4. Type 8-7: Fire-Rated Insulated Glass Units:
a. Two layers of Glass Type 7 fire-rated glass with 1/2 inch air space mounted
in Fire-Rated hollow metal frame specified in Section 08 11 13 “Hollow Metal
Doors and Frames.”
1) Basis of Design, Insulated Fire-Rated Glass: Firelite IGU by Technical

Glass Products/TGP or equivalent product as approved by Architect.
Glazing 08 80 00 - 9
2.11 FIRE-RATED GLASS
A. Filmed Monolithic Ceramic Glass – Glass Type 7: Wire-free safety glazing material for
use in accidental human impact safety rated locations such as doors, transoms and
borrowed lites with fire rating requirement of 45-minutes, with hose stream test
compliance, at interior locations.
B. Properties:
1. Thickness: 3/16"
2. Fire Rating: 45 minutes.
3. Impact Safety Rating: ANSI Z97.1 & CPSC 16CFR1201 (CAT I & II)
4. Maximum width by height of door lite: 36 by 89 inches
5. Maximum area of door lite: 3,204 square inches
6. Maximum width by height of non-door lite: 95 by 95 inches
7. Maximum area of non-door lite: 3,325 square inches.
8. Labeling: Each lite shall be labeled with a permanent logo including the name of
the product, manufacturer, approved testing laboratory, fire rating period, and
safety glazing standard.
9. Fire rating: Fire rating listed and tested for fire rating scheduled in accordance with
ASTM E-163.
C. Acceptable Products:
1. FireLite NT by Technical Glass Products.

2. SuperClear 45-HS by SaftiFirst.
2.12 SECURITY FILM
A. Safety and Security Window Film: Optically clear microlayered polyester film, nominally
8 mils (0.008”) thick, with a durable acrylic abrasion resistant coating over one surface
and a pressure sensitive adhesive on the other. The adhesive is pressure-activated, not
water-activated, and forms a mechanical bond, not chemical bond, to the glass. Provide
microlayered film with plastic and ductile polyester layers for tear resistance.
1. Physical / Mechanical Performance Properties (nominal):
a. Film Color: Clear

b. Film Thickness: Nominal 8 mils
2. Uniformity: No noticeable pin holes, streaks, thin spots, scratches, banding or other
optical defects.
3. Variation in Total Transmission across the width: Less than 2 percent over the
average at any portion along the length.
4. Impact Resistance for Safety Glazing: Tested on 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) annealed glass.
a. Safety Rating (CPSC 16 CFR, Part 1201): Category II (400 ft.-lbs).

b. Safety Rating (ANSI Z97.1): Class A, Unlimited Size.
5. Forced Entry Protection: Independent lab testing according to UL 972 protocol

(Multiple Impact Test).
Glazing 08 80 00 - 10
a. Annealed Glass (1/4 inch) - Pass

b. Tempered Glass (1/4 inch) - Pass
6. Use: At locations noted on Drawings.

7. Acceptable Product: 3M™ Scotchshield™ Ultra 800 Safety and Security Window
Film with 3M Impact Protection Adhesive Attachment System.
2.13 GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General:
1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact,
including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel
substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by
sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions
existing at time of installation.
3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's
full range.
B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.
a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning® 790 Silicone Building Sealant.

b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.;
SCS2700 SilPruf LM.
c. Pecora Corporation; 890NST.
d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.
C. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.
a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning® 795 Silicone Building Sealant.

b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.; Silpruf
SCS200.
c. Pecora Corporation; 895NST.
d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2.
2.14 GLAZING TAPES
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids

elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with
or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for
application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products
indicated below:
Glazing 08 80 00 - 11
1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous
pressure.
2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to
continuous pressure.
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with
adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary
sealant.
2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination
with a full bead of liquid sealant.
2.15 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge
and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written
instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with
system performance requirements.
1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes
acting on glass framing members and glazing components.
a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg
C), material surface.
B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square

edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with
the following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness,

and offsets at corners.
2. Presence and functioning of weep systems.
3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before
glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
Glazing 08 80 00 - 12
B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as
needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials
that leave visible marks in the completed Work.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets,

and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including
those in referenced glazing publications.
B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged
glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes
glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass,
impair performance, or impair appearance.
C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined
by preconstruction testing.
D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course
of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270
mm).
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of
glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless
gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain
required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.
2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness
equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final
compressed thickness of tape.
G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving
sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and
according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.
H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as
specified.
J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant
or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when
installation is subjected to movement.
K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner

recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner
joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
Glazing 08 80 00 - 13
L. Tempered Safety Glazing:
1. Do not cut, seam, nip or abrade tempered safety glass.

2. Set tempered safety glass with tong marks completely concealed or in as
inconspicuous a location as possible.
3. Install tempered safety glass in hazardous locations:
a. Ingress and egress doors.

b. Operable or inoperable panels adjacent to a door in building and within same
wall plane as door whose nearest vertical edge is within 24" of door in closed
position and whose bottom edge is less than 60" above floor or walking
surface.
c. Fixed panels which have glazed area in excess of 9 sq. ft. and lowest edge
is less than 18" above finished floor level or walking surface within 36" of
such glazing where panels are not protected with horizontal member not less
than 1-1/2" in width located between 24" and 36" above walking surface.
d. Other locations required by building code.
3.4 TAPE GLAZING
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges
are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch
tapes to make them fit opening.
C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs.
Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills.
D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not
lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.
F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting
dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of
removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of
openings.
3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit

openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in
place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting
blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression
gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start
Glazing 08 80 00 - 14
gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets
to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket
joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks,
and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets
and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets.
Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses
in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing,

between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent
sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure.
Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of
installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting
or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other
masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a
month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.
1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with
glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass
manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage
to coatings.
C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.
D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled
for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
Glazing 08 80 00 - 15
SECTION 08 91 19
FIXED LOUVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Fixed extruded-aluminum louvers for storm shelter applications.
2. Blank-off panels for louvers
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501
apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced
standards.
B. Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades (i.e., the axis of the blades are
horizontal).
C. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistant Louver: Louver that provides specified windborne-

debris-impact resistance, as determined by testing in accordance with AMCA 540 and
certified to comply with requirements of ICC 500 – ICC/NSSA Standard for the Design
and Construction of Storm Shelters and FEMA 361 – Safe Rooms for Tornadoes and
Hurricanes: Guidance for Community and Residential Safe Rooms.
1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing
specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.
B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles,
and spacing.
1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashings, sealants, and other means of preventing
water intrusion.
2. Show mullion profiles and locations.
C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required.
D. Delegated Design Submittal: For louvers indicated to comply with structural

Fixed Louvers 08 91 19 - 1
A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed in

accordance with AMCA 500-L by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and
witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of louver and showing
compliance with performance requirements specified.
B. Windborne-debris-impact-resistance test reports and certifications including for of ICC

500 – ICC/NSSA Standard for the Design and Construction of Storm Shelters and
FEMA 361 – Safe Rooms for Tornadoes and Hurricanes: Guidance for Community and
Residential Safe Rooms.
C. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer’s special warranties.
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with the

following:
1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, “Structural Welding Code – Aluminum.”

2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, “Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel.”
3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, “Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel.”

before fabrication.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Finish Warranty, Factory-Applied Finishes: Standard form in which

manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of
deterioration of baked enamel, powder coat, or organic finishes within specified
warranty period.
a. Color fading more than 5 Delta E units when tested in accordance with
ASTM D2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested in accordance with
ASTM D4214.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fixed louvers from single source from a single manufacturer
where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.
A. Delegated Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a

qualified professional engineer, using structural performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Louvers withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following
loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent
deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver-blade rattle
or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures are
considered to act normal to the face of the building.
1. Wind Loads:
a. Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings.
C. Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Louvers tested to meet requirements for of ICC

500 – ICC/NSSA Standard for the Design and Construction of Storm Shelters and
FEMA 361 – Safe Rooms for Tornadoes and Hurricanes: Guidance for Community and
Residential Safe Rooms.
D. Seismic Performance:
1. Louvers, including attachments to other construction, withstand the effects of
earthquake motions determined in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7 and as indicated
on Drawings.
E. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified,

as demonstrated by testing manufacturer’s stock units identical to those provided,
except for length and width in accordance with AMCA 500-L.
F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material

surfaces.
G. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA’s “Architectural Sheet

Metal Manual” for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.
2.3 FEMA AND ICC-500 APPROVED STATIONARY BLADE LOUVER
A. Basis of Design: Model XP500 as manufactured by Ruskin Company.
1. Fabrication: Formed Aluminum stationary horizontal chevron louver style.

2. Frame:
a. Frame Depth: 5 inches (127 mm).
b. Wall Thickness: 0.25 inch (6 mm), nominal.
c. Material: formed aluminum.
d. Provide ICC-500 label.
3. Blades:
a. Style: Horizontal mounted chevron sight proof.
b. Wall Thickness: 0.25 inch (6 mm), nominal.
c. Material: formed aluminum.
B. Performance Data:
1. Free Area: 46 percent, nominal.
2. Maximum Recommended Air Flow through Free Area: 900 feet per minute (4.57
m/sec).
3. Air Flow: 7600 cubic feet per minute (3,587 l/s).
4. Maximum Pressure Drop (Intake): 0.30 inches w.g. (0.07 kPa).
2.4 LOUVER SCREENS
A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver.
1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face.

2. Screening Type: Bird screening.
B. Secure screen frames to louver frames with machine screws with heads finished to
match louver, spaced a maximum of 6 inches from each corner and at 12 inches o.c.
C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated.
1. Metal: Same type and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are
attached. Reinforce extruded-aluminum screen frames at corners with clips.
2. Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached.
3. Type: Rewirable frames with a driven spline or insert.
D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers:
1. Bird Screening, Aluminum: 1/2-inch-square mesh, 0.063-inch wire.
2.5 BLANK-OFF PANELS
A. Uninsulated Blank-Off Panels: Metal sheet attached to back of louver.
1. Aluminum sheet for aluminum louvers, not less than 0.050-inch nominal
thickness.
2. Panel Finish: Same finish type applied to louvers, but black color.
3. Attach blank-off panels with clips.
B. Insulated Blank-Off Panels: Laminated panels consisting of an insulating core surfaced

on back and front with metal sheets and attached to back of louver.
1. Thickness: 1 inch.
2. Metal Facing Sheets, Aluminum: Not less than 0.032-inch nominal thickness.
3. Insulating Core: Rigid, glass-fiber-board insulation.
4. Edge Treatment: Trim perimeter edges of blank-off panels with louver
manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum-channel frames, not less than
0.080-inch nominal thickness, with corners mitered and with same finish as
panels.
5. Seal perimeter joints between panel faces and louver frames with gaskets or
sealant.
6. Panel Finish: Same type of finish applied to louvers, but black color.
7. Attach blank-off panels with clips.
2.6 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003 or 5005, with temper as required for forming,
or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.
C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.
1. Use tamper-resistant screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless steel fasteners.
3. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.
D. Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion

anchors, fabricated from stainless steel components, with allowable load or strength
design capacities calculated in accordance with ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater
than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing in accordance with
ASTM E488/E488M conducted by a qualified testing agency.
E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with

ASTM D1187/D1187M.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Factory assemble louvers to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units
as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly
and coordinated installation.
B. Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver units exceeds fabrication and handling
limitations, fabricate units to permit field-bolted assembly with close-fitting joints in
jambs and mullions, reinforced with splice plates.
1. Continuous Vertical Assemblies, Rooftop Equipment Screens: Fabricate units

without interrupting blade-spacing pattern.
C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames
at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance.
D. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with
allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material
tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.
1. Frame Type: Channel unless otherwise indicated.
E. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.
F. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than is
recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches o.c., whichever is less.
1. Exposed Mullions: Where indicated, provide units with exposed mullions of same
width and depth as louver frame. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and
handling limitations, provide interlocking split mullions designed to permit
expansion and contraction.
2. Exterior Corners: Prefabricated corner units with mitered and welded blades and
with mullions at corners.
G. Provide subsills made of same material as louvers for recessed louvers.
H. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds
concealed from view unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes
bolted connections between frame members necessary.
A. Finish louvers after assembly.
B. High-Performance Organic Finish, Two-Coat PVDF: Fluoropolymer finish complying

with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color
coat or with FEVE powder coating.
1. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions for seacoast and severe
environments using chromium pretreatment.
2. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with
the Work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for

installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry
construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to
screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight
connection.
C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.
D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers,
as indicated.
E. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation
progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Section 07 92
00 "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation.
A. Clean exposed louver surfaces that are not protected by temporary covering, to
remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate
during construction period.
B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or
detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.
C. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction, so no evidence remains

of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by
Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units.
1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color
and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 09 05 61
MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION AND ALKALINITY CONTROL

FOR CONCRETE SLABS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Topical water vapor reduction system on new and existing concrete slabs to
receive tile carpet, and resinous flooring, or other moisture sensitive flooring.
2. Topical water vapor reduction system and cementitious surfacing on new and
existing concrete slabs to receive tile carpet, wood, and resilient flooring, or other
moisture sensitive flooring.
1. Pre-installation testing methods and quantities for each unique flooring product
are specified within each individual flooring product Section in Division 09.
1.2 UNIT PRICES

A. Work of this Section is affected by the following unit prices specified in Section 01 22
00 "Unit Prices":
1. Submit Unit Price for topical moisture vapor emission and alkalinity control of
concrete floor slabs in sheet carpeted areas, tile carpeted areas, and areas with
resinous flooring products.
2. Submit Unit Price for topical moisture vapor emission and alkalinity control of
concrete floor slabs and cementitious surfacing installation in tile carpeted areas,
wood flooring product areas, and resilient flooring product areas.
1.3 REFERENCES
1. ASTM D 1308: Standard Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on
Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes.
2. ASTM D 4541: Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using
Portable Adhesion Testers.
3. ASTM E 96: Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
4. ASTM F 710: Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient
Flooring.
5. ASTM F 1869: Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission
Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride.
6. ASTM F 2170: Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in
Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes.

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and
procedures related to installation including, but not limited to, the following:
Moisture Vapor Emission and Alkalinity Control 09 05 61 - 1

1. Review substrate conditions, moisture and pH test results, manufacturer's

installation instructions, and warranty requirements.
2. Document proceedings, including required corrective measures.
A. Product Data: For each type of product used in vapor emission control system.
B. Product Schedule: For all floor areas to receive moisture vapor emission and alkalinity
control system products. Use same room label and numbering designations indicated
on Drawings.
1. Distinguish on schedule between those areas required to receive cementitious
surfacing over moisture vapor emission and alkalinity control system and those
areas where not required.
A. Qualification Data: Certificates indicating Installer of vapor emission control treatments

is trained and certified or employed by treatment manufacturer.
B. Product Test Reports: For each product performed by nationally recognized

independent testing agency indicating conformance with specified performance
requirements.
C. Preconstruction Test Reports: For alkalinity, calcium chloride, and relative humidity of
concrete slabs.
D. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty for vapor emission control coating
system and certificate of underwriter’s coverage of manufacturer’s warranty.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years experience in manufacturing

water vapor reduction systems.
1. The water vapor emission reduction system must be specifically formulated and
marketed for water vapor emission reduction and alkalinity control without
change of system design for a minimum period of ten (10) years.
B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer of products or an entity that employs installers

and supervisors who are trained and certified by manufacturer. Installer must have a
minimum of five years experience installing vapor emissions control systems.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Moisture and pH testing shall be performed by an

International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI), Certified Concrete Slab Moisture Testing
Technician – Grade 1.
A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Following at least 28 days after placement of

concrete and prior to floor covering installation, engage a qualified independent testing

agency to perform the following tests on floor areas to receive moisture vapor emission
and alkalinity control system:
1. Calcium chloride testing per ASTM F 1869.
2. Relative humidity testing per ASTM F 2170.
3. Alkalinity testing per ASTM F 710.
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s unopened containers fully identified with brand,

type, grade, class and all other qualifying information.
B. Deliver materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and

recommendations.
C. Store materials in a dry, well-ventilated area at minimum 50 deg F and maximum 90

deg F.
1.10 COORDINATION AND SEQUENCING
A. Coordinate testing agency to test concrete slabs not less than one week or more than
5 weeks prior to scheduled flooring installation.
1. Apply treatment to areas with moisture vapor emission or relative humidity rates
which exceed floor covering manufacturer’s written limits, as determined by
ASTM F 1869 and ASTM F 2170 testing.
B. Coordinate with installation of floor coverings. Ensure flooring installation complies

with vapor emission control system manufacturer’s warranty requirements.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace

components of treatment system, cementitious surfacings, floor covering materials,
adhesives, and installation labor for same period resulting from moisture vapor
emission related failure that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
B. Warranty shall guarantee moisture vapor and alkalinity emission rates to be at or below
published requirements of floor covering manufacturers.
C. Warranty shall not exclude concrete slabs containing silica or silicate compounds.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products

manufactured by one of the following:
1. Ardex Engineered Cements, Inc.
2. BASF Corporation

3. KOSTER Waterproofing Systems USA.
A. Multi- or single-component, fluid-applied penetrants or coatings intended to seal or

stabilize internal humidity by restricting excessive moisture and pH (alkalinity), and to
mechanically regulate permeability and suppress the volume of moisture reaching
concrete surfaces, for compliance with subsequent floor covering manufacturer’s
written limitations.
1. Application methods are to be determined by site conditions, presence of sub-
slab vapor barriers for slabs-on-grade, concrete mix design and contaminants,
age of concrete substrate, results of ASTM F1869 calcium chloride testing, if
required, and finish floor covering manufacturer’s recommendations.
2.3 MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION AND ALKALINITY CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Ardex Engineered Cements, Inc.; MC ULTRA Moisture Control System.
2. BASF Corporation; Chemrex MV-Block.
3. KOSTER Waterproofing Systems USA; VAP I 2000.
B. Physical Characteristics:
1. ASTM E 96 Water Vapor Transmission: Minimum 94% reduction under
laboratory conditions
2. ASTM D 1308 Alkali Resistance: PASS, up to pH of 14
3. ASTM D 4541 Adhesion Strength: 500 psi (100% Concrete Adhesive Failure)
4. Resists up to 100% Relative Humidity as measured by ASTM F 2170.
5. VOC: 96g/L per SCAQMD Rule #1113
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Cementitious Surfacing: Portland cement-based, self-leveling compound to be applied

to areas receiving resilient or wood flooring. Cement must bond with subsequent floor
coverings and adhesives.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
a. Ardex K-15 by Ardex Engineered Cements, Inc.; Ardex K-15.
b. Mapei International; Mapei Ultraplan 1 Plus.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to

performance.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Mask and protect adjacent wall and floor surfaces from effects of scarification and
application.
B. Scarify slab surface in area of application by shot blasting or other method acceptable
to coating treatment manufacturer.
C. Prepare and treat cracks, control joints, and cold joints per system manufacturer’s
written requirements.
D. Sweep and vacuum concrete substrate.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Apply treatment system in number of coats required by manufacturer with roller and
squeegee over entire treatment area; saturate surfaces to ensure a thorough bond.
B. Clean and fill divots, chips, voids and other surface irregularities with 100 percent
Portland cement based patching compound or cementitious fill.
C. Apply cementitious surfacing over coating in areas to receive tile carpet, wood, and
resilient flooring, or other moisture sensitive flooring to facilitate adhesive bond.
1. Apply at a thickness of 1/8-inch.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect each coat during specified cure period from traffic, topical water, and
contaminants.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 09 21 16
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions.
2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits.
3. Grid suspension systems for gypsum board ceilings.
4. Interior gypsum board.
5. Tile backing panels.
6. Acoustical accessories at interior partitions.
7. Trim accessories.
8. Joint treatments.

1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions.
2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits.
3. Grid suspension systems for gypsum board ceilings.
4. Gypsum board products.
5. Acoustical accessories.
6. Trim accessories.
7. Joint treatment materials.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of gypsum board
assemblies; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including
mechanical fasteners.
2. Indicate reinforcing channels, supplemental framing, seismic restraints, shear
diaphragms, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details,
and attachment to adjoining work.
3. Indicate locations, fabrication, and installation of control and expansion joints.
C. Samples: For the following products:

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- (300-mm-) long length for each trim
accessory indicated.
A. Product Certificates: For each type of code-compliance certification for studs and tracks.
B. Evaluation Reports: For embossed, high-strength steel studs and firestop tracks from
ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 16 - 1

A. Code-Compliance Certification of Studs and Tracks: Provide documentation that framing

members are certified according to the product-certification program of the Certified
Steel Stud Association, the Steel Framing Industry Association, or the Steel Stud
Manufacturers Association.
B. Mockups: Build mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in surface area to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockups for the following:
a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.
b. Each texture finish indicated.
2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on
exposed surfaces for review of mockups.
3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,
condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage.
Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C840 requirements or gypsum board

manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.
1. Do not install interior gypsum panels and products until installation areas are
enclosed and conditioned.
B. Room Temperatures: Maintain minimum 40 degrees F (4 degrees C). For adhesive

attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain minimum 50 degrees F (10 degrees
C) for 48 hours before application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95
degrees F (35 degrees C) when using temporary heat sources.
C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. Avoid
drafts during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly.
D. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and
conditioned.
E. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited
to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide

materials identical to those tested in UL design assemblies indicated on Drawings
according to ASTM E119 by an independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction

identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E90 and classified
according to ASTM E413 by an independent testing agency.
2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C645 requirements for steel unless
2. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM
A653/A653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.
B. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645. Use either conventional steel studs and tracks or
embossed, high-strength steel studs and tracks.
1. Steel Studs and Tracks:
1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.
2) ClarkDietrich.
3) Custom Stud.
4) MarinoWARE.
5) MBA Building Supplies.
6) Phillips Manufacturing Co.
7) SCAFCO Steel Stud Company.
8) Steel Construction Systems.
9) Telling Industries.
10) The Steel Network, Inc.
b. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: As indicated on Drawings, in correlation
with vertical unbraced span and horizontal deflection performance
requirements.
c. Depth: As indicated on Drawings
d. Spacing: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Provide one or more of the following as required to accommodate
anticipated floor or roof structure deflection:
1. Clip System: Clips designed for use in head-of-wall deflection conditions that
provide a positive attachment of studs to tracks while allowing 4 inches (102 mm)
minimum vertical movement.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.; Deflex Clips.
2) ClarkDietrich; Fast Top Clip.

3) Fire Trak Corp; PosiKlip.

4) The Steel Network, Inc.; VertiClip SLD Series.
2. Single Long-Leg Track System: ASTM C645 top track with 4 inches (102 mm)
deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs
friction fit into top track and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305
mm) of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.
3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top track manufactured to prevent cracking of
finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure
above and allowing 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) minimum vertical movement; in
thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of
studs.
following:
1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.; CST Slotted
Deflection Track.
2) ClarkDietrich; MaxTrak Slotted Deflection Track.
3) MarinoWARE; Slotted Track.
4) Perfect Wall, Inc.; The System Slotted Deflection Track.
5) SCAFCO Steel Stud Company; SDLT-Slotted Leg Track System.
6) Steel Construction Systems; SDLT-Slotted Leg Track System.
7) Telling Industries; Interior Slotted Track.
D. Firestop Tracks: Provide one or more of the following as required to accommodate
anticipated floor or roof structure deflection:
1. Top track manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with
movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated and allowing up to 2 inches vertical movement; in thickness
not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
following:
1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.; FAS Track.
2) Fire Trak Corp; Fire Trak System attached to studs with Fire Trak
RediKlip.
3) MarinoWARE; FAS Track 1000.
4) Perfect Wall, Inc.; The System Slotted Deflection Track.
5) SCAFCO Steel Stud Company; SCAFCO Slotted Leg Track System.
6) Steel Construction Systems; Steel-Con Slotted Leg Track System.
following:
1) ClarkDietrich; BlazeFrame RipTRAK.
2) Fire Trak Corp; Fire Trak System attached to studs with Fire Trak
PosiKlip.
a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:

1) Fire Trak Corp; Fire Trak Shadowline attached to studs with Fire Trak
PosiKlip.
E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width
indicated.
1. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0359 inch (0.912 mm).
F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.0538-inch (1.367-mm) minimum base-steel

thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.
1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.72-
mm-) thick, galvanized steel.
G. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C645.

1. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0296 inch (0.752 mm).
2. Depth: 7/8 inch (22.2 mm).
H. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to
reduce sound transmission.
a. ClarkDietrich; RC Deluxe.
b. SCAFCO Steel Stud Company; Kwik RC.
c. Steel Construction Systems; RC 1/Serenity.
2. Configuration: Asymmetrical.
I. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with

minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.
1. Depth: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge-type steel sheet with minimum
uncoated-steel thickness of 0.0329 inch (0.8 mm).
3. Tie Wire: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-
mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.
J. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm),
wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22 mm), minimum uncoated-steel thickness of 0.0179
inch (0.455 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm)
diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.
B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

1. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01 AC193 AC58 or AC308 as
appropriate for the substrate.
a. Material: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B633
or ASTM F1941 (ASTM F1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A641/A641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12
mm) in diameter.
D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch (25 by 5 mm) by length indicated.
E. Angle-Type Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8-inch (22-mm) wide with a base
steel thickness of 0.0538 inch (1.367 mm) and minimum 5/16-inch- (8-mm-) diameter
bolted connections.
F. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-

steel thickness of 0.0538 inch (1.367 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide
flanges.
1. Depth: 2 inches (51 mm).
G. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.367-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with
minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep.
2. Steel Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645.
a. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0296 inch (0.752 mm).
b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Embossed, High-Strength Steel Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645.
b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
4. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C645, 7/8 inch (22 mm) deep.
5. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep members designed to reduce
sound transmission.
a. Configuration: Asymmetrical.
H. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C645, direct-hung system
composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
a. Armstrong Ceiling & Wall Solutions; Drywall Grid Systems.
b. Rockfon (Rockwool International); 640/660 Drywall Ceiling Suspension.
c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.
2.4 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each
area and that correspond with support system indicated.
2.5 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M.

of the following:
a. American Gypsum.
b. CertainTeed Gypsum.
c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
d. National Gypsum Company.
e. PABCO Gypsum.

f. USG Corporation.
2. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X.
3. Long Edges: Tapered.
B. Flexible Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M. Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to
be more flexible than standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness.
of the following:
a. CertainTeed Gypsum.
b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
c. National Gypsum Company.
d. PABCO Gypsum.
e. USG Corporation.
2. Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).
C. Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M. With moisture- and mold-

resistant core and paper surfaces. Use at ceilings at toilet rooms, locker rooms, kitchens,
and other wet and high humidity areas.
a. American Gypsum; M-Bloc® Type X with Mold & Moisture Resistance.
b. CertainTeed Gypsum; CertainTeed M2Tech Mold and Moisture Resistant
Type X Gypsum Board.
c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond® XP® Fire-Shield® Gypsum Board.
d. PABCO Gypsum; MOLD CURB® Plus.
e. USG Corporation; USG Sheetrock® Brand Mold Tough® Firecode® X
Panels.
4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D3274.
D. Acoustically Enhanced Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M. Multilayer products

constructed of two layers of gypsum boards sandwiching a viscoelastic sound-absorbing
polymer core. Use where required to achieve STC levels shown on Drawings.
a. CertainTeed Gypsum; CertainTeed SilentFX QuickCut Type X Acoustical
Gypsum Board.
b. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond® SoundBreak XP™ Retrofit™
Board.
c. PABCO Gypsum; QuietRock® ES.
2. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X .
E. Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M gypsum board, tested

according to ASTM C1629/C1629M.
a. American Gypsum; 5/8" M-Bloc® AR Type X with Mold & Moisture
Resistance.
b. CertainTeed Gypsum; CertainTeed Extreme Abuse Resistant Type X
Gypsum Board with M2Tech Mold and Moisture Technology.
c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond® Hi-Abuse® XP® Gypsum Board.

d. PABCO Gypsum; PABCO ABUSE CURB®.

e. USG Corporation; USG Sheetrock® Brand Mold Tough® Abuse-Resistant
Firecode®.
3. Surface Abrasion: ASTM C1629/C1629M, meets or exceeds Level 2
requirements.
4. Indentation: ASTM C1629/C1629M, meets or exceeds Level 1 requirements.
5. Soft-Body Impact: ASTM C1629/C1629M, meets or exceeds Level 2
requirements.
F. Impact-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M gypsum board, tested

according to ASTM C1629/C1629M.
a. American Gypsum; 5/8" M-Bloc® IR Type X with Mold & Moisture
Resistance. 3233
b. CertainTeed Gypsum; CertainTeed Extreme Impact Resistant Type X
Gypsum Board with M2Tech Mold and Moisture Technology. 3133
c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond® Hi-Impact® XP® Gypsum Board.
3133
d. PABCO Gypsum; PABCO® Impact Resistant. 2133
e. USG Corporation; USG Sheetrock® Brand Mold Tough® VHI (Very High
Impact) Firecode® Core. 2233
3. Surface Abrasion: ASTM C1629/C1629M, meets or exceeds Level 2
requirements.
4. Indentation: ASTM C1629/C1629M, meets or exceeds Level 1 requirements.
5. Soft-Body Impact: ASTM C1629/C1629M, meets or exceeds Level 3
requirements.
6. Hard-Body Impact: ASTM C1629/C1629M, meets or exceeds Level 3
requirements according to test in Annex A1.
2.6 TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C1288 or ASTM C1325, with
manufacturer's standard edges. For use at wet and dry walls.
a. FinPan, Inc; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board.
b. National Gypsum Company; PermaBase® Cement Board.
c. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.
2. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
2.7 ACOUSTICAL ACCESSORIES
A. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)

produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from
glass, slag wool, or rock wool.


a. CertainTeed Corporation; NoiseReducer™.
b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company; Formaldehyde-free™
Unfaced thermal and acoustical batts.
c. Knauf Insulation; EcoBatt® Insulation.
d. Owens Corning; EcoTouch® Insulation.
2. Flame-Spread Index: Not more than 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM
E84.
3. Smoke-Developed Index: Not more than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM
E84.
B. Electrical J-Box Putty Pads: Preformed, moldable putty pads formulated to maintain the
performance of acoustically rated wall assemblies by sealing penetrations including
common electrical outlets boxes, phone outlet boxes, electrical switches, HVAC ducts,
and plumbing connections.
a. ATS Acoustics; ATS Acoustics Putty Pads.
b. The Soundproofing Company Inc.; Acoustical Putty Pads.
c. QuietRock; QuietPutty.
C. Sound Isolation Clips: Decouples gypsum board from structure.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Model RSIC-1 as
manufactured by PAC International.
D. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag,
paintable, nonstaining latex acoustical sealant complying with ASTM C834.
a. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.; RCS20
Acoustical.
b. Hilti, Inc.; CP 506 Smoke and Acoustical Sealant.
c. QuietRock; QuietSeal Pro.
d. Specified Technologies, Inc.; SpecSeal Smoke 'N' Sound Sealant.
e. Tremco Incorporated; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
f. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
2. Colors of Exposed Acoustical Joint Sealants: White.
2.8 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C1047, galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, or
paper-faced galvanized-steel sheet.
1. Edge Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. Bullnose bead.
c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
f. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
2. Expansion (Control) Joints:
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1) ClarkDietrich; #93 Zinc Control Joint (ZNCJ).

3. Fire-Rated Expansion (Control) Joints: Composite control joint with intumescent

tape factory applied to back of control joint on one side.
1) ClarkDietrich; FAS-093X Fire Rated Control Joint.
B. Base-of-Wall PVC Moisture Barrier Trim: Extruded PVC, 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) high.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Waterguard; Waterguard.
C. Extruded Aluminum Trim Accessories: Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than
the strength and durability properties of ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), Alloy 6063-T5, of
profiles and dimensions indicated.
1. Reveal Molding, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) deep by 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide:
1) Fry Reglet; DRM-625-50
b. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish
materials specified.
D. Fire-Rated Reveal Backer: 0.0359 inch (0.912 mm) thick, ASTM A653/A653M, hot-dip
galvanized, ASTM C645 flat steel strap backer plate with an affixed cured intumescent
strip to maintain fire ratings behind architectural reveal moldings in fire-rated partitions.
a. ClarkDietrich; BlazeFrame® “FSB” (Flat Strap Backer).
2.9 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
B. Floor Track Seal: Provide the following where indicated:

1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit
steel stud size.
C. Fasteners for Steel Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power,
and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
D. Steel Drill Screws For Gypsum Board: ASTM C1002 unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C954 for fastening panels to steel members
from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size
recommended by panel manufacturer.
E. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering

gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
2.10 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C475/C475M.
B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners,
and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the
following:
1) National Gypsum Company; Proform Quick Set 90 Setting Compound.
2) USG Corporation; Sheetrock Durabond 90 Setting-Type Joint
Compound.
2. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
following:
1) National Gypsum Company; Proform Quick Set 90 Setting Compound.
2) USG Corporation; Sheetrock Durabond 90 Setting-Type Joint
Compound.
3. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
following:
1) National Gypsum Company; Proform All Purpose Joint Compound,
Ready-Mixed.
2) USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand All Purpose Joint Compound,
Ready-Mixed.
4. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
following:
1) National Gypsum Company; Proform Lite Joint Compound, Ready-
Mixed.
2) USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Lightweight Joint Compound,
Ready-Mixed.
D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel
manufacturer.
2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal
frames, cast-in anchors, and support framing, for compliance with requirements and
other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and
mold damaged.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation

of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to
building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support
the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.
1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation
in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.
B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:

1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or
ceiling tracks to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.
Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to
building structure not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.
2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent
necessary for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce
thickness of fire-resistive materials below that are required for fire-resistance
ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire-resistive materials from damage.
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing
indicated.
B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections
securely fastened.
C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services,

heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at
exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural
supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated
to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around and above ducts that
penetrate partitions above ceiling.
1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports,
install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of
finished assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames;
install track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-
inch (13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint
in finished assembly.
c. Extend both jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside
of overhead structure.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as
required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills
of openings to match framing required above door heads.
4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-
rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous
from floor to underside of solid structure.
a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-
resistance-rated assembly indicated.
5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly
indicated.
6. Curved Partitions:
a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent
to arcs.
b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally
along arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs,
place studs 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
E. Direct Furring:
1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry
attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.
F. Z-Shaped Furring Members:

1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and
hold in place with Z-shaped furring members spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.
2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to
wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-
driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.
3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange
extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of
furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second
member no more than 12 inches (305 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit.
G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more
than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.5 INSTALLING CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater
than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1. Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c.
2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c.
3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by
building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within
ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective
means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces
hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support
standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members
and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling
loads within performance limits established by ASTM C 754.
3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to
inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate
for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or
otherwise fail.
4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by
attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure
and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause
hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger
inserts that extend through forms.
7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.
E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.
F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension
systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members
to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
G. Installation Tolerances:
1. Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6
m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and
transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.

2. Where sprinkler heads, diffusers, and speakers are arranged in alignment,

variation from exact alignment shall not vary more than 1/2-inch (13-mm) either
side of centerline through various element openings.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL ACCESSORIES
A. Place acoustical insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind
and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items
passing through partitions.
B. Install electrical J-box putty pads at partitions with high STC ratings in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install acoustical sealant at non-fire-rated partitions in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.
3.7 INSTALLATION AND FINISHING OF PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C840.
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and
to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of
adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and
ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force
into place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where
intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do
not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite
sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed
openings.
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum
panels.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above
ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7
sq. m) in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of
floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural
members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant.
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural

abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations
and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between
edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is
attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I. STC-Rated Assemblies:
1. Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and
penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical
sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations.
2. Comply with ASTM C919 and with manufacturer's written instructions for locating
edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies,
including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are
readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Type X: Typical.
2. Mold-Resistant Type: At framed surfaces where construction will not be fully
protected from potential weather exposure at time of installation.
3. Flexible Type: Apply in double layer at curved assemblies.
4. Acoustically Enhanced Type: As indicated on Drawings.
5. High Performance, Acoustically Enhanced Type: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Single-Layer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to
greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless
otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize
end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than 24 inches (600 mm) in alternate
courses of panels.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3. On Z-shaped furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing)
with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
C. Multilayer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base
layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers
at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing
member, 16 inches (400 mm) minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless
otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers
vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring
member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-
layer joints unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated
assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.
3. On Z-shaped furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and
face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to

framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints
of base layer over furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers with screws; fasten face layers with
adhesive and supplementary fasteners.
D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a

substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board),
comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions and temporarily brace or
fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.
E. Curved Surfaces:
1. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent
possible, across curved surface plus 12-inch- (300-mm-) long straight sections at
ends of curves and tangent to them.
2. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches
(400 mm) o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten
to studs with screws spaced 12 inches (300 mm) o.c.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at dry and wet locations indicated to receive
tile including locations scheduled to receive tile greater than 1.4 sq. ft. (0.13 sq. m) in
area or 5 lb./sq. ft. (24.4 kg/sq. m) in weight and locations indicated to receive adhered
masonry or stone.
B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim framed
surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.
3.10 INSTALLATION OF TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Control Joints: Maintain fire ratings of assemblies at control joints. Install control joints
according to ASTM C840 and as follows:
1. Partitions: Install control joints:
a. no greater than 30 feet (9 m) on center where a partition runs in an
uninterrupted straight plane;
b. at both corners of openings in wall planes, above and below opening, where
width of opening is 6 feet (1.8 m) or greater, or where ratio of width to height
of wall area above or below opening exceeds 4:1;
c. at all spliced joints of vertical studs;
d. at other locations indicated on Drawings.
2. Ceilings: Install control joints:
a. no greater than 30 feet (9 m) on center and with total area not to exceed 900
sq. ft. (81 sq. m);
b. where sections of "A", "L", "O", "U", "T" and "X" shaped ceiling areas or furr-
down areas intersect;
c. at other locations indicated on Drawings.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated.
2. Bullnose Bead: Use where indicated on Drawings.
3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
4. L-Bead: Use where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum board is installed.
5. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges not intended to receive joint compound.
6. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.
D. Aluminum Trim: Maintain fire ratings of assemblies at aluminum trim. Install in locations
3.11 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints,
penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare
gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from
adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated
as not intended to receive tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels:

1. Level 0: No taping, finishing, or accessories required.
2. Level 1:
a. Joints: Tape set in joint compound.
b. Interior Angles: Tape set in joint compound.
c. Surface: Tool marks and ridges acceptable. Surface free of excess joint
compound.
3. Level 2: Also known as “Fire Taping”
a. Joints: Tape embedded in joint compound and wiped with a joint knife,
leaving a thin coat of compound over tape.
b. Interior Angles: Tape embedded in joint compound and wiped with a joint
knife, leaving a thin coat of compound over tape.
c. Accessories: Shall be covered to one separate coat of joint compound.
d. Fasteners: Shall be covered by one separate coat of joint compound.
e. Surface: Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and
ridges acceptable. Joint compound applied over the body of the tape at the
time of tape embedment shall be considered a separate coat of joint
compound and shall satisfy the conditions of this level.
4. Level 3:
a. Joints: Taped as in Level 2, then covered with one separate coat of joint
compound.
b. Interior Angles: Taped as in Level 2, then covered with one separate coat of
joint compound.
c. Accessories: Shall be covered by two separate coats of joint compound.
d. Fasteners: Shall be covered by two separate coats of joint compound.
e. Surface: Joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.
5. Level 4:

a. Joints: Taped as in Level 2, then covered with two separate coats of joint
compound.
joint compound.
c. Accessories: Shall be covered by three separate coats of joint compound.
d. Fasteners: Shall be covered by three separate coats of joint compound.
e. Surface: Joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.
6. Level 5:
a. Joints: Taped as in Level 2, then covered with two separate coats of joint
compound.
joint compound.
c. Accessories: Shall be covered by three separate coats of joint compound.
d. Fasteners: Shall be covered by three separate coats of joint compound.
e. Surface: A thin skin coat of joint compound, or a material manufactured
especially for this purpose, shall be applied to the entire surface. The
surface shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.
E. Gypsum Board Finish Level Schedule: Finish panels to levels indicated below and
according to ASTM C840:
1. Level 0: Temporary construction or where final finishes have not yet been
determined. Do not use in areas where fire ratings or smoke control are required.
2. Level 1: Non-fire-rated ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, service corridors
and other areas not normally exposed to view.
3. Level 2: Provide at non-exposed locations in fire-rated walls and ceilings (fire
taping, and at panels that are substrates for tile.
4. Level 3: Areas which are to receive heavy or medium, spray or troweled, texture
finishes before final painting and areas where heavy grade wall coverings are to
be applied as the final finish.
5. Level 4: Typical panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise
indicated.
a. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 91 23
"Interior Painting."
6. Level 5: At panel surfaces identified on Drawings and locations flooded with
natural or artificial light and scheduled to receive semi-gloss or gloss paint finish.
a. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 91 23
"Interior Painting."
F. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.12 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and
other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged
during drywall application.
B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 09 21 19
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Gypsum board shaft wall assemblies.
a. Stairwell enclosures.
b. Service shaft enclosures for piping, ductwork, air plenums, electrical and
similar services.
c. Elevator shaft enclosures.
d. Structural column enclosures.
e. Chute enclosures for linen, trash, and similar uses.
f. Area separation walls.
2. Metal framing and accessories.
3. Gypsum board wall products and accessories.
1.2 DEFINITION
A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA 505 for

definitions of terms for gypsum board construction not otherwise defined.
A. Product Data: Technical data for each component of gypsum board shaft wall assembly.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit full scale drawings indicating special or unusual conditions
relating to the shaft wall system specified not addressed in manufacturer's product data.
C. Calculations: Submit calculations verifying steel partition stud minimum base metal
thickness and depth compliance with Code and ASTM C645 for height, load, and
deflection.
A. Product Certificates: Certification signed by manufacturers of gypsum board and framing

assembly components to certify products comply with specified requirements.
B. Product Test Reports: Submitted from independent testing indicating and interpreting
test results relative to compliance of shaft wall systems with acoustical, fire resistance
and structural performance requirements.
C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For firestop tracks, post installed anchors, and power
actuated fasteners, from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to
Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies 09 21 19 - 1

A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep dry and protected against damage from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic and other
causes. Stack panels flat and support on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
C. Handle panels to prevent damage to edges, ends and surfaces. Do not bend or damage
metal corner beads, trim, track, and studs.
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with gypsum shaftliner board manufacturer's written

instructions.
B. Do not install finish panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Fire Resistance Ratings: Fire resistive rated assemblies identical to those indicated by
reference in GA 600 or to UL design designations, including those incorporating elevator
door others framing, whose fire resistance has been determined by ASTM E 119 by an
B. Structural Performance Characteristics: Engineer shaft wall systems to withstand lateral

design loadings, positive and negative air pressure, of 5.0 psf. for maximum heights of
partitions required with deflection not to exceed L/240 of wall height.
Air Pressure
Elevator 1 or 2 Elevators 3 or More Elevators
Velocity - Ft./Min. Per Shaft Per Shaft
0 to 180 5.0 psf 5.0 psf
180 to 1,000 7.5 psf 5.0 psf
1,000 to 1,800 10.0 psf 7.5 psf
1,800 to 3,000 15.0 psf 7.5 psf
C. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those of

assemblies tested according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by

a testing and inspecting agency and to achieve a minimum STC Rating specified or noted
on Drawings.
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
A. Fire Resistance Rating: Indicated on Drawings.
B. STC Rating: Indicated on Drawings typically except at shafts containing drain piping
provide STC 51, minimum.
C. Shaft Wall Systems: Assembly consisting of gypsum shaft wall boards inserted between
U- or J-shaped metal floor and ceiling tracks; with specially shaped studs engaged in
tracks and fitted between shaftliner boards; and gypsum boards on finished side or sides
applied to studs in number of layers, thickness, and arrangement indicated.
1. Studs: I, CH, double-E, or CT profile for repetitive members, corner and end
members, and fire resistance rated assembly indicated.
a. Depth: As indicated, 2-1/2 inches minimum.
b. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As required to meet performance
requirements, 0.018 inch, minimum.
2. Firestop Tracks: Provide firestop track at head of shaft wall on each floor level.
3. Room Side Finish: One or two layer(s) of 5/8 inch thick gypsum board as indicated
on room side.
4. Shaft Side Finish: One layer of 5/8 inch of gypsum where finish is indicated on
shaft side.
5. Cavity Insulation: Sound attenuation blankets in thickness required to meet
indicated STC ratings.
D. Gypsum Shaftliner Board:

1. Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; fire resistive liner panels with paper faces, 1 inch
(25.4 mm) thick, with double beveled long edges.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
1) American Gypsum; Shaft Liner Gypsum Wallboard.
2) CertainTeed Corp.; ProRoc Shaftliner.
3) Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC, Subsidiary of Georgia Pacific;
ToughRock Fireguard Shaftliner.
4) National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand Fire-Shield Shaftliner.
5) USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Liner Panel.
b. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm).
c. Long Edges: Double bevel.
2. Moisture and Mold Resistant Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; fire resistive liner
panels with ASTM D 3273 mold resistance score of 10 as rated according to
ASTM D 3274, 1 inch (25.4 mm) thick, and with double beveled long edges.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
1) American Gypsum Company; M-Glass Shaft Liner with mold and
Moisture Resistance.
2) CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Shaft Liner Type X.
3) Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC, Subsidiary of Georgia Pacific; Dens-
Glass Ultra Shaftliner.

4) National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand EXP Extended

Exposure Shaftliner.
5) USG Corporation; Sheetrock Glass-Mat Liner Panels.
b. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm).
c. Long Edges: Double bevel.
d. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D
3274.
e. Provide at locations installed prior to those areas being fully enclosed and
protected from exposure to outside air or other elements, moisture, or
humidity.
E. Nonload Bearing Steel Framing: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal
unless otherwise indicated and complying with requirements for fire resistance rated
assembly indicated.
1. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot dip galvanized unless
F. Studs: Standard profile for repetitive, corner, and end members:

1. Depth: Indicated on Drawings.
2. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated Provide 0.033 inch (0.84 mm) where
not otherwise shown.
G. Runner Tracks: J profile track with long edge length, but at least 2 inches (51 mm) long
and matching studs in depth.
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated.
H. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and
contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire resistance
rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to
accommodate depth of studs.
of the following:
a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System.
b. Grace Construction Products; FlameSafe FlowTrak System.
c. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.
d. Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD Series.
I. Elevator Hoistway Entrance Struts: J profile jamb strut with long leg length of 3 inches
(76 mm), matching studs in depth, and not less than 0.033 inch (0.84 mm)] thick.
J. Finish Panels: As indicated. Provide Gypsum board where not otherwise shown; refer
to Section 09 29 00.
K. Auxiliary Materials: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with shaft wall manufacturer's
1. Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes
as specified in Section 09 29 00 that comply with gypsum board shaft wall
assembly manufacturer's written instructions for application indicated.
2. Control Expansion Joint:
a. Control Joint Trim: ASTM C1047, provide #93 Zinc Control Joint (ZNCJ) by
Clark Dietrich.

b. Fire Rated Control Joint Backer: 0.0179 inch minimum thickness, ASTM A
653 hot dipped galvanized, ASTM C 645 flat steel strap backer plates with
an affixed cured intumescent strip to maintain fire ratings behind control
joints in fire rated partitions.
1) Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one
of the following:
a) BlazeFrame CJB series (Control Joint Backer) by Clark Dietrich
for horizontal and vertical control joints.
b) Fire Rated Control Joint for Horizontal and Vertical Joints: FAS-
093X by Cemco.
c. Fire Stop Fire Rated Backer: 0.0296 inch minimum thickness, ASTM A 653
hot dipped galvanized, ASTM C 645 flat steel strap backer plate with an
affixed cured intumescent strip to maintain fire ratings behind architectural
reveal moldings in fire rated partitions.
1) Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the
following:
a) Horizontal and Vertical Joint behind Reveals: BlazeFrame FSB
series (Flat Strap Backer) by Clark Dietrick.
3. Reveal Molding: Vertical or horizontal recessed reveal fabricated from extruded
aluminum.
a. Dimension: 1/2 inch wide x 5/8 inch deep (13 mm by 16 mm).
b. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide DRM-
625-50 by Fry Reglet.
4. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.
5. Track Fasteners: Power driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand
loading conditions imposed on shaft wall assemblies without exceeding allowable
design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are
embedded.
a. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion resistant materials, with
allowable load or strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-
ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to the design load, as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488/E 488M conducted by a qualified
testing agency.
b. Power Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application
indicated, fabricated from corrosion resistant materials, with allowable load
capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC70, greater than or equal to
the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a
6. Reinforcing: Galvanized steel reinforcing strips with 0.033 inch (0.84 mm)
minimum thickness of base metal (uncoated).
7. Acoustical Sealant: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining,
gunnable synthetic rubber sealant complying with requirements specified in
Section 07 90 20.
8. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced glass or slag mineral fiber blanket
complying with ASTM C 665 for Type I, produced by combining thermosetting
resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
9. Gypsum Board Cants:
a. Gypsum Board Panels: Refer to Section 09 29 00, Type X, 1/2 inch or 5/8
inch (13 mm or 16 mm) panels.
b. Adhesive: Laminating adhesive; refer to Section 09 29 00.
c. Nonload Bearing Steel Framing: Refer to Section 09 29 50.

d. Steel Reinforcing Strip: Refer to Section 05 50 00.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the work. Examine panels
before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Sprayed Fire Resistive Materials: Coordinate with gypsum board shaft wall assemblies
so both elements of work remain complete and undamaged. Patch or replace sprayed
fire resistive materials removed or damaged during installation of shaft wall assemblies
to comply with requirements specified in Section 07 81 00.
B. After sprayed fire resistive materials are applied, remove to extent necessary for
installation of gypsum board shaft wall assemblies and without reducing the fire resistive
material thickness below that which is required to obtain fire resistance rating indicated.
Protect remaining fire resistive materials from damage.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install gypsum board shaft wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire resistance
rated assemblies indicated and manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Do not bridge building expansion joints with shaft wall assemblies; frame both sides of
expansion joints with furring and other support.
C. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft wall assemblies around openings
and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures,
equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, wall-mounted door stops, and similar items
that cannot be supported directly by shaft wall assembly framing.
1. Elevator Hoistway: At elevator hoistway entrance door frames, provide jamb struts
on each side of door frame.
2. Reinforcing: Provide where items attach directly to shaft wall assembly as
indicated on Drawings; accurately position and secure behind at least one layer of
face panel.
D. Integrate stair hanger rods with shaft wall system by locating cavity of system as
necessary to enclose rods.
E. Penetrations: At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire resistance rating of shaft wall
assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and
fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons and floor
indicators, and similar items.

F. Isolate shaft wall system from transfer of structural loading to system, both horizontally
and vertically and to prevent cracking of panels while maintaining continuity of fire rated
construction. Provide slip or cushioned type joints to attain lateral support and avoid
axial loading. Comply with details shown and with manufacturer's instructions.
G. Seal gypsum board shaft walls at perimeter which abuts other work and at joints and
penetrations. Install acoustical sealant to withstand dislocation by air pressure
differential between shaft and external spaces; comply with manufacturer's instructions
and ASTM C 919.
H. Firestop Tracks: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire resistance rated
assembly indicated.
I. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings but not fewer than
according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect while
maintaining fire resistance rating of gypsum board shaft wall assemblies.
J. Sound Rated Shaft Wall Assemblies: Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical
sealant at perimeter of each assembly where it abuts other work and at joints and
penetrations within each assembly.
K. Gypsum Board Cants: At projections into shaft exceeding 4 inches (102 mm) and where
indicated, install gypsum board cants covering tops of projections.
1. Slope cant panels at least 75 degrees from horizontal. Set base edge of panels in
adhesive and secure top edges to shaft walls at 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. with
screws fastened to shaft wall framing.
2. Where nonload bearing steel framing is required to support gypsum board cants,
install framing at 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. and extend studs from the projection to
shaft wall framing.
L. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more
than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 09 30 13
CERAMIC TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Ceramic mosaic tile.

2. Unglazed porcelain floor or wall tile.
3. Glazed or unglazed wall tile.
4. Quarry tile
5. Waterproof membrane.
6. Crack isolation membrane.
7. Metal transitions.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. High-Performance Tile Grout: A factory-prepared grouting material mixture of cement

and other ingredients, including a redispersible latex/polymer powder, to which only
water is added at the jobsite, or a liquid latex additive.
B. Improved Modified Dry-Set Mortar (Thinset): Modified Dry-Set Mortar with a minimum
bond strength of 300 psi to impervious ceramic tile.
C. Large and Heavy Tile (LHT): Any tile material weighing 5 lbs./sq. ft. or greater, or any
tile with a least horizontal dimension of 15 inches or more.
D. Modified Dry-Set Mortar for Large and Heavy Tile (LHT): Formerly “Medium Bed
Mortar,” is a modified dry-set mortar formulated to have a bond coat thickness between
3/32 and 1/2 inch after tile embedment, and declared as an “LHT” setting material by
the manufacturer based on these characteristics.
E. Modified Dry-Set Mortar (Thinset): A factory-prepared setting material mixture of

cement and other ingredients, including a redispersible latex/polymer powder, to which
only water is added at the jobsite, or a liquid latex additive.
B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for ceramic tiles at shower enclosures.
1. Include plans, elevations, component details, and trim details.

2. Indicate materials and profiles of each item.
Ceramic Tiling 09 30 13 - 1
3. Show fittings, joinery, penetrations, fasteners, anchorages, plumbing fixtures,

and other accessory items.
C. Samples:
1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. For
ceramic mosaic tile in color blend patterns, provide samples of each color blend.
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at site.

1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by
other trades.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
1. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation.

2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard-grade tile that complies with
ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with
ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards
referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and
other requirements specified.
2.2 TILE PRODUCTS
A. Factory-Mounted Ceramic Mosaic Tile:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on

Drawings.
2. Composition: Impervious natural clay or porcelain.
3. Certification: Tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency.
4. Module Size: As indicated by product designations on Drawings.
5. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
6. Face: As indicated by product designations on Drawings.
7. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: For products on floor surfaces, not less than
0.42.
8. Finish: As indicated by product designations on Drawings.
9. Tile Color and Pattern: As indicated on Drawings.

10. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.
B. Unglazed Porcelain Floor or Wall Tile:

Drawings.
2. Certification: Tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency.
4. Face Size Variation: Rectified.
5. Thickness: As indicated by product designations on Drawings, but not less than
3/8 inch.
7. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: For products on floor surfaces, not less than
0.42.
9. Grout Color: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Glazed or Unglazed Wall Tile:

Drawings.
2. Module Size: As indicated by product designations on Drawings.
3. Face Size Variation: Rectified.
6. Finish: As indicated by product designations on Drawings.
8. Grout Color: As indicated on Drawings.
D. Quarry Tile: Square edged quarry tile as scheduled on Finish Schedule.

1. Wearing Surface: Abrasive aggregate embedded in surface.
2. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42 wet.
3. Tile Color and Pattern: As scheduled in Finish Schedule.
4. Grout Color: As scheduled in Finish Schedule.
5. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where
applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes
selected from standard shapes in sizes as scheduled in Finish Schedule:
a. Base: Coved with surface bullnose top edge except where wall tile is
shown above base, face size as scheduled.
b. Wainscot Cap: Surface bullnose except provide flush tile for Wainscot Cap
for Flush Conditions flat tile for conditions where tile wainscot is shown
flush with wall surface above it, same size as adjoining flat tile.
2.3 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE
A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10 and is
recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement
and accessories recommended by manufacturer.
1. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex

rubber or elastomeric polymer and continuous fabric reinforcement. Provide
membrane approved by IAPMO for use in showers and shower pans

following:
1) Custom Building Products; Redgard
2) Laticrete International, Inc; Laticrete Hydroban 9235 Waterproof
Membrane.
3) MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic Aqua Defense
2.4 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE
A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, that complies
with ANSI A118.12 for high performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for
the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by
manufacturer.
B. Chlorinated Polyethylene Sheet: Nonplasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on

both sides with nonwoven polyester fabric; 0.030-inch nominal thickness.
a. Noble Company (The); Nobleseal CIS.
C. Fabric-Reinforced, Modified-Bituminous Sheet: Self-adhering, modified-bituminous

sheet with fabric reinforcement facing; 0.040-inch nominal thickness.
a. Custom Building Products; Crack Buster Pro-Crack Prevention Mat

Underlayment.
b. Laticrete Blue 92
c. MAPEI Corporation; Mapeguard 2 or Mapesonic 2.
D. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or

elastomeric polymer and fabric reinforcement.

a. Custom Building Products; 9240 Waterproofing and Anti-Fracture
Membrane.
b. Laticrete International, Inc; Laticrete Blue 92 Anti-Fracture Membrane.
c. MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic HPG with MAPEI Fiberglass Mesh.
2.5 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Modified Dry-Set Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.4. For use with standard tile.

a. ARDEX Americas.
b. Bostik, Inc.
c. Custom Building Products.
d. Laticrete International, Inc.
e. MAPEI Corporation.
f. TEC; H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc.
2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix to which only water must be added at

Project site.
3. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.
B. Improved Modified Dry-Set Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.15 for Large and Heavy Tile
(LHT): Provide product that is approved by manufacturer for application thickness of
1/2 inch.

a. MegaLite; Custom Building Products.
b. 257 Titanium; Laticrete International, Inc.
c. UltraLite S2; MAPEI Corporation.
2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix to which only water must be added at

Project site.
3. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.
2.6 GROUT MATERIALS
A. High-Performance Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7.

a. FL Grout; ARDEX Americas.

b. Prism Sure-Color Grout; Custom Building Products.
c. PermaColor Select; Laticrete International, Inc.
d. Ultracolor Plus FA; MAPEI Corporation.
2. Polymer Type: Dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients.
3. Where joints size is 1/8 inch or less, use unsanded grout. Where joints are
greater than 1/8 inch, use sanded grout.
B. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less.

a. WA Grout; ARDEX Americas.

b. CEG Lite; Custom Building Products.
c. SpectraLOCK ProPremium; Laticrete International, Inc.
d. Kerapoxy; MAPEI Corporation.
2.7 THRESHOLDS
A. Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between

adjacent floor finishes.
1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch
(1.5 mm) above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of
threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) or less above adjacent
floor surface.
B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503/C 503M, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10

according to ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241/C 241M and with honed finish.
1. Description: Uniform, fine to medium grained white stone with gray veining.
A. Manufactured Shower Pan System: Prefabricated shower pan fabricated for each
application with 2 percent slope, ADA-complaint, with factory-applied waterproofing
and crack-suppression system specified in this Section.
1. Basis of Design: ShowerSlope as manufactured by Custom Building Products or
by KBRS Hard Core with compliant waterproofing system, compatible with
materials specified in this Section. Provide with drain shown or as specified in
Division 22.
B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland

cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting
materials for installations indicated.
C. Metal Isolation Shapes, Edge and Trim Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile
and setting-bed thickness, designed specifically for application indicated; stainless-
steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products scheduled

in Transition Schedule on Drawings and as follows:
a. Floor Sealer: Outside corners: Schluter Rondec
b. Wainscot cap: Schluter Rondec
c. Metal nosing: Schluter Trep-E
d. Locations specified in drawings: Schluter Jolly
D. Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color
or appearance of grout.

a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company.

b. Custom Building Products.
c. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
d. TEC; H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are
incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other
substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness
tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with bonded mortar bed or
thinset mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for
installations indicated.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with
thinset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically
recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.
B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced

mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward
drains.
C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended
and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as
those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended,
either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
3.3 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for
TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of
the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are
referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and
apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.
1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile
installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:
a. Tile floors in wet areas.

b. Tile floors consisting of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger.
c. Tile floors consisting of rib-backed tiles.
B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form
complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work
neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint
alignments.
C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without
marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in
items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and
other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary or indicated to eliminate

exposed tile edges.
E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting bed thickness so that
tiles are flush.
F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work
and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile
work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint
widths unless otherwise indicated.
G. Joint Widths: Install tile with joint widths recommended by the manufacturer for
products indicated.
H. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions
indicated.
I. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including
control, contraction, and isolation joints where indicated but not greater than 30 feet on
center
1. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not
saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
2. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly
above them.
3. Install control and expansion joints in accordance with TCNA Handbook Method
No. EJ171.
J. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated. If not indicated, install where exposed
edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of
tile.
K. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to
grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as floor has penetrated grout
joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
L. Install tile backing panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and
manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use modified dry-
set mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written
instructions.
M. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written

instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded
securely to substrate.
N. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's
written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely
to substrate.
3.4 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION
A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written

instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded
securely to substrate.
B. Allow waterproofing to cure and verify by testing that it is watertight before installing tile
or setting materials over it.
3.5 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's
written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely
to substrate.
B. Allow crack isolation membrane to cure before installing tile or setting materials over it.
3.6 THINSET INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: At large and heavy tile provide minimum ½ inch
thick mortar bed.
1. Slabs-On-Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, TCNA F113; thinset mortar.
a. Thinset Mortar: Modified dry-set mortar typically. Use improved modified

dry-set mortar approved for LHT applications and for large and heavy tile.
b. Grout: High-performance grout.
2. Restroom and Servery Floors on Slabs-On-Grade: TCNA F113; thinset mortar.

dry-set mortar approved for LHT applications for large and heavy tile.
b. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.
3. Elevated Slabs: Unless otherwise indicated, TCNA F125-Full; thinset mortar on

crack isolation or waterproofing membrane.

4. Restroom and Servery Area Floors on Elevated Slabs: TCNA F125-Full; thinset
mortar on crack isolation membrane.

b. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.
B. Stair Installations: Basis of Design products by Custom Building Products. Other

acceptable manufacturers include Mapei, Laticrete, and Ardex will be acceptable
pending review of proposed products and systems by Architect.
1. Bonding Primer to Adhere System to Stair Tread and Riser Substrates: Basis of
Design: MBP Multi-Surface Bonding Primer by Custom Building Products
1. Bond Coat: Epoxy Mortar: Basis of Design: EBM Lite Epoxy Bonding Mortar by
Custom Building Products
2. Cement Board: As specified in Section 09 21 16. Thickness: ¼-inch. Basis of
Design: Wonder Board Lite by Custom Building Products
3. Crack Suppression Membrane: Basis of Design: Crack Buster Pro self-adhering
membrane by Custom Building Products
4. Improved Modified Dry-Set Mortar: Thickness: Minimum ½ inch. Basis of Design:
MegaLite Ultimate Crack Suppression Mortar by Custom Building Products.
5. Tile: As scheduled
6. Grout: Color as scheduled. Basis of Design: Prism by Custom Building Products.
C. Wall Installations:
1. Dry Locations: Unless otherwise indicated, TCNA W244C or TCNA W244F;

thinset mortar on cementitious backer units or fiber-cement backer board.

D. Shower Wall Installations:
1. Wet Locations: TCNA B415; thinset mortar on waterproof membrane over

cementitious backer units or fiber-cement backer board.

b. Grout: High-performance or epoxy grout.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 09 51 13
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit grid layout and related dimensioning, splicing, junctions with
adjacent work or ceiling finishes, interrelation of mechanical and electrical items related
to system.
C. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish
required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.
1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch-square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and
texture.
2. Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch-long
Samples of each type, finish, and color.
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the
items involved:
1. Ceiling suspension system members.
2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached.
3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
a. Furnish layouts for cast in place anchors, clips, and other ceiling
attachment devices whose installation is specified in other Sections.
4. Carrying channels or other supplemental support for hanger wire attachment
where conditions do not permit installation of hanger wires at required spacing.
5. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels.
6. Items penetrating finished ceiling and ceiling-mounted items including the
following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Diffusers.
c. Grilles.
d. Speakers.
e. Sprinklers.
f. Access panels.
g. Perimeter moldings.
Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 1

7. Show operation of hinged and sliding components covered by or adjacent to
B. Product Test Reports: Submit for each acoustical panel ceiling, for tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency or a qualified testing agency.
C. Evaluation Reports: Submit ICC-ES report for each acoustical panel ceiling suspension
system and anchor and fastener type.
D. Field quality control reports.
A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings.

A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project

site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned
space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity,
temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a
stabilized moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any
way.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are
enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above
ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained
at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours
before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing

1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
A. Glass-Fiber-Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.
B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration

indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types,
patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products

equivalent to those scheduled in Finish Schedule on Drawings or equivalent products
1. USG Company
2. CertainTeed
2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung

metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated
that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M.
1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M requirements for

"Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-
humidity finishes are indicated.
B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in
ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with
seismic design requirements.
1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or
loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain,
without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as
determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable,
conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

a. Type: Postinstalled expansion or bonded anchors.

b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition.
2. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for

application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or
other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated and with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by
ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190,
C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following
requirements:
1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft
temper.
2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic.
3. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load
(ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of
wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch-diameter wire.
D. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
E. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch-
thick, galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating
designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch-diameter bolts.
F. Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to

accommodate seismic forces.
G. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate

seismic forces.
H. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure
acoustical panels in place.
2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Drawings or equivalent products by one of the following:
1. USG Company
2. CertainTeed.
B. Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel
sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to
ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation; with prefinished flanges.
1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.

2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type.

2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM

B. Extruded-Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's

extruded-aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated or referenced by
manufacturer's designations, including splice plates, corner pieces, and attachment
and other clips, complying with seismic design requirements and the following:
1. Aluminum Alloy: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and

finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength
and durability properties of aluminum extrusions complying with ASTM B 221 for
Alloy and Temper 6063-T5.
2. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
3. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils.
Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M and coating manufacturer's written
instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.
2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and
effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and
openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative
assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1. Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant.

2. Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable,
synthetic-rubber sealant.
3. Acoustical sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which

acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and
anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.
B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet,
moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border
widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at
borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and
seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions
and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension
system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to
support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension
members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with
a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to
inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for
substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or
elevated temperatures.
5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate
framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are
secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and
the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them
to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten
hangers to postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated
fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.
7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing
required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment
of hanger wires.
8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported
directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than
8 inches from ends of each member.
11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads
within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area
and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.

1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical

legs of moldings before they are installed.
2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and
not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a
tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
D. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with
one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-
system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations
to provide a neat, precise fit.
1. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by
flanges of suspension-system runners and moldings.
2. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with
bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.
3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system members with box-shaped
flanges, install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension-
system surfaces and panel faces flush with bottom face of runners.
4. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of
exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose
by acoustical panel manufacturer.
5. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for
fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings,
and suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for
cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components
that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of
damage.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 09 51 84
ACOUSTICAL BAFFLE CEILING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. PET “felt” acoustical ceiling baffles ACB-1 through ACB-4.

2. Installation of ceiling suspension system specified elsewhere.
1. Section 05 43 00 “Slotted Channel Framing” for Acoustical Baffle Ceiling

suspension system.
2. Divisions 21, 23, and 26 Sections for sprinklers, air-distribution components, and
light fixtures.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical baffle ceiling system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures,
HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
B. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish
required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:
1. Acoustical Ceiling Baffle: Set of 12-inch- long Samples of each type and color.
2. Suspension System Members: 12-inch- long Sample of each type.
3. Baffle Spacer Filler Strips: Set of 6-inch- long Samples of each type, finish, and
color.
A. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical baffle ceiling, for tests performed by a
Acoustical Baffle Ceiling System 09 51 84 - 1

B. Evaluation Reports: For acoustical baffle ceiling and components and anchor and
fastener type.
A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Acoustical Baffle Ceiling System Components: Quantity of each, baffle and

spacer equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program for testing indicated.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings.

2. Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not
indicated, as directed by Architect.
3. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before start of final unit of Work.
6. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as
a standard for judging the completed Work.
A. Deliver baffle ceilings, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site
in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space
where they are protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature
extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical baffles, permit them to reach room temperature and a
stabilized moisture content.
C. Handle baffle ceilings, suspension system components, and accessories carefully to

avoid damaging units and finishes in any way.

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install acoustical baffle ceiling system until
space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally
dry, work above ceilings is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining
ambient temperature and humidity conditions at levels intended for occupants after
Project completion during the remainder of the construction period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of

preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified

agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design Products: Refer to Interior Finish Schedule on Drawings.
B. Colors, Textures, Thickness, and Patterns: Refer to Interior Finish Schedule on

Drawings.
C. Source Limitations:
1. Acoustical Baffles: Obtain each type from single source from single
manufacturer.
2. Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single
manufacturer.
2.3 ACOUSTICAL BAFFLE CEILING SYSTEM
A. Acoustical Baffle Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard baffle configuration

indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types,
acoustical ratings, and light reflectance unless otherwise indicated.
1. ASTM E1264 Type XX – Other; PET Felt panels, unfaced, pigmented, with
surface-burning characteristics for flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-
developed index of 50 or less, as determined by testing per ASTM E 84.
2. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which
face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface per ASTM E 795.

B. Fabrication: Manufacturer's standard units of size, profile, and edge treatment

indicated, indicated to mount as shown and be securely retained on slotted channel
carriers without separate fasteners, and finished to comply with requirements indicated.
C. Splices: Construction same as ceilings, in lengths 8 to 12 inches; with manufacturer's

standard finish.
D. End Caps: Manufacturer's standard material; fabricated to fit and conceal exposed
ends of baffles.
E. Filler Strips: Manufacturer's standard material; fabricated to uninterruptedly and

uniformly space voids between baffles.
2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Metal Suspension Systems: Slotted Metal Channel Framing as specified in Section

05 43 00.
B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in
ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, Direct Hung, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or
loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain,
without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as
determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable,
a. Type: Postinstalled expansion anchors.

b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition.
c. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with
ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Group 1 Alloy 304 or 316 for bolts;
Alloy 304 or 316 for anchor.
d. Corrosion Protection: Components fabricated from nickel-copper-alloy
rods complying with ASTM B 164 for UNS No. N04400 alloy.
2. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Not permitted.
C. Wire Braces and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
a. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc

coating, soft temper.
2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load
(ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of
wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- diameter wire.
D. Slotted Channel Framing: Factory finished with matte-black baked enamel finish.
E. Carrier Splices: Same, profile, and finish as for carriers.

2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Access Panels: For access at locations indicated, provide door hinge assembly,
retainer clip, and retainer bar, assembled with ceiling panels and carrier sections into
access doors of required size, permitting upward or downward opening.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates
to which acoustical baffle ceiling system attach or abut, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling
installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of acoustical baffle ceiling system.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical baffles to balance border
widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width baffles at
borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans and on Coordination
Drawings.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's
"Ceiling Systems Handbook."
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension
system.
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to
support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension
members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with
a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to
inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for
substrate to which hangers are attached and for type of hanger involved.
5. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing
required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment
of hanger wires.

6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.

7. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
8. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported
directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than
8 inches from ends of each member.
9. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads
within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum
of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for
hangers but without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs.
Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.
D. Install suspension system carriers so they are aligned and securely interlocked with
one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
E. Cut baffles for accurate fit at borders and at interruptions and penetrations by other
work through ceilings.
F. Install baffles in coordination with slotted channel suspension system.
1. Align joints in adjacent courses to form uniform, straight joints parallel to room
axis in both directions unless otherwise indicated.
2. Fit adjoining units to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut units for accurate fit at
borders and around construction penetrating ceiling.
3. Install with butt joints using internal splices
4. Where metal ends are visible, install end caps unless trim is indicated.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical baffle ceiling system, including trim and edge
moldings after removing strippable, temporary protective covering if any.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for stripping of temporary protective

covering, cleaning, and touchup of minor finish damage.
C. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and
repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage, including dented and bent
units.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 09 64 66
ATHLETIC WOOD FLOORING SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes Add Alternate Wood Flooring in lieu of resilient athletic flooring specified
in Section 09 65 66 “Resilient Athletic Flooring”:
1. Sheet vapor retardant on substrate surface.
2. Plywood sheathing on cushion blocks.
3. Hardwood flooring.
4. Surface sanding and finish coating.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. APA - American Plywood Association.
B. MFMA - Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association.
C. NFPA - National Forest Products Association.
D. SFPA - Southern Forest Products Association.
E. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
A. Product Data:
1. Submit descriptive literature, specifications and recommended installation instructions
for resilient blocks, flooring materials, floor coating, game inserts, sockets, and
devices.
2. Submit manufacturer's maintenance instructions including recommended cleaning
and stain removal methods, materials, and waxes.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate floor joint pattern, grain direction, and termination details.
2. Indicate provisions for expansion and contraction, base, base corner details, game
inserts or socket devices.
3. Indicate location, size, design, and color of colored game lines.
C. Samples: Submit 18" x 18" samples illustrating floor finish color, game line colors, and
sheen.
A. Certificates:
1. Furnish MFMA certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
2. Furnish certification that flooring meets DIN 60 percent shock absorption.
Athletic Wood Flooring Systems 09 64 66 - 1

1. Company specializing in manufacturing products specified within minimum three
years documented experience.
B. Installer Qualification: Minimum of three years documented experience in applying work

specified and approved by manufacturer.
A. Deliver materials in time to permit moisture content to stabilize to ambient conditions.
1. Do not install wood flooring until wet construction work is completed.
2. Do not install flooring until moisture content of concrete subfloor has stabilized at 12
percent maximum and ambient air at installation space is not less than 65 degrees F.
3. Provide permanent heat, light, and ventilation prior to installation.
4. Maintain minimum room temperature of 65 degrees F for period of two days prior to
delivery of materials during and after installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Aacer Hardwood Flooring
2. AA, Inc.
3. Connor/AGA.
4. Harris-Tarkett, Inc.
5. Horner Flooring Company.
6. Robbins, Inc.
7. Action Floor Systems
B. Basis of Design Product, Gymnasium Floor: Robbins Bio-Cushion Classic System.
C. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.

1.1
A. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient wood flooring shall comply with requirements of
FloorScore Standard.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Wood Flooring: Species and grade stamped on underside of each piece, complying with
following:
1. Species: Northern MFMA White hard maple, KD.
2. Grade: First
3. Cut: Plain sawn.
4. Moisture Content: 10 to 13 percent.
5. Actual Thickness:
a. Gymnasium: 25/32"
6. Edge: Tongue and groove.

7. End: Tongue and groove.

8. Length: Random.
B. Plywood Underlayment, 2-layers: APA rated Sheathing, Exposure I, Fir or Southern Pine
1/2 thick.
C. Ventilating Base:
1. Molded rubber, 4" high with toe, ventilating type, with adhesives and accessories.
2. Color: Black. As selected by Architect.
D. Cushion Blocks:
1. 3/4" Resilient pads, rubber material, air channels for resiliency, compressible to
1/16" under 40 psi load with full and immediate recovery.
2. Acceptable Product: Robbins Bio-Cushion Pad.
E. Impact Isolator: As recommended by flooring manufacturer.
F. Divider Strip: Angle, mill aluminum as recommended by manufacturer.
G. Threshold: Extruded, mill finish aluminum as recommended by manufacturer.
H. Sheet Vapor Retarder: 6 mil thick black polyethylene; with 2" wide self adhesive,
reinforced tape for lap joint sealing.
I. Fasteners:
1. Subfloor: 1" coated staples and adhesive as recommended by flooring manufacturer.
2. Flooring: 2" barbed cleats or staples.
J. Adhesives: Manufacturer’s standard for application indicated.

1. Use adhesive and primer, if any, that have a VOC content of 100 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.4 FINISH
A. Floor Finish Coating:

1. Two component polyurethane, type recommended by flooring manufacturer.
2. Acceptable Product: Robbins Miracle Oil Modified Polyurethane Sealer and Finish.
B. Marking Paint: Compatible with floor finish and as recommended by flooring

manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
B. Verify that subfloor surface has smooth steel trowel finish and is flat to tolerance of 1/8" in
10'-0" maximum.
C. Verify that concrete substrate moisture content is 15 percent maximum.
3.2 PREPARATION

A. Broom clean substrate.
3.3 INSTALLATION - FLOOR SYSTEM
A. Install floor system in accordance with MFMA Hardwood Flooring Installation Manual.
B. Place vapor retardant, lap edges an ends 4" minimum, tape seal and spot glue in place.
C. Place two layers of plywood over substrate. Secure cushion blocks to underside of lower
layer of plywood at 12" on center and at each end.
D. Place lower plywood subfloor perpendicular to intended finish flooring direction. Stagger
joints and space 1/4" apart.
E. Place upper plywood subfloor diagonal to lower subfloor panels. Stagger joints and
spacing 1/4" apart. Secure upper panel with adhesive and staples placed 6" on center at
panel perimeter and 12" on center throughout interior of panel.
F. Machine nail maple finish flooring with end joints driven up with spacing provided for
prevailing humidly conditions. Provide 2" expansion voids at perimeter and at vertical
obstructions.
3.4 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Provide divider strips or threshold at centerline of door openings and where flooring
terminates with other floor areas as shown and scheduled.
B. Install base at floor perimeter to cove expansion space in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions. Miter inside and outside corners.
C. Install floor game inserts and cover plates to depth sufficient to ensure flush top surface
with sanded floor surface.
3.5 FINISHING
A. Sand flooring to smooth even finish with no evidence of sander marks. Take precautions
to contain dust. Remove dust by vacuum.
B. Mask off adjacent surfaces.
C. Apply three finish coats in accordance with floor finish manufacturer's instructions.
D. Apply first coat, allow to dry and buff with steel wool to remove irregularities. Vacuum
clean and wipe with damp cloth. Apply second coat. Allow to dry. Lightly buff with steel
wool and vacuum clean.
E. Apply colored game lines, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, 2" wide.
F. Apply last coat of finish.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 09 65 13.13
RUBBER BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Rubber base.
2. Rubber molding accessories.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less
than 12 inches long.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RUBBER BASE

the following:
1. AB; American Biltrite.

2. Allstate Rubber Corp.
3. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
4. Burke Mercer Flooring Products, Division of Burke Industries Inc.
5. Flexco.
6. Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company.
7. Mondo Rubber International, Inc.
8. Nora Systems, Inc.
9. Roppe Corporation, USA.
10. VPI, LLC, Floor Products Division.
B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic).
1. Group: I (solid, homogeneous).

2. Style and Location:
a. Style B, Cove: Provide in areas indicated.
C. Thickness: 0.125 inch.
Rubber Base and Accessories 09 65 13.13 - 1

D. Height: As indicated on Drawings.
E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
F. Outside Corners: Preformed.
G. Inside Corners: Job formed.
H. Colors: As indicated on Drawings.
2.2 RUBBER MOLDING ACCESSORY

the following:
1. Roppe Corporation, USA.

2. VPI, LLC, Floor Products Division.
B. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Locations: Provide rubber molding accessories in areas indicated.
D. Colors and Patterns: As indicated on Drawings.
2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for

resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.
1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion

of resilient products.
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
C. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space
where they are to be installed.
D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by

resilient products.

3.2 RUBBER BASE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces,
and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops
of adjacent pieces aligned.
D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of
resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.
H. Job-Formed Corners:
1. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with
returns not less than 4 inches in length.
a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints.
3.3 RUBBER ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.
B. Resilient Stair Accessories:
1. Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread
contours.
2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece.
3. For treads installed as separate, equal-length units, install to produce a flush joint
between units.
C. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to

substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor
covering that would otherwise be exposed.
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient
products.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 09 65 19
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Luxury vinyl floor tile.
1. Division 09 Section “Preinstallation Testing for Flooring” for substrate moisture and
alkalinity tests to be performed on concrete substrates.
2. Division 09 Section "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer
strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor coverings.

1. Review methods and procedures related to resilient tile installation including, but
not limited to, the following:
a. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures.
b. Review subfloor preparation procedures.
2. Review concrete substrate requirements for conditions affecting performance of
flooring, including results of moisture and alkalinity tests.
3. Review locations and frequency of moisture and alkalinity tests.

A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals: Submit the supporting documentation with the

completed worksheet:
1. Laboratory Test Reports: Submit test reports for adhesives and sealants, indicating
compliance with requirements for low mitting materials.
2. Low Emitting Materials: Submit VOC content limits and emissions data, and
description of testing or certification for site installed interior materials and
products.
3. Site Waste Management: Submit tabulating and supporting for salvaged, recycled,
and reused building waste materials.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit for each type of resilient flooring. Include floor covering layouts,
edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
1. Show details of special patterns.
Resilient Tile Flooring 09 65 19 - 1

D. Samples for Verification: Submit full size units of each color and pattern of floor tile
required showing full range of variations anticipated.
A. Test Reports: From Testing Agency for pre-installation substrate moisture and alkalinity
tests.
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and
that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
1. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type,
color, and pattern of floor tile installed.
A. Installer Qualifications: Entity having minimum 5 years documented experience who

employs trained or certified by manufacturer for required installation techniques and are
competent in techniques required for resilient flooring and seaming method.
1. Engage an installer who employs workers trained or certified by resilient flooring
manufacturer for installation techniques required.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to

demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Coordinate mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections.
a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. for each type, color, and pattern in locations
directed by Architect.
A. Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened cartons and

containers, each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and
shipping and handling instructions.

B. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not
less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) or more than 90 degrees F (32 degrees C).
1. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less
than 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) or more than 95 degrees F (35 degrees C), in spaces
to receive floor tile during the following periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within
range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 degrees F (13 degrees C) or
more than 95 degrees F (35 degrees C).
C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.
D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.
E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type,
color, and pattern of floor tile installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. (a FUSION Partner).
2. Congoleum Corporation.
3. Mannington Mills, Inc.
4. Patcraft; a division of Shaw Industries, Inc.
5. Tarkett (a FUSION Partner).
6. TOLI International.
7. VPI Corporation.

A. Fire Test Response Characteristics: For resilient floor tile, as determined by testing
identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements.

3. Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) 2012.
2.3 SUSTAINABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Sustainability: Comply with requirements of Section 01 81 13.
B. Low Emitting Materials: Provide products complying with applicable regulations

regarding toxic and hazardous materials that complies with VOC content limits and
emissions and chemical component limits.
1. Adhesives and Sealants: Comply with the specified content limits.
C. Construction Waste Management: Comply with building site waste management and
construction waste management plans for disposal of building materials. Maintain record
and receipts indicated in management plans.
D. Source Limitations:
1. Tile: Obtain floor products of same type and color or finish from one source or
producer. Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.
2. Sheet Materials: Obtain sheet materials from same production run and of
consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.
3. Setting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar,
adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate
from one source or producer.
2.4 LUXURY VINYL FLOOR TILE
A. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1700.
B. Basis of Design Product: As indicated in Interior Finish Schedule on Drawings.

1. Thickness: 0.120 inch (3.0 mm).
2. Size: As indicated in Interior Finish Schedule on Drawings.
3. Colors and Patterns: As indicated in Interior Finish Schedule on Drawings.

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex modified, portland cement based
or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by floor tile
manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers
to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.
C. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor polish products recommended by floor tile
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content
and other conditions affecting performance of the work.
1. Verify finishes of substrates comply with specified tolerances and requirements
and substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits
that interfere with adhesion of floor tile.
3.2 PREINSTALLATION TESTING
A. General: Perform preinstallation testing under provisions of Section 09 05 62.
B. Submit floor covering and adhesive manufacturer’s written acceptance of the concrete
floor substrate as represented by moisture and alkalinity testing.
C. Submit copies of test reports and flooring manufacturer’s written acceptance of substrate
conditions to Owner and Architect prior to flooring installation.
D. If test results indicate concrete subfloor is not within flooring manufacturers’ acceptable
range, notify Owner and Architect.
E. Moisture Remediation: If substrates fail to meet manufacturer’s recommended moisture,

humidity, and alkalinity levels or ranges, provide moisture vapor emissions control
system as specified in Section 09 05 63.
F. Proceed with floor covering installation only after substrates past testing.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure

adhesion of resilient products.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and substances incompatible with adhesives and
contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by
floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Perform additional moisture and vapor tests recommended by manufacturer. If
substrates fail to meet manufacturers recommended moisture content, remediate
moisture. Proceed with floor covering installation after substrates past testing.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install floor tiles until materials are the same temperature as space where they
are to be installed.
1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation
materials into spaces where they will be installed.
E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates covered by resilient
floor tile.
3.4 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor
offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to
avoid using cut widths that equal less than one/half tile at perimeter.
1. Lay tiles in pattern indicated.
C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same
sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked,
chipped, or deformed tiles.
D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent
fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend
floor tiles to center of door openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future
cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or nonpermanent
marking device.
G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint
covers, and similar items in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and
pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile
edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.
H. Adhere floor tiles to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at
joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

3.5 SITE SUSTAINABILITY
A. Construction Waste Management: Comply with requirements of Section 01 74 19.

1. Waste Disposal: Dispose of product waste, including accessories and used items,
by recycling or reusing waste materials.
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp op surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction
period.
D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from floor tile surfaces before
applying liquid floor polish.
1. Apply five coats.
E. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 09 65 66
RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Sheet vinyl athletic flooring.
B. See Section 09 64 66 “Athletic Wood Flooring Systems” for add alternate in lieu of
resilient athletic sheet flooring.
1. Section 09 65 13 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for wall base and accessories
installed with resilient athletic flooring.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of flooring with floor inserts for gymnasium equipment.
B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details and locations of the following:
1. Borders.
2. Floor patterns.
3. Layout, colors, widths, and dimensions of game lines and markers.
4. Seam locations for sheet flooring.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each type, color, and pattern specified, 6-
inch- square in size and of the same thickness indicated for the Work.
1. Game-Line- and Marker-Paint Samples: Include Sample sets showing game-line-

and marker-paint colors applied to flooring.
2. Seam Samples: For each vinyl sheet flooring color and pattern required; with seam
running lengthwise and in center of 6-by-9-inch Sample applied to a rigid backing
and prepared by Installer for this Project.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of resilient athletic flooring.
1. Game-Line and Marker Paint: Include charts showing available colors and glosses.
Resilient Athletic Flooring 09 65 66 - 1

E. Samples for Verification: For each type, color, and pattern of flooring specified, 6-inch-
square in size and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work.
1. Game-Line- and Marker-Paint Samples: Include Sample sets showing game-line-

and marker-paint colors applied to flooring.
2. Seam Samples: For each vinyl sheet flooring color and pattern required; with seam
running lengthwise and in center of 6-by-9-inch Sample applied to a rigid backing
and prepared by Installer for this Project.
A. Qualification Data: For sheet vinyl flooring Installer.
A. Maintenance Data: For resilient athletic flooring to include in maintenance manuals.
1. Sheet Flooring: Furnish full-width rolls of not less than 10 linear feet for each 500
linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of flooring installed.
A. Sheet Vinyl Flooring Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed
sheet vinyl flooring installations using seaming methods indicated for this Project and
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; who is acceptable
to manufacturer; and whose work has resulted in installations with a record of successful
in-service performance.
A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing
manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storing.
B. Store materials to prevent deterioration.
1. Store tiles on flat surfaces.

2. Store rolls upright.
A. Adhesively Applied Products:

1. Maintain temperatures during installation within range recommended in writing by

manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to
receive flooring 48 hours before installation, during installation, and 48 hours after
installation unless longer period is recommended in writing by manufacturer.
2. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended in
writing by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
3. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation.
4. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after flooring installation unless manufacturer
recommends longer period in writing.
B. Install flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET VINYL FLOORING – WF-1

indicated on Drawings based on Tarkett Omnisports Multi-Use Sports Flooring or
comparable product by one of the following when available meeting requirements
established by Basis of Design product:
1. Amarco Products.
2. Connor Sports.
3. Lonseal, Inc.
4. Gerflor.
B. Description: Sheet vinyl flooring specifically designed for adhered athletic flooring
applications.
C. Sheet Vinyl Flooring with Backing: ASTM F2772 Class 3.
1. Type: Dual-durometer foam-backed sheet vinyl flooring.

2. Wear Layer: ASTM
3. F1303/F410, Type 1, Grade 1
4. Wear-Layer Thickness: Not less than 2 mm.
5. Overall Thickness: Not less than 6.2 mm.
6. Interlayer Material: High density, two layer, dual-durometer, closed cell foamed
plastic.
D. Seaming Method: Heat welded.
E. Roll Size: Not less than 59 inches wide by longest length that is practical to minimize
splicing during installation.
F. Color and Pattern: As indicated by manufacturer's designations in Finish Schedule or

as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compound: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based

formulation approved by flooring manufacturer.
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Manufacturer’s Multi-Poxy Adhesive.
1. Moisture Resistance Limit: 95% relative humidity (RH) when tested according to
ASTM F 2170
2. Coverage Type: Full-spread application for 100% coverage.
C. Heat Welding Rod: As supplied by indoor resilient athletic flooring manufacturer.
1. Color: Blend with resilient athletic flooring color.
D. Game-Line and Marker Paint: Complete system including primer, if any, compatible with
flooring and recommended in writing by flooring and paint manufacturers for use
indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements
specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges,
depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of
resilient products.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion

of flooring.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and
hardeners.
2. Alkalinity Testing: Perform pH testing according to ASTM F710. Proceed with
installation only if pH readings are not less than 7.0 and not greater than 8.5.
3. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft.,
and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas
evenly spaced in installation areas.

a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F1869. Proceed with installation

only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of
water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in-situ probes, ASTM F2170. Proceed with
installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative
humidity level measurement.
C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives
and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended in
writing by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in
substrates.
E. Move flooring and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least
48 hours in advance of installation unless manufacturer recommends a longer period in
writing.
1. Do not install flooring until it is the same temperature as space where it is to be

installed.
F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by flooring immediately before

installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation,
and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.3 FLOORING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Scribe, cut, and fit flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, equipment
anchors, floor outlets, and other interruptions of floor surface.
C. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings unless
D. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future
cutting by repeating subfloor markings on flooring. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining
marking device.
3.4 SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION
A. Unroll sheet flooring and allow it to stabilize before cutting and fitting.
B. Lay out sheet flooring as follows:
1. Maintain uniformity of flooring direction.

2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas,
at least 6 inches away from parallel joints in flooring substrates.
3. Match edges of flooring for color shading at seams.

4. Locate seams according to approved Shop Drawings.
C. Adhere products to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to

comply with adhesive and flooring manufacturers' written instructions, including those for
trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times.
1. Provide completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering
at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface
imperfections.
D. Vinyl Sheet Flooring Seams: Prepare and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with
adjoining flooring surfaces.
1. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F1516. Rout joints and use welding bead
to permanently fuse sections into a seamless flooring.
3.5 GAME LINES AND MARKERS
A. Mask flooring at game lines and markers, and apply paint to produce sharp edges.
Where crossing, break minor game line at intersection; do not overlap lines.
B. Apply game lines and markers in widths and colors according to requirements indicated
on Drawings.
A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing flooring installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from flooring surfaces.

2. Sweep and vacuum flooring thoroughly.
3. Damp-mop flooring to remove marks and soil after time period recommended in
writing by manufacturer.
B. Protect flooring from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction
period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over flooring. Protect flooring with
plywood or hardboard panels to prevent damage from storing or moving objects
over flooring.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 09 67 23
RESINOUS FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Resinous flooring systems, labeled on Drawings as “Epoxy Flooring”.
1. Section 09 05 62 “Preinstallation Testing for Flooring” for substrate moisture, RH,

alkalinity, and porosity tests to be performed on concrete substrates.
1. Review manufacturer's written instructions for substrate preparation and

environmental conditions affecting resinous flooring installation.
2. Review concrete substrate requirements for conditions affecting performance of
flooring, including results of moisture and alkalinity tests.
a. Review locations and frequency of moisture and alkalinity tests.
3. Review details of integral cove bases.

4. Review manufacturer's written instructions for installing resinous flooring
systems.
5. Review protection measures for adjacent construction and installed flooring, floor
drainage requirements, curbs, base details, and so forth.
1. Include manufacturer's technical data, installation instructions, and

recommendations for each resinous flooring component required.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish required.
C. Samples for Verification: For each resinous flooring system required and for each color
and texture specified, 6 inches square, applied to a rigid backing by Installer for this
Project.
Resinous Flooring 09 67 23 - 1
B. Material Certificates: For each resinous flooring component.
C. Material Test Reports: For each resinous flooring system, by a qualified testing
agency.
D. Test Reports: From Testing Agency for pre-installation substrate moisture and
alkalinity tests.
A. Maintenance Data: For resinous flooring to include in maintenance manuals.
B. Record Documents: Showing locations of substrate moisture and alkalinity tests.

Provide markups on floor plan indicating the location of each test and the dates tests
were performed.
A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by

manufacturer.
1. Engage an installer who is certified in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer

as qualified to apply resinous flooring systems indicated.
B. Manufacturer Field Technical Service Representatives: Resinous flooring manufacture

shall retain the services of Field Technical Service Representatives trained specifically
in the installation of the specified system.
1. Field Technical Services Representatives shall be employed by the system

manufacture to assist in the quality assurance and quality control process of the
installation and available to perform field problem solving issues with the installer.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to

demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Apply full-thickness mockups on 96-inch- square floor area in location mutually

agreed upon by Owner and Architect.
a. Include 96-inch length of integral cove base with inside corner.
2. Simulate finished lighting conditions for Architect's review of mockups.


A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing
manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and mixing with
other components.
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written

instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and
other conditions affecting resinous flooring installation.
B. Conditioning Period: Commence minimum 7 days before coating application, is

continuous through application, and continues minimum 3 days after application.
1. During conditioning period, maintain an ambient temperature between 65

degrees F and 85 degrees F (18 degrees C and 30 degrees C) and not more
than 50 percent relative humidity in spaces to receive flooring.
2. After conditioning period, maintain relative humidity and ambient temperature
planned for building occupants.
C. Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate
permanent lighting conditions during resinous flooring installation.
D. Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring installation and for 72 hours after
installation unless manufacturer recommends a longer period.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Written warranty signed by Manufacturer and Applicator in which the Manufacturer and
Applicator agree to repair or replace components of resinous floor installation that fail
in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Minimum one year from date of substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: As schedule in Finish Schedule on Drawings.
B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products scheduled in the Finish

Schedule or equivalent system by one of the following:
1. Crossfield Products Corp.

2. Duraflex, Inc.
3. Dudick/Carboline
4. Sherwin-Williams Company, General Polymers.
5. Sika Corporation; Flooring.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain primary resinous flooring materials, including primers,

resins, hardening agents, grouting coats, and topcoats, from single source from single
manufacturer. Obtain secondary materials, including patching and fill material, joint
sealant, and repair materials, of type and from manufacturer recommended in writing
by manufacturer of primary materials.
A. Fire Test Response Characteristics: Determined by testing identical products

according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. Critical Radiant
Flux Classification of Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
B. Flammability: Self-extinguishing in accordance with ASTM D635.
2.3 RESINOUS FLOORING
A. Resinous Flooring System: Abrasion-, impact-, and chemical-resistant, aggregate-

filled, resin-based monolithic floor surfacing designed to produce a seamless floor and
integral cove base.
B. System Characteristics:
1. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2. Wearing Surface: Textured for slip resistance, smooth, or Manufacturer's
standard wearing surface, as indicated in Flooring Systems Schedule.
3. Overall System Thickness: Not less than 1/4 inch.
C. System Physical Properties: Provide resinous flooring system with the following
minimum physical property requirements when tested in accordance with test methods
indicated:
1. Compressive Yield Strength: 10,000 psi minimum per ASTM C579.

2. Tensile Strength: 2,000 psi minimum in accordance with ASTM C307.
3. Flexural Strength: 4,300 PSI in accordance with ASTM C580
4. Abrasion Resistance: 0.06 gram maximum weight loss in accordance with ASTM
D4060
5. Hardness: 85-90, Shore D in accordance with ASTM D2240.
D. Primer: Four-component epoxy and aggregate troweled mortar base.
E. Undercoat: Three-component pigmented epoxy and aggregate coating.
F. Broadcast aggregate: Colored quartz. Colors as selected by Architect.
G. Body Coats:
1. Resin: Epoxy.
2. Formulation Description: UV-resistant.
3. Type: Clear.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPROVED INSTALLERS
A. Johnson and Sons, Plano, Texas
B. Other approved applicators: As authorized by resinous flooring manufacturer in

accordance with Quality Assurance Article and as approved by Architect and Owner.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements
specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges,
depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of
resinous flooring systems.
3.3 PREINSTALLATION TESTING
A. General: Perform preinstallation testing under provisions of Section 09 05 62.
B. Submit resinous flooring manufacturer’s written acceptance of the concrete floor

substrate as represented by moisture, humidity, and alkalinity testing.
C. Submit copies of test reports and resinous flooring manufacturer’s written acceptance
of substrate conditions to Owner and Architect prior to flooring installation.
D. If test results indicate concrete subfloor is not within flooring manufacturers’ acceptable
range, notify Owner and Architect.
E. Moisture Remediation: If substrates fail to meet manufacturer’s recommended

moisture, humidity, and alkalinity levels or ranges, provide moisture vapor emissions
control system as specified in Section 09 05 63.
F. Proceed with resinous flooring installation only after substrates past testing.
3.4 PREPARATION
A. Prepare and clean substrates in accordance with resinous flooring manufacturer's

written instructions for substrate indicated to ensure adhesion.
B. Concrete Substrates: Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze,

efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other
contaminants incompatible with resinous flooring.
1. Prepare concrete surfaces according to ASTM F 710.

2. Roughen concrete substrates as follows:
a. Shot-blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface,

contains the dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot
by vacuum pickup.
3. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete in accordance with resinous flooring

4. Perform additional moisture and vapor tests recommended by manufacturer. If
substrates fail to meet manufacturers recommended moisture content, remediate
moisture. Proceed with flooring installation after substrates past testing.
C. Patching and Filling: Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in
substrates in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Control Joint Treatment: Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate
cracks to prevent cracks from reflecting through resinous flooring in accordance
with manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Construction and Cold Joints: Treat construction and cold joints as
recommended by manufacturer on horizontal and vertical surfaces.
a. Discontinue resinous floor at vertical and horizontal contraction and

expansion joints by installing backer rod and sealant upon completion of
installation.
1) Sealant: Provide sealant recommended by manufacturer for traffic

conditions and chemical exposures to be encountered in accordance
with Section 07 92 00.
D. Resinous Materials: Mix components and prepare materials in accordance with

resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. Apply components of resinous flooring system in accordance with manufacturer's

written instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness
specified.
1. Coordinate installation of components to provide optimum adhesion of resinous

flooring system to substrate, and optimum intercoat adhesion.
2. Cure resinous flooring components in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions. Prevent contamination during installation and curing processes.
3. Expansion and Isolation Joint Treatment: At substrate expansion and isolation
joints, comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Primer: Apply primer over prepared substrate at spreading rate recommended in

writing by manufacturer.
C. Field-Formed Integral Cove Base: Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces before
applying flooring coats. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions
and details, including those for taping, mixing, priming, troweling, sanding, and
topcoating of cove base. Round internal and external corners.
1. Integral Cove Base: 4 inches high unless otherwise indicated.
D. Self-Leveling Body Coats: Apply self-leveling slurry body coats in thickness specified
for flooring system.
1. Aggregates: Broadcast aggregates at rate recommended in writing by

manufacturer. After resin is cured, remove excess aggregates to provide surface
texture indicated.
E. Troweled or Screeded Body Coats: Apply troweled or screeded body coats in

thickness specified for flooring system. Hand or power trowel and grout to fill voids.
When body coats are cured, remove trowel marks and roughness using method
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
F. Grout Coat: Apply grout coat to fill voids in surface of final body coat.
G. Topcoats: Apply topcoats in number indicated for flooring system specified, at

spreading rates recommended in writing by manufacturer, and to produce wearing
surface specified.
A. Material Sampling: Owner may, at any time and any number of times during resinous
flooring installation, require material samples for testing for compliance with
requirements.
1. Owner will engage an independent testing agency to take samples of materials

being used. Material samples will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in
presence of Contractor.
2. Testing agency will test samples for compliance with requirements, using
applicable referenced testing procedures or, if not referenced, using testing
procedures listed in manufacturer's product data.
3. If test results show applied materials do not comply with specified requirements,
pay for testing, remove noncomplying materials, prepare surfaces coated with
unacceptable materials, and reinstall flooring materials to comply with
requirements.
B. Core Sampling: At Owner's direction and at locations designated by Owner, take one
core sample per 1000 sq. ft. of resinous flooring, or portion of, to verify thickness. For
each sample that fails to comply with requirements, take two additional samples.
Repair damage caused by coring. Correct deficiencies in installed flooring as indicated
by testing.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect resinous flooring from damage and wear during the remainder of construction
period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering,
recommended in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 09 68 13
TILE CARPETING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Carpet tiles, accessories, and installation on floor surfaces.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. ASTM C 423 - Acoustical Test.
2. ASTM E 84 - Flammability Tunnel Test.
3. ASTM E 648 - Flooring Radiant Panel Test.
4. ASTM E 662 - Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials.
A. Product Data: Submit installation instructions including allowable temperature range,

maintenance and cleaning instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions of carpet areas showing starting points, walls or
partitions, fixed built-in equipment, required cutouts pile or pattern direction, location and
type of edge strips, and interface with other specified flooring materials or thresholds.
C. Samples:
1. Carpet:
a. Submit three carpet tiles of each selected color and pattern.
2. Edge Strip: 6" long piece.
A. Test Reports: Submit manufacturer's fire hazard classification, sound absorption and
static control reports.
A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum five years experience, installed at least ten projects
equivalent to work specified; certified by carpet manufacturer.
B. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Provide carpet identical to those of assemblies tested for

fire response per NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
A. Do not deliver carpet tile to project site until painting and finishing work is complete and
ceilings and overhead work has been tested and accepted.
Tile Carpeting 09 68 13 - 1
B. Deliver and store materials at project site in original factory packaging and containers.
Store materials flat, above ground, in a well-ventilated area protected from weather,
moisture, soiling, humidity, and extreme temperature.
1.7 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Maintain temperature, in areas where materials are stored or

installed, of 68 deg. F at least three days prior to, during, and after installation.
B. Substrate.
1. No condensation on underside of a 4' x 4' polyethylene sheet within 48 hours, fully
taped at perimeter to substrate.
2. PH of 9 or less when substrate wetted with potable water and pH paper applied.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's five-year warranty for material including statement carpet will maintain
specified levels of static control.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Carpet Tile: Before installation begins, furnish full size units equal to 5 percent of each
selection installed.
B. Store where directed by Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: As scheduled in Finish Schedule on Drawings.
B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements

following.
1. InterfaceFLOR.
2. J+J Flooring
3. Lees Carpet.
4. Milliken
5. Shaw Industries.
C. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Adhesive:
1. Non-flammable type recommended by carpet manufacturer.
B. Edge Strips: Refer to Transition Schedule.
C. Patching and Leveling Compound: Latex based as recommended by carpet

manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify floors are level with maximum surface variation of 1/4" in 10'-0", noncumulative.
B. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and
other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color,
pattern, and potential defects.
C. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the
following:
1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile
manufacturer.
2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-
Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet tile.
3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean floors of dust, dirt, solvents, oil, grease, paint, plaster and other substances which
would be detrimental to the proper performance of adhesive and carpet. Allow floors to
thoroughly dry.
B. Use filler to patch cracks and small holes, for leveling, and for transitions to other floor
materials.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Begin installation at central point in room and lay out by measuring length and width of
area, planning tiles down hallways, snapping chalk lines with right angles to center point
of grid.
B. Create "anchor" line along edge of each quadrant by spreading trowel width of adhesive
using notched trowel. Allow adhesive to dry 20-30 minutes before installing tiles.
C. Apply adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for dot application.
D. Apply carpet in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for glueless application.
E. Begin carpet installation at one of right angles created by chalk lines, and lay first tile
making sure it is aligned with chalk lines. Install adjacent tiles, pressing squarely against
first tile. Use pyramiding technique of installation with all four corners aligning properly.
F. Fit carpet squares around walls, doors, etc., cutting tiles from back with straight edge
and carpet knife, with all cut squares adhered to floor.
G. In large areas, install additional "anchor" lines every 12-15 feet. In corridors, adhere tiles
across width every 6-8 feet with "anchor" lines.
H. Continue grid uninterrupted into all spaces.
3.4 EDGE TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install edge strips where carpet terminates at other floor coverings and at carpet bases
in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Use full length pieces butted tightly to vertical surfaces. Where splicing cannot be
avoided, butt ends tight and flush.
3.5 ADJUSTMENT
A. Replace damaged tiles and soiled or stained tiles which cannot be cleaned. Remove
loose pieces of face yarn with sharp scissors.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Remove spots and smears of adhesive from carpet and adjacent surfaces immediately
with solvent.
B. Remove rubbish, wrapping materials, salvages and scraps.
C. Vacuum carpet using beater bar type vacuum cleaner.
D. Protect finish installation from soiling and damage by covering with protective sheets if
additional work is required in area with carpet.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 09 84 33
SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes shop-fabricated, sound absorbing acoustical wall panel units tested for
acoustical performance, including the following:
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.
1. Include panel and mounting indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For unit assembly and installation.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting devices and details.

2. Include details at cutouts and penetrations for other work.
C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:
1. Panel: 12-inch-square sample(s) showing each edge profile, corner, and finish.
2. Mounting Devices: Full-size Samples.
3. Assembled Panels: Approximately 36 by 36 inches, including joints and mounting
methods.
A. Coordination Drawings: Elevations and other details, drawn to scale, on which the
following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of
the items involved:
1. Electrical outlets, switches, and thermostats.

2. Items penetrating or covered by units including the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
Sound-Absorbing Wall Units 09 84 33 - 1

c. Speakers.
d. Alarms.
e. Sprinklers.
f. Access panels.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of unit.
C. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of unit to include in maintenance manuals. Include
fabric manufacturers' written cleaning and stain-removal instructions.
A. Furnish extra materials from same production run that match products installed and that
are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Mounting Devices: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no

fewer than five devices, including unopened adhesives.
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to

demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials, fabrication, and
installation.
1. Build mockup of one typical panel.

A. Comply with fabric and unit manufacturers' written instructions for minimum and
maximum temperature and humidity requirements for shipment, storage, and handling.
B. Deliver materials and units in unopened bundles and store in a temperature-controlled

dry place with adequate air circulation.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install units until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work at and above ceilings is
complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels
indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Lighting: Do not install units until a lighting level of not less than 50 fc is provided on
surfaces to receive the units.
C. Air-Quality Limitations: Protect units from exposure to airborne odors, such as tobacco
smoke, and install units under conditions free from odor contamination of ambient air.
D. Field Measurements: Verify unit locations and actual dimensions of openings and
penetrations by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate them on Shop
Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain wall units specified in this Section from single source from
single manufacturer.
B. Basis of Design: Tectum Panels as listed in Finish Schedule on Drawings.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A. Acoustical Panels:
1. Material: Pre-molded panels composed of long, chemically-processed wood

(American Aspen), magnesium oxide, sodium silicate, calcium carbonate, and
related materials, pressure bonded with a uniform bottom face texture to provide
shapes and sizes as required, with the following properties.
2. Acoustical Absorption: NRC range of 0.60 for 2-inch thickness; ASTM C 423.
3. Thickness and edge: 2 inch thick, beveled edge
4. Size: As shown on Construction Drawings.
5. Acceptable Product: Wall Panel by Tectum.
B. Acoustical Wall Panel Accessories:
1. Z-clips or other Mounting: Back mounted with manufacturer's standard metal clips
or bar hangers, secured to substrate.
2. Edge Profile: Square.
3. Corner Detail in Elevation: Square with continuous edge profile indicated.
4. Reveals between Panels: Flush reveals as indicated on Drawings.
5. Panel Dimensions: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Core Materials:
1. Cementitious-Wood Fiber.
D. Mounting Devices: Concealed on back of unit, recommended by manufacturer to support

weight of unit, and as follows:

1. Splines: Manufacturer's standard concealed metal or plastic splines that engage

the kerfed edges of the unit, with other moldings and trim for interior corners,
exterior corners, and exposed edges, with factory-applied finish on exposed items.
2. Metal Clips or Bar Hangers: Manufacturer's standard two-part metal "Z" clips, with
one part of each clip mechanically attached to back of unit and the other part to
substrate, designed to permit unit removal.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Standard Construction: Use manufacturer's standard construction unless otherwise

indicated; with panel face, edges, and back reinforced against warpage and damage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine panels, mounting devices, substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance
with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting unit
performance.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install units in locations indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, install units with vertical
surfaces and edges plumb, top edges level and in alignment with other units, faces flush,
and scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installation of units using type of
mounting devices indicated. Mount units securely to supporting substrate.
3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Plumb and Level: Plus or minus 1/16 inch in 48 inches, noncumulative.
B. Variation of Joint Width: Not more than 1/16-inch variation from hairline in 48 inches,
noncumulative.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean panels on completion of installation to remove dust and other foreign materials
END OF SECTION

SECTION 09 91 13
EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1. SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Surface preparation and field application of paints and coatings at
exterior hollow metal doors and frames and exterior surfaces not to receive high-
performance or elastomeric coatings.
B. Work not requiring finish, the following items are not required to be finished under this
Section.
1. Items with factory applied final finish.
2. Aluminum, brass, bronze, chromium plate, copper, nickel and stainless steel.
3. Brick, tile, plaster, and cast stone.
4. Moving parts of operating units.
5. Code required labels such as UL or equipment identification plates.
1.2. REFERENCES

1. ASTM D 16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related
Products.
2. ASTM D 523 - Test Method for Specular Gloss.
3. ASTM D 2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood.
1.3. DEFINITIONS
A. Comply with ASTM D 16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section.
B. Gloss Factors: Values of various degrees of luster when tested in accordance with
ASTM D 523 shall comply with following:
1. Flat: Below 5 units at 85 degree test angle.
2. Eggshell/Satin: 10 to 30 units at 60 degree test angle.
3. Semi-Gloss: 30 to 65 units at 60 degree test angle.
4. Gloss: Over 70 units at 20 degree test angle.
1.4. SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis,

instruction for handling, storage, surface preparation procedures and application
recommendations for each paint system including primers and sealers.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit painting schedule including manufacturer's product name, color,
and substrate proposed for painting, and method of application.
C. Samples: Provide stepped samples defining each separate coat, including block fillers
and primers - of each color, texture and material to be applied on the following
substrates:
Exterior Painting 09 91 13 - 1
1. Painted Wood: Provide two 12" square samples of each color and material on
hardboard.
2. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4" square samples of flat metal and two 8" long samples
of solid metal for each color and finish.
D. Quality Control Submittals: Furnish certificates from manufacturer that all products
supplied comply with local, state, and federal regulations controlling use of volatile
organic compounds (VOC's).
1.5. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Applicator: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum
five years commercial and three projects of similar scope documented experience.
2. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the
same manufacturer as the finish coats.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with Texas Air Control Board (TACB) Regulation V
and requirements of governing authorities relative to volatile organic compounds (VOC)
content.
C. Field Samples:
1. Prepare 100 sq. ft. field sample panel illustrating each special coating color, texture,
sheen, and finish.
2. Locate where directed by Architect.
3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place work.
4. Accepted sample may remain as part of Work.
5. Final acceptance of colors will be from job applied samples.
1.6. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site in manufacturer's sealed and labeled containers. Examine to

verify acceptability.
B. Container label to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number
and date of manufacturer, brand code, coverage rate, surface preparation, instructions
for mixing and reducing drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and
application instructions.
C. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature between 45 degrees F and 90

degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
1.7. PROJECT CONDITIONS
1. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is
outside humidity ranges required by paint product manufacturer.
2. Dew Point: Do not apply exterior coatings unless dew point is at least 5°F above
surface (to be coated) temperature, and rising.
3. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50
degrees F for exterior, or as otherwise indicated by manufacturer’s Product Data
Sheet.
4. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or

exterior, or as otherwise indicated by manufacturer’s Product Data Sheet.
1.8. EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide two gallons of each color, type, and surface texture to Owner.
B. In addition to manufacturer's label, identify each container with color, type, texture, and
room location.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements

following.
1. AkzoNobel: Devoe High Performance Coatings
2. Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore): Coronado, Corotech, Insl-X, Lenmar, Maxum
3. Kelly-Moore Paint Co., Inc. (KM)
4. Pittsburgh Paints, PPG Industries, PPG Architectural Coatings (PPG): Glidden
Professional (GP)
5. The Sherwin-Williams Company. (S-W): Kwal, Frazee, Colorwheel, Parker, General
Paint
2.2. MATERIALS
A. Coatings:
1. Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings.
2. Process pigments to soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly
dispersed to homogeneous coating; good flow and brushing properties; capable of
drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
B. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials
not specifically indicated but required to achieve finishes specified, of commercial
quality.
C. Patching Materials: Latex filler.
D. Fastener Head Cover Materials: Latex filler.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1. EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions:
1. Examine the substrates, adjoining constructions, and the conditions under which the
work is to be installed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions
detrimental to the work have been corrected.

2. Verify that substrate conditions are ready to receive work as instructed by product
manufacturer.
3. Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
4. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not
apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below following maximums:
a. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 2016.
3.2. PREPARATION
A. General:
1. Remove or mask electrical and mechanical, plates, hardware and hardware
accessories, light fixture, escutcheons, fittings, and similar items prior to preparing
surfaces or finishing. Reinstall removed items by workers skilled in the trades
involved.
2. Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove
existing coatings that exhibit loose surface defects.
3. Schedule cleaning and surface preparation so that dust and other containments will
not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
4. Seal with shellac marks which may bleed through surface finishes.
5. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
B. Surface Preparation:
1. Aluminum Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove surface contamination by
steam or high pressure water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing.
Apply etching primer immediately following cleaning.
2. Exterior Wood Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign
matter. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with vinyl
spackling compound after prime coat has been applied.
3. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent.
Apply coat of etching primer.
4. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium
phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
5. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust.
Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with
suitable solvent or detergent and water. Prime bare steel surfaces with primer
compatible with shop coat and scheduled topcoat. Prime metal items including shop
primed items.
6. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: In accordance with SSPC SP-1, solvent clean to
remove oil, grease, dirt, and other contaminants that may affect adhesion of primer.
Remove mill scale using hand-or power-tool cleaning in accordance with SSPC SP-2,
and SSPC SP-3, respectively. Where blast cleaning is deemed appropriate, prepare
surface of steel and iron in accordance with SSPC SP-6, Commercial Blast Cleaning.
Spot prime paint after repairs, with appropriate compatible primer.
7. Metal Doors: Seal top and bottom edges with primer.
3.3. APPLICATION
A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.
C. Apply each coat to uniform finish.
D. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat.
E. Sand wood and metal lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
F. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. Use tack cloth just prior to applying next
coat.
G. Observe manufacturer’s published re-coat window times for products being used.
H. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into grain
before set. Wipe excess from surface.
I. Prime concealed surfaces of exterior woodwork with primer paint.
3.4. FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Paint shop prefinished items occurring at exposed exterior areas.
B. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed
ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, and except where items are prefinished.
3.5. CLEANING
A. Collect waste material which may constitute fire hazard, place in closed metal containers
and remove daily from site.
3.6. SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR SURFACES
A. Concrete Masonry Units: Refer to Section 09 96 53 – Elastomeric Coatings.
B. Ferrous Metal - Structural Steel, Handrails, Guardrails, and Metal Fabrications: See
Section 09 96 59 “High Performance Coatings.”
C. Ferrous Metal – Doors and Frames:

1. Finish: Semi-gloss alkyd, anticorrosive primer and two finish coats.
2. Primer:
a. Moore: Corotech Acrylic Metal Primer, V 110, 1.6-2.0 mils dft/coat.
b. Devoe Coatings Devguard 4160 Tank & Structural Primer, 2.0 - 2.5 mils dft/coat.
c. KM: 1710 Kel-Guard Alkyd Rust Inhibitive Primer, 1.5 – 2.0 mils dft/coat.
d. PPG: 6-208 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer, 1.5 – 2.0
mils dft/coat.
e. S-W: Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer, 3.0 – 4.0 mils dft/coat.
3. Finish Coats:
a. Moore: Corotech Alkyd Urethane Semi Gloss, V201.,1.5 – 2.5 mils dft/coat.
b. Devoe 4306 Devguard Rust Preventative Semi-Gloss Enamel, 1.9-2.4 mils
dft/coat.
c. KM: 1275 Weather Shield Int/Ext Semi-Gloss Oil, 1.7 – 2.2 mils dft/coat.
d. PPG Speedhide Int/Ext Urethane Modified Gloss Oil, 2.3 dft/coat.
e. S-W: B54Z Industrial Enamel, 2.0 – 3.0 dft/coat.
D. Galvanized Metal - Structural Steel, Handrails, Guardrails, and Metal Fabrications: See
Section 09 96 59 “High Performance Coatings.”:
E. Galvanized and Galvannealed Metal – Doors and Frames:

1. Finish: Semi-gloss alkyd, primer and two finish coats.
2. Primer:
a. Moore: Corotech Acrylic Metal Primer V110, 1.6-2.0 mils dft.
b. Devoe 4160 Devoe Coatings Devguard All Purpose Metal & Galvanized Primer,
1.5 – 2.0 mils dft/coat.
c. KM: 1712 All Metal Gard White Rust-Inhibitive Primer, 1.5 – 2.0 mils dft.
d. PPG: 6-209 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Galvanized Steel Primer, 1.5 – 2.0 mils
dft/coat.
e. S-W: Galvite HS Alkyd, 3.0 – 4.5 mils dft/coat.
3. Finish Coats:
a. Moore: Corotech Alkyd Urethane Semi-Gloss, V201, 2.0-2.2 mils dft/coat.
b. Devoe 4306 Devguard Rust Preventative Semi-Gloss Enamel , 1.9-2.4 mils
dft/coat.
c. KM: 1275 Weather Shield Int/Ext Semi-Gloss Oil, 1.7 – 2.2 mils dft/coat.
d. PPG: Speedhide Int/Ext Urethane Modified Gloss Oil , 2.3 dft/coat.
e. S-W: B54Z Industrial Enamel, 2.0 – 3.0 dft/coat.
F. Wood – Plywood:
1. Finish: Semi-Gloss acrylic latex, primer and two finish coats.
2. Primer:
a. GP: 3210 GRIPPER Int/Ext Primer SealerHydrosealer Primer Sealer 6001-1200,
1.8 - 2.1mils dft.
b. Moore Sure Seal Latex Primer-Sealer, 027, 1.3 mils dft.
c. PPG: 17-921 Seal Grip Acrylic Universal Primer , 1.3 – 1.6 dft.
d. S-W: A100 Exterior Latex Primer, 1.4 mils dft minimum.
e. KM: 255 Acry-Shield 100% Acrylic Exterior Wood Primer 1.5-2.0 mils dft.
3. Finish Coats:
a. GP: Ultra-Hide 150 Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint 2416V, 1.3 – 1.5 mils dft/coat.
b. Moore: Ultra Spec EXT Satin Finish, N448, 1.5 mils dft minimum.
c. PPG: 90-474 Pitt-Tech Int./Ext. Satin DTM Industrial Enamels, 1.1 – 1.3 mils
dft/coat.
d. S-W: DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss Coating B66-200 Series, 2.0 – 4.0 dft/coat.
e. KM: 1250 Acry-Shield 100% Acrylic Exterior Semi-Gloss Enamel 1.5-2.0 mils dft.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 09 91 23
INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Surface preparation and application of interior paint coating systems
on interior substrates.
1. Concrete.
2. Concrete masonry units (CMUs).
3. Steel and iron not otherwise schedule to receive high-performance coating.
4. Galvanized metal.
5. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).
6. Gypsum board.
7. Cotton or canvas insulation covering.
8. ASJ insulation covering.
9. Other exposed surfaces not scheduled to receive factory finish.
B. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating
parts, and labels.
1. Prefinished items include the following shop- and factory-finished components:
a. Architectural woodwork and casework.
b. Metal lockers.
c. Prefinished elevator entrance doors and frames.
d. Elevator equipment.
e. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
f. Light fixtures.
g. Distribution cabinets.
2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible
spaces:
a. Furred areas.
b. Ceiling plenums.
c. Pipe spaces.
d. Duct shafts.
e. Elevator shafts.
3. Finished metal surfaces include the following:
a. Door hardware.
b. Aluminum.
c. Brass.
d. Bronze.
e. Chromium plate.
f. Copper.
g. Nickel.
h. Stainless steel.
Interior Painting 09 91 23 - 1
4. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or
other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating,
or nomenclature plates.
5. Operating parts including moving parts of operating equipment and the following:
a. Valve and damper operators.
b. Linkages.
c. Sensing devices.
d. Motor and fan shafts.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Gloss Factors: Values of various degrees of luster when tested in accordance with
1. Gloss Level 1 – Flat: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85
degrees.
2. Gloss Level 2 – Low Sheen: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35
units at 85 degrees.
3. Gloss Level 3 – Eggshell: 1 0 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85
degrees.
4. Gloss Level 4 – Satin: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at
85 degrees.
5. Gloss Level 5 – Semigloss: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees.
6. Gloss Level 6 – Gloss: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees.
7. Gloss Level 7 – High Gloss: More than 85 units at 60 degrees.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordination of Work: Coordinate field finishing of shop primed metals are provided to
ensure compatibility of total systems for various substrates.
A. Product Data: Technical data and product information for block fillers, primers, paints,
and coatings, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, surface
preparation, and application for each paint and coating system.
1. For field painting of factory primed metal products and fabrications, submit
technical data for each type of paint product, surface preparation requirements,
and application instructions.
2. Indicate manufacturer's instructions for special surface preparation procedures
and substrate conditions requiring special attention.
3. Product List: Provide inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each
material and cross reference specific coatings, finish system, and application.
Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number, series, and general
classification. Use same designations indicated in Finish Schedules.
B. Samples: Submit aged (minimum seven day old) paint samples for each type of paint
system and each color and gloss of topcoat.
1. Provide stepped draw-down samples, defining each separate coat, including block
fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review.
Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.
a. Label draw-down samples with the following:
1) Paint manufacturer.
2) Manufacturer’s color name, number, and sheen.
3) Paint formula employed to produce designated color and sheen.
4) Date paint was mixed.
2. Provide list of material and application for each coat of each sample. Label each
sample as to location and application.
3. Submit samples on substrates for review of color and texture:
a. Concrete: Two 4 inch (50 mm) square samples for each color and finish.
b. Concrete Masonry: Two 4 by 8 inch (100 by 200 mm) samples of masonry,
with mortar joint in the center, for each finish and color.
c. Painted Wood: Two 12 inch (305 mm) square samples of each color and
material on hardboard.
d. Ferrous and Nonferrous Metals: Two 4 inch (100 mm) square samples of
flat metal and two 8 inch (200 mm) long samples of solid metal for each color
and finish.
A. Qualification Data: For applicator.
B. Quality Control Submittals: Furnish certificates from manufacturer that products

supplied comply with VOC content limits and emission in accordance with local, state,
and federal regulations and sustainability limit requirements.
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with Federal and local toxicity and air quality
regulations and with Federal requirements on content of for heavy metals including but
not limited to lead and mercury. Do not use solvents in paint products that contribute to
air pollution.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Entity having minimum 5 years documented experience in

applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated.
C. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish
selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for
application of each paint system.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9
sq. m).
b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.
a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of
additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
A. Container Labels: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number
and date of manufacturer, brand code, coverage rate, surface preparation, instructions
for mixing and reducing drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with
ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 degrees F (7
degrees C).
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
A. Do not thin or add water to waterbased paints, including waterbased alkyds.
B. Weather Conditions:
1. Apply paints when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air
temperatures are between 50 degrees F and 95 degrees F (10 degrees C and 35
degrees C).
2. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures
less than 5 degrees F (3 degrees C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet
surfaces.
3. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F (7 degrees C)
for interiors; 50 degrees F (35 degrees C) for exterior, unless otherwise indicated
by manufacturer’s Product Data Sheet.
C. Apply solvent thinned paints when temperatures of surfaces to receive paint and
surrounding air are between 45 degrees F. and 95 degrees F (7 degrees F and
35 degrees C).
1. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F (18 degrees
C) for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
D. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to receive paint
and coatings are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the
manufacturer during application and drying periods.
E. Provide lighting level of 80 foot-candles (860 lx) measured mid-height at substrate

surface.
1.9 SURPLUS MATERIALS
A. Inquire and coordinate with Owner regarding disposition of excess and leftover paint
materials. If Owner wishes to retain excess materials for maintenance and touch-up
purposes, deliver excess materials to designated storage area as directed by Owner.
1. Any materials not retained by Owner shall become the property of the Contractor
and shall be removed from the site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoats for each coating system
from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Provide first quality, 100% acrylic, commercial or industrial

products of one of the specified manufacturers. Residential-grade products are not
permitted.
1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore).
2. The Comex Group: Kwal, Frazee, Colorwheel, Parker, General Paint.
3. Dunn Edwards (DE).
4. Glidden Professional Paints (AN).
5. Kelly-Moore Paint Company Inc. (KM).
6. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints (PPG).
7. The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W).
A. Performance and Durability:

1. ASTM D 16 Standard Test Method for Load Testing Refractory Shapes at High
Temperatures.
2. ASTM D 2486 Standard Test Method for Scrub Resistance of Interior Wall Paint.
3. ASTM D 2805 Standard Test Method for Hiding Power of Paints by Reflectometry.
4. ASTM D 4828 Standard Test Method for Practical Washability of Organic
Coatings.
B. Chemical Components of Field Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat
paints and anticorrosive and antirust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with
chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings applied in
a fabrication or finishing shop:
1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent
by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one
or more benzene rings).
2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain components
restricted by the EPA.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by
topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B. Accessories: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners, and similar materials not
specifically indicated but necessary to achieve the finishes specified for commercial
quality.
C. Patching Materials: Latex filler compatible with paint systems.
D. Fastener Head Cover Materials: Latex filler.
E. Colors: As indicated in Finish Schedule on Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Test substrates after repairing and cleaning substrates but prior to application of paint
and coatings.
1. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic
moisture meter as follows:
a. Concrete: 12 percent.
b. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent.
c. Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent.
d. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
2. Test cementitious substrates and plaster cement/stucco for alkalinity (pH).
C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify joints are properly taped and finishing compound is
sanded smooth.
D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with

existing finishes and primers.
1. Verify previously painted surfaces can be stripped to bare substrate, repaired if
necessary, and prepared to receive new paint or coating system consisting of
primer and two top coats at a minimum.
a. When previously painted surfaces have failed to accept new paint systems,
determine cause of failure and take corrective measures to ensure each
surface accepts new paint or coating system. Failure of new paint system is
not permitted.
2. Shop Primed Metals: Inspect shop primed metals to determine if primer is in
condition to receive and is compatible with topcoats.
E. Commence paint and coating application after correcting unsatisfactory conditions and
surfaces are dry. Application of coating indicates applicator’s acceptance of surfaces
and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations applicable to

substrates and paint systems indicated.
B. Coordination of Work:
1. Preprimed Substrates: Inspect existing conditions in which primers are factory
applied to ensure compatibility of the total system for each substrate. Notify
Architect of anticipated problems when using the materials specified over factory
primed or preprimed substrates.
2. Existing Painted Surfaces: Inspect previously painted surfaces to ensure
compatibility of the existing paints with new paint system for each substrate. Notify
Architect of anticipated problems.
3. Repair defects and clean surfaces affecting bond with paint system. Remove
existing paints exhibiting loose surface defects showing signs of rust, scale, or
delamination.
4. Seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes.
5. Touch up shop primer or previously painted surfaces prior to application of
topcoats.
C. Surface Cleaning and Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according
to manufacturer's written instructions for each substrate condition.
D. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. If removal is
impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface applied
protection before surface preparation and painting
1. Before applying paint or surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that
impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and contaminants from the cleaning
process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
2. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items in place that are removable
and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size
or weight of item, provide surface applied protection before surface preparation
and painting.
a. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades
involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface applied
protection.
3. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or
apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
4. Seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes with shellac.
5. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
6. Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect the Work.
7. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
E. Cementitious Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence,

chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, release agents, mold, mildew, and existing paint. Roughen
as necessary to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve
curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.
1. Use abrasive blast cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.
2. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
a. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing
appropriate pH testing. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish
paint to blister and burn, correct condition prior to application of paint.
b. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation
after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of
water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m).
c. Relative Humidity Test: Using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with
installation after substrates have obtained percent relative humidity level
recommended by paint manufacturer.
d. Perform additional moisture tests when recommended by manufacturer.
Proceed with installation when moisture content complies with that permitted
in manufacturer's written instructions.
e. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with solution of
sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to thoroughly
dry.
3. Clean concrete floors to receive paint or coating with a 5 percent solution of
muriatic acid or etching cleaner. Flush floors with clean water to remove acid;
neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry; vacuum before painting.
F. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture
content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's
G. Ferrous Metals: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer. Clean ungalvanized
ferrous metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose
mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods
that comply with SSPC recommendations.
1. SSPC-SP 11.
H. Shop Primed Ferrous Metal Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and
areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used
for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop primed surfaces.
1. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash
coat before priming.
2. Touch up bare areas and damaged shop applied prime coats. Wire brush, clean
with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer
as the shop coat.
I. Galvanized Ferrous Metal Substrates: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum

based solvents leaving surface free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove
pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical
methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of
subsequently applied paints.
J. Aluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing.
Remove oil, grease, surface oxidation, and contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP-
1 Solvent Cleaning. Apply etching primer immediately following cleaning.
K. Wood Substrates:
1. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac
or recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and
imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when
dried.
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides,
and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling.
4. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of
varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.
5. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic
wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
L. Cotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign
material that might impair bond of paints to substrates.
M. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that
might impair bond of paints to substrates.
N. Mildew and Mold Removal: Remove mildew and mold by high power washing (pressure
range of 1500 to 4000 psi) with solution of trisodium phosphate and bleach. If substrate
is too soft for high power washing, scrub substrate with solution. Rinse with clean water
and allow surface to dry.
O. Protective Coverings: Provide protections for duration of the Work, including covering
furnishings and decorative items. Protect and mask adjacent finishes and components
against damage, marking, overpainting, and injury. Clean and repair or replace damage
caused by painting.
P. Renovated Surfaces: Clean surface free of loose dirt and dust. Except at gypsum board
surfaces, remove existing paint and coatings to bare substrate and prepare substrates
to receive new paint system. Test substrate to verify it will bond with primer and receive
new paint system without failure. If test fails, clean surface to base substrate and apply
barrier coat. Retest to verify surface will accept new paint system.
1. Remove surface film preventing proper adhesion and bond.
2. Wash glossy paint with a solution of sal soda and rinse thoroughly.
3. Remove loose, blistered, and defective paint and varnish; smooth edges with
sandpaper.
4. Clean corroded iron and steel surfaces.
5. Repair and blend into portland cement plaster.
6. Prime bare surfaces.
7. Tone varnished surfaces with stain bringing to uniform color.
8. If existing surfaces cannot be put in acceptable condition for finishing by customary
cleaning, sanding, and puttying operations, notify Owner and do not proceed until
correcting unsatisfactory conditions.
Q. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects
after repair.
R. Pipe Covering and Insulation: Remove loose, foreign, and objectionable material before
applying sealing coat.
S. Preparation of Substrates for Wallcovering: Prime and seal substrate with release coat
in accordance with wallcovering manufacturer's recommendations for substrate.
1. Assure compatibility with product of wall covering manufacturer.
2. Fill indentations in substrate and prime with opaque white primer before applying
release coat.
3. Apply release coat in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
T. Barrier Coat: Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
Notify Owner in writing of anticipated problems using specified finish coat material over
previously coated substrates.
U. Paint and Coating Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as
required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary,
remove surface film and strain material before using.
3. Do not use thinners for water based paints.
4. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat
where multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match
the color of the finish coat. Provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats
to distinguish each separate coat.
V. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove foreign
particles to permit adhesion of finishing materials. Apply compatible sealer or primer.
W. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium

phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
X. Wood and Metal Doors: Seal top and bottom edges with primer.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations applicable to

1. The term exposed surfaces includes areas visible when permanent or built in
fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, and similar
components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas to maintain system
integrity and provide desired protection.
2. Provide finish coats compatible with primers.
3. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
4. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
5. Paint exposed surfaces. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint
the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces.
a. Field painting of exposed surfaces include bare and covered pipes and ducts
(including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and
surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory
applied final finish.
b. Areas visible when permanent or built in fixtures, grilles, convector covers,
covers for finned tube radiation, and similar components are in place.
c. Extend coatings in areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and
provide desired protection.
d. Finish doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.
6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible
through registers or grilles.
7. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and
similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
8. rating, or nomenclature plates.
9. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps,
brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or surface imperfections. Cut in
sharp lines and color breaks.
10. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior
door frames.
11. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes.
12. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
13. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats
of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured
film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp
lines and color breaks.
E. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials to dry film thickness indicated in pain
schedule but no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve
dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as
recommended by manufacturer.
1. Measure film thickness on magnetic surfaces by use of Elcometer thickness gauge
and on nonmagnetic surfaces by pit gauge or Tooke Gauge.
F. Application: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or prepared
for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface
deterioration.
1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of
application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured
as recommended by manufacturer.
2. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory
primed or factory finished after removing rust and scale and priming or touching
up surface sand if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
3. If undercoats, stains, or conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional
coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special
attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive
dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not
recoat surfaces until paint has dried and cured to where it feels firm, and does not
deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of
another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
G. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic

Safety and Security Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items
exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces.
1. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and
electrical components and paint separately.
2. Prime and paint uninsulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and
exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, heat exchangers, tanks,
ductwork, conduit, switchgear, and paintable insulation except where items are
prefinished.
3. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, and convector and baseboard heating cabinets
visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to visible
surfaces. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and
baseboard cabinets to match face panels.
4. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone
equipment before installing equipment.
5. Color code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed ductwork in accordance with
requirements indicated. Color band and identify with flow arrows, names, and
numbering.
6. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and
fittings removed prior to finishing.
7. Concealed Members: Wherever steel and metal parts to receive paint are built
into and concealed by construction, paint as specified for exposed parts so finish
painting is complete before members are concealed.
8. Paint the following work where exposed to view:
a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear.
b. Uninsulated metal piping.
c. Uninsulated plastic piping.
d. Pipe hangers and supports.
e. Metal conduit.
f. Plastic conduit.
g. Tanks that do not have factory applied final finishes.

h. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation
covering or paintable jacket material.
9. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:
a. Equipment, including panelboards.
b. Uninsulated metal piping.
c. Uninsulated plastic piping.
d. Pipe hangers and supports.
e. Metal conduit.
f. Plastic conduit.
g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation
covering or other paintable jacket material.
h. Other items as directed by Architect.
10. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets
and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.
H. Items not to Receive Paint: Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished
metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels.
I. Electrostatic Spray Painting: Apply coating electrostatically to finished surfaces, free

from runs, sags, visible overlaps, holidays, craters, pinholes and other defects
detrimental to protective and decorative qualities of coating.
1. Thickness of Coatings: 1.5 to 2.0 mils dry film thickness. Measure dry film
thickness with magnetic gauge.
2. Use application techniques, equipment, materials, and preparation procedures
J. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at rate to ensure complete
coverage with pores filled.
K. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply prime coat, recommended by
manufacturer, to material required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime
coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots
or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or
defects due to insufficient sealing.
L. Finish Coats: Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting,
holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface
imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. If undercoats or other conditions
show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish,
color, and appearance without bleed through.
1. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to
provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and
coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness,
or surface imperfections is not acceptable.
2. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce glass smooth surface
film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs,
brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. Provide satin
finish for final coats.
M. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove,
refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements.
N. Touch Up: Touch up marred, scraped, and blemished areas of surfaces which were
factory primed or previously coated.
1. Prepare and touch up scratches, abrasions, and blemishes and remove foreign
matter before proceeding with succeeding coats.
2. Touch up marred, scraped, and blemished areas of factory primed or previously
coated surfaces.
3. Feather touch up coating overlapping minimum 2 inches onto adjacent
unblemished areas producing smooth, uniform surface.
4. As soon after erection and installation as possible, touch up fasteners, welded
surfaces and surroundings, field connections, and areas on which shop coat has
been abraded or damaged with specified primer before corrosion and other
damage occurs from exposure.
A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and
inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.
2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with
paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and
apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with
paint manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT
A. Paint products are considered hazardous materials. Do not empty or allow excess paint
to enter storm drainage systems. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for
disposal of leftover paint and paint buckets.
B. Waste Disposal: Legally dispose of metal, plastic, and product waste, including
accessories and used items, by recycling or reusing waste materials.
C. Clean and recycle plastic paint containers. Do not dispose of paint containers in landfills.
D. Do not dispose of unused paints, stains, and coatings by pouring into storm drainage or
sewer systems.
E. Do not allow run off water resulting from washing paint containers and applicators to
seep into the ground or run into the storm drainage or sewer systems.
1. Prior to disposing, allow unused paint to dry in can before legally disposing.
F. Legally dispose of unused paint, stain, and coatings and the containers in accordance
with manufacturer’s recommendations and environmental regulations.
A. Clean Up: At end of each day, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded
materials from site. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces.
Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or
damage adjacent finished surfaces.
B. Protections: Protect Work of other trades against damage from paint application.
Correct damage to Work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing,
as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
C. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces.
D. At completion of painting activities, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted

surfaces.
E. Provide Wet Paint signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting
operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their
work. After related Work is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted
surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.
3.7 INTERIOR PAINT AND COATING SCHEDULE
A. Cotton or Canvas Covering over Insulation:

1. Finish: Interior, flat, latex-based paint.
a. AN: Glidden Ultra-Hide No VOC Interior Flat Paint 1209 (0 g/L VOC), 1.3 -
1.5 mils dft/coat.
b. Moore: 219 Eco Spec Interior Latex Flat 9) g/L VOC), 1.2 mils dft/coat
minimum.
c. PPG: 9100 Series Pure Performance Interior flat Latex (0 g/L VOC), 1.8 mils
dft/coat minimum.
d. S-W: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Flat Paint B30-2600 (0 G/L VOC), 1.6
mils dft/coat minimum.
e. KM: 1500 Enviro-Coat 100% Acrylic Interior Flat Wall Paint (0 g/L VOC) 1.5
- 2.0 mils dft/coat.
f. Comex: UltraTech C115 Interior Latex Flat Finish (35g/L VOC) 1.5 - 2.0 mils
B. Gypsum Board:
1. Finish: Lusterless (flat) latex; primer and two finish coats.
2. Primer: No Substitutions.
a. GP: Glidden Lifemaster No VOC Interior Primer Sealer 9116-1200, (0 g/L
VOC), 1.4 mils dft minimum.
b. Moore: Ultra Spec 500 Waterborne Interior Primer Sealer N534, (0 g/L
c. PPG: Speedhide Interior Latex Primer Sealer 6-2, (<50 g/L VOC), 1.0 mils
dft minimum.
d. S-W: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer B28W2600 (0 G/L VOC),
1.5 mils dft minimum.
e. KM: 971 Acry-Plex Zero VOC Interior PVA Primer/Sealer (0 g/L VOC), 2.0
mils dft minimum.
f. Comex: Ultratech Interior Latex Primer Sealer C152, (44 g/L VOC), 2.0 mils
dft minimum.
3. Finish Coats:
a. GP: Glidden Lifemaster No VOC Interior Flat Paint 9100 (0 g/L VOC), 1.3 -
1.5 mils dft/coat.
b. Moore: Waterborne Ceiling Paint, Flat, 0 VOC, 508, 1.4 mils dft/coat
c. PPG: 6-4110XI Speedhide zero Interior Flat Latex (0 g/L VOC), 1.8 mils
dft/coat minimum.
d. S-W: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Flat Paint B30-2600 (0 G/L VOC), 1.6
mils dft/coat minimum.
e. KM: 1005 KM PROFESSIONAL Interior Acrylic ZERO VOC Flat Wall Paint
(0 g/L VOC) 1.5-2.0 mils dft.
f. Comex: UltraTech C129 Int Low Odor Zero VOC Flat (0g/L VOC) 1.6 mils
dft/coat minimum.
4. Location: Ceilings Only.
C. Gypsum Board:
1. Finish: Satin latex enamel; primer and two finish coats.
2. Primer: No Substitutions.
a. DE: Vinylastic Premium Interior Wall Sealer VNPR00-1 (<51 g/L VOC)
b. BM: Eco Spec WB Interior Latex Primer N372/F372 (<51 g/L VOC)
c. PPG: Speedhide Interior Latex Primer Sealer 6-2, (<50 g/L VOC), 1.0 mils
dft minimum.
d. S-W: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer B28W2600 (0 G/L VOC),
3. Finish Coats:
a. BM: Premium Interior Latex Eggshell W626/K626 (<51 g/L VOC)
b. DE: Low Odor Zero VOC Interior Velvet Paint EVER20 (<51 g/L VOC)
c. PPG: 6-411 Series Speedhide Interior Enamel Eggshell Latex (73 g/L VOC),
1.5 – 1.7 mils dft/coat.
D. Ferrous Metal:
1. Finish: Semi-Gloss latex enamel; primer and two finish coats.
2. Primer:
a. AN: Devoe Coatings Devflex 4020PF DTM Primer & Finish (75 g/L VOC),
2.2 – 3.5 mils dft.
b. Moore: 363 IronClad Latex Low Lustre Metal & Wood Enamel (<150 g/L
c. PPG: 90-712 Series Pitt-Tech Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial
Enamel (123 g/L VOC), 2.0 – 3.0 mils dft.
d. S-W: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Univeral Acrylic Primer B66-310 (<100 g/L
VOC), 2.0 – 4.0 mils dft.
e. KM: 5725 DTM Acrylic Metal Primer (125 g/L VOC) 1.5 - 2.0 mils dft.
f. Comex: UltraTech C309 Universal Water-based Metal Primer (85g/L VOC)
1.5 - 2.0 mils dft.
3. Finish Coats:
a. AN: Glidden Ultra-Hide No VOC Interior Semi-Gloss Paint 1415 (0 g/L VOC),
1.3 dft/coat minimum.
b. Moore: 276 Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel (< 150 g/L),
1.2 mils dft/coat minimum.
c. PPG: 6-500 Series Speedhide Interior Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex (90 g/L
VOC), 1.5 – 1.7 mild dft/coat.
d. S-W: S-W: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel B31-
2600 (0 G/L VOC), 1.6 mils dft/coat minimum.
e. KM: 2020 Green Coat –ZERO VOC- Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel (0
g/L VOC) 1.7 - 2.2 mils dft.
f. Comex: UltraTech C413 High Perf DTM Semi Gloss Acrylic (240g/L VOC)
1.5-2.0 mils dft/coat.
E. Ferrous Metal – Guardrails and Handrails: Refer to Section 09 96 00 “High-Performance

Coatings.”
F. Ferrous Metal – Doors, Frames:

1. Finish: Semi-gloss, waterborne light industrial coating; primer and two finish coats.
2. Primer:
a. AN: Devoe, Devflex 4020 Direct to Metal Primer & Flat Finish (91 g/L VOC)
2.2 – 3.5 mils dft.
b. PPG: Pitt-Tech Plus, Int/Ext DTM Industrial Primer 90-912 (<90 g/L VOC)
2.0 – 4.0 mils dft.
c. S-W: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Acrylic Primer B66-310 (<100 g/L
VOC) 2.0 – 4.0 mils dft.
3. Finish Coats:
a. AN: Devoe High Performance Devflex 4216 High Performance WB Acrylic
Semi-Gloss Enamel 4216L (<150 g/L VOC) 2.0 – 4.0 mils dft/coat.
b. PPG: Pitt-Glaze WB1, Pitt-Glaze WBI Int. Semi-Goss Acrylic Epoxy 16-510
(<100 g/L VOC) 1.5 mils dft/coat minimum.
c. S-W: Pro Industrial, Pre-Catalyzed Waterbased Epoxy Semi-Gloss (<143
g/L VOC) 1.5 mils dft/coat minimum.
G. Ferrous Metal – Galvanized:

1. Finish: Semi-Gloss latex enamel; primer and two finish coats.
2. Primer:
a. AN: Devoe Coatings Devflex 4020 DTM Primer & Finish (75 g/L VOC), 2.2
– 3.5 mils dft.
b. Moore: 363 IronClad Latex Low Lustre Metal & Wood Enamel (<150 g/L
c. PPG: 90-712 Series Pitt-Tech Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial
Enamel (123 g/L VOC), 2.0 – 3.0 mils dft.
d. S-W: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Univeral Acrylic Primer B66-310 (<100 g/L
VOC), 2.0 – 4.0 mils dft.
e. KM: 1725 Acry-Shield 100% Acrylic Metal Primer (100 g/L VOC) 1.5 - 2.0
mils dft.
f. Comex: UltraTech C309 Universal Water-based Metal Primer (85g/L VOC)
1.5 - 2.0 mils dft.
3. Finish Coats:
a. AN: Glidden Ultra-Hide No VOC Interior Semi-Gloss Paint 1415 (0 g/L VOC),
1.3 dft/coat minimum.
b. Moore: 276 Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel (<150 g/L
VOC), 1.2 mils dft/coat minimum.
c. PPG: 6-500 Series Speedhide Interior Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex (90 g/L
VOC), 1.5 – 1.7 mild dft/coat.
d. S-W: S-W: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel B31-
2600 (0 G/L VOC), 1.7 mils dft/coat minimum.
g/L VOC) 1.7 - 2.2 mils dft/coat.
f. Comex: UltraTech C136 Int Low Odor Zero VOC Semi-Gloss Finish (0g/L
VOC) 1.5 - 2.0 mils dft/coat.
H. Woodwork:
1. Finish: Semi-gloss waterborne acrylic enamel; primer and two finish coats.
2. Primer:
a. AN: Glidden Gripper Interior/Exterior Primer Sealer 3210-1200, (<100 g/L
b. Moore: 216 Regal First Coat Interior Latex Primer & Underbody (<100 g/L
c. PPG: 17-921 Series Seal Grip Interior/Exterior 100% Acrylic Universal
Primer/Sealer (89 g/L VOC), 1.2 – 1.5 mils dft.
d. S-W: Premium Wall & Wood Interior Latex Primer B28W8111 (41 g/L VOC),
e. KM: 973 Acry-Plex Zero VOC Interior Wall Primer & Undercoat (0 g/L VOC)
1.5 - 2.0 mils dft.
f. Comex UltraTech C312 Int/Ext Acrylic primer (49g/L VOC) 1.5 - 2.0 mils dft
3. Finish Coats:
a. AN: Glidden Ultra-Hide 250 Interior Semi-Gloss Paint 1406N (<50 g/L VOC),
1.4 mils dft/coat minimum.
b. Moore: 314 Low Lustre Waterborne Satin Impervo (<150 g/L VOC), 1.4 mils
dft/coat minimum.
c. PPG: 87-6 Series Manor Hall Interior Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex (140 g/L
VOC), 1.3 – 1.4 mils dft/coat.
d. S-W: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel B31-2600 (0
G/L VOC), 1.6 mils dft/coat minimum.
g/L VOC) 1.7 - 2.2 mils dft/coat.
f. Comex: UltraTech C119 Int Latex Semi-Gloss (50g/L VOC) 1.5 mils dft/coat
minimum.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 09 96 23
ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Surface preparation and application of antigraffiti coating.

1. Locations:
a. Exterior stone ST-1
b. Exterior cast stone
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Technical data and product information for fillers, primers, and coatings,
including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, surface preparation, and
application for each paint and coating system.
1. Indicate manufacturer's instructions for special surface preparation procedures
and substrate conditions requiring special attention.
B. Samples: Submit samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square.

1. Label each sample for location and application area.
A. Quality Control Submittals: Furnish certificates from manufacturer that products supplied
comply with VOC content limits and emission in accordance with local, state, and federal
regulations and sustainability limit requirements.
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with Federal and local toxicity and air quality
regulations and with Federal requirements on content of for heavy metals including but
not limited to: lead and mercury. Do not use solvents in paint products that contribute to
air pollution.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Entity having minimum 5 years documented experience who is

approved by manufacturer.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each paint system from a single manufacturer, including
block fillers, primers, and top coats.
D. Coordination of Work: Coordinate field finishing of shop primed metals are provided to
ensure compatibility of total systems for various substrates.
E. Mockup: Provide mockup on each type of substrate to establish quality standards for
materials and execution of the work.
Antigraffiti Coating 09 96 23 - 1
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for
application of condition.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surface Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m).
b. Other Items: Items or areas designated by Architect.
c. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically
approves deviations in writing.
d. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become
part of the completed work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at site.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Container Labels: Deliver products to site in undamaged condition in manufacturer's

original sealed containers, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing,
unpacking, protecting, and installing. Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand
name, lot number and date of manufacturer, brand code, coverage rate, surface
preparation, instructions for mixing and reducing drying time, cleanup requirements,
color designation, and application instructions.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with
ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 degrees F (7
degrees C).
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
A. Do not thin or add water coatings.
B. Weather Conditions:
1. Apply paints when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air
temperatures are between 50 degrees F and 95 degrees F (10 degrees C and 35
degrees C).
2. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures
less than 5 degrees F (3 degrees C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet
surfaces.
3. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F (7 degrees C)
for interiors; 50 degrees F (35 degrees C) for exterior, unless otherwise indicated
by manufacturer’s Product Data Sheet.
C. Protection: Protect shrubs, metal, wood trim, glass, asphalt and other building hardware
during application from overspray.
1. Do not permit spray mist or liquid to drift onto surrounding properties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Chemical Components of Paints and Coatings: Provide products complying with limits
for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent
by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one
or more benzene rings).
2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain components
restricted by the EPA.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Acceptable Products and Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

provide products on one of the following:
1. Chemprobe Coating Systems; Conformal Clear Antigrafiti.
2. Evonik Industries; Protectosil Antigraffiti.
3. Prosoco, Inc.; Blok-Guard and Graffiti Control.
4. RainGuard; VandlGuard Ten AntiGraffiti Coating.
5. Sherwin Williams Protective and Marine Coatings; Invisi-Shield Antigraffiti Clear.
B. Antigraffiti Coating:
1. Physical Properties:
a. Graffiti Resistance: ASTM D6578 for graffiti resistance; Cleanability level of
3 after 25 cycles.
b. Water Vapor Transmissions: ASTM D6490.
c. Surface Appearance: No difference, clear coating.
d. Accelerated Weathering: ASTM G53/G85.
e. VOC Emissions and Content: Less than 50 g/L..
f. Volume Solids: 50 percent, +/- 2 percent.
g. Weight Solids: 59 percent, +/- 2 percent.
C. Material Compatibility:
1. Materials shall be compatible with substrate and with other coatings, under
conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on
testing and field experience.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the work.
1. Test substrates after repairing and cleaning substrates but prior to application of
paint and coatings.
2. Masonry: Verify masonry joints that are unsound, hollow, or otherwise defective,
have been raked out to a depth of 1/2 inch (13 mm) and pointed with mortar.
3. Verify cracks that exceed 1/64 inch (0.08 mm) wide have been filled with pointing
mortar.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protection: Protect adjacent surfaces and vegetation during application from overspray.
1. Do not permit spray mist or liquid to drift onto surrounding properties or parking
areas.
2. Protective Coverings: Provide protections for duration of the work. Protect and
mask adjacent finishes and components against damage, marking, overpainting,
and injury. Clean and repair or replace damage caused by painting.
B. Surface Preparation:
1. Clean surfaces to receive sealer from dirt, oil, grease, laitance, and contaminants.
Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants with degreasers. High pressure wash
surfaces with pressure water having minimum 3000 psi.
2. Remove dirt, dust and materials that interfere with application.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations applicable to

1. Apply material as supplied by the manufacturer. Do not dilute or thin.
2. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
B. Mix material well prior to application using a power mixer to assure uniformity. Apply
material using coating manufacturer’s recommended application equipment and
methods.
C. Apply treatment evenly for full coverage to recommended dry film thickness and to
achieve uniform appearance.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials to dry film thickness indicated in pain
schedule but no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve
dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as
1. Measure film thickness on magnetic surfaces by use of Elcometer thickness gauge
and on nonmagnetic surfaces by pit gauge or Tooke Gauge.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean Up: At end of each day, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded
materials from site. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces.
Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or
B. Protections: Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct
damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as
approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 09 96 53
ELASTOMERIC COATINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes elastomeric coatings at CMU and concrete:

1. Surface preparation, including crack repair.
2. Application of block filler, primer if required, and elastomeric finish coat.
1.2 REFERENCES
1. ASTM D 412: Rubber Properties in Tension.
2. ASTM D 552: Test for Cellular Rubber Products.
3. ASTM D 1653: Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Organic Coating
Films.
4. ASTM D 2370: Test Method for Tensile Properties of Organic Coatings
5. ASTM D 6904: Standard Practice for Resistance to Wind Driven Rain for Exterior
Coatings Applied on Masonry.
6. ASTM E 96: Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each primer, block filler, and finish coat specified submit basic
material and instructions for handling, storage and application.
B. Samples:
1. Provide stepped samples, defining block filler, primer and finish coats.
2. Substrate: Two 8 inch square samples of concrete masonry, with mortar joint in
center, for each color and texture required.
C. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Certification by paint coating manufacturer that products supplied comply with local
regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds.
2. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency evidencing
compliance of elastomeric coatings with requirements indicated based on
comprehensive testing within last two years of current product formulations.
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed coating

system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for Project that have
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance for at least 5
years.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat material produced by

same manufacturer as finish coats.
Elastomeric Paint Coatings 09 96 53 - 1

A. Deliver elastomeric coating materials to job site in manufacturer's original, new,

unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and following
information:
1. Name or title of material.
2. Manufacturer's name, stock number, and date of manufacture.
3. Contents by volume.
4. Thinning instructions (if permitted).
5. Application instructions.
6. Color name and number.
7. Handling instructions and precautions.
B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers at a minimum ambient
temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C) in a well-ventilated area. Maintain containers used in
storage of coatings in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
1. Protect elastomeric coating materials from freezing. Keep storage area neat and
orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that
workmen and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from
handling, mixing, and application.
A. Temperature Conditions: Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated

and surrounding air temperatures are above 50 deg F (10 deg C), unless otherwise
permitted by manufacturer's printed instructions.
B. Weather Conditions: Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative
humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above dew
point; or to damp or wet surfaces. Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain
temperature and conditions specified before proceeding with or continuing coating
operation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Glidden Professional Paints (GP)
2. BASF Building Systems
3. Kelly-Moore
4. Sherwin Williams
5. Sto
6. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints. (PPG)
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General:

1. Material Compatibility: Provide crack fillers, block fillers, primers, elastomeric finish
coat materials, and related materials that are compatible with one another and
substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2. Colors: Provide custom colors to match Architects sample.
B. Elastomeric Paint Coating: Factory-formulated, 100 percent acrylic or silicone-emulsion

finish coating materials, compatible with substrate, filler, and primer required.
a. GP: 2260 Decra-Flex Exterior Elastomeric Coating
b. Master Builders: MasterProtect EL 750.
c. Kelly-Moore: Kelly-Moore Premium; Kel-Seal Urethane Modified Acrylic
Elastomeric Coating DU0080920.
d. Sherwin Williams: ConFlex XL; High Build Coating A05W00451.
e. Sto: StoSilco Lastic; StoSilco Lastic 80222.
f. PPG: Perma-Crete Pitt-Flex Elastomeric Coating 4-110
2. Texture: Smooth.
3. Physical Properties:
a. Elongation at Break: Not less than 240 percent when tested according to ASTM D
412 or ASTM D 2370.
b. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes a 1/8-inch, 180-degree mandrel bend at
minus 10 deg F at 20-mil dry film thickness when tested according to ASTM D
552.
c. Tensile Strength: Not less than 220 psi when tested according to ASTM D 412 or
ASTM D 2370.
d. Water Vapor Permeability: Not less than 10 perms when tested according to
ASTM D 1653 or ASTM E 96.
e. Wind-Driven Rain Test: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM D
6904.
f. Minimum Dry Film Thickness per Coat: Not less than 10 mils.
g. Minimum Solids Content by Volume: Not less than 45 percent.
C. Crack Fillers: Provide manufacturer's standard factory-formulated acrylic emulsion crack

fillers that are compatible with substrate and finish coat materials indicated.
D. Block Fillers: As recommended by coating manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which elastomeric coating systems will be
applied for compliance with requirements for application. Surfaces to receive elastomeric
coatings must be thoroughly dry before coatings are applied.
1. Do not proceed with application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2. Start of coating within a particular area will be construed as Applicator's acceptance
of surface conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Remove items that are not to be coated, or provide surface-applied protection
prior to surface preparation and coating. Remove these items, if necessary, to
completely coat substrates and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of coating
operations in each area, reinstall items removed, using workers skilled in trades involved.
B. Cleaning: Before applying coatings or other surface treatments, clean substrates of

substances that could impair bond of coating systems. Schedule cleaning and coating
application so dust and other contaminates will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces.
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be coated according to

manufacturer's instructions for particular substrate conditions, and as specified.
1. Cementitious Surfaces: Prepare surfaces of concrete, concrete masonry, stucco, and
similar surfaces to receive elastomeric coatings by removing efflorescence, chalk,
dust, dirt, release agents, grease, oils, and similar conditions by water blasting
followed by a clear water rinse.
2. Remove mildew and neutralize surfaces according to manufacturer's
recommendations before materials are applied.
3. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be coated by performing
appropriate tests. Do not apply coatings over surfaces where moisture content
exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Application Procedures: By brush or roller according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
A. Owner reserves right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as
Owner deems necessary during period when coating operations are being conducted.
1. Owner will engage services of an independent testing agency to sample coating
being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified,
sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.
2. Testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as
required by Owner:
a. Quantitative materials analysis.
b. Elongation at break.
c. Tensile strength.
d. Percent of recovery.
e. Resistance to wind-driven rain.
f. Water vapor transmission.
3. If results show materials do not comply with requirements, the Contractor may be
directed to stop work, remove noncomplying materials, pay for testing, recoat
surfaces coated with rejected materials, or remove rejected materials from previously
coated surfaces if, upon recoating with specified materials, the two coatings are not
compatible.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other
discarded materials from the site.

1. After completing work, clean glass and spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
coatings by washing, scraping or other methods, being careful not to scratch or
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades from damage whether being coated or not. Correct damage
by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating as acceptable to the Architect. Leave in
an undamaged condition.
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly coated finishes. Remove temporary protective
wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing coating operations.
1. After construction activities of other trades are complete, touch up and restore
damaged or defaced coated surfaces.
3.7 COATING SCHEDULE
A. Provide the following coating systems for substrates indicated.

1. Apply additional coats, if undercoats or other conditions show through the final coat,
until the cured film is of uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.
B. Concrete and Masonry: Two finish coats over block filler with a total dry film thickness
not less than 20 mils, excluding block filler.
1. Block Filler: Manufacturer's recommended masonry block filler.
2. First Coat: Elastomeric coating.
3. Second Coat: Elastomeric coating.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 09 96 59
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Preparation of substrate.
2. Application of epoxy and urethane coating system.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. ASTM D 16 - Standard Terminology Relating to Paint, Varnish, and Related Products.
2. ASTM D 523 - Test Method for Specular Gloss.
B. Steel Structures Paint Council:

1. SSPC-SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning.
2. SSPC-SP3 - Power Tool Cleaning.
3. SSPC-SP6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning.
4. SSPC-SP7 – Brush-Off Blast Cleaning
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Comply with ASTM D 16 for interpretation of forms used in this Section.
B. Gloss Factors: Values of various degrees of luster when tested in accordance with
1. Eggshell: 5 to 20 units at 60-degree test angle.
2. Satin: 15 to 35 units at 60-degree test angle.
3. Semi-Gloss: 30 to 65 units at 60-degree test angle.
4. Gloss: Over 65 units at 60-degree test angle.
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis,

instruction for handling, storage, surface preparation procedures and application
recommendation for each paint system including primers and sealers
B. Shop Drawings: Submit painting schedule including manufacturer's product name, color,
and substrate proposed for painting and method of application.
C. Samples: Provide stepped samples defining each separate coat, including fillers and
primers of each color, texture and material to be applied on the following substrates:
1. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4" square samples of flat metal and two 8" long samples
of solid metal for each color and finish.
D. Quality Control Submittals:
High Performance Coatings 09 96 59 - 1

1. Certificates: Furnish by the manufacturer that all products supplied comply with local
regulations controlling use of volatile organic compound (VOC's).
A. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Minimum of five years documented experience in
manufacturing specified epoxy coatings.
2. Applicator Qualifications: Minimum five years documented experience applying
epoxy coatings on commercial projects with minimum of five completed projects of
similar scope and complexity; approved and trained by coating manufacturer.
3. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the
same manufacturer as the finish coat.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable codes, regulations ordinances and

laws regarding use and application of coating systems containing volatile organic
compounds.
C. Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to making field samples and placing order for
materials, Architect, Contractor, installer, and manufacturer's representative shall meet
and agree on methods and schedule for application.
D. Mock-Up:
1. Apply each coating on minimum 100 square feet of area for each type of coating
material.
2. Apply coatings over same substrate types as required for finished Work including
AESS and intumescent fireproofing. Coordinate with Work of Sections 05 12 13 and
07 81 23.
3. Mock-up will be used to judge quality and finish of completed work.
4. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place work and view from the
same distance and angles as the finished Work will be exposed to.
5. Mock-up may be left in place as part of completed work.
6. Final acceptance of colors and textures will be from approved mockups.
A. Deliver materials in factory sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact and
legible.
B. Container label to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number
and date of manufacturer, brand code, coverage rate, surface preparation instructions for
mixing and reducing drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and
C. Store materials in protected area at temperature recommended by manufacturer.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Project Conditions:
1. Apply coating materials only when air and surface temperatures do not exceed
minimum or maximum requirements for product to be applied; relative humidity is not

above 85 percent and surface temperature is at least 5 degrees F above dew point
and rising; and wind velocity is below 20 mph.
2. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to
prevent accumulations of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
B. Existing Conditions: Provide lighting levels of 80 ft. candles measured mid-height at

substrate surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:.
1. AkzoNobel: Devoe High Performance Coatings.
2. Tnemec Company, Inc. (Tnemec).
2.2 MIXING
A. Mix and thin materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not use material beyond manufacturer's recommended pot life.
2.3 FINISH
A. Colors: As selected by Architect, to match existing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify surfaces to be coated are dry, clean and ready to accept base coat in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate with Work of Section 05 12 13 “Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel” and

with Section 07 81 23 “Intumescent Fireproofing”. Ensure that fabrications of AESS and
surface preparation of the fireproofing, and selection and application of the high-
performance coating, does not affect fire ratings based on selected UL Design system.
B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Protect

surrounding and adjacent surfaces in manner recommended by coating manufacturer.
C. Scrape or grind protrusions flush with surface.
D. Dislodge dirt, mortar spatter and other dry materials by scraping or brushing. Remove
dust and loose material by brushing, sweeping, vacuuming, and blowing with high
pressure air.

E. Remove oil, wax, and grease by scraping off heavy deposits and cleaning with mineral
spirits or hot trisodium phosphate solution followed by water rinse.
F. Monitor Dew Point/ Relative Humidity at worksite prior to start of workday, and
periodically during the workday, utilizing electronic or sling psychrometer. Suspend work
when environmental conditions approach limits set out by manufacturer.
G. Concrete: Brush-off blast or acid etch in accordance with coating manufacturer's

recommendations; patch holes and cracks flush with surface using Portland cement grout
or other acceptable material.
H. Ferrous Metal:
1. Remove loose rust, mill scale and other foreign matter by hand or power tool cleaning
(SSPC SP-2, and SSPC SP-3, respectively),or by complying with SSPC-SP6
(Commercial Blast Cleaning), and coating manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Clean structural steel beams and metal deck which cannot be reached by commercial
blast cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP2 or SSPC SP-3, as required, and
3. Produce surface profile as instructed by the manufacturer’s data for the selected
coating system(s).
4. Remove any visible rust that forms on blast cleaned surface prior to coating
application by reblasting in compliance with SSPC-SP6.
I. Nonferrous Metal: Clean surface with mineral spirits.
J. Galvanized Metal: Remove contaminants and protective mill coating by blast cleaning in
compliance with SSPC-SP7, utilizing non-aggressive abrasive (pecan shells, corn cob, or
similar) , or acid etching with a solution of phosphoric acid and detergents specifically
formulated to remove grease and oil residue, and provide a lightly etched substrate
surface, using care not to damage or remove galvanized coating
K. Intumescent Fireproofing: Comply with fireproofing and coating manufacturers’

requirements to ensure proper preparation, application, and compliance with fire-ratings.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply materials within specified film thickness range, by method recommended by

manufacturer.
B. Apply first coatings within four hours maximum of commercial blasting of steel or hand
tool cleaning of tops of beams.
C. Allow each coat to dry thoroughly before recoating, observing manufacturer’s stated re-
coat windows.
D. Using recommended brush or roller, apply “stripe coat” to sharp angles, bolt heads, bolt
threads, welds, and other irregular surfaces, prior to application of subsequent coats.
E. Work material into surface voids and hairline cracks. Cut in edges clean and sharp
where work joins other materials or colors.

F. Make finish coats smooth, uniform in texture and color, and free of brush marks, laps,
runs, dry spray, overspray and skipped or missed areas.
G. Do not apply coating to any moving part of operating units, mechanical and electrical
parts, laboratory labels, or equipment identification plates.
A. Request acceptance of each coat before applying succeeding coats.
B. Manufacturer's representative shall visit site at beginning and during coating process to
offer assistance on proper application procedures and verify that materials are applied in
accordance with specification requirements.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Touch up and repair damaged or otherwise unacceptable work.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Remove coating spatters from glass and adjoining surfaces.
3.7 COATING SCHEDULE
A. Metal - Ferrous:
1. Finish: Semigloss polyurethane over high-build epoxy and zinc-rich primer.
2. Cleaning: SSPC-SP6, commercial blast down to bare metal.
3. Primer: Aromatic polyurethane or inorganic silicate zinc-rich primer; one or two-
component.
a. Devoe Coatings, Interzinc 2280 Primer.
b. Tnemec: Series 90-97 Tneme-Zinc
4. First Coat: Epoxy, high-build, low gloss.
a. Devoe Coatings, Bar-Rust 231 Multi-Purpose Epoxy Mastic.
b. Tnemec: Series 280 Polyamine Epoxy.
5. Second Coat: High-solids, two-component, pigmented polyurethane, semi-gloss.
a. Devoe Coatings, Devthane 378 Aliphatic Urethane Semi-Gloss Enamel.
b. Tnemec: Series 1095 Endura-Shield Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane Semi-Gloss.
B. Metal – Galvanized steel and non-ferrous metals:

1. Finish: Semigloss polyurethane over epoxy.
2. Cleaning: SSPC-SP16, brush-off blast, or acid etching at bare galvanized surfaces.
3. Primer: Epoxy, Water-based.
a. Devoe Coatings: Devran 203 Water-Borne Epoxy Primer.
b. Tnemec: Series 1224 Epoxoline WB.
4. First Coat: Epoxy, high-build, low gloss.
a. Devoe Coatings, Bar-Rust 231 Multi-Purpose Epoxy Mastic.
b. Tnemec: Series 280 Polyamine Epoxy.
5. Second Coat: High-solids, two-component, pigmented polyurethane, semi-gloss.
a. Devoe Coatings, Devthane 378 Aliphatic Urethane Semi-Gloss Enamel.
b. Tnemec: Series 1095 EnduraShield Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane Semi-Gloss.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 10 11 00
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Visual display marker board assemblies.
2. Floor to ceiling marker wall assemblies.
3. Tackboard assemblies
4. Tackwall assemblies
A. Product Data: Technical data including construction details, material descriptions,

dimensions of individual components and profiles, finishes, and accessories for visual
display units.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment to other
work.
1. Show locations of panel joints. Show locations of field assembled joints for factory
fabricated units too large to ship in one piece.
2. Show locations and layout of special purpose graphics.
3. Include sections of typical trim members.
C. Samples: Submit for each type of visual display unit indicated.

1. Visual Display Panel: Minimum 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches (215 mm by 280 mm),
with facing, core, and backing indicated for final work including one panel for each
type, color, and texture required.
2. Trim: 6 inch (150 mm) long sections of each trim profile.
3. Marker wall: 12 inch square (305 mm square) off each marker sheet type and
color.
4. Tack wall: 12 inch square (305 mm square) off each tackable sheet type and color.
5. Accessories: Full size sample of each type of accessory.
D. Product Schedule: Submit visual display unit schedule using same designations
B. Product Test Reports: Submit reports for each visual display unit, for tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.
Visual Display Units 10 11 00 - 1

A. Maintenance Data: Submit data for visual display units to include in maintenance
manuals.
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity having minimum 5 years documented experience that

employs installers and supervisors trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to

set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockups of typical wall areas and visual display units with accessories
shown on Drawings. Show seam treatment.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at site.
A. Deliver factory fabricated visual display units completely assembled in one piece. If
dimensions exceed maximum manufactured unit size, or if unit size is impracticable to
ship in one piece, provide two or more pieces with joints in locations indicated on
approved Shop Drawings.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install visual display units until spaces are
enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings
is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient
temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the
construction period.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Porcelain Enamel Face Sheets: Written warranty sighed by the manufacturer in which
the manufacturer agrees to repair or replace porcelain enamel face sheets that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
a. Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities.
b. Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking.

3. Warranty Period: Life of the building.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing
1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less.
2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

application.
2.2 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARD ASSEMBLY
A. Basis of Design, Marker Boards - MB: LCS Deluxe Porcelain Whiteboard by Claridge
B. Basis of Design, Tack Boards - TB: 800 Series Tackboard by Claridge
C. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

products by one of the following:
1. BestRite Chalkboards Company, MooreCo, Inc.
2. PolyVision Corporation, a Steelcase company.
3. US Porcelain Manufacturers.
D. Visual Display Board Assembly: Factory fabricated.

1. Assemblies:
a. Framed tackboards.
b. Framed markerboards.
2. Corners: Square.
3. Width: Indicated on Drawings.
4. Height: Indicated on Drawings.
5. Mounting Method: Direct to wall.
E. Markerboard Panel: Porcelain enamel faced markerboard panel on core indicated.

1. Color: White.
F. Tackboard Panel: Pigmented natural cork tackboard panel on core indicated.

1. Color and Pattern: Selected by Architect.
G. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricated from not less than 0.062 inch (1.57 mm) thick,
extruded aluminum; standard size and shape.
1. Aluminum Finish: Clear anodic finish.
H. Joints: Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length.
Fabricate with minimum number of joints, as indicated on approved Shop Drawings.
I. Accessories:
1. Marker/Chalk Tray: Continuous type.
a. Box Type: Extruded aluminum with slanted front, grooved tray, and cast
aluminum end closures.

2. Map/Display Rail: Extruded aluminum display rail with plastic impregnated cork
insert, end stops, and continuous paper holder, designed to hold accessories.
a. Size: 1 inch high by full length of visual display unit or other lengths indicated
on Drawings.
b. Map Hooks: Two map hooks for every 48 (1200) inches (mm) of display rail
or fraction thereof.
c. Flag Holder: Two for each room.
2.3 VISUAL WALL ASSEMBLIES
A. Basis of Design, Marker Wall - MKW: Arise Marker Wall by Claridge.
B. Basis of Design, Bulletin Board – TW: by Forbo.
C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:
1. AJW Architectural Products.
2. Egan Visual Inc.
3. K-Pro Specialty Products.
4. Platinum Visual Systems.
D. Marker Wall Panel Assemblies: Consisting of markerboard panels with porcelain enamel
facing on core indicated; fabricated for floor to ceiling assemblies.
1. Dimensions: As shown on Drawings
2. Perimeter Edge Treatment: Provide continuous extruded aluminum H-channels
around entire perimeter of panel installation. Miter corners for tight installation
according to panel manufacturer’s instructions.
3. Between Panel Edge Treatment: Butt panels together without transition member.
Ensure edges are finished to match faces.
4. Color: White or as Selected by Architect.
E. Tackboard Panel Assemblies: Consisting of tackboard rolled goods fabricated from

through-body panels providing a homogeneous tackable surface made of primary natural
materials consisting of linseed oil, cork, rosin binders and dry pigments, mixed and
calendared onto a natural jute backing; fabricated for floor to ceiling assemblies.
1. Dimensions: As shown on Drawings
2. Edge Treatments:
a. Perimeter Edge Treatment: Provide continuous extruded aluminum H-
channels around entire perimeter of panel installation. Miter corners for tight
installation according to panel manufacturer’s instructions.
b. Panel Joint Edges: Butt joints, joined with extruded aluminum H-channels
between panels according to panel manufacturer’s instructions.
F. Joint Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard treatment or as selected by Architect at butt

joints.
2.4 MARKERBOARD PANELS
A. Porcelain Enamel Markerboard Panels: Balanced, high pressure, factory laminated

markerboard assembly of three ply construction, consisting of moisture barrier backing,

core material, and porcelain enamel face sheet with gloss finish appropriate for use as
projection screen. Laminate panels under heat and pressure with flexible waterproof
adhesive.
1. Face Sheet Thickness: Nominal 0.021 inch (0.53 mm) uncoated base metal
thickness.
2. Standard Core: Minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, with moisture barrier backing.
3. Laminating Adhesive: Moisture resistant thermoplastic type recommended by
manufacturer.
2.5 TACKABLE PANELS
A. Tack Wall Panels: ¼ inch thick cork sheet
B. Tackboard Panels:
1. Facing: 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, natural cork.
2. Core: Manufacturer’s standard for products listed.
2.6 MATERIALS
A. Porcelain Enamel Face Sheet: PEI-1002, with face sheet manufacturer's two or three
coat process.
B. Natural Cork Sheet: Seamless, single layer, compressed fine grain cork sheet; bulletin
board quality; face sanded for natural finish; with surface burning characteristics
indicated.
C. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, tempered.
D. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-1.
E. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.
F. Fiberboard: ASTM C 208 cellulosic fiber insulating board.
G. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063.
H. Adhesives for Field Application: Mildew resistant, nonstaining adhesive for use with
specific type of panels, sheets, or assemblies; and for substrate application; as
recommended in writing by visual display unit manufacturer.
I. Primer/Sealer: Mildew resistant primer/sealer complying with requirements in Section 09

91 23 and recommended in writing by visual display unit manufacturer for intended
substrate.
2.7 FINISH REQUIREMENTS
finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,


C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable.

A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
B. Powder Coat Finish: AAMA 2603, except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils
(0.04 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning,
conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and conditions affecting performance of the work.
B. Examine roughing in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of connections
before installation of motorized, sliding visual display units.
C. Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation and backing for visual display units.
D. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth where sliding visual display units
will be installed.
E. Proceed with installation after correcting unsatisfactory conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.
B. Clean substrates of substances, such as dirt, mold, and mildew, that could impair the
performance of and affect the smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards.
C. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound
coatings, cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair bond
between visual display units and wall surfaces.
D. Prime wall surfaces indicated to receive visual display units and direct applied, floor to
ceiling visual display assemblies and as recommended in writing by primer/sealer
manufacturer and visual display unit manufacturer.
E. Prepare recesses for sliding visual display units as required by type and size of unit.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on

Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight,

level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets,
anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation.
B. Field Assembled Visual Display Wall Assemblies: Coordinate field assembled units with
grounds, trim, and accessories indicated. Join parts with a neat, precision fit.
1. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length.
Fabricate with minimum number of joints, as indicated on approved Shop
Drawings.
2. Where size of visual display board assemblies or other conditions require support
in addition to normal trim, provide structural supports or modify trim as indicated or
as selected by Architect from structural support accessories to suit conditions
indicated.
C. Factory Fabricated Visual Display Board Assemblies: Adhere to wall surfaces with egg
size adhesive gobs at 16 inches (400 mm) o.c., horizontally and vertically.
D. Factory Fabricated Visual Display Board Assemblies: Attach concealed clips, hangers,
and grounds to wall surfaces and to visual display board assemblies with fasteners at
not more than 16 inches (
E. Floor to Ceiling Marker Wall and Tack Wall Panels: Attach panels to wall surface with
egg size adhesive gobs at 16 inches (400 mm) o.c., horizontally and vertically.
1. Join adjacent panels according to approved shop drawings.
A. Clean visual display units in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Attach
one removable cleaning instructions label to visual display unit in each room.
B. Touch up factory applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
C. Cover and protect visual display units after installation and cleaning.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 10 11 17
GLASS MARKER BOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Glass markerboards.

components and profiles, finishes, and accessories for visual display units.
2. Include electrical characteristics for motorized units.
B. Shop Drawings: For visual display units.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment to other work.
2. Show locations of panel joints, if required.
3. Include sections of typical trim members.
C. Samples: For each type of visual display unit indicated, for units with factory-applied
color finishes, and as follows:
1. Samples of facings for each visual display panel type, indicating color and
texture.
2. Include accessory Samples to verify color selected.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For visual display units to include in maintenance
manuals.
trained and approved by manufacturer.
A. Deliver factory-fabricated visual display units completely assembled in one piece. If

dimensions exceed maximum manufactured unit size, or if unit size is impracticable to
ship in one piece, provide two or more pieces with joints in locations indicated on
approved Shop Drawings.
Glass Markerboards 10 11 17 - 1
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install visual display units until spaces are
enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above
ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining
ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder
of the construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with visual

display units by field measurements before fabrication.
1. Allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication
might delay the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of visual display unit from single source from
2.2 GLASS MARKERBOARDS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Clarus

Glassboards, LLC; Glassboard Depth, or comparable product by one of the following:
1. A-1 Visual Systems.
2. Architectural School Products Ltd.
3. Best-Rite; MooreCo, Inc.
4. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
5. Egan Visual Inc.
6. Ghent Manufacturing, Inc.
7. Marsh Industries, Inc.
B. Glass Markerboards:
1. Exterior: 13-mm tempered laminated glass markerboard, with smooth polished
edge and eased corners; color coated on back surface, mounted with clips to
brick kneewall.
2. Interior: 6-mm tempered glass markerboard, with smooth polished edge and
eased corners; color coated on back surface, wall-mounted with stand-offs.
C. Mounting:
1. Exterior: Mount on brick wall with clip system.
2. Interior: Round, stainless-steel standoffs, holding glass approximately 1 inch from
wall surface; mounted through holes in markerboard.
D. Color and Gloss: As indicated on Drawings.
E. Marker Tray: Aluminum, fastened to wall beneath markerboard.

1. Provide one set of five colored markers per markerboard.
F. Size: As indicated on Drawings.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Clear Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1,
Quality Q3, with exposed edges seamed before tempering.
B. Laminated Glass: ASTM C1172.
C. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063.
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.


A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
requirements for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions
B. Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation and backing for visual display
units.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.
B. Clean substrates of substances, such as dirt, mold, and mildew, that could impair the
performance of and affect the smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards.
C. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound
coatings, cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair
bond between visual display units and wall surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Factory-Fabricated Glass Marker Board Assemblies: Attach concealed clips, hangers,

and grounds to wall surfaces and to visual display board assemblies with fasteners at
not more than 16 inches o.c.
B. Glass Marker Board Mounting Heights: Install glass marker boards at mounting
heights indicated on Drawings.
A. Clean visual display units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one
removable cleaning instructions label to visual display unit in each room.
B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
C. Cover and protect visual display units after installation and cleaning.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 10 14 16
PLAQUES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Metal plaques.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Accessible: In accordance with the accessibility standard.
A. Product Data: Technical data for each type of product including installation methods.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit fabrication and installation details and attachments to other
work.
1. Show plaque mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be
provided by other installers, and accessories.
2. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, and layout for each plaque at
least half size.
C. Samples: Submit samples for each type of plaque showing all components and with the
required finish(es), in manufacturer's standard size unless otherwise indicated and as
follows:
1. Plaques: Full size Sample.
2. Exposed Accessories: Full size Sample of each accessory type.
D. Product Schedule: Submit schedule using same designations indicated on Drawings or

specified.
A. Qualification Data: Submit data for Installer and manufacturer.
A. Maintenance Data: Submit data for plaques to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Installer Qualifications: Entity having minimum five years documented experience that
employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.
A. Deliver signs to site in manufacturer’s unopened packaging.
Plaques 10 14 16 - 1
B. Leave protective covering on sign until completion of installation.
1.8 WARRANTY

replace components of plaques that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering.
b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements.

2.2 PLAQUES
A. Cast Plaque: Cast metal plaque with background texture, border, and characters having
uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows:
of the following:
a. A.R.K. Ramos.
b. ACE Sign Systems, Inc.
c. Erie Landmark Company; a division of Paul W. Zimmerman Foundries.
d. Gemini Incorporated.
e. Matthews International Corporation; Bronze Division.
f. Metal Arts.
g. Metallic Arts.
h. Signs & Decal Corp.
i. Southwell Company (The).
2. Plaque Material: Cast aluminum.
3. Plaque Thickness: 0.50 inch (12.7 mm).
4. Finishes:
a. Aluminum Finish: Selected by Architect.
5. Background Texture: Selected by Architect.
6. Integrally Cast Border Style: Indicated on Drawings.
7. Applied Frame Material, Style, and Finish: Indicated on Drawings.
8. Mounting: Indicated on Drawings.
9. Text and Typeface: Typeface selected by Architect and variable content as
scheduled. Finish raised characters to contrast with background color, and finish
Braille to match background color.
Plaques 10 14 16 - 2
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B26/B26M, alloy and temper recommended by plaque

manufacturer for casting process used and for type of use and finish indicated.
B. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), alloy and temper
recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.
C. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), alloy and temper recommended by
aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.
D. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304, stretcher leveled
standard of flatness.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchors: Necessary for secure anchorage of plaques, noncorrosive and
compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:
1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed.
2. Furnish stainless steel devices unless otherwise indicated.
3. Exposed Metal Fastener Components:
a. Fabricated from same basic metal and finish of fastened metal unless
b. Fastener Heads: For nonstructural connections, use flathead screws and
bolts with tamper resistant spanner head or one way head slots unless
4. Plaque Mounting Fasteners:
a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to
back of plaque, screwed into back of plaque, or screwed into tapped lugs
cast integrally into back of plaque unless otherwise indicated.
b. Through Fasteners: Exposed metal fasteners matching plaque finish, with
type of head indicated, installed in predrilled holes.
B. Adhesive: Recommended by plaque manufacturer.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Provide plaques according to requirements indicated.

1. Preassemble plaques in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble
plaques only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units
for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from view
after final assembly.
2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to
resist water penetration and retention.
3. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding and brazing. Provide
welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring
exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress
exposed and contact surfaces.
4. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are
inconspicuous.
Plaques 10 14 16 - 3
5. Provide rabbets, lugs, and tabs necessary to assemble components and to attach
to existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners
where possible; use exposed fasteners that match plaque finish.
6. Castings: Fabricate castings free of warp, cracks, blowholes, pits, scale, sand
holes, and other defects that impair appearance or strength. Grind, wire brush,
sandblast, and buff castings to remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and
casting marks before finishing.
B. Brackets: Fabricate brackets, fittings, and hardware for bracket mounted plaques to suit
plaque construction and mounting conditions indicated. Modify brackets as necessary.
1. Aluminum Brackets: Factory finish brackets with baked enamel or powder coat
finish to match plaque background color unless otherwise indicated.
2. Stainless Steel Brackets: Factory finish brackets to match plaque background
finish unless otherwise indicated.

C. Directional Finishes: Run grain with long dimension of each piece and perpendicular to
long dimension of finished trim or border surface unless otherwise indicated.
D. Organic, Anodic, and Chemically Produced Finishes: Apply to formed metal after
fabrication but before applying contrasting polished finishes on raised features unless
E. Aluminum Finishes:
1. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
2. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
F. Stainless Steel Finishes:

1. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into
finish.
2. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of
cross scratches.
a. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove
embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
b. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
Plaques 10 14 16 - 4
B. Verify that plaque support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate plaques
without gaps or irregularities between backs of plaques and support surfaces unless
C. Proceed with installation after correcting unsatisfactory conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install plaques using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's

1. Install plaques level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated,
with plaque surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.
2. Install plaques so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility
standard.
3. Before installation, verify that plaque surfaces are clean and free of materials or
debris that would impair installation.
4. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with
grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of
bituminous paint.
B. Mounting Methods:
1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on
back of plaque. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.
a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for
displaced adhesive. Place plaque in position and push until flush to surface,
embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support plaque in position until
adhesive fully sets.
b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place plaque in position and flush to surface, install
washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and
tighten.
2. Through Fasteners: Drill holes in substrate using predrilled holes in plaque as
template. Countersink holes in plaque if required. Place plaque in position and
flush to surface. Install through fasteners and tighten.
3. Brackets: Remove loose debris from substrate surface and install bracket supports
in position, so that plaque is correctly located and aligned.
4. Shim Plate Mounting: Provide 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick, concealed aluminum shim
plates with predrilled and countersunk holes, at locations indicated, and where
other direct mounting methods are impractical. Attach plate with fasteners and
anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate. Attach plaques to plate using
specified method.
A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed plaques and plaques that do not comply
with specified requirements. Replace plaques with damaged or deteriorated finishes or
components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair
procedures.
B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as plaques are installed.
Plaques 10 14 16 - 5
C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of plaques according to

manufacturer's written instructions and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish.
Maintain plaques in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until
END OF SECTION
Plaques 10 14 16 - 6
SECTION 10 14 21
ILLUMINATED DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Backlit illuminated, fabricated channel dimensional characters.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Illuminated: Illuminated by lighting source integrally constructed as part of the sign

unit.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Furnish templates for placement of electrical service embedded in permanent

construction by other installers.
B. Shop Drawings: For signs.

1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work.
2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided
by other installers, and accessories.
3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, and layout for each sign at
least half size.
4. Show locations of electrical service connections.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer’s color charts for baked-enamel and
powder-coat finishes indicating complete line of available colors.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign assembly showing all components and
with the required finish(es), in manufacturer's standard size unless otherwise indicated
and as follows:
1. Dimensional Characters: Full-size Sample of dimensional character.
2. Full-size Samples, if approved, will be returned to Contractor for use in the
Project.
Illuminated Dimension Letter Signage 10 14 21 - 1

A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer of products, or an entity that employs installers

and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.
A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of electrical service embedded in permanent

construction by other installers by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that

b. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Thermal Movements: For exterior fabricated channel dimensional characters, allow for
thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

application.
2.2 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS
A. Fabricated Channel Characters: Metal face and side returns, formed free from warp
and distortion; with uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and

profiles; internally braced for stability, to meet structural performance loading without
oil-canning or other surface deformation, and for securing fasteners; and as follows.
a. A.R.K. Ramos.
b. ACE Sign Systems, Inc.
c. Allen Industries Architectural Signage.
d. APCO Graphics, Inc.
e. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
f. Charleston Industries, Inc.
g. Cosco.
h. Gemini Incorporated.
i. Metallic Arts.
j. Signs & Decal Corp.
2. Illuminated Characters: Backlighted character construction with LED lighting,
including transformers, insulators, and other accessories for operability, with
provision for servicing and concealing connections to building electrical system.
Use tight or sealed joint construction to prevent unintentional light leakage.
Space lamps apart from each other and away from character surfaces as needed
to illuminate evenly.
a. Power: As indicated on electrical Drawings.
b. Weeps: Provide weep holes to drain water at lowest part of exterior
characters. Equip weeps with permanent baffles to block light leakage
without inhibiting drainage.
3. Character Material: Aluminum channels formed from sheet or plate aluminum.
4. Material Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size and design of character,
but not less than 0.100 inch.
5. Character Height: 14 inches (355 mm).
6. Character Depth: Manufacturer’s standard, but not less than 3/4-inch (19 mm).
7. Finishes:
a. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, in color
as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
8. Mounting: Projecting studs for backlit applications.
a. Hold characters at manufacturer's recommended distance, but not less
than 1 1/2 inches (38 mm) from wall surface.
9. Typeface: Helvetica, upper case letters.
2.3 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTER MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B26/B26M, alloy and temper recommended by sign

manufacturer for casting process used and for type of use and finish indicated.
B. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum
producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.

C. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum

producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.
D. Paints and Coatings for Sheet Materials: Inks, dyes, and paints that are recommended
by manufacturer for optimum adherence to surface and are UV and water resistant for
colors and exposure indicated.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of

signs, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the
following:
1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed.
2. For exterior exposure, furnish stainless steel devices unless otherwise indicated.
3. Exposed Metal-Fastener Components:
a. Fabricated from same basic metal and finish of fastened metal unless
4. Sign Mounting Fasteners:
a. Projecting Studs: Threaded studs with sleeve spacer, welded or brazed to
back of sign material, screwed into back of sign assembly, or screwed into
tapped lugs cast integrally into back of cast sign material, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with

ASTM D1187/D1187M.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements

indicated.
1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible.
Disassemble signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in
locations concealed from view after final assembly.
inconspicuous.
5. Internally brace dimensional characters for stability, to meet structural
performance loading without oil-canning or other surface deformation, and for
securing fasteners.

6. Provide rabbets, lugs, and tabs necessary to assemble components and to

attach to existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed
fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish.
7. Castings: Fabricate castings free of warp, cracks, blowholes, pits, scale, sand
holes, and other defects that impair appearance or strength. Grind, wire brush,
sandblast, and buff castings to remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and
other casting marks before finishing.
A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a

A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film
thickness of 1.5 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for
cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s complete line.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without
gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Verify that electrical service is correctly sized and located to accommodate signs.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS
A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to

1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with
sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.
2. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or
debris that would impair installation.

3. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact

with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of
bituminous paint.
B. Mounting Methods:
1. Projecting Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on
back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.
a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole
for displaced adhesive. Place spacers on studs, place sign in position, and
push until spacers are pinched between sign and substrate, embedding the
stud ends in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully
sets.
b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place spacers on studs, place sign in position
with spacers pinched between sign and substrate, and install washers and
nuts on stud ends projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.
A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed characters and signs that do not comply
with specified requirements. Replace characters with damaged or deteriorated finishes
or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor
repair procedures.
B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.
C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to

manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish.
Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until
END OF SECTION

SECTION 10 14 23
PANEL SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

1. Interior room identification signs.
2. Storm shelter signage.
1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary Project
identification signs and for temporary information and directional signs.
2. Section 10 14 24 “First Responder Panel Signage” for exterior “first responder”
signage
3. Section 14 21 23 “Machine Roomless Electric Traction Passenger Elevators” for
elevator related signage.
4. Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for labels,
tags, and nameplates for plumbing systems and equipment.
5. Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for labels,
tags, and nameplates for HVAC systems and equipment.
6. Division 26 Sections for electrical service and connections for illuminated signs.
7. Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" for labels, tags, and
nameplates for electrical equipment.
8. Division 26 Section "Interior Lighting" for illuminated Exit signs.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers

Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for
Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines."
B. Shop Drawings: For panel signs.

1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work.
by others, and accessories.
Panel Signage 10 14 23 - 1
3. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters

and Braille, and layout for each sign.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly and exposed finish.
1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols.
D. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for the full range of
color, texture, and sign material indicated, of sizes indicated:
1. Room-Identification Signs: Full-size Sample.
2. Storm Shelter Signs: Full-size Sample.
3. Full-size Samples, if approved, will be returned to Contractor for use in Project.
E. Product Schedule: For panel signs. Use same designations indicated on Drawings or
specified.
A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.
A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate

products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of
successful in-service performance.
B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
a. Deterioration of metal and polymer finishes beyond normal weathering.
b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image colors and sign lamination.
c. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design, Manufacturer: Benchmark Signs, Weatherford, TX.
B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

1. A Sign of Quality, LLC.
2. APCO Graphics, Inc.
3. ASI-Modulex, Inc.
4. Best Sign Systems.
5. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc.
6. InPro Corporation
C. Source Limitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a
A. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the USDOJ's "2010 ADA
Standards for Accessible Design," ICC A117.1, and Texas Accessibility Standards
(TAS).
B. Storm Shelter Signage: Comply with FEMA 361, Design and Construction Guidance
for Community Safe Rooms; and ICC 500, ICC/NSSA Standard for the Design and
Construction of Storm Shelters.
2.3 PANEL SIGNS
A. Panel Sign: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having
uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles.
1. All signs shall be ADA compliant.
B. Room-Identification Sign: Signs with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and
characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and
profiles; and as follows:
1. Material: 1/8-inch thick polymer with raised copy and Grade II Braille.
2. Finish: Surface and edge painted.
3. Font: Swis 721 BT Roman, all caps or as shown on Drawings
C. Signs which require tactile copy and Grade II Braille shall be manufactured utilizing a
1/32”, raised engraved lettering.
1. Tactile lettering shall be precision machined, raised 1/32-inch.
D. Sign Types and Configuration: As indicated on Drawings.
E. Panel Sign Schedule: Refer to Drawings for Schedule.
F. Mounting: One of the following, as selected by fabricator / installer:

1. Adhesive: As recommended by sign manufacturer.
2. Two-Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high-bond, foam-core tape, 0.045 inch
thick, with adhesive on both sides.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabrication of signage assemblies shall be in accordance with approved

Shop Drawings and manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated.

1. Preassemble signs in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs
and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly
mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed
from view after final assembly.
2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather
to resist water penetration and retention.
C. Copy shall be a true, clean, accurate reproduction of typeface(s) specified. Provide

upper and lower case or all caps as indicated on Drawings. Letter spacing to be
normal and interline spacing shall be set by manufacturer.
D. Arrows, Symbols, Graphis, and Logo Art: Provided in style, sizes, colors and spacing
as indicated on Drawings.
E. Signs with Changeable Message Capability: Fabricate signs to allow insertion of

changeable messages as follows:
1. For slide-in changeable inserts, fabricate slot without burrs or constrictions that
inhibit function. Furnish initial changeable insert. Furnish two blank inserts for
each sign for Owner's use.
A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces

are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples.
Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance
of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples
and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
C. Finishes shall comply with Accessibility Standards.
D. Provide primer coats or other surface pre-treatment where recommended by signage

manufacturer.
E. Sign colors shall match approved samples and shall be as specified in unit
descriptions. Sign colors shall be consistent in chroma and value, shall maintain
proper opacity or translucency, and shall be free of all imperfections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
work.
B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without
gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise
indicated.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to

2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility
standard.
3. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where
applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs
on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign
without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door.
B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except

where more stringent requirements are indicated.
C. Accessibility: Install signs in locations on walls as indicated on Drawings and according

to the Accessibility Standards.
D. Mounting Methods:
1. Adhesive: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove
loose debris. Apply linear beads or spots of adhesive symmetrically to back of
sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign after cure without slippage.
Keep adhesive away from edges to prevent adhesive extrusion as sign is applied
and to prevent visibility of cured adhesive at sign edges. Place sign in position,
and push to engage adhesive. Temporarily support sign in position until
adhesive fully sets.
2. Two-Face Tape: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and

remove loose debris. Apply tape strips symmetrically to back of sign and of
suitable quantity to support weight of sign without slippage. Keep strips away
from edges to prevent visibility at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to
engage tape adhesive.
E. Signs Mounted on Glass: Provide opaque sheet matching sign material and finish onto
opposite side of glass to conceal back of sign.
A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with
specified requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or
components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor
repair procedures.

manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 10 14 24
FIRST RESPONDER PANEL SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Exterior, wall-mounted, first-responder panel signs.
A. Product Data: Technical data for each type of product including installation methods.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit fabrication and installation details and attachments to other
work.
by other installers, and accessories.
2. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and
Braille, and layout for each sign at least half size.
C. Samples: Submit for each type of sign assembly showing components and with required
finish(es), in size indicated:
1. Panel Signs: Full size sample.
2. Component Materials: Full size sample of each base material, character (letter,
number, and graphic element) in each exposed color and finish not included in
Samples above.
3. Exposed Accessories: Full size Sample of each accessory type.
D. Product Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings or specified.
E. Delegated Design Submittal: Submit for signage indicated, including structural analysis
calculations for signs indicated to comply with design loads; signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
A. Qualification Data: Submit data for Installer and manufacturer.
B. Evaluation Reports: ICC-ES report for post installed anchors and power actuated
fasteners from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
A. Maintenance Data: Submit data for signs to include in maintenance manuals.
FIRST RESPONDER PANEL SIGNAGE 10 14 24 - 1

A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide each type of signage by a single manufacturer.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Furnish templates for placement of sign anchorage devices embedded in permanent

B. Furnish templates for placement of electrical service embedded in permanent

A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of anchorage devices embedded in permanent

construction by other installers by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.8 WARRANTY

replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image.
c. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer to design sign structure and
anchorage of exterior sign types according to structural performance requirements.
B. Structural Performance: Signs and supporting elements shall withstand the effects of
gravity and other loads within limits and under conditions indicated.
1. Uniform Wind Load: Indicated on Drawings.
2. Concentrated Horizontal Load: Indicated on Drawings.
3. Other Design Load: Indicated on Drawings.
C. Thermal Movements: For exterior signs, allow for thermal movements from ambient and
surface temperature changes.
(100 degrees C), material surfaces.
D. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements.


3. Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS).
2.2 PANEL SIGNS
A. Compliance Standards: ASTM D4956, Type 1, Engineering Grade, Retroreflective

aluminum substrate with UV-resistant ink and clear coating applied by digital or screen
process. Backing Class 1 through 4 as standard with sign fabricator for signage types
shown. Daytime color and outdoor weathering as standard for Type 1 sheeting.
1. Fire Department Connection Signage: Comply with Texas Government Code
417.008 and with NFPA 1, Fire Code, for content, layout, graphics, lettering, colors,
and content. Inspect in accordance with the Government Code 417.0081.
B. Panel Sign: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having
uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows:
1. Basis of Design, Manufacturer: Benchmark Signs, Weatherford, TX
2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide products by one of the following:
a. ACE Sign Systems, Inc.
b. Advance Corporation.
c. APCO Graphics, Inc.
d. ASE, Inc.
e. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
f. Best Sign Systems, Inc.
g. Clarke Systems.
h. Diskey Architectural Signage Inc.
i. Fossil Industries, Inc.
j. InPro Corporation (IPC).
k. Mohawk Sign Systems.
l. Nelson-Harkins Industries.
m. Poblocki Sign Company, LLC.
n. Seton Identification Products.
o. Signs & Decal Corp.
p. Stamprite Supersine; a division of Stamp Rite Inc.
q. Vista System.
r. Vomar Products, Inc.
C. Solid Sheet Sign: Aluminum sheet with finish specified:

1. Thickness: 0.080 inch (2.03 mm).
2. Surface Applied, Flat Graphics: Applied baked enamel, powder coat, or urethane
paint.
D. Sign Panel Perimeter: Finish edges smooth.

1. Edge Condition: Square cut.
2. Corner Condition in Elevation: Indicated on Drawings. Provide rounded to radius
where indicated.
E. Mounting: Surface mounted to wall with concealed anchors, countersunk flathead

through fasteners, adhesive, or two face tape.

F. Surface Finish and Applied Graphics:

1. Integral Aluminum Finish: Clear anodized unless otherwise Selected by Architect.
2. Baked Enamel or Powder Coat Finish and Graphics: Colors selected by Architect.
3. Painted Finish and Graphics: Factory applied exterior grade urethane sign paint;
colors selected by Architect.
4. Photo Image Graphics: Black and white or multicolor, 600 dpi halftone or dot
screen image as identified by Architect prior to sign fabrication.
5. Overcoat: Baked on or air-dry urethane clear coating.
G. Text and Typeface: Accessible raised characters and Braille, typeface selected by
Architect and variable content as scheduled. Finish raised characters to contrast with
background color, and finish Braille to match background color.
H. Flatness Tolerance: Sign shall remain flat or uniformly curved under installed conditions
as indicated on Drawings and within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm)
measured diagonally from corner to corner.
2.3 PANEL SIGN MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper
recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.
B. Vinyl Film: UV resistant vinyl film of nominal thickness indicated, with pressure sensitive,
permanent adhesive on back; die cut to form characters or images as indicated on
Drawings and suitable for exterior applications.
C. Paints and Coatings for Sheet Materials: Urethane sign paints by Matthews Paints or
equivalent for optimum adherence to surface; UV and water resistant for colors and
exposure indicated.
D. Accessories:
1. Fasteners and Anchors: Fastening necessary for secure anchorage of signs,
noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the
following unless otherwise indicated:
a. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed.
b. For exterior exposure, furnish stainless steel devices unless otherwise
indicated.
c. Exposed Metal Fastener Components:
1) Fastener Heads: For nonstructural connections, use flathead or oval
countersunk screws and bolts with tamper resistant spanner head
slots unless otherwise indicated.
d. Sign Mounting Fasteners:
1) Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed
to back of sign material or screwed into back of sign assembly unless
2) Projecting Studs: Threaded studs with sleeve spacer, welded or
brazed to back of sign material or screwed into back of sign assembly,
3) Through Fasteners: Exposed metal fasteners matching sign finish,
with type of head indicated, and installed in predrilled holes.
e. Inserts: Furnish inserts to be set by others into concrete or masonry work.

2. Post Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with bolts of same basic metal as
fastened metal, if visible, unless otherwise indicated; with working capacity greater
than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01, ICC-ES AC193, ICC-
ES AC58, or ICC-ES AC308 as appropriate for the substrate. Ensure that
expansion anchors do not damage substrates receiving signage.
a. Uses: Securing signs with imposed loads to structure.
b. Stainless Steel: Alloy Group 1 (A1) or Group 2 (A4) stainless steel bolts,
ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).
3. Power Actuated Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or
equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.
4. Adhesive: Type recommended by sign manufacturer for permanent installation.
5. Two Face Tape: High bond, foam core tape, 0.045 inch (1.14 mm) thick, with
adhesive on both sides. Provide VHB Heavy Duty Mounting Tape by 3 M.
6. Bituminous Paint: Cold applied asphalt emulsion complying with
ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Provide sign assemblies according to requirements indicated.

1. Preassemble signs in the shop.
inconspicuous.
5. Internally brace signs for stability, to meet structural performance loading without
oil-canning or other surface deformation, and for securing fasteners.
6. Provide rabbets, lugs, and tabs necessary to assemble components and to attach
to substrates. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where
possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish.

C. Directional Finishes: Run grain with long dimension of each piece and perpendicular to
long dimension of finished trim or border surface unless otherwise indicated.
D. Organic, Anodic, and Chemically Produced Finishes: Apply to formed metal after
fabrication but before applying contrasting polished finishes on raised features unless

E. Aluminum Finishes:
1. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
2. Baked Enamel or Powder Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film
thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written
instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the work.
B. Verify sign support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps
or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
C. Verify anchorage devices embedded in permanent construction are correctly sized and
located to accommodate signs.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility
standard.
3. Before installation, verify sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris
that would impair installation.
4. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with
grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of
bituminous paint.
B. Accessible Signage: Install in locations on walls in accordance with TAS, ADAAG, and
accessibility standards.
C. Mounting Methods:
1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on
displaced adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface,
embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive
fully sets.
b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface, install
washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and
tighten.
2. Projecting Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on

displaced adhesive. Place spacers on studs, place sign in position, and push
until spacers are pinched between sign and substrate, embedding the stud
ends in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.
b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place spacers on studs, place sign in position with
spacers pinched between sign and substrate and install washers and nuts
on stud ends projecting through opposite side of surface and tighten.
3. Through Fasteners: Drill holes in substrate using predrilled holes in sign as
template. Countersink holes in sign if required. Place sign in position and flush to
surface. Install through fasteners and tighten.
4. Adhesive: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove
loose debris. Apply linear beads or spots of adhesive symmetrically to back of sign
and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign after cure without slippage. Keep
adhesive away from edges to prevent adhesive extrusion as sign is applied and to
prevent visibility of cured adhesive at sign edges. Place sign in position and push
to engage adhesive. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.
5. Two Face Tape: Clean bond breaking materials from substrate surface and
remove loose debris. Apply tape strips symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable
quantity to support weight of sign without slippage. Keep strips away from edges
to prevent visibility at sign edges. Place sign in position and push to engage tape
adhesive.
A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with
specified requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or
procedures.

manufacturer's written instructions and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 10 14 30
DIGITAL MARQUEE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Exterior electronic, digital signage and graphics with accessories for
mounting.
A. Wind Load: 100 mph (30 psf) windload.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, specifications, installation

instructions, and cleaning recommendations; submit manufacturer's recommended
maintenance instructions and cleaning materials and application methods, including
precautions which may be detrimental to surfaces.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each sign type indicating construction and
mounting; include details of brackets, supports and fastenings.
A. Package signs in crates or cartons, adequately padded and protected against scratching
and other damage. Label packages with listing of sign labels and locations.
B. Include in sign packages installation templates, hardware or adhesive, and installation

instructions.
C. Store materials out of weather and protect from damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Model GS6 x 19.8 mm Full Color message Display; Daktronics.
2.2 EXTERIOR MESSAGE BOARD (MARQUEE)
A. Message Board:
1. Construction: Double faced. Mount on masonry base and surround as shown on
drawings.
2. Usage: Exterior.
3. Header Glazing: 3/16" clear polycarbonate with school name.
Digital Marquee 10 14 30 - 1
4. Header Colors: As selected by Architect. Header layout as shown on drawings.

5. Header Lighting: LED.
6. Digital Message Center
a. Line and Column Spacing: 15.85 mm
b. Character Height: 4.4 inches (7 pixel font).
c. Color: 281 trillion colors, full color range.
d. Dimensions: approximately 3’-8”H x 4’-9”W x 24” D
e. Communication method: Manufacturer’s standard, wifi enabled, including control
by designated electronic sources controlled by school administration.
f. Network Capabilities: Provide connection to Owner’s network.
g. Service: Accessible from front.
h. Capabilities
1) Able to display text, graphics, logos, animation multiple font styles and sizes.
2) Able to detect and display temperature, date, and time.
i. Software: Provide manufacturer’s software and training.
j. Maintenance: Provide manufacturer’s platinum level service agreement for a
period of five years.
B. Fasteners: Anchor bolts.
C. Grout: Non-metallic, non-shrink grout.
D. Accessories::
1. Sign controller.
a. The display’s controller shall be able to run independently from a controlling

computing device allowing the display to operate even when the controlling
device is unhooked or turned off.
b. Communication protocol shall support other matrix products from the vendor
such as other outdoor or indoor displays of varying sizes and/or colors.
c. Each controller shall be connected to a light sensor allowing each LED
display to automatically adjust brightness according to display direction and
lighting conditions.
d. The controller shall allow connection to a temperature sensor that provides
accurate site temperatures.
e. Active presentations, stored presentations, schedules, display configuration,
time and date shall be stored in non-volatile memory. No external power or
battery backup will be required to maintain this data.
2. Communication: Wifi and Cat 5 cable.
3. Software: Manufacturer’s standard PC-compatible and updatable.
4. Power: 120/240 VAC, single phase.
5. Operating Temperature: -40 degrees F to 120 degrees F; up to 99 percent RH non-
condensing
2.3 FINISH
A. Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: Chromium pretreatment, primer, and color coat, of 70-75
percent fluorocarbon (polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) resin), AAMA 2605; 1.2 mils
thickness minimum; equivalent to Kynar 500/Hylar 5000, black.
B. Concealed Steel Items: Galvanized in accordance with ANSI/ASTM A386 to 2.0 oz/sq.ft.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Verify exact locations with Architect.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install signs and supports plumb, level, in line, in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Install signs without exposed fasteners.
B. Seal joints between message center and surrounding brick.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 10 21 17
PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Solid-plastic toilet compartments configured as floor-mounted, overhead braced
toilet enclosures and urinal screens.
1. Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for in-wall blocking.
2. Section 10 28 13 "Toilet Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars,
purse shelves, and similar accessories mounted on toilet compartments.

components and profiles, and finishes for toilet compartments.
B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details.
2. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories.
3. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures.
4. Show locations of floor drains.
5. Show ceiling grid, and overhead bracing locations.
C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Each type of material, color, and finish required for toilet compartments, prepared
on 6-inch- square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.
2. Each type of hardware and accessory.
D. Product Schedule: For toilet compartments, prepared by or under the supervision of

supplier, detailing location and selected colors for toilet compartment material.
A. Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment.
Plastic Toilet Compartments 10 21 17 - 1

A. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals.
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents and
source.
1. Door Hinges: One hinge(s) with associated fasteners.
2. Latch and Keeper: One latch(es) and keeper(s) with associated fasteners.
3. Door Bumper: One bumper(s) with associated fasteners.
4. Door Pull: One door pull(s) with associated fasteners.
5. Fasteners: Ten fasteners of each size and type.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings,
and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements
before fabrication. Show field measurements on Shop Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Fire Performance: Tested in accordance with, and pass the acceptance criteria of,
NFPA 286.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the Texas Accessibility

Standards, U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities, and ICC A117.1 for toilet
compartments designated as accessible.
2.2 SOLID-PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
A. Basis of Design: “Hiny Hiders” as manufactured by Scranton Products.

Class A toilet compartment products by one of the following:
2. American Sanitary Partition Corporation.
3. Columbia Lockers; Partition Systems International of South Carolina.
4. General Partitions Mfg. Corp.
5. Metpar Corp.
C. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Floor-supported, overhead braced.

D. Urinal-Screen Style: Post to ceiling.
E. Door, Panel, Screen, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene

(HDPE) panel material, not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges, no-
sightline shiplap edge system, and with homogenous color and pattern throughout
thickness of material.
1. Integral Hinges: Configure doors and pilasters to receive integral hinges.
2. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum or
stainless-steel strip fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid-plastic
components to hinder malicious combustion.
3. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
F. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel.
G. Urinal-Screen Post: Manufacturer's standard post design of 1-3/4-inch- square,

stainless steel tube with satin finish; with shoe and sleeve (cap) matching that on the
pilaster.
H. Brackets (Fittings):
1. Full-Height (Continuous) Double-Ear Type: Manufacturer's standard design;
stainless steel.
2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's heavy-duty operating hardware and

accessories.
1. Hinges: Manufacturer's minimum 0.062-inch- thick stainless-steel continuous,
cam type that swings to a closed or partially open position, allowing emergency
access by lifting door. Mount with through-bolts.
2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's heavy-duty surface-mounted cast-stainless-
steel latch unit designed to resist damage due to slamming, with combination
rubber-faced door strike and keeper, and with provision for emergency access.
Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at
compartments designated as accessible. Mount with through-bolts.
3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's heavy-duty combination cast-stainless-steel hook
and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting
compartment-mounted accessories. Mount with through-bolts.
4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's heavy-duty rubber-tipped cast-stainless-steel
bumper at out-swinging doors. Mount with through-bolts.
5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's heavy-duty cast-stainless-steel pull at out-swinging
doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units
on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. Mount with
through-bolts.
B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail

with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.

C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless

steel, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads.
Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use
stainless-steel, hot-dip galvanized-steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel
compatible with related materials.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221.
C. Brass Extrusions: ASTM B 455.
D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.
E. Stainless-Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated.

Coordinate requirements and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories
where required for attachment of toilet accessories.
B. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports,

leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at
pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.
C. Urinal-Screen Posts: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring

assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at tops and bottoms of posts. Provide
shoes and sleeves (caps) at posts to conceal anchorage.
D. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- wide, in-swinging
doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- wide, out-swinging doors with a
minimum 32-inch- wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for fastening, support, alignment, operating clearances, and other conditions affecting
B. Confirm location and adequacy of in-wall blocking and supports required for installation
of the following items and applications:
1. Toilet partitions, pilasters, and urinal screens.
2. Brackets for overhead bracing.

3. Impact zone of toilet partition door stops.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,
straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended
anchoring devices.
1. Maximum Clearances:
a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch.
b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch.
2. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with
full-height brackets.
a. Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile
joints.
b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
B. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set
pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches into structural floor unless
otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail
to each pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners.
1. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels, and adjust so tops of doors
are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.
C. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units
level and plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware

manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging
doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when
unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 10 21 23
CUBICLE CURTAIN AND TRACK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Ceiling mounted curtain track.
2. Curtain.
3. Attachment accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions.
B. Samples: Submit curtain fabric and ceiling track samples.
A. Do not deliver accessories to site until rooms in which they are to be installed are ready
to receive them.
B. Pack accessories individually in a manner to protect accessory and its finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
1. Customfab.
2. General Cubicle Company.
3. Imperial Fastener Company.
4. Kirsch.
5. Watrous, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Curtains: Flame proof "Jean" cloth with 20" high nylon mesh top, 1-1/2" triple hem at top,
turned edges, bottom hem 1-1/4" wide, single turn, all vertical seams are double needle
interlocked; rust-proof roll edged grommets in top hem at 6" on center; color as selected
by Architect.
B. Tracks:
1. 29/32" x 11/16" extruded 6063-T5 anodized aluminum Roller carriers shall ride upon
V-shape channels formed by reinforced inside corners of extrusion, creating 4-point
suspension; Model no. 9605/61
Cubicle Curtain and Track 10 21 23 - 1

2. Carrier: Celcon body and wheels of self-lubricating, noiseless nylon; aluminum

hooks.
3. End Stops: 0.032" thick sheet aluminum; #9610.
4. Pullouts: To permit entry of track carriers at end where curtains are stacked, made of
0.032" thick sheet aluminum; #9611
5. Attachment Accessories: Pipe spacer of size necessary for attachment bolts at
ceiling tile; equal to thickness of tile.
6. Hardware: Screws, bolts, washers, nuts, or other hardware as required.
C. Acceptable Product: Series 09600 by Kirsch, 1-616-651-0112.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.
B. Verify with Architect exact location of ceiling track.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install true, plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate in accordance
with manufacturers installation instructions.
B. Secure track to ceiling grid with No. 8 truss head sheet metal screws at 12" o.c.
maximum. Between grid through-bolt to steel strap hangers above ceiling secured to
structure 3"-6" on center with trough bolts with truss head bolt, washers, and locknuts.
END OF SECTION
Cubicle Curtain and Track 10 21 23 - 2

SECTION 10 26 00
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Corner guards.
1. Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware" for metal armor, kick, mop, and push plates.
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength,

dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each impact-
resistant wall protection unit.
B. Shop Drawings: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit showing locations and
extent. Include sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size
indicated below.
1. Wall and Corner Guards: 12 inches long. Include examples of joinery, corners,
and field splices.
A. Maintenance Data: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit to include in

1. Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining

optimum condition of plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use conditions.
Include precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be
detrimental to plastic finishes and performance.
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
Wall and Door Protection 10 26 00 - 1

B. Source Limitations: Obtain impact-resistant wall protection units from single source
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

impact-resistant wall protection units and are based on the specific system indicated.
Refer to Section 01 45 16 "Contractor’s Quality Control."
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except

with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive
D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural

& Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and
ICC/ANSI A117.1.
A. Store impact-resistant wall protection units in original undamaged packages and

containers inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling,
extreme temperatures, and humidity.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install impact-resistant wall protection units

until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work is complete and dry, and HVAC
system is operating and maintaining temperature at 70 deg F for not less than 72 hours
before beginning installation and for the remainder of the construction period.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair

or replace components of impact-resistant wall protection units that fail in materials or
a. Deterioration materials beyond normal use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use
and finish indicated, but with not less than strength and durability properties specified
in ASTM B 221 for Alloy 6063-T5.

B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M.
C. Adhesive: As recommended by impact-resistant plastic wall protection manufacturer

and with a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.2 CORNER GUARDS
A. Surface-Mounted, Metal Corner Guards: Fabricated from one-piece, formed or

extruded metal with formed edges; with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.

a. Arden Architectural Specialties, Inc.

b. Balco, Inc.
c. Construction Specialties, Inc.
d. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems; Division of InPro Corporation.
e. Korogard Wall Protection Systems; a division of RJF International
Corporation.
f. Pawling Corporation.
2. Material: One of the following as indicated on Drawings
a. Stainless steel, Type 304.
1) Thickness: Minimum 0.0500 inch.

2) Finish: Directional satin, No. 4.
b. Extruded aluminum, minimum 0.0625 inch thick, with clear anodic finish.
3. Wing Size: As indicated on Drawings.

4. Height: As indicated on Drawings.
5. Corner Radius: 1/8 inch.
6. Mounting: Adhesive.
2.3 Surface Mounted, Plastic Cover Corner Guards: assembly consisting of snap on,
resilient plastic cover installed over retainer; including mounting hardware; fabricated
with 90 degree or 135 degree turn to match wall condition.
a. American Floor Products Company, Inc.
b. Construction Specialties, Inc.
c. InPro Corporation (IPC).
d. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group.
e. Korogard Wall Protection Systems; a division of RJF International
Corporation.
f. Musson Rubber Co.
g. Nystrom, Inc.

h. Pawling Corporation.
i. Tepromark International, Inc.
j. WallGuard.com.
k. wallProtex.
2. Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, minimum 0.078 inch (2.0 mm) wall thickness; in
dimensions and profiles indicated on Drawings.
a. Color and Texture: Selected by Architect.
3. Continuous Retainer: Minimum 0.060 inch (1.5 mm) thick, one piece, extruded
aluminum.
4. Retainer Clips: Impact absorbing clips.
5. Top and Bottom Caps: Prefabricated, injection molded plastic; color matching
cover; field adjustable for close alignment with snap on cover.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate impact-resistant wall protection units to comply with requirements indicated

for design, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.
2.5 METAL FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
2. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.
B. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary

protective covering before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, fire rating, and other conditions affecting
performance of work.
B. Examine walls to which impact-resistant wall protection will be attached for blocking,
grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for
secure attachment of support fasteners.
1. For impact-resistant wall protection units attached with adhesive or foam tape,
verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes or primers.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall

protection system components.
B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install impact-resistant wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line
without distortions.
1. Install impact-resistant wall protection units in locations and at mounting heights

3.4 CLEANING
A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using
a standard, ammonia-based, household cleaning agent.
B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by

manufacturer.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 10 26 41
BALLISTICS RESISTANT PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Ballistics-resistant composite sheet material panels for integration into
interior partition assemblies.
B. Related sections include the following:
1. Section 09 21 16 “Gypsum Board Assemblies” for partitions into which ballistics

resistant panels are integrated.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Underwriter’s Laboratories, UL 752 - Standard for Bullet-Resisting Equipment, current

edition.
B. ASTM E119 - Standard Test for One-Hour Fire-Rating of Building Construction and
Materials.
C. ASTM F1233 - Standard Test Method for Forced Entry Testing of Materials/Assemblies,
Class IV.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, and dimensions of individual

components and profiles, for each type of panel and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of ballistics resistant panels. Include details
for joints and cracks, penetrations, inside and outside corners, and other termination
conditions.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of panel, of size indicated below:
1. Ballistics Resistant Fiberglass Panels: For each UL ballistics level specified, in 6-

inch by 6-inch (150 by 150 mm) samples. Sample thickness shall be
representative of ballistics level specified.
Ballistics Resistant Panels 10 26 41 - 1

A. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's latest installation instructions.
C. Product Test Reports: For each product, tests performed by a qualified testing agency
to indicate compliance with UL752 and ASTM E119.
D. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.
A. Executed copy of Special Manufacturer’s Warranty.
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained
and approved by panel manufacturer.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockup of typical ballistics resistant panel assembly, including corner, panel
joint, supports, attachments, and accessories.
A. Comply with panel manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time requirements to
avoid delays in the performance of the Work.
B. Deliver panels and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed.

Package panels for protection during transportation and handling.
1. Ensure manufacturer’s UL LISTED Labels are intact and legible.
C. Handle the material with care to prevent damage.
D. Cover and protect material in transit and at job site. Damaged or defaced material will
be rejected and shall be replaced at no cost to Owner.
E. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at

temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. Store panels in a
dry location at Project site.

1.9 SCHEDULING
A. Consult with other trades in advance and make provisions for their work to avoid cutting
and patching.
B. Notify responsible trades of schedules to allow adequate time for installation and
coordination of their work.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of
other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and
shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor
under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Ballistics Resistant Panels: All materials and

workmanship shall be warranted against defects for a period of ten (10) years from date
of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. ArmorCore,” as manufactured by Waco Composites.

2. Armortex,” as manufactured by Safeguard Security Services, Ltd.
B. Source Limitations for Ballistics-Resistant Panels: Obtain ballistics-resistant fiberglass

panels, battens, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
A. Through the design, manufacturing technique, and material application the bullet
resistant fiberglass panels shall be of the “non ricochet type”. System design shall permit
the capture and retention of an attacking projectile, lessening the potential of a random
injury or lateral penetration.
B. Make joints, fasten to substrates, and shield penetrations to maintain indicated UL

ballistics level equivalence at all points and in all directions.
2.3 BALLISTICS RESISTANT FIBERGLASS PANELS
A. Manufacturer's standard panel construction consisting of multiple layers of woven roving

ballistic grade fiberglass cloth impregnated with a thermoset polyester resin and
compressed into flat rigid sheets. Production technique and materials shall provide the
controlled internal delamination to permit the capture of a penetrating projectile.

B. Ballistics Resistance Panels:
1. Ballistics Security Level 3 Panels, per UL 752:
a. Nominal Thickness: 1/2-inch (12 mm).

b. Nominal Weight: 5 lbs. per square foot.
2. Basis of Design Product: “ArmorCore” as manufactured by Waco Composites.
A. Batten Strips: Fabricated of same material and with same UL ballistics rating level as
primary panels.
B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure
anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on
inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide
toothed-steel or expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate conditions are acceptable for product installation in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions, and report any discrepancies before starting work.
B. Examine backup surfaces to determine that corners are plumb and straight, surfaces are
smooth, uniform, clean, free from foreign matter, nails and screws are countersunk, and
joints and cracks are filled flush and smooth with the adjoining surface.
C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Using products acceptable to ballistics resistant panel manufacturer, install panels in

accordance with panel manufacturer's latest specifications and printed instructions.
Method of application shall maintain the ballistics resistant rating at junctures with the
concrete floor slab, the ballistics resistant door frames, ballistics resistant window
frames, and all required penetrations.
B. Scribe and cut ballistics resistant fiberglass paneling to fit adjoining work.
C. Install sheets plumb, level, securely anchored or fastened, and with tight, hairline joints
between adjacent panels.
D. Ballistics resistant panels shall be adhered using manufacturer’s recommended

industrial adhesive, mastic, screws or bolts.

E. Panel Joints: Reinforce by a back-up layer of ballistics resistant material. The ballistics
resistance level of the joint, as reinforced, shall be at least equal to that of the panel.
1. Minimum width of reinforcing layer at joint shall be 4-inches (2 inches on each

panel or a 2 inch minimum overlap).
F. Verify integrity of ballistics resistant fiberglass panel system before covering panels with
finish materials.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 10 28 13
TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Toilet accessories.
B. Owner-Furnished, Contractor-Installed (OFCI):

1. Toilet tissue dispensers
2. Soap dispensers
3. Paper towel dispensers
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances
required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment,
operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.
B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to
prevent delaying the Work.
B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room
of each accessory required.
1. Identify locations using room designations indicated.

2. Identify products using designations indicated.
A. Maintenance data.

application.
Toilet Accessories 10 28 13 - 1
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TOILET ACCESSORIES
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products

scheduled based on products listed by:
1. American Specialties, Inc.
2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
3. Bradley Corporation.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless
B. Brass: ASTM B 19, flat products; ASTM B 16/B 16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat
products with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings.
C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel),
0.036-inch minimum nominal thickness.
D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating.
E. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication.
F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and
tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.
G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).
H. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm
thick.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang
doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed
anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.
B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and
resupplying. Provide minimum of three keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners

appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units
level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested
according to ASTM F 446.
3.2 SCHEDULE
A. Grab Bars:
1. Material: 1-1/2" diameter stainless steel, 18 gage, Type 304, brushed satin finish
with peened gripping surface.
2. Mounting: Concealed plates, without exposed fasteners; concealed anchor kit
for type of wall.
a. 36" Units: Toilet Compartments:
1) B-6806.99 x 36 by Bobrick
2) ASI 3801-36P
3) Bradley 812-2-001-36 (Safety-Grip Finish)
b. 42" Units: Toilet Compartments:
1) B-6806.99 x 42 by Bobrick
2) ASI 3801-42P
3) Bradley 812-2-001-42 (Safety-Grip Finish)
c. Showers:
1) B-68616 by Bobrick
2) ASI 3850
B. Pediatric Changing Table:

1. Fabricated from stainless steel Type 304, 16 gage, with seamless welds; rated to
support static load of 400 pounds.
2. ADA Compliant
a. Model 100SSE-SM Horizontal Surface Mounted Special Needs Diaper
Changing Station.
C. Baby Changing Table:

1. Product: Wall mounted, fold-down, HDPE changing table
a. Changing Station Model WB641430 by Global Industries
D. Toilet Tissue Dispenser

1. Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed.
E. Sanitary Napkin Disposal

1. Material: 22 gage, Type 304 stainless steel, Satin finish.
2. Construction: Seamless flanges, welded, self-closing stainless-steel door with
piano hinge, tumbler lock.
3. Mounting: Wall mounted for one toilet compartment.
4. Receptacle: Removable from one side.
a. B-254 by Bobrick
b. ASI 0473-1A
c. Bradley 4722-15.
F. Soap Dispensers
G. Paper Towel Dispensers

H. Framed Mirrors, partial height and full-height.

1. Material: One piece, roll-formed stainless steel angle frame, 1/2" x 1/2" x 1/2",
Type 430, Lock tab, bright polish finish.
2. Mirror: 1/4" thick float glass mirror electrolytically copper plated; 15-year guaran-
tee.
3. Mounting: Theft resistant, concealed wall hangers.
4. Size per Construction Documents.
a. B-165, 1836 (18W by 36 H) and 2460 (24 W by 60 H) Series by Bobrick
b. ASI 0620, 1836 (18W by 36 H) and 2460 (24 W by 60 H)
c. Bradley 781, 1836 (18W by 36 H) and 2460 (24 W by 60 H).
I. Mop and Broom Holders:

1. Material: 18 gage stainless steel, Satin finish.
2. Construction: 8" deep with four mop holders, three rag hooks, wet rag rod, and
shelf above.
3. Mounting: Surface.
a. B-224 x 36" by Bobrick
b. ASI 1315-4
c. Bradley 9984.
J. Shower Curtain & Curtain Rod

1. Shower Curtain
a. Material: Opaque matte white vinyl 0.008 thick; nickel plated grommets.
b. Size: 42" wide x 72" long.
c. Acceptable Products:
1) Bobrick 204-2
2) 1200-v42
3) Bradley 9533-48 (48”)
2. Curtain Rod
a. Material: Type 304, 20 gage, 1" diameter stainless steel tubing.
b. Acceptable Products:
1) 207 by Bobrick
2) ASI 1224
3) Bradley 9538.
K. Towel Pin
1. Material: 2" x 2" flange, projects 3-3/8" from wall, brushed satin stainless steel.
a. Bobrick B-6777
b. ASI 7301-S
c. Bradley 9314.
L. Soap Dish:
1. Material: Vandal Resistant; extra heavy duty, chrome-plated cast bronze, bright finish.
2. Size: 5"w x 1-3/8" h x 3" d.
3. Acceptable Product: B-973 by Bobrick.
M. Shower Seat
1. Seat: One-piece, ½" thick, solid phenolic with matte-finish, melamine surfaces and
phenolic-resin core. Integral slots for water drainage. Secured to frame with stain-
less steel carriage bolts and acorn nuts. Reversible for left- or right-hand installation.
2. Frame: Type 304 stainless steel, satin finish, 16 gage, 1-1/4" square tubing and 18
gauge, 1" diameter seamless round tubing.
a. B-5181 by Bobrick
b. ASI 8206L/R
c. Bradley 9565-L/9566-R
END OF SECTION
SECTION 10 41 16
EMERGENCY KEY CABINET
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Emergency key cabinet for local Fire Department access.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Furnish inserts and anchorages which must be built into other work for installation of
recessed emergency key cabinet. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
A. Sequence delivery and installation of items until construction is ready for their installation
to minimize possibility of damage.
A. Product Data: Technical data for each item including manufacturer, material descriptions
including size and weight, finishes, manufacturer cut sheets, assembly and disassembly,
storage instructions for portable items, and other available pertinent data.
A. Catalog Standards: Manufacturer's catalog numbers or names may be indicated on

Drawings or specified for convenience in identifying miscellaneous specialties items.
Unless otherwise indicated, manufacturer's current catalog description for indicated
number and specified in options or accessories constitutes requirements for each type
of item.
1. Use of catalog numbers and specific requirements indicated on Drawings and in
Specification are not intended to preclude use of comparable items by acceptable
manufacturers, but are given for purpose of establishing standard of design and
quality for materials, construction and workmanship.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of item from single source from single
manufacturer.
A. Deliver materials to site in original factory wrappings and containers, clearly labeled with
identification of manufacturer, brand name, quality or grade, fire performance
characteristics, and lot number.
Emergency Key Cabinet-Alum 10 41 16 - 1

B. Store emergency key cabinet in original undamaged packages and containers, inside
well ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures,
and humidity.
C. Comply with instructions and recommendations of manufacturer for special delivery,

storage, and handling requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer and model number listed are included for convenience of Contractor in
establishing quality, performance, function, and aesthetic appearance acceptable to
Architect.
1. Other manufacturers approved by Architect may be used whose qualities meet or
exceed those of the specified manufacturer.
2.2 EMERGENCY KEY CABINET
A. Fire Control Key Box: KnoxBox® 3200 Series as manufactured by Knox Company.
1. Capacity: Standard, to secure up to 10 keys.
2. Include Tamper Alert switch to interface with building security system.
3. Mounting Type: Recessed in exterior wall.
4. Color: Aluminum.
5. Mounting Location: To be determined by local Fire Department.
6. Basis of Design: Knox model number 3264.
a. Contractor shall confirm with local fire department prior to ordering.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide emergency key cabinet manufactured as integral units ready for
installation.
B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide
materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with
exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using concealed fasteners

appropriate to substrate and recommend by manufacturer of units.
B. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
C. Install wiring from key cabinet tamper switch to building security system control panel.
Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics with building security
system.
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as cabinets are
installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Adjust cabinet door to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices
operate properly.
C. On completion of cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as

D. Replace cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful
END OF SECTION

SECTION 10 43 00
SAFETY EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Defibrillator (AED) cabinets.
2. Automated external defibrillator (AED).
3. First Aid Kits
4. Accessories.
A. Product Data: Submit technical data including construction details, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, cabinet type and materials, door style
and finishes.
1. Automatic External Defibrillator (AED).
2. Cabinets: Indicate door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. Include
roughing in dimensions and details showing semi-recessed mounting method and
relationship to adjacent construction.
3. Evacuation chair
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments of AED cabinets to
other Work.
2. Installation drawings for first aid kits and for evacuation chairs.
C. Samples: Submit samples for each exposed finish required, prepared on samples 6
inches by 6 inches (150 mm by 150 mm) square.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain AED cabinets from a single manufacturer.
B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at site.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of AED cabinets with AED to ensure that products are accommodated.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of AED cabinets with wall depths.
A. Deliver, store, and protect defibrillator cabinets and related materials to prevent damage,
deterioration, or loss.
Safety Equipment 10 43 00 - 1
B. Deliver components in original packaging, properly labeled for identification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

application.
2.2 EMERGENCY SPECIALTY CABINET
A. Manufacturer:
1. Basis of Design, Cabinet: Semi-recessed Wall Cabinet, Model 80000-0814 by Zoll
Medical Corporation. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide basis of
design product or comparable by one of the following:
a. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group.
b. Larsens Manufacturing Company.
2. Basis of Design, AED: AED Plus by Zoll Medical Corporation. Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide basis of design product or comparable by
a. Defibtech.
b. Phillips Healthcare.
B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.
C. Cabinet Material: Cold rolled steel sheet.

1. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.
2. Tub: Cold rolled steel.
a. Finish: Factory applied powder coat paint finish.
1) Color: White.
3. Semirecessed Cabinet: One piece combination trim and perimeter door frame
overlapping surrounding wall surface, with exposed trim face and wall return at
outer edge (backbend).
a. Square Edge Trim: 1-1/4 inch to 1-1/2 inch (32 mm to 38 mm) backbend
depth.
b. Rolled Edge Trim: 3 inch (76 mm) backbend depth.
D. Cabinet Finish:
1. Finish: Factory applied powder coat paint finish.
a. Color: White.
E. Door and Trim Construction: Cold rolled steel; flush doors with 5/8 inch (15.88 mm) door
stop attached by continuous hinge and equipped with zinc plated roller catch.
1. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear).
F. Door Hardware: Door operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and
door material and style indicated.
1. Provide projecting lever handle with cam action latch.
2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to
open 180 degrees.
G. Wall Signs and Cabinet Lettering:

1. AED wall signs.
2. Custom door graphics.
3. AED Identification: Wall signage with lettering complying with authorities having
jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location.
a. Location: Applied to cabinet door.
b. Application Process: Silk screened or Pressure sensitive vinyl letters.
c. Lettering Color: Red.
H. Alarm: Alarm that actuates when cabinet door is opened and that is powered by low
voltage, complete with transformer.
I. AED Accessories: Provide AED Package with the following accessories:

1. AED (defibrillator) unit.
2. Carry case.
3. Adult pads.
4. Infant/child pads.
5. Lithium battery with minimum 4 year warranty).
6. Rescue ready kit (scissors, razor, gauze, alcohol wipe, CPR mask, and bandages.)
7. Extra battery.
2.3 FIRST AID KITS
A. Metal, wall-mounted first aid cabinet without medications.

1. Basis of Design: Model 90829 XL by First Aid Only.
2. Capacity: Designed to support up to 150 people.
3. Cabinet: ANSI B+, Types 1 and II compliant.
4. SmartTab ezRefill system compatible.
5. Color coded per ANSI recommendations
6. Dimensions: 17 by 5-1/2 by 22-1/2 inches
7. Kit includes
a. (2) WoundSeal Powder Packs, 2ct
b. (1) Liquid Skin, 4ct
c. (1) Padded Flexible Splint, 4.25" x 24"
d. (1) Hema-Seal Bandage Compress, 2 Nitrile Exam Gloves
e. (1) 1 Eye and Face Shield and 2 Nitrile Exam Gloves
f. (1) Body Fluid Spill Clean-Up Pack (21 pieces)
g. (1) Splinter Out, 10ct
h. (1) Cotton Tipped Applicators, 100ct
i. (1) Wound Dressing Pack
j. (1) Ammonia Inhalants, 10ct
k. (1) Conforming Gauze Roll, 2", 2ct
l. (1) Burn Spray, 4oz
m. (1) Antiseptic Spray, 4oz
n. (1) Patch Plastic Bandages, 1½" x 1½", 10ct
o. (1) Adhesive Plastic Bandages, 1" x 3", 40ct
p. (1) Adhesive Fabric Bandages, 1" x 3", 40ct
q. (1) Conforming Gauze Roll, 4"
r. (1) Alcohol Wipes, 20ct

s. (4) BZK Antiseptic Towelettes, 10ct
t. (1) Hand Sanitizer Packets, 10ct
u. (1) Sterile Gauze Pads, 2" x 2", 10ct
v. (1) Sterile Gauze Pads, 3" x 3", 10ct
w. (1) Triangular Bandage, 40" x 40" x 56", 2ct
x. (1) Scissors
y. (2) Cold Pack, 4" x 5"
z. (1) First Aid Guide
aa. (1) Tweezers
bb. (2) 2 Sterile Eyepads, 1oz Eyewash, and ½" x 5 yd Tape Roll
cc. (2) Trauma Pads, 5" x 9", 2ct
dd. (1) 1 CPR Face Shield and 4 Nitrile Exam Gloves
ee. (1) Fingertip Fabric Bandages, 20ct
ff. (1) Nitrile Exam Gloves, 8ct
gg. (1) First Aid Tape, 1/2" x 5yd, 2ct
hh. (1) Elastic Bandage Wrap, 3" x 5 yd
ii. (1) 6 Fabric Bandages, 2" x 4" and 10 Butterfly Wound Closures, 16ct
jj. (1) Knuckle Fabric Bandages, 20ct
kk. (2) Burn Dressing, 4" x 4"
ll. (1) Eye Wash, 4oz
mm. (1) Rubber Tourniquet, 1" x 18"
nn. (2) First Aid/Burn Cream Packets, 20ct
oo. (2) Antibiotic Ointment Packets, 20ct
pp. (1) 20 Sting Relief Wipes and 10 Hydrocortisone Packets, 30ct
qq. (1) Triple Cut Adhesive Tape Roll, 2"
rr. (1) Povidone-Iodine Infection Control Wipes, 50ct
ss. (1) Non Stick Pads, 3" x 4", 50ct
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Cold Rolled Steel: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
1. Finish: Powder coat finish.
a. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply
with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
b. Color: White.
B. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm
thick, Class 1 (clear).
2.5 FABRICATION
A. AED Cabinets: Standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet
type, trim style, and door style indicated.
1. Weld joints and grind smooth.
2. Miter corners and grind smooth.
3. Provide factory drilled mounting holes.
4. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks.
5. Install door locks at factory.
B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet
types and trim styles.
1. Fabricate door frames of one piece construction with edges flanged.
2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames and grind smooth.
C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and
ground smooth.
A. Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500 Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish cabinets after assembly.

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for AED cabinets to verify actual locations before cabinet
installation.
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where
semirecessed cabinets are installed.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare recesses for semirecessed AED cabinets required by type and size of cabinet
and trim style.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install AED cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or at heights

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and accessibility standards.
B. AED Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed AED cabinets. If wall thickness is
inadequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed AED cabinets.
C. Locate AED cabinet in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of

D. Identification: Verify AED identification and graphic is viewable through window.
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as AED cabinets are
B. Adjust AED cabinet doors to operate easily without binding.
C. On completion of AED cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as

D. Touch up marred finishes or replace AED cabinets that cannot be restored to factory
finished appearance. Use materials and procedures recommended or furnished by AED
cabinet manufacturers.
E. Replace AED cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful
END OF SECTION
SECTION 10 44 13
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes fire-protection cabinets for portable fire extinguishers and fire
blankets.
B. Shop Drawings: For fire-protection cabinets.
A. Maintenance data.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire
extinguishers indicated are accommodated.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths.
C. Coordinate fire-rating of cabinets with fire-rating of wall in which cabinet is located.
A. Regulatory Requirements: Fire extinguisher and fire extinguisher cabinets shall bear UL
label, and shall comply with applicable provisions of NFPA-10 including the inspection
and tagging of fire extinguishers; approved for intended use and locations by applicable
governing authority.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in

ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.
Fire Protection Cabinets 10 44 13 - 1

2.2 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINETS
A. Cabinet, Fire Extinguishers: Suitable for size of fire extinguisher specified.
B. Cabinet Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

1. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group.
2. Larsens Manufacturing Company.
3. Nystrom, Inc.
4. Potter Roemer LLC.
C. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated or fire-rated as required.
1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated

from 0.043-inch-thick cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch-thick
fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
D. Cabinet Material: As indicated on the Drawings from the following options:
1. Cold-rolled steel sheet.
E. Fire Extinguisher Mounting Style: As indicated on the Drawings from the following
options:
1. Recessed Cabinets: Exposed Flat Trim: One-piece combination trim and

perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim
face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).
2. Semirecessed Cabinets: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame
overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at
outer edge (backbend).
a. Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch backbend depth.
3. Surface-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet box fully exposed and mounted directly on

wall with no trim.
F. Cabinet and Door Trim Material: As indicated on the Drawings from the following
options:
1. Cold-rolled steel sheet.
G. Door Style, Fire Extinguisher Cabinet: Vertical duo panel with frame.
H. Door Glazing: Acrylic sheet.
1. Acrylic Sheet Color: Clear transparent acrylic sheet.
I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for

cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
J. Accessories:

1. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling
sharply on door handle.
2. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter
style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated.
a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE

EXTINGUISHER" or “FIRE BLANKET” as appropriate.
1) Location: Applied to cabinet door.

2) Application Process: Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters.
3) Lettering Color: White
4) Cabinet Color: Red.
5) Orientation, Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: Vertical.
6) Orientation, Fire Blanket Cabinets: Horizontal.
K. Materials:
1. Cold-Rolled Steel: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
a. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.

b. Color: White.
2. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), 3 mm

thick, with Finish 1 (smooth or polished).
L. Class A Fire Extinguisher for General Use:

1. Type: Multi-purpose dry chemical.
2. Heavy duty cylinder with epoxy finish; chrome valve and siphon tubes, replaceable
molded valve steam seal; large pressure indicating gages, pull pin; up-right
squeeze-grip operation.
a. UL rated 4A-60B:C, 10 lb. capacity
1) Model No. MP10 by Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
2) Cosmic 10E by J. L. Industries.
3) Model No. EX-3010 by Nystrom.
M. Class K Fire Extinguisher for Kitchen Areas ONLY

1. Type: Potassium acetate, low PH agent, wet chemical
2. Heavy duty cylinder with epoxy finish; chrome valve and siphon tubes, replaceable
molded valve steam seal; large pressure indicating gages, pull pin; up-right
squeeze-grip operation.
3. Capacity: 12 lb; UL 2A:1B:C:K
4. Acceptable Product:
a. WC-6L by Larsens.
b. EX-3260 by Nystrom, Inc.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame,
door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Prepare recesses for recessed and semi-recessed fire-protection cabinets as required

by type and size of cabinet and trim style.
B. Install fire-protection cabinets in locations indicated or, if not indicated, at a minimum

rate of one fire protection cabinet for each 6,000 sq. ft. of floor area or fraction thereof.
1. Mounting Height: 54 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet.
C. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
D. Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated.
E. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that
latching devices operate properly.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 10 51 13
LOCKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. High-density polyethylene (HDPE) corridor lockers.
A. Product Data: Technical data for each type of product including construction details,
material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for
each type of HDPE locker.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

1. Show locker trim and accessories.
2. Include locker identification system and numbering sequence.
C. Samples: Submit samples in manufacturer's standard size:

1. Lockers and equipment.
2. Locker benches.
A. Maintenance Data: Data for adjusting, repairing, and replacing locker doors and latching
mechanisms to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at site.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain HDPE lockers and accessories from single source from single
locker manufacturer.
A. Do not deliver HDPE lockers until receiving or installation space is clean, dry, and ready
for installation.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of recessed openings by field

measurements before fabrication.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of bases for HDPE lockers.
Athletic Lockers 10 51 13 - 1
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and related
units of work to ensure that HDPE lockers can be supported and installed as indicated.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Written warranty signed by manufacturer in which manufacturer agrees to

repair or replace components of HDPE lockers that fail in materials or workmanship,
excluding finish, within specified warranty period.
a. Structural failures.
b. Faulty operation of latches and other door hardware.
2. Damage from deliberate destruction and vandalism is excluded.
3. Warranty Period for HDPE Lockers: Two years from date of Substantial
Completion.
1.1 EXTRA MATERIAL
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. The following HDPE locker hardware items equal to 10 percent of amount installed
for each type and finish installed, but no fewer than five units:
a. Blank identification plates.
b. Hooks.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Accessibility Standard: For lockers indicated to be accessible, comply with applicable

provisions in the USDOJ 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design, Texas
Accessibility Board, and ICC A117.1.
2.2 HDPE CORRIDOR LOCKERS
A. Basis of Design: Tufftec Lockers by Scranton Products
B. Locker doors and frames shall be made from high impact, high density polyethylene
(HDPE) formed under high pressure into solid plastic components 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick
with homogeneous color throughout.
C. Sides, tops, bottoms, backs, and shelves shall be made from high impact, high density,
polyethylene (HDPE) formed under pressure into solid plastic components 3/8 inch (9.5
mm)thick with homogenous natural color throughout.
D. Provide end panels and filler panels of plastic material in color of locker unless noted
otherwise as an accent color.
E. Continuous latch shall be made from high impact HDPE plastic and capable of accepting
padlock hasp
F. Door hinge: Heavy duty extruded aluminum with a powder coating in black or silver as
selected by Architect.
1. Door hinge shall be full length assembled onto the door and vertical face frame.
G.
H. Hardware and Accessories:

1. Padlock hasp
2. One top-mounted, two-pronged plastic coat hook
3. Horizontal venting
4. Continuous hinge
5. Multi point security latch
6. Lattice venting
7. Slope top/ Flat top
8. Base: 4 inches (102 mm) high, black unless otherwise specified. Locker bases
shall be fabricatedfrom3/4 inch (19mm) black plastic. Bases are assembled in the
field.
9. End panels
I. Doors: One piece; fabricated from [0.075 inch (1.90 mm)] nominal thickness steel sheet;
formed into channel shape with double bend at vertical edges and with right angle single
bend at horizontal edges.
1. Doors less than 12 inches (305 mm) wide may be fabricated from 0.048 inch (1.21
mm) nominal thickness steel sheet.
2. Doors for box lockers less than 15 inches (381 mm) wide may be fabricated from
0.048 inch (1.21 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet.
3. Reinforcement: Reinforcing angles, channels, or stiffeners for doors more than 15
inches (381 mm) wide; welded to inner face of doors.
4. Stiffeners: Full height stiffener fabricated from 0.048 inch (1.21 mm) nominal
thickness steel sheet; welded to inner face of doors.
5. Sound Dampening Panels: Designed to stiffen doors and reduce sound levels
when doors are closed, of die formed metal with full perimeter flange and sound
dampening material; welded to inner face of doors.
6. Door Style: [Unperforated panel.] [Vented panel as follows:]
a. Louvered Vents: No fewer than [six louver openings at top and bottom
for single tier] [three louver openings at top and bottom for double tier]
[two louver openings at top and bottom, or three louver openings at top
or bottom, for triple tier] <Insert configuration> lockers.
b. Security Vents: Stamped horizontal or vertical.
c. Perforated Vents: Standard shape and configuration.
d. Concealed Vents: Slotted perforations in top and bottom horizontal door
return flanges.
J. Body: Assembled by riveting or bolting body components together. Fabricate from

unperforated steel sheet with thicknesses as follows:
1. Tops, Bottoms, and Intermediate Dividers: 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) nominal
thickness, with single bend at sides.
2. Backs and Sides: 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) nominal thickness, with full height, double
flanged connections.
3. Shelves: 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) nominal thickness, with double bend at front and
single bend at sides and back.
K. Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) nominal thickness steel
sheet; lapped and factory welded at corners; with top and bottom main frames factory
welded into vertical main frames. Form continuous, integral, full height door strikes on
vertical main frames.
1. Cross Frames between Tiers: Channel formed and fabricated from same material
as main frames; welded to vertical main frames.
2. Frame Vents: Fabricate face frames with vents.
L. Hinges: Welded to door and attached to door frame with no fewer than two factory
installed rivets per hinge that are completely concealed and tamper resistant when door
is closed; fabricated to swing 180 degrees [; self closing].
1. Knuckle Hinges: Steel, full loop, five or seven knuckles, tight pin; minimum 2 inches
(51 mm) high. Provide no fewer than three hinges for each door more than 42
inches (1067 mm) high.
2. Continuous Hinges: Steel, full height.
3. Hinges: Steel, continuous or knuckle type.
M. Projecting Door Handle and Latch: Finger-lift latch control designed for use with either
built-in combination locks or padlocks; positive automatic latching, chromium plated; pry
and vandal resistant.
1. Latch Hooks: Equip doors 48 inches (1219 mm) and higher with three latch hooks
and doors less than 48 inches (1219 mm) high with two latch hooks; fabricated
from 0.105 inch (2.66 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet; welded or riveted to full
height door strikes; with resilient silencer on each latch hook.
2. Latching Mechanism: Rattle free latching mechanism and moving components
isolated to prevent metal to metal contact, and incorporating a prelocking device
that allows locker door to be locked while door is open and then closed without
unlocking or damaging lock or latching mechanism.
N. Recessed Door Handle and Latch: Stainless steel cup with integral door pull, recessed
so locking device does not protrude beyond door face; pry and vandal resistant.
1. Multipoint Latching: Finger lift latch control designed for use with built-in
combination locks, built-in key locks, or padlocks; positive automatic latching and
prelocking.
a. Latch Hooks: Equip doors 48 inches (1219 mm) and higher with three latch
hooks and doors less than 48 inches (1219 mm) high with two latch hooks;
fabricated from 0.105 inch (2.66 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet; welded
or riveted to full height door strikes; with resilient silencer on each latch hook.
b. Latching Mechanism: Rattle free latching mechanism and moving
components isolated to prevent metal to metal contact, and incorporating a
prelocking device that allows locker door to be locked while door is open and
then closed without unlocking or damaging lock or latching mechanism.
2. Single Point Latching: Nonmoving latch hook [designed to engage bolt of built
in combination or cylinder lock] [with steel padlock loop that projects
through recessed cup and is finished to match metal locker body].
a. Latch Hook: Equip each door with one latch hook, fabricated from 0.105 inch
(2.66 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet; welded midway up full height door
strike; with resilient silencer.
O. Door Handle and Latch for [Box] [16 Person] Lockers: Stainless steel strike plate with
integral pull; with steel padlock loop that projects through metal locker door.
P. Locks: [Combination padlocks] [Built in combination locks] [Cylinder locks] [Built

in, card operated locks] [Digital keypad locks] [Built in, coin operated locks].
Q. Identification Plates: Etched, embossed, or stamped [aluminum] [plastic] plates, with

numbers and letters at least 3/8 inch (9 mm) high.
R. Hooks: Ball pointed hooks, aluminum or steel; zinc plated.
S. Coat Rods: [1 inch (25 mm)] [3/4 inch (19 mm)] diameter steel tube or rod, [chrome
finished] [nickel plated].
T. Legs: 6 inches (152 mm) high; formed by extending vertical frame members, or
fabricated from 0.075 inch (1.90 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet; welded to bottom
of locker.
1. Closed Front and End Bases: Fabricated from 0.036 inch (0.91 mm) nominal
thickness steel sheet.
U. Continuous Zee Base: Fabricated from [0.060 inch (1.52 mm)] [0.075 inch (1.90 mm)]
nominal thickness steel sheet.
1. Height: [4 inches (102 mm)].
V. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated from [0.036 inch (0.91 mm)] [0.048 inch (1.21
mm)] nominal thickness steel sheet.
1. Closures: [Vertical] [Hipped] end type.
2. Sloping top corner fillers, mitered.
W. Individual Sloping Tops: Fabricated from 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) nominal thickness steel
sheet.
X. Recess Trim: Fabricated from 0.048 inch (1.21 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet.
Y. Filler Panels: Fabricated from [0.036 inch (0.91-mm)] [0.048-inch (1.21-mm)] nominal
Z. Boxed End Panels: Fabricated from 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet.
AA. Finished End Panels: Fabricated from 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) nominal thickness steel
sheet to cover unused penetrations and fasteners, except for perimeter fasteners, at
exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers.
BB. Center Dividers: Fabricated from 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet.
CC. Materials:
1. Cold Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B,
2. Metallic Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS),
Type B; with A60 (ZF180) zinc iron, alloy (galvannealed) coating designation.
DD. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.

2.3 WELDED CORRIDOR LOCKERS

following:
2. Art Metal Products.
3. ASI Storage Solutions; ASI Group.
4. DeBourgh Mfg. Co.
5. General Storage Systems Ltd.
6. List Industries Inc.
7. Lyon Workspace Products, LLC.
8. Olympus Lockers & Storage Products, Inc.
9. Penco Products, Inc.
10. Republic Storage Systems, LLC.
11. WEC Manufacturing LLC.
B. Doors: One piece; fabricated from 0.075 inch (1.90 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet;
formed into channel shape with double bend at vertical edges and with right angle single
bend at horizontal edges.
2. Door Style: [Unperforated panel.] [Vented panel as follows:]
a. Louvered Vents: No fewer than [six louver openings at top and bottom
for single tier] [three louver openings at top and bottom for double tier]
[two louver openings at top and bottom, or three louver openings at top
or bottom, for triple tier] <Insert configuration> lockers.
b. Security Vents: Stamped horizontal or vertical.
c. Perforated Vents: Standard shape and configuration.
C. Body: Assembled by welding body components together. Fabricate from unperforated

steel sheet with thicknesses as follows:
1. Tops, Bottoms, and Sides: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) nominal thickness.
2. Backs: 0.048 inch (1.21 mm) nominal thickness.
D. Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) nominal thickness steel
sheet; lapped and factory welded at corners; with top and bottom main frames factory
welded into vertical main frames. Form continuous, integral, full height door strikes on
vertical main frames.
1. Cross Frames between Tiers: Channel formed and fabricated from same material
as main frames; welded to vertical main frames.
E. Hinges: Welded to door and attached to door frame with no fewer than two factory-
2. Continuous Hinges: Steel, full height.
F. Projecting Door Handle and Latch: Finger lift latch control designed for use with either
built-in combination locks or padlocks; positive automatic latching, chromium plated; pry
and vandal resistant.
1. Latch Hooks: Equip doors 48 inches (1219 mm) and higher with three latch hooks
and doors less than 48 inches (1219 mm) high with two latch hooks; fabricated
from 0.105 inch (2.66 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet; welded or riveted to full
height door strikes; with resilient silencer on each latch hook.
2. Latching Mechanism: Rattle free latching mechanism and moving components
isolated to prevent metal to metal contact, and incorporating a prelocking device
that allows locker door to be locked while door is open and then closed without
unlocking or damaging lock or latching mechanism.
G. Recessed Door Handle and Latch: Stainless steel cup with integral door pull, recessed
combination locks or padlocks; positive automatic latching and prelocking.
to full height door strikes; with resilient silencer on each latch hook.
2. Single Point Latching: Nonmoving latch hook [designed to engage bolt of built
H. Door Handle and Latch for [Box] [16 Person] Lockers: Stainless-steel strike plate with
integral pull; with steel padlock loop that projects through metal locker door.
I. Locks: [Combination padlocks] [Built-in combination locks] [Cylinder locks] [Built-

in, card operated locks] [Digital keypad locks] [Built-in, coin operated locks].
J. Identification Plates: Etched, embossed, or stamped [aluminum] [plastic] plates, with

K. Hooks: Ball pointed, aluminum or steel; zinc plated.
L. Coat Rods: [1 inch (25 mm)] [3/4 inch (19 mm)] diameter steel, [chrome finished]
[nickel plated].
M. Legs: 6 inches (152 mm) high; formed by extending vertical frame members, or
of locker.
N. Continuous Zee Base: Fabricated from, [0.060 inch (1.52 mm)] [0.075 inch (1.90 mm)]
1. Height: 4 inches (102 mm).
O. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated from 0.048 inch (1.21 mm) nominal thickness steel
sheet, with a pitch of approximately 20 degrees.
P. Recess Trim: Fabricated from 0.048 inch (1.21 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet.
Q. Filler Panels: Fabricated from 0.048 inch (1.21 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet.
R. Boxed End Panels: Fabricated from 0.048 inch (1.21 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet.
S. Finished End Panels: Fabricated from 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) nominal thickness steel
T. Materials:
U. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.

2.4 KNOCKED DOWN ATHLETIC LOCKERS

following:
5. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc.
11. Shanahan's Manufacturing Limited.
B. Perforated Doors: One piece; fabricated from 0.075 inch (1.90 mm) nominal thickness
steel sheet with diamond perforations; formed into channel shape with double bend at
[vertical edges and with right angle single bend at horizontal edges] [and] [latch
point (bottom) and right angle single bend at remaining edges for box lockers].
C. Expanded Metal Doors: Fabricated from 0.090 inch (2.28 mm) nominal thickness
expanded metal; welded to 0.105 inch (2.66 mm) nominal thickness steel angle frame;
with 0.090 inch (2.28 mm) nominal thickness, steel sheet lock panel backed by 0.060-
inch (1.52 mm) nominal thickness, steel sheet retainer welded to door frame.
D. Body: Assembled by riveting or bolting body components together. Fabricate from

unperforated steel sheet with thicknesses as follows:
1. Tops and Bottoms: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) nominal thickness, with single bend at
edges.
E. Unperforated Sides: Fabricated from [0.048 inch (1.21 mm)] [0.060 inch (1.52 mm)]
F. Perforated Sides: Fabricated from 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet
with diamond perforations.
G. Expanded Metal Sides: Fabricated from 0.090 inch (2.28 mm) nominal thickness
expanded metal; welded to 0.105 inch (2.66 mm) nominal thickness steel angles or 0.060
inch (1.52 mm) nominal thickness steel channel frames.
H. Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) nominal thickness steel
sheet or 0.097 inch (2.45 mm) nominal thickness steel angles; lapped and factory welded
at corners; with top and bottom main frames factory welded into vertical main frames.
Form continuous, integral, full height door strikes on vertical main frames.
1. Cross Frames for [Double Tier] [Triple Tier] Lockers: Channel formed and
fabricated from same material as main frames; welded to vertical main frames.
I. Reinforced Bottoms: Structural channels, formed from [0.060 inch (1.52 mm)] [0.075
inch (1.90 mm)] nominal thickness steel sheet; welded to front and rear of side panel
frames.
J. Hinges: Welded to door and attached to door frame with no fewer than two factory
2. Continuous Hinges: Steel; side or top mounted as required by locker configuration.
K. Recessed Door Handle and Latch: Stainless steel cup with integral door pull, recessed
combination locks, built-in cylinder locks, or padlocks; positive automatic latching
and prelocking.
2. Single Point Latching: Nonmoving latch hook [designed to engage bolt of built-
L. Projecting Turn Handle and Latch: Steel handle welded to three point, Cremone type
latching mechanism consisting of steel rods or bars that engage locker frame at top and
bottom of door, and center latch that engages strike jamb; with steel padlock loop.
M. Door Handle and Latch for Box Lockers: Stainless steel strike plate with integral pull;
with steel padlock loop that projects through metal locker door.
N. Locks: [Combination padlocks] [Built-in combination locks] [Cylinder locks] [Built-

O. Identification Plates: Etched, embossed, or stamped [aluminum] [plastic] plates, with

P. Hooks: Ball pointed, aluminum or steel; zinc plated.
Q. Coat Rods: [1 inch (25 mm)] [3/4 inch (19 mm)] diameter steel, [chrome finished]
[nickel plated].
R. Legs: 6 inches (152 mm) high; formed by extending vertical frame members, or
of locker.
S. Continuous Zee Base: 4 inches (102 mm) high; fabricated from 0.075 inch (1.90 mm)
T. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated from 0.048 inch (1.21 mm) nominal thickness steel
U. Recess Trim: Fabricated from 0.048 inch (1.21 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet.
V. Filler Panels: Fabricated from 0.048 inch (1.21 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet.
W. Boxed End Panels: Fabricated from 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet.
X. Finished End Panels: Fabricated from 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) nominal thickness steel
Y. Materials:
Type B; with A60 (ZF180) zinc-iron, alloy (galvannealed) coating designation.
3. Expanded Metal: ASTM F 1267, Type II (flattened), Class I (uncoated), 3/4 inch
(19 mm) steel mesh, with at least 70 percent open area.
Z. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.

2.5 WELDED ATHLETIC LOCKERS

following:
B. Perforated Doors: One piece; fabricated from 0.075 inch (1.90 mm) nominal thickness
steel sheet with diamond perforations; formed into channel shape with double bend at
[vertical edges and with right angle single bend at horizontal edges] [and] [latch
point (bottom) and right angle single bend at remaining edges for box lockers].
C. Expanded Metal Doors: Fabricated from 0.090 inch (2.28 mm) nominal thickness
expanded metal; welded to 0.105 inch (2.66 mm) nominal thickness steel angle frame;
with 0.090 inch (2.28 mm) nominal thickness, steel sheet lock panel backed by 0.060
inch (1.52 mm) nominal thickness, steel sheet retainer welded to door frame.
D. Body: Assembled by welding body components together. Fabricate from unperforated

steel sheet with thicknesses as follows:
edges.
E. Unperforated Sides: Fabricated from [0.048 inch (1.21 mm)] [0.060 inch (1.52 mm)]
with manufacturer's standard diamond perforations.
Form continuous, integral, full height door strikes on vertical main frames.
1. Cross Frames for [Double Tier] [Triple Tier] Lockers: Channel formed and
fabricated from same material as main frames; welded to vertical main frames.
I. Reinforced Bottoms: Structural channels, formed from [0.060 inch (1.52 mm)] [0.075
inch (1.90 mm)] nominal thickness steel sheet; welded to front and rear of side panel
frames.
J. Hinges: Welded to door and attached to door frame with no fewer than two factory
2. Continuous Hinges: Side or top mounted as required by locker configuration.
K. Recessed Door Handle and Latch: Stainless steel cup with integral door pull, recessed
combination locks, built in cylinder locks, or padlocks; positive automatic latching
and prelocking.
2. Single Point Latching: Nonmoving latch hook [designed to engage bolt of built-
L. Projecting Turn Handle and Latch: Steel handle welded to three point, Cremone type
latching mechanism consisting of steel rods or bars that engage locker frame at top and
bottom of door, and center latch that engages strike jamb; with steel padlock loop.
M. Door Handle and Latch for Box Lockers: Stainless steel strike plate with integral pull;
with steel padlock loop that projects through metal locker door.
N. Locks: [Combination padlocks] [Built-in combination locks] [Cylinder locks] [Built-

O. Identification Plates: Etched, embossed, or stamped [aluminum] [plastic] plates, with

P. Hooks: Ball pointed, aluminum or steel; zinc plated.
Q. Coat Rods: [1 inch (25 mm)] [3/4 inch (19 mm)] diameter steel, [chrome finished]
[nickel plated].
R. Legs: 6 inches (152 mm) high; formed by extending vertical frame members, or
of locker.
S. Continuous Zee Base: 4 inches (102 mm) high; fabricated from 0.075 inch (1.90 mm)
T. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated from 0.048 inch (1.21 mm) nominal thickness steel
U. Recess Trim: Fabricated from 0.048 inch (1.21 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet.
V. Filler Panels: Fabricated from 0.048 inch (1.21 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet.
W. Boxed End Panels: Fabricated from 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet.
X. Finished End Panels: Fabricated from 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) nominal thickness steel
Y. Materials:
Z. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.

2.6 KNOCKED DOWN, OPEN FRONT ATHLETIC LOCKERS

following:
B. Locker Arrangement: Open front, with [seat/shelf] [seat/footlocker] [upper shelf]

[upper shelf with security box] [and] [full width security compartment]
[configuration as indicated on Drawings].
C. Body: Assembled by riveting or bolting body components together. Fabricate from

unperforated steel sheet of thickness:
edges.
D. Unperforated Sides: Fabricated from 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) nominal thickness steel
sheet.
E. Perforated Sides: Fabricated from 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet
with diamond perforations. Perforations shall not occur [above upper shelf] [at security
compartment] [or] [at seat/footlocker].
F. Expanded Metal Sides: Fabricated from 0.090 inch (2.28 mm) nominal thickness
G. Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) nominal thickness steel
H. Reinforced Bottoms: Structural channels, formed from 0.075 inch (1.90 mm) nominal
thickness steel sheet; welded to front and rear of side panel frames.
I. Seats/Shelves: Full width of metal locker; channel formed; fabricated from 0.075 inch
(1.90 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet; with stiffeners for reinforcement.
J. Seats/Footlockers: Enclosure full width of bottom of metal locker; fabricated from cold
rolled steel sheet.
1. Seat/Lid: 0.075 inch (1.90 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet; channel formed and
reinforced with stiffeners; with steel continuous hinge that is completely concealed
and tamper resistant when seat/lid is closed; with padlock hasp.
2. Front Panel: 0.075 inch (1.90 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet; channel formed
at top edge; with minilouvers for ventilation; recessed for padlock loop.
3. Sides: [Integral part of unperforated] [Unperforated bottom portions of
perforated] [0.060 inch (1.52 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet inside
expanded metal] sides.
K. Security Boxes: Nonperforated, consisting of partition extending from upper shelf to top
of metal locker, fabricated from 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet; with
channel formed, 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) nominal thickness, steel sheet door frame, and
door fabricated from 0.075 inch (1.90 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet with right angle
single bend at edges; with steel continuous hinge that is completely concealed and
tamper resistant when door is closed; fabricated to swing 180 degrees.
1. Single Point Latching: Stainless steel strike plate with integral pull; with steel,
nonmoving latch hook [designed to engage bolt of lock] [with steel padlock
loop that projects through door and is finished to match metal locker body].
2. Locks: [Combination padlocks] [Built-in combination locks].
L. Security Compartments: Nonperforated, running full width of metal locker, with door
fabricated from 0.075 inch (1.90 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet.
1. Locks: [Combination padlocks] [Built-in combination locks] <Insert item>.
M. Identification Plates: Etched, embossed, or stamped [aluminum] [plastic] plates, with

N. Hooks: Ball pointed, aluminum or steel; zinc plated.
O. Coat Rods: [1 inch (25 mm)] [3/4 inch (19 mm)] diameter steel, [chrome finished]
[nickel plated].
P. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated from 0.048 inch (1.21 mm) nominal thickness steel
Q. Recess Trim: Fabricated from 0.048 inch (1.21 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet.
R. Filler Panels: Fabricated from 0.048 inch (1.21 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet.
S. Boxed End Panels: Fabricated from 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet.
T. Finished End Panels: Fabricated from 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) nominal thickness steel
U. Materials:
2.7 WELDED, OPEN FRONT ATHLETIC LOCKERS

following:
B. Locker Arrangement: Open front, with [seat/shelf] [seat/footlocker] [upper shelf]

[upper shelf with security box] [and] [full width security compartment]
[configuration indicated on Drawings].
C. Material: [Cold rolled] [Metallic coated] steel sheet.
D. Body: Assembled by [welding] [or] [riveting or bolting] body components together.

Fabricate from unperforated steel sheet with thickness:
edges.
E. Unperforated Sides: Fabricated from 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) nominal thickness steel
sheet.
with diamond perforations. Perforations shall not occur [above upper shelf] [at security
compartment] [or] [at seat/footlocker].
I. Reinforced Bottoms: Structural channels, formed from 0.075 inch (1.90 mm) nominal
thickness steel sheet; welded to front and rear of side panel frames.
J. Seats/Shelves: Full width of metal locker; channel formed; fabricated from 0.075 inch
(1.90 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet; with stiffeners for reinforcement.
K. Seats/Footlockers: Enclosure full width of bottom of metal locker; fabricated from cold
rolled steel sheet.
1. Seat/Lid: 0.075 inch (1.90 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet; channel formed and
reinforced with stiffeners; with steel continuous hinge that is completely concealed
and tamper resistant when seat/lid is closed; with padlock hasp.
2. Front Panel: 0.075 inch (1.90 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet; channel formed
at top edge; with minilouvers for ventilation; recessed for padlock loop.
3. Sides: [Integral part of unperforated] [Unperforated bottom portions of
perforated] [0.060 inch (1.52 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet inside
expanded metal] sides.
L. Security Boxes: Nonperforated, consisting of partition extending from upper shelf to top
of metal locker, fabricated from 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet; with
channel formed, 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) nominal thickness, steel sheet door frame, and
door fabricated from 0.075 inch (1.90 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet with right angle
single bend at edges; with manufacturer's standard, steel continuous hinge that is
completely concealed and tamper resistant when door is closed; fabricated to swing 180
degrees.
1. Single Point Latching: Stainless steel strike plate with integral pull; with steel,
nonmoving latch hook [designed to engage bolt of lock] [with steel padlock
loop that projects through door and is finished to match metal locker body].
M. Security Compartments: Nonperforated, running full width of metal locker, with door
fabricated from 0.075 inch (1.90 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet.
N. Identification Plates: Etched, embossed, or stamped [aluminum] [plastic] plates, with

O. Hooks: Ball pointed, aluminum or steel; zinc plated.
P. Coat Rods: [1 inch (25 mm)] [3/4 inch (19 mm)] diameter steel, [chrome finished]
[nickel plated].
Q. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated from 0.048 inch (1.21 mm) nominal thickness steel
R. Recess Trim: Fabricated from 0.048 inch (1.21 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet.
S. Filler Panels: Fabricated from 0.048 inch (1.21 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet.
T. Boxed End Panels: Fabricated from 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) nominal thickness steel sheet.
U. Finished End Panels: Fabricated from 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) nominal thickness steel
V. Materials:
W. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.

2.8 LOCKS
A. Combination Padlock: [Key controlled, three number dialing combination locks;

capable of five combination changes] [Provided by Owner].
B. Built in Combination Lock: Key controlled, three number dialing combination locks;
capable of at least five combination changes made automatically with a control key.
1. Bolt Operation: [Manually locking deadbolt] [or] [automatically locking spring
bolt].
C. Cylinder Lock: Built-in, flush, cam lock with five pin tumbler keyway, keyed separately
and master keyed. Furnish two change keys for each lock and [two] <Insert number>
master keys.
1. Key Type: [Flat] [Grooved][, with minimum 2 inch by 2.68 inch (51 mm by 68.3
mm) key head for accessible lockers].
bolt].
D. Built in, Card Operated Lock: Self contained units mounted on interior of door with
replaceable lock cylinders keyed separately and master keyed. Mount instruction decals
on both door faces. Furnish one change card key for each lock and one master card key.
bolt].
E. Digital Keypad Lock: Battery powered electronic keypad with reprogrammable manager
and owner codes that override access. Three consecutive incorrect code entries shall
disable lock for three minutes.
1. Designed for permanently assigned access via entry of user's four digit code.
2. Designed for shared or temporary access by multiple users, with user defined code
to lock and unlock. Provide LED indicator to show when lock is in use.
F. Built in, Coin Operated Lock: Self contained units mounted on interior of door with
replaceable lock cylinders keyed separately and master keyed. Mount instruction decals
on both door faces. Furnish one change key for each lock and one master key.
bolt].
2. Lock Type: Fee [return/deposit] [collect/pay].
3. Fee Type: [Token] [Coin, one quarter] [Coin, two quarters].
4. Coin Box: Housing or stainless steel cash box with stainless steel flanged cover
set into base of lock channel frame. Furnish with removable cylinder and key, and
master code changer key.
2.9 LOCKER BENCHES

following:
B. Provide bench units with overall assembly height of 17-1/2 inches (445 mm).
C. Bench Tops: One piece units, with rounded corners and edges.
1. Size: Minimum 9-1/2 inches wide by 1-1/4 inches thick (241 mm wide by 32 mm
thick) [ except provide 20 inch to 24 inch (508 mm to 610 mm) wide tops where
accessible benches are indicated].
2. Laminated clear hardwood with one coat of clear sealer on all surfaces and one
coat of clear lacquer on top and sides.
3. Plastic laminate over particleboard core, with two steel tubes running full length of
top and positioned to receive pedestal fasteners.
4. Extruded aluminum with clear anodic finish.
D. Fixed Bench Pedestals: Supports, with predrilled fastener holes for attaching bench top
and anchoring to floor, complete with fasteners and anchors:
1. Tubular Steel: 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) diameter steel tubing threaded on both ends,
with standard pipe flange at top and bell-shaped cast-iron base; with baked-
enamel or powder-coat finish; anchored with exposed fasteners.
2. Tubular Steel: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) diameter steel tubing, with 0.1265 inch (3.2 mm)
thick steel flanges welded at top and base; with [baked enamel] [zinc plated]
finish; anchored with exposed fasteners.
E. Movable Bench Pedestals: Standard supports with predrilled fastener holes for attaching
bench top, complete with fasteners:
1. Aluminum: 1/8 inch thick by 3 inch wide (3 mm thick by 76 mm wide) channel or
1/4 inch thick by 3 inch wide (6 mm thick by 76 mm wide) bar stock, shaped into
[trapezoidal] [inverted-T] form; with nonskid pads at bottom.
a. Finish: [Clear] [Black] [Gold] anodic finish.
2. Stainless Steel: 1/8 inch thick by 3 inch wide (3 mm thick by 76 mm wide) channel
or 1/4 inch thick by 3 inch wide (6 mm thick by 76 mm wide) bar stock, shaped into
trapezoidal form; with nonskid pads at bottom.
a. Finish: No. 4B.
F. Materials:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
2. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGP.
3. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper
recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
4. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500/A 500 M, cold rolled.
5. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
2.10 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, without warp, and with metal faces flat and free of
dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges safe to touch and free of sharp edges
and burrs.
1. Form body panels, doors, shelves, and accessories from one piece steel sheet
2. Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as necessary for
complete installation.
B. Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom,
and back; and common intermediate uprights separating compartments.
C. Equipment: Provide each locker with an identification plate:

1. Single Tier Units: Shelf, one double prong ceiling hook, and two single prong wall
hooks.
2. Double Tier Units: One double prong ceiling hook and two single prong wall hooks.
3. Triple Tier Units: One double prong ceiling hook.
4. Coat Rods: [For each compartment of each locker] [In lieu of ceiling hook for
metal lockers 24 inches (610 mm) high or more] [In lieu of ceiling hook for
metal lockers 18 inches (457 mm) deep or more].
5. Open Front Athletic Lockers: Two single prong wall hooks bolted to locker back
and coat rod.
D. Knocked Down Construction: Fabricate metal lockers by [assembling at site]

[preassembling at plant prior to shipping], using nuts, bolts, screws, or rivets.
E. Welded Construction: Factory preassemble metal lockers by welding all joints, seams,
and connections; with no bolts, nuts, screws, or rivets used in assembly of main locker
groups. Factory weld main locker groups into one piece structures. Grind exposed welds
smooth and flush.
F. Accessible Lockers: Fabricate as follows:

1. Locate bottom shelf no lower than 15 inches (381 mm) above the floor.
2. Where hooks, coat rods, or additional shelves are provided, locate no higher than
48 inches (1219 mm) above the floor.
G. Continuous Zee Base: Fabricated in lengths as long as practical to enclose base and
base ends; finished to match lockers.
H. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated in lengths as long as practical, without visible

fasteners at splice locations; finished to match lockers.
1. Sloping top corner fillers, mitered.
I. Individual Sloping Tops: Fabricated in width to fit one locker frame in lieu of flat locker
tops; with integral back; finished to match lockers. Provide wedge shaped divider panels
between lockers.
J. Recess Trim: Fabricated with minimum 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) face width and in lengths as
long as practical; finished to match lockers.
K. Filler Panels: Fabricated in an unequal leg angle shape; finished to match lockers.
Provide slip joint filler angle formed to receive filler panel.
L. Boxed End Panels: Fabricated with 1 inch (25 mm) wide edge dimension, and designed
for concealing fasteners and holes at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers;
finished to match lockers.
1. Provide one piece panels for double row (back to back) locker ends.
M. Finished End Panels: Fabricated to conceal unused penetrations and fasteners, except
for perimeter fasteners, at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match
lockers.
1. Provide one piece panels for double row (back to back) locker ends.
N. Center Dividers: Full depth, vertical partitions between bottom and shelf; finished to
match lockers.
2.11 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Zinc or nickel plated steel, slotless type, exposed bolt heads; with self locking
nuts or lock washers for nuts on moving parts.
B. Anchors: Material, type, and size required for secure anchorage to each substrate.
1. Provide nonferrous metal or hot dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face
of exterior walls for corrosion resistance.
2. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled in place anchors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls and floors or support bases for compliance with requirements for
B. Prepare written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install lockers level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims.
1. Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but

not more than 36 inches (910 mm) o.c. Using concealed fasteners, install anchors
through backup reinforcing plates, channels, or blocking as required to prevent
metal distortion.
2. Anchor single rows of metal lockers to walls near top [and bottom of lockers] [of
lockers and to floor].
3. Anchor back to back metal lockers to floor.
B. Knocked Down Lockers: Assemble with recommended fasteners, with no exposed

fasteners on door faces or face frames.
C. Welded Lockers: Connect groups together with recommended fasteners, with no

exposed fasteners on face frames.
D. Equipment:
1. Attach hooks with at least two fasteners.
2. Attach door locks on doors using security type fasteners.
3. Identification Plates: Identify metal lockers with identification indicated on
Drawings.
a. Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least two
aluminum rivets.
b. Attach plates to upper shelf of each open front metal locker, centered, with
a least two aluminum rivets.
E. Trim: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures accurately together to form
tight, hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates.
1. Attach recess trim to recessed metal lockers with concealed clips.
2. Attach filler panels with concealed fasteners. Locate filler panels where indicated
on Drawings.
3. Attach sloping top units to metal lockers, with closures at exposed ends.
4. Attach boxed end panels using concealed fasteners to conceal exposed ends of
nonrecessed metal lockers.
5. Attach finished end panels using fasteners only at perimeter to conceal exposed
ends of nonrecessed metal lockers.
F. Fixed Benches: Provide no fewer than two pedestals for each bench, uniformly spaced
not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) apart. Securely fasten tops of pedestals to
undersides of bench tops, and anchor bases to floor.
G. Movable Benches: Place benches in locations indicated on Drawings.

1. Waste Disposal: Dispose of product waste, including accessories and used items,
by recycling or reusing waste materials.
2. Manufacturer Take Back Program: Arrange with product manufacturer to return
scraps and excess materials for recycling into new products.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without
binding. [ Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.]
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect metal lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit use
during construction.
B. Touch up marred finishes, or replace metal lockers that cannot be restored to factory
finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by
locker manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 10 51 23
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD LOCKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Plastic-laminate-clad wood lockers.

components and profiles, and finishes for each type of locker.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals.
C. Shop Drawings: For plastic-laminate-clad wood lockers.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
2. Show details full size.
3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including
concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
4. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in lockers.
5. Show locker fillers, trim, base, sloping tops, and accessories.
6. Show locker identification system and numbering sequence.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of the following:

1. High-pressure decorative laminates.
2. Thermoset decorative overlay panels.
3. Carpet.
E. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Plastic-laminate-clad panels, not less than 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color,
pattern, and surface finish.
2. Thermoset decorative-overlay-surfaced panels, not less than 8 by 10 inches, for
each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.
3. Corner pieces of locker front frame joints between stiles and rail, as well as
exposed end pieces, not less than 18 inches wide by 18 inches high by 6 inches
deep.
4. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.
5. Carpet, not less than 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, and pattern.
Plastic-Laminate-Clad Lockers 10 51 23 - 1
A. Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing, and replacing locker doors and latching
mechanisms to include in maintenance manuals.
1. Locker doors, complete with specified door hardware. Furnish no fewer than four
doors of each type and color installed.
2. Units of the following locker hardware items equal to 10 percent of amount
installed for each type and finish installed, but no fewer than five units:
a. Hinges.
b. Pulls.
c. Shelf rests.
d. Blank identification plates.
e. Hooks.
A. Do not deliver lockers until painting and similar operations that could damage lockers
have been completed in installation areas. If lockers must be stored in other-than-
installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions are the same as
those in final installation location, and comply with requirements specified in "Field
Conditions" Article.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install lockers until building is enclosed,

wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature
between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the
remainder of the construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Where lockers are indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support lockers by
field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
C. Established Dimensions: Where lockers are indicated to fit to other construction,

establish dimensions for areas where lockers are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming
at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to

established dimensions.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concealed wood in-wall blocking.

1. Refer to Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry."
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other
related units of work specified in other Sections to ensure that lockers can be
supported and installed as indicated.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of lockers that

a. Structural failures.
b. Faulty operation of locks or hardware.
c. Deterioration of wood, finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Accessibility Standard: For lockers indicated to be accessible, comply with applicable

provisions in the USDOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design" and
ICC A117.1.
2.2 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD WOOD LOCKERS
A. Construction Style: Flush overlay.

1. Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch.
B. Final Assembly: Manufacturer's standard factory assembly.
C. Locker Body: Fabricated from particleboard-core panels covered on both sides with
thermoset decorative overlay.
1. Side Panels: 3/4 inch thick.
2. Back Panel: 1/2 inch thick.
3. Top Panel: 3/4 inch thick.
4. Bottom Panel: 3/4 inch thick.
5. Exposed Panel Edges: 3-mm-thick PVC.
D. Plastic-Laminate-Clad Wood Doors: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS,

over both sides of particleboard or medium-density-fiberboard core.
1. Thickness: 3/4 inch thick.
2. Panel Edges: 3-mm-thick PVC.
E. End Panels: Match style, material, construction, and finish of plastic-laminate-clad

wood doors.
F. Shelves: Fabricated from particleboard-core panels covered on both sides with

thermoset decorative overlay; fixed unless otherwise indicated.
2. Exposed Edges: 3-mm-thick PVC.
G. Corners and Filler Panels: 3/4-inch- thick panels. Match style, material, construction,
and finish of plastic-laminate-clad wood doors.
H. Continuously Sloping Tops: Plastic-laminate-clad, 3/4-inch- thick panel that matches

door faces for installation over lockers with separate flat tops. Fabricate tops in lengths
as long as practical, without visible fasteners at splice locations. Provide fasteners,
supports, and closures, as follows:
1. Closures: Vertical-end type.
2. Sloping-top corner fillers, mitered.
I. Plastic-Laminate Colors, Patterns, and Finishes:

1. As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Composite Wood: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced

quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless
1. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard
finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and
complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for Test Methods 3.3,
3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.
2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.
3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.
4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, medium-density overlay.
B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as follows:

2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.
3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS.
C. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated,

use materials impregnated with fire-retardant chemical formulations indicated by a
pressure process or other means acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction to

produce products with fire-test-response characteristics specified.
1. Do not use material that is warped, discolored, or otherwise defective.
2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise
adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants in solution to distinguish treated
material from untreated material.
3. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: Medium-density panels according to ANSI A208.2,
made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed
together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less
and smoke-developed index of 200 or less according to ASTM E84.
D. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln
dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.
E. Anchors: Material, type, size, and finish as required for each substrate for secure
anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed
anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face
of exterior walls and at floors.
F. Support Base: Cast-in-place concrete as specified in Section 03 30 53.
2.4 HARDWARE
A. Cam Padlock Hasp: Surface mounted, steel; finished to match other locker hardware.
B. Digital Keypad Lock: Battery-powered electronic keypad with reprogrammable

manager and owner codes that override access. Three consecutive incorrect code
entries shall disable lock for three minutes.
1. Designed for shared or temporary access by multiple users, with user-defined
code to lock and unlock. Provide LED indicator to show when lock is in use.
C. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch, five-knuckle steel hinges; back mounted.

1. Provide two hinges for doors 36 inches high and less.
2. Provide three hinges for doors more than 36 inches high.
D. Wire Pulls: Back mounted; 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter.
E. Accessible Handle: Metal, fixed, graspable lever handle and rose trim; surface
mounted at ADA-compliant units.
F. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013.
G. Hooks: Manufacturer's standard, ball-pointed aluminum or steel; finished to match

other locker hardware. Attach hooks with at least two fasteners.
1. Provide hooks as indicated on Drawings.
2. Provide one double-prong ceiling hook and two single-prong wall hooks for each
compartment of double-tier lockers.
H. Exposed Hardware Finish:
1. Satin chrome unless otherwise indicated.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for
BHMA finish number indicated.
a. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652
for steel base.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Protective Mats: 1/8-inch- thick, solid rubber.
B. Number Identification Plates: 1-1/2-inch- diameter, etched, embossed, or stamped,

stainless-steel plates with black numbers and letters at least 1/2 inch high. Identify
lockers in sequence indicated on Drawings.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate each locker with shelves, an individual door and frame, an individual top, a
bottom, and a back, and with common intermediate uprights separating compartments.
1. Fabricate lockers to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
2. Ease edges of corners of solid-wood members to 1/16-inch radius.
B. Fabricate lockers square, rigid, without warp, and with finished faces flat and free of
dents, scratches, and chips. Accurately factory machine components for attachments.
Make joints tight and true.
1. Fabricate lockers using manufacturer's standard construction, with joints made
with dowels, dados, or rabbets. Dado side panels to receive shelving except
where indicated to be adjustable.
2. Fabricate lockers with joints that are dadoed or rabbeted, glued full length, and
stapled. Dado side panels to receive shelving except where indicated to be
adjustable.
C. Accessible Lockers: Fabricate as follows:

1. Locate bottom shelf no lower than 15 inches above the floor.
2. Where hooks, coat rods, or additional shelves are provided, locate no higher than
48 inches above the floor.
D. Venting: Fabricate lockers with space between doors and locker assembly of not less
than 1/4 inch.
E. Number Identification Plates: Inlay number plates flush in each locker door, near top,
centered.
F. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to

maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components
only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site,
provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
1. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely
assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening
devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that the parts fit as intended,
and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated
on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment.
2. Use only manufacturer's nuts, bolts, screws, and other devices for assembly.
G. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, electrical work,
and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in
diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to
remove splinters and burrs.
H. Attach PVC edging to panels by thermally fusing edging to panels after panel
fabrication.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls and floors or support bases, with Installer present, for compliance with
the Work.
B. Verify that furring is attached to concrete and masonry walls that are to receive lockers.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Condition lockers to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before

installation.
B. Before installing lockers, examine factory-fabricated work for completeness and

complete work as required, including removal of packing.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install lockers level, plumb, and true; use concealed shims.
B. Connect groups of lockers together with manufacturer's standard fasteners, through

predrilled holes, with no exposed fasteners on face frames. Fit lockers accurately
together to form flush, tight, hairline joints.
C. Install lockers without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings, providing
unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as
indicated.
1. Installation Tolerance: No more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other
variation from a straight line. Shim as required with concealed shims.
D. Locker Anchorage:
1. Fasten lockers through wood locker base, at ends, and not more than 36 inches
o.c. with No. 8 flush-head wood screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood
base.
2. Fasten lockers through back, near top and bottom, at ends with No. 8 brass-
finished, flush-head wood screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood base
wood framing, blocking, or furring and spaced not more than 16 inches o.c.
E. Scribe and cut corner and filler panels to fit adjoining work using fasteners concealed
where practical. Repair damaged finish at cuts.
F. Attach sloping-top units to lockers, with end panels covering exposed ends.
G. Install number identification plates after lockers are in place.

1. Attach number identification plate on each locker door, near top, centered, with at
least two screws with finish matching the plate.
2. Insert name identification plate into matching nameplate holder on each door.
H. Provide protective mat at each shoe shelf.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors to operate easily without binding.
Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit use during
construction.
B. Touch up marred finishes, or replace lockers that cannot be restored to factory-finished

appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by locker
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 10 56 13
METAL STORAGE SHELVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Case type metal storage shelving.

2. Four post metal storage shelving.
3. Post and beam metal storage shelving.
A. Product Data: Technical data including rated capacities, construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for metal
storage shelving.
A. Sustainable Design Submittals: Submit supporting documentation with the completed

worksheet.
1. Product Data, Recycled Content: Indicate percentage of postconsumer and
preconsumer recycled content and relative dollar value per unit of product.
a. Indicate percentage of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content
and relative dollar value per unit of product.
b. If recycled content product is part of an assembly, indicate relative dollar
value of recycled content product to total dollar value of assembly.
2. Product Data, Regional Materials: Submit for materials manufactured within 100
miles (160 km) of Project, indicating location of material manufacturer and point of
extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include distance to Project
and cost for each raw material.
3. Regional Materials: Submit for materials manufactured within 500 miles (800 km)
of Project for each raw material.
a. Sourcing Location(s): Indicate location of extraction, harvesting, and
recovery; indicate distance between extraction, harvesting, and recovery
and the project site.
b. Manufacturing Location(s): Indicate location of manufacturing facility;
indicate distance between manufacturing facility and the project site.
c. Product Value: Indicate dollar value of product containing local/regional
materials; include materials cost only.
d. Product Component(s) Value: Where product components are sourced or
manufactured in separate locations, provide location information for each
component. Indicate percentage by weight of each component per unit of
product.
Next two apply to LEED 2009 and LEED v4.

4. Chain of Custody Certificates: Submit data for certified wood products. Include
statement of costs.
Metal Storage Shelving Full 10 56 13 - 1

5. Chain of Custody Qualification Data: Submit data for manufacturer and vendor.
6. Construction Waste Management: Submit tabulating and supporting for salvaged,
recycled, and reused building waste materials.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

1. Indicate installation details of connectors, lateral bracing, and special bracing.
2. Indicate dimensions, tolerances, materials, components, hardware, options,
accessories, and layout of system.
C. Samples: Submit for each type of metal storage shelving and for each color specified:
1. Vertical Supports: 12 inches (305 mm) tall.
2. Shelves: Full size, but not more than 24 inches wide by 12 inches deep (610 mm
wide by 305 mm deep).
3. Connectors: Full size.
4. Shelf Label Holders: Full size.
D. Product Schedule: Submit schedule for metal storage shelving.[ Use same
designations indicated on Drawings.]
E. Delegated Design Submittal: Submit for seismic restraint of metal storage shelving.
B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certificates for metal storage shelving,

accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
C. Product Certificates: Submit certificates for each type of metal storage shelving.
A. Maintenance Data: Submit data for metal storage shelving to include in maintenance
manuals.
A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative having minimum 5 years

documented experience who is trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody

by an FSC accredited certification body.
C. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-

accredited certification body.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project site.

1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of blocking and backing required for installation of metal
storage shelving attached to wall and ceiling assemblies.
B. Coordinate requirements for stud spacing, blocking, and auxiliary structural supports to
ensure adequate means for installation of shelving system.
C. Coordinate locations and installation of metal storage shelving that may interfere with
ceiling systems including lighting, HVAC, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, electrical
switches or outlets, and floor drains.
D. Coordinate shelving system layout with columns, wall mounted pipes and conduit, and
wall protrusions. Provide cut outs in shelving so components fit tight around protruding
elements. Field verify required dimensions.
E. Coordinate with installation of suspended ceiling system to ensure adequate blocking,

bracing, and auxiliary structural support is provided for attachment of ceiling brackets
and support of uprights.
F. Coordinate installation of shelving system with application of floor, wall, and ceiling
finishes. To the extent possible, install shelving components after finishes have been
applied.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install metal storage shelving until spaces
are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary
HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions
at levels intended for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIAL
1. Shelves: Full size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type
indicated, but no fewer than 5 shelves.
2. Shelf to Post Connectors: Full size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for
each type indicated, but no fewer than 10 connectors.
3. Shelf Label Holders: Full size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each
type indicated, but no fewer than 10 holders.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Delegated Design: Design metal storage shelving, including comprehensive engineering

analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and

B. Seismic Performance: Metal storage shelving shall withstand the effects of earthquake
1. Seismic Component Importance Factor: [1.5] [1.0].
2.2 SUSTAINABILITY REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Sustainability: Comply with requirements of Section [01 81 00] [018113].
B. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one/half of preconsumer

recycled content not less than 25 percent.
C. Regional Materials: Provide materials manufactured within [100 miles (160 km)] [500
miles (800 km)] of Project for each raw material.
D. Certified Wood: Wood products shall be certified as FSC Pure [ or FSC Mixed Credit]
according to FSC STD-01-001 and FSC STD-40-004.
E. Composite Wood Products: Provide products made using ultra low emitting
formaldehyde resins as defined in the California Air Resources Board's Airborne Toxic
Control Measure to Reduce Formaldehyde Emissions from Composite Wood Products
or shall be made with no added formaldehyde.
F. Construction Waste Management: Comply with construction waste management plans

for disposal of building materials. Maintain record and receipts indicated in management
plans.
2.3 CASE TYPE METAL STORAGE SHELVING
A. Case Type Metal Shelving: Complying with MH 28.1; freestanding units and field
assembled from factory formed components. Shelves span between two independent
supporting sheet metal end panels that allow shelf height adjustment over full height of
shelving unit. Provide fixed top and bottom shelves, adjustable intermediate shelves, and
accessories indicated.
of the following:
a. Adjustable Shelving; Karp Associates, Inc.
b. Borroughs Corporation.
c. EQUIPTO.
d. Lyon Workspace Products, LLC.
e. Montel Aetnastak Inc.
f. Republic Storage Systems, LLC.
g. Tennsco.
h. UNICOR.
B. Load Carrying Capacity per Shelf: [200 lb (91 kg)] [Indicated on Drawings], uniformly
distributed.
C. End Panels: Fabricated from cold rolled steel sheet, with concealed perforations at front
and back edges at [standard spacing] [1 inch (25 mm) o.c.] for receiving adjustable
shelf clips.

1. Steel Sheet Thickness, Nominal: [0.036 inch (0.91 mm)] [Required for load
carrying capacity per shelf and number of shelves].
2. Adjustable Shelf Clips: Cold rolled steel, nominal thickness [0.036 inch (0.91 mm)]
[required for load carrying capacity per shelf]; with projections designed to
engage at least two perforations in end panels.
D. End Panels: Fabricated from cold rolled steel sheet; with horizontal slots spaced at
[standard spacing] [1 inch (25 mm) o.c.] [1-1/2 inches (38 mm) o.c.] for supporting
shelves.
E. Back Panel: One piece, fabricated from cold rolled steel sheet.
F. Shelves: Fabricated from cold rolled steel sheet. Fabricate shelves with vertical front that
is flanged and returned.
1. Shelf Divider Slots: 2 inches (51 mm) o.c..
G. Shelf Quantity: [Three] [Four] [Five] [Six] shelves per shelving unit in addition to top and
bottom shelf.
H. Base: Closed front, with base strips fabricated from same material and with same finish
as end panels.
I. Overall Unit Width: [30 inches (762 mm)] [36 inches (914 mm)] [42 inches (1067 mm)]
[48 inches (1219 mm)] <Insert dimension>.
J. Overall Unit Depth: [12 inches (305 mm)] [18 inches (457 mm)] [24 inches (610 mm)]
<Insert dimension>.
K. Overall Unit Height: [72 inches (1829 mm)] [84 inches (2134 mm)] [96 inches (2438
mm)] <Insert dimension>.
L. Accessories:
1. Finished End Panels: Fabricated as [solid] [perforated] full height panels from
same material and with same finish as end panels, with trim along edges abutting
end panels and top shelf.
2. Shelf Dividers: Fabricated from same material and with same finish as shelves;
[full height] [angle] [tapered] [sliding] type.
3. Bins: [Fabricated from same material and with same finish as shelves]
[Plastic]; [size as indicated on Drawings].
4. Shelf Label Holders: [Clear] [Colored] plastic, designed to clip onto front edge of
shelf.
M. Steel Finish: [Baked enamel] [or] [powder coat].

1. Color and Gloss: Selected by Architect.

2.4 FOUR POST METAL STORAGE SHELVING
A. [Open] [Closed] Four Post Metal Storage Shelving: Complying with MH 28.1 and field
assembled from factory formed components. Shelves span between supporting corner
posts that allow shelf height adjustment over full height of shelving unit. Provide fixed top
and bottom shelves, adjustable intermediate shelves, and accessories indicated.
of the following:
a. Adjustable Shelving; Karp Associates, Inc.
b. Borroughs Corporation.
c. Lyon Workspace Products, LLC.
d. Mecalux.
e. Penco Products, Inc.
f. Republic Storage Systems, LLC.
g. Spacesaver Corporation.
h. Tennsco.
i. Western Pacific Storage Systems.
2. Load Carrying Capacity per Shelf: [350 lb (159 kg)] [700 lb (318 kg)] [1500 lb (680
kg)] [Indicated on Drawings].
3. Posts: Fabricated from hot rolled steel; in [angle] [offset angle] [beaded] [T]
[tubular T] [V] [box] shape; with perforations at 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) o.c. to
receive shelf to post connectors.
a. Unit Configuration: Configure shelving units as [individual, freestanding]
[starter and add on unit] assemblies.
1) Add on Shelf Posts: Fabricated from hot rolled steel, [T] <Insert
requirements> shape; perforated to match main posts.
b. Post Base: [Bolt leveler] [Adjustable steel floor plate, drilled for floor
anchors].
4. Bracing: [Single] [or] [double] diagonal cross bracing.
a. Location: At unit [back] [and] [ends] as required for stability, load carrying
capacity of shelves, and number of shelves indicated.
5. Back Panel: [One piece] [Two half panels] fabricated from cold rolled steel sheet.
a. Steel Sheet Thickness, Nominal: [0.024 inch (0.61 mm)] [Required for load
carrying capacity per shelf].
6. End Panels: Fabricated from cold rolled steel sheet.
a. Steel Sheet Thickness, Nominal: [0.024 inch (0.61 mm)] [Required for load
carrying capacity per shelf] <Insert thickness>.
7. Solid Type Shelves:
a. Steel Sheet: Nominal thickness [0.030 inch (0.76 mm)] [0.036 inch (0.91
mm)] [0.048 inch (1.21 mm)] [required for load carrying capacity per
shelf].
b. Metallic Coated Steel Sheet: Nominal thickness [0.034 inch (0.86 mm)]
[0.040 inch (1.02 mm)] [0.052 inch (1.32 mm)] [required for load carrying
capacity per shelf].
c. Slots or Holes for Shelf Dividers: [2 inches (51 mm)] [3 inches (76 mm)]
o.c.
d. Fabricate fronts and backs of shelves with box formed edges, with corners
lapped and welded.

e. Fabricate fronts and backs of shelves with vertical edges that are flanged
and returned, with edges reinforced with steel [bars] [angles] [or]
[channels].
8. Framed Type Wire Shelves: [Steel] [Metallic coated-steel] wire; with shelf frame
fabricated from same material and with same finish as posts.
9. Truss Type Wire Shelves: [Steel] [Metallic coated steel] [Stainless steel]
[Chrome plated] wire over wire construction, with downturned wire truss edges.
10. Shelf Quantity: [Three] [Four] [Five] [Six] shelves per shelving unit in addition to
top and bottom shelf.
11. Shelf to Post Connectors: [Mechanical fasteners (nuts and bolts)]
[Compression clips] [Support clips] [Containment clips] [Horizontal supports
with rivet connectors to post] [Standard connectors].
12. Base: [Open, with exposed post legs] [Closed, with base strips fabricated
from same material and with same finish as shelving].
13. Overall Unit Width: [30 inches (762 mm)] [36 inches (914 mm)] [42 inches (1067
mm)] [48 inches (1219 mm)], inclusive of two end posts.
14. Overall Unit Depth: [12 inches (305 mm)] [18 inches (457 mm)] [24 inches (610
mm)].
15. Overall Unit Height: [72 inches (1829 mm)] [84 inches (2134 mm)] [96 inches
(2438 mm)].
16. Accessories:
a. Finished End Panels: Fabricated as [solid] [perforated] full height panels
from standard thickness cold rolled steel sheet and with same finish as posts,
with trim for a finished appearance along edges abutting posts and top shelf.
b. Shelf Dividers: Fabricated from same material and with same finish as
shelves; [full height] [angle] [tapered] [sliding] type.
c. Bins: Fabricated from same material and with same finish as shelves; [size
indicated on Drawings].
d. Shelf Label Holders: [Clear] [Colored] plastic, designed to clip onto front
edge of shelf.
17. Steel Finish: [Baked enamel] [or] [powder coat].
a. Color and Gloss: Selected by Architect.
B. Wire Type, Four Post Metal Storage Shelving: Complying with MH 28.1; field assembled
from factory formed components. Shelves span between supporting corner posts that
allow shelf height adjustment over full height of shelving unit. Provide fixed top and
bottom shelves, adjustable intermediate shelves, and accessories indicated.
of the following:
a. AMCO Corporation.
b. InterMetro Industries Corporation.
c. Lyon Workspace Products, LLC.
d. Safco Products.
e. Spacesaver Corporation.
f. Tennsco.
2. Load Carrying Capacity per Shelf: [200 lb (91 kg)] [600 lb (272 kg)] [1200 lb (544
kg)] [Indicated on Drawings], uniformly distributed.
3. Posts: Fabricated from 1 inch (25 mm) OD, [square] [round] tubing of indicated
material; with grooves or notches at 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. to receive shelf to post
connectors. Label posts with numbers at not less than 2 inches (51 mm) o.c. for
determining shelf height.

a. Post Material: [Steel] [Stainless steel].

b. Post Base: [Bolt leveler] [Adjustable steel floor plate, drilled for floor
anchors].
c. Post Cap: Nylon or plastic.
d. Unit Configuration: Configure shelving units as [individual, freestanding]
[starter and add on unit] assemblies.
4. Framed Type Wire Shelves: [Steel] [Metallic coated steel] [Stainless steel] wire
over wire construction, with shelf frame fabricated from same material and with
same finish as posts; with post collar, designed to engage collet (wedge), welded
at each corner.
5. Truss Type Wire Shelves: [Steel] [Metallic coated steel] [Stainless steel]
[Chrome plated] wire over wire construction, with downturned wire truss edges;
with post collar, designed to engage collet (wedge), welded at each corner.
6. Waterfall Type Wire Shelves: [Steel] [Metallic coated steel] [Stainless steel] wire
over wire waterfall construction; with post collar, designed to engage collet
(wedge), welded at each corner.
7. Shelf Quantity: [Three] [Four] [Five] [Six] shelves per shelving unit in addition to
top and bottom shelf.
8. Shelf to Post Connectors: One piece collet (wedge), designed to engage post
collar attached to shelves.
9. Bracing: Diagonal cross bracing, required for stability, load carrying capacity of
shelves, and number of shelves.
10. Overall Unit Width: [24 inches (610 mm)] [36 inches (914 mm)] [48 inches (1219
mm)] [60 inches (1524 mm)], inclusive of two end posts.
11. Overall Unit Depth: [12 inches (305 mm)] [18 inches (457 mm)] [24 inches (610
mm)].
12. Overall Unit Height: [60 inches (1524 mm)] [72 inches (1829 mm)] [84 inches
(2134 mm)].
13. Accessories:
a. Shelf Dividers: Fabricated from same material and with same finish as
shelves; [full height] [angle] [tapered] [sliding] type.
b. Shelf Inlay: [Clear plastic] [static dissipative plastic] [hardboard] mat.
c. Storage Basket: Edge of shelf mounted wire basket, <Insert dimensions>;
fabricated from same material and with same finish as shelves.
d. Back Ledges: [1 inch (25 mm)] [4 inches (102 mm)] high, fabricated from
same material and with same finish as shelves.
e. Side Ledges: [1 inch (25 mm)] [4 inches (102 mm)] high, fabricated from
same material and with same finish as shelves.
f. Garment Hanger Tube: Width of [21 inches (533 mm)] [shelves]; with
mounting brackets.
g. Shelf Label Holders: [Clear plastic] [Colored plastic] [Cold rolled steel
sheet], designed to clip onto front edge of shelf.
14. Steel Finish: [Baked enamel or powder coat] [Chrome plated].
a. Color and Gloss: Selected by Architect.

15. Stainless Steel Finish: [No. 4 directional satin finish] [Nondirectional polish
finish].

2.5 POST AND BEAM METAL STORAGE SHELVING
A. Post and Beam Metal Shelving: Complying with MH 28.2; field assembled from factory
formed components. Shelves are supported by beams that span between supporting
corner posts that allow beam height adjustment over full height of shelving unit. Provide
fixed top and bottom beams, adjustable intermediate beams, and accessories indicated.
of the following:
a. Borroughs Corporation.
b. Lyon Workspace Products, LLC.
c. Mecalux.
d. Penco Products, Inc.
e. Republic Storage Systems, LLC.
f. Tennsco.
g. Western Pacific Storage Systems.
B. Load Carrying Capacity per Shelf: [400 lb (181 kg)] [1000 lb (454 kg)] [2000 lb (907 kg)]
[Indicated on Drawings], uniformly distributed.
C. Posts: Fabricated from cold rolled steel; in [angle or open box] [1-1/2 inch by 1-1/2
inch (38 mm by 38 mm) angle] [open box] shape; with perforations at 1-1/2 inches (38
mm) o.c. to receive beam to post connectors.
1. Unit Configuration: Configure shelving units as [individual, freestanding] [starter
and add on unit] assemblies.
2. Steel Thickness, Nominal: [0.075 inch (1.90 mm)] [Required for load carrying
capacity per shelf and number of shelves].
a. Add on Shelf Posts: Fabricated from hot rolled steel, T-shape; perforated to
match main posts and of same thickness.
3. Post Base: Cold rolled steel floor plate, drilled for floor anchors.
D. Beams: Fabricated from cold rolled steel; in [channel] [flanged] [channel or flanged]
shape. Provide beam at each side of each shelf, with center supports as required for
load carrying capacity of shelf.
1. Steel Thickness, Nominal: [0.075 inch (1.90 mm)] [Required for load carrying
capacity per shelf].
2. Beam to Post Connectors: Projecting [rivet] [tab] at each end that engage posts.
a. Top and Bottom Shelf Beams: Provide with [single] [double] beam to post
connectors.
b. Intermediate Shelf Beams: Provide with [single] [double] beam to post
connectors.
3. Beam Quantity: [As required for number of shelves indicated] <Insert
number> per shelving unit.
E. Particleboard Shelves: 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick; [factory] [or] [field] cut.
F. Flat Metal Shelves: Fabricate [fronts and backs] [fronts, backs, and sides] of shelves
with box formed edges, with corners lapped and welded from the following material:
1. Steel Sheet: Nominal thickness [0.030 inch (0.76 mm)] [0.036 inch (0.91 mm)]
[0.048 inch (1.21 mm)] [required for load carrying capacity per shelf].

2. Metallic Coated Steel Sheet: Nominal Thickness [0.034 inch (0.86 mm)] [0.040
inch (1.02 mm)] [0.052 inch (1.32 mm)] [required for load carrying capacity
per shelf].
G. Ribbed Metal Decking Shelves: Fabricated from 0.036 inch (0.91 mm) nominal thickness
steel sheet.
H. Wire Shelves: Welded steel wire; with 2 inch by 4 inch (51 mm by 102 mm) openings.
I. Shelf Quantity: [Three] [Four] [Five] [Six] shelves per shelving unit in addition to top and
bottom shelf.
J. Overall Unit Width: [36 inches (914 mm)] [48 inches (1219 mm)] [60 inches (1524
mm)] [69 inches (1753 mm)] [72 inches (1829 mm)] [96 inches (2438 mm)], inclusive
of two end posts.
K. Overall Unit Depth: [18 inches (457 mm)] [24 inches (610 mm)] [30 inches (762 mm)]
[36 inches (914 mm)] [48 inches (1219 mm)].
L. Overall Unit Height: [60 inches (1524 mm)] [72 inches (1829 mm)] [84 inches (2134
mm)] [96 inches (2438 mm)].
M. Accessories:
1. Tie Plates: Cold rolled steel, finished to match posts; designed for joining posts of
adjacent shelving units.
2. Supports: [Back to wall] [and] [back to back] type that bolt to posts; as required
for shelving unit stability.
3. Record Boxes: Knocked down, corrugated fiberboard with white finish and
contrasting contents legend; with prepunched handles and matching separate lid.
a. Letter/Legal Size Boxes: 12-1/2 inches wide by 16 inches deep by 10-1/2
inches high (318 mm wide by 406 mm deep by 267 mm high) for letter-size
material stored left to right and legal-size material stored front to back.
1) Quantity: <Insert number>.
b. Letter Size Boxes: 12-1/2 inches wide by 24 inches deep by 10-1/2 inches
high (318 mm wide by 610 mm deep by 267 mm high) for letter-size material
stored left to right.
1) Quantity: <Insert number>.
4. Record Box Support Rails: 1-1/2 inch by 1-1/2 inch (38 mm by 38 mm) metal angle,
with length to match depth of shelving unit; fabricated from same material and with
same finish as beams.
N. Steel Finish: [Baked enamel] [or] [powder coat].

1. Color and Gloss: Selected by Architect.
2.6 ANCHORS
A. Floor Anchors: Galvanized steel, [post installed expansion anchors] [power actuated
fasteners] [or] [threaded concrete screws]. Provide number per unit recommended by
manufacturer unless additional anchors are indicated in calculations.

B. Wall Anchors: Galvanized steel anchors designed to secure metal storage shelving to
adjacent wall. Provide one per shelving unit for each shelving unit adjacent to a wall
unless additional anchors are indicated in calculations.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate metal storage shelving components to provide field assembled units that are
square and rigid, with posts plumb and true and shelves flat and free of dents or
distortion. Fabricate connections to form a rigid structure, free of buckling and warping.
1. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
2. Build in straps, plates, brackets, and other reinforcements as needed to support
shelf loading.
3. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications to receive hardware, fasteners, and
similar items.
B. Form metal in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Form bent metal corners to smallest
radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the work.[ Form
backs of shelving units of up to 48 inches (1219 mm) wide from one piece.]
C. Form edges and corners free of sharp edges or rough areas. Fold back and crimp
exposed edges of unsupported sheet metal to form a hem on the concealed side; ease
edges of metal plate to radius of approximately 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). Shear and punch
metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
D. Weld corners and seams continuously to develop strength, minimize distortion, and
maintain the corrosion resistance of base metals. At exposed locations, finish welds and
surfaces smooth and blended so surface is smooth after finishing and contour of welded
surface matches that of adjacent surface. Weld before finishing components to greatest
extent possible. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces before
finishing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of the work.
B. Examine floors for suitable conditions where metal storage shelving will be installed.
C. Examine [walls] [and] [ceilings] to which metal storage shelving will be attached for
properly located blocking, grounds, or other solid backing for attachment of support
fasteners.
D. Proceed with installation after correcting unsatisfactory conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Vacuum and clean finished floor over which metal storage shelving is to be installed.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install metal storage shelving level, plumb, square, rigid, true, and with shelves flat and
free of dents or distortion. Make connections to form a rigid structure, free of buckling
and warping.
1. Install exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners where possible.
2. Install braces, straps, plates, brackets, and other reinforcements as needed to
support shelf loading and as required for stability.
3. Adjust post base bolt leveler to achieve level and plumb installation.
4. Anchor shelving units to floor with floor anchors through floor plate. Shim floor plate
to achieve level and plumb installation.
5. Install seismic restraints.
6. Connect [side to side] [and] [back to back] shelving units together.
7. Install shelves in each shelving unit at [spacing indicated on Drawings] [equal
spacing].
a. Case Type Metal Storage Shelving: Install adjustable shelf clips at front and
back of each shelf.
b. Four Post Metal Storage Shelving: Install four clips, one at each post, for
support of each shelf; with clips fully engaged in post perforations.
c. Post and Beam Metal Storage Shelving: Install beams with beam-to-post
connectors fully engaged in post perforations.
B. Accessories:
1. Install finished end panels and trim at exposed ends of shelving units.
2. Shelf Dividers: Install [at locations indicated on Drawings] <Insert
requirements>.
3. Bins: Install [at locations indicated on Drawings] <Insert requirements>.
4. Shelf Label Holders: Install [one] <Insert number> on each shelf.
a. Install [centered] [vertically aligned] [at locations indicated on Drawings]
within each shelving unit.
5. Record Box Support Rails: Provide two for each record storage box.
6. Shelf Inlays: Install [one per shelf] [at locations indicated on Drawings].
7. Storage Baskets: Install [at locations indicated on Drawings] <Insert
requirements>.
8. Back Ledges: Install [one per shelf] [at locations indicated on Drawings].
9. Side Ledges: Install [on each side of each shelf] [at locations indicated on
Drawings].
10. Garment Hanger Tubes: Install [at locations indicated on Drawings] <Insert
requirements>.
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Erect [case type] [and] [four post] metal storage shelving to a maximum tolerance from
vertical of 1/2 inch (13 mm) in up to 10 feet (3 m) of height, not exceeding 1 inch (25
mm) for heights taller than 10 feet (3 m).
B. Erect post and beam metal storage shelving to a maximum tolerance from vertical of 1/4
inch (6 mm) in 84 inches (2134 mm) of height.

B. Waste Disposal: Dispose of metal [, wood,] and product waste, including accessories
and used items, by recycling or reusing waste materials.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust metal storage shelving so connectors and other components engage accurately
and securely.
B. Adjust and lubricate operable components to operate smoothly and easily, without
binding or warping. Check and readjust operating hardware.
C. Touch up marred finishes or replace metal storage shelving that cannot be restored to
factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or
furnished by metal storage shelving manufacturer.
D. Replace metal storage shelving components that have been damaged beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
E. Clean and polish storage system components. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or
methods that could damage finish.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 10 73 17
METAL SHADE CANOPIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Design, engineer, fabricate, supply, deliver, and install manufactured
extruded aluminum shade canopies, perforated aluminum plate panels, framing, shade
foils, reinforcing, and cantilevered structural attachment to vertical surfaces.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of base plates anchored into concrete footings.
B. Supply inserts and anchoring devices for building into concrete and instruct other trade
of proper location and position.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

components and profiles, and description of finishes for aluminum members.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, accessories, and fastening
and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.
1. Column Anchorage Plans: Submit anchorage plans and templates.

2. Framing Drawings: Show complete fabrication of canopy framing. Indicate welds
and bolted connections.
3. Include section module of wind loadbearing members, calculations for stresses
and deflections under design loading.
C. Samples for Verification: Submit 12 inch (305 mm) long section with finish of aluminum
canopy in thickness indicated.
A. Delegated Design Submittal: Submit analysis data indicating compliance with

performance requirements and design data signed and sealed by the qualified
B. Research/Evaluation Reports: ICC-ES reports for post installed anchors.
C. Qualification Data: For fabricator and installer.
Metal Shade Canopies 10 73 17 - 1

1. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
a. AWS D1.2/D1.2 M Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.

b. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for
welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer with at least 15 years’ experience

in the design, engineering, manufacturing, and installation of shade structures.
1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of comprehensive engineering analysis

and Shop Drawings by a professional engineer who is legally qualified and
licensed to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located.
C. Erector / Installer Qualifications: An experienced erector having minimum 10 years’

documented experience, and who specializes in erecting and installing work similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is approved by
canopy manufacturer.
A. Deliver canopy components to prevent damaged or deformation. Package metal canopy

for protection during transportation and handling.
B. Unload, store, and erect metal canopy components to prevent bending, warping,
twisting, and surface damage.
C. Set metal canopy horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with weathertight and
ventilated covering. Store to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water.
Do not store metal canopy in contact with materials that stain, dent, or cause surface
damage.
A. Field Measurements: Verify location and elevation of footings relative to finished grade,
columns, and adjacent construction contiguous with manufactured canopy by field
measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without

delaying the work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal
canopies without field measurements.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Metal Canopy Finishes: Written warranty signed by manufacturer in which manufacturer

agrees to repair finish or replace metal canopy components that show evidence of
deterioration of factory applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Entry Canopies, Cantilevered Design, by AVAdek.

1. Austin Mohawk and Company, Inc.

2. Mapes Canopies, LLC.
3. Peachtree Protective Covers.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain exterior manufactured canopy and components from a single
manufacturer.
D. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products and services from the basis
of design manufacturer, or from another manufacturer with comparable experience;
comparable history of successful projects; turn-key design, fabrication, and installation
capabilities; and follow-up maintenance service; as determined and approved by the
Architect.
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section

01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design shade canopy system and foundations.
B. Structural Performance: Metal canopy shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and
the indicated loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.
1. Wind Loads: Determine wind loads based on minimum design speed indicated:
a. Design Wind Speed: As indicated on Drawings.

b. Exposure: As indicated on Drawings.
c. Wind Pressures: As calculated based on design wind speed.
2. Point Loads: 300 pounds or 20 pounds per square foot.
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of


effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat
gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
(100 degrees C), material surfaces.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
specified
1. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5 or T-52
a. Thickness: Thickness necessary to comply with design calculations.
2. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for
forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.
3. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, alloy 319.
B. Framing: Extruded aluminum tube columns and beams for structural support, sized to
comply with design calculations and withstand required loads.
1. Columns: Shape and size as indicated on Drawings.

2. Beams: Shape and size as indicated on Drawings.
3. Trellis/Sunshade/Louvers: Shape and size as indicated on Drawings.
4. Sub-Framing: Provide additional members as required to support electrical service
and junction boxes for lights and ceiling fan. Conceal conduit inside of columns,
beams, and elliptical louvers.
5. Weatherproof Cover: Provide minimum 18 inches by 18 inches (457 mm by 457
mm) aluminum sheet of same material, thickness, and finish as canopy members,
mounted to top of framing above ceiling fan location.
C. Perforated Aluminum Panels: Aluminum panels, 3/8-inch thick, with perforation pattern
as selected by Architect.
1. Fasteners: Self-taping screws for attaching panels to steel framing.
D. Wood Look Louvers: 2 by 4 inch "trellis tube", spaced 6 inches O.C.
1. Color: "Southern Pecan" by Avadek
E. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 series stainless
steel, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals incompatible with joined materials.
1. Use type and size suitable for installation conditions.

2. Use Phillips flat head screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Anchors and Inserts: Stainless steel, of type and size required for loading and installation
indicated.

G. Bituminous Paint: ASTM D 1187. Cold applied asphalt mastic t containing no asbestos
fibers, or cold applied asphalt emulsion complying with.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Configuration: Custom, as indicated on Drawings.
B. Comply with indicated profiles, dimensioned requirements and structural requirements.
C. Use sections true to details with clean, straight, sharply defined profiles and smooth
surfaces of uniform color and texture, free from defects impairing strength and durability.
D. Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods of aluminum canopy with those of

adjoining construction to produce integrated assemblies with closely fitting joints and
with edges and surfaces aligned unless otherwise indicated.
E. Form metal to profiles indicated, in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Produce flat,
flush surfaces without cracking or grain separation at bends.
F. Coordinate location of penetrations for fire suppression system piping and electrical
conduit concealed inside of columns, beams, and elliptical louvers.
G. Bolted Connections: All bolts, nuts, washers, and screws used in joining the members
shall be stainless steel up to 3/8” diameter. Over 3/8” diameter may be hot-dipped
galvanized.
1. Fasten blades to structure with concealed stainless steel screws.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Aluminum Finishes: Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established

by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
1. Two Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less
than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply
coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'
2. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect.
3. Apply a coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum surfaces in contact with
cementitious or dissimilar materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
installation tolerances, metal canopy supports, and conditions affecting performance of
the work.
1. Examine framing to verify that angles, channels, studs, and structural panel
support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances
required by manufacturer.
B. Examine embedded supports for components and system to verify actual locations of
penetrations relative to seam locations of metal canopy before installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install metal canopy in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions on prepared

concrete slabs.
B. Install metal canopy plumb and level. Anchor metal canopy and components securely
in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.

2. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
C. Fasteners:
1. Aluminum Framing: Use stainless steel fasteners.
D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal canopy is
On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal canopy
manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
B. After metal panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions,
dirt, and sealant.
C. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence

remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop;
make required alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units.
D. Replace metal canopy components damaged or deteriorated beyond repair.

E. Protect finishes from damage during remainder of construction period. Remove

temporary protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 10 73 26
WALKWAY COVER
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Prefinished, pre-assembled, extruded aluminum walkway cover

system, including framing, reinforcing, structural anchors, integral gutters and drains,
attachments, shims and sealants.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association:

1. AAMA 605 - Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural
Extrusions and Panels.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials:

1. ANSI/ASTM B 209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
2. ANSI/ASTM B 221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube.
3. ASTM C 94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete.
4. AAMA 2603: Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test
Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.
A. Design Criteria:
1. Provide for expansion and contraction due to structural movement and temperature
changes without detriment to appearance or performance.
2. Engineer components of completed system with provisions and allowances for
minimum of + or - 180 degree F variation in surface temperature to eliminate
excessive thermal stresses and deformation.
B. Wind Loading: 25 psf positive and negative wind load.
C. Deflection: L/180.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's fabrication and field installation instructions; submit
maintenance and cleaning instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Include details of construction and installation methods, types and
thicknesses of materials; section module of wind load-bearing members, calculations for
stresses and deflections under design loading.
C. Samples: Submit 12" long section with finish of corrugated aluminum roof panel, gutters
and posts; submit samples of interlocking deck joint, roof deck expansion joint, welded
column or beam corner, beam cap, and rain cap.
Walkway Cover 10 73 26 - 1
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Five years documented experience in engineering and

fabrication of similar work.
B. Installer Qualifications: Five years documented experience; approved by manufacturer.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Supply inserts and anchoring devices for building into concrete and instruct other trade of
proper location and position.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. AVAdek Walkway Cover Systems.
2. American Walkway Covers, LLC
3. Mapes Industries.
4. Metals USA
5. US Sunguard
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Panel:
1. Extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T6, 0.078" thick, nominal 2 3/4" x 6" channel with
interlocking joints to form corrugated roof deck panels.
2. Acceptable Product: AVAdek Walkway Cover Systems.
B. Gutter and Fascia: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T6 0.125" thick, nominal 3" style,
fascia and gutter beam.
C. Roof Beams: 4" x 6", 4" x 8" and 6" x 10" extruded aluminum channel beams providing
structural support and conductance for rain water.
D. Columns: 6" x 10" extruded aluminum tubular posts 0.125" thick.
E. Fasteners: Prefinished fasteners, sized for conditions encountered.
2.3 CONCRETE MIX
A. Compressive Strength: 3,000 psi at 28 days, ASTM C 94 portland cement concrete.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Refer to Architectural Drawings for details.
B. Fabricate supports to act as downspouts. Fabricate framing system to drain water from
fascia gutter to support columns and provide discharge spouts for designated columns at
ground level.
C. The canopy deck is to have welded end closures at the deck terminations.
D. Apply protective coating to aluminum in contact with grout.
2.5 FINISH
A. Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: AAMA 2605 PVDF with minimum 70 percent resin
content. Colors as selected by Architect. Pretreat aluminum with chromium pretreatment.
B. Concealed Steel Items: Galvanized in accordance with ANSI/ASTM A 123 to 2.0

oz/sq.ft..
C. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum surfaces in contact with
cementitious or dissimilar materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Erect canopy after concrete and masonry work in vicinity is completed and washed down.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Set posts on 10'-0" maximum centers, in concrete footings. Ensure drainage is

constructed so no standing water will be at downspout post bottoms.
B. Erect walkway cover in accordance with manufacturer's instructions including related

flashings, concealed gutters and drains, fasteners, hardware, sealants and material
necessary for complete weathertight installation.
C. Weld beams and columns either into one-piece rigid bents or shop build as mechanical
joint. Install structural ties in tops of beams for rigidity and to serve as closures between
draining deck sections.
D. Interlock sections in structural unit with joint fabricated into rigid shape which is self-
flashing. Fasten interlocking joints rigidly with fastenings 8" on center. Assemble roof
deck on simple spans of 15'-0" or more with camber sufficient to neutralize deflection
caused by dead load of material and to provide positive drainage from center of deck. No
protruding ribs on underside of deck are permissible.
E. Form expansion joints with no metal-to-metal contact between deck and beam or clamps.
F. Fill downspout columns with grout to discharge level to prevent standing water. Vibrate
with small rod to fill voids. Install downspout deflectors after grouting.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Repair damage or scratches using same paint as factory finish.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Wash down exposed surfaces using mild domestic detergent in warm water applied with
soft cloths. Remove dirt from corners and interior surfaces.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 10 75 00
ALUMINUM FLAGPOLE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Requirements including but not limited to:

1. Ground set flagpoles made from aluminum.
2. Fittings, base, anchorage.
3. Flags: OFOI.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Technical data for flagpoles including construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operating
characteristics, fittings, accessories, and finishes for flagpoles.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit plans, elevations, and attachment details. Show general
arrangement, jointing, fittings, accessories, grounding, anchoring, and support, including
section, and details of foundation system.
C. Samples: Submit 2 by 4 inch metal samples, finished to match flagpole.
D. Delegated Design Submittal: Submit engineered shop drawings with seal and signature
of Professional Engineer, licensed in the State of Texas, who was responsible for
creating them.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit data to include in operation and maintenance
manuals.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain flagpoles as complete units, including fittings, accessories,

bases, and anchorage devices, from single source from single manufacturer.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for flagpoles. Furnish setting drawings, templates,

and directions for installing anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry.
Deliver items to project site in time for installation.
A. Spiral wrap flagpoles with heavy paper and enclose in a hard fiber tube or other
protective container.
Flagpoles 10 75 00 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, licensed in the State of

Texas experience in the design of flagpole systems using performance requirements and
B. Seismic Performance: Flagpole assemblies shall withstand the effects of earthquake

C. Structural Performance: Flagpole assemblies, including anchorages and supports, shall

withstand design loads indicated within limits and under conditions indicated.
1. Wind Loads: Determine according to NAAMM FP 1001 for basic wind speed for
Project location when flying two flags. Refer to Structural Drawings for wind speeds
and pressures.
2. Base flagpole design on polyester flags of maximum standard size suitable for use
with flagpole or flag size indicated, whichever is more stringent.
D. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements.

2.2 FLAGPOLES

following:
1. Acme/Lingo Flagpoles, LLC.
2. American Flag Poles.
3. Concord American Flagpole.
4. Eder Flag Manufacturing Company, Inc. (Baartol Company)
5. Ewing Flagpoles.
6. Morgan-Francis Flagpoles and Accessories.
7. Pole-Tech Company Inc.
B. Aluminum Flagpoles: Cone tapered flagpoles fabricated from seamless extruded tubing
complying with ASTM B 241/B 241M, Alloy 6063, with a minimum wall thickness of 3/16
inch (4.8 mm).
C. Exposed Height: 30 feet (9 m).
D. Construct flagpoles in one piece.
E. Metal Foundation Tube: Corrugated steel foundation tube, 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) wall
thickness with 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) steel bottom plate and support plate; 3/4 inch (19 mm)
diameter, steel ground spike; and steel centering wedges welded together. Galvanize
foundation tube after assembly. Furnish loose hardwood wedges at top of foundation
tube for plumbing pole.
1. Flashing Collar: Same material and finish as flagpole.
2. Furnish ground spike.
2.3 FITTINGS
A. Finial Ball: Flush seam ball, sized to match flagpole butt diameter.
1. 0.063 inch (1.6 mm) spun aluminum, finished to match flagpole.
B. Internal Halyard, Winch System: Manually operated winch with control stop device and
removable handle, stainless steel cable halyard, and concealed revolving truck assembly
with plastic coated counterweight and sling. Furnish flush access door secured with
cylinder lock. Finish truck assembly to match flagpole.
1. Halyard Flag Snaps: Stainless steel swivel snap hooks with neoprene or vinyl
covers. Furnish two per halyard.
A. Flags: Owner-Furnished, Owner-Installed.
B. Concrete: Quick set concrete composed of not less than five (5) sacks of Portland
cement conforming to ASTM C150, per cubic yard of wet concrete combined with fine
aggregate, clean water, and mixed in proportions to attain minimum 28 day compressive
strength of not less than 3,000 psi.
C. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M.
D. Drainage Material: Crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; coarse aggregate.
E. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Single or Multicomponent nonsag STPE or STPU joint

sealant complying with requirements in Section 07 92 00.
F. Bituminous Paint: Cold applied asphalt emulsion complying with

ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
2.5 FINISH
A. Aluminum:
1. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41.
2. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44.
b. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare uncoated metal flagpoles that are set in foundation tubes by painting below
grade portions with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
B. Foundation Excavation: Excavate to neat clean lines in undisturbed soil. Remove loose
soil and foreign matter from excavation and moisten earth before placing concrete. Place
and compact drainage material at excavation bottom.
C. Provide forms where required due to unstable soil conditions and for perimeter of
flagpole base at grade. Secure and brace forms to prevent displacement during
concreting.
D. Foundation Tube: Place foundation tube, center, and brace to prevent displacement
during concreting. Place concrete. Plumb and level foundation tube and allow concrete
to cure.
E. Sleeves: Locate and secure sleeves in forms by bracing to reinforcement and forms.
F. Anchor Bolts: Locate and secure anchor bolts in forms with templates and by tying to
reinforcement.
G. Concrete: Place concrete as specified in Section 03 30 00. Compact concrete in place

by using vibrators. Moist cure exposed concrete for no fewer than seven days or use
nonstaining curing compound.
H. Trowel exposed concrete surfaces to a smooth, dense finish, free of trowel marks, and
uniform in texture and appearance. Provide positive slope for water runoff to perimeter
of concrete base.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install flagpoles where indicated and according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer's
B. Foundation Tube: Place flagpole in tube, seated on bottom plate between steel centering
wedges, and install hardwood wedges to secure flagpole in place. Place and compact
sand in foundation tube and remove hardwood wedges. Seal top of foundation tube with
a 2 inch (50 mm) layer of elastomeric joint sealant and cover with flashing collar.
C. Provide positive lightning ground.
3.4 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A. Clean area of debris and place excavated soil where directed or remove from site as
directed. Clean flagpole of dirt and foreign matter which will affect appearance.
B. Touch up damage to finished surfaces with manufacturer’s matching paint.
C. Adjust fittings for smooth operation.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 11 12 33
LIFT ARM GATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Automatic barrier gates.
2. Vehicle detectors.
3. Access control units.
A. Product Data: Technical data including Include rated capacities, operating

characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties
components and profiles, and finishes for vehicle control equipment.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit plans, elevations, sections and attachment details.

1. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size
of each field connection.
3. Vehicle Detectors: Layout and method of placement of vehicle detector system.
C. Samples: Submit samples for each exposed product and for each color and texture
specified, 6 inches (150 mm) square in size.
B. Field quality control reports.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit data for vehicle control equipment to include
in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Gate Arms: Two breakaway gate arms for each gate installed, complete with
accessory components.
Lift Arm Gates 11 12 33 - 1

A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative having minimum 5 years

documented experience who is trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Sole Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of vehicle control equipment from single
source from single manufacturer.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project site.

1. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing in, equipment bases, and preparatory work.
2. Verify equipment operation is consistent with system description.
3. Review sequence of operation for each type of vehicle control equipment.
4. Review coordination of interlocked equipment specified.
5. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Comply with the following standards:

1. UL 325 for Vehicle Class II for swing and vertical barrier (arm).
A. Electrical Components and Devices: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.3 AUTOMATIC BARRIER GATES.
A. Provide vehicle control device consisting of operator and controller housed in a

weathertight, tamper resistant cabinet enclosure with gate arm. Device shall be activated
by a signal from access control device. Fabricate unit with gate arm height in down
position of not more than 35 inches (889 mm) above pavement.
1. Acceptable products and manufacturers include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. ParkPlus 101-BL15 Articulated; Automatic Systems.
b. MHTM Micro-Drive Parking Pro with VarioBoom; Magnetic Automation
Corporation.
c. Folding Arm Barrier Gate; ParkingBOXX.
2. Standards: Barrier gate operators that are listed and labeled according to UL 325
by a qualified testing agency.
B. Controller: Factory sealed, solid state, plug in type, with galvanized steel box for wiring
connections. Noncommunicating type.
1. Noncommunicating Type:
a. Capable of logic for one- and two-way lanes.
b. Separate momentary contacts for vehicle entries and vehicle exits.
2. Physical Characteristics:
a. On-off power supply switch.
b. Automatic-manual switch.

c. Differential counter.
d. Communication port.
e. Programmable arm speeds for opening and closing.
f. Wireless receiver with two remote controls for opening and closing
g. Internal resettable counters.
h. Thermal overload protection with manual reset.
i. Plug-in connectors for three vehicle detectors.
j. Thermostatically controlled heater with on/off/auto switch.
k. Thermostatically controlled fan with on/off/auto switch.
l. Switch to test motor and limit switches.
m. Emergency manual disconnect.
n. Battery backup.
o. Two, 115-V ac grounded power receptacle.
3. Operational Characteristics:
a. Able to store successive inputs and sequentially processing each one.
b. Automatic instant reversing obstacle detector mechanism that stops
downward motion of gate arm if arm contacts or nears an object and that
immediately returns arm to upward position. Include a zero to 60 second,
variable time reset device.
c. Directional arming logic.
d. Broken gate arm monitoring.
e. Programmable automatic timer.
f. Diagnostic mode for onsite testing , with LEDs for inputs and outputs.
g. Automatic and continuous testing of inputs and outputs.
h. Reversible arm capability for right or left handed operation.
C. Cabinets: Fabricated from sheet metal with seams welded and ground smooth;
approximately 15 inches square by 40 inches tall (381 mm square by 1016 mm tall).
Provide single, gasketed access door for each cabinet with flush mounted locks. Furnish
two keys for each lock, all locks keyed alike. Fabricate cabinet with internal reinforcing
and four mounting holes accessible only from inside cabinet.
1. Stainless Steel Sheet: Not less than 0.109 inch (2.8 mm) thick, stainless steel
sheet.
a. Finish: Powder coat cabinet exterior. Colors as selected by Architect.
D. Folding Gate Arm: Aluminum breakaway arm with metal brackets.

1. Traffic Side Face: Reflective painted finish and red diagonal stripes.
2. Length: 12 feet or as indicated on Drawings.
3. Mounting Flange: Provide with breakaway feature to ensure a clean break if arm
is struck by vehicle.
E. Operator: UL labeled and listed, Class II. 1/2 hp; V, 60-Hz, single phase, instant
reversing, continuous duty motor for operating gate arm. Transmit power to gate arm
drive shaft through the speed reducer to harmonic acting crank and connecting rod.
Fabricate crank, rod, and drive shaft of galvanized solid bar steel. Provide an operable
cam for adjusting arm travel.
1. Opening Time: Three seconds.
2. Inherently adjustable, torque limiting clutch for safety.
F. Characteristics:
1. Audible alarm that activates as part of a safety device system.

2. Additional obstruction detector; noncontact infrared, photoelectric, or radio

frequency barrier.
3. Low voltage red warning lights that illuminate when gate is in down position.
4. Low voltage light on cabinet top that flashes or changes from red to green when
barrier gate is operating.
5. LED integrated into gate arm for increased visibility.
6. Manually operated crank for emergency operation.
2.4 VEHICLE DETECTORS
A. Provide infrared detection devices that sense presence or transit of vehicles and emit
signals activating gate arm operators.
1. Basis of Design: Opticom 711 Infrared Vehicle Detector; Global Traffic
Technologies.
2. Other Acceptable Products and Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide products by, but not limited to, the following:
a. EMX OWL; North Shore Commercial Door.
b. IS40/XL; BEA, A Halma Company.
B. Vehicle Loop Detector System: Self tuning electronic presence detector with adjustable
detection patterns, adjustable sensitivity and frequency settings, and panel indicator
light. Include automatic closing timer with adjustable time delay before closing , timer cut
off switch, designed to hold gate arm open until traffic clears. Provide number of loops
consisting of multiple strands of wire, number of turns, loop size, and method of
placement at location indicated on Drawings, as recommended in writing by detection
system manufacturer for pave over or saw cut installation.
1. Field Assembled Loop: Wire, in size indicated for field assembly.
2. Factory Formed Loop: Wire, preformed in size indicated.
3. Operation:
a. Recognize vehicles within 6 inches (152 mm) of each other on standard-
sized loop.
b. Recognize vehicle direction by detecting vehicle moving from one loop to
another.
c. Generate reverse count if vehicle backs up after generating directional count
in forward direction.
d. Continuous diagnostic monitoring for intermittently operating and failed
loops.
e. Crosstalk test between adjacent loops.
C. Active Infrared Vehicle Detector: Emitter/receiver type presence detector with adjustable
detection zone pattern and sensitivity, designed to detect the presence or transit of
vehicle in gate arm pathway by interrupting infrared beam in zone pattern and to emit
signal activating gate arm operator. Include automatic closing timer with adjustable time
delay before closing, timer cut off switch, and vehicle presence detector designed to hold
gate arm open until traffic clears.
2.5 ACCESS CONTROL UNITS
A. Provide access control unit that activates barrier gates.

1. Basis of Design: Model Ascent 25-K2; Security Brands, Inc. or equivalent products
by manufacturers acceptable to Architect.

B. Unit Housing: Fabricate from welded cold rolled steel or aluminum sheet with
weatherproof front access panel equipped with flush-mounted lock and two keys.
Provide face lighted unit fully visible at night.
1. Steel Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat finish system.
C. Digital Keypad Controlled Unit: Functions only when authorized code is entered on keyed
keypad and card reader capability.
1. System: Programmable, multiple code capability.
a. Multiple code capability of no fewer than 500 possible individual codes.
b. Programmable, multiple code capability permitting validation or voiding of no
fewer than 10,000 possible individual codes, consisting of one to six digits.
2. Operation: Online communication to remote vehicle control system.
3. Characteristics: Timed antipassback.
4. Reader Type: Proximity.
a. Cards/FOBS: As standard with Owner.
5. Mounting: With pedestal or as indicated on Drawings.
2.6 ANCHORAGES
A. Anchor Bolts: Galvanized.

1. Hot dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/A153M and ASTM F2329/F2329M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
installation tolerances, including equipment bases; accurate placement, pattern, and
orientation of anchor bolts; critical dimensions; and conditions affecting performance of
the work.
B. Examine roughing in for electrical and communication systems to verify actual locations
of connections before vehicle control equipment installation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Excavation for Traffic Controllers: Saw cut existing pavement for recessed traffic
controllers and hand excavate recesses to dimensions and depths and at locations as
required by traffic controller manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated on
Drawings.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install vehicle control equipment as required for complete and integrated installation.
1. Rough in electrical connections.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF AUTOMATIC BARRIER GATES
A. Anchor cabinets to concrete bases with anchor bolts or expansion anchors, and mount
barrier gate arms.
1. Install barrier gates according to UL 325.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF VEHICLE DETECTORS
A. Cut grooves in pavement and bury or bury and seal wire loop at locations indicated on
Drawings according to manufacturer's written instructions. Connect to vehicle control
equipment operated by detector.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF CARD READERS AND PEDESTALS
A. Pad or In-ground mount as shown, with mounting bolts.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL
A. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19.
B. Ground equipment according to Section 26 05 26.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory authorized service representative to test

and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including
connections.
C. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in
NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
D. Vehicle control equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.9 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust vehicle control equipment to function smoothly and lubricate as recommended by

manufacturer.
B. Confirm that locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.

C. After completing installation of exposed, factory finished vehicle control equipment,

inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.
3.10 PROTECTION
A. Remove barrier gate arms during the construction period to prevent damage and install
them immediately before Substantial Completion.
A. Maintenance Service Description: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance

service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of vehicle control
equipment Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of
worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper
vehicle control equipment operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's
authorized replacement parts and supplies.
3.12 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain vehicle control
equipment.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 11 30 00
APPLIANCES AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Appliances Include: Refrigerator, cooktop, hood, microwave oven, waste disposer,

dishwasher, ice makers, and trash compactor.
B. Equipment includes washing machine, clothes dryer, kitchen doorbell and accessories.
A. Product Data: Submit descriptive literature, rough-in requirements, installation

instructions and maintenance instructions for each type of appliance accepted.
A. Energy Ratings: Provide residential appliances that carry labels indicating energy cost
analysis (estimated annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by the
FTC Appliance Labeling Rule.
1. Provide appliances that qualify for the EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling
program.
B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements.

1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Deliver products to project site in manufacturer's undamaged protective containers, after

utility rough-ins are complete and construction is substantially complete and ready for
installation.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Refrigerator: Submit manufacturer's written five year parts and labor warranty.
B. Ice Maker:
1. Compressor and Condenser: Five years.

2. All Other Parts and Labor: Three years.
Appliances and Equipment 11 30 00 - 1

C. Dishwasher:
1. Motor and Pump: Five years.

2. Stainless Steel Components: Ten years against rust.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Appliance Manufacturers:
1. General Electric.
2. Sub-Zero.
3. KitchenAid.
4. Thermador/Waste King.
5. Scotsman Consumer Products.
6. Hot Point.
2.2 APPLIANCES
A. Refrigerator
1. Type - 1: Bottom-Freezer Drawer Refrigerator; Black

2. Energy Star
3. Capacity: 20.9 cu. Ft.
4. Overall Size: 69-7/8H x 29-3/4”Dx 29-3/4”W
5. Features: LED lighting, sliding snack drawer, factory installed icemaker, MWF
replacement filter; upfront temperature controls; turbo cool setting.
6. Acceptable Product: GDE21EYK/EMK by GE Appliances.
B. Undercounter Refrigerator:
1. Stainless steel wrapped cabinet and door

2. Size: 30”H x 23.63”W x 22.63”D
3. Acceptable Product: AL54CSSTB by Summit Appliance
4. Stainless steel.
5. Acceptable Product: GLDT690D/GLDT696D by GE
C. Counter-Top Icemaker:
1. Capacity: 261 lbs of ice

2. Water cooled
3. Acceptable Product: RNS-12A by Manitowoc
D. Self-Contained Icemaker, ADA compliant:
1. Production: 55 lbs of ice per 24 hours

2. Dimensions: 14-7/8 by 22-5/8 by 33-1/2 inches high
3. Air cooled

4. Acceptable Product: AM-50BAJ-AD by Hoshizaki
E. Drop-In Range: Ensure that controls are front-mounted for accessibility.
1. Size: 27-1/8” W x 24-3/16”D

2. 4 burners; self-clean oven; coil heating elements; chrome drip bowls, electronic
clock and timer.
3. Acceptable Product: JM250DFBB with Backsplash Kit WB36K5232 by GE, Black
F. Vent Hood:
1. Stainless Steel under the cabinet hood.

2. Size: 30” wide under counter, 5_1/2” high x 20” deep
3. Exhaust outlet connects to 3-1/4" x 10" rectangular duct. Vent top or rear. Includes
rectangular damper.
4. Four-speed with boost, 310 CFM venting system
5. Electronic backlit controls
6. Dual halogen lighting with nightlight
7. Auto-off
8. Convertible venting options
9. Vertical and rear exhaust
10. Appearance (Fully enclosed bottom)
11. Acceptable Product: Model JVW5301SJ/EJ by GE
G. Microwave: Counter-Top
1. Color: Black
2. Size: 24-1/8”W x 14”H x 19-3/4”D
3. Capacity: 2.2 cu. Ft. – 1100 watts.
4. Auto and time defrost; sensor cooking controls; 16” turntable; instant on controls;
control lockout; add 30 seconds; kitchen timer.
5. Acceptable Product: PES7227DLBB by GE.
2.3 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT
A. Washer:
1. Front Load Electric

2. Capacity: 4.3 cu. ft.
3. Size: 27”w x 33-1/2”d x 39-3/4”h
4. Acceptable Products: GFWN1600JWW by GE Appliances.
B. Dryer:
1. Front Load Electric

2. Capacity: 7.5 cu. ft.
3. Acceptable Product: GFDN160EJWW by GE Appliances

2.4 DOORBELL
A. Wired doorbell with firebell at Kitchen:
1. Basis of Design: “Wired Warehouse Door Bell with Firebell” by Reliable Chimes &
Security. Kit includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Bell
b. 12 volt push button
c. 12 volt transformer
d. Power cord
e. Connectors and wiring
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and written instructions.
B. Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners.

Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are
completely concealed.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Test each item of equipment to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustment.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Remove packing material from equipment items and leave units in clean condition,
ready for operation.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 11 40 00
FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and General Documents, apply to the Work specified in this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY OF THE WORK
A. Project Name and Location:
Argyle Elementary School #4, Argyle, Texas
B. Approval of Working Surface: any contractor performing work over the work of other
contractors shall notify the Architect of any unsatisfactory conditions. Beginning of work
by any contractor shall constitute acceptance of the previous work.
C. Checking Dimensions at Site: before ordering any materials or doing any work, verify all
measurements of the building and be responsible for the accuracy of them. No extras
will be allowed for variations from drawings in existing conditions or for work performed
under this contract. Any discrepancies found shall be submitted to the Architect or
Foodservice Consultant for instructions before proceeding.
D. Cutting and Patching: No excessive cutting will be permitted, nor shall any structural
members be cut without the written approval of the Architect. Each Contractor shall
leave all chases and openings straight, true and of the proper size in his work as may be
necessary for the proper installation of his and other contractors’ work. After such work
has been installed, he shall carefully fit around, close up, repair, patch and point up same
as directed, to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.
E. Cooperation: The General Contractor, all other contractors and all subcontractors shall
coordinate their work with all adjacent work and shall cooperate with all other trades to
facilitate the general progress of the work. Each trade shall afford all the other trades
every reasonable opportunity for installation of their work and storage of their material.
F. Inspection and Tests: Architect, Owner, Foodservice Consultant and their representative
shall at all times have access to the work whether it is in preparation or progress. Provide
proper and safe facilities for such access and inspection.
G. Fees, Permits and Inspections: secure and pay fees for all permits, licenses and
inspections as required by all authorities having jurisdiction. Give all notices and comply
with all laws, ordinances, codes, rules, regulations and contract requirements bearing on
the work.
Foodservice Equipment 11 40 00 - 1
1.3 SCOPE
A. Include the Work specified, shown or reasonably inferable as part of Foodservice

Equipment. Portions of this Work may be subcontracted to those qualified to do such
work, as may be necessary because of jurisdictional trade agreements and restrictions.
B. The General Contractor is responsible for Related Work specified in other Sections: i.e.
final plumbing, electrical and mechanical connections. The Foodservice Equipment
Contractor is responsible for all internal connections when specified.
C. Specifications and drawings have been prepared to form the basis for procurement,
erection, startup and adjustment of all equipment in this contract. Plans and
specifications shall be considered as mutually explanatory and work required by one, but
not by the other, shall be performed as though required by both. Items required by one,
but not by the other shall be provided as though required by both. Work shall be
accomplished as called for in specifications and shown on drawings, so that all items of
equipment shall be completely functional for purpose for which they were designed.
Provide all necessary material, tools, equipment and labor required for the complete
installation. When there is any discrepancy between drawings and specifications,
bidders should seek clarification of any discrepancies from the Architect/Consultant prior
to bidding.
D. Should the drawings disagree in themselves, or the specifications with the drawings, the
better quality, more stringent, and/or greater quantity of the work or materials shall be
completed without additional costs to the Owner.
1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Slab depressions: reinforced concrete wearing bed and interior finished floor with coved
base at prefabricated cold storage assemblies: Divisions 03/09.
B. Concrete or masonry platforms with finished top and coved base at perimeter, for raised
setting of foodservice equipment: Divisions 03/09.
C. Slab depressions to receive stainless steel drain trench liner/grate assemblies (provided
under this Section): Division 03.
D. Dwarf-wall at exposed front/ends of cafeteria serving counters with finish as selected by

Architect.
E. Corner guards: Division 09 (Unless otherwise specified).
F. PVC or EMT Conduit with pull-wire and wide-sweep bends for refrigerant piping to
remote foodservice equipment refrigeration systems: Division 22/26.
G. Empty EMT conduit with pull-wire and wide-sweep bends for interconnect cables
between LAN and POS terminals, change-makers, pre-check units, printers, CPU’s, etc.:
Division 26.
H. Supply and exhaust fans for foodservice equipment and exhaust hoods: Division 23. All
testing and balancing for rooms and exhaust hoods to be performed by mechanical
contractor. Balance report for Foodservice Exhaust Hoods to be provided to FDP
immediately upon completion (send to Dallas.Submittal@fdp.org) and must be submitted
with O&M manuals.
I. Roughing in and final connection of mechanical, electrical, and plumbing systems to

foodservice equipment and cold storage assemblies by Divisions 22/23/26.
J. Grease traps by Division 22.
K. Millwork /Casework Fixtures by Division 06.
L. Any wall penetration required for Foodservice Equipment utilities to be provided by G.C..
Escutcheon plates or stainless steel sleeves to be provided and installed by G.C. as
needed.
M. Div. 23 to provide conditioned air above walk-in assembly.
A. In addition to complying with all applicable laws, statutes, building codes and regulations
of public authorities, comply with the following:
1. National Sanitation Foundation (all equipment to bear label).
2. National Electric Code.
3. Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. (all applicable equipment to bear label).
4. American Gas Association Laboratories.
5. National Fire Protection Association.
6. Americans with Disabilities Act.
7. Food and Drug Administration HAACP Guidelines.
8. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC).
9. Department of Energy.
10. Environmental Protection Agency
B. Furnish certification of regularly manufactured equipment listing or classification by

Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. with initial submittal.
C. Furnish list of equipment and components (internal and external) that are not of domestic
origin. All equipment and components (internal and external) should be of domestic
origin when possible. This information should be provided with the initial submittal.
D. Projects outside the continental United States shall adhere to all local authorities having
jurisdiction over that project.
1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Equipment items or components specified are intended to be the Basis of Bid. All other
brands, including any additional names, which may be listed as “Alternates” or
“Approved Equal,” must conform with the specifications, size, accessories, function, etc.
of the first-named brand and be subject to Paragraph C-03 of this Article.
B. Proposed Substitutions:
1. Submitted no less than 14 calendar days prior to Bid Date.
2. Submit proposed substitutions with catalog data and/or manufacturer’s shop
details indicating all modifications required to conform with specified brand.
3. List of deviations must include listing of equipment name, model number,
accessories and features with deviation(s) noted for both specified and proposed
alternate equipment. Equipment without listed deviation(s) will be considered to
be furnished as specified.
C. Substitutions with prior approval:

1. Submitted on Bidder’s letterhead attached to Proposal Form with individual
additive/deductive amounts stipulated and the documentation required in
Paragraph B02.
2. Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all substitution proposals before
execution of Contract.
3. Provide all design/engineering services required to make adjustments in space,
systems, utilities, etc. and pay all additional costs of utilities, construction or
professional services that may be incurred due to the acceptance of any
substitution.
D. All appliances within common group or category (e.g., refrigerators, kettles, ovens, etc.):
same manufacturer.
1.7 INTERPRETATION OF DOCUMENTS
A. During Bidding: contractor’s, supplier’s or vendor’s questions and comments pertaining

to Construction Document’s clarity or intent will be addressed by addendum.
B. Subsequent to Award:
1. Confirmation of Construction Document requirements will be provided by
Clarification Bulletin.
2. Request for Information Bulletins submitted by Contractor: contain Contractor’s
proposed resolution.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide a written warranty for a period of one year from the date of Substantial
Completion, including extended four-year replacement warranty on compressor bodies.
B. Components of equipment subject to replacement prior to one-year’s use (such as

refrigerator door gaskets) and those items which may fail due to improper or inadequate
periodic maintenance by the Owner/Operator (such as an uncleaned refrigeration

system condenser) are not intended to be included within the scope of the Warranty.
C. Refrigeration Systems/Equipment: one-year free service available within twenty-four

hours of notification.
D. Furnish three copies of a list of all equipment and their respective local service agencies,
indicating the address, telephone number and name of person to contact. Whenever
possible, the service agencies selected shall be factory-authorized for the equipment
assigned.
E. Provide following for refrigeration systems/equipment, unless specified otherwise:

1. One (1) year free service available within twenty-four hours of notification, for
refrigeration systems.
2. Provide five (5) year manufacturer’s registered written replacement, warranty
certificate, covering compressor bodies. Warranty to cover labor costs for first
year.
3. Provide ten (10) year manufacturer’s registered written replacement/repair,
warranty certificate, covering walk-in panels. Warranty to cover defects in material
and workmanship. Warranty to cover labor costs for first year.
4. Provide one (1) year parts and labor warranty for all parts of refrigeration system(s)
and walk-in cooler(s) and freezer(s), not otherwise covered herein.
F. All above stated warranty periods are from date of Substantial Completion. All
replacement parts due to a warranty call should be of same quality as the original.
Replacement parts should be of a domestic origin where possible.
1.9 SUBMITTAL DATA
A. Special Requirements: the following are in addition to any general requirements given
elsewhere in the Documents.
B. Submittal Requirements:
1. Kitchen Equipment Contractor to furnish all submittals via PDF, drawings to be
scaled per General Specifications and provided in Three (3) submittal sets.
2. Foodservice Design Professionals requires the below listed business days for each
submittal submitted. Submittal sets to be submitted with 14 days between each
issued submittal. Each submittal should be one individual document.
i. Submittal Set One include two (2) individual submittals sets: 10 Business
Days.
1. Equipment rough-in
2. Equipment Brochure
ii. Submittal Set Two include three (3) individual submittal sets:
10 Business Days
1. Exhaust Hood
2. Cold Storage Assembly
3. Refrigeration
iii. Submittal Set Three include individual submittal: 15 Business

Days
1. Custom Fabrication
2. Serving Counter
3. Merchandising equipment
4. Miscellaneous submittals
C. Submittals to be identified with the below listed file name structure:

a. 11 40 00-1 EQUIPMENT BROCHURE
b. 11 40 00-2 EQUIPMENT ROUGH-IN PLANS
c. 11 40 00-3 CUSTOM FABRICATION
d. 11 40 00-4 SERVING COUNTER
e. 11 40 00-5 EXHAUST HOODS
f. 11 40 00-6 COLD STORAGE ASSEMBLY
g. 11 40 00-7 REFRIGERATION
h. 11 40 00-8 BEVERAGE MERCHANDISER
D. Submittal Set One (1) requires both individual submittals Brochure and Rough-in plans.
If not sent together, submittal will be rejected.
E. All submittals will be notated in RED, architect, and general contractor to be colored per
their direction.
F. If hard copy submittals are required, kitchen contractor to furnish all hard copies as
required to the specified trades.
G. If discrepancies, missing information, or incorrect information occur within the

documents, kitchen contractor to seek clarification or clearly notate on submittals the
need for further direction. Kitchen contractor is to bid the higher of the discrepancy. Per
General specifications (Section 1.3. Scope subparagraph D).
H. Brochure Format (for regularly manufactured equipment and components):

1. Front and rear protective cover with labeled project name.
2. Brochure index: indicate functional Area/Room number, item number, quantity,
description and manufacturer.
3. A separate flysheet for each component or item of equipment, indicating item
number, name, quantity, manufacturer, optional equipment, modifications, special
instructions and utility requirements. An item of equipment or assembly containing
more than one buyout sub-assembly or component shall have the secondary item
listed in parenthesis beside the primary item name. For example: Serving Counter
(hot food well).
4. Catalog specification sheet and manufacturer’s drawing.
I. Shop Drawings (Rough-In Drawings):

1. Separate drawing sheets: same size as Contract Drawings (Contract Drawings
are not to be traced or reproduced). Submittal drawings are to be provided by
Kitchen Equipment Contractor and not reproduced from Contract Documents. Any
reproduced submittal drawings will be rejected.
2. ¼” scale drawing of fixed/movable Foodservice Equipment and pre-fabricated

Cold Storage Assemblies with itemized schedules.
3. Special Conditions Drawings, sizing and locating the following conditions:
a. Slab depressions, cores, sleeves or block-outs (cold storage assemblies,
drain trenches, piping, etc.).
b. Concrete or masonry platforms.
c. Pipe sleeves or roof jacks.
d. Wall-openings or block-outs for pass-through equipment, recessed control
panels, in-wall fire-protection system components, etc.
e. Blocking grounds or anchor plates required in walls for equipment
support/attachment.
f. Above-ceiling hanger assemblies for support of exhaust hoods, utensil-
racks, etc.
g. Access panels in walls or ceiling for service of equipment.
h. Ceiling pockets or recesses for unusually high equipment.
i. In-wall carriers for wall-hung or cantilevered equipment.
4. Electrical rough-in drawing.
5. Plumbing/mechanical rough-in drawing.
6. Required information:
a. All fixed and movable Foodservice Equipment shown on Contract Drawings.
b. All prefabricated Cold Storage Assemblies and Conveyor/Dishtable
Assemblies shown on Contract Drawings.
c. All general-use and convenience utilities or services indicated on Contract
Drawings, including those required by or connected to equipment or devices
not in this Section.
d. All rough-in drawings: fully dimensioned from engineering benchmark
(column lines, when provided) and finished-room surface to point of stub-up
through floor and stub-out through wall or ceiling for all mechanical, electrical
and plumbing services.
e. Connection number/tag system and symbols: identical to Contract
Drawings.
J. Shop Drawings (Manufacturer’s and Fabricator’s):

1. Sheet Size: identical to Contract Drawings, drawn or plotted at ¾” scale for plan
view and elevations; 1½” scale for sections and construction details.
2. Included information: item number, name and quantity.
3. Construction details, sections and elevations to reflect requirements of the
Specifications and Drawings.
4. Indicate adjacent walls, columns and equipment.
5. Indicate plumbing and electrical schematic drawings for equipment such as:
conveyors, waste systems, self-cleaning exhaust hoods, exhaust hood fire
protection systems and fabricated fixtures with single electrical or plumbing
connection.
6. Mechanical or electrical operating components or products integrated into a
fabricated fixture: ventilation and service access required or recommended by the
manufacturer, including panel size and location to permit easy lubrication,
adjustment or replacement of all moving parts.
K. All equipment and engineering rough-in plans sheet numbers are to match the contract
documents. All equipment item no.'s and engineer item no.'s located on the schedules
are to match the contract documents. All engineering requirements are to be updated as
required to accommodate the provided equipment and/or match the contract documents.
The Kitchen Contractor is responsible for the coordination of any MEP revisions to
accommodate the provided and proposed equipment. The kitchen contractor is
responsible for any costs associated with equipment substitution.
L. FDP drawings and schedules are not to be copied in anyway. Any replicated drawings
of FDP will be rejected.
1.10 SERVICE MANUAL
A. Three copies bound in 1½” hardback, three-ring binders (as many volumes as required
by scope of project) with same data as brochure at completion of installation (Refer to
“Submittal Data”). Provide separate service manuals as required for each independent
area within the project scope (Main Kitchen, Culinary, Concession, etc.).
B. Each Volume: section for maintenance of finish materials (e.g., stainless steel, plastic
laminates, FRP, Plexiglas, etc.).
C. Catalog specification sheet and/or manufacturer’s shop drawings.
D. Each Volume: index of items, manufacturer’s operating/maintenance information,

replacement parts data and price lists. Provide the name, title and address of personnel
at each respective manufacturer to be contacted for spare/replacement parts after
warranty period.
E. To the extent possible, provide two copies of manufacturer’s video instructional

cassettes for operating, maintenance and service of equipment.
F. Internally subdivide binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized
by equipment item number or manufacturer name, with tab titling clearly printed under
reinforced laminated plastic tabs.
G. Electronically submitted manuals are required to follow the same formatting

requirements listed above.
1.11 VERIFICATION AND COORDINATION OF PROJECT / DATA
A. Utilities Rough-in Drawings and Field-Services within four weeks after receipt of notice-
to-proceed, review Contract Drawings and Submittal Data for accuracy and
completeness and notify Architect of conflicts and proposed adjustments. Coordinate
work with other sub-contractors.
1. KEC to provide on-site field verification of all underground utilities prior to pouring
of concrete for capacity and location, coordinate with General Contractor. Submit
review to Architect and General Contractor.
2. KEC to provide on-site field verification of all other utility connections and locations,
coordinate with General Contractor. Submit review to Architect and General
Contractor.
B. ON-SITE INSPECTION REPORTS

1. Prior to concrete pour. (KEC to submit a copy of the report below to the Architect,
General Contractor and Foodservice Consultant within 24 hours of the inspection.)
2. Prior to delivery of equipment. (KEC to submit a copy of the report below to the
Architect, General Contractor, and Foodservice Consultant with-in 24 hours of the
inspection.)
C. Review critical systems/components for application, performance and capacity and

submit calculation worksheets with initial submission of brochure/rough-in drawings, with
all proposed adjustments noted, including:
1. Exhaust hood removal/supply air volume, velocity, static pressure, duct collar sizes
and locations.
2. Refrigeration Systems (compressor, condenser and evaporator) capacities/sizes,
quantities and refrigerant piping distances/sizes.
3. Exhaust Hood Fire Suppression Systems (nozzle locations, air handler and fuel
interlocks, piping/distance limitations).
4. Locations of Vacuum Breakers.
5. Conformance of Refrigerated Components/Equipment with HACCP Guidelines
(e.g., salad/sandwich pans, upright/open refrigerator cabinets, salad bars) with
HACCP Guidelines.
6. Gas, water line sizes and manifold configurations.
7. Diameter and length of flexible connector lines for fixed/movable gas appliances.
8. Fabricated Equipment load center panels (individual and total amperage
calculations and circuit balance).
9. ADA compliance of workstations, service positions, passageways, etc.
D. Ceiling mounted appliances/fixtures: verify and coordinate dimensions/location of

support framing/hangers with General Contractor. All material and installation below 12'-
0" aff.: Section 11 40 00.
E. Dimension Responsibility: obtain actual or guaranteed measurements for proper fit of

equipment. All dimensions indicated in Contract Documents are approximate and are
as accurate as can be determined at the time. Field-check all horizontal/vertical
measurements and conditions at the building prior to fabrication or delivery of equipment
and notify the Architect of all conflicts or deviation from the dimensions shown.
F. Checking Dimensions at Site: before ordering any materials or doing any work, verify all
measurements of the building and be responsible for the correctness of them. No extras
will be allowed for variations from drawings in existing conditions or for work performed
under this contract. Any discrepancies found shall be submitted to the Architect for
instructions before proceeding.
G. Scheduling to Fit Openings: should it become necessary to schedule construction of

walls or partitions prior to delivery of fixed equipment, the equipment must be fabricated
for passage through finished openings. Maintain close contact with the project and be
cognizant of all conditions, including vertical handling limitations within the building
(elevator cabs or openings, stairs, etc.) and possible hoisting requirements. Coordinate
all procedures with General Contractor and Project Team.
H. Refrigerated and Dry Storage Areas: verify and coordinate dimensions to accommodate
scheduled modular shelf sections. Notify Architect of variance between the Contract
Documents and actual conditions.
I. Color/Pattern Selections: submit selection samples of solid polymer products, plastic

laminate, paint or stain finishes and vinyl-coated surface material of equipment as
selected by Owner.
J. Movable Equipment Interface: rolling stock (pan racks, carts, dollies, dish/tray/rack
dispensers) required to fit through or into fixed equipment (roll-in refrigerators, counter
bodies, etc.) is to be reviewed and coordinated for compatibility at time initial of shop
drawing submittal. Indicate conflicts and proposed adjustments.
K. Relocation of Work: relocate or re-route work as required to coordinate related items

free of charge if no extra work is involved.
L. Contractor must provide an Itemized Schedule of Values that correlates with the
foodservice equipment item numbers for verification prior to submittals being submitted.
1.12 EQUIPMENT FURNISHED / INSTALLED BY OTHERS

A. Obtain and coordinate utility requirements of Owner-Furnished/Owner-Installed
(OF/OI) equipment with the building utilities and roughing-in drawings/provisions.
B. Coordinate physical data of OF/OI appliances or equipment and incorporate
information into Submittal Drawings. Vendor- or Purveyor-Furnished equipment (e.g.,
coffee/tea equipment): same as OF/OI.
1.13 WORK INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED BY OTHERS

A. Coordinate delivery/installation schedule of Owner-Furnished/Contractor-Installed
(OF/CI) equipment with Owner not less than ninety (90) days before equipment
requirement.
B. Obtain and coordinate utility requirements of OF/CI equipment with the building utilities
and roughing-in drawings/provisions.
C. Receive at job-site and fully incorporate into installation procedures as if furnished
under this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRICATED FIXTURES MATERIAL / COMPONENTS
A. Stainless steel sheets or shapes: 18-8, Type 302, polished to 180 grit No. 4 finish.
1. Stainless steel joints and seams: heli-arc welded, free of pits and flaws, ground
smooth and polished to No. 4 finish.
2. The “grain” direction of horizontal stainless-steel surfaces: longitudinal, including
the splashback. The polishing procedure at right-angle corners of fixtures shall
provide a mitered appearance.
B. Galvanized Iron Sheets: Armco copper bearing Zinc Grip or Zinc Grip/Paint Grip.
1. Galvanized iron joints and seams: arc-welded, free of pits and flaws and ground
smooth.
2. Galvanized sheets or shapes: washed with mineral spirits and painted with
Rustoleum gray semi-gloss enamel.
C. Sound Deadening: Schnee Butyl Sealant ½” wide rope positioned continuously between
all frame-members or contact material and underside of stainless-steel surface (sinks,
table tops, food wells, overshelves and undershelves). Tighten stud-bolts for maximum
compression of sealant and trim excess.
D. Plastic Laminates: color/pattern selected by Architect, in 1/16” thickness for flat

surfaces: 1/32” thickness for radiused surfaces. Plastic laminates and adhesives must
be N.S.F. approved (Standard No. 35).
E. Solid Polymer products: color/pattern/material as selected by Architect in thickness as

specified. Solid Polymer and adhesives must be N.S.F. approved (Standard No. 51).
F. Casters.
1. Fabricated fixtures with “Open Base” construction: Jarvis and Jarvis Model No.
5-405-113P-NSF swivel casters with grease seals on forks and wheels; Zerk
fitting in swivel; two casters: Model No. E-75 Vertilock brakes. All casters: B-7”
rolling bumpers with stainless steel top discs.
G. Cutting Boards: 1/2” thick Read Products, Inc. “Richlite” cutting board, size as indicated.
H. Identification Plates, Labels, Tags:

1. Prohibited Information: names of suppliers, fabricators and contractors.
2. NSF Labels: required on all pieces of equipment.
3. Required Information: function or purpose of controls such as display light
switches, food warmer controls, etc.
4. Plate Construction: engraved phenolic plastic, secured to equipment with epoxy
cement or stainless-steel screws. Furnish samples.
2.2 PLUMBING / MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Plumbing Fittings and Components: furnished under this Section as follows:

Note: Fitting and components described in Items 1, 2, 3,4 and 5 are furnished loose
for installation by Division 22.
1. Control valves, appliance pressure regulators for water, gas and steam, and
vacuum breakers: wherever required on Foodservice Equipment (chrome-plated
where exposed).
2. Faucets and drains without connected overflows (unless otherwise indicated) for
all sinks.
3. Specialty Foodservice water-fill faucets or hose assemblies indicated in
drawings/specifications.
4. Wade Model No. W-10 Shock-Stop shock absorbers for all Foodservice Equipment
with quick-opening or solenoid-operated water valves.
5. Dormont Stainless Steel Water Quick Disconnect hose, diameter per water
connection size requirements, with SafetyQuick safety fitting, w/coiled restraining
device, full port ball valve, antimicrobial coating, lifetime warranty.
6. Extensions of indirect waste fittings to open-sight floor sink or floor drains from
sinks, under bar equipment, and food-holding components of serving counters
(e.g. cold pans, hot food wells, refrigerator/freezer coils not equipped with
condensate evaporators) furnished and installed by Division 22. Drains: painted
with aluminum paint where exposed, type “K” copper where concealed.
7. Piping brackets and supports beneath/within fabricated equipment.
8. Closed Base Bodies: removable 18-gauge stainless steel closure panel at
plumbing penetrations, under top.
9. Control valves on Open Base fixtures: mounted on 14-gauge stainless steel
gusset-shaped panel with 3½” setback from counter top edge/rim to face of control
handle.
10. Fill hose/faucet at support pedestals or Closed Base Body: installed in a 15” x 18”
x 5” deep recessed mounting panel. Panel bottom: sloped on a 60o angle, with
3/8” stainless steel rod hanger-bracket for hose.
11. In-line water filter system:
a. Everpure System filters for coffee/tea brewers, icemakers, water
chillers, convection steamers and beverage systems. Sized per
manufacturer recommendation.
B. Gas-Heated Equipment Fittings and Components: furnished under this Section as

follows:
1. Fixed Equipment: Dormont MFG brand “KITCF” Series gas hose kit with Quick
Disconnect fitting at appliance. Approved equal: T&S Brass. Diameter per fuel
volume/connection size requirements. Gas valve diameter size per fuel
volume/connection size requirements.
a. Restraining device: heavy duty steel cable, fastened to equipment and
walls, 3” to 6” shorter than equipment connector length.
C. Final Plumbing Connections Provisions.

1. Fabricated equipment containing components, fittings and/or devices indicated on
Foodservice Connection Drawings to be connected to the building systems: each
component, fitting or group thereof pre-piped to a utility compartment for final
connection by Division 22. Refer to drawings for capacities.
2. Field-assembled equipment (e.g., prefabricated walk-in refrigerator/freezers,
exhaust hoods, warewash machines, convection ovens, etc.): plumbing
components completely interconnected under this Section for final connection
arrangements indicated on Utility Connection Drawings.
3. All plumbing final connection points of equipment shall be tagged, indicating:
a. Item number.
b. Name of devices or components.
c. Type of utility (water, gas, steam, drain, chilled water).
D. Ducts and Vents.

1. Exhaust hoods which are furred-in to ceiling: 2” high duct collar for final connection
to duct system.
2. Warewash machines equipped with integral vent cowls or extended hoods:
furnished with 18-gauge stainless steel seamless duct risers to 6” above finish
ceiling for final connection. The duct: trimmed at ceiling with 16-gauge stainless
steel angle flange with all corners welded.
2.3 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS
A. Install complete with all refrigerant, oil, dials, dehydrators, gauges, controls required for
the proper operation of the system.
B. Self-contained or factory-installed compressors: check and adjust to proper operating

temperature prescribed by FDA/HACCP.
2.4 PLUMBING TRIM
A. Faucets: furnished for all sinks or equipment requiring open water supply.
B. Fill Faucets: furnished for appliances requiring open water supply.
C. Drain Fittings: furnished for all sinks or equipment requiring removal of liquids. Install
specified chrome-plated or stainless-steel fittings in die-stamped openings with washers
and locknuts. Solder may be used as a sealer but shall not be applied to the top surface
of the drain fittings.
2.5 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All electrical systems, components and accessories within the work of this Section:
certified to be in accordance with NEC 70.
B. Electrical Fittings and Components: furnished under this Section as follows. Coordinate
foodservice equipment loads, voltage and phase with building system and confirm any
existing or OF/OI equipment requirements.
C. Cord and Caps.

1. Coordinate all Foodservice Equipment cord/caps with related receptacles.
2. All 120 volt “plug-in” equipment shall have Type SO or SJO cord and plug with
ground wire fastened to frame/body of item.
3. Cord lengths for fixed equipment: adjusted to eliminate loose-hanging excess.
4. All non-fixed plug-in “buy-out” equipment: Hubbell configuration, ratings as
required.
5. All mobile electrical support equipment (heated cabinets, dish carts, etc.) and
counter appliances mounted on mobile stands (mixers, food cutters, toasters,
coffee makers, microwave ovens, etc.): 8’-0” cord length with cord-hanger strap
secured to rear of equipment or mobile stand.
D. Switches and Controls.

1. Each motor-driven appliance or electrically heated unit: equipped with control
switch or starter per Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. with low-voltage and overload
protection.
2. Disposer controls recess-mounted in wall: external fittings and accessories
removed from enclosure and furnished with 16-gauge stainless steel perimeter
angle flange with welded corners. Install control at 4’-0” aff to bottom of enclosure.
3. Disposer controls recess-mounted in counter-splash risers: external fittings and

accessories removed from NEMA 4 enclosure and furnished with 16-gauge
stainless steel perimeter angle flange with welded corners. Install control at 3’-0”
aff to bottom of enclosure. Provide panel with 60” long coil of Seal-Tite electrical
conduit, from bottom of control panel for final field connections under Division 26.
4. Equipment which is not provided with built-in circuit breakers or fused terminal
block and is indicated on Utility Connections Drawings to be directly connected to
the building electrical system: a NEMA 4 stainless steel disconnect switch
furnished and installed by Division 26.
5. All remote manual starters, disconnect switches, magnetic contactors or starters
and push-button stations: NEMA Type 4 enclosure; NEMA Type 1 enclosure only
when installed in a Closed Base Body.
E. Heating Elements.
1. Electrically heated equipment: thermostatic controls.
2. Water heating equipment: equipped with positive low water shut-off.
F. Receptacles and Switches.

1. Receptacles installed in vertical panels of support pedestals or Closed Base
Bodies: installed in 12” x 8½” x 3” deep recessed mounting panel sloped on 60o
angle and turned up to top of opening.
2. Pre-wire receptacles in closed base fixtures to a junction box installed within 6”
from bottom of utility or compressor compartments.
3. Receptacles mounted on Open Base fixtures: installed on 12” x 10½” x 4½” deep
14-gauge stainless steel panel with returned ends and sloping recess. Secure
panel to underframe of fixture top.
4. Pre-wire receptacles on open base fixtures to a junction box secured to a leg or
mounted on underside of lower shelf. Vertical runs of wiring: made in rigid conduit
or within the tubular leg.
5. Receptacles installed in/on-fabricated equipment: Hubbell, Inc. assemblies
horizontally mounted in a metal box with stainless steel cover plate.
6. Switches installed in/on-fabricated equipment: Hubbell, Inc. with metal box and
stainless-steel cover plate. Switches: pre-wired to the controlled device and to a
junction box installed within 6” from bottom of utility or compressor compartment.
All refrigeration system switches: installed within the compressor compartment
near the door opening.
7. Load centers installed in/on fabricated equipment to have all fixture components
pre-wired to load center with balanced phase loading. Load center: ready for final
connection by Division 26 and flush-mounted within utility compartment rear panel,
set back 8” from access door. All breaker/device information: typewritten on circuit
schedule in load center door (number corresponding breaker/device) with
enclosed schematic wiring diagram of fixture components.
8. All receptacles to be pre-wired to cord and plug assembly and routed through
overshelf post at all island equipment locations, unless specified otherwise.
G. Light Fixtures.
1. Light fixtures with lamps installed in/on fabricated or field-assembled equipment:

pre-wired to a junction box for final connection (continuous-run fixtures when
indicated).
2. LED Display Light: install light fixtures full-length of Display Stand and Serving
Shelf with stud bolts and pre-wire through support posts to an apron-mounted
switch.
3. Heat Lamps: installed to underside of serving shelf assemblies. When multiple
24” heat lamps are specified, provide maximum length heat lamp chassis. Install
all switches remote from lamps.
4. Cold Storage Light Fixtures: Furnished by Section 11 40 00 and installed by Div.
26. All electrical wiring and conduit provided by Div. 26. electrically connected
through the Vapor Proof light fixture base connection, located on the interior door
header. Door frame wiring stubs out top of panels 8” in flexible conduit for final
connection by electrical contractor. All horizontal conduit: above ceiling panels.
Install plastic sleeve through ceiling panels for electrical conduit. Seal sleeved
penetrations airtight at both sides of panel. All penetrations to be sealed by
Kitchen Equipment Contractor. All Cold Storage light fixtures to be LED.
H. Final Electrical Connection Provisions.

1. Fabricated equipment containing electrically operated components or fittings
indicated on Utility Connections Drawings: direct-connected, with each
component, fitting or group pre-wired to a junction box for final connection by
Division 26. Refer to drawings for circuit loading.
2. Fabricated equipment containing electrically operated components and/or
devices indicated: circuit-breaker load center with each component or device
pre-wired to a separate circuit breaker for balanced phase loading and single
final connection by Division 26.
3. Field-assembled equipment (e.g., prefabricated cold storage assemblies,
exhaust hoods, warewash machines, etc.) shall have electrical components
completely interconnected in this Section for final connection arrangements as
indicated on Utility Connection Drawings by Division 26.
4. Pre-wire the following groups of cold storage assembly electrical devices to a
top-mounted junction box for final connection by Division 26 per compartment
grouping (unless otherwise indicated).
a. Light fixtures and switches; heated pressure-relief vent.
b. Door/jamb heaters.
c. Evaporator fans, defrost elements, and drain line heaters.
5. All electrical final connection points of equipment shall be tagged, indicating:
a. Item number.
b. Name of devices on circuit.
c. Total electrical load.
d. Voltage and phase.
I. Lamps: in all Foodservice Equipment containing light fixtures. Refrigerator or heated

cabinets: All exposed LED lamps above or within a food zone: Shat-R-Shield lamps or
standard lamps, sleeved with end caps.
2.6 CUSTOM - FABRICATED / ASSEMBLED UNITS
A. Mechanical or electrical operating components or products integrated into a fabricated

fixture: ventilation and service access required or recommended by the manufacturer.
The service access panel(s) size and placement is to permit easy lubrication, adjustment
or replacement of all moving parts and is to be indicated on fabrication shop drawings.
2.7 BAKER TABLE TOPS (UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE)
A. 14-gauge 304 S/S top with 2” square turn down at front, 6” high enclosed splash at three
(3) sides and rear. Brace same as “Counter/Table tops”.
B. 1¼” x 6” high integral coved riser at rear and ends unless indicated otherwise on
drawings.
C. 16-gauge stainless steel flour-trough at free long sides, secured to underside of top.
Trough: 3” diameter with eased edges/corners.
2.8 COUNTER / TABLE TOPS
A. 14-gauge stainless steel; all free edges turned down 2” with ¾” tight hem at bottom. Free
corners: rounded on ¾” radius.
B. Marine edges: turned up ½” on 45º angle and turned down 2” with ¾” tight hem at
bottom.
C. Cafeteria serving counter tops at hot food stations: full-length x 3½” x ½” high raised rail
at (customer’s) front side with 45º integral turndown to counter surface.
D. Tops abutting high fixtures or walls: cove up specified height and slope back 1½” at top
on 45º angle; 2½” slope where piping occurs. Turn down 1” at rear of splash and close
ends to bottom of top turndown. Secure splash turndown to wall with 4” long 14-gauge
stainless steel “Z” clip anchored to wall, 36” o.c.
E. Freestanding tables and all serving counter splash-risers: turned back on 90º angle with
1” turndown at rear.
F. Brace tops with rigid-welded 1½” x 1½” x 1/8” galvanized steel angle frame at perimeter
with cross bracing 2’-0” o.c. maximum. Provide 4” x 4” x 12-gauge stainless steel
triangular pads where leg gusset welds to frame. Paint entire frame with Rustoleum gray
semi-gloss enamel. Angle frames: secured to underside of top surfaces with ¼” studs
welded 9” o.c. maximum with chrome-plated washer, lock washer and capnut. Studs:
such length that cap nuts can be made-up tight, bringing top down snugly on angle frame
eliminating all vibrations or “oil-canning”.
G. Tops: 1½” overhang at free sides of underframe or Closed Base Body.
H. Mockett Model No. SG5-26 chrome-plated/plastic grommet assembly or integrally

welded stainless-steel flange or inverted gusset where service utilities or support posts
penetrate or abut tops, ground and polished to match top. When conditions permit,
provide a 1” x 1½” rectangular opening in the backsplash for service utilities in lieu of
piercing the horizontal surface. Install stainless steel split-tubing at raw-edge of opening.
I. Extend underbracing members to wall, turn down 6” and anchor to wall when specified
to be mounted on leg/bracket assembly.
J. All openings in tops: 3/16” high raised die-formed edges.
K. All top openings for pans or inserts: 20-gauge stainless steel, watertight liners, 8½”
deep, secured to underside of counter top.
L. All “built-in” and “drop-in” counter equipment/appliances: with framing members at

perimeter of opening.
M. Scrap Container: 18-gauge stainless steel construction 6½” x 6½” x 21¾” long. Top of
container: 5/8” wide x ¼” high full perimeter flange with ¼” diameter stainless steel rod
bail handle. Interior vertical corners coved on ½” radius. Counter top: fitted with 6¾”
square die-stamped opening.
2.9 COLD PANS
A. 14-gauge stainless steel with ¾” coved interior welded integrally to counter top with 3/16”
raised edge at perimeter of opening. Depth of Cold Pan: NSF 7 compliance.
B. Slope bottom to required quantity of Component Hardware Model No. E16-4021 drain
fittings at 48” o.c. maximum. Sleeve through insulation at drain fittings and extend
common drain line into utility compartment for indirect waste connection.
C. ½” o.d. copper refrigerant lines in serpentine patter, 1½” o.c. flattened for maximum
contact. Secure tubing to underside of ¼” thick aluminum “distribution plate” installed
tight to underside of frost plate area and apply cold-conductive mastic to all surfaces.
D. Component Hardware Model No. E16-4021 drain fittings at 48” o.c. maximum, sleeved
through insulation with common drain line extended into utility compartment.
E. Heat Cable: low-wattage, full-perimeter, below counter top at edge of depression.

Secure with “Z” clips, 9” o.c. and interwire with compressor switch for simultaneous
operation.
F. Enclose sides and bottom of pans with airtight 18-gauge galvanized jacket and pack with
2” fiberglass insulation set in mastic.
G. Compressor: size as indicated or required to accommodate size of cold pan. Locate

compressor in compressor compartment below unit or as indicated on drawings.
H. Sectional 16-gauge stainless steel perforated false bottom (¼” holes, @ ¾” o.c.). Turn
down 1½” all sides, weld corners and provide finger rings. False bottom sections: 24”
long maximum.
2.10 DRAWERS
A. Liners: Component Hardware Model No. S80-2020 (20” x 20”), easily removable with
drawer in fully extended position.
B. Drawer Frame: 16-gauge stainless steel flanged out at top. Weld the frame to double-
paneled 16-gauge stainless steel drawer front with full-length recessed pull at top (similar
profile as Garcy Model No. R-1060) with closed ends.
C. Channel-formed horizontal pull: ¾” turndown at front and ends with ½” tight hem. Front
edge of pull: flush with face of drawer. Recess behind pull: sloped up on 60o angle,
terminating 1” below bottom edge of pull.
D. Mount drawer frame on Component Hardware Model No. S52-2020 self-closing slides,
with Delrin bearings, full-depth of fixture. Secure slides to body or brackets to eliminate
lateral movement in extended position. Refrigerator drawers: Component Hardware
Model No. S52-2024 stainless steel slides with Delrin bearings.
E. Drawer enclosure in an Open Base Fixture: 18-gauge stainless steel flanged out at top
for attachment to underside of table top. Lower edge of enclosure is flanged in toward
open bottom. Mount drawer slides to enclosure and brace as required. Face of
enclosure is to be same length and height of drawer face. Provide ¾” deep offset in front
of enclosure and 2½” from underside of table top for flush-fitting appearance. Drawer
enclosure on freestanding fixture: full-depth of table framing.
F. Drawer enclosure in a Closed Base Fixture: completely partitioned from adjoining area.
Drawer front: flush-fitting with face of body.
G. Drawer Liners other than tool/utility: Bread Drawer: Component Hardware Model No.
S83-2020; Refrigerated Drawer: Component Hardware Model No. S81-1520 stainless
steel liner.
H. Cash Drawer: integral stainless-steel body, 3” deep.
2.11 FOOD WELLS (UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE)
A. Food Warmer Controls: remote-mounted in sloping recessed apron panel. Control

panel is recessed 2½” from bodyline at top of 60o slope, 1” at lower edge. Terminate
slope angle 2½” below counter top. Mount panel on concealed piano hinge at bottom
edge; secure with screws at upper corners.
B. Manifold all warmer drains and extend to within utility compartment for indirect waste
connection. Install valve in drain line and extend handle through compartment door.
C. Removable 18-gauge stainless steel closure panel at underside of warmers.
D. 14-gauge stainless steel plate/utensil shelf full-length of hot food station unless noted
otherwise: 10” below counter top x 9” deep, with rear panel coved up to underside of
counter top; end panels turned up square. Front of shelf: turned down 1½” and returned
under for closure panel attachment.
E. Food wells: Hatco Model No. HWBIBRT-FULD insulated food warmer (1200 watts, 208
volts, single phase) secured to underside of 12” x 20” die-stamped counter top openings
with thermal breaker mastic rope applied at perimeter of food well flange.
F. Soup Warmers: Hatco Model No. HWB-11QTD soup warmer secured to underside of
11” diameter die stamped counter top opening with thermal breaker mastic rope applied
at perimeter of soup well flange. Maximum allowable temperature of counter top at
contact surface: 120oF. Each warmer: equipped with one 11-quart stainless steel round
insert and slotted cover.
G. When specified: 5/8” deep recess in counter top full-length of pan-opening or as shown,
with equal-length removable ¾” thick Read Products “PolyLite” cutting board sections,
42” long maximum. Recess and board: spaced 2” from front edge of pan opening and
extended to leading edge of counter top.
2.12 SINKS
A. 14-gauge stainless steel; all interior corners (horizontal/vertical) coved on ¾” radius. 1½”
wide double-walled partitions with flat tops between compartments.
B. Continuous exterior panels of multiple-compartment sinks: 14-gauge stainless steel filler

panel welded, ground and polished between compartments.
C. Sinks (with overflow): score and slope sink bottom ½” to die-stamped opening fitted with
Fisher 22306 twist waste valve 3 1/2" x 2" with overflow and tailpiece. 14-gauge stainless
steel bracket: welded to sink bottom for drain stem with 1½” handle clearance.
D. Where sinks are installed in fixture with Closed Base Body, provide a Fisher 22306 twist
waste valve 3 1/2" x 2" with overflow and tailpiece. (Sinks with dimension larger than 20”
x 20” in Closed Base Body will not have overflow fitting.) 14-gauge stainless steel
bracket: welded to sink bottom with T & S Model No. BL-4740-1 guide bushing. Install
on shortened drain stem, one T & S Model No. BL-4710-1 remote control stem assembly
only (length as required) with Model No. 113-L universal joint and white blank button.
Set drain control handle in Cambro Model PSB-6 bowl with bottom omitted (dress raw
edge) to permit passage of drain handle. Secure bowl in utility compartment door or
body panel with clear silicone.
E. When single-hole deck-mounted faucets are specified, install overflow fitting in sidewall
of sink compartment and provide ell-fitting in connecting tubing.
F. Flush Covers when specified: 1/2” thick Read Products, Inc. “Richlite” cutting board, size
as indicated. Support clips: ¼” stainless steel rod 2” long, formed at 45º with two ¾” leg
ends (¼” long threaded ends). Insert rod-clips through tight-clearance holes in sink, seal
watertight and secure with stainless steel acorn-nuts or tack-weld at exterior of sink wall.
Set support clips ½” below top. Provide 14-gauge stainless steel channel or angle
support frame to store covers when not in use. Cover holder: adjacent to sink
compartment, below counter top or under drawer assembly.
2.13 TRAYSLIDES (UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)
A. Trayslides: 12” wide, solid 16-gauge stainless steel turned up 2” at rear behind counter
top turndown; turned down 4” at front and free ends, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Three ¼” high die-formed inverted “vee” ridges at 4” o.c., 2” from leading edge,
terminating 2” from ends of trayslide with tapered ridge-ends.
C. Ridges formed on radius: equal-length segments with 2” separation between chords.
D. Secure trayslides to counter-top/body frame, same as “Counter Tops.” Enclose exposed

underside of trayslide with 18-gauge stainless steel.
E. When indicated, project trayslides 2” beyond serving counter top and return the full-width
of serving counter at free ends.
F. All trayslides to be provided and mounted per ADA requirements.
2.14 DISHTABLES
A. Soiled/clean dishtable: 14-gauge stainless steel; free edges coved up 3” with 1½”
diameter rolled rim and bullnosed corners.
B. Edge of dishtables next to high fixtures or walls: coved up 10” and sloped back 1½” on
45º angle; 2½” slope where piping occurs. Turn down 1” at rear of splash and secure to
wall with 4” long 14-gauge stainless steel “Z” clips anchored to wall, @ 36” o.c.
C. Exposed rear splash: 16-gauge stainless steel finish panel from top of splash to bottom
edge of rolled rim with welded vertical joint at end. Secure panel with concealed
attachment and install bracing 24” o.c.
D. Cove all interior corners (horizontal/vertical) on ¾” radius and slope tables 1/8” per foot
to sinks, scuppers or warewash machines, maintaining level crown/splash.
E. Brace dishtables with 1” x 4” 12-gauge stainless steel channels down centerline of top
and between each pair of legs, with closed ends. Bracing: secured to underside of
dishtable with ¼” studs welded 6” o.c. maximum, with chrome-plated washer, lock
washer and cap nut. Studs: such length that the cap nuts can be made up tight, bringing
the dishtable down on the channel-members, eliminating all vibration and “oil-canning.”
F. Integrally welded stainless steel flange or inverted gusset where service utilities or
support posts penetrate or abut tops; ground and polished to match top.
G. Hose Bibb: Chicago Model No. 305VBRCF; mounted on 12-gauge stainless steel flange
or inverted gusset bracket with 3/8” stainless steel rod hose hanger.
H. Extend underbracing members to wall, turn down 6” and anchor to wall when specified
to be mounted on leg/bracket assembly.
I. Paper-Drop Opening: 9” square with 4” integral chute having hemmed bottom edge.
Slope dishtable top 1” toward opening, forming a 16” square tapered deposit point.
J. Accessible Tray-Drop Opening: 10” x 18” with integral 16-gauge stainless steel
seamless chute sloped on 45º angle toward center of mobile soak sink position.
2.15 DISH / TRAY DEPOSIT ASSEMBLY
A. 14-gauge stainless steel deposit shelf, size as indicated. Extend shelf through opening,
flush with public side of partition, height as required by local code authorities. Turn shelf
down 1” at front with ¾” return at bottom (either scribed into partition or forming reveal).
Shelf: 1” square turndown at rear long side, integral with conveyor slider pan, tray-
accumulator or dishtable. Extend rear/end splash to align with head of deposit station
opening. Modify rolled rim at the operator’s side of the tray drop window to have a 3"
rolled rim.
B. 18-gauge stainless steel window frame with perimeter flange channel-formed 1” x ¾” at

both sides of wall. Weld all corners of frame and install with concealed attachment.
Align/abut one jamb of frame with end splash of conveyor slider pan or dishtable
whenever adjacent.
2.16 UTENSIL - WASH COUNTERS
A. 14-gauge stainless steel; all free edges coved up 3” with 1½” diameter rolled rim and
bullnosed corners.
B. Edges of utensil-wash counters next to high fixtures or walls: coved up 10” and sloped
back 1½” on 45º angle; 2½” slope where piping occurs. Turn down 1” at rear of splash
and secure back splash to wall with 4” long 14-gauge stainless steel “Z” clip anchored
to wall @ 36” o.c. Vacuum breaker pockets: 4” long square turnback sections, aligned
with slope breakline.
C. Exposed Rear Splash: 16-gauge stainless steel finished panel from top of splash to
bottom edge of rolled rim with welded vertical joint at end of splash and ½” turnback at
bottom of panel. Secure panel with concealed attachment and install bracing 24” o.c.
D. Cove all interior corners (horizontal/vertical) on ¾” radius and slope tables 1/8” per foot,
maintaining level crown.
E. Brace utensil-wash counters with 1” x 4” 12-gauge stainless steel channels down

centerline of top and between each pair of legs, with closed ends. Bracing: secured
to underside of dishtable with ¼” studs welded 6” o.c. maximum, with chrome-plated
washer, lock washer and cap nut. Studs: such length that the cap nuts can be made
up tight, bringing the dishtable down on the channel-members, eliminating all vibration
and “oil-canning.”
F. Integrally welded stainless-steel flange or inverted gusset where service utilities or

support posts penetrate or abut tops: ground and polished to match top.
G. Extend underbracing members to wall, turn down 6” and anchor to wall when specified
to be mounted on a leg/bracket assembly.
H. Hose Bibb: Chicago Model No. 305VBRCF; mounted on 12-gauge stainless steel
flange or inverted gusset bracket with 3/8” stainless steel rod hose-hanger.
2.17 DOORS
A. 18-gauge x 1” stainless steel double pan-formed welded construction, insulated with 1”

thick polyurethane boards. Seal perimeter joint of pans. Offset lower horizontal framing
member of Closed Base Body to align flush access door with bottom of Body.
B. Channel-formed full-length horizontal recessed pull: ¾” turndown at front and ends with
½” tight hem. Front edge of pull: flush with face of door. Recess behind pull: sloped
up on 60o angle and terminated 1” below bottom edge of pull.
C. Door Hardware:
1. Two Component Hardware Model No. M75-1002 stainless steel hinges (notch
door/jamb at hinge location).
2. Component Hardware Model No. 35-2000 concealed Magnetic Catch.
3. Component Hardware Model No. D30-4780 lock in upper free corner of door.
D. Louvered opening: cutout opening size as indicated, turn in 1” and weld. All corners:
ground and polished.
1. Full-height 18-gauge stainless steel louver with 1” vanes at 45º, ½” spacing.
Perimeter channel-formed frame: 1½” x 1”.
2. 45º x 1” x ½” x opening width plus ½” 18-gauge stainless steel louver.
3. Tack weld tab of louver flange to back panel of door.
E. Drain handle opening: 6” diameter hole through double pan to accommodate Cambro
Model No. PSB-6 Bowl.
1. Secure bowl to door panel with clear silicone.
2. Omit bottom of bowl. Dress raw edges of opening for passage of drain handle.
3. Exposed insulation at penetration of door pan: painted black.
F. Sliding Doors: fabricate same as Paragraph “A.”

1. Aluminum Sliding Door Track: Component Hardware Model No. B57-0000 Series,
length as required. Secure to angle frame at top of underside.
2. Front/rear door sheaves: stainless steel ¾” side mounted door hangers; two (2)
required per door.
3. Recessed Vertical Pull at Upper Corner of Door: Component Hardware Model No.
P63-1012.
4. By-Passing Door Guides secured to bottom shelf: Component Hardware Model
No. B62-1093.
5. Door Stop at bottom edge of door: Component Hardware Model No. B60-1086.
G. Offset lower horizontal framing member of Closed Base Body/utility compressor

compartment to align door flush with bottom of Body.
2.18 CLOSED BASE BODIES
A. Frame: rigid-welded 1½” x 1½” x 1/8” galvanized steel angle forming a continuous
structure around the top and bottom perimeters of the fixture, a post at each corner,
studs spaced 48” o.c. maximum. Top of frame is cross-braced with 1½” angles, 2’-0”
o.c. maximum.
B. 18-gauge stainless steel panels and trim with concealed attachment. All seams: welded,
ground and polished.
C. Exposed Vertical Corners: rounded on ¾” radius. Closed Base Bodies adjacent to walls
or fixtures: square corners.
D. Vertical and horizontal channel members at shelf interior or drawer enclosures, such as
corners and center mullions: closed and sealed
E. Closed Base Bodies set on finished masonry platforms: closed and caulked at underside
of equipment overhang and bolted to platform. Body overhang of platform: 1” at free
ends 2” at front and exposed rear sides.
F. Closed Base Bodies not set on platform: Component Hardware Model No. A54-2-6, 6”
legs spaced 5’-0” o.c. maximum.
2.19 COMPRESSOR COMPARTMENTS
A. Same material as Closed Base Bodies with back and end partitions; omit bottoms only.
B. 10-gauge steel slide out support: channel frame on full extension slides with 125 lb.
minimum capacity secured to fixture frame with anti-vibration mountings for maximum
sound deadening. Closed Base Body on solid platform: front-to-back slide out support
channels set 4” above bottom for air circulation.
C. Access Door: 18-gauge stainless steel double-pan type with channel formed horizontal
recessed pull full length of top (similar profile as Garcy Model No. R-1060) with closed
ends. Channel-formed horizontal pull: ¾” turndown at front and face of door. Recess
behind pull slopes up on 60o angle, terminating 1” below bottom edge of pull. Offset
lower horizontal framing member of Closed Base Body to align flush access door with
bottom of body. Door hardware: two Component Hardware Model No. M75-1002
stainless steel hinges (notch door/jamb at hinge locations) and Component Hardware
Model No. 35-2000 concealed magnetic catch.
D. Access Doors Louver: full-height, with 1½” x 1” x 18-gauge stainless steel channel-
formed frame with welded corners. 18-gauge stainless steel louver. Submit sample of
design for approval.
2.20 UTILITY COMPARTMENTS
A. Closed Base Bodies or Pedestal Supports: fitted with utility compartments wherever
piping or wiring is required in/on the fixture.
B. Same material as Closed Base Bodies with full-height back and end partitions. Omit
bottoms except at hose-reel locations.
C. Access Doors: 18-gauge stainless steel double-pan type with channel formed horizontal
recessed pull full-length of top (similar profile to Garcy Model No. R-1060) with closed
ends. Channel-formed horizontal pull: ¾” turn down at front of door, recess behind pull
slopes up on 60o angle, terminating 1” below bottom edge of pull. Offset the lower
horizontal framing member of the Closed Base Fixture to permit flush alignment of door
with face and bottom edge of body. Door hardware: two Component Hardware Model
No. M75-1002 stainless steel hinges (notch door/jamb at hinge locations) and one
Component Hardware Model No. 35-2000 concealed magnetic catch.
D. No shelves of Closed Base Fixtures are to be penetrated.
2.21 UTENSIL RACKS
A. Rack: ¼” x 2” 300 series stainless steel flat bar with No. 4 finish, fully welded and formed
to match shape shown on drawings. Lowest band: 7-6 aff, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Ceiling Mount Supports: 1-5/8” diameter 16-gauge stainless steel tubing from band to
18” above ceiling. Anti-sway bracing above ceiling: 1½” unistrut members. Tubing
penetrations at ceiling: Component Hardware Model No. A16-0206 stainless steel
gussets.
C. Table Mount Supports: 1-5/8” diameter 16-gauge stainless steel tubing extended thru
counter top. Secure to closed base framing or cross rail/undershelf on open base fixture.
Tubing penetrations of counter tops: integrally welded stainless-steel inverted gusset.
D. Utensil Rack Hooks: Component Hardware Model No. J77-4401 stainless steel hooks
spaced 8” o.c. maximum.
E. Electrical Receptacle: NEMA No. 5-20-R or as noted. Mount in fully welded 3½” x 5½”
x 3” 14-gauge stainless steel enclosure with ½” radius corners. Stainless steel cover
plate to fit specified receptacle. Pre-wire thru tubular support for final connection above
ceiling by Division 26.
2.22 CASHIER / SERVING COUNTERS
A. Exterior Body Panels when specified: ¾” thick marine grade hardwood plywood with
plastic laminate or solid polymer in Architect’s selection of color/pattern at all exposed
surfaces; backing sheet where concealed.
B. Position, size and finish horizontal or vertical reveal as directed by Architect.
C. Secure panels to counter body framing in concealed manner. Install removable panels
with “Z” clips overlapping body framing members.
D. Hinged doors in exterior body panel(s): Grass Model No. 1200VZ or 1200VZ8 self-
closing hinges. Three (3) required per door; Grass Model No. G/HRZ base plate at each
hinge; Ives Model No. TM820 concealed push latch at each door. Confirm Model No.
and provide samples with submittal.
E. Cashier counter to have 16-gauge s/s intermediate shelf, turned down 1 1/2" with tight
hem at front. Cove up 2" at rear and sides. Brace undershelf with 1" x 4" 14-gauge
stainless steel channel at longitudinal centerline. Provide outlet for power/data within
body located above intermediate shelf. Provide cash drawer inserts per district
standards.
2.23 OPEN BASE STRUCTURES
A. 1-5/8” o.d. x 16-gauge seamless stainless-steel tubing legs beveled at bottom. 1¼” o.d.
crossrails fully-welded (360o smooth and polished) to legs at 10” aff, o.c.
B. Top of Leg: inserted in Component Hardware Model No. A20-0206 gusset fully welded
to table frame or sink bottom.
C. Bullet Foot: Component Hardware Model No. A10-0851.
D. Freestanding fixtures requiring utility connections: Component Hardware Model No.

A10-0854 flanged feet at the fixture corners, anchored to floor with non-corrosive bolts.
E. Table Bases: maximum leg spacing of 6’-0” o.c.; dishtable and utensil wash counter
bases at 5’-0” o.c.
F. Open Base equipment specified to be supported by brackets at the rear side only (not
completely cantilevered): tubular legs at front side only with Component Hardware
Model No. A10-0854 flanged feet anchored to floor with non-corrosive bolts. Front-to-
back crossrail: fitted into Component Hardware Model No. A20-0406 circular gusset
secured to wall with non-corrosive bolts.
2.24 UNDERSHELVES
A. Open Base Structures: 16-gauge stainless steel turned down 1½” with tight hem at
bottom. Notch all corners to fit tubular legs and weld from underside to completely fill
gap; grind and polish. Cove up 2” at rear or ends adjacent to wall, columns, refrigerators,
etc. The turn up at freestanding fixtures is to be hemmed tight to bottom of turndown.
Brace undershelf with 1” x 4” 14-gauge stainless steel channel at longitudinal centerline
and at each intermediate pair of legs.
B. Open Base Structure specified to be supported by brackets at rear side only (not
completely cantilevered): 16-gauge stainless steel turned down 1 ½” at free sides with
tight hem at bottom edge. Notch all corners to fit tubular legs as required and weld from
underside to completely fill gap; grind and polish. Cove up 2” at rear ends, as indicated.
Fill gap at front to back rail, grind and polish. Brace undershelf with 1” x 4” x 1” 14-gauge
stainless steel channel at longitudinal centerline between front to back rails.
C. Closed Base Fixtures: 16-gauge stainless steel turned down 1½” at front. Front edge
of bottom shelf: turned back and sealed to finished masonry platform or boxed for leg
application. Center shelf has ¾” tight hem.
1. Shelves: turn up square at ends (coved up at rear only) to the shelf above or
counter top flanged out for attachment with no open spaces at interior.
2. All shelf partitions at exposed ends of cabinet bodies or interiors: free of exposed
framing members.
3. Reinforce shelves with full-length 1” x 4” x 14-gauge stainless steel closed hat
channel.
4. Unless otherwise noted, all closed base undershelves are to be 22” deep, clear.
5. Fully weld smooth and polish, the vertical seam of shelf turndown/turn up with face
of body partition.
6. Seal the vertical seam of square turn-in at exposed interior of open shelf sections.
2.25 ANCHOR PLATES / WOOD GROUNDS
A. Behind finish surface wherever building wall, partitions or ceiling construction will not
accommodate direct attachment of equipment such as overshelves, wall cabinets, hose
reels, utensil racks, exhaust hoods, display cases, etc. Material and installation by
General Contractor. Location and coordination with trades by Section 11 40 00.
B. Anchor Plates: not less than 12” x 12” x ¼” thick steel, secured to the structure above
or behind the finished surface, positioned at attachment points.
C. Wood Grounds: length required by fixture, component or device, 24” wide x ¾” thick
plywood secured to partition system prior to gypsum board installation.
D. Above ceiling supports: structural shapes (4” x 8.0 lb. channel) suspended from
structure. Maximum height 15’-0” aff. size: width of equipment x length of equipment
plus 6’-0”. Cross bracing at 6’-0” on center maximum.
2.26 OVERSHELVES
A. 16-gauge stainless steel with free edges turned down 1” with ½” tight hem at bottom. ¾”
radius at free corners.
B. Turn up 2” raw at walls and sides with horizontal coved corner at rear. Round front
corners of turn up on ¾” radius.
C. Where shelf width exceeds 12” width, reinforce with ½” x 4” x 14-gauge stainless steel
closed hat channel full-length of shelf.
D. Wall-Mounted Shelves: 16-gauge stainless steel brackets 48” o.c. maximum, set in 6”
from ends.
E. Freestanding Shelves: where splash is required at free overshelves, turn up square 2”

at ends, cove up at rear and hem tight to lower edge of front turndown. Weld exposed
corners.
1. Freestanding overshelves: 16-gauge stainless steel cantilevered brackets at rear
of table; double-cantilevered brackets at center of table. Posts for cantilevered
overshelves are 1-5/8” o.d. x 16-gauge stainless steel secured to underframe, 4’-
0” o.c. Ends of shelves: secured to adjacent wall/fixture or mounted on 1¼”
diameter stainless steel posts.
2. Freestanding overshelves not on cantilevered brackets: 1¼” o.d. x 16-gauge
stainless steel posts, each pair at 4’-0” o.c., maximum.
F. Baker Table Overshelves: supported at 18” above top with 1¼” o.d. stainless steel
tubular supports with channel shoe secured to risers.
G. Glass/Cup Rack Overshelf at Dishtables: 14-gauge stainless steel with 1½” deep “vee”
trough at free long sides with 1” tight hem at inside of trough. Provide a ½” marine edge
at free ends; 4” splash at wall. Suspend shelf at 18” above dishtable surface on
posts/brackets anchored to dishtable frame/wall at rear; 1” o.d. stainless steel tubing
supports from structure above ceiling at front edge, 60” o.c./each end.
1. Install at both ends, ½” stainless steel drain-tube (connecting both vee-troughs)
extended to dishtable surface through splash turnback.
2. Rack-rest: horizontal full-length 1-5/8” o.d. stainless steel tubing supported at 10”
o.c. above shelf (8” o.c. for double service shelf) by 1¼” o.d. stainless steel tubing
with closed ends. Support tubing: welded, ground and polished, spaced 60” o.c.
3. Rack-rest supports to wall: 4” x 4” x 10-gauge stainless steel flange plates welded to

support tubing. Anchor flanged plates to blocking ground with non-corrosive bolts.
2.27 DRAIN TRENCH LINER / GRATING
A. Liners: 14-gauge stainless steel in sizes as indicated.
B. Interior of liners: 6” deep with all interior corners (horizontal/vertical) coved on ¾” radius;
sloped and scored 1” to integrally welded Component Hardware Model No. D34-Y011
basket drain assemblies @ 48” o.c., fitted with 6” long welded tailpiece. Stainless steel
safety chain: connected to basket strainer assembly and top of liner wall.
C. Liners: 1” wide perimeter shoulder at the top, turned up flush with finished floor, tight-
hemmed back down to the shoulder level and flanged out 2” for attachment to the slab.
D. Underside of sloping portion of liner: 2” long “Z” clips.
E. Grating: IMC-TEDDY PFD-ADA removable fiberglass grating.

1. 1” deep “I” bearing bars with 0.6” wide top flange.
2. Full perimeter frame, section quantities and sizes indicated.
3. Maximum of 2’-0” sections.
4. Grating bars to be spaced 0.4” apart per ADA requirements.
5. Grating to be two (2) equal sizes.
2.28 WALL PANELS
A. Wall Panels: 18-gauge stainless steel, double pan-formed ½” thick with internal stiffener
members. Fill with USDA approved thermal insulation, full height and width of panels,
attach to interior with mastic. Maximum allowable temperature at rear side of panel:
120oF.
1. Height of panels as required: top of tile base to underside of hood, top of tile base
to top cap of stub wall or top of splash to underside of hood.
2. Level and square lower edge and sides.
3. Butt joint all panels.
2.29 EXHAUST HOOD (SURFACE - MOUNTED CONDENSATE)
A. Hoods: size/shape as indicated: 18” high at interior.
B. Body: 16-gauge stainless steel, with all seams welded, ground and polished.
C. Continuous condensate trough at perimeter: 3” x 1”.
D. Frame top of hood with 1½” angle iron assembly and suspend from structure above
ceiling by ½” diameter steel rods, drawn tight against finished ceiling surface.
E. Duct opening/collar as specified with stainless steel louvered grille over opening.
F. Div. 22 to extend drain line to floor sink. Drain line to be silver painted.
G. ½" diameter steel hanger rods at 4'-0" O.C. maximum to be by Kitchen Equipment
Supplier, but they are to be anchored to supporting structure (or slab) by the General
Contractor in the locations required by exhaust hood shop detail.
2.30 EXHAUST HOOD (UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE)
A. Exhaust to be provided to meet local jurisdiction code requirements. Kitchen Equipment

Contractor to verify code requirements and coordinate with Division 23 and 26. Hoods
over production equipment to be Type 1 with continuous capture. All Type 1 hoods to
be 6’ deep to ensure smoke/steam capture unless notated otherwise.
B. Install fire suppression system(s) in all ventilators, specified in this section. Install in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and applicable codes or standards.
Submit installation certification form to Architect.
C. Locate chemical cylinders as indicated on drawings and install piping to exhaust hood(s)
in totally concealed manner. Set cylinders and cabinets at 7"-0" clear AFF unless noted
otherwise. Provide polished chrome plated tubing piping/fittings, where exposed at
cylinder location and at interior of exhaust ventilator. Exposed pipe threads in/above
food zone not allowed. Submit schematic diagram of installation and confirm critical
distances from cylinders to nozzles.
D. Remote manual release located in path of egress from protected exhaust hood area.
Kitchen Equipment Contractor to coordinate location with local Fire Marshal
requirements prior to submittal review. All conduits to be recessed within wall, SURFACE
MOUNTING WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED.
E. Provide one (1) handheld Type 'K' 6-liter fire extinguisher per Ansul system, surface wall
mounted.
F. Required quantity and sizes of mechanically operated gas valves.
G. Confirm interconnection of all equipment as required to ensure exhaust hood and fire
suppression systems are completely operational and meet local jurisdiction code
requirements.
H. ½" diameter steel hanger rods at 4'-0" O.C. maximum to be by Kitchen Equipment
I. Provide appropriate quantity of fire suppression systems as required by local jurisdiction

code requirements.
2.31 HIGHLIGHTING
A. Polish the following vertical surfaces to a No. 8 finish:

1. Serving and display shelf turndowns.
2. Conveyor and dish/tray deposit station turndowns/frame.
3. Trayslide turndowns.
2.32 SHOP / FIELD JOINTS
A. Field joints: least possible number, used only when equipment size must be limited for
access into building or interior space.
B. Stainless steel tops (including edges and splashes): fully welded, ground and polished
to match adjacent surface.
C. Vertical field joints of fixture backsplashes that are inaccessible from the back: terminate
1” above the horizontal coved corner. The remaining height of field joint: hairline butt
joint with offset draw-angle behind. All horizontal/vertical draw-joints: located and noted
on shop drawings.
D. Hairline butt joint: 1½” x 1½” x 1/8” steel angles welded to back/underside of counter
top/shelf. Offset angle beyond joining metal edge ½” (min.) to provide flat backing
surface for joint with angle of other joining metal edge, set for ½” space between vertical
legs of angles. Bolt sections together with 5/16” machine bolts, lock washers, acorn
head cap nuts, set 3” o.c.
E. Closed Base Bodies: draw-type with hairline seam fully field-welded.
F. Millwork: plastic laminated material joints shall be doweled, glued and draw-bolted with
fasteners.
G. Solid Polymer: surfaces drawn tight, filled, sanded and finished to match adjacent
surface.
2.33 PREFABRICATED COLD STORAGE ASSEMBLIES
A. Assembly to be installed by Factory Authorized Installers only.
B. KEC to provide a 1-year walk-in panel installation warranty. Panel installation warranty
to cover labor and part replacement issues resulting from a failure to adequately
complete the following during installation:
1. Walk-in panels to be installed in a square, plumb and level manner.
2. Ceiling panels to be installed flush and tight to wall panels with the gasket material
undamaged and to create a proper seal. Any signs of condensation at joints or
walk-in walls should be reported to FDP and addressed immediately. Caulk at
panel seams will not be an acceptable solution.
3. All cam-locks should be engaged and button holes in place.
4. Any gaps under floor angle (due to shimming) must be sealed completely to the
slab.
5. All penetrations in ceiling or wall panels should be insulated and sealed.
6. Proper installation of the door systems should allow for the door to self-close and
seal around the perimeter of the door opening and at the floor threshold.
7. Final operation of the IC/IC+ control, door heaters and light switches should be
confirmed upon completion of the electrical connections.
8. Service issues, resulting from faulty installation will be covered under the walk-in
panel installation warranty.
C. KEC is responsible for overall install accuracy/quality and quality control of work
performed regardless of installer or any field modifications due to building/construction
conditions. KEC to provide Letter of Install Approval to FDP upon completed install
verifying that all items above have been inspected by the KEC for completeness. This
letter will be required as part of the completion of the contract.
D. Sectional Assemblies: size/shape indicated on drawings; 8’-6” aff unless otherwise

specified. Door locations/size: exactly as shown.
E. Sandwich Panel Insulation: Class 1 Urethane with vapor barrier, 4” thickness with
mature “U” factor of .030 or lower.
F. Wherever compartment dimension exceeds clear-span ability of ceiling panels, provide

I-beam support on exterior of ceiling or spline-hangers. Install ½” diameter steel rods
through beam/hangers and secure to structure above. Beams or posts within
compartments are not acceptable.
G. Reinforce prefabricated wall panels to rigid support the door assemblies. All door
jambs: furnished with replaceable full-perimeter thermostatically controlled heater
cable. Install 2” x 4” 16-gauge stainless steel hat-channel full-width of jamb with 1/8”
stainless steel removable flush sill, secured with stainless steel screws and sealed
watertight to channel.
H. Provide aluminum cove base at interior and exterior of exposed panels for all floor
assemblies.
I. 8-1/2” Recessed Factory Floor Assemblies:

1. Factory floor in slab recess with all joints lapped 6 inches and sealed to form a
watertight seal.
2. Level and square prefabricated perimeter and partition wall panels, anchored to
slab recess. Protect exposed surface of panels.
3. 4" manufacturer's floor.
4. 15# felt slip sheet over insulation with 6” lapped joints flashed up the height of
finished floor base.
5. 1/2" sand leveling bed by G.C.
6. Concrete flooring and tile over insulation by Divisions 03/09.
J. 4” Recessed Exposed Factory Floor Assemblies:

1. 6 mil polyethylene sheets in slab recess with all joints lapped 6 inches and sealed
to form a watertight seal.
2. Level and square prefabricated perimeter and partition wall panels, anchored to
slab recess. Protect exposed surface of panels.
3. 4" commercial grade manufacturer's durafloor with diamond treadplate surface and
marine grade plywood subfloor.
4. 15# felt slip sheet over insulation with 6” lapped joints flashed up the height of
finished floor base.
5. 1/2" sand leveling bed by G.C.
K. Surface Mounted Factory Floor Assemblies:

1. 4" commercial grade manufacturer's durafloor with diamond treadplate surface and
marine grade plywood subfloor.
2. 36" re-enforced diamond treadplate internal ramp.
3. 10-gauge stainless steel threshold to provide smooth transition to interior walk-in
floor.
L. Modularm Model No. 75LC temperature monitor/alarm with sensor and probe-cord
length required to extend from exterior front of assembly to a mounting position of the
sensor within evaporator return air-stream. System to include built in panic alarm.
System to be interconnected to building’s alarm system by Division 27.
M. LED surface-mounted light fixture, in quantity/arrangement shown on drawings. Light

fixtures to be perpendicular to coils. Light fixtures wired to interior and exterior
temperature control panel. Light fixtures to be provided by Section 11 40 00 and installed
by Division 26. Division 26 to seal both sides of conduit penetrations at light fixtures.
N. Penetrations of Panels: To be sealed by factory installer with Dow Corning 3-6548

silicone RTV foam, full depth of panel. Trim excess flush.
O. Install closure panels and/or trim strips to building walls and ceiling with concealed
attachment. Closure material: same as wall panels unless noted otherwise.
P. Compartment Entrance Doors: 36” x 78” nominal clearance unless otherwise noted.
1. Mount hinged doors on three Kason Model No. 1346; polished chrome plated nylon
cam-lift hinges.
2. Swing doors as indicated on drawings.
3. Defrost heater: thermostatically controlled and replaceable at full perimeter of all
doors, except when using clear Lexan doors (in addition to door jambs). Defrost
heaters to be wired for continuous service.
4. 36” high x full-length diamond aluminum treadplate at front and rear of all hinged
doors.
5. 12” x 2” engraved phenolic plastic compartment identification sign in Architect’s
color selection with 1” letters, mounted above door window.
6. 14” x 24” four-panel glass view window with heater and molded non-metallic inner
and outer frame. Heater to be wired for continuous service.
7. Padlock/key provisions in door latch with interior safety release.
8. Provide one (1) heated pressure relief port for each cooler/freezer section with
separate dedicated electrical circuits. Heated pressure relief ports in freezers to
be wired for continuous service. Heated pressure relief port for freezer to be
located on common wall of cooler/freezer assembly, unless specified otherwise.
Q. Provide refrigeration calculations and refrigeration alarm to meet local jurisdiction code
requirements.
R. If air screens are specified above doors, manufacturer is to provide adequate blocking
in panels to support air screens and pre-wired electrical connections. Installer to
coordinate location of door closure as to not interfere with air screens.
S. S/S trim above walk in to conceal manufacturers ceiling grid.
T. Field-check all horizontal/vertical measurements and conditions at the building prior to

fabrication or delivery of equipment.
U. Installer to seal all holes in Cold Storage Assembly.
2.34 COLD STORAGE REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS
A. Unit Coolers: specified quantity and model, ceiling-hung by ½” o.d. nylon bolts with
stainless steel washers and nuts. Insert hanger bolts through plastic sleeve and seal
penetration airtight.
1. Unit cooler drain fittings: positioned as indicated on drawings. Installation of cast
tee-fittings on drain pan outlet with union and cleanout plug and extension of 1”
Type K copper drain line through wall panel to air-gap fitting or floor drain under
this Section.
2. Slope drain line ½” per foot, trap at exterior of assembly and turn down into drain.
Manifold drain lines of adjacent compartments wherever possible.
3. Install drain line plastic sleeve through compartment wall, seal around drain line
and install stainless steel escutcheon with setscrews.
4. Electric drain line heater cable (self-regulating 7 watts): on all unit coolers
operating below 36oF., installed from coil drain line fitting to wall penetration under
this Section. Heater cables: minimum rating of 15 watts/lineal foot, 208 volts,
single phase. Wrap drain line with maximum 2” loop spacing and interwire to unit
cooler for continuous operation.
5. Mounted, pre-piped and pre-wired evaporator components:
a. Sporlan thermostatic expansion valve with external equalizer.
b. Shut-off valve at evaporator suction and liquid lines.
c. Sporlan “Catch-All” refrigerant filter/dehydrator on liquid line.
d. White Rogers 1609-101 adjustable thermostat with remote bulb positioned
in return air-stream of evaporator.
e. Electrical disconnect switch in NEMA 4 enclosure.
B. Refrigerant System Installation.

1. Refrigerant Lines; Type “L” hard copper tubing. Fittings: wrought copper or brass
designed for use with high temperature solder. Piping joints: made with silver
solder (Sil-Fos). Piping: properly suspended from and anchored to the structure
with adjustable hangers 6’ o.c. maximum. Suction lines: sized to have maximum
pressure drop of two pounds in medium temperature systems; one pound in low
temperature system. Liquid lines: sized to give maximum pressure to prevent
trapping of oil. Insulation on all suction lines: Armaflex insulation by Armstrong.
¾” thick at medium temp 1” thick at low-temp. Refrigerant lines in PVC or EMT
conduit: sealed at both ends with Dow Corning 3-6548 silicone RTV foam. Exterior
Refrigerant Lines to be wrapped by refrigeration system installer in self-fastening
jacket of Type 3003-H14 aluminum alloy 0.016-inch thick. Provide aluminum
strapping and seals for applying aluminum jacket and covers according to
manufacturer’s recommendations to provide completely weather-tight covering.
C. Evacuation and Charging.

1. After completion of the pressure test, the system shall be evacuated using an
approved auxiliary vacuum pump. Connections for evacuation: in accordance
with manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. Charging subsequent to the initial charge, which is contained in the condensing
unit (Type of Refrigerant to meet District Standards, Industry Standards and
Codes.) - Non- CFC Ozone Depletion Refrigerant on low temp units) – (Refrigerant
must meet local codes): given through the charging valve in the high side passing
all of the liquid refrigerant through a charging dehydrator. All charging lines and
gauges: purged of air prior to connection with system. Refrigerant: unused and
shall be delivered in clean containers. After the system is fully charged: start and
place in full operation.
2.35 PRE-APPROVED KITCHEN SUPPLIERS
A. Only the following named Subcontractors and those approved later, if any, are approved
for inclusion in the Contractor’s Bid.
B. Any supplier requesting for inclusion within this bid will be required to submit AIA form
305 minimum 14 days prior to bid date for review, or as required by Architect.
1. Ed Don & Company, 3501 Plano Parkway, The Colony, Texas 75056, Mr. Scott
Jost, Phone: (972) 624-7460, Fax: (972) 624-7762, E-mail: scottjost@don.com
2. Kirby Restaurant Supply, Mr. Billy Anderson, 809 S. Eastman Road, Longview,
Texas 75602, Phone: (903) 757-2723, Fax: (903) 757-9519, Email:
billya@kirbyrestaurantsup.com
3. Custom Kitchen Equipment Company, 2601 Wilson Road, Humble, Texas
77396, 281-446-8187, Fax: 281-446-8180.
4. Texas Metal Equipment Company, Mr. Andrew Harman, 6707 Mayard, Houston,
Texas 77041, 713-466-8722, Fax: 713-466-0166.
5. Pasco Brokerage, Ms. Kasey Hollon, 6465 Chase Oaks Blvd., Plano, Texas
75023, 972-596-3350.
6. Supreme Fixture Co. Inc., Mr. Tim Hampel, 11900 Vinny Ridge Road, P.O. Box
193655 Little Rock, Arkansas 72219, Phone (501) 455-2552, Fax: (501) 455-
0802, Email: tim@supremefixture.com
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DELIVERY AND INSTALLATION
A. Supervision: provide a competent foreman or supervisor who shall remain on the job
during the entire installation.
B. Delivery: coordinate with progress of construction and Owner’s operation schedules.

Unless otherwise instructed and documented by Owner or General Contractor, the
following procedures apply:
1. Field-Assembled Fixed Equipment integrated into the structure (e.g., cold storage
assemblies, exhaust hoods, drain trench/grate assemblies, conveyor systems,
ceiling-mounted utensil racks, etc.) are to be sent to the job-site when directed by
the General Contractor and installed/protected accordingly.
2. All other Fixed Equipment: delivered after completion of work on adjacent finished
ceilings, lighting, finished floor and wall systems, including painting.
3. Major Movable Equipment: delivered when possible to inventory in secured area
for interim job-site storage or, if secured area is not available, when fixed
equipment installation/clean-up has been completed.
4. Minor appliances and loose items (e.g., pans, covers, flatware containers, etc.)
delivered only when Owner is prepared to receive and inventory such items.
C. Installation: performed by manufacturer of custom fabricated fixtures.

1. Assemble, square, level and make ready all items for the final utility’s connections.
2. Cut neatly around obstructions to provide sanitary conditions.

3. Where gaps of ¼” or less occur adjacent to or between equipment, insert rope
backing and smoothly-applied General Electric construction sealant Series SE-
1200 silicone mastic (white color). Mask both sides of gap for neat application of
sealant and remove excess. If space exceeds ¼”, neatly install 18-gauge stainless
steel trim molding of proper shape with concealed attachment. Use epoxy cement
or “Z” clips wherever possible to secure stainless steel trim. Exposed edges or
corners of trim: eased and smooth.
4. Refrigeration coil drain line runs to indirect drain connection greater than 2” from
face of wall or panel: either of the following field procedures.
a. Trench the floor and provide 6” wide x 2” deep 16-gauge stainless steel
sloping (-1” to -2”) trough from face of cooler/freezer wall to body of floor
sink/floor drain. Trough: turned up 4” at wall; ¾” flange with ½” turndown at
both long sides. Set trough in waterproof mastic and seal 1” o.d. drain tube
penetration into floor sink/floor drain at -2½” bff. Patch the floor to match
adjacent material/surface.
b. Provide 12” x 6” x 2” deep 16-gauge stainless steel condensate pan mounted
to cooler/freezer wall at 6” aff clear. Trench the floor and install 1” o.d. drain
line from bottom of pan to body of floor sink/drain. Slope drain line ¼” per
foot and seal all connections watertight. Patch the floor to match adjacent
material/surface.
D. Protection of Work:
1. Fabricated fixtures: fiberboard or plywood taped to tops and exposed body
panels/components.
2. Manufactured Equipment: fiberboard or plywood taped as required by equipment
shape and installation-access requirements.
3. Prohibited use of equipment: tool and materials storage, workbench, scaffold,
stacking area, etc.
4. Damaged Equipment: immediately documented and submitted to Owner with
Contractor’s recommendation of action for repair or replacement and its impact on
the Project Schedule and Contract Amount, if any.
3.2 CLEAN AND ADJUST
A. Clean up and remove from the job site, all debris resulting from this Work as the
installation progresses.
B. Thoroughly clean and polish interior/exterior of all Foodservice Equipment, prior to

demonstration and final observation, ready for Owner’s use.
C. Lubricate and adjust drawer slides, hinges, casters.
D. Adjust pressure regulating valves, timed-delay relays, thermostatic controls, temperature

sensors, exhaust hood grilles, etc.
E. Clean or replace faucet aerators, line strainers.
F. Touch-up damage to painted finishes.
G. Start up and check operation of all refrigeration systems for at least 72 hours prior to
acceptance.
3.3 EQUIPMENT START-UP/DEMONSTRATION
A. Carefully test, adjust and regulate all equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions and certify in writing to the Owner that the installation, adjustments and
performance are in full compliance.
B. Provide the Owner or Foodservice Operators with a thorough operational demonstration

of all equipment and furnish instructions for general and specific care and maintenance.
Coordinate and schedule selected items of equipment and attendees with Owner at least
two weeks in advance of demonstration periods.
3.4 FINAL OBSERVATION
A. Final observation will be made when the Contractor will certify that he has completed his
work, made a thorough review of the installation/operation of each item in the contract
and found it to be in compliance with the Construction Documents.
B. Repetitive final observations (more than two) and all costs associated thereto which may
be incurred due to the Contractor’s failure to comply with the requirements of this Article
will be invoiced to this Contractor on a $70.00/hr. and expense basis.
PART 4 - EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
4.1 REGULARLY-MANUFACTURED EQUIPMENT/COMPONENTS: Standard finishes

and accessories unless specifically deleted or superseded by the Contract Documents.
4.2 FABRICATED AND FIELD-ASSEMBLED EQUIPMENT: Arrangement and

configuration as shown on plans, elevations, detail drawings and outlined in
specifications.
4.3 REFER TO DRAWINGS: For unit quantities and electrical or mechanical provisions
required, including manufacturer’s optional voltages, wattages, burner capacities, etc.
4.4 REFER TO PART 2 – PRODUCTS: For accessories, fittings, requirements and

procedures related to the listed buy-out and fabricated equipment.
4.5 ALTERNATE MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS: A specific product manufactured

by the listed pre-approved equals shown under section 4.7 foodservice equipment are
acceptable only if the specific product can evidence compliance with the specified line
items and the contract documents.
4.6 RE-USED EXISTING EQUIPMENT IF SHOWN
A. Existing equipment scheduled for re-use is to be inventoried and documented that

equipment is in operating condition once Kitchen Contractor has taken ownership.
B. Provide pictures of all equipment once inventoried and issue to the architect to ensure
that equipment has not been damaged.
C. Verify locations of all equipment with owner.
D. Existing equipment that is to be reused may be missing parts or accessories for proper
and complete operation. Submit report listing all items with pricing for approval to allow
E. Utility disconnection and re-connection: under Divisions 22 and 26. Kitchen Contractor
to verify utility requirements of existing equipment and coordinate with Kitchen
Consultant as required. All utilities not scheduled for re-use to be capped and covered
by required disciplines.
F. Disassembly, removal, transportation and relocation: under this Section and scheduled
with General Contractor. Owner’s representative must be present, coordinate date / time
with owner.
G. Thoroughly clean inside and out prior to relocation.
H. Review functional parts (e.g., doors, controls, heating elements, compressors, etc.) and
submit report of required repairs and estimate of cost. Any finishes or equipment
damaged due to construction to be repaired as required.
I. Existing equipment not scheduled for reuse is to be carefully removed/relocated by the

Kitchen Contractor per the Owner's direction. Kitchen Contractor to coordinate date /
time with General Contractor and Owner.
J. Removal or replacement of existing equipment is to be scheduled for times of least

interruption and inconvenience to the foodservice operation. Submit proposed schedule
of time frame, task sequence and operation for approval prior to starting work.
K. Kitchen Contractor to verify size and shape for all existing equipment being re-used and
coordinate with Foodservice Consultant as required.
L. Any modification(s) required/desired for re-used existing equipment to be verified by the

Kitchen Contractor. All modifications must be approved by the Owner and Foodservice
Consultant prior to the modifications being made.
M. The KEC is to verify and coordinate all of the utility requirements with the construction
documents as required. Refer to the general specifications re: conflicts.
4.7 FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
A. All equipment to have a performance check from factory authorized personnel.

Warranties will begin on the day of performance check.
B. All equipment and internal components should be of domestic origin where possible.
ITEM NO. 101 AIR SCREEN

QUANTITY 1
Manufacturer: Mars
Model: STD248-1UA-OB
Size and Shape: Refer to drawings
Alternate: Berner
1. Air curtain, STD2 series model, unheated, obsidian black exterior. Size unit to fit door.
2. Air Curtain to include Model #J0023 Controller Kit. Controller kit to come complete with
plastic magnetic reed switch, surface mounted, .50 HP max, 115v/1-ph limit switch. The
magnet to be mounted on the surface of the door jamb and the door.
3. Confirm clearance above door prior to installation. Air Curtain to accommodate door
width.
4. 114000 to provide magnetic reed switch kit loose to General Contractor for installation
by Division 26. Division 26 to route flexible conduit to j-box on cabinet. Routing to be
clean and secured to building.
5. Provide Harsh Weather Cover if no awning or recessed door is provided. (PM coordinate
with Architect)
ITEM NO. 102 COLD STORAGE ASSEMBLY

QUANTITY 1
Manufacturer: Thermo Kool

Model: ---
Alternate:
1. Procurement and provision of cold storage assembly installation is to be by

manufacturer only. Submittal drawings are to include confirmation from manufacturer of
included information.
2. Assembly to be higher than standard box and increased in height by 12”.
3. Regal White 20 gauge smooth aluminum where exposed, 20 gauge galvalum steel
where concealed.
4. Factory floor with smooth aluminum finish, recessed in slab 8 1/2". Secure floor to wall
assembly with cam-lock assembly. KEC to ensure the floor assembly is level prior to the
wearing bed installation.
5. Interior walls to be .040” aluminum, white embossed texture on walls.
6. Ceiling to be smooth .040” aluminum baked white enamel.
7. Two (2) 36" doors. Doors to be 18 gauge stainless steel, type 304 (18-8), #3 finish, with
heated perimeter / door jambs / windows and threshold heaters. Each door to be
equipped with 3'-0" high diamond tread kick plate on both sides of doors.
8. 18 gauge stainless steel, type 304 (18-8), #3 finish trim where adjacent to walls.
9. Freezer One (1) lot LED light fixtures. Fixtures to be equipped with T8 temperature
ballasts to operate in temperatures to -20 F.
10. Refrigerator- One (1) lot LED light fixtures.
11. 4’-0” high diamond tread plate at exposed surfaces. Fasten to wall with stainless steel
fasteners.
12. Provide door bumper at doors.
13. Compartments to be have all electrical concealed within the walls or located above the
ceiling.
14. 18 gauge stainless steel, type 304 (18-8), #3 finish, wrap wall opening at door assembly.
15. Provide Modularm model 75CL for single point temperature read out/monitoring. Route
temperature sensor to be behind each coil.
16. Doors to be provided with CCI Industries, Inc., Clear-VU swinging door assemblies.
17. K.E.C. to provide aluminum coved base tile to interior of assembly. Provide sealant
between floor and wall panels.
18. All holes in assembly to be sealed by factory installer.
19. Pressure relief port to be sized per manufacturers recommendations, locate on
cooler/freezer common wall and on freezer wall.
20. Interwiring of temperature monitor panel to master building alarm system or to the
Owner’s network. Technology department to provide all interfacing of alarm system and
with the building alarm system. Conduit from refrigeration system to monitor by Division
26. Temperature Monitor installation at 4'-0" above finished floor. All conduit to be
located above walk-in cooler/freezer ceiling. Exposed electrical conduit is not
acceptable.
ITEM NO. 103 COLD STORAGE REFRIGERATION SYSTEM

QUANTITY 1
Manufacturer: RDT
Model: ZS1-2 EcoSmart
Alternate:
1. Air cooled system.

2. Cooler temperature to be +35 degrees.
3. Freezer temperature to be -10 degrees.
4. EcoSmart system on demand defrost system for freezer coil.
5. S/S covered housing.
6. All exterior piping to be aluminum wrapped.
7. System to accommodate Item No. 102 Cold Storage Assembly.
8. Mount condensing unit on common exterior rack. Refer to Architectural and Engineering
drawings for exact location of remote unit. Coordinate routing of refrigeration lines and
conduit with appropriate trades. Heat tape and insulate all drain lines. General
Contractor to seal all building penetrations at refrigeration lines.
ITEM NO. 104 COLD STORAGE SHELVING

QUANTITY 2
Manufacturer: Metro
Model: Metro Max Q
Alternate: AMCO
1. Each unit to be four (4) tiers high with open grid mats.
2. Four (4) 74" post per unit. Provide foot plates at all posts when assembly is supplied with
walk-in floor.
3. Refer to drawings for size, width and lengths. Maximize shelving to allow not more than
6" tolerance.
4. Quantity One (1) to equal One (1) lot: all shelving shown within cold storage assembly.
5.
6. Special Instructions:Verify shelving requirements with approved submittal prior to
ordering.
ITEM NO. 105 DUNNAGE RACK

QUANTITY 5
Manufacturer: Metro
Model: Bow Tie Series
Alternate: AMCO
1. Size as shown.
ITEM NO. 107 DRY STORAGE SHELVING

QUANTITY 1
Manufacturer: Metro
Model: MetroMax Q
Alternate: AMCO
1. Each unit to be five (5) tiers high with open grid shelving.
2. Four (4) 86" posts per unit.
3. Quantity One (1) to equal One (1) Lot: all shelving shown within the dry storage room.
4. Refer to drawings for size, width and lengths. Maximize shelving to allow not more than
6" tolerance.
5. Special Instruction: Verify shelving requirements with approved submittal prior to
ordering.
ITEM NO. 108 CAN RACK

QUANTITY 1
Manufacturer: New Age

Model: 97294CK
Alternate:
1. Three (3) sets 1255, of shelf inserts to accommodate #5 and #10 cans.
2. Four (4) casters with brakes.
3. First In First Out can rack
ITEM NO. 110B STACKED WASHER/DRYER

QUANTITY 1
Manufacturer: Whirlpool
Model: Residential
Alternate:
1. Washer:
2. 2.0 cubic ft. capacity.
3. Straight vane agitator.
4. 7 cycles, 2-speed.
5. 4 water temperatures.
6. "Quick pak" sound insulation.
7. Color to be white.
8. Water and drain hoses.
9. Dryer:
10. 3.4 cubic ft. capacity.
11. 4 cycles plus Air only.
12. Auto dry.
13. Wrinkle Guard 1.
14. Color to be white.
15. To include dryer cord and vent kit.
16. Units to include model stationary assembly including: white stack stand, dryer wall
mount kit,door latch kit.
17. Special Instruction:Verify utility requirements with owner/operator. Models at time of
delivery shall be the current models numbers.
ITEM NO. 121 TWO COMPARTMENT SINK W/DISPOSER

QUANTITY 1
Manufacturer: Custom Fabricated

Model: ---
Alternate:
1. Top: 14 gauge type 304 S/S marine edge with 2" turndown at free sides.
2. Open base construction.
3. 10" high splash where adjacent to walls/fixtures.
4. Two (2) 24" x 26" x 15" deep sink compartments.
5. One (1) T&S model no. B-0291, splash mount faucet, 18" swing nozzle,LL inlets, for ¾"
hot and cold water connections.
6. Two (2) Fisher 22306 twist waste valve 3 1/2" x 2" with overflow and tailpiece. Provide
18 gauge S/S bracket for drain handle welded to sink bottom.
7. Provide One (1) T&S model no. B-0133-EE pre-rinse, w/ Add-A-Faucet assembly, B-
0108-C spray head, two(2) B-0109-04 18" long wall bracket (dealer to cut to correct
length), one (1) additional spray face model no. 108SFRK with ceramic cartridges.
8. 16 gauge S/S undershelf per drawings.
9. Disposer - installed in top integrally welded disposer cone. Notch and punch splash turn
back for vacuum breaker. 12 gauge S/S bracket mounted below counter top for disposer
control panel ground and polished to match top.
10. 12" deep single post mounted overshelf at 18" above counter top, punched to
accommodate spray rinse.
11. Post mounted utensil rack, extend 1-5/8" diameter S/S post from back splash, turn
forward 12" and weld full length x 2" x ¼" S/S bar with Component Hardware model no.
V-77-4401 S/S sliding hooks at 8" on center. Verify height with owner.
12. Omit rear rail at sink compartments, disposer and front rail at hose bibb.
13. Two (2) "Richlite" ½" thick removable sink covers installed at each sink. Weld ¼" bar
stock, set 5/8" below work surface at all four corners for support of sink covers. Two (2)
finger holes per board.
14. Provide top and bottom c-channel support storage for sink covers at right or left end of
counter.
15. One (1) Edlund model no. S-11 Manual can opener, mounted on raised platform.
16. Flanged feet at front only.
17. Seal at all splash penetrations.
ITEM NO. 123 DISPOSER-CONE MOUNT

QUANTITY 2
Manufacturer: Salvajor
Model: 300-CA-ARSS
Alternate: In-Sink-Erator
1. Fixed nozzle.
2. Delete standard syphon breakers and provide T & S B-0456-04 vacuum breakers and
mount 6” from tabletop to base of breaker.
3. Solenoid valve.
4. Flow control.
5. Model no. ARSS-LD control panel.
6. Auto-reverse.
7. Dejamming tool.
8. Install vacuum breaker in splash
9. S/S cone cover.
10. Disposer cone with scrap ring.
11. Swirl inlet located in disposer cone at a 45 degree angle.
12. Provide reducing flange. ONLY REQUIRED IF INSINKERATOR IS PRIME
13. Special Instruction:GC to pipe 1/2" cold water to disposer body. Excess electrical cord to
be secured to fabrication as required.
ITEM NO. 124 WORKTABLE W/ OVERSHELF

QUANTITY 3

Model: ---
Alternate:
1. Top: 14 gauge type 304 S/S top with 6" high backsplash at wall and 2" turndown at free
sides.
3. 16 gauge S/S overshelf post mounted 18" above working surface.
4. 16 gauge S/S undershelf.
5. Two (2) 20" W x 20" L drawer assemblies. Component Hardware #S52-2020 drawer
slides with delrin bearings - 200lb capacity. Component Hardware #S80-2020 drawer
pan.
6. Close back of splash when exposed.
ITEM NO. 125 20 QT. MIXER W/STAND

QUANTITY 1
Manufacturer: Hobart
Model: HL200
Alternate:
1. Food mixer, Bench Model, 1/2-HP motor, 20 qt. Capacity.

2. 115/60/1 ph.
3. 15 minute timer.
4. Epoxy enamel finish-bench model.
5. One (1) 20 qt. S/S bowl.
6. One (1) 20 qt. Aluminum "B" flat beater.
7. One (1) 20 qt. S/S "D" wire whip.
8. One (1) 20 qt. "ED" dough hook.
9. One (1) 20 qt. Lexan splash cover.
10. One (1) 20 qt. bowl guard with ingredient chute.
11. One (1) Caddy model no. T-242 mobile mixer stand, with casters, two (2) with brakes.
Secure mixer to table with non-corrosive bolts. Alternate-Custom Fabricated, New Age.
12. Stand to be Pre-Drilled to accommodate Mixer.
ITEM NO. 129 WORKTABLE W/S.BAR UT.RACK

QUANTITY 1

Model: ---
Alternate:
1. Top: 14 gauge type 304 S/S, 2" turn down at free sides, 10" high at walls or adjacent
equipment.
4. Two (2) 20" W x 15" L drawer assemblies, 200 lb. drawer slides.
5. Flanged feet.
6. Post mounted utensil rack, extend 1-5/8" diameter S/S post from cross rail, thru top to
78" A.F.F. and weld full length x 2" x ¼" S/S bar with Component Hardware model no. V-
77-4401 S/S sliding hooks at 8" on center. Verify height with Owner.
7. Provide a duplex receptacle and housing mounted below countertop per drawings.
Interconnect and prewire a 5'-0" cord and plug out of receptacle housing for plugging
into ceiling drop cord receptacle. 11400 and Div. 26 to coordinate location of drop cord
receptacle.
ITEM NO. 130 WORKTABLE

QUANTITY 2

Model: ---
Alternate:
1. Top: 14 gauge type 304 S/S, 6" splash adjacent walls or fixtures, 2" turndown at free
sides.
4. 20" W x 20" L drawer assemblies, 200 lb. drawer slides per drawings.
5. Close back of splash when exposed.
ITEM NO. 131 FOOD PROCESSOR

QUANTITY 1
Manufacturer: Berkel
Model: M2000-5
Alternate: Globe, Robocoupe
1. Dual feed openings.

2. Disk ejection system.
3. Safety magnetic interlock.
4. One (1) each slicer blades S2, S3, S5, S8, S11 and S14.
5. One (1) each shredder blades SH4 and SH7.
6. One (1)each dicing grids D8, D11, D14 and D22.
7. One (1) J4x4 Julienne slicer.
8. One (1) J2x2 Julienne slicer.
9. Hinged feed hopper lid.
10. Plate holder. Two (2) ACCY-Rack 6 storage racks.
11. Project manager to confirm blades required.
ITEM NO. 136 BAKER'S TABLE

QUANTITY 1

Model: ---
Alternate: ---
1. Top: 14 gauge type 304 S/S with 2" square turn down at front, 6" high enclosed splash
at three (3) sides and rear.
2. Provide finished back at exposed end and backsplashes.
3. 12" deep post mounted overshelf at 18" above counter top.
4. 16 gauge S/S flour trough.
5. Rear rail only.
6. One (1) lot Rubbermaid no. FG360288WHT ingredient bins.
7. One (1) enclosed 3-tier drawer base.
ITEM NO. 138 PAN RACK

QUANTITY 2
Manufacturer: CresCor
Model: 207-UA-13A
Alternate: Lakeside, New Age, Renfro
1. Four (4) 5" casters.

2. Adjustable universal slides on 1-1/2" centers.
3. Vertical pan stop.
ITEM NO. 139 INSUL MOBILE PROOFER

QUANTITY 1
Manufacturer: Cres Cor

Model: H-137-WSUA-12D
Alternate: Alto-Shaam, Carter Hoffman, Metro, FWE, Winston
1. Insulated proofer/heated cabinet.

2. Field reversible doors.
3. Adjustable universal angles.
4. Four (4) 5" casters, two (2) with brakes.
5. Tempered glass door windows.
6. Key lock handle.
7. Corner bumpers.
8. Cord and plug. Coordinate NEMA configuration with Electrician.
9. Thermometer.
10. 2000 watt heater.
ITEM NO. 145 WORKTABLE W/SINK & S.BAR UT.RACK

QUANTITY 1

Model: ---
Alternate: ---
1. Top: 14 gauge type 304 S/S, 2" turn down at all sides.
2. Provide table in two (2) sections-one (1) 27" and one (1) 33" section. Refer to detail.
4. Full length 16 gauge S/S undershelf.
5. Four (4) 20" W x 20" L drawer assemblies. Component Hardware #S52-2020 drawer
slides with delrin bearings - 200lb capacity. Component Hardware #S80-2020 drawer
pan.
6. One (1) 15" x 20" x 10" deep sink compartment. Coordinate location with drain overflow.
7. One (1) T&S model no. B-0320-BB-CR, rigid gooseneck, ceramic cartridges, deck faucet
for ¾" hot and cold water connections.
8. One (1) Fisher 22306 twist waste valve 3 1/2" x 2" with overflow and tailpiece. Provide
9. Post mounted utensil rack, extend 1-5/8" diameter S/S post from cross rail, thru top to
78" A.F.F. and weld full length x 2" x ¼" S/S bar with Component Hardware model no. V-
77-4401 S/S sliding hooks at 8" on center. Verify height with Owner. 48" max. upright
post spacing.
10. Provide a duplex receptacle and housing mounted below countertop per drawings.
Interconnect and prewire a 5'-0" cord and plug out of receptacle housing for plugging
into ceiling drop cord receptacle. 11400 and Div. 26 to coordinate location of drop cord
receptacle.
11. Omit rear cross rail at sink section.
12. Flanged feet.
13. Coordinate with Item No. 601 Hot Water Dispenser
ITEM NO. 151 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

QUANTITY 2
Manufacturer: Ansul
Model: R102
Alternate:
1. Duct and plenum protection to exhaust hood.

2. Surface protection for cooking equipment.
3. Locate remote fire pulls as indicated on plan.
4. One (1) lot Mechanical gas valve (maximum diameter as required). Size as required.
Furnished by Section 11400, installed by Division 22. Kitchen Equipment Contractor to
coordinate location with local Fire Marshal requirements prior to submittal review. All
conduits to be recessed within wall, SURFACE MOUNTING WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED.
5. System to meet U.L. 300 requirements.
6. Provide one (1) hand held Type 'K' 6 liter fire extinguisher per Ansul System, surface
wall mounted.
7. Exposed pipe threads are unacceptable.
8. All exposed piping to be chrome plated.
9. All hood penetrations to have U.L. listed "Quick Seal".
10. Provide phenolic I.D. labels for exhaust hood, remote fire pull, light/fan switches and fire
protection system.
11. Provide a manufacturer performance test and report that verifies this system is fully
operational.
12. Provide s/s cabinet as shown on plan.
13. Installer to provide one (1) Ansul system per exhaust hood, review drawings and provide
systems as required.
14. Special Instruction:Install hand held extinguishers, maximum of 3'-2" A.F.F. to top of unit.
ITEM NO. 152 EXHAUST HOOD

QUANTITY 1
Manufacturer: Mod-U-Serve
Model: W-cpb
Alternate:
1. Hood to meet IECC Mechanical and Energy Codes.

2. All 18 gauge S/S construction and s/s rear back at exposed surface.
3. Insulated hood end panels.
4. Hood manufacturer to perform hood balance reports, to be sent directly to FDP prior to
final project completion.
5. Continuous capture.
6. Ceiling mounted supply plenum with light fixtures, coordinate conditioned/tempered air
with engineer. Locate supply plenum in ceiling, coordinate location with GC as required.
7. Recess mounted LED light fixtures. All exposed fire control piping to be chrome plated
and all hood penetrations sealed with S/S escutcheons.
8. 4" air space at rear of hood.
9. S/S closure panel between hoods if back to back hoods.
10. S/S filters and grease cup. Provide filter removal tool.
11. Ductwork and final connection to hood above ceiling to be by the Mechanical Contractor.
12. Ventilators to have adjustable make-up air damper which must remain accessible for
adjustment
13. Make-up air fire dampers. Insulated make-up air plenum with 1" thick foil faced fiberglass
insulation.
14. S/S filters and grease cup with filter removal tool.
15. Provide 18 gauge stainless steel wall panel if wall is tiled. “Stainless steel “Tee” type
joining strips at panel joints and “C” type finishing strips at ends not protected full height
with corner guards. Extend from top of coved base to underside of hood. Top of panel to
be secured to wall with “Z” clips, bottom secured to wall with stainless steel overhead
molly bolts. Wall panels to extend the full length of the hood wall.
16. S/S c-channel closure panel from top of hood to ceiling.
17. ½" diameter steel hanger rods at 4'-0" O.C. maximum to be by Kitchen Equipment
18. Provide pre-set temperature sensor for automatic start of exhaust fan when the condition
exists where the exhaust fan is not initiated at the wall switch and the temperature in the
exhaust canopy reaches 110° F. At the end of the cooking day when the fan is
disengaged at the wall switch the thermostat (temperature sensor) will keep the exhaust
fan on until the temperature in the exhaust canopy drops below 110° F.
19. Refer to individual hood lengths as shown on drawings for each assembly required.
Install at 6'-10" A.F.F. to bottom of hood, coordinate duct and fan requirements with
Mechanical Contractor. Interconnect to wall mounted light switch by Division 26. Bulbs
for light fixtures to be furnished and installed by Kitchen Equipment Contractor.
ITEM NO. 153 EXHAUST HOOD

QUANTITY 1
Model: W-cpb
Alternate:
1. Hood to meet IECC Mechanical and Energy Codes.

2. All 18 gauge S/S construction and s/s rear back at exposed surface.
3. Insulated hood end panels.
4. Hood manufacturer to perform hood balance reports, to be sent directly to FDP prior to
final project completion.
5. Continuous capture.
6. Ceiling mounted supply plenum with light fixtures, coordinate conditioned/tempered air
with engineer. Locate supply plenum in ceiling, coordinate location with GC as required.
7. Recess mounted LED light fixtures. All exposed fire control piping to be chrome plated
and all hood penetrations sealed with S/S escutcheons.
8. 4" air space at rear of hood.
9. S/S closure panel between hoods if back to back hoods.
10. S/S filters and grease cup. Provide filter removal tool.
11. Ductwork and final connection to hood above ceiling to be by the Mechanical Contractor.
12. Ventilators to have adjustable make-up air damper which must remain accessible for
adjustment
13. Make-up air fire dampers. Insulated make-up air plenum with 1" thick foil faced fiberglass
insulation.
14. S/S filters and grease cup with filter removal tool.
15. Provide 18 gauge stainless steel wall panel if wall is tiled. “Stainless steel “Tee” type
joining strips at panel joints and “C” type finishing strips at ends not protected full height
with corner guards. Extend from top of coved base to underside of hood. Top of panel to
be secured to wall with “Z” clips, bottom secured to wall with stainless steel overhead
molly bolts. Wall panels to extend the full length of the hood wall.
16. S/S c-channel closure panel from top of hood to ceiling.
17. ½" diameter steel hanger rods at 4'-0" O.C. maximum to be by Kitchen Equipment
18. Provide pre-set temperature sensor for automatic start of exhaust fan when the condition
exists where the exhaust fan is not initiated at the wall switch and the temperature in the
exhaust canopy reaches 110° F. At the end of the cooking day when the fan is
disengaged at the wall switch the thermostat (temperature sensor) will keep the exhaust
fan on until the temperature in the exhaust canopy drops below 110° F.
19. Refer to individual hood lengths as shown on drawings for each assembly required.
Install at 6'-10" A.F.F. to bottom of hood, coordinate duct and fan requirements with
Mechanical Contractor. Interconnect to wall mounted light switch by Division 26. Bulbs
for light fixtures to be furnished and installed by Kitchen Equipment Contractor.
ITEM NO. 168 S/S WALL CAP

QUANTITY 2

Model: ---
Alternate:
1. 2" square turndown at free ends.

2. Caulk and seal at wall with clear silicone.
3. Eased edges at exposed corners.
4. Coved turn up at full height wall, extended to ceiling.
5. 18 ga. stainless steel corner guards located at all exposed corners of kitchen.
6. Locate per drawings.
ITEM NO. 172 COMBI OVEN - DBL

QUANTITY 1
Manufacturer: Rational
Model: ICP 6-FULL/6-FULL N/G
Alternate:
1. 208/240V 1PH
2. Six (6) 18" x 26" or twelve (12) 12" x 20" pan capacity, per unit.
3. Standard warranty: 2 year parts and labor, installation inspection/start up.
4. Doors hinged per drawings.

5. Combi-Duo Stacking Kit, mobile.
6. Grill & Pizza Tray.
7. Cleaner Tables
8. Care Tablets.
9. Gastronorm Grid Shelf.
10. Gastronorm CombiGrill.
11. Gastronorm Potato Baker, 1/1 size, 12" x 20".
12. Grilling & Roasting Plate.
13. KEC to coordinate pan accessories with Owner prior to ordering.
14. Four hour chef training.
15. Heat shield.
16. Installation Kit "10", per unit, article number 8720.1560US.
17. Rational offers Certified Installation of units by Commercial Kitchens.
18. System installation to be reviewed by an authorized factory installer, provide report
confirming installation meets factory's requirements.
19. Reverse Osmosis System: 3M Model Number SGLP200-CL-BP Steel mounting bracket
(to mount to stacked unit) OR Wall mounting bracket (to mount to adjacent wall). Div. 22
to provide all interconnection tubing and components required by RO system (Quick
disconnect plumbing, cleaning bypass assembly, and connection fittings for standard
3⁄4" water line). Refer to Manufacturer’s Data Sheet for mounting and connection
instructions. Copper piping to the RO System by Div. 22. Plastic pipe or reinforced
opaque beverage tubing from RO System to equipment by Div. 22. GC to provide wall
blocking as required for mounting the system.System incoming water pressure must be
between 60 and 100 psig or external pump is required. Div. 22 to confirm, and provide
incoming water pressure booster pump as required. (PM TO REVISE THIS SPEC AS
NECESSARY).
20. Provide sizes and quantities as required: Dormont s/s water disconnect from filter to
steamer,color coded for filtered and non-filtered water.
21. KEC to coordinate filtered and unfiltered water with Combi Oven, do not connect filtered
water to unfiltered water connection.
22. Provide quantities and sizes required: Dormont Model #VER-KITCF-2S-48” Gas Conn.
Kit, 48” long, dble. Supr-Swivel coupling with SafetyQuick safety fitting, w/coiled
restraining device, full port gas valve, antimicrobial coating, lifetime warranty.
23. Water supply to have shut-off valve and back flow preventer furnished and installed by
Division 22. Supply water to interconnect thru water filter and then to each oven. Indirect
drain line to be ran outside of the footprint of the unit, coordinate location of the related
floor sink.
ITEM NO. 172.1 COMBI OVEN- SINGLE

QUANTITY 1
Manufacturer: Rational
Model: ICP 6-FULL N/G

Alternate:
1. Six (6) 18" x 26" or twelve (12) 12" x 20" pan capacity, per unit.
2. 208/240V 1PH
3. Standard warranty: 2 year parts and labor, installation inspection/start up.
4. Mobile Oven Stand, open base, s/s construction, adjustable height casters with brakes.
5. Doors hinged per drawings.
6. Grill & Pizza Tray.
7. Cleaner Tablets.
8. Care Tablets.
9. Gastronorm Grid Shelf.
10. Gastronorm CombiGrill.
11. Gastronorm Potato Baker, 1/1 size, 12" x 20".
12. Grilling & Roasting Plate.
13. KEC to coordinate pan accessories with Owner prior to ordering.
14. Four hour chef training.
15. Heat shield.
16. Installation Kit "10", per unit, article number 8720.1560US.
17. Rational offers Certified Installation of units by Commercial Kitchens.
18. System installation to be reviewed by an authorized factory installer, provide report
confirming installation meets factory's requirements.
19. Reverse Osmosis System: 3M Model Number SGLP200-CL-BP Steel mounting bracket
(to mount to stacked unit) OR Wall mounting bracket (to mount to adjacent wall). Div. 22
to provide all interconnection tubing and components required by RO system (Quick
disconnect plumbing, cleaning bypass assembly, and connection fittings for standard
3⁄4" water line). Refer to Manufacturer’s Data Sheet for mounting and connection
instructions. Copper piping to the RO System by Div. 22. Plastic pipe or reinforced
opaque beverage tubing from RO System to equipment by Div. 22. GC to provide wall
blocking as required for mounting the system.System incoming water pressure must be
between 60 and 100 psig or external pump is required. Div. 22 to confirm, and provide
incoming water pressure booster pump as required. (PM TO REVISE THIS SPEC AS
NECESSARY).
20. Provide sizes and quantities as required: Dormont s/s water disconnect from filter to
steamer,color coded for filtered and non-filtered water.
21. KEC to coordinate filtered and unfiltered water with Combi Oven, do not connect filtered
water to unfiltered water connection.
22. Provide quantities and sizes required: Dormont Model #VER-KITCF-2S-48” Gas Conn.
Kit, 48” long, dble. Supr-Swivel coupling with SafetyQuick safety fitting, w/coiled
23. Utilities for second combi-oven to remain capped for future use.
24. Water supply to have shut-off valve and back flow preventer furnished and installed by
Division 22. Supply water to interconnect thru water filter and then to each oven. Indirect
drain line to be ran outside of the footprint of the unit, coordinate location of the related
floor sink.
ITEM NO. 187 PASS-THRU HEATED CABINET- 2DR

QUANTITY 2
Manufacturer: Traulsen
Model: AHF-232WP-HHS
Alternate:
1. Anodized aluminum interior and S/S exterior.

2. Interior lights with bulbs.
3. Exterior digital thermometer.
4. Locking hardware.
5. Universal 18" x 26" and 12" x 20" pan files on 4" centers in all sections.
6. 6" high adjustable S/S legs.
7. Furnish start-up and Three (3) years free services, including parts and labor.
8. Controls mounted on kitchen side.
9. Half height doors hinged as per plan. Glass doors located on kitchen side, solid doors
located on server side.
10. Re-hinging feature.
ITEM NO. 188 PASS-THRU REFRIGERATOR - 1DR

QUANTITY 2
Manufacturer: Traulsen
Model: AHT-132WPUT
Alternate:
1. Anodized aluminum interior and S/S exterior.

2. Interior lights with bulbs.
3. Exterior digital thermometer.
4. Locking hardware.
5. Universal 18" x 26" and 12” x 20” pan files on 4" centers in all sections.
6. 6" high adjustable S/S legs.
7. Furnish start-up and Three (3) years free service, including parts and labor.
8. Controls mounted on kitchen side.
9. Five (5) Year compressor warranty.
10. Half height doors hinged as per plan. Glass doors located on kitchen side, solid doors
located on server side.
11. Re-hinging feature.
ITEM NO. 201 SERVING COUNTER

QUANTITY 1
Manufacturer: Counter Craft

Model: SCSL-528
Alternate:
1. Continuous piece ‘semi enclosed base’ style construction.

2. 2cm stone top with eased edges, no turndown, no splash required, color selection to be
confirmed by the KEC.
3. Engineered stone tray slide with eased edges and two (2) each ss half round runners.
Trayslide to be supported with finished plywood with white melamine at exposed areas.
Trayslide brackets to be fully welded to angle iron frame.
4. Counter front to consist of backerboard to accept tile by G.C. Color selection to be
confirmed by the KEC.
5. Fully welded angle iron frame utilizing 1.5" x 1.5” x 1/8" galvanized angle. Welds to be
ground smooth and sprayed with silver enamel paint. Angle Iron to be framed around
each cutout for drop-in-equipment. Angle iron to run front-to-back and at each mullion.
1/2" sound deadening tape to be applied to top of angle iron frame prior to installation of
countertop.
6. All stainless steel fabrication to be fully welded. Butt or knuckle joints will not be
accepted.
7. Stainless steel internal shelving compartments.
8. Two (2) load center compartments.
9. All electrical to be interconnected to load center. Electrical to be located in electrical
conduit pipe, flex conduit to be kept to a minimum. Exposed flex conduit will not be
accepted. All wiring to be numbered at all junctions, per circuit. Wiring diagram to be
provided at each load center door. All receptacles mounted in the counter to be recess
mounted and labeled.
10. One (1) lot plumbing. Plumbing lines are to be 3/4" and to be coated to protect from
corrosion. All hot food well drains are to be manifolded with unions for ease of
maintenance. Manifolded drains lead to single 3/4" turn ball valve mounted in full
stainless steel housing. Drain valve to be located on operator side for ease of access.
KEC to extend all drain lines to floor sinks.
11. Custom control panel containing remote mounted controls for drop-in equipment (i.e. hot
food wells, cold pans, etc), custom CounterCraft labeling and switches.
12. One (1) lot custom CounterCraft adjustable series breath guards with #8 mirror finish
stainless steel post. Posts to extend through the countertop and securing to the angle
iron frame within counter body. 3/8” tempered glass front and side and serving shelf
panels. Glass is to have high polish profiled edges with rounded corners. Includes
single-tier over hot food sections and double-tier over cold food sections. Includes heat
and lights as required, adheres to current NSF standards.
13. Two (2) LTI Hot/Cold Drop-In Five (5) well unit. Locate per drawings. Drain to floor sink.
BY KEC. LTI UNIT IS TO BE FURNISHED BY KEC/INSTALLED BY COUNTERCRAFT.
14. Two (2) Each single panty fill faucet.
15. Two (2) each, CounterCraft, HotFrost™ GOVS ™ built-in over shelf. Frost only
functionality. ½ recesses to accommodate one (1) 18X26” sheet pan. Remote on/off
rocker switch and condensing unit.
16. Two (2) each Hatco drop in mechanical cold pan, 3 pan capacity unless counter
drawings shows otherwise.
17. Two (2) Ice Cream Display Freezer, drop-in, (1) hinged lid, adjustable temperature
control, manual defrost, stainless steel interior, stainless steel & galvanized exterior,
bottom-mounted self-contained refrigeration.
18. Cashiers station to be integral with counter, lockable cashiers drawer, undershelf to
accommodate owners POS System, outlet to accommodate POS system and dataline.
19. All drains pre-plumbed, as required.
20. Stainless steel legs and adjustable bullet feet.
ITEM NO. 209 DROP FRONT MILK COOLER - 8 CASE

QUANTITY 2
Model: MCT-DM1
Alternate: Beverage-Aire, Traulsen
1. 18 gauge S/S fully welded liner.

2. 20 gauge S/S exterior.
3. Double pan insulated doors.
4. High pressure insulated foam.
5. 5" casters, two (2) with brakes.
6. ½" S/S nipple drain.
7. Locking mechanism.
8. Cord and plug. NEMA - 5-15P.
9. Corner bumpers.
10. 8 case capacity.
11. Strip curtains.
12. Special Instruction:Coordinate location of electrical receptacle so as to not interfere with
location of milk dispenser.
ITEM NO. 214 CASH REGISTER

QUANTITY 2
Manufacturer: Owner Furnished

Model: ---
Alternate: ---
ITEM NO. 216 MENU BOARD

QUANTITY 2
Manufacturer: NCR
Model: NEC E Series
Alternate:
1. One (1) NEC V-423 42” Commercial Grade LCD with three (3) year warranty (part#
232814). Mount where indicated on drawings.
2. One (1) Universal Ceiling Mount tilt or fixed, 30”- 55” (part# 231865).
3. One (1) 4” Ceiling Mount Plate for Single Mount (part# 231867).
4. One (1) 3’-5’ Adjustable Extension Pole (part# 231410).
5. One (1) Installation of LCD display units.
ITEM NO. 249 THREE COMPARTMENT SINK

QUANTITY 1

Model: ---
Alternate:
1. Top: 14 gauge S/S 3" high 1-1/2" rolled rim at free sides, 10" high splash at walls.
3. Omit rear rail at sink.
4. Three (3) 30" x 30" x 15" deep sink compartment. ¼" diameter S/S rods welded
diagonally in each sink corner low enough for sink cover to sit flush with drainboard.
Coordinate location with drain overflow.
5. Two (2) T&S model no. B-0291, splash mount faucet, 18" swing nozzle, LL inlets, for ¾"
hot and cold water connections.
6. Three (3) Fisher 22304 twist waste valve 3 1/2" x 2" with overflow and tailpiece. Provide
7. 12" deep single post perforated overshelf mounted at 18" above counter top.
8. Post mounted utensil rack, extend 1-5/8" diameter S/S post from back splash, turn
forward 12" and weld full length x 2" x ¼" S/S bar with Component Hardware model no.
V-77-4401 S/S sliding hooks at 8" on center.
9. One (1) Chicago model no. 305-VBR hose bibb and rack mounted on 12 gauge S/S
bracket ground and polished to match top. Hose and spray rinse by owner.
10. Three (3) "Richlite" ½" thick removable sink covers, one installed at each sink. Provide
14 gauge S/S vertical holding rack mounted as per drawings. Two (2) finger holes per
board.
11. Omit front rail at hose bibb.
12. 16 gauge S/S undershelf as per drawings.
13. Flanged feet at front only of counter.
14. Anchor flanged feet to floor with non-corrosive bolts. Secure wall mounted equipment /
components to in wall grounds or anchor plates. Coordinate installation with the general
contractor.
ITEM NO. 250 DISHMACHINE W/EXTERNAL BOOSTER

QUANTITY 1
Manufacturer: Meiko
Model: K44
Alternate: Hobart
1. Dishwasher, conveyor type, single tank design, 202 racks/hour capacity, S/S
construction, with automatic fill, auto timer, and 115 volt pilot circuit.
2. 15 KW Electric tank heat.
3. 480/60/3.
4. Verify direction of dishmachine with drawings.
5. One (1) Extended warranty - One (1) Year parts and labor.
6. Chamber 6" higher than standard.
7. Machine and electric tank heat to have single point electrical connection. Separate
electrical connection required for external booster heater
8. Provide built-in electrical disconnects pre-wired within dishmachine.
9. Two (2) vent hoods with 4 x 16 vent and damper.
10. One (1) table limit switch with stainless steel cover to conceal back. Provided by
Manufacturer / Installed by Div. 26.
11. Four (4) 20"x20" Peg racks.
12. Four (4) 20" x 20" sheet pan racks.
13. Two (2) 20" x 20" combination racks.
14. Vent fan controls.
15. Peak Rate of drain flow = 38 gpm. Division 22 to provide and install backflow preventor
between booster heater and filter. Final connection by Division 22. Coordinate location of
electrical disconnects on free wall.
ITEM NO. 252 BOOSTER HEATER

QUANTITY 1
Manufacturer: Hatco
Model: C-24
Alternate:
1. Compact booster heater.

2. One (1) Brass Pressure Reducing Valve with By-Pass.
3. 6" adjustable S/S legs.
4. One (1) Phosphate water treatment unit. System to be located in an accessible location.
5. One (1) Shock Absorber.
6. S/S body and base.
7. Division 22 to provide and install backflow preventor between booster heater and filter.
Final connection by Division 22. Interconnect to dishmachine by Division 22. Coordinate
location of electrical disconnects on free wall. GC to insulate hot water from booster
heater to dishmachine.
ITEM NO. 254 SOILED & CLEAN DISHTABLE

QUANTITY 2

Model: ---
Alternate:
1. Top: 14 gauge type 304 S/S 3" high 1-1/2" rolled rim at free sides. 10" high splash at
walls.
2. Install Disposer as shown. Notch and punch splash turn back for vacuum breaker. 12
gauge S/S bracket mounted below counter top and polished to match top for disposer
control panel.
3. Provide One (1) T&S model no. B-0133-EE pre-rinse, B-0108-C spray head, two (2) B-
0109-04 18" long wall bracket (dealer to cut to correct length), one (1) additional spray
face model no. 108SFRK with ceramic cartridges.
4. One (1) 18" disposer cone.
5. Provide ½" slope in top towards dishmachine per the general specifications.
6. S/S cover to conceal table limit switch.
7. Anchor flanged feet to floor with non-corrosive bolts. Secure wall mounted equipment /
components to in wall grounds or anchor plates. Coordinate installation with the general
contractor.
ITEM NO. 255 MOBILE UTENSIL SHELF

QUANTITY 3
Manufacturer: Metro
Model: MetroMax 'Q'
Alternate: Amco
1. Five (5) tier high with open grid shelving.

2. Four (4) 86" high posts.
3. Two (2) no. 5MP casters per unit.
4. Two (2) no. 5MPB locking casters per unit.
5. Two (2) bottom shelves equipped with sheet pan drying rack assemblies.
ITEM NO. 262 HAND SINK

QUANTITY 6
Manufacturer: Advance Tabco

Model: 7-PS-54

Alternate:
1. Hand Sink, wall model, 14" wide x 10" front-to-back x 5" deep bowl.
2. Splash mount faucet with wrist blade operation.
3. Basket drain and wall bracket.
4. P-Trap assembly, delete open/close drain valve.
5. Soap and Towel Dispensers by Owner.
6. 12” high custom fabricated removable end splashes on sides as required by code.
7. Special InstructionsDivision 22 to provide temperature adjustment valves as required
ITEM NO. 601 HOT WATER DISPENSER

QUANTITY 1
Manufacturer: Hatco
Model: AWD-12
Alternate:
1. Water treatment system.

2. Cord and plug assembly, NEMA L6-30P.
3. Plumbing kit.
4. Stainless steel dormont water disconnect, sized to accommodate equipment.
5. Provide grommetted hole in countertop to accommodate utility requirements.
6. Dormont S/S water line with disconnect.
7. Run from filter to water connection.
ITEM NO. 614 FILL FAUCET

QUANTITY 2
Manufacturer: T&S
Model: B-0610
Alternate: ---
1. Pot Filler Faucet, splash-mounted, 8" centers, vacuum breaker, flexible S/S hose, 60"
long, hooked nozzle with self-closing valve, ½" IPS female inlets, built-in check valves.
2. 12" square 12 ga. S/S wall plate with hose rack with radius corners.
3. Install at 48" A.F.F. by Division 22. Coordinate height of backflow preventor with highest
water level of associated equipment.
ITEM NO. 695 INDUCTION RANGE

QUANTITY 1
Manufacturer: Cooktek
Model: MC2502F
Alternate:
1. Electric countertop induction range, two (2) burner.

2. Ceramic glass surface with rotary power knob.
3. Cord and plug assembly, dedicated circuit required. NEMA 6-30P
4. KEC to provide Vollrath induction pans as follows: One (1) large stock pot, One (1) 7qt
sauce pan, and Two (2) additional pans, size and shape as selected by Owner.
ITEM NO. 706 UNDERCOUNTER ICE MACHINE

QUANTITY 1
Manufacturer: Scotsman
Model: UC2024SA-1
Alternate:
1. Ice machine to be located below countertop, coordinate with counter as required.

2. Cube size to be small cubes
3. Cord and plug assembly.
4. Prodigy floor mount kit model no. KPUFM26.
5. S/S water disconnect kit.
6. Drain to floor sink.
7. Coordinate interconnection of ice machine to remote filter system.
ITEM NO. 735 TILT BRAISING PAN - 15 GAL

QUANTITY 2
Manufacturer: Groen
Model: BPM-15GA
Alternate:
1. Manual tilt.
2. Advanced Controls
3. S/S Construction
4. Steamer pan inserts.
5. Pan Carrier.
6. Etch marks
7. Flanged feet. Secure to floor with non-corrosive anchors.
8. Provide quantities and sizes required: Dormont Model#VER-KITCF-2S-48 Gas

Connector Kit, 48" long, double Swivel couplings with SafetyQuick fittings with coiled
9. Trench Liners To Consist of::
10. S/S trench liner by 11400. Installation by G.C.
11. Custom Fabricated or IMC/Teddy
12. IKG grating Type "D"
13. Fibergrate: Gray #2 1" Thick, 1 1/2" squares mesh, Quartz grit top. Provide in two (2)
equal sections, all ends to be finished ends.
14. 14 gayge S/S liner.
15. Klein no. 1834-1010-100 basket drain.
16. Klein no. 1870-1001-3251 safety chain.
17. Location of trench liner is critical. G.C. and 11400 to verify location prior to concrete
pour. Oversize trench liner block out to accommodate equipment pour path.
18. Classic Controls
ITEM NO. 801 S/S CORNER GUARDS

QUANTITY 1

Model: ---
Alternate:
1. Caulk and seal at wall with clear silicone.

2. 18 ga. stainless steel corner guards located at all exposed corners of kitchen, full height.
Secure to wall with hidden fasteners.
3. Quantity of One (1) equal to One (1) Lot to be located at all exposed corners.
ITEM NO. 806 WALL MOUNTED CHEMICAL SHELF

QUANTITY 1
Manufacturer: Metro
Model: 12WS12C
Alternate: ---
1. Verify height with Owner

2. Verify shelf spacing with Owner
3. Locate per plans
ITEM NO. 825 REVERSE OSMOSIS SYSTEM
QUANTITY 1
Manufacturer: 3M
Model: Custom Fabricated
Alternate:
1. Reverse Osmosis (3M Model / ScaleGard HP) system to serve cold (Treated/Filtered)
water for equipment. (NON-Treated/NON-Filtered should not be connected to RO
system).
2. Reverse Osmosis to produce up to 1040 Gallons per day from a single SQC RO
Membrane.
3. Reverse Osmosis to incorporate adjustable filtered blend valve to adjust output TDS
levels.
4. Reverse Osmosis to have on-board real-time TDS monitor to read inlet and outlet TDS
levels.
5. Reverse Osmosis system to have integrated IMPACT design Chlorine/Chloramines 0.2-
micron SQC design Pre filter.
6. Inlet water shut off vale, pre-filter flushing valve, inlet/outlet gauges, (tank shut off valve,
tank sample valve and pressure relieve valve included with system tank and install kits
assembly).
7. System to be used with 40 gallon (actual draw down capacity) tank.
8. System to be supplied by a dedicated 120 Volt and 15 Amp circuit.
9. Recommended to have external sediment pre-filter for prolonged system life.
10. Recommended to have external carbon post filter.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 11 50 00
KILNS AND HOODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Prefabricated electric kiln with vent and furniture kit.
2. Electric ventilating hood.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 23: Mechanical Connections.
B. Division 26: Electrical, power wiring to electric kilns.
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard product data, including descriptive

literature, specifications, installation instructions, and maintenance instructions.
A. Deliver components in manufacturers protective packaging. Deliver assembled as much

as possible.
B. Do not deliver until interior areas of building are completely enclosed and dry. Store in a
dry area away from construction operations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
2.2 ELECTRIC KILN
A. Kiln: Galvanized 16-gauge frame and 12 gauge legs; sectional construction; 10-sides 3”
thick sidewalls, top loading; 2” brick top row of brick without element grooves; twist-lock
spring latches; galvanized steel base covers reversible brick bottom, folds up under
stainless steel case on all sides.
1. Sentry controller
2. Accessories: Vent and Furniture Kit.
a. (8) C-23H ½ shelves (20” round x ¾” thick)
b. 1-1/2” wide square posts, 8 of each
3. Electrical:
a. Temperature: 2350F max.
b. 48 amps, single phase, 11500 watts, 6-50R NEMA; 60 breaker
c. Circuit Copper Wire Size: 6 gauge
Kilns and Vent Hoods 11 50 00 - 1

d. TUV tested to CSA and UL Standard 499
B. Acceptable product: Model NoTnF-24-3 by Paragon.
2.3 KILN VENTILATING HOOD
A. Exhaust Fan: Two-speed, 200 low and 265 high CFM .
B. Motor: 2 speed control Fan motor with on-off switch and plug.
C. Accessories: Outside venting kit and overhead counterweight pulley system and hose,
clamps, and external mounting plate.
1. Hood diameter: 37 inches

2. Hose diameter: 6 inches
D. Acceptable Product: Vent-A-Kiln Model 1347/500 by Vent-A-Kiln Corporation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Set all items square, level, plumb, aligned with surrounding construction, in proper planes
to other work, securely anchored in place.
B. Hook up to utility connections required for operation of items of this Section required
under Divisions 23 and 26.
C. Perform work carefully. Do not mar equipment or surrounding work.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Test operation of equipment. Verify all functions and combination of functions are fully
operational.
B. Adjust, repair or replace as required any equipment that does not function properly.
END OF SECTION
Kilns and Vent Hoods 11 50 00 - 2

SECTION 11 52 14
PROJECTORS AND PROJECTION SCREENS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Ceiling-mounted projector at cafeteria
2. Electrically operated, front projection screens.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. ALR: Ambient light rejection; for specular reflective viewing surfaces, measured as the
percentage of ambient light striking the viewing surface that has equal angles of
incidence and reflection.
B. Gain: Ratio of light reflected from viewing surface material to that reflected
perpendicularly from a magnesium carbonate surface as determined in accordance with
SMPTE RP 94.
C. Half-Gain Angle: The angle, measured from the axis of the viewing surface to the most
central position on a perpendicular plane through the horizontal centerline of the viewing
surface, where the gain is half of the peak gain.
A. Product Data: Technical data including product technical specifications, dimensions,

features and options, finish, options and features, mounting and installation, and
maintenance instructions.
1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and electrical characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: Show mounting and connection of projector and controls. Show layouts
and types of front-projection screens. Include the following:
1. Drop heights.
2. Location of seams in viewing surfaces.
3. For end mounted motors, location of screen centerline relative to ends of screen
case.
4. Anchorage details, including connection to supporting structure for suspended
units.
5. Details of juncture of screen case or trim with adjacent finishes.
6. For electrically operated units, wiring diagrams and location of wiring connections.
7. Accessories.
C. Samples: Submit samples of exposed finish and for each color and finish specified, in
typical sizes.
Projector and Projection Screens 11 52 14 - 1

A. Maintenance Data: Submit for projector and for front projection screens to include in
A. Source Limitations for Projection Screens: Obtain front projection screens from single
manufacturer. Obtain viewing surfaces and accessories, including mounting hardware,
from screen manufacturer.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver projector until mounting platform is installed

and power and connections are available for activation. Do not deliver projector or front
projection screens until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in installation
spaces is complete and dry, and temporary or permanent HVAC system is operating and
maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions planned for building occupants
during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Store projector and front projection screens in manufacturer's protective packaging and
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of projector and front-projection screens with adjacent
construction, including ceiling suspension systems, light fixtures, HVAC system
components, fire suppression system, and partitions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Viewing Surface and Masking Materials:

1. Mildew Resistance Rating: Zero or 1 when tested in accordance with ASTM G21.
2. Flame Resistance: Passes NFPA 701.
3. Flame Spread Index: Not greater than 75 when tested in accordance with
ASTM E84.
2.2 PROJECTORS
A. General Requirements: Ceiling mounted dual laser projector.

1. Basis of Design: Model PT-RZ890U by Panasonic.
2. Surface Mounting Configuration: Mounted directly to wall or ceiling, as indicated
on Drawings, with concealed mounting.
3. Projector Cage: As shown.

2.3 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED, FRONT PROJECTION SCREENS
A. General Requirements: Manufacturer's standard units consisting of case, screen, motor,

controls, mounting accessories, and other components necessary for a complete
installation. Provide units that are listed and labeled as an assembly by UL or another
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined
in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
2. Screen Mounting: Top edge securely anchored to rigid metal roller and bottom
edge formed into a pocket holding a metal rod, with ends of rod protected by plastic
caps.
B. Surface-Mounted, Metal-Encased, Electrically Operated Screen: Motor-in-roller unit with

screen case fabricated from formed-steel sheet or from aluminum extrusions with
manufacturer's standard finish and matching end caps.
1. Basis of Design Product: Draper Inc; Premier XL Motorized Screen.
2. Controls: Remote, key-operated, three-position control switch installed in
recessed device box with flush cover plate matching other electrical device cover
plates in room where switch is installed.
a. Provide control switches for each screen.
b. Provide power supply for low-voltage systems.
c. Provide locking cover plates for switches.
d. Provide key-operated, power-supply switch.
e. Provide remote control, consisting of battery powered transmitter and
receiver that operates screen and projector.
f. Provide video interface control for connecting to projector. Projector provides
signal to raise or lower screen.
3. Motor in Roller: Instant-reversing motor of size and capacity recommended by
screen manufacturer; with permanently lubricated ball bearings, automatic
thermal-overload protection, preset limit switches to automatically stop screen in
up and down positions, and positive-stop action to prevent coasting. Mount motor
inside roller with vibration isolators to reduce noise transmission.
4. Screen Mounting: Top edge securely anchored to rigid metal roller and bottom
edge formed into a pocket holding a 3/8-inch- diameter metal rod with ends of rod
protected by plastic caps.
a. Roller for motor in roller is supported by vibration- and noise-absorbing
supports.
5. Tab Tensioning: Provide units that have a durable low-stretch cord, such as
braided polyester, on each side of screen that is connected to edge of screen by
tabs to pull screen flat horizontally.
C. Suspended, Electrically Operated Screens with Automatic Ceiling Closure, with Motor-
in Roller, and with Tab Tensioning: Units designed and fabricated for suspended
mounting; with bottom of case composed of two panels, fully enclosing screen, motor,
and wiring; one panel hinged and designed to open and close automatically when screen
is lowered and fully raised, the other removable or openable for access to interior of
case.
1. Basis of Design Products:
a. Draper Inc; Premier XL Motorized Screen.
2. Provide metal or metal-lined wiring compartment.

3. Screen Case: Made from metal.

4. Provide screen case constructed to be installed with underside flush with ceiling.
5. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Prime painted.
6. HDTV Format Screen: 16:9 with tensioners.
D. Matte-White Viewing Surface: Peak gain of not less than 0.9, and gain of not less than
0.8 at an angle of 50 degrees from the axis of the screen surface.
1. Material: Vinyl-coated, glass-fiber fabric or vinyl sheet.
2. Mildew-Resistance Rating: Zero or 1 when tested according to ASTM G 21.
3. Flame Resistance: Passes NFPA 701.
4. Flame-Spread Index: Not greater than 75 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
5. Seamless Construction: Provide screens, in sizes indicated, without seams.
6. Edge Treatment: Black masking borders.
7. Size of Viewing Surface: As scheduled.
8. Provide extra drop length of dimensions and at locations indicated.
a. Color: Black.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install front projection screens at locations indicated on Drawings to comply with screen
B. Install front projection screens with screen cases in position and in relation to adjoining
construction indicated. Securely anchor them to supporting substrate in a manner that
produces a smoothly operating screen that, when lowered, has flat viewing surface and
plumb vertical edges.
1. Install low voltage controls in accordance with NFPA 70 and complying with
a. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway, except in accessible ceiling spaces
and in gypsum board partitions, where unenclosed wiring method may be
used. Use UL listed plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including
plenum ceilings. Conceal raceway and cables, except in unfinished spaces.
2. Test electrically operated units to verify that screen controls, limit switches,
closures, and other operating components are in optimum functioning condition.
3. Test manually operated units to verify that screen operating components are in
optimum functioning condition.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 11 61 43
STAGE CURTAINS AND TRACKS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Front and rear stage curtains.
2. Tracks, hardware, and fittings.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, specifications and

installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate details of installation and erection, including adjoining

conditions and necessary clearances; show actual dimensions and methods at joining
work.
C. Samples: Submit 36" square samples of standard color swatches for selection; submit
flameproofed samples of selected color for final approval; submit 6" long track sections
specified finish.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Hang and trim curtains after construction is completed and building has been cleaned.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Furnish warranty to repair or replace within thirty days any item found defective within
two years including materials and workmanship.
B. Ordinary wear and defects due to improper usage are excepted.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Curtains as manufactured by KM Fabrics, as follows:
Stage Curtain and Tracks 11 61 43 - 1

1. Front Curtain: “Memorable” 25 ounce, 100 percent cotton fabric, flame-retardant.

2. Rear Curtain: “Princess” 16 ounce, 100 percent cotton fabric, flame-retardant.
B. Cyclorama Scrim Drop, Basis of Design: Scrim Drop by S&K Theatrical Draperies.
1. 100 percent cotton fabric, flame-retardant,
C. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Karma Corporation.
2. J. R. Clancy, Inc.
3. Secoa Stage
D. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 00.
2.2 CURTAIN
A. Curtain Fabrics: Crescent Synthetic Velour to conform to following minimum

requirements:
1. Front Curtain
a. Weight per linear yard (unflameproofed): 20 oz.
b. Backing ends per inch: 51.
c. Ground ends per inch: 51.
d. Pile tufts per inch: 1658.
e. Picks per inch: 94.
f. Pile height: 130/1000.
2. Curtain materials shall be fully flameproofed by immersion process.
3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
4. Acceptable Product: Crescent Velour by Texas Scenic Co.
B. Rear and Side Curtains – Black Crescent Velour – 20 oz. by KM

a. Match curtains
C. Valance Curtain: Same fabric and color as house curtain.
D. Snap Rings and Trim Chains: Verify length of attachment of curtain to carrier at tracked
drapes on shop drawings.
E. Thread: Comply with shrinkage characteristics and composition of fabric; colors to

match face colors.
F. Grommets: No. 2 size, brass or plated steel.
G. Tie Lines: 36" No. 4 braided cotton or nylon.
H. Curtain Chains: Galvanized or plated No. 6 jack chain in separate sleeve sewed into
bottoms of curtains to have sewn into bottom hem and held 4" above bottom of curtain.
I. Border Chains: Galvanized or plated No. 4 jack chain in separate sleeve sewed into
bottoms of curtains to have sewn into bottom hem and held 4" above bottom of border.

2.3 CURTAIN TRACKS
A. Heavy Duty Curtain Track:

1. 100 Track by Texas Scenic
2. Track shall be of 14 ga (1.980 mm) galvanized construction, entirely enclosed
except for the slot in the bottom. Each section of track less than 20 ft (6,096 mm)
shall be in one continuous piece. Splice clamps shall be permitted for section
lengths over 20 ft (6,096 mm).
3. Carriers shall be constructed of nylon, supported from two heavy-duty polyethylene
wheels held in the ball bearing by a nickel-plated steel rivet. Each carrier shall be
equipped with a free-moving swivel and sufficient trim chain to accommodate a
curtain S-hook. Each carrier shall have a back-pack. Rubber washers shall be
provided between each back-pack and carrier to reduce noise.
4. The Master Carrier block shall be constructed of plated steel having two cable clips
to clamp the cord to the carrier. Four wheels in pairs identical to the single carrier
above shall support the block.
5. Live and dead end pulleys shall be adjustable, equipped with oil-impregnated
sleeve bearing wheels on adequately guarded plated steel housings. End stops at
each track end and one adjustable, demountable floor pulley shall be furnished.
Stretch-resistant, fiberglass center operating cord shall be 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) in
diameter.
6. Track shall be rigged for bi-parting operation with a 36 inch (914.4 mm) center
overlap. Hanging clamps shall be provided for suspension at 6 ft (1,829 mm) foot
maximum intervals.
B. Valance Curtain Track:

1. Steel track and accessories (CWANA).
2. Acceptable Product: H&H Dead Hung track by J.R. Clancy, Inc.
C. Carriers:
1. Master Carriers: Two clamps for attachment of operating cord, two plated swivels
with 3" to 6" trim chains for curtain attachment.
2. Single Carriers: Two nylon wheels with ball bearings and "hollow center" design
to bypass operating line; single plated swivels with 3" to 6" trim chains and rubber
spacers; one single carrier for each 12" of track length plus two spares each track
section.
3. End Stacking Devices: Manufacturer's standard device to stack drapery at track
ends.
D. Battens: Curtain Battens: Fabricate battens from steel pipe, ASTM A53, Grade A,
Schedule 40, with a minimum number of joints. Connect pipe with a drive-fit pipe sleeve
not less than 18 inches (450 mm) long, and secure with four flush rivets, plug welds,
threaded couplings, or other equally secure method. Shop-paint completed pipe battens
with black paint with 1 inch (25 mm) wide yellow stripe at the center of each batten
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Perform shop and field welding in full compliance with AWS D1.1 for full strength welds.

Use electronic welding where possible. Clean welds of flux, slag and spatter before
painting. Wire brush or grind if necessary.
B. Machine finish operating parts. Smooth edges adjacent to line and cable ways.
C. Finish hand touchable and people level items smoothly without sharp corners or edges.
D. Clean fabricated steel work, including equipment, supports and framing. Apply primer
and minimum one coat of finish paint. Where necessary for full coverage, paint before
assembly. Retouch as necessary.
E. Fit items with proper allowances for stretch and shrinkage, or expansion and contraction;
edges, corners and joints true and properly aligned.
F. Use only clean, new fabrics and fittings. Finish items with smooth seams and hems. No
sags, ripples or puckers. Check hang and trim before shipping.
G. Run curtain fabric with pile in vertical up direction. Run fabric full height, no horizontal
seams.
H. Sewn flameproofing certification label on back of each curtain at bottom of stage hem,
off stage.
I. House Curtain:
1. Box pleats at top of panels, 12" on center; reinforce with 3-1/2" jute webbing.
2. Attach grommets through pleats and webbing, double grommets at ends; attach to
track carriers by plated drapery spring snap hooks or plated "S" hooks.
3. Center edges of each panel faced back with minimum 30" width of fabric and hand
tacked entire length with continuous catch stitching spaced four inches apart.
4. 4" hems on offstage edge; 6" double-turned hem at bottom, enclosing chain
sleeve.
5. Fullness: 50 percent sewn into curtain.
J. Valance Curtain:
1. Reinforce tops with 3-1/2" jute webbing, grommets at 12" on center, double
grommets at ends.
2. Form 4" side hems and 6" bottom hem with chain sleeve.
3. Height: 16" tall dead-hung valance curtain.
4. Fullness: 50 percent sewn into curtain.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Position items accurately to plumb line and level.
B. Maintain maximum headroom and clearance at all points.

C. Do required cutting, drilling, tapping and welding necessary to properly install work.
D. Clean and retouch field welds and abraded painted surfaces with matching primers and
finishes.
E. Hang and adjust ceiling pieces. Check trim of hanging elements. Adjust if required.
F. Install battens by suspending at heights indicated with steel cables, : 1/4 inch (7 mm)
diameter, 7x19 galvanized steel aircraft cable with a breaking strength of 7,000 ounds,
spaced to support load . Do not exceed 10 feet (3 m) o.c. between cables Secure cables
either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and
appropriate to substrate and that will not deteriorate or fail with age or elevated
temperatures. Attach other cable end to pipe clamps with turnbuckles, moused or fixed
with nuts after adjustment, to prevent loosening. Provide fittings complying with cable
manufacturer's written recommendations for size, number, and method of installation,
including a drop-forged galvanized turnbuckle to allow for leveling.
A. Instruct Owner's representatives in safe operation, servicing, care and maintenance of

items, including storage of curtains.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 11 66 00
ATHLETIC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Basketball backstops, interior and exterior, including supports, safety stop,
backboards, goals, nets, and operating winch.
2. Volleyball system.
3. Soccer goals and nets.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 26: Attachment of lights, wiring junction boxes, conduit and final connection.
A. Product Data: Submit specifications and installation instructions for each item.
B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details including support from structure.
A. Deliver products in manufacturer's packaging with installation, adjustment, and operating

instructions.
B. Handle and store to avoid damage.
1.5 WARRANTIES
A. Provide manufacturer's limited lifetime warranty on backstops, scoreboards, and

equipment from date of acceptance of completed installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. AALCO Manufacturing, Inc., 1650 Avenue H, St. Louis, MO 63125
2. ADP Lemco
3. Daktronics
4. Draper Shade and Screen Co., Inc., Spiceland, Indiana, 47385
5. Fair-Play
6. Institutional Products, Inc.
7. Nevco
8. Performance Sports Systems, Inc.
9. Porter Athletic Equipment Co.
Athletic Equipment 11 66 00 - 1
2.2 PRODUCTS
A. Fixed Basketball Backstops, Wall-Mounted:

1. Basis of Design, Backstop: GillPorter Center strut Backboard Package, Model
20810C03 with Power Flex Competition Goal and Pro-Pad backboard pad.
a. Color: Red
2. Basis of Design, Wall-Mount: Gill/Porter SAF-Strap wall mount kit without Height
Adjuster, Model 10797120
B. Volleyball Assemblies:
1. Basis of Design: Aluminum Volleyball Net System by Sports Imports including the
following components:
a. Model AL7 Aluminum pole
b. Model KA25 floorplate and sleeve
c. Model HDNR-B Heavy Duty net ratchet
d. Model HM50 net
e. Model NA2 Net antenna
f. Model FP1 - black safety pad
g. Model PS1 free standing official stand with padding
h. 2 Pole storage carts
C. Soccer Goals and Nets:
1. Nets: Porter Soccer Goal Netting, square, braided nylon rope. Model 00491824, 8
feet by 24 feet or as otherwise shown or selected by Architect.
2. Goals: Kwik Goal Pro Premium World Competition Soccer Goal, 8 by 24 feet.
D. Basis of Design, Wall Pads at Gymnasia: SuperSafe Wall Pads by GillPorter Athletics.
1. Thickness: 3 inches unless otherwise shown.
2. Standards:
a. ASTM F2440 for impact protection
b. NFPA 286 for fire-protection
c. Colors, Striping, Accents, Digits, Logos, and Graphics: As directed by Architect
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Verify height of backboardand locations of scoreboards with Architect.
B. Provide controllers to Owner for secure storage.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Securely fasten equipment to structure plumb and level in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions.
B. Support backstops from 3-1/2" outside diameter, pipe anchored to structural framing
members by means of the manufacture's die formed support fittings.
C. Winch: Mount winch minimum of 12'-0" above finish in location approved by Architect.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust limit switches and backboards to assure proper position.
B. Adjust each piece of equipment to operate properly.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 11 68 13
PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Design, engineering, fabrication, supply, delivery, and installation of

complete age-appropriate playground structure for grades 4 through 6.
1. Section 03 30 53 “Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete” for foundations for
playground equipment.
2. Section 10 73 16 “Fabric Shade Canopies” for playground shelter.
3. Section 32 18 21 “Protective Playground Surfacing.”
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Age-Appropriate: Term that describes equipment scale to include platform height, fall
height and maximum equipment height, that allows safe and successful use by children
of a specific chronological age; mental and physical ability; and anthropometric
measurement equipment until installation.
B. Play Event: A piece of manufactured playground equipment that supports one or more
play activities.
C. Protective Barrier: An enclosing device around an elevated surface that prevents both
inadvertent and deliberate attempts to pass through the device.
D. Use Zone: The area beneath and immediately adjacent to a play structure or equipment
that is designated for unrestricted circulation around equipment, and on whose surface
it is predicted that a user would land when falling from or exiting the equipment.
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and

procedures related to installation of playground equipment.
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard product data, descriptive literature,

specifications, and installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: For playground equipment.

1. Include fabrication and installation details.
Playground Equipment 11 68 13 - 1
2. Show play events, platform mounting heights, locations of supplementary

supports, and accessories.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer’s color chart showing full range of colors
available for factory-applied finishes.
A. Delegated-Design Submittal: For playground structure and foundation system.
B. Qualifications Data: For fabricator and installer.
C. Design Mixtures: For concrete mixture employed for playground foundations.
A. Maintenance Data: For playground equipment to include in operation and maintenance

manuals. Include recommended preventive maintenance, inspection frequency and
techniques, periodic adjustments, lubricants, and cleaning requirements.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer with at least 10 years’ experience

in the design, engineering, manufacturing, and installation of playground structures.
B. Erector / Installer Qualifications: An experienced erector having minimum 10 years’

documented experience, and who specializes in erecting and installing work similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to
manufacturer.
A. Concrete: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M and ACI 301
B. Deliver equipment and assembly hardware packages in wooden crates, with non-ferrous
strapping.
C. Handle components in manner to avoid damage during shipping, receiving, storage, and
installation.
D. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel
members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and
spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and
deterioration.
1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion,
damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace
damaged materials or components as directed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Attached Appendix of products by Landscape Structures, Inc. establish

the design intent for the Work of this Section.
B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements established

by Basis of Design selection, other acceptable playground equipment manufacturers
may include but not be limited to the following:
1. Park and Play Structures: Point of Contact: Jeff Mankins, Recreation Consultant;
210-468-9032 jmankins@playandpark.com.
2. Fun Abounds: Point of Contact: Mike Giehl, VP of Sales. 512-636-8260
mike@fabplaygrounds.com.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain playground equipment structure and play events as complete
units, including fittings, accessories, bases, and anchorage devices, from single source
A. Structural Performance: Playground equipment assemblies, including anchorages and

supports, shall withstand design loads indicated within limits and under conditions
indicated.
1. Structural Design for Wind Forces: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Design Wind Speed: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Deck and Platform Deflection: Maximum 1/360 of the span of the frame when
exposed to a uniform live load of 40 lbs/ft. (585 N/m).
4. Design footings for maximum soil bearing pressure as indicated in Geotechnical
Investigation Report.
B. Comply with provisions of Consumer Products Safety Commission (CPSC): A Handbook

for Public Playground Safety.
1. Provide play events that meet the child safety performance requirements
described in CPSC Pub No 325, and ASTM F1487.
C. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the USDOJ's "2010 ADA
Standards for Accessible Design," ICC A117.1, and Texas Accessibility Standards
(TAS).
D. Design playground equipment to be age appropriate for the age group designated to use
it.
2.3 PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT
A. Refer to Drawings and the attached Material Specifications Quote: 1170450-01-04JPI

from Landscape Structures, Inc. for basis of design for playground equipment and
structures and associated play event components.
B. All metal elements shall be shop-coated with high grade corrosion-resistant primer and
durable UV-resistant, weather-resistant, chip-resistant, polyester powder-coat finish.
C. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s complete line.
2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Design components and field connections required for erection to permit easy
assembly.
1. Mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond with previously prepared
erection drawings, diagrams, and instructions.
2. Fabricate frame and supports from steel. Preassemble in shop to greatest extent
possible. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units
for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Form bent metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
C. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight
edges.
D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing
loads.
E. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners where possible. Fabricate slip fit connections exposed to weather to exclude
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
2.5 STEEL FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A153/A153M

for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A123/A123M for other steel and iron
products.
adhesion.
B. Surface Preparation of Galvanized Steel: Prepare galvanized-steel surfaces for shop

priming by thoroughly cleaning steel of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter,
and treating with etching cleaner, or in accordance with SSPC-SP 16.
C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer in accordance with

minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage
of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
D. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Minimum dry film thickness of 3.0 mils. Comply
with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and
applying and baking finish.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine area where playground equipment will be installed to ensure site conditions,
including but not limited to subgrade preparation, area surface/sub-surface drainage,
and any other condition required for the proper installation and performance of the
playground equipment is acceptable.
B. Proceed with installation of equipment only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Verify locations of playground perimeter and pathways. Verify that playground layout
and equipment locations comply with requirements for each type and component of
equipment.
B. Coordinate final elevation of playground equipment with finished elevation of any

protective playground surfacing that may be designated for the Use Zone.
C. Layout of the entire outdoor play area shall be staked before excavation begins to include
the following:
1. All play event configuration access and egress points.
2. Use zone perimeters.
3. Hard surface areas and pathway widths.
4. Exterior plant material and planters.
5. Walls, fences, and other structures.
D. Provide sufficient space between all adjacent play events and individual play events for
play activities and circulation. Moving and rotating play events shall be located away
from circulation to prevent collisions.
E. Foundation Excavation: Excavate to neat clean lines in undisturbed soil. Remove loose
soil and foreign matter from excavation and moisten earth before placing concrete.
1. Waste material from excavations shall be disposed off site.
F. Provide forms where required due to unstable soil conditions and for perimeter of pole
base at grade. Secure and brace forms and foundation tube, sleeve, or anchor bolts in
position, to prevent displacement during concreting.
G. Place concrete, as specified in Section 03 30 53 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place

Concrete." Compact concrete in place by using vibrators. Place concrete immediately
after mixing. Compact concrete in place by using vibrators.
H. Moist cure exposed concrete for not less than seven days or use non-staining curing
compound.
I. Trowel exposed concrete surfaces to a smooth, dense finish, free of trowel marks, and
uniform in texture and appearance. Provide positive slope for water runoff to perimeter
of concrete base.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install playground equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and

recommendations.
B. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent
contact with framing. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies
in elevations and alignment.
C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with

grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous
paint.
D. Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written approval from
playground equipment system manufacturer.
E. Set equipment so fall heights and elevation requirements for age group use and
accessibility are within required limits.
F. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before
permanently fastening. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for
discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed components that do not comply with
specified requirements. Replace items with damaged or deteriorated finishes or
procedures.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing, and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.
C. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is
damaged or missing, and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to
comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
B. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's

written instructions. Maintain playground system in a clean condition during construction
and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.
END OF SECTION
Attachment: Quote: 1170450-01-04JPI from Landscape Structures Inc.
Material Specifications-Argyle #4 ES Playground
Material Specifications
Quote: 1170450-01-04JPI
PlayBooster® (5-12 years)
147425A- Clatterbridge 123 w/Barriers
Fasteners: Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless
steel (SST) per ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated (see specific product
installation/specifications).
CABLE: Made of tightly woven, polyester-wrapped, six stranded galvanized-steel cable with a
PVC wrapped galvanized steel core.
Clamps: Cast aluminum. Finish: ProShield, color specified.
Barrier: Weldment comprised of 1.900" (48,26 mm) O.D. RS-20 (.090" - .100") (2,28 mm-2,54
mm) galvanized steel tubing beam, 1.029" (26,14 mm) O.D. RS-20 (.070" - .080") (1,78 mm-
2,03 mm) galvanized steel tubing and 7 GA. (.179") (4,55 mm) HRPO sheet steel. Finish:
ProShield, color specified.
ATTACHMENT BRACKET: Fabricated from 11 GA. (.120") (3,04 mm) HRPO plate. Finish:
TenderTuff, color specified.
COVER PLATE: Fabricated from 12 GA. (.105") (2,66 mm) HRPO plate. Finish: ProShield, color
specified.
PLANK: Weldment comprised from 12 GA. (.105") (2,67 mm) HRPO plate with 5/16" (7,92 mm)
diameter perforated holes and threaded stainless steel inserts, plank measures 11 7/16" x 46
7/8" (290,50 mm x 1190,63 mm) long. Finish: TenderTuff, color specified.
MOUNTING BRACKET: Weldment comprised from 1/2" (12,7 mm) HRPO sheet steel, (2) 1/4" x
1 3/4" (6,35 mm x 44,45 mm) steel half clamps and 7/8" (22,23 mm) diameter 304L stainless
steel tube. Finish: ProShield, color specified.
169320C- Log Stepper 48" Deck w/2 Recycled Wood-Grain Handholds 1 Handrail DB Only
Right Handhold
Handhold Frame: Weldment comprised of 1.125" (28,58 mm) O.D. 11 GA. (.120") (3,04 mm)
steel tubing with 203 or 303 stainless steel inserts, with 5/8" (15,88 mm) internal threads and
1/4" (6,35 mm) HRPO steel plate. Finish: ProShield, tan in color.
Handrail: Weldment comprised of 1.125" (28,58 mm) O.D. x 11 GA (.120") (3,04 mm) steel
tubing with 203 or 303 stainless steel welded inserts with 3/8" (9,53 mm) internal threads.
Finish: TenderTuff, color specified.
Log Stepper Assy.: (Footer Post) Weldment comprised of 5" (127 mm) O.D. x 11 GA. (.120")
(3,04 mm) wall galvanized steel tubing and 3/16" (4,75 mm) HRPO steel plate. Finish:
ProShield, color specified. (Log Stepper-fully assembled) Glass reinforced wet cast solid pour
concrete product. Finish: Latex paint made for concrete, natural colors.
Poly Board: Recycled high-density polyethylene, cedar, mink or gray in color.
172666B- Corkscrew Climber w/Recycled Wood-Grain Handholds 72"Dk DB
Corkscrew: Weldment comprised of 1.900" (48,26 mm) O.D. RS-20 (.090"-.100") (2,28 mm-
2,54 mm) galvanized steel tubing, and 1.315" (33,40 mm) O.D. RS-20 (.080"-.090") (2,03 mm-
2,28 mm) galvanized steel tubing. Finish: ProShield, color specified.
220541A- GeoPlex Ground-To-Deck Double Climber 72"Dk Alum DB
Climbing Wall: Rotationally molded from U.V. stabilized linear low-density polyethylene, color
specified.
Barrier: Weldment comprised of 1.125" (28,58 mm) O.D. x 11 GA (.120") (3,04 mm) steel tube
per ASTM A513 with 203 or 303 stainless steel welded inserts with 5/8" (15,88 mm) internal
threads and 1/4" (6,35 mm) tabs. Finish: TenderTuff, color specified.
Locking Clamp: Rotationally molded from U.V. stabilized linear low-density polyethylene, color
specified. Wall measures 37” (939 mm) wide x 34” (863 mm) High.
Infill Panel: Recycled Permalene, color specified.
128252A- Loop Ladder 40"Dk DB
Offset Hanger Clamp Assembly: Cast aluminum. Finish: ProShield, color specified.
Handhold Panel: Permalene, color specified.
Loop Ladder: Weldment comprised of 1.125" (28,58 mm) O.D. x 11 GA (.120") (3,04 mm) black
steel tubing. Finish: TenderTuff, color specified.
Spacer Tube: Made from 6061-T6 aluminum 7/8" (22,23 mm) O.D. x 1 11/16" (42,85 mm).
Finish: ProShield, color specified.
152907A- Deck Link w/Barriers Steel end panels 1 Step
SteelX Panels: Zinc plated 7 GA (.179") (4,55 mm) HRPO flat steel. Finish: ProShield, color
specified.
Barrier: Weldment comprised of 1.125" (28,58 mm) O.D. x 11 Ga. (.120") (3,04 mm) wall steel
tubing, 5/8" (15,88 mm) O.D. steel bar with 203 or 303 stainless steel 3/8" (9,53 mm) threaded
inserts. Finish: TenderTuff, color specified.
Step Section: Formed from 12 GA (.105") (2,66 mm) sheet steel conforming to ASTM A1011.
Standing surface is 24 1/4" (615,95 mm) wide x 14" (356 mm) deep and is perforated with
5/16" (7,94 mm) diameter holes. Finish: TenderTuff, color specified.
152907B- Deck Link w/Barriers Steel end panels 2 Steps
SteelX Panels: Zinc plated 7 GA (.179") (4,55 mm) HRPO flat steel. Finish: ProShield, color
specified.
Barrier: Weldment comprised of 1.125" (28,58 mm) O.D. x 11 Ga. (.120") (3,04 mm) wall steel
tubing, 5/8" (15,88 mm) O.D. steel bar with 203 or 303 stainless steel 3/8" (9,53 mm) threaded
inserts. Finish: TenderTuff, color specified.
Step Section: Formed from 12 GA (.105") (2,66 mm) sheet steel conforming to ASTM A1011.
Standing surface is 24 1/4" (615,95 mm) wide x 14" (356 mm) deep and is perforated with
5/16" (7,94 mm) diameter holes. Finish: TenderTuff, color specified.
202625A- Crest Climber w/Permalene Handholds
Cable Assy.: (Cable) Made of tightly woven polyester-wrapped, six-stranded galvanized-steel

cable with a polypropylene core. (Cable Connectors) 6063-T6 aluminum.
Handhold Panel: Recycled Permalene, color specified.
Steel Clamp: Fabricated from of 1/4" (6,35 mm) HRPO flat steel. Finish: ProShield, color
specified.
Net Clamp: Weldment comprised of 1/4" x 1 3/4" (6,35 mm x 44,45 mm) HRPO flat steel and
.375" (9,53 mm) stainless steel sheet. Finish: ProShield, color specified.
Cross Support: Weldment comprised of 2.375" (60,33 mm) O.D. RS40 (.130" - .140") (3,30 mm-
3,56 mm) wall galvanized steel tubing and 3/8" (9,53 mm) thick HRPO steel plate. Finish:
Support: Weldment comprised of 2.375" (60,33 mm) O.D. RS40 (.130" - .140") (3,30 mm-3,56
mm) wall galvanized steel tubing,3/8" (9,53 mm) thick stainless-steel plate, and 1/4" (6,35
mm) HRPO flat steel. Finish: ProShield®, color specified.
111228A- Square Tenderdeck
Deck Hanger Clamp Assembly: Cast aluminum. Finish: ProShield, color specified.
Square Deck: Flange formed from 12 GA (.105") (2,66 mm) sheet steel conforming to ASTM
A1011. Standing surface is perforated with 5/16" (7,92 mm) diameter holes. Deck face has (4)
slotted holes for face mounting components. The finished size measures 2 5/8" x 47" x 47"
(66,68 mm x 1194 mm x 1194 mm). Finish: TenderTuff, color specified.
111231A- Triangular Tenderdeck
Triangular Deck: Flange formed from 12 GA (.105") (2,66 mm) sheet steel conforming to ASTM
slotted holes for face mounting components. The finished size measures 2 5/8" x 37 3/4"
(66,68 mm x 958,85 mm). Finish: TenderTuff, color specified.
121948A- Kick Plate 8"Rise
Kick Plate: Fabricated from 11 GA (.120") (3,04 mm) HR flat steel. Finish: TenderTuff, brown or
gray in color.
121949A-Tri-Deck Kick Plate 8"Rise
gray in color.
122197A- 90* Triangular Tenderdeck
Triangular Deck: Flange formed from 12 GA (.105") (2,66 mm) sheet steel conforming to ASTM
slotted holes for face mounting components. The finished size measures 2 5/8" x 37 3/4"
(66,68 mm x 958,85 mm). Finish: TenderTuff, color specified.
152911B- Curved Transfer Module Left 40"Dk DB
Deck Support: Weldment comprised of 3 1/2" (88,9 mm) O.D. RS-20 (.125") (3,17 mm)
galvanized steel tubing and 3/8" (9,53 mm) O.D. x 5" (127 mm) long CRS rod. Finish: ProShield,
color specified.
Deck: Flange formed from 12 GA (.105") (2,66 mm) HRPO sheet steel conforming to ASTM
A1011. Standing surface is perforated with 5/16" (7,92 mm) diameter holes and measures 29"
(737 mm) per (2) sides. Finish: TenderTuff, color specified.
Step Support: Weldment comprised of 1.660" (42,16 mm) O.D. RS-20 (.080" - .095") (2,03 mm-
2,41 mm) galvanized steel tubing and 1 3/4" x 1 3/4" x 1/8" (44,45 mm x 44,45 mm x 3,17 mm)
HR angle. Finish: ProShield, color specified.
Step Sections/Top Step Section: Formed from 12 GA (.105") (2,66 mm) HRPO sheet steel
conforming to ASTM A1011. Standing surface is 24 3/8" (619,13 mm) wide x 14" (355,6 mm)
deep and is perforated with 5/16" (7,92 mm) diameter holes. Finish: TenderTuff, color
specified.
Panels: Permalene, color specified.
Railings: Weldment comprised of 1.125" (28,58 mm) O.D. x 11 GA. (.120") (3,04 mm) steel
tubing with 203 or 303 stainless steel 3/8" (9,53 mm) threaded inserts. Finish: TenderTuff,
color specified.
115254A- Storefront Panel
Bracket: Formed 11 GA (.120") (3,04 mm) 5052 aluminum angles. Finish: ProShield, color
matched to panel.
Store Panel: One-color Permalene. Panel measures 35 1/2" (901,7 mm) wide x 37" (940 mm)
high, color specified.
120314B- Wire Barrier w/Wheel Above Deck
90o Bracket: Formed from 1/4" x 1 1/4" (6,35 mm x 31,75 mm) HRPO flat steel. Finish:
Wheel: 12" (305 mm) diameter cast A319.1 aluminum alloy. Shaft-303 stainless steel. Finish:
Wheel Bracket: Weldment comprised of formed 3/16" (4,75 mm) plate and 5/8" (15,88 mm)
O.D. shaft. Finish: ProShield, tan in color.
Wire Bracket: 3/16" (4,74 mm) Thick HRPO flat steel. Finish: ProShield®, black in color.
Wire Barrier: Weldment comprised of 5/8" (15,88 mm) solid steel vertical rails, 1 1/8" (28,58
mm) O.D. steel horizontal rails with 203 or 303 stainless steel welded inserts with 5/8" (15,88
mm) internal threads, 1 1/2" x 1 1/2" x 29 1/2" (38,1 mm x 38,1 mm x 749,3 mm) angle iron
and 1/4" (6,35 mm) diameter wire. Barrier has approximately 1 5/8" x 2 9/16" (41,28 mm x
65,02 mm) openings and measures 33 7/8" (860,43 mm) wide x 39 13/16" (1011,22 mm) high.
120314A- Wire Barrier Above Deck
90o Bracket: Formed from 1/4" x 1 1/4" (6,35 mm x 31,75 mm) HRPO flat steel. Finish:
Wire Barrier: Weldment comprised of 5/8" (15,88 mm) solid steel vertical rails, 1 1/8" (28,58
mm) O.D. steel horizontal rails with 203 or 303 stainless steel welded inserts with 5/8" (15,88
mm) internal threads, 1 1/2" x 1 1/2" x 29 1/2" (38,1 mm x 38,1 mm x 749,3 mm) angle iron
and 1/4" (6,35 mm) diameter wire. Barrier has approximately 1 5/8" x 2 9/16" (41,28 mm x
65,02 mm) openings and measures 33 7/8" (860,43 mm) wide x 39 13/16" (1011,22 mm) high.
169319A- Recycled Wood-Grain Lumber Panel
Barrier Rail: Weldment comprised of 1.125" (28,57 mm) O.D. 11 GA. (.120") (3.04 mm) steel
tubing with 203 or 303 stainless steel inserts, with 5/8" (15,87 mm) internal threads and 1/4"
(6,35 mm) HRPO steel plate. Finish: ProShield, tan in color.
Bracket: Formed from 1/4" x 1 1/4" (6,35 mm x 31,75 mm) HRPO flat steel. Finish: ProShield,
tan in color.
Poly Board: Recycled 1 1/2" x 3 1/2" (38,1 mm x 88,9 mm) and 1 1/2" x 5 1/2" (38,1 mm x
139,7 mm) high density polyethylene, cedar, or mink in color.
217909A- DigiFuse Barrier Panel Above Deck
DigiFuse Panel: Made from 1/4" (6,35 mm) thick aluminum sheet. Dye sublimation printed
digital artwork is fused onto the powder coated substrate.
218172A- DigiFuse Barrier Panel w/Medallions Above Deck
Spacer Tube: Made from 6061-T6 aluminum 7/8" (22,23 mm) O.D. Finish: ProShield, color
specified.
Medallion Plate: Made from .063” (1,60 mm) thick aluminum plate, 4” (101 mm) in diameter.
Finish: ProShield®, white in color with a clear coat finish.
DigiFuse Panel: Made from 1/4" (6,35 mm) thick aluminum sheet. Dye sublimation printed
digital artwork is fused onto the powder coated substrate.
111362A- Talk Tube 40' Tubing Kit PB
Hose Clamp: Band and housing made from 300 series stainless steel. Slotted screw with hex-
head and safety collar is cadmium-plated carbon steel.
Talk Tube Hose: Made from 1.75" (44,45 mm) O.D. HDPE conduit.
111363A- Talk Tube At Grade Mounted DB Only
Talk Tube Cover: One-color Permalene, Tan in color.
Bug Screen: Weave .011 (0,28 mm) Ga. charcoal fiberglass screen.
Talk Tube: Weldment comprised of 1.600" (42,16 mm) O.D. RS-40 (.108" - .132") (2,74 mm-
3,35 mm) galvanized steel tubing, 14 GA. (.079") (2,00 mm) cold rolled steel sheet zinc plate,
and 3/16" (4,75 mm) HRPO steel sheet. Finish: ProShield, color specified.
120902A- Handhold Leg Lift
Half Clamp: Cast aluminum. Finish: ProShield, color specified.
Hand Hold/Leg Lift: Weldment comprised of formed 7/8" (22,23 mm) O.D. x 11 GA (.120")
(3,04 mm) and 1/4" x 1 3/4" (6,35 mm x 44,45 mm) steel half clamps. Finish: TenderTuff, color
specified.
111404W- 156"Steel Post DB
111404Z- 182"Steel Post DB 44" Bury
111404E- 116"Alum Post DB
111404D- 124"Alum Post DB
111404C- 132"Alum Post DB
111404B- 140"Alum Post DB
111404A- 148"Alum Post DB
173594A- Log Crawl Tunnel DB Only
Log Crawl Tunnel Assembly: Weldment comprised of 1.900" (48,26 mm) O.D. RS20 (.090"-
.100") (2,29 mm-2,54 mm) wall galvanized steel tubing, 3/16" HRPO steel plate and 7" x 3" x
3/16" (178 mm x 76 mm x 4,75 mm) wall rectangular tube. (Log Crawl Tunnel assembled) Glass
reinforced wet cast solid pour concrete product. Finish: Latex paint made for concrete, natural
colors.
215186D- SkyWays Hip 35'x35' Shade 14' Entry Height
Column: Weldment comprised of 1-1/2” (38,1 mm) thick steel plate ASTM A 36, 3/4” (19,05
mm) thick steel plate ASTM A 36, 5” (127 mm) x 5” (127 mm) x 1/4” (6,35 mm) wall steel
tubing (HRS) ASTM A 500, and 4.5” (114 mm) O.D. x .188” (4,77 mm) wall galvanized steel
tubing ASTM A 500. Finish: Polyester Powder coat, color specified.
Hip Rafter: Weldment comprised of 1/2” (12,7 mm) thick steel plate A 36, 5” (127 mm) O.D.
x .188” (4,77 mm) wall steel tubing ASTM A 500, 4.5” (114 mm) O.D. x .188” (4,77 mm) wall
galvanized steel tubing ASTM A 500 and 1/2” (12,7 mm) O.D. steel rod ASTM A 500. Finish:
Polyester Powder coat, color specified.
Anchoring Hardware: Carbon Steel.
Exposed Hardware: Grade 8 Yellow Zinc.
Ridge Extension: Comprised of 5” (127 mm) O.D. x .188” (4,77 mm) wall galvanized steel tubing
ASTM A 500. Finish: Polyester Powder coat, color specified.
Fabric: Heavy duty, 62.9 mils (1.6 mm) thick professional grade shade fabric for tensioned
structures and other shade applications. Made from UV stabilized HDPE monofilament and
tape yarns. Specialized lock stitch knit for more air movement and better channeling of cooling
breezeways. Constructed to block up to 97.7% of harmful UV sun rays. Fade and tear resistant,
will not crack, rot, or fray. Tensile strength warp 142.75 lbs. weft 560.67 lbs. Tear strength warp
42.03 lb. and weft 80.70 lbs. Burst pressure 507.63 PSI. Live loads 5 psf. Remove fabric when
wind speed is expected to exceed 105 mph and snow load is expected to exceed 5 psf, per
International Building Code (IBC) 2012.
Crosspiece: Weldment comprised of 5” (127 mm) O.D. x .188” (4,77 mm) wall galvanized steel
tubing ASTM A 500, and 4.5” (114 mm) O.D. x .188” (4,77 mm) wall galvanized steel tubing
ASTM A 500. Finish: Polyester Powder coat, color specified.
182503C- Welcome Sign (LSI Provided) Ages 5-12 years Direct Bury
Post: Weldment comprised 2.375" (60,33 mm) O.D. RS20 (.095-.105) (2,41 mm-2,67 mm) wall
galvanized tube, 1/4" (6,35 mm) HRPO steel sheet and aluminum post cap. Finish: ProShield,
color specified.
Sign Panel: Panel is fabricated from 1/8" (.125”) (3,17 mm) aluminum plate. Finish: ProShield®,
gray in color. (Sign) Digital image is transferred to a 1/8" (.125”) (3,17 mm) ProShield coated
aluminum plate, then infused into the ProShield.
169316A- SlideWinder2 w/Tree Branch Support 72"Dk DB
Theme Support: Weldment comprised of 5.000" (127 mm) O.D. x 11 GA. (.120") (3,04 mm)
wall galvanized steel tubing, 3.500" (88,9 mm) O.D. RS20 (.125") (3,17 mm) wall galvanized
steel tubing, 3/16" (4,75 mm) HRPO steel plate and 3/16" (4,75 mm) stainless steel sheet.
Finish: Epoxy coated with a theme texture.
Rail Spacer: Fabricated from 1.312" (33,32 mm) O.D. x 16 Ga. (.065") (1,65 mm) steel tubing.
Rail: 1 1/8" (28,58 mm) O.D. 6061-T6 aluminum extrusion with 5/16" (7,92 mm) walls. Finish:
Slide Sections: Rotationally molded from U.V. stabilized linear low-density polyethylene, color
specified.
Exit Footer: Weldment comprised of 2.375" (60,33 mm) O.D. RS-20 (.095" - .105") (2,41 mm-
2,66 mm) galvanized steel tubing and 1/4" x 3" x 7 1/2" (6,35 mm x 76 mm x 191 mm) HRPO
steel mounting plate. Finish: ProShield, color specified.
222708B- WhooshWinder Slide 96"Dk DB
Lower Support: Weldment comprised of 1.900" (48,26 mm) O.D. RS20 (.090"-.100") (2,28 mm -
2,54 mm) galvanized steel tubing and 1/4" (6,35 mm) flat steel. Finish: ProShield, color
specified.
Rail: 1 1/8" (28,58 mm) O.D. 6061-T6 aluminum extrusion with 5/16" (7,92 mm) walls. Finish:
Slide Sections: Rotationally molded from U.V. stabilized linear low-density polyethylene, color
specified.
Exit Footer: Weldment comprised of 2.375" (60,33 mm) O.D. RS-20 (.095" - .105") (2,41 mm-
2,66 mm) galvanized steel tubing and 1/4" x 3" x 7 1/2" (6,35 mm x 76 mm x 191 mm) HRPO
steel mounting plate. Finish: ProShield, color specified.
Mid-Support: Weldment comprised of 1.900" (48,26 mm) O.D. RS20 (.090" - .100") (2,28 mm-
2,54 mm) galvanized steel tubing and 7 GA. (.179") (4,54 mm) HRPO steel strap. Finish:
174018A- Belt Seat ProGuard Chains for 8' Beam Height
Bolt Link: Stainless Steel
Chain/ProGuard: Steel 3/16" (4,75 mm) straight link chain, 800 lb. (362,87 kilograms) working
load limit. Finish: ProGuard.
Belt Seat: Molded from UV stabilized black EPDM rubber encapsulating a weldment comprised
of a 22 GA (.029") (0,74 mm) spring stainless steel sheet and (4) .105" (2,67 mm) thick
stainless steel washers. The belt seat elliptical shape measures 7" (178 mm) wide x 26" (660
mm) long x .700" (17,78 mm) thick.
177332A- Single Post Swing Frame 8' Beam Height Only
Post: See PlayBooster (PB) General Specifications.
Beam: Weldment comprised of tee clamps and 5" O.D. extruded 6005-T5 aluminum alloy tube
with a .125" wall. Finish: ProShield®, color specified.
177333A- Single Post Swing Frame Additional Bay 8' Beam Height Only
177351A- Molded Bucket Seat (5-12 yrs.) w/Harness ProGuard Chains for 8' Beam Height
Bucket Seat Assy: (Bucket Seat & Yoke) Rotationally molded from U.V. stabilized linear low-
density polyethylene, color specified. (Pipe bolt) Made from 1.125" (28,58 mm) O.D. 6005-T5
threaded anodized aluminum tube. (Bearings) UHMW PE lubricated. (Brackets) Made from
356-T6 aluminum.
Mounting Bracket: Cast from 535 aluminum magnesium.
Bumper: Molded from U.V. stabilized black EPDM rubber encapsulating 11 GA (.120") (3,04
mm) HRPO steel sheet.
Dbl. Pivot Block: Fabricated from 6061-T6 Aluminum with bronze oil impregnated bearing.
__________________________________________________________________________
Material Specifications
Quote: 1170450-01-04JPI
PlayShaper® (2-5 years)
153077A-Mini Summit Climber 48"Dk DB
Handhold Panel: Permalene, color specified.
Support: Weldment comprised of 2.375" (60,33 mm) O.D. RS-20 (.095" - .105") (2,41 mm-2,66
mm) galvanized steel tubing and 1/4" x 3" (6,35 mm x 76 mm) mounting plate. Finish:
Summit Climber: Rotationally molded from U.V. stabilized linear low-density polyethylene,
color specified.
185861C-Log Stepper 32"Deck w/2 Recycled Wood-Grain Handholds 1 Handloop and 1

Handrail Left Handhold
Handloop: Weldment comprised of 1.125" (28,58 mm) O.D. x 11 GA (.120") (3,04 mm) steel
tubing with 203 or 303 stainless steel inserts, with 3/8" (9,53 mm) internal thread. Finish:
Handrail: Weldment comprised of 1.125" (28,58 mm) O.D. x 11 GA (.120") (3,04 mm) steel
tubing with 203 or 303 stainless steel welded inserts with 3/8" (9,53 mm) internal threads.
Log Stepper Assy.: (Footer Post) Weldment comprised of 5" (127 mm) O.D. x 11 GA. (.120")
(3,04 mm) wall galvanized steel tubing and 3/16" (4,75 mm) HRPO steel plate. Finish:
ProShield, color specified. (Log Stepper-fully assembled) Glass reinforced wet cast solid pour
concrete product. Finish: Latex paint made for concrete, natural colors.
185862C-Wood Plank Wiggle Ladder 48"Deck DB
Spacer Panel: Permalene, tan in color.
Support (DB): Fabricated from 1.315" (33,40 mm) O.D. RS20 (.080"-.090") (2,03 mm - 2,28 mm)
galvanized steel tubing.
111237A-Square Tenderdeck
Square Deck: Flange formed from 12 GA (.105") (2,66 mm) sheet steel conforming to ASTM
slotted holes for face mounting components. The finished size measures 2 5/8" x 44 3/8" x 44
3/8" (66,68 mm x 1127,13 mm x 1127,13 mm). Finish: TenderTuff, color specified.
153020A-Curved Transfer Module 32"Dk Right DB
Deck Support: Weldment comprised of 3 1/2" (88,9 mm) O.D. RS-20 (.125") (3,17 mm)
galvanized steel tubing and 3/8" (9,53 mm) O.D. x 5" (127 mm) long CRS rod. Finish: ProShield,
color specified.
Deck: Flange formed from 12 GA (.105") (2,66 mm) HRPO sheet steel conforming to ASTM
A1011. Standing surface is perforated with 5/16" (7,92 mm) diameter holes and measures 29"
(737 mm) per (2) sides. Finish: TenderTuff, color specified.
Step Support: Weldment comprised of 1.660" (42,16 mm) O.D. RS-20 (.080" - .095") (2,03 mm-
2,41 mm) galvanized steel tubing and 1 3/4" x 1 3/4" x 1/8" (44,45 mm x 44,45 mm x 3,17 mm)
HR angle. Finish: ProShield, color specified.
Step Sections/Top Step Section: Formed from 12 GA (.105") (2,66 mm) HRPO sheet steel
conforming to ASTM A1011. Standing surface is 24 3/8" (619,13 mm) wide x 14" (355,6 mm)
deep and is perforated with 5/16" (7,92 mm) diameter holes. Finish: TenderTuff, color
specified.
Panels: Permalene, color specified.
Railings: Weldment comprised of formed 1 1/8" (28,58 mm) O.D. x 11 GA (.120") (3,04
mm) steel tubing, 3/16" (4,75 mm) thick HRPO flat steel, 3/16" (4,75 mm) thick HRPO steel
plate and 3/4" (19,05 mm) O.D. x 11 GA. (.120") (3,04 mm) stainless steel tubing. Finish:
179349A-Kick Plate 8"Rise
gray in color.
117946A-Wire Barrier Above Deck
Barrier: Weldment comprised of 1 1/8" (28,58 mm) O.D. steel horizontal rails with 203 or 303
stainless steel welded inserts with 5/8" (15,88 mm) internal threads, 1/4" x 1 1/4" (6,35 mm x
31,75 mm) HRPO flat steel and 1/4" (6,35 mm) diameter wire. Barrier measures 39 1/4"
(996,95 mm) wide x 30 13/16" (782,62 mm) high. Finish: TenderTuff, color specified.
Wire Bracket: 3/16" (4,74 mm) Thick HRPO flat steel. Finish: ProShield®, black in color.
139264A- Trail Tracker Reach Panel Ground Level
Angle: Fabricated from formed 11 GA (.120") (3,04 mm) HRPO sheet steel. Finish: ProShield,
color specified.
Panel: Two color Permalene panel measures 39 1/2" (1003,3 mm) wide x 13" (330 mm) high,
color specified.
164146A- Rock-N-Ring Panel Ground Level
Bongo: Rotationally molded from U.V. stabilized linear low-density polyethylene, color
specified.
Bell: Fabricated from 10 GA. (.135") (3,42 mm) HRPO low carbon steel. Finish: ProShield, color
specified.
Permalene Panel: Two color panel measures 39 1/2" (1003,3 mm) wide x 30" (762 mm) high,
color specified.
Bell Striker: Recycled Permalene, color specified.
Screen Plate: Fabricated from 12 GA. (.105") (2,66 mm) HRPO flat steel. Finish: Black in color.
173586A- Recycled Wood-Grain Lumber Panel Above Deck
Barrier Rail: Weldment comprised of 1.125" (28,57 mm) O.D. 11 GA. (.120") (3.04 mm) steel
tubing with 203 or 303 stainless steel inserts, with 5/8" (15,87 mm) internal threads and 1/4"
(6,35 mm) HRPO steel plate. Finish: ProShield, tan in color.
Poly Board: Recycled 1 1/2" x 3 1/2" (38,1 mm x 88,9 mm) and 1 1/2" x 5 1/2" (38,1 mm x
139,7 mm) high density polyethylene, cedar or mink in color.
111397D- 98"Post DB
111397C- 106"Post DB
111397B- 114"Post DB
111397A- 128"Post DB
168099A- Cozy Dome DB
Cozy Dome Panel: Rotationally molded from U.V. stabilized linear low-density polyethylene,
color specified.
Mount Plate: Fabricated from 1/4" (6,35 mm) HRPO steel plate. Finish: ProShield, color
specified.
Ring Plate: Fabricated from 1/4" (6,35 mm) HRPO steel plate. Finish: ProShield, color specified.
Direct Bury Plate: Weldment comprised of 2.375" (60,33 mm) O.D. RS20 (.095"-.105") (2,41
mm-2,66 mm) wall galvanized steel tubing and 1/4" (6,35 mm) HRPO steel plate. Finish:
182503A- Welcome Sign (LSI Provided) Ages 2-5 years Direct Bury
Border: Permalene, black in color.
Post: Weldment comprised 2.375" (60,33 mm) O.D. RS20 (.095-.105) (2,41 mm-2,67 mm) wall
galvanized tube, 1/4" (6,35 mm) HRPO steel sheet and aluminum post cap. Finish: ProShield,
color specified.
Sign Panel: Panel is fabricated from 1/8" (.125”) (3,17 mm) aluminum plate. Finish: ProShield®,
gray in color. (Sign) Digital image is transferred to a 1/8" (.125”) (3,17 mm) ProShield coated
aluminum plate, then infused into the ProShield.
133668A- Single Slide 48"Dk DB
Rail: Extruded from 1.125" ((28,58 mm) O.D. x .312" (7,92 mm) wall. 6005-T5 aluminum.
Slide Hood: Rotationally molded from U.V. stabilized linear low-density polyethylene, color
specified.
Offset Bolt Bracket: Cast aluminum. Finish: ProShield, color specified.
Exit Support: Weldment comprised of 2.375" (60,33 mm) O.D. RS-20 (.095" - .105") (2,41 mm x
2,66 mm) galvanized steel tubing and 1/4" x 3" (6,35 mm x 76 mm) mounting plate. Finish:
Slide: Rotationally molded from U.V. stabilized linear low-density polyethylene, color specified.
137967A- Lava Run Slide 32"Dk DB
specified.
Spacer: One-color Permalene, color specified.
Lava Run: Rotationally molded from U.V. stabilized linear low-density polyethylene, color
specified.
Support: Weldment comprised of 1.660" (42,16 mm) O.D. RS-20 (.085"-.095") (2,16 mm-2,41
mm) galvanized steel tubing and fabricated 7 GA (.179") (4,55 mm) steel plate. Finish:
Rail Spacer: Fabricated from 1.312" (33,32 mm) O.D. x 16 GA (.065") (1,65 mm) steel tubing.
178768A- Double Swirl Slide 48"Dk DB
Slide Support: Weldment comprised of 2.375" (60,33 mm) O.D. RS-20 (.095" - .105") (2,41 mm-
specified.
Mid-Support: Weldment comprised of 1.660" (42,16 mm) O.D. RS-20 (.085" - .095") (2,16 mm-
Rail Spacer: Fabricated from 1.312" (33,32 mm) O.D. x 16 GA (.065") (1,65 mm) steel tubing.
Slide: Rotationally molded from U.V. stabilized linear low-density polyethylene, color specified.
174018A- Belt Seat ProGuard Chains for 8' Beam Height
Bolt Link: Stainless Steel
Belt Seat: Molded from UV stabilized black EPDM rubber encapsulating a weldment comprised
of a 22 GA (.029") (0,74 mm) spring stainless steel sheet and (4) .105" (2,67 mm) thick
stainless-steel washers. The belt seat elliptical shape measures 7" (178 mm) wide x 26" (660
mm) long x .700" (17,78 mm) thick.
176038G- Full Bucket Seat ProGuard Chains for Toddler Swing
Full Bucket Seat: Made of U.V. stabilized high-quality black rubber encapsulating a 24 GA
(.024") (0,61 mm) stainless steel reinforcement plate. Handles cast from 356-T6 aluminum
alloy with black polyarmor paint finish. Handles attach to seat with (3) 1/4" (6,35 mm) x 1
5/16" (33,32 mm) long stainless-steel rivets. The full bucket measures 9" (229 mm) deep x 10
1/2" (266,7 mm) wide.
177332A- Single Post Swing Frame 8' Beam Height Only
177333A- Single Post Swing Frame Additional Bay 8' Beam Height Only
177337A- Toddler Swing Add-On Beam
Swing Beam: Weldment comprised of 3.500" (88,9 mm) O.D. RS-20 (.120" - .130") (3,04 mm-
3,30 mm) galvanized steel tubing, 6" (152 mm) wide zinc plated steel clamp, 3.500" (88,9 mm)
pipe cap, and 1 1/4" (31,75 mm) housings with bronze bushings. Finish: ProShield, color
specified.
218671C- Molded Bucket Seat (2-5 yrs.) w/Harness ProGuard Chains for 8' Beam Height
Bumper: Molded from U.V. stabilized black EPDM rubber encapsulating 11 GA (.120") (3,04
mm) HRPO steel sheet.
Bucket Seat Assy: (Bucket Seat & Yoke) Rotationally molded from U.V. stabilized linear low-
density polyethylene, color specified. (Pipe bolt) Made from 1.125" (28,58 mm) O.D. 6005-T5
threaded anodized aluminum tube. (Bearings) UHMW PE lubricated. (Brackets) Made from
356-T6 aluminum.
Mounting Bracket: Cast from 535 aluminum magnesium.
Dbl. Pivot Block: Fabricated from 6061-T6 Aluminum with bronze oil impregnated bearing.
128953B- 56" Crawl Tunnel 56" w/o View Above Deck
Tunnel Section: Rotationally molded from U.V. stabilized linear low-density polyethylene, color
specified.
Attachment Blocks: U.V. stabilized high-density polyethylene, color specified.
Clear Cover: Drape formed .177" x 23" x 30 7/8" (4,50 mm x 584 mm x 784,23 mm) clear
polycarbonate.
Permalene Panel: Panel measures 39 1/2" (1003,3 mm) wide x 30" (762 mm) high, color
specified.
Landscape Structures Inc. (“Manufacturer”) warrants that all play structures and/ or
equipment sold will conform in kind and in quality to the specifications manual for the
products identified in the Acknowledgment of Order and will be free of defects in
manufacturing and material. Manufacturer further warrants:
100-YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY

On all PlayBooster® and PlayShaper® aluminum posts, stainless steel fasteners, clamps, beams
and caps against structural failure due to corrosion/natural deterioration or manufacturing
defects, and on PlayBooster steel posts against structural failure due to material or
manufacturing defects.

On all Evos® and Weevos® steel arches, all plastic components (including TuffTimbers™
edging), all aluminum and steel components not covered above, Mobius® climbers, Rhapsody®
Outdoor Musical Instruments, decks and TenderTuff™ coatings (except Wiggle Ladders, Chain
Ladders and Swing Chain) against structural failure due to material or manufacturing defects.

On concrete products against structural failure due to natural deterioration or manufacturing
defects. Does not cover minor chips, hairline cracks or efflorescence.

On Aeronet® climbers and climbing cables against defects in materials or manufacturing
defects.

On Rhapsody® cables and mallets against defects in materials or manufacturing defects, on
polycarbonate panels against defects in materials or manufacturing defects, and on bamboo
panels against delamination due to defects in materials or manufacturing defects. Does not
cover damage which may be associated with the natural characteristics of bamboo aging,
including but not limited to discoloration, splitting, cracking, warping or twisting, nor the
formation of algae, mold and other forms of fungal-type bodies on bamboo.

On all other parts, i.e.: Pulse® products, all swing seats and hangers, Mobius climber
handholds, Wiggle Ladders, Chain Ladders and ProGuard™ Swing Chain, Track Ride trolleys and
bumpers, all rocking equipment including Sway Fun® gliders, belting material, HealthBeat®
resistance mechanism, Seesaws, etc., against failure due to corrosion/ natural deterioration or
The environment near a saltwater coast can be extremely corrosive. Some corrosion and/or
deterioration is considered “normal wear” in this environment. Product installed within 500
yards (457 meters) of a saltwater shoreline will only be covered for half the period of the
standard product warranty, up to a maximum of five years, for defects caused by corrosion.
Products installed in direct contact with saltwater or that are subjected to salt spray are not
covered by the standard warranty for any defects caused by corrosion.
This warranty does not include any cosmetic issues or wear and tear from normal use of the
product, or misuse or abuse of the product. It is valid only if the play structures and/or
equipment are erected to conform with Landscape Structures’ installation instructions and
maintained according to the maintenance procedures furnished by Landscape Structures Inc.
SECTION 12 24 13
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Manually operated light filtering roller shades with single rollers and fascia; RS-1
2. Manually-operated ;ight filtering roller shades with single rollers and recessed box;
RS-2.
3. Motor-operated roller shades with blackout shade, single rollers and recessed box;
RS-3.
4. Motor-operated roller shades with blackout shade, single rollers and fascia; RS-4
1. Section 06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds
for mounting roller shades and accessories.
1. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for sealing the perimeters of installation
accessories for light-blocking shades with a sealant.
2. Division 26 for power and controller requirements.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Window Covering Manufacturers Association

1. WCMA A 100.1: Safety of Corded Window Covering Products (ANSI)

1. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller
shades.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including
shadeband materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations.
1. Motor-Operated Shades: Include details of installation and diagrams for power,

signal, and control wiring.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type and color of shadeband material.
1. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of roller shade.

1. Shadeband Material: Not less than 10 inches square. Mark inside face of material
if applicable.
Roller Window Shades 12 24 13 - 1

2. Roller Shade: Full-size operating unit, not less than 16 inches wide by 36 inches
long for each type of roller shade indicated.
3. Installation Accessories: Full-size unit, not less than 10 inches long.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of shadeband material, signed by product

manufacturer.
C. Product Test Reports: For each type of shadeband material, for tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roller shades; include in maintenance manuals.

1. Roller Shades: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each size,
color, and shadeband material indicated, but no fewer than two units.

A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades from single source from single manufacturer.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to
demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials, execution,
operation, and adjusting.
1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the ntract
A. Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and
location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work
in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its
intended use.

B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable
glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that
vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid
delaying the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

following:
1. Draper Inc.
2. Hunter Douglas Contract.
3. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.
4. MechoShade Systems, Inc.
5. Silent Glissx
6. Solar Shading Systems.
7. Springs Window Fashions; SWFcontract.
8. Alta (Timber Blind Metro Shade)
B. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS – RS-1
A. Chain and Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous loop bead chain and clutch
that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and
lubricated.
1. Bead Chains: Nickel plated metal.
a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade.
b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops.
c. Chain Retainer Type: Clip, jamb mount.
2. Spring Lift Assist Mechanisms: Manufacturer's standard for balancing roller shade
weight and for lifting heavy roller shades.
a. Provide for shadebands that weigh more than 10 lb (4.5 kg) or for shades as
recommended by manufacturer, whichever criterion is more stringent.
B. Rollers: Corrosion resistant steel or extruded aluminum tubes of diameters and wall
thickness required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of
shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive end
assemblies and idle end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for
service.
1. Roller Drive End Location: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back (exterior face) of roller.
3. Shadeband to Roller Attachment: Adhesive strip.
C. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller
assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and
conditions indicated.

D. Roller Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to

join up to three inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller drive
end assembly.
E. Shadebands:
1. Shadeband Material: Light filtering fabric.
2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.
a. Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material.
b. Color and Finish: Selected by Architect.
F. Installation Accessories:
1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and
operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners.
a. Shape: L-shaped.
b. Height: Height required to conceal roller and shadeband assembly when
shade is fully open, but not less than 4 inches (102 mm).
2. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: Selected by Architect.
2.3 MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS - RS-2

following:
1. DFB Sales Inc.
2. Draper Inc.
3. Hunter Douglas Contract.
5. MechoShade Systems, Inc.
6. Silent Gliss Inc.
8. Alta (TimberBlindMetroShade).
B. Chain and Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous loop bead chain and clutch
that stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and
lubricated.
1. Bead Chains: Nickel plated metal.
a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade or as indicated on Drawings.
b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops.
c. Chain Retainer Type: Chain tensioner, jamb mounted.
2. Spring Lift Assist Mechanisms: As necessary for balancing roller shade weight and
for lifting heavy roller shades.
a. Provide for shadebands that weigh more than 10 lb (4.5 kg) or for shades as
recommended by manufacturer, whichever criterion is more stringent.
C. Rollers: Corrosion resistant steel or extruded aluminum tubes of diameters and wall
thickness required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of
shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive end
assemblies and idle end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for
service.
1. Roller Drive End Location: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Shadeband to Roller Attachment: Adhesive strip.

D. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller
E. Roller Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to

join up to three inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller drive
end assembly.
F. Shadebands:
1. Shadeband Material: Light filtering fabric.
b. Color and Finish: Selected by Architect.
G. Installation Accessories:
1. Recessed Headbox: Rectangular, extruded aluminum enclosure including front
fascia, top and back covers, endcaps, and removable bottom closure.
a. Height: Height required to enclose roller and shadeband assembly when
shade is fully open, but not less than 4 inches (102 mm) or as indicated on
Drawings.
2. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps.
3. Closure Panel and Wall Clip: Removable aluminum panel designed for installation
at bottom of site constructed ceiling recess or pocket and for snap in attachment
to wall clip without fasteners.
a. Closure Panel Width: As indicated on Drawings but not less than 2 inches
(51 mm).
4. Side Channels: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at sides of
shades as shades are drawn down. Provide side channels with shadeband guides
or other means of aligning shadebands with channels at tops.
5. Bottom (Sill) Channel or Angle: With light seals and designed to eliminate light
gaps at bottoms of shades when shades are closed.
6. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: Selected by Architect.
2.4 MOTOR-OPERATED, SINGLE-ROLLER SHADES – RS-3 and RS-4
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to
the following:
1. Draper, Inc.
2. Hunter Douglas, Inc.
3. Insolroll Window Shading Systems.
4. Levolor Inc.
6. MechoShade Systems, LLC.
7. Rollease Acmeda Inc.
B. Motorized Operating System: Provide factory-assembled, shade-operator system of size

and capacity and with features, characteristics, and accessories suitable for conditions
indicated, complete with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, power

disconnect switch, enclosures protecting controls and operating parts, and accessories
required for reliable operation without malfunction. Include wiring from motor controls to
motors. Coordinate operator wiring requirements and electrical characteristics with
building electrical system.
1. Electrical Components: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified
testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2. If required, insert manufacturers' description of alternative motor that is available
(for example, "quiet operation" motor, and so forth) in "Electric Motor"
Subparagraph below.
3. Electric Motor: Manufacturer's standard tubular, enclosed in roller.
a. Electrical Characteristics: Coordinate with Division 26.
b. Maximum Total Shade Width: As required to operate roller shades indicated.
c. Maximum Shade Drop: As required to operate roller shades indicated.
d. Maximum Weight Capacity: As required to operate roller shades indicated.
4. Remote Control: Electric controls with NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure for surface
mounting. Provide the following for remote-control activation of shades:
a. Keyed Control Station: Keyed, momentary-contact, three-position, switch-
operated control station with open, close, and off functions. Provide two keys
per station.
b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
5. Limit Switches: Adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls and set to stop
shades automatically at fully raised and fully lowered positions.
6. Operating Features:
a. Group switching with integrated switch control; single faceplate for multiple
switch cutouts.
b. Capable of interface with audiovisual control system.
C. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall

thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of
shadebands indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end
assemblies and idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for
service.
1. Roller Drive-End Location: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Coordinate direction of roll with fascia, headbox, or shade-pocket design.
4. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method.
D. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller
E. Roller-Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to

join up to three inline rollers that are operated by one roller drive-end assembly.
F. Shadebands:
1. Shadeband Material – RS-3: Light-blocking fabric.
2. Shadeband Material – RS-4: Light-blocking fabric.


b. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
G. Installation Accessories:
1. Recessed Headbox at RS-3: Rectangular, extruded aluminum enclosure including
front fascia, top and back covers, endcaps, and removable bottom closure.
a. Height: Height required to enclose roller and shadeband assembly when
shade is fully open, but not less than 4 inches (102 mm) or as indicated on
Drawings.
2. Front Fascia at RS-4: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of
roller and operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed
fasteners.
a. Shape: L-shaped.
b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and
shadeband assembly when shade is fully open, but not less than 4 inches
(102 mm).
3. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps.
4. Side Channels: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at sides of
shades as shades are drawn down. Provide side channels with shadeband guides
or other means of aligning shadebands with channels at tops.
5. Bottom (Sill) Channel or Angle: With light seals and designed to eliminate light
gaps at bottoms of shades when shades are closed.
6. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full
range.
2.5 SHADEBAND MATERIALS
A. Shadeband Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a

qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.
B. Light-Filtering Fabric at RS-1 and RS-2: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant.
1. Source: Roller-shade manufacturer.
2. Type: PVC-coated fiberglass.
3. Weave: Mesh.
4. Orientation on Shadeband: Up the bolt.
5. Openness Factor: 3 percent.
6. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
C. Light Blocking Fabric at RS-3 and RS-4: Opaque fabric, stain and fade resistant.
1. Basis of Design: SunBloc SB9000 Blackout by Draper.
2. Type: Manufacturer’s standard; preferred fabric Fiberglass textile with PVC film
bonded to both sides.
4. Roll Width: 72 inches (1829 mm).
5. Opacity: 100 percent
6. Weight: 12 oz/square yard

7. Orientation on Shadeband: Up the bolt.

2.6 ROLLER-SHADE FABRICATION
A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1,
including requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; and
warning labels.
B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows,
measured at 74 deg F:
1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of
opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch per side or 1/2-inch total, plus or
minus 1/8 inch. Length equal to head-to-sill or -floor dimension of opening in which
shade is installed less 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch.
2. Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations
between shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other
defined vertical separations between openings.
C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent

possible except as follows:
1. Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater
than 1:4, provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length
to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement
without distortion of the material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions
3.2 ROLLER-SHADE INSTALLATION
A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to
B. Electrical Connections: Connect motor operated roller shades to building electrical

system.
C. Roller Shade Locations: Indicated on Drawings.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from
binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.

A. Clean roller-shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer

and Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time
of Substantial Completion.
C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by

Architect, before time of Substantial Completion.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain motor operated roller shades.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 12 36 61.16
SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes solid surface material countertops.
A. Product Data: For countertop materials.
B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash
profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.
C. Samples: For each type of material exposed to view.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous-filled plastic resin complying with ICPA SS-1.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated

on Drawings.
a. Type: Provide Standard type or Veneer type made from material complying
with requirements for Standard type, as indicated unless Special Purpose
type is indicated.
b. Colors and Patterns: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Composite Wood Products: Products shall be made without urea formaldehyde.
1. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C

Plugged, touch sanded.
2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130 .
2.2 COUNTERTOP FABRICATION
A. Fabricate countertops according to solid surface material manufacturer's written

instructions and to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."
1. Grade: Custom.
Solid Surfacing Countertops 12 36 61.16 - 1

B. Configuration:
1. Front Edge: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner.
3. End Splash: Matching backsplash.
C. Countertops: One of the following:
1. 1/2-inch-thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same material
to profile indicated.
2. 1/4-inch-thick, solid surface material laminated to 3/4-inch-thick MDF with front
edge built up to profile indicated.
D. Backsplashes: 3/4-inch-thick, solid surface material.
E. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints wherever possible. Fabricate oversized

countertops in sections for joining in field, with joints at locations indicated on approved
Shop Drawings.
F. Cutouts and Holes:
1. Undercounter Plumbing Fixtures: Make cutouts for fixtures using template or

pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves.
A. Adhesive: Product recommended by solid surface material manufacturer.
1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less.
B. Sealant for Countertops: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 07 92 00

"Joint Sealants."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fasten subtops to cabinets by screwing through subtops into cornerblocks of base

cabinets. Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane.
B. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to solid surface material

C. Bond joints with adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of
countertops adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.
D. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall and countertops with
adhesive.

E. Install aprons to backing and countertops with adhesive.
F. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts
to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed,
and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease
edges slightly to prevent snipping.
G. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
END OF SECTION

[this page intentionally left blank]

SECTION 12 64 26
UPHOLSTERED SEATING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Requirements including but not limited to:

1. Library seating.
2. Accessories required for complete fabrications and installation.
A. Product Data: Technical data for each type of product indicated, including materials,
upholstery, attachment to other components or work, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of upholstered seatings, attachment to other work, and
components. Include dimensioned plans, and elevations, sections, details.
1. Show details half size; show sections at 3" = 1" minimum; show plans and
elevations at 3/4" = 1' minimum.
2. Show locations and sizes of furring and blocking, including concealed blocking
specified.
3. Indicate seating layout and sizes.
4. Indicate details of joining, methods of attachment to other members and to
substrates.
C. Samples: Approved samples will not be returned or used in the work.

1. Samples of each exposed material from which each type of unit is composed, in
each color, finish, pattern, and texture indicated. Provide the following samples:
a. Upholstery Fabric: Full width sample, minimum 36 inches (915 mm) long,
with specified treatments supplied. Show complete pattern repeat. Mark top
and right side.
b. Plastic Laminate, Wood, and Plywood Materials and Finishes: Standard size
unit.
c. Exposed Fasteners: Each type required.
d. Shop applied finishes.
A. Maintenance Data: Submit data for each type of unit to include in maintenance manuals.
Include fabric manufacturers' written cleaning and stain removal instructions.
1. Include precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental
to finishes and performance.
Upholstered Seating 12 64 26 - 1
1. Fire Performance Characteristics of Upholstered Seating: California Technical

Bulletin 133.
2. Fire Performance Characteristics of Seat Padding:
a. California Technical Bulletin 117.
b. Federal Test Method Standard 191, Method 5903.2.
3. Chair Performance: Comply with requirement of BIFMA F-1. Test chairs
representative of those installed and certify compliance.
4. Fabric Flammability: Class 1 flammability requirements, US Department of
Commercial Standard 191-53 in accordance with California Bulletin #117.
5. Obtain testing and approval of local authority having jurisdiction for each type of
fabric.
6. AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Entity having minimum 5 years documented experience in the

fabrication of banquets.
C. Single Source Responsibilities: Obtain each type of seating, table, or booth including
accessories and mounting components, from one source of a single manufacturer.
D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to

set quality standards for materials, fabrication, and installation.
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves
the completed work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install upholstered seatings until building is

enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain
temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the
B. Field Measurements: Where upholstered seatings are indicated to fit to other

construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the work.
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support upholstered
seating by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements
on Shop Drawings.
delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating upholstered
seating without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure actual
dimensions correspond to established dimensions, without requiring modifications
to upholstered seating.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install upholstered seating until building is

enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain
temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the
B. Field Measurements: Where upholstered seating are indicated to fit to other

construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the work.
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support upholstered
seating by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements
on Shop Drawings.
delaying the work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating upholstered
seating without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual
dimensions correspond to established dimensions, without requiring modifications
to upholstered seating.
A. Deliver units in unopened cartons clearly labeled bearing name and contents of carton.
Immediately examine cartons upon delivery. Do not accept damaged units. Remove
from site and return to manufacturer for replacement.
B. Store in protect, dry location under environmental conditions similar to those of the
location in which the units will be installed. Handle units as recommended by
manufacturer to prevent damage.
C. Do not stack units higher than recommended by manufacturer.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and related
units of work ensuring upholstered seating are installed as indicated.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Extra Materials: Furnished from same production run as materials installed. Package
materials with protective covering and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver
extra materials to Owner.
1. Seat and Back Covers: To be determined by Owner.
2. Fabric: Provide upholstery material in full width quantity to reupholster seating units
equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 5 percent of banquette
units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Miscellaneous Wood: Refer to Section 06 10 50:

1. Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A 208.2, 55 lb/cubic foot density; minimum 5/8
inch (15 mm) thickness, containing no added urea formaldehyde.
2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue. No added urea

formaldehyde permitted.
3. Veneer Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with
adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde.
4. Plywood: DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Hardwood: Selected kiln dried hardwood, 4/4 stock surfaced two sides.
B. High Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades required by woodwork quality

standard.
C. Padding: New polyurethane foam (premium quality).
D. Upholstery Fabric: Refer to Finish Schedule.
E. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. Use installation
adhesives complying with limits for VOC content when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
F. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire retardant treated softwood lumber,
kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content; refer to Section 06 10 50.
G. Anchors: Nonferrous metal or hot dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of
exterior walls and as necessary for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead
expansion sleeves for drilled in place anchors. Select appropriate anchor type, size, and
finish for each substrate for secure anchorage.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Banquette: 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) polyfoam over plywood frame; seat of 1-1/2 inch (38 mm)
polyfoam with sisal pad bottom over 10 gauge no sag spring, 3 inches (75 mm) on center
with 2 inch (50 mm) helical spring connectors; 6 inch (150 mm) channel upholstered
back; wrap around end panel; seat style: waterfall upholstered with French seams. Verify
dimensions and configuration prior to fabrication.
B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and finishing, to maximum extent possible,

before shipment to project site. Disassemble components as necessary for shipment and
installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing,
trimming, and fitting. Notify Architect minimum 7 days in advance of the dates and times
upholstered seating fabrication will be complete.
C. Coordinate with manufacturer to determine finished wall sizes. Deduct 1/4 inch (6 mm)
from each end of banquette in alcoves to ensure proper fit. Provide a template to prefit
and prebolt banquette together in factory and verify measurements prior to delivery to
ensure fit.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for construction
tolerances, material properties as they affect anchors and fasteners, and location of
units. Verify dimensions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Condition upholstered seating to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation

areas. Before installing units, examine shop fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including removal of packing and back priming.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install level, plumb, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as necessary with
concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm
in 2400 mm). Install with no more than 1/16 inch in 96 inch (1.6 mm in 2400 mm) vertical
cup or bow and 1/8 inch in 96 inch (3 mm in 2400 mm) horizontal variation from a true
plane.
B. Anchor upholstered seating to supporting substrate with concealed clips and splined
connection strips. Do not use face fastening unless otherwise indicated.
A. Repair damaged and defective upholstered seating, where possible, to eliminate

functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace upholstered seating.
Adjust for uniform appearance.
B. Clean upholstered seating on exposed surfaces. Touch up shop applied finishes to

restore damaged or soiled areas.
C. Repair abrasions and imperfections in units.
D. Replace upholstery fabric and plastic laminate tops damaged during installation.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 12 66 00
TELESCOPING GYM SEATS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Telescoping Gymnasium Seating includes electrically operated

telescoping systems of multiple-tiered seating rows comprising of seat, deck
components, understructure that permits closing without requiring dismantling, into a
nested configuration for storing or for moving purposes.
1. Typical applications include the following:
a. Wall Attached Telescoping Gym Seats.
2. Special applications include the following:
a. Telescoping elevated front row with front rails, built in ramps that are an integral
part of the first row walkway.
1. Division 09 finishes sections for adequate floor & wall construction for operation of
Telescoping Gym Seats. Flooring shall be level and rear wall plumb within 1/8” in 8’-
0”.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

1. NFPA 102 Standard for Assembly Seating, Tents and Membrane Structures.
B. American Welding society (AWS):

1. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel.
2. AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.
C. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):

1. AISC - Design of Hot Rolled Steel Structural Members.
D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
E. American Iron & Steel Institute (AISI):

1. AISI - Design Cold Formed Steel Structural Members.
F. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM - Standard Specification for Properties of Materials.
G. National Bureau of Standards/Products Standard (NBS/PS):

1. PS1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.
H. Americans with Disability Act (ADA)

1. ADA - Standards for Accessible Design.
1.3 MANUFACTURER'S SYSTEM ENGINEERING DESCRIPTION
Telescoping Gym Seats 12 66 00 - 1

A. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate and install telescopic gym seating systems
to the following structural loads without exceeding allowable design working stresses of
materials involved, including anchors and connections. Apply each load to produce
maximum stress in each respective component of each gym seat unit.
1. Design Loads: Comply with ICC 300 Edition
B. Manufacturer's System Delegated Design Criteria:

1. Gymnasium seat assembly; Design to support and resist, in addition to it’s own
weight, the following forces:
a. Live load of 120 lbs per linear foot on seats and decking
b. Uniformly distributed live load of not less than 100 lbs per sq. ft. of gross
horizontal projection.
c. Parallel sway load of 24 lbs. per linear foot of row combined with (b.) above
d. Perpendicular sway load of 10 lbs. per linear foot of row combined with (b.) above
2. Hand Railings, Posts and Supports: Engineered to withstand the following forces
applied separately:
a. Concentrated load of 200 lbs.] applied at any point and in any direction.
b. Uniform load of 50 lbs. per foot applied in any direction.
3. Guard Railings, Post and Supports: Engineered to withstand the following forces
applied separately:
a. Concentrated load of 200 lbs. applied at any point and in any direction along top
rail.
b. Uniform load of 50 lbs. per foot applied horizontally at top rail and a simultaneous
uniform load of 100 lbs. per foot applied vertically downward.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section Cross-Reference: Required submittals in accordance with "Conditions of the

Contract" and Division 1 General Requirements sections of this "Project Manual."
B. Project Data: Manufacturer's product data for each system. Include the following:
1. Project list: Ten (10) seating projects of similar size, complexity and in service for at
least five (5) years.
2. Deviations: List of deviations from these project specifications, if any.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate Telescoping Gym Seat assembly layout. Show seat heights,
row spacing and rise, aisle widths and locations, assembly dimensions, anchorage to
supporting structure, material types and finishes.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Indicate electrical wiring and connections.
D. Samples: Seat materials and color finish as selected by Architect from manufacturers
offered color finishes.
E. Manufacturer Qualifications: Certification of insurance coverage and manufacturing

experience of manufacturer, and copy of a telescopic load test to all loads described in
1.03 above, observed by a qualified independent testing laboratory, and certified by a
registered professional structural engineer verifying the integrity of the manufacturer's
geometry design and base structural assumptions.
F. Installer Qualifications: Installer qualifications indicating capability, experience, and

Certification by manufacturer of telescopic seating.

G. Engineer Qualifications: Certification by a professional engineer registered in the state of

Texas that the equipment to be supplied meets or exceeds the design criteria of this
specification.
H. Operating/Maintenance Manuals: Provide to Owner maintenance manuals.

Demonstrate operating procedures, recommended maintenance and inspection program.
I. Warranty: Manufacturers standard warranty documents.
A. Seating Layout: Comply with current NFPA 102 Standard for Assembly seating, Tents,
and Membrane Structures, and specifically with Folding and Telescopic Seating, except
where additional requirements are indicated or imposed by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Welding Standards & Qualification: Comply with AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code -
Steel and AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer who has a minimum of 40 years of experience

manufacturing telescoping gym seats and can demonstrate continual design
enhancement and 25-year minimum product life-cycle support of telescopic seating.
D. Installer Qualifications: Engage experienced Installer who has specialized in installation

of telescoping gym seat types similar to types required for this project and who carries an
official Certification Card issued by telescoping gym seat manufacturer.
E. Engineer Qualifications: Engage licensed professional engineer experienced in providing

engineering services of the kind indicated that have resulted in the successful installation
of telescoping bleachers similar in material, design, fabrication, and extent to those types
indicated for this project.
A. Deliver telescopic gym seats in manufacturers packaging clearly labeled with

manufacturer name and content.
B. Handle seating equipment in a manner to prevent damage.

A. Field Measurements: Coordinate actual dimensions of construction affecting telescoping

bleachers installation by accurate field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded
measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Product Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard warranty form for

telescoping bleachers. This warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of other rights
Owner may have under Contract Documents
1. Warranty Period: Five years from Date of Acceptance.
1.9 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION
A. Instructions: Both operation and maintenance shall be transmitted to the Owner by the
manufacturer of the seating or his representative.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Structural Performance: Telescoping stands shall withstand the effects of gravity loads,
operational loads, and other loads and stresses according to ICC 300.
B. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the DOJ's 2010 ADA
Standards for Accessible Design and the TAS.
2.2 TELESCOPING STANDS
A. System Description: Operable system of multiple-tiered seating on interconnected folding

platforms that close for storage, without being dismantled, into a nested stack.
Telescoping-stand units permit opening and closing of adjacent, individual and multiple
rows, and close with vertical faces of platforms in the same vertical plane.
1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

application.
2. Telescoping-Stands Standard: ICC 300.
2.3 TELESCOPING GYM SEATING
A. Basis for Design: Interkal, closed deck telescopic bleacher with friction power, automatic
electro-mechanical propulsion system.
B. Other acceptable manufacturers listed below will be considered if in compliance with

these specifications. Deviations must be submitted with bid in order that a fair and proper
evaluation be made. Those bidders not submitting a list of deviations will be presumed to

have a bid as specificed.

1. Irwin Telescoping Seating Company.
2. Hussey Seating
3. The Seating Pros
C. Telescopic Gym Seats, row spacing, rise spacing, seat types and rail types as shown on
construction drawings.
D. Column Framing: 2" x 3" minimum electric welded, continuous closed seam rectangular
structural steel tubing; joined to lower riser board with mill angle steel braces.
E. Wheels: Each column to ride on heavy duty composite rubber wheels, 3-1/2" diameter by
1-1/8" wide, with oil impregnated sintered metal bearings. Minimum of four wheels at
each column base.
F. Plastic Seat Modules:

1. 18” fixed blow molded, double walled, high density, impact resistant, UV stabilized,
linear polyethylene. plastic seat modules; scuff resistant textured surface 10” deep
and contoured seat surface with vertical front.
2. Brackets and mounting hardware of permanent 14” high concrete risers; 24” tread
spacing.
3. Color: Color as selected by Architect.
4. Acceptable Product: Plastic Seat Modules on Permanent Concrete Risers by Irwin
Telescopic Seating Company.
G. Lower Riser Boards: Heavy gage steel.
H. Deck: Full platform of 5/8" nominal AC grade with solid cross band; finished with
urethane, brown color.
I. Steel Understructure Components: Surface treated and emersion painted with

manufacturer's standard enamel paint.
J. Safety End Rails: Self-storing, non-removable.
K. Aisles: Foot level type, 36" wide.
L. Front Truncation with Railing: 2'- 9" x 1 row.
M. Operation: Electric
2.4 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM

A. Integral power with pendant control.
B. Floor Friction Power Operating Drive Unit: Two 6" diameter x 9" wide cylinders, spaced
24" on center, simultaneously chain driven by one electric gear motor installed in heavy
steel frame; with 1/2" thick non-marring rubber pad that provides minimum floor contact.
C. Drive Motor: 1/4 horsepower, 110 volt, single phase electric gear motor.
D. Wiring Harness: Provide for each bank of seating, including wiring from power source to
and within seating bank, control circuit and removable, portable pendant controller.

E. Pendant Controller: Portable type to plug into receptacle in first row of each seating bank
for visual observation of telescoping operations; movement stops immediately when
pendant switch is released.
F.
2.5 MATERIALS
A. Lumber: ANSI/Voluntary Product 20, B & B Southern Pine
B. Plywood: ANSI/Voluntary Product PS1, APA A-C Exterior Grade.
C. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36.
D. Galvanized Steel Strip: ASTM A653 Grade 40, zinc coated by the hot-dip process,
structural quality.
E. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500 Grade B, cold-formed.
F. Polyethylene Plastic: ASTM D 1248, Type III, Class B; molded, color-pigmented,

textured, impact-resistant, structural formulation; in color indicated or, if not otherwise
indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
G. Fasteners: Vibration-proof, of size and material standard with manufacturer.
2.6 UNDERSTRUCTURE TELESCOPIC FABRICATION
A. Frame System:
1. Wheels: Not less than 5" diameter by 1 1/4" with non-marring soft rubber face to
protect wood and synthetic floor surfaces, with molded-in sintered iron oil-
impregnated bushings to fit 3/8" diameter axles secured with E-type snap rings.
2. Lower Track: Continuous Positive Interglide System interlocks each adjacent CPI
unit using an integral, continuous, anti-drift feature and through-bolted guide at front
to prevent separation and misalignment. CPI units at end sections of powered banks
sections shall contain a Low Profile Posi-Lock LX to lock each row in open position
and allow unlocking automatically.
3. Slant Columns: High tensile steel, tubular shape.
4. Sway Bracing: High tensile steel members through-bolted to columns.
5. Deck Stabilizer: High tensile steel member through-bolted to nose and riser at three
locations per section. Interlocks with adjacent stabilizer on upper tier using low-friction
nylon roller to prevent separation and misalignment.
6. Deck Support: Securely captures front and rear edge of decking at rear edge of nose
beam and lower edge of riser beam for entire length of section.
2.7 DECKING
A. Deck System:
1. Section Lengths: Each bank shall contain sections not to exceed 25’-6” in length with
a minimum of two supporting frames per row, each section.

2. Nose beam and Rear Riser beam: Nose beam shall be continuously roll-formed
closed tubular shape of ASTM A653 grade 40, Riser beam shall be continuously roll-
formed of ASTM A653 grade 40. Nose and Riser beam shall be designed with no
steel edges exposed to spectator after product assembly.
3. Attachment: Through-Bolted fore/aft to deck stabilizers, and frame cantilevers.
4. Decking: 5/8" BC grade polyethylene-top-coated tongue and groove Douglas Fir
plywood; both of interior type with exterior glue, 5-ply, all plies with plugged
crossbands, produced in accordance with National Bureau of Standards PS-1-97.
Plywood shall be cut and installed with top, center and bottom ply grain-oriented from
front of deck to rear of deck (nose beam to riser beam). Adjacent pieces shall be
locked together with tongue and groove joint from front to rear of deck. Longest
unsupported span: MAXAM 26, 21 ½”;
5. Deck End Overhang: Not to exceed frame support by more than 5'-7".
2.8 SHOP FINISHES
A. Understructure: For rust resistance, steel understructure shall be finished on all surfaces
with black "Dura-Coat” enamel. Understructure finish shall contain a silicone additive to
improve scratch resistance of finish.
B. Wear Surfaces: Surface subject to normal wear by spectators shall have a finish that
does not wear to show different color underneath:
1. Steel nosing and rear risers shall be pre-galvanized with a minimum spangle of G-60
zinc plating.
2. Decking: 0.030” laminated polyethylene wear surface.
2.9 FASTENINGS
A. Welds: Performed by welders certified by AWS standards for the process employed.
B. Structural Connections: Secured by structural bolts with prevailing torque lock nuts, free-
spinning nuts in combination with lock washers, or Riv-nuts in combination with lock
washers.
2.10 ELECTRICAL OPERATION
A. Integral Power: Furnish and install Hussey PF(1/2/3/4), an integral automatic

electro-mechanical powered frame propulsion system, to open and close telescopic
seating. Integral Power and Control System shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
approved and listed as well as CE Compliant for EU applications.
1. Operation shall be with a removable pendant control unit which plugs into seating bank
for operator management of stop, start, forward, and reverse control of the power
operation.
2. Each Powered Frame unit shall consist of output shaft gear reducer with 6" diameter x
4" wide wheels covered with non-marring 1/2" thick composite rubber. Reducers
shall be fitted with 3 phase induction motors which will provide an average operating
speed of (46/25) f.p.m.
3. Operating Loads: Each Powered Frame provides (220 / 550) lbs pull force which
equals approximately (28 / 35) psi lateral force on the floor..
B. Electrical: Seating Manufacturer shall provide all wiring within seating bank including
pendant control.

1. Each unit for PF(1/2/3/4) is power operated by a 1/2 horsepower, 1725 R.P.M., 208
Volts, 50/60 Hz., three phase 1.25 service factor motor. This motor draws a full load
current of 2.2 amperes. Power supply required shall be 120/208 volts three phase 5
wire plus ground service with 20 amps. Motors, housing, and wiring shall be installed
and grounded in complete accord with the National Electrical Code.
2. The electrical contractor shall provide required power source with no greater than 4%
voltage drop at the seatings’ junction box. The electrical contractor shall perform all
wiring connections in junction box that are attached to or a part of the building.
3. Each integral power system provided is U.L. Listed and or C.E. Compliant.
2.11 ACCESSORIES
A. Non-Slip Tread: Provide at front edge of each aisle location an adhesive-backed

abrasive non-slip tread surface.
B. Foot Level Aisles: Provide deck level full width vertical aisles located as indicated.
C. Intermediate Aisle Steps: Intermediate aisle steps shall be of boxed fully enclosed type
construction. Blow molded end caps shall have full radius on all four edges. Step shall
have adhesive-backed abrasive non-slip tread surface. Quantity and location as
indicated.
D. Intermediate Aisle Handrails: Provide single pedestal mount handrails 34” high with
terminating mid rail. Aisle handrails that are detached from the socket for storage are
unacceptable.
E. Front Panel: Provide front closure panels for truncated sections, permanent end cutouts
or elevated front aisles. Panels shall extend vertically from underside of front row to
within 1 1/2” or floor. Paneling to be 5/8” grey Polydeck attached to a steel framework.
F. Front Rail: Provide not less than 30” high above deck, steel rails with tubular supports
and intermediate members designed with 4" sphere passage requirements. Rails to be
located at each required seating location.
G. Self Storing End Rails: Provide steel self-storing 42" high above seat, end rail with
tubular supports and intermediate members designed with 4" sphere passage
requirements.
H. Row Letters: Provide at each row end of plastic seat a 1 3/4" x 1 1/4" oval etched Lexan
plate with black numerals. Plates to be fitted flush in vandal resistant end cap recess.
I. Poly Deck: Decking panel to be a 0.030” thick high-density polyethylene overlay panel
fabricated with a skid-resistant textured top surface permanently bonded to a Western Fir
plywood substrate meeting the requirements of NBS PS-1-97. Panel thickness shall be
5/8” with tongue and grooved edge joints and top polyethylene surface of textured gray
color.
J. Safety Accessories: Provide the following safety features:

1. Coin Round or Roll all edges of exposed metal on top and underneath Bleacher to
eliminate sharp edges. Provide safety ease edges, coined edges, or rounded edges
for the bleacher understructure components as follows. Diagonal or X braces and
deck support or deck stabilizers. Systems provided with sharp edges or corners, to

be rounded off in the field and field painted.

2. Provide plastic end cap on nose metal at Bank ends to close off edges to prevent
spectator injury.
3. Provide plastic end cap on back of deck supports on 1st 7 Rows to prevent spectator
injury.
4. Powered frames systems without a metal protective housing, covering drive chain and
drive wheels are not permitted under this specification.
K. Vinyl End Curtains to prevent unauthorized access to the underside of the bleachers.
2.12 COURTSIDE GRAPHIC LOGO
A. Decorative graphic logo that is applied to the integrally molded end cap recess area of
the CourtSide 10 XC or 12XCS seat module.
B. Logo is approximately 4.7” (h) x 3.5” (w) w/full color CMYK vector art output on FujiFlex
crystal archive printing material. (FujiFlex Specs. Available)
C. Color logo is laminated with a 5-mil Hard Guard Matte laminate (Specs. Available)
D. Laminated logo is bonded to a Flex-Con L – 606 laminating adhesive layer (Specs.

Available)
E. Logo is trimmed to a precise custom cut shape with two mounting hole
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Verify area to receive telescoping gym seats are free of
impediments interfering with installation and condition of installation substrates are
acceptable to receive telescoping gym seats in accordance with telescoping gym seats
manufacturer's recommendations. Do not commence installation until conditions are
satisfactory.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Comply with telescoping gym seats manufacturer's

recommendations for product installation requirements.
B. General: Manufacturer’s Certified Installers to install telescoping gym seats in

accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and final shop drawings. Provide
accessories, anchors, fasteners, inserts and other items for installation of telescoping
gym seats and for permanent attachment to adjoining construction.
3.3 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Adjustment: After installation completion, test and adjust each telescoping gym seats
assembly to operate in compliance with manufacturer's operations manual.
B. Cleaning: Clean installed telescoping gym seats on both exposed and semi-exposed

surfaces. Touch-up finishes to restore damage or soiled surfaces.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. General: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to

manufacturer and installer to ensure telescoping gym seats are without damage or
deterioration at time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 12 93 13
BICYCLE RACKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Bicycle racks.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Technical data including fabrication materials and configuration,

anchorage to substrate, and finish.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers
1. Basis of Design: Stainless Ring Bike Rack; Landscape Forms.
2. Other Acceptable Product: Stainless Steel Horseshoe Bike Rack; Superior
Recreational Products.
2.2 BICYCLE RACKS
A. Bicycle Rack Construction:

1. Frame: Stainless steel.
a. Pipe or Tubing OD: Not less than 1-1/2 inches.
b. Thickness: 0.120 inches.
c. Ring Diameter: 24-3/4 inches
2. Mounting: Embedded in concrete base.
3. Capacity: Two bicycles or as shown on Drawings
2.3 STAINLESS STEEL MATERIALS
A. Tubing: ASTM A554, Grade MT 304.
B. Pipe: ASTM A312/A312M, Grade TP 304.
C. Plate, Sheet, and Strip: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304.
D. Flat Bar: ASTM A666, Type 304.
E. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A276, Type 304.
Bicycle Racks 12 93 13 - 1
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Metal Components: Form to required shapes and sizes with true, consistent curves,
lines, and angles. Separate metals from dissimilar materials to prevent electrolytic action.
B. Welded Connections: Weld connections continuously. Weld solid members with full
length, full penetration welds and hollow members with full circumference welds. At
exposed connections, finish surfaces smooth and blended, so no roughness or
unevenness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining
surfaces.
C. Pipes and Tubes: Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to
produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical
cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or
otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components.
D. Exposed Surfaces: Provide with surfaces smooth, free of burrs, barbs, splinters, and
sharpness and edges and ends rolled, rounded, or capped.
E. Factory Assembly: Factory assemble components to greatest extent possible to

minimize field assembly. Clearly mark units for assembly in the field.
F. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. Locate weep holes in inconspicuous
locations.
G. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable.

A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable.

B. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
C. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross
scratches.
D. Stainless Steel Tubing Finishes:

1. 320-Grit Polished Finish: Oil-ground, uniform, fine, directionally textured finish.
E. Stainless Steel Sheet and Plate Finishes:

1. Directional Satin Finish: ASTM A480/A480M, No. 4.
F. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign
matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for correct and level
finished grade, mounting surfaces, installation tolerances, and conditions affecting
performance of the work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent

requirements are indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, install site furnishings after landscaping and paving have
been completed.
C. Install site furnishings level, plumb, true, and securely anchored at locations indicated
on Drawings.
D. Embed in concrete to depth recommended in writing by manufacturer of site furnishings.

Clean holes of loose material, embed, and fill annular space with nonshrink, nonmetallic
grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written
instructions, with top smoothed and shaped to shed water.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 13 03 40
AUDIOMETRIC ROOMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Provide and install modular sound rooms that provide sound control, sound isolation
and corrected internal acoustic environment.
A. Sound-Isolation Practice Rooms: Factory-fabricated, modular, sound-isolation

enclosures with sound transmission characteristics meeting requirements. Enclosures
shall be internally wired for power, lighting, and ventilation controls. Site-fabricated
enclosures and enclosures with site-installed gaskets and sealants shall not be
allowed. Modifications to room on site affect acoustical performance and laboratory
test data.
a. Assemble rooms using factory-gasketed modular components that allow
reconfiguration and relocation without component modification or loss of
acoustical performance.
B. Room Variation: Sound-isolation practice rooms (with VAE) shall be equipped with
manufacturer's Virtual Acoustical Environment (VAE) simulation system with
integrated wiring, speakers, and microphones capable of providing room sonic
environment simulation of a range in preset and customized practice and performance
environments.
1. Coordinate installation of performance equipment with work of other trades.
2. Check actual openings and dimensions required in construction work by
accurate field measurements before commencing fabrication.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard product data, descriptive literature,

specifications and installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340. Indicate following
minimum information:
a. Complete, fully dimensioned shop drawings of components.
b. Details of installation and erection, including adjoining conditions and
necessary clearances. Where work is to adjoin another trade, show
actual dimensions and methods of joining work.
C. Samples: Provide corner sample that clearly shows panel construction, as well as
samples of all finishes for selection by Architect.
Audiometric Rooms 13 03 40 - 1
1.05 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Information on Contract Documents is for information of Contractor. Contractor to

verify existing field conditions and take measurements to ensure accurate and
B. Contractor shall immediately notify Architect of conditions, measurements, quantities

and other data, required for proper execution, fit and completion of work, and for safe
and proper operating clearances.
C. Contractor shall immediately notify Architect of site conditions or variations which

affect installation or completion of work, and where appropriate, shall indicate
suggested remedial procedures by drawings or descriptions.
A. Deliver module components to project site in manufacturer's original packaging,

individually cartoned and identified.
B. Storage on job site in manner and location accepted to module manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Airborne Noise Reduction: Sound-isolation practice rooms with 410 cu. ft. (11.6 cu. m)
interior volume, 34 percent perforated interior panels, 12 inch (304 mm) airspace
between modules, mounted on concrete floor construction, tested as follows:
1. NIC 41 from exterior to interior of module, per independent lab test.

2. NIC 63 from interior of one module to interior of adjacent module, with 12 inches
(304 mm) airspace between modules, per independent lab test.
B. Ambient Noise at Center of sound-isolation room: Lighting and ventilating systems

operating, per ANSI S 12.2: Not exceeding NC 25.
C. Reverberation Time: Sound-Isolation Practice Rooms with 640 cu. ft. (18.12 cu. m)
interior volume: in contiguous octave bands, center frequencies from 125 to 4000 Hz,
per ASTM C 423: 0.45 plus or minus 0.10 seconds.
D. Ventilation Air Change Rate: Sound-isolation practice rooms with 406 cu. ft. (11.5 cu.
m) interior volume shall have 35 air changes per hour. Other rooms will vary according
to size and occupancy.
E. Sound-Isolating Door Sound Transmission Class: With full window, per internal testing
only: STC 46.
F. HVAC Ceiling Panel Sound Transmission Class: Per internal testing only: STC 45.
G. Safety Glazing Products: 16 CFR 1201.
2.02 MANUFACTURER
H. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. IAC Acoustics
2. Wenger Corporation.
B. Basis for Design: SoundLok Sound-Isolating Practice Rooms, Wenger Corporation
C. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00
2.02 SOUND ISOLATION PRACTICE ROOMS
A. Wall Frame: 14-gauge/0.075 inch (1.91 mm) thick steel channel with 1-1/4 inch (31.75
mm) thick factory-applied acoustical gasketing at floor slab, with 3/4 inch (19 mm)
leveling adjustment.
B. Wall Panels: 30 inches by 4 inches (762 by 102 mm) thick composite panels,
consisting of an exterior face of 16-gauge/0.0598 inch (1.52 mm) sheet steel, an
interior face of 22-gauge/0.0299 inch (0.76 mm) perforated or solid sheet steel, with
sound-attenuation material at panels indicated as perforated.
1. Acoustical Seal: Two continuous acoustical gaskets factory-mounted at panel
perimeter.
2. Panel Attachment: Two or more mechanical locks on each vertical edge to align
and engage adjoining panel and create compression seal between panels.
3. Power Panel (one per unit): Same construction as wall panels, with factory pre-
wiring meeting ETL and NEC requirements, consisting of conduit, wiring,
junction and electrical boxes, and airtight cover plates, and including the
following:
a. Two duplex receptacles
b. Dimmable switches, occupancy sensors and connectors for lighting
control (and fans, and VAE, as required).
c. Three empty raceways for future Owner-installed circuitry.
4. Communication Wall Panels: Where indicated: Same construction as wall
panels, size and configuration indicated, with factory installed rough-in for
addition wiring by owner, consisting of conduit, junction boxes, and airtight cover
plates, and includes one pre-wired quad outlet
5. Interior Room Height; 7 feet 6 inches.
C. Ceiling Frame: Sheet steel, 16-gauge/0.053 inch (1.34 mm) thick, with clamping
mechanism for compressing ceiling panel acoustical gaskets, with external support
beam where required by room size.
D. Ceiling Panels: 15 inches by 6 inches thick composite panels, consisting of an exterior

face of 16-gauge/0.0598 inch (1.52 mm) sheet steel, an interior face of 22-
gauge/0.0299 inch (0.76 mm) perforated or solid sheet steel, with sound-attenuation
material at panels indicated as perforated.
1. Acoustical Seal: Two continuous acoustical gaskets factory-mounted at panel

perimeter.
2. Panel Attachment: Two or more mechanical locks on each vertical edge to align
and engage adjoining panel and create compression seal between panels.
3. Sprinkler Ceiling Panels: Where indicated, panels fabricated with predrilled
holes to enable fire sprinkler system installation specified elsewhere. Furnish
covers for installations not requiring sprinkler piping penetration.
4. Light Panels: Where indicated, highly efficient, 50/60Hz, 100-277 Volt AC, 40
Watt, 1’ x 4’ dimmable edge-lit LED flat panels. Technical information; power
factor: 0.9, lifetime (L70): 50,000 hours, LED chip type: 2835, number of LEDs
(per panel): 216, physical dimensions: 11.83 inches (W) x 47.63 inches (L) x
0.39 inches (H), color temperature: 5000k (standard), lumens: 4200, beam
angle: 120 degrees, RA value: 80, compatible with 0-10V dimmers. Compliance
& approvals: ETL, FCC, DLC QPL, IP rating: damp locations.
5. Ceiling Ventilation System, Connection to Building HVAC System:
a. Vent Panels: 15 inch (381 mm) wide by 6-inch (152 mm) thick panel with
integral acoustical air plenum, with 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) sound-absorbing
duct liner and four 90-degree bends, with 8 inch (203 mm) diameter duct
connector. Capacity: 120 cfm (.057 cu. m/s) maximum per vent panel.
Configured in pairs of intake and exhaust panels as indicated. Flexible
ductwork specified in mechanical section and provided by others.
C. Door and Frame: 2 inches (51 mm) thick composite panel, consisting of an exterior
face of 16-gauge/0.053 inch (1.34 mm) sheet steel, an interior face of 14-gauge/0.068
inch- (1.72 mm-) sheet steel, and a core of sound-attenuation material, sound
transmission class (STC) 46 (based on internal testing), size and swing as indicated
on Drawings, and as follows:
1. Prehung door with 36 inch swing.
2. Acoustical Seals: Magnetic seal plus compression seal at head and jambs, and
adjustable sweep seal at door bottom.
3. Door frame with integral ramped aluminum threshold, maximum ½ inch.
4. Lockset: See Section 08 71 00 “Door Hardware” for basis of design product
requirements.
5. Locks and Cylinders: Provide Small Format Interchangeable Core (SFIC)..
D. Closure Panels: Provide vertical and horizontal wood closure panels in areas
required.
E. LED Lighting. Compliance and approvals: ETL, FCC, DLC QPL, IP rating: damp
locations.
F. Finishes: Colors as selected from manufacturers standard colors by Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Fabricate and install items in conformity with applicable trade practices and
manufacturer's recommendations, unless specifically excepted by specifications or
drawings.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Position items accurately as indicated on drawings, and true to plumb line and level.
B. Maintain maximum headroom and clearance at all points.
C. Verify completed installation, ready for satisfactory operation prior to final inspection
and acceptance by Owner. Advise Architect in writing, that installation is complete and
ready for acceptance review.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 13 31 10
PRE-ENGINEERED FABRIC SHADE STRUCTURE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Pre-Engineered Shade Structure.
1. The extent of shade structure work is indicated on drawings and by provisions of this
section.
2. Coordinate blocking and in-wall structure with Work of other Sections.
A. General: Provide shade structure units which are complete assemblies, produced by one
manufacturer/fabricator. Complete assembly including structural framework and fabric
elements are single source responsibility of fabricator.
B. Fabricator's Qualifications: Provide units fabricated by shop with a minimum of five (5)
years of experience in similar work. Fabricate custom equipment items at same shop.
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for components and application conditions of
shade structure units which are not fully dimensioned or detailed in product data. Show
relationships to adjoining work.
1. Provide sealed structural engineering design drawings and calculations. These
drawings should include plans, elevations, details, dimensions, support steel sizing,
cables and hardware, interfaces to foundation supports, design loads used in structural
calculations, and foundation reaction loads; including field measurements at each
location.
2. Provide fabric samples and powder coat colors for final order selection.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For fabric shade assembly indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by
the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Provide one year warranty on labor and materials.
B. Provide 10 year pro-rated warranty for fabric and 10 years non-prorated warranty
on structure and steel components against structural failure due to material or
C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have
under the provisions of the Contract Documents, and will be in addition to, and run
Pre-Engineered Fabric Shade Structure 13 31 10 - 1

concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of

the Contract Documents.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements provide Full Hip Cantilever by
USAShade; or other comparable products by the following:
1. Skyways, a brand of Landscape Structures Inc.
2. Shade Systems Inc.
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 45

16 "Contractor’s Quality Control," to design fabric shade assembly.
B. Design Criteria:
1. Provide for expansion and contraction due to structural movement and temperature
changes without detriment to appearance or performance.
2. Engineer components of completed system with provisions and allowances for
minimum of + or - 180 degree F variation in surface temperature to eliminate
excessive thermal stresses and deformation.
C. Design Loads:
1. Delegated Design: Design and fabricate shade structures to comply with the following
loads and with the local building codes
a. Building Code IBC 2015/Texas Building Code
b. AISC Specifications
c. AISI Specifications
d. Live Loads 5 PSF
e. Snow Load:
a. 5 PSF, Steel Frame With Fabric Attached
b. 15 PSF, Steel Frame With Fabric Removed
f. Wind Loads 115 MPH1
a. 3-Sec. Gust, Risk Category II & Exposure C
2.3 STRUCTURE
A. Structural Steel:
1. Square and rectangular 50,000 PSI yield / 62,000 PSI tensile
2. Round pipe 46,000 PSI yield / 62,000 PSI tensile
3. Posts: Four each 40 by 34 by 13 feet and four each 35 by 35 by 13 feet.
4. Galvanized HSS and steel tube: ASTM A500, Grade B, typical mechanical properties
achieved for galvanized tube products:
a. Round tube 45,000 PSI yield / 48,000 PSI tensile
5. Plates: ASTM A572 grade 50.
6. Coat steel tubing with in-line AAMA 2604 powder coating process. Tubing shall be
internally coated with zinc and organic coatings to prevent corrosion.

B. Welding: Comply with American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1. Welds shall be continuous
where length is not given, unless otherwise shown or noted on drawings. Welds shall
develop the full strength of the weaker member.
1. Shop connections shall be welded unless noted otherwise. Field connections shall be
as indicated on approved shop drawings. Fillet welds shall be a minimum of 3/16"
unless otherwise noted. Field welds shall not be allowed.
C. Bolts:
1. High strength bolts: ASTM A325 Grade B
2. Stainless Steel bolts: ASTM F593, Alloy Group 1 or 2
3. Nuts: ASTM F594.
4. Washers: Rubber.
D. Coating:
1. Powder coat galvanized structural steel with AAMA 2604 compliant polyester TGIC.
E. Tension Cables:
1. Wire rope cable: ASTM A603
a. For tension loads up to 4500 pounds: 7x19 strand core galvanized wire rope; 0.025-
inch diameter.
b. For tension loads up to 9000 pounds: 7x19 strand core galvanized wire rope;
0.0375-inch diameter.
c. For tension loads up to 13,500 pounds: 6x 19 strand core galvanized wire rope;
0.5-inch diameter.
2. Feed cables through fabric sleeves around the perimeter of the canopy and tensioned
until the fabric panels are taunt. Retighten to reduce long-tern cable sag during
maintenance visits as part of scheduled warranty work.
F. Fabric Shade Systems

1. Shade Fabric: UV-stabilized high-density polyethylene (HDPE), lock stich knit with
monofilament and tape yarn and Rachel knitted to ensure material will not unravel
if cut.
2. Fabric: Flame retardant complying with ASTM E84 Class A and NFPA 701 Test 2.
a. Fabric Weight shall be 8.7 Oz/SQFT
b. Fading: Exhibits minimum Fading After 5 Years
c. Life expectancy a minimum of 12 years continuous exposure to the sun
4. Thread: Mildew-resistant PTFE (teflon) meeting the following specifications:
a. High strength, low shrinkage, wide temperature range, flex & abrasion
resistant and UV radiation immunity. Lockstitch - 1200 denier - Chainstitch
thread - 2400 denier.
5. Thread shall be manufactured from 100% expanded polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE).
Reinforce corners with fabric and strapping to properly distribute load(s).
a. Fabricate fabric perimeters with cable reinforcing and double lockstitches.
b. Rapid Release system: Designed for removal and reinstallation of the fabric,
integrated internally into the structure and is not an external hardware
attachment.
2.4 FABRICATION GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Pre-assemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize filed
splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembled and coordinated installation.

B. Shade structures Framework: Use materials of size and thickness as required to produce
strength and durability in finished product for use intended. Work to dimensions indicated or
accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of
materials indicated or specified for various components of work.
1. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight
sharp edges. Maintain cross-section of pipe and tubing. Crimped pipe ends, fitting and tee
connections are not acceptable.
2. Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS recommendations. Grind and
brush welds. Brazed welds are not acceptable.
a. Certify full penetration welds undergo inspection by independent inspection agency.
3. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners wherever possible.
4. Provide for anchorage of type shown, coordinated with supporting structure. Fabricate and
space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use.
C. Seams: Double stitch fabric seams.
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions, which have been previously
installed under other sections, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with
B. Notification: Immediately notify general contractor’s field representative of uncompleted or

inadequate work which hinders installation of product specified.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install shade structure units in manner indicated to comply with manufacturer's
instructions, as indicated on plans, and as indicated in approved shop drawings.
1. Position units level, plumb, secure, at proper height and location relative to adjoining
Work.
2. Securely anchor units with proper clips, brackets, anchorages, suited to type of
mounting indicated.
3. Installation of the proposed structure(s) shall be performed by an installation contractor
that has been certified by the manufacturer with a minimum of 32 hours of training.
Installer to provide copy of certification.
4. Concrete work shall be executed in accordance with the latest edition of the American
Concrete Building Code, ACI 318.
5. Concrete specifications shall comply as per plans, and as follows:
a. 28-day strength: 3,000psi
6. All reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A-615, Grade 60.
7. Reinforcing steel shall be detailed, fabricated, and placed in accordance with the latest
ACI Detailing Manual, and Manual of Standard Practice.
8. Set galvanized anchor bolts in concrete per delegated design shop drawings.
9. Tighten high strength bolts to a snug tight condition.

10. Place footings in accordance with manufacturer’s engineered drawings and

specifications.
B. Provide adequate clearances between fabric shade structure framework and structures to
permit unencumbered operation of hardware.
C. Attach fabric to frame work as recommended by manufacturer, using techniques required

for specific attachment type to assure proper fit of fabric to frame.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 13 34 15.13
GRANDSTAND SEATING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Permanent steel and aluminum grandstand seating including the following.
a. Concrete foundations, steel substructure, aluminum decking system, seating
components, handrails with infill panels, litter shield and gutters, and
miscellaneous parts.
b. Pressbox support system.
c. Pressbox as specified in Section 13 34 56.
1.2 REFERENCES

1. ASTM A 36 - Structural Steel.
2. ASTM A 108 - Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality.
3. ASTM A 123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
4. ASTM A 283 - Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates
5. ASTM A 307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Fasteners.
6. ASTM A 325 - High -Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints
7. ASTM A 366 - Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Commercial Quality.
8. ASTM A 446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process,
Structural (Physical) Quality.
9. ASTM A 525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated. (Galvanized)
by the Hot-Dip Process.
10. ASTM A 570 - Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled, Structural Quality.
11. ASTM B 209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
12. ASTM B 221 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,
Shapes, and Tubes.
13. ASTM C 94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete.
B. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
C. Federal Specifications:
1. FS FF-S-325 - Shield, Expansion; Nail, Expansion; and Nail, Drive Screw
(Devices, Anchoring, Masonry).
D. International Code Council:
1. ICC 300 – Standard for Bleachers, Folding and Telescoping Seating, and
Grandstands
1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Loads: Comply with ICC 300, latest edition.
Grandstand Seating 13 34 15 - 1
B. Guardrail: Stiffness, height and spacing of intermediate rails in accordance with code
requirements.
C. Handicapped Requirements: Design and construct grandstands, stairs, ramps and

wheelchair spaces to comply with building and handicap codes.
D. Capacity:
1. Permanent Grandstands: Refer to drawings for seating layout and capacity.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate construction details, sizes of metal sections, thicknesses of

metals, profiles, attachments, dimensions and field joints, method of structural
support, built-in items; indicate welded connections, net weld length, and AWS
welding symbols.
1. Delegated Design: Submit with engineered shop drawings showing compliance
with specified requirements. Submittals shall bear seal of Registered
Professional Engineer licensed to practice in state of Texas.
B. Samples: Color samples for selection and verification of steel and aluminum finishes
including roof and wall panels.
C. Test Reports: Submit mill test reports for structural steel.
D. Certificate: Submit welder's qualifications certified by qualified testing laboratory;

certify installed grandstand seating will safely support design loads.
A. Manufacturer/Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing and

installation of grandstands with minimum five years documented experience.
B. Welder Qualifications: AWS D1.1.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Provide Manufacturer/Installer warranty against material and installation

defects for two years.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
A. Design: Conform to AISC Steel Construction Manual and AA Aluminum Design

Manual.
B. Applicable Codes: Design and workmanship shall be in accordance with Building

Code of Texas/IBC 20125 and ICC 300.
C. Design Loads:
1. Live Loads:
a. Uniform Loading, Structure: 100 psf.
b. Uniform Loading, Seats: 120 plf.

2. Sway Loads:
c. Perpendicular to Seats: 10 plf.
d. Parallel to Seats: 24 plf.
3. Wind, Snow, and Seismic Loads: As scheduled on Drawings.
4. Handrail and Guardrail: 200 lbs. concentrated in any direction
D. Shop Connections: Welded and capable of carrying stress put upon them.
E. Welding: AWS D1.1.
F. Concrete Foundations: Manufacturer shall design and install concrete foundations in

compliance with Work of Section 03 30 00.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
1. Southern Bleacher Company.
2. Steel Stadiums, Ltd.
3. Sturdisteel, Division of Schultz Industries Inc.
B. Comply with ADAG and TAS Handicapped Seating requirements for assembly
areas.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221.
B. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209.
C. Steel Sections, Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36.
D. Bent or Cold-Formed Steel Plates: ASTM A 283, Grade C.
E. Cold-Finished Steel Bars: ASTM A 108.
F. Steel Sheets and Strips: ASTM A 1011.
G. Guardrails: Galvanized pipe or anodized aluminum sections with end plugs at ends
of straight runs at sides of grandstand, entry stairs, ramps, portals and landings.
H. Fencing: 9 gage galvanized chain link fencing, 2" x 2 " mesh, secured with
galvanized fittings and aluminum ties.
I. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: High-strength type, ASTM F 3125.
J. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1, type required for materials being welded.
K. Galvanizing: ASTM A 123.
L. Expansion Anchors: FS FF-S-325, Group II, Type 4, Class 1; carbon steel, zinc
plated.
M. Primer: SSPC SP-20 zinc-rich primer
N. Basis of Design, Wall and Roof Panels: R-Panel by McElroy Metals as specified in
Section 07 42 13.13 “Formed Metal Wall Panels”.
O. Stadium Seating::
1. Basis of Design, Product: Continuous Elevated Angle-Frame Bleachers by
Sturdisteel.
2. Brackets: ASTM-A36 steel hot dipped galvanized or extruded aluminum alloy
6061-T6.
3. Riser Mounted: “L” brackets.
4. Planks: Lengths and shapes as shown; clear anodized.
5. Tread planks, Riser Planks: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T6.
6. Seat Planks, Backrests, Stanchions and Covers: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063-
T6, clear anodized 204R1, Class II. Attach with 3/16" pop rivets.
7. Joint Sleeve Assembly: Extruded Aluminum alloy 6063-T6, mill finish.
8. Rows: Refer to drawings.
9. Length of Units: As shown or, if not shown, per Manufacturer.
10. Hold-Down Clip Assembly: Attach plank to bracket; 4-way adjust 5/16" by 1-1/4
carriage bolt, 5/16" kep nut.
2.4 CONCRETE MIX
A. 3000 psi minimum at 28 days in accordance with ASTM C 94 and Work of Division
03.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Rise and Depth Dimensions: 8 inch vertical rise per row and 24 horizontal depth
unless otherwise shown on Drawings.
B. Seats: 1-1/2 by 9-1/2 inch
1. Seat Boards: Aluminum alloy 6063-T6; wall thickness .078; clear anodized finish,
AA-M10C22A31, 204R1. Provide with end caps.
C. Seat Support Bracket: 6" aluminum Z-bracket, mill finish.
D. Treads: Two 1-1/2 by 9-1/2 inch
1. Tread Boards: Aluminum alloy 6063-T6; boards with end caps.
E. Riser Boards: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T6; clear anodized 204R1, AA-
M10C22A31,
F. Risers:
1. Typical: 1/2-inch by 6-1/4 inch.

2. Top Row: ½ inch by 11-1/2 inches
G. Space horizontal beam design with vertical columns spaced in accordance with
manufacturer's design to meet specified load conditions. Fabricate wide flange
horizontal beams.
H. Traverse bays shall be free of cross bracing for total length of grandstand.
I. Stringers shall be wide flange, with angle rise and depth fabrication and spaced in
accordance with manufacturer's design to meet specified load conditions.
2.6 FINISHES
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36, hot dipped galvanized after fabrication in accordance
with ASTM A 123.
B. Extruded Aluminum:
1. Seat Planks, Stanchions: Aluminum alloy 6063-T6, clear anodized 204R1, AA-
M10C22A31, Class II.
2. Tread Planks and Riser Planks: Extruded aluminum alloy, 6063-T6 mill finish.
3. Joint Sleeve Assembly: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T6, mill finish.
4. Channel End Caps: Aluminum alloy, 6063-T6, clear anodized, 204R1, AA-
M10C22A31, Class II.
5. Cast End Caps: Aluminum 319 alloy, cast finish.
C. Hold Down Clip Assemblies: Aluminum alloy 6063-T6.
D. Hardware, Bolts and Nuts: Hot dipped galvanized or zinc plated; ASTM A153.
E. Prefinished Wall and Roof Panels: AAMA 2605 two-coat fluoropolymer, 70 percent
solids. Colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full available range.
3.1 ERECTION
A. Size foundation footings and space for sufficient bearing surface to support loads of
grandstand structure and design live loads.
B. Erect grandstand square, level, plumb, and free from distortion or defects detrimental
to appearance and performance in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Secure guardrail at angle rail risers with galvanized fasteners. Extend railing 42"
above walkways, entrances and center of any adjacent seat.
D. Install fencing on back and sides of grandstand.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 14 21 23
MACHINE ROOMLESS (MRL) ELECTRIC TRACTION PASSENGER ELEVATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Machine roomless electric traction passenger elevators.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions in ASME A17.1/CSA B44 apply to the work.
B. Service Elevator: A passenger elevator that is used to carry freight.
A. Product Data: Technical data including capacities, sizes, performances, operations,

safety features, finishes, and similar information. Include manufacturer’s model specific
data for car enclosures, hoistway entrances, and operation, control, and signal
systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit plans, elevations, sections, and large scale details indicating
service at each landing, coordination with building structure, relationships with other
construction, and locations of equipment.
1. Include large scale layout of car control station.

2. Indicate maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points
of support, and maximum and average power demands.
C. Samples: Submit hoistway door and frame, and signal equipment finishes; 3 inch (75
mm) square Samples of sheet materials; and 4 inch (100 mm) lengths of running trim
members.
B. Seismic Qualification Data: Submit certificates for elevator equipment, accessories,

and components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual

test of assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Machine Roomless Electric Traction Passenger Elevators

14 21 23 - 1
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is

based and their installation requirements.
C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit,

and machine room layout and dimensions, indicated on Drawings, and electrical
service, as shown and specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided.
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit for elevators to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.
1. Submit operation and maintenance manual, according to ASME

A17.1/CSA B44, including diagnostic and repair information available to
manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance personnel.
B. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by

authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use.
C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Submit a continuing maintenance proposal from

Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard one year maintenance agreement, starting
on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations,
conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.
A. Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer or an authorized representative having

minimum 5 years documented experience who is trained and approved by
manufacturer.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain elevators, including major elevator components such as

driving machines, controllers, signal fixtures, door operators, car frames, cars, and
entrances, from single manufacturer.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of inserts, sleeves, block outs, elevator equipment with integral
anchors, and other items that are embedded in concrete or masonry for elevator
equipment. Furnish templates, inserts, sleeves, elevator equipment with integral
anchors, and installation instructions and deliver to Project site in time for installation.
B. Coordinate locations and dimensions of related work to electric traction elevators

including pit ladders; sumps and floor drains in pits; entrance subsills; electrical service;
and electrical outlets, lights, and switches in hoistways, pits, and machine rooms.
A. Deliver, store, and handle materials, components, and equipment in manufacturer's

protective packaging. Store materials, components, and equipment off of ground, under
cover, and in a dry location.

14 21 23 - 2
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Written warranty signed by manufacturer in which manufacturer agrees to repair,

restore, or replace elevator work that fails in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, operation or control system failure, including
excessive malfunctions; performances below specified ratings; excessive wear;
unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; need
for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual,
unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions.
2. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.
B. Seismic Performance: Elevator system shall withstand the effects of earthquake

motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 and shall comply with elevator seismic
requirements in ASME A17.1/CSA B44 and as defined on Structural Drawings.
1. The term "withstand" means "the system will remain in place without separation of
any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
2. Provide seismic switch required by ASCE/SEI 7.
C. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with requirements for accessible elevators in the

United States Access Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC A117.1.
2.2 SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS
A. Basis of Design: Evolution 200 machine-room-less electric gearless traction elevator

by TK (ThyssenKrupp) Elevator; 2500 pound capacity; 200 FPM.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following:
1. Canton Elevator, Inc.

2. Fujitec America, Inc.
3. KONE Inc.
4. Minnesota Elevator, Inc.
5. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
6. Otis Elevator Co.
7. Schindler Elevator Corp.
C. Elevator System: Elevator system utilizing standard components included in elevator

systems and as required for complete system.
D. Elevator Description:

14 21 23 - 3
8. Rated Load: 2500 lb (1135 kg).

9. Rated Speed: 200 fpm (1.0 m/s).
10. Motor: 480V; 3 phase.
11. Operation System: Selective-collective automatic operation.
12. Auxiliary Operations:
a. Standby powered lowering.
13. Security Features: Card reader, Keyswitch, or Keypad operation.

14. Car Enclosures: Dimensions as shown on Drawings.
b. Inside Height: Not less than 93 inches (2362 mm) to underside of ceiling.
c. Front Walls (Return Panels): Plastic laminate.
d. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, ASTM A480/480M, No. 4 with textured
finish.
e. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Plastic laminate.
f. Reveals: Satin stainless steel, ASTM A480/480M, No. 4 finish.
g. Door Faces (Interior): Satin stainless steel, ASTM A480/480M, No. 4
Textured stainless steel.
h. Door Sills: Nickel silver.
i. Ceiling: Satin stainless steel, ASTM A480/480M, No. 4 finish.
j. Handrails: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) round satin stainless steel, at sides and
rear of car.
k. Floor: Linoleum tile or finish as scheduled. Adjust top of plywood elevation
to accommodate floor finish system.
15. Hoistway Entrances:
a. Width: 42 inches (1067 mm).

b. Height: 84 inches (2134 mm).
c. Type: Single speed center opening.
d. Frames: Satin stainless steel, ASTM A480/480M, No. 4 textured stainless
steel finish.
e. Doors and Transoms: Satin stainless steel, ASTM A480/480M, No. 4 finish
Textured stainless steel.
f. Sills: Nickel silver.
16. Hall Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, ASTM A480/480M, No. 4 finish.
17. Additional Requirements:
a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with
frame made from satin stainless steel, ASTM A480/480M, No. 4 finish.
b. Provide hooks and one complete set of full height protective pads.
2.3 TRACTION SYSTEMS
A. Elevator Machines: Permanent magnet, variable voltage, variable frequency, ac-type

hoisting machines and solid-state power converters.
1. Provide nonregenerative system.

14 21 23 - 4
B. Fluid for Hydraulic Buffers: Fire resistant fluid.
C. Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices
for installing guide rails, machinery, and other components of elevator work. Device
installation is specified elsewhere.
D. Machine Beams: Provide steel framing to support elevator hoisting machine and
deflector sheaves from the building structure. Comply with Section 05 50 00 for
materials and fabrication.
E. Car Frame and Platform: Bolted or welded steel units.
F. Guides: Roller guides. Provide guides at top and bottom of car and counterweight
frames.
2.4 OPERATION SYSTEMS
A. Provide microprocessor operation systems required to provide type of operation

indicated.
B. Auxiliary Operations:
2. Single Car Battery Powered Automatic Evacuation: If power fails and car is at a
floor, it remains at that floor, opens its doors, and shuts down. If car is between
floors, it moves to the next floor above or below, opens its doors, and shuts down.
System includes rechargeable battery and automatic recharging system.
C. Security features shall not affect emergency firefighters' service. Provide security
features as selected by Architect from the following:
1. Card Reader Operation: System uses card readers at car control stations to
authorize calls. Security system determines which landings and at what times
calls require authorization by card reader. Provide required conductors in
traveling cable and panel in machine room for interconnecting card readers, other
security access system equipment, and elevator controllers. Allow space for card
reader in car.
a. Security access system equipment is specified in Section 28 15 00.
2.5 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES
A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening device with uniform array of 36 or more
microprocessor controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance.
Interruption of one or more light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen.
2.6 CAR ENCLOSURES
A. Provide enameled or powder coated steel car enclosures to receive removable wall
panels, withcar roof, access doors, power door operators, and ventilation.

14 21 23 - 5
1. Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1/CSA B44 on car tops where
required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44.
B. Materials and Finishes:
1. Subfloor: Exterior, C-C Plugged grade plywood, not less than 7/8 inch (22.2 mm)
nominal thickness.
2. Floor Finish: As scheduled.
3. Base: Satin stainless steel sheet metal base; as specified in Section 05 75 00.
4. Plastic Laminate Wall Panels: Plastic laminate adhesively applied to 1/2 inch (13
mm) fire retardant treated particleboard with plastic laminate panel backing and
protective edge trim.
a. Panels: Flame spread index of 25 or less, when tested according to ASTM E84.
b. Plastic Laminate Color, Texture, and Pattern: Selected by Architect.
5. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment.

6. Fabricate car door frame integrally with front wall of car.
7. Stainless Steel Doors: Flush, hollow metal construction; fabricated from stainless
steel sheet.
8. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on car doors.
9. Sills: Extruded or machined metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick.
10. Metal Ceiling: Flush panels, with LED downlights in the center of each panel. Align
ceiling panel joints with joints between wall panels.
11. Light Fixture Efficiency: Not less than 35 lumens/W.
12. Ventilation Fan Efficiency: Not less than 3.0 cfm/W (1.4 L/s per W).
2.7 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES
A. Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Horizontal sliding, door and frame hoistway entrances
complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Frame size and profile
shall accommodate hoistway wall construction.
1. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, frames shall be self supporting
with reinforced head sections.
B. Fire Rated Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Door and frame assemblies shall comply
with NFPA 80 and be listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction based on testing at as close to neutral pressure as
possible according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B.
1. Fire Protection Rating: 1 hour.
C. Materials and Fabrication:
1. Enameled or Powder Coated Steel Frames: Formed from cold or hot rolled steel
sheet. Provide with factory applied enamel or powder coat finish; colors selected by
Architect.
2. Stainless Steel Frames: Formed from stainless steel sheet.
3. Stainless Steel Doors and Transoms: Flush, hollow metal construction; fabricated
from stainless steel sheet.

14 21 23 - 6
4. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on doors matching door edges.

5. Sills: Extruded or machined metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick.
6. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M.
2.8 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
A. Provide hall call and car call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call
has been fulfilled. Provide vandal resistant buttons and lighted elements illuminated
with LEDs.
B. Car Control Stations: Provide car control stations as shown. Mount in return panel
adjacent to car door unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mark buttons and switches for required use or function. Use both tactile symbols
and Braille.
2. Provide "No Smoking" sign matching car control station, either integral with car
control station or mounted adjacent to it, with text and graphics as required by
C. Swing Return Car Control Stations: Provide car control stations mounted on rear of
hinged return panel adjacent to car door and with buttons, switches, controls, and
indicator lights projecting through return panel but substantially flush with face of return
panel.
1. Mark buttons and switches for function. Use both tactile symbols and Braille.
2. Provide "No Smoking" sign matching car control station, either integral with car
control station or mounted adjacent to it, with text and graphics as required by
D. Emergency Communication System: Two-way voice communication system, with

visible signal, which dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and does not
require handset use. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification,
instructions for use, and battery backup power supply. Provide system that:
1. Is a visual and text-based and a video-based 24/7 live interactive system.
2. Is fully accessible by the deaf, hard of hearing, and speech impaired, and includes
voice-only options for hearing individuals.
3. Has the ability to communicate with emergency personnel utilizing existing video
conferencing technology, chat/text software, or other approved technology.
E. Firefighters' Two-Way Telephone Communication Service: Provide flush-mounted

cabinet in each car and required conductors in traveling cable for firefighters' two-way
telephone communication service specified in appropriate Division 28 Section.
F. Car Position Indicator: Provide digital type car position indicator, located above car door
or above car-control station. Provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car
is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served. Include travel direction arrows
if not provided in car control station.
G. Hall Push Button Stations: Provide one hall push button station at each landing.

14 21 23 - 7
3. Provide wall mounted units.

4. Equip units with buttons for calling elevator and for indicating desired direction of
travel.
5. Provide telephone jack in each unit for firefighters' two way telephone
communication service specified in Section 28 46 21.
H. Emergency Pictorial Signs: Fabricate from materials matching hall push button
stations, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction, indicating
that in case of fire, elevators are out of service and exits should be used instead.
Provide one sign at each hall push button station unless otherwise indicated.
2.9 FINISH MATERIALS
A. Cold Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed,
matte finish.
B. Hot Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, commercial steel, Type B, pickled.
C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304.
D. Textured Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 with embossed texture
rolled into exposed surface.
1. Metal surface is satin relieved after texturing.
E. Stainless Steel Bars: ASTM A276, Type 304.
F. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A554, Grade MT 304.
G. Nickel Silver Extrusions: ASTM B151/B151M, Alloy UNS No. C74500 or

UNS No. C77600.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elevator areas for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of the work. Examine hoistways, hoistway
openings, and pits as constructed; verify critical dimensions; and examine supporting
structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed.
B. Prepare written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the work.
C. Proceed with installation after coordinating unsatisfactory conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

14 21 23 - 8
B. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work where
bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation,
adjustment, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with
AWS standards for workmanship and for qualifications of welding operators.
C. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration isolating mounts
to minimize vibration transmission to structure and structure borne noise due to elevator
system.
D. Lubricate operating parts of systems, including ropes, as recommended by

manufacturers.
E. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator

guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with car. Where possible, delay final
adjustment of sills and doors until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to
minimum, safe, workable dimension at each landing.
F. Leveling Tolerance: 1/8 inch (3 mm), up or down, regardless of load and travel
direction.
G. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with
nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
H. Locate hall signal equipment for elevators as follows unless otherwise indicated:
2. Place hall lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance.

3. Mount hall lanterns at a minimum of 72 inches (1829 mm) above finished floor.
A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting

elevator use (either temporary or permanent), perform acceptance tests as required
and recommended by ASME A17.1/CSA B44 and by governing regulations and
agencies.
B. Operating Test: Load elevator to rated capacity and operate continuously for 30
minutes over full travel distance, stopping at each level and proceeding immediately to
the next. Record temperature rise of elevator machine during 30 minute test period.
Record failure to perform as required.
C. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and
times that tests are to be performed on elevators.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Use: Comply with the following requirements for elevator used for
construction purposes:
1. Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of
finished car, to protect finishes from damage.
2. Provide strippable protective film on entrance and car doors and frames.

14 21 23 - 9
3. Provide padded wood bumpers on entrance door frames covering jambs and
frame faces.
4. Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and procedures as
needed to protect elevator and elevator equipment.
5. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity.
6. Engage elevator Installer to provide full maintenance service. Include preventive
maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication,
cleanup, and adjustment as necessary for proper elevator operation at rated speed
and capacity. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture
and installation of original equipment.
7. Engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work, if any, so no evidence remains
of correction. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make
required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance

personnel to operate, adjust, and maintain elevator(s).
B. Check operation of elevator with Owner's personnel present before date of Substantial
Completion and again not more than one month before end of warranty period.
Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly.
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service

shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of elevator Installer.
Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective
components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator
operation at rated speed and capacity. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's
authorized replacement parts and supplies.
1. Perform maintenance during normal working hours.

2. Perform emergency callback service during normal working hours with response
time of two hours or less.
3. Include 24 hour per day, 7 day per week emergency callback service with response
time of two hours or less.
END OF SECTION

14 21 23 - 10

Argyle ES#4 Specs 04212023 V1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Argyle ES#4 Specs 04212023 V1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Argyle Elementary School #4 75 Percent Package Project Manual

Contract Conditions and Specifications for the general construction

Argyle Elementary School No. 04

CONTRACT CONDITIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR

75 Percent Progress Set

Civil Engineer: Landscape Architect:

SECTIONS ISSUE DATE REVISED

DIVISION 00 — PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

00 41 00 Proposal Form ................................................................................

DIVISION 01 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 06 — WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

DIVISION 07 — THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

10 44 13 Fire Protection Cabinets..................................................................

DIVISION 13 — SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

DIVISION 14 — CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 21 — FIRE SUPPRESSION

22 16 01 Natural Gas Piping and Appurtenances ..........................................

DIVISION 23 — HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

26 28 19 Ground Fault Protection System .....................................................

DIVISION 28 — ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

DIVISION 32 — EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

ADVERTISEMENT FOR PROPOSALS

Advertisement for CSP 00 11 13 - 1

1.7 Bidder: Person or entity who submits a Bid.

1.9 Bidding Requirements: Include Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders,

1.11 Civil Engineer: - RLK Engineering.

1.13 Owner: - Argyle Independent School District

1.16 Work: Argyle Elementary School Number 4.

ARTICLE 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATION

2.1 Bidder by making a Bid represents that:

ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS

B. Bidding Documents will not be issued directly to Sub-bidders.

3.2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS

B. Bidder and Sub-bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of Bidding Documents

C. Interpretations, corrections and changes of Bidding Documents will be made by

A. Materials, products and equipment described in Bidding Documents establish standard of

D. No substitution will be considered after Contract award unless specifically provided in

E. By requesting Architect's acceptance of substitutions, bidder represents that substitute

ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES

4.1 PRE-BID CONFERENCE

B. Following will serve as minimum agenda for Pre-Bid Conference:

4.2 FORM AND STYLE OF BIDS

B. All blanks on Bid Form shall be filled in by typewriter or manually in ink.

D. Interlineation, alterations or erasures must be initialed by signer of Bid.

4.3 BID SECURITY

4.4 SUBMISSION OF BIDS

4.5 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID

D. Bid security shall be in amount sufficient for Bid as modified or resubmitted.

ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS

5.1 OPENING OF BIDS

5.2 REJECTION OF BIDS

5.3 ACCEPTANCE OF BID (AWARD)

oChapter 2270 (Boycott) Verification

ARTICLE 6 POST-BID INFORMATION

B. Bidder will be required to establish reliability and responsibility of persons or entities

6.2 CONTRACTOR SCREENING PROGRAM

A. Criminal History Background Checks and Drug Testing

5. No misdemeanor convictions, open deferred adjudications or pending criminal

General Contractor shall perform and shall require, as a condition of contracting,

A photo identification badge shall be issued to those persons meeting the

C. If for some reason workers employed by the Contractor, Subcontractors, or Sub

ARTICLE 7 - PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND

7.1 BOND REQUIREMENTS